JP7526448B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

A typical example of a game machine in which a game is played using game balls is a pachinko machine. Currently, most pachinko machines have an electrical performance device, and multiple boards are built in to control the performance device and the overall game content. A connector for electrically connecting the other boards and the performance device is mounted on one board via a connecting member for connecting the connectors (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2001-46599 A (FIG. 5)

As described above, current gaming machines are equipped with a great number of boards and performance devices, and there are also many wires to connect them. Therefore, in order to save on wiring costs, the length of the wires is set to the shortest possible distance. If such a gaming machine unfortunately breaks down and the board or performance device needs to be replaced, the connector at the end of the wire must be removed from the board, and in some places, the short length of the wire becomes a bottleneck, causing more stress than necessary to be applied to the connector and joint members mounted on the board.
As a result, during maintenance work in pachinko parlors or during assembly work on gaming machines, the location of the board on which the connector is mounted can be difficult, and sometimes more stress than necessary is applied to the terminal pieces of the joining member, which can cause the connection between the joining member, connector, and board to become unstable.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above, and has an object to provide an amusement machine in which the connection between the joining member, the board, and the connector is less likely to become unstable .

In order to achieve the above objective, the present invention provides:
In a gaming machine having a board on which electronic components can be mounted, the board includes a connector for electrically connecting at least one of a power source, a ground, or various signals,
The joining member is attached to a predetermined location,
At least one of the bonding members has a terminal piece protruding from a body of the bonding member and connected to a copper foil of a pad formed on the substrate,
Further, the copper foil of the pad is expanded beyond the tip of the terminal piece by a width equal to or greater than the width of the terminal piece to form an expanded pattern portion, and a through hole portion capable of electrical conduction is provided in the expanded pattern portion;
The width of the enlarged pattern portion is set to be equal to or greater than the width of the pad,
The enlarged pattern portion extends beyond the tip of the terminal piece, and extends from the tip of the terminal piece connected to the copper foil of the pad to the through-hole portion without bending.
It is characterized by :

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide an amusement machine in which the connection between the joining member, the board, and the connector is less likely to become unstable .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is a front view of a pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame, as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the left and right outer frame assemblies of the outer frame, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front and top, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the front and rear, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of a conventional pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the rear. 34(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the rear. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in Figure 34 (a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit from the rear. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. 1A is a perspective view of the fall cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the fall cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the fall cover unit with the lid member removed. 1A is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in Figure 41 (a). 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. 1. This is an oblique view of the tray unit of the door frame. This is an oblique view of the plate unit from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of a conventional door frame cut at the same location as (a). This is an enlarged plan view showing the ball lending operation unit area in the tray unit of the door frame. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 1A seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from above and at the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from below and in the front. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower retaining member is at the upper end of its movement position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit has moved from the position of (a) to the raised position. This is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the downward end of its travel position. This is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative board of the performance operation unit, the outer decorative board of the buttons, and the inner decorative board of the buttons in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is a plan view of a production operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detection bodies are provided in the production operation unit of the production operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of multiple contact detection bodies connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and multiple contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate unit's left plate decorative unit, right plate decorative unit, and performance operation unit, etc. can be moved forward and backward, and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear of the performance operation unit, etc. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the performance operation unit. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in Figure 62(a). (a) is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, (c) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. 66(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). FIG. 1A is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. 1B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer intact in FIG. A front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame. This is a plan view showing the decorative board in the part of the door frame's performance operation unit. A rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front left. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. 1A is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main body frame. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the rear. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the rear. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the door frame foul cover unit and the lower full ball path unit. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of a board unit of a main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the rear. 1 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, disassembled into its main components, as viewed from the rear. An enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line B1-B1 in Figure 98A. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line B2-B2 in Figure 98A. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line B3-B3 in Figure 98A. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line B4-B4 in Figure 98A. This is an oblique view of the upper part of the main body frame from behind. This is an oblique view of the rear side of the upper part of the main body frame, showing the tank unit disassembled and the game board for installation placed in front. 1A is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled thereto, as seen from above the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 1A from below the front. 100(a) is an exploded perspective view including a cross-sectional view of a main portion of FIG. 100(a). An explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls that overflow from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame circulate. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls that have overflowed from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage at the top of the main frame. 1 is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body frame from the rear of the hinge side, showing the tank rail and its surroundings. FIG. This is an oblique view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail as viewed from behind of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of another embodiment. 106 in an assembled state together with a spherical tank, (b) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the rear. 107A is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 107B is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc., taken along the kerk line. An explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the flow of game balls within the tank rail of Figure 107. 11A and 11B are cross-sectional views showing another embodiment in which the protective walls of FIG. 109 are provided on the front wall and rear wall of the gutter of the tank rail. A cross-sectional view of a tank rail of another embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section of line K-K in Figure 107(a). A cross-sectional view of a tank rail of another embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line B4-B4 in Figure 98A. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a ball stopping member of another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a tank rail etc. of another embodiment, cut in the vicinity of a bent portion. A vertical cross-sectional view of a tank rail etc. of another form, showing the state in which the ball stopping member of Figure 115, which is in the retracted position, has been moved to the protruding position. 115A is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z1-Z1 in FIG. 115, and FIG. 115B is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z2-Z2 in FIG. 1A is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front right, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front left. 118(a) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 118(a) seen from the upper right rear, and FIG. 118(b) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 118(a) seen from the lower right rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 118(a) viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 118(a) seen from behind. 118(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K-I in FIG. 118(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K in (a). This is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 118(a). An explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge outlet of the out ball passage. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor in FIG. This is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the center component and other parts are made opaque. 127 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 126 as seen from the front right. FIG. 127 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 126 as seen from the front left. This is an oblique view of the game board from behind. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board. FIG. This is a front view of the game board with the center member and other parts made transparent. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in Figure 126. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in Figure 126. This is a front view of the game board with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle pins. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the front components and game panel of a game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the front components and game panel as viewed from the back. 11 is a front view of the component showing a state in which the partition member is separated into a first partition member and a second partition member. FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the first partition member as seen from the front side. FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the first partition member as seen from the rear side. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first partition member as viewed from the rear side. This is a cross-sectional view of line AA in Figure 137C. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing another embodiment of the first partition member as viewed from the front side. 13 is a perspective view showing still another embodiment of the first partition member as viewed from the rear side. FIG. FIG. 137I is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a second partition member as viewed from the front side, with a portion in cross section. FIG. This is a cross-sectional view of line BB in Figure 137K. This is a cross-sectional view of line CC in Figure 137K. 1A and 1B are cross-sectional views showing the state in which a first partition member and a second partition member are joined together, in which FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts before joining, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts after joining. 1 is a front perspective view of a front unit of a game board. FIG. (a) is an oblique view of the starting port unit, side unit, upper left side unit, and attacca unit in the front unit, seen from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the starting port unit, side unit, upper left side unit, and attacca unit in the front unit, seen from the back. 1A is a perspective view of a center member in a front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of an upper component part that constitutes an upper portion of a center frame. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center member and the opening of the game panel. FIG. 1A is an oblique view showing the relationship between the center member, the game panel, and the rear left decorative body of the rear unit, and FIG. 1B is a front view of FIG. 1A is a plan view of a third sorting device in the center member, and FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the third sorting device in the center member. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the third distributing device of the center member, as viewed from above and at the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the third distribution device of the center member, as viewed from below and in front. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the third distribution device in the center member. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the function of the protrusions provided on the second V winning port and the third losing port in the third distribution device of the center member, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the game ball when no protrusions are provided on the second V winning port and the third losing port. An explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls passing through the second ball passage section, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls passing through the third ball passage section. A cross-sectional front view of a key part of a game board showing another embodiment of the bouncing ball receiving portion of Figure 149A. FIG. 149C is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 149B. This is a cross-sectional front view of a key part of a game board, showing an example in which the bouncing ball receiving portion of Figure 149B is applied to the embodiment of Figure 126. FIG. 149D is a perspective view. FIG. 149E is an exploded perspective view. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls accepted into the device winning port, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the third distribution device in (a) from above, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the second distribution device in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the reel winning opening and the first and second distribution devices according to the type of "small win". 1A is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the attacca unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E in FIG. 149A to 149D are explanatory diagrams showing embodiments of the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion that are different from those shown in FIG. 149A. 4(e) and (f) are explanatory diagrams showing further different embodiments of the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion. FIG. 2 is a front view of the rear unit of the game board. This is an oblique view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front. This is an oblique view of the rear unit of the game board from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the light guide plate performance unit of the rear unit seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the light guide plate performance unit seen from the back. This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the picture substrate in the light guide plate performance unit from the front. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a first pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated, and FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated. This is a front view showing the arrangement of each decorative board in the back front performance unit in the back unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rear right decorative board, sub status indicator, and the right side part of the center member of the rear front performance unit in the rear unit in a left side cross section, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rear right decorative board, sub status indicator, and the right side part of the center member of the rear front performance unit in the rear unit in (a) from the front. This is a wiring diagram showing the wiring of some of the sub-state LEDs on the rear right decorative board. (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the rear unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, (d) is an oblique view of the out ball detection unit from the front, (e) is an oblique view of the out ball detection unit from the rear, (f) is an oblique view of the out ball detection unit from a position near the lower right front, and (g) is an oblique view of the out ball detection unit from the lower right rear. 1A is an exploded oblique view of the out ball detection unit seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded oblique view of the out ball detection unit seen from the rear. 1A is an oblique view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and FIG. 1B is an oblique view showing the out ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. This is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right-side out sensor assembled on the game board, cut vertically at the center thereof, and viewed from the right side. This is an oblique view showing the area around the outlet from the front when assembled on the game board. This is a front view of the game board showing the second image illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rear unit's light guide plate presentation unit. This is a front view of the game board showing the first image illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the rear unit. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram showing the connection configuration of each board, motor, etc. on the game board. This is an oblique view of the game board from behind. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the rear board unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view showing the rear board unit. FIG. 174D is an exploded perspective view. This is a cross-sectional view of line AA in Figure 174C. A cross-sectional view corresponding to line AA in Figure 174C showing another embodiment. This is a cross-sectional view of line BB in Figure 174C. This is a front view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, showing the rear board unit attached. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine from behind, showing the rear board unit attached. FIG. 13 is a front view of the main part as seen from the rear of the rear board unit showing another embodiment. FIG. 2 is a side view of a joining member which is a specific electronic component. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a joining member which is a specific electronic component. 1 is a perspective view showing a bonding member connected to a pad of a substrate as viewed from above; FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a main portion of a substrate showing a bonding member connected to a pad. 1 is a longitudinal sectional view of a main portion of a substrate showing a state in which a bonding member is disposed below an electronic component (bonding member). 1 is a perspective view showing a bonding member connected to a pad of a substrate as viewed from above; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the main control side power is turned on in Figures 175A and 175B. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation display process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed when the dispensing control unit is powered on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in Figure 181. Following Figure 182, this is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric gimmick control processing executed by the main control MPU in the embodiment. A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a pre-determination process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment; A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern process executed by the main control MPU in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing executed by the main control MPU in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a hit determination process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment. (A) is a win determination table used in the lottery process for big wins, (B) is a big win pattern determination table used in the lottery process for the type of big win, and (C) is a small win pattern determination table used in the lottery process for the type of small win. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a first special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment. A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a first special pattern stopping process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric gimmick control processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the small hit start processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during a small hit executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error notification mode. FIG. 4 is a timing diagram showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. FIG. 4 is a timing diagram showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. FIG. 4 is a timing diagram showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing a setting value. This is a fluctuation pattern table used to determine a fluctuation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a right detection sensor is provided in the second ball passage section. This is a specific example of a warning effect that is performed using the right detection sensor. An explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion. This is a specific example of a warning effect using a right detection sensor and a left detection sensor. An explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which ball clogging relief holes are provided in the second ball passage section and the third ball passage section. An explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which ball clogging relief holes are provided in the second ball passage section and the third ball passage section. An explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet is provided near the inlets of the second ball passage section and the third ball passage section. An explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet is provided near the outlet inside the second spherical passage section. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of a calculation when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of a calculation when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet and a third outlet are provided in addition to the outlet. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of calculations when a second outlet and a third outlet are provided in addition to the outlet. 1 is a luminous color pattern table in which luminous color patterns of a light guide plate are set. An explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which multiple decorative bodies are provided around the display area of the performance display device. This is a specific example of a lighting effect using a light guide plate and multiple decorative elements. This is an image displayed on the light guide plate and the performance display device when the imitation performance is being performed. This is a specific example of a performance using a light guide plate and a performance display device when performing an imitation performance. 11 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 11 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 11 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a setting information determination process executed by a main control MPU. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting value hold indication display. An explanatory diagram showing an example of image data that combines the display mode of a hold notice effect and the display mode of a setting value hold suggestion effect. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting value continuous suggestion display. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. 11 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity during a change of a setting value. 13 is a time chart showing a fraudulent activity monitoring state in a case where fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of a setting value. 13 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activities when fraudulent activities are partially monitored during a confirmation display of a setting value. 13 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activities when fraudulent activities are partially monitored during a change of a setting value. FIG. 13 is a front view of a modified game board. 13 is an example of a table used in the lottery process. This is a variation of the setting value suggestion presentation. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is an oblique view of the game board from behind. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the main control unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of another embodiment of the main control unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of a main control unit according to another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a longitudinal sectional view of a main part of a main control unit according to another embodiment. 13 is a longitudinal sectional view of a main part showing a rotation operation state of a setting key of a main control unit of another embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of a main control unit according to another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a longitudinal sectional view of a main part of a main control unit according to another embodiment. 13 is a longitudinal sectional view of a main part showing a rotation operation state of a setting key of a main control unit of another embodiment. FIG. 13 is a longitudinal sectional view of a main part showing a rotation operation state of a setting key of a main control unit of another embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the main control unit. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the main control unit. FIG. 2 is an enlarged partial front view of a main control unit. This is a cross-sectional view of line ZZ in Figure 263. This is an enlarged partial front view of the main control unit, showing the state in which the change suppression means has changed to the second state from Figure 263. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit. FIG. 2 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main control unit. FIG. 2 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main control unit. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a control unit (main control unit). FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a control unit (main control unit). FIG. 2 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a control unit (main control unit). FIG. 2 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view of a main part of a control unit (main control unit). FIG. 2 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a control unit (main control unit). FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a control unit (main control unit). 4 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a main portion showing a boundary portion between vertically arranged control units (main control unit, peripheral control unit). FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a control unit (main control unit). This is a rear view showing the lower half of the pachinko machine with the outer frame omitted. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a control unit (main control unit). FIG. 279 is a perspective view showing a different form of the control unit (main control unit) from that shown in FIG. 279.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 12. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Fig. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, seen from the right front. Also, Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game board 5 that has a game area 5a that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3 and into which the player hits a game ball B (see Figure 89).

The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate coaxially, and the main frame 4 is attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

In addition, when the main frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 has the lower outer frame assembly 40 which cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the game area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 also has a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player in addition to the handle 195. When a player-participation performance is being executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance operation unit 301. This allows the player to enjoy the game not only by playing with the game ball B, but also by operating the performance operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable and for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 which reinforces the main body frame base unit 500, a ball launching device 540 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. It is equipped with a payout base unit 550 that receives the game balls B, a payout unit 560 that pays out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player, a board unit 620 that has a power board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a that can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 as well as a payout control board 633, a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The game board 5 is made up of a game area 5a into which a game ball B is shot by the player to play the game, a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, a main control board (hereinafter also referred to as the "main control unit") 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that are attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The game console includes a main control unit 1300 having a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game status. The main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1400 are also collectively referred to simply as "control units".

The game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, as well as a general prize opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a normal prize opening 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a large prize opening 2005 that provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) when the game ball B is accepted or passed through. The obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the normal prize opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the large prize opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

The player can shoot game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. This allows the player to enjoy operating the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B so that it is accepted into or passes through the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the normal winning hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, and the large winning hole 2005, etc., in the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 can entertain the player by displaying a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600 or by performing light-emitting performances using the light guide plate performance unit 3100, the back front performance unit 3200, etc., depending on the game state that changes when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 13 to 18. Fig. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, Fig. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and Fig. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Fig. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and Fig. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the rear. Fig. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other laterally and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and can invert the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiate it forward.

The outer frame 2 can detachably support the upper hinge assembly 50 of the main body frame 4. The upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 can coaxially support the upper hinge member 510 and the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Left outer frame assembly and right outer frame assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, disassembled and viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are arranged spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so that they can rotate on the same axis, and attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 comprises a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and a lower left connecting member 13 that is attached to the lower end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The left outer frame member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface, which is one of three equal parts in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 11b that bulges to the right from the part on the right side surface opposite the recess 11a, and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulge 11b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the left outer frame member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulge 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

The left outer frame member 11 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the left side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the right side surface are semicircular. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the right outer frame member 21 of the right outer frame assembly 20 described below.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-to-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing part 12c into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the upper end of the left outer frame member 11, and abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing parts 12c against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and then screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing part 12c from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the underside of the left end of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserting the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30, and then screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat abutment portion 13d extending short to the right from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11 with the rear surface of the abutment portion 13d abutting against the front surface of the bulge portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b abutting against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a coinciding with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11. The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c with the horizontal fixing portion 13a abutting against the upper surface of the left end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c inserted into the notch 41a on the left side of the lower outer frame member 41.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 comprises a right outer frame member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper right connecting member 22 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface, which is one of three equal portions of the right side surface divided in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 21b that bulges to the left from the portion of the left side surface opposite the recess 21a, and a hollow portion 21c that penetrates the bulge 21b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the right outer frame member 21 are increased by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

The right outer frame member 21 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the right side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the left side surface are semicircular. The right outer frame member 21 is formed symmetrically to the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-to-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21 with the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 22c abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the lower surface of the right end side of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the notch portion 30a on the right side of the upper outer frame member 30, and screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat abutment portion 23d extending short to the left from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear surface of the abutment part 23d abutting against the front surface of the bulge part 21b of the right outer frame member 21, the right side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a coinciding with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c with the horizontal fixing part 23a abutting against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are hooked by the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 described below. The upper hook member 24 has a flat mounting part 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat hook piece part 24b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting part 24a and hooks the upper outer frame hook 653.

The lower hook member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a flat hook piece portion 25b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 25a and to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole 25c that penetrates the hook piece portion 25b in the front-to-rear direction and through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The upper outer frame member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The upper outer frame member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The upper outer frame member 30 has a width in the front-to-rear direction substantially the same as that of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the lower outer frame member 41 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 described below.

The upper outer frame member 30 has cutouts 30a at the center of the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The upper horizontal fixing part 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends.

The upper outer frame member 30 also has a mounting step 30b at the left end, the top and front surfaces of which are recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Lower Outer Frame Assembly]
The lower frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower frame assembly of the outer frame when viewed from the front. The lower frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left and right frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and is used to close off the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 comprises a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and extends left and right; a box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right along the lower outer frame member 41, and is open at the rear; a box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42 and is attached to the top surface of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right, and is open at the front; and a ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as that of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is formed from wood. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-to-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutouts 41a at the center of the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 41a at both left and right ends. This allows the lower ends of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 to be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the top surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the back panel member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right and extends from a position toward the rear of the center in the front-to-rear direction to the front end side. This recess 41b makes the volume of the back panel internal space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the back panel member 43 as large as possible.

The front panel member 42 has the same left-right length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape with a short front-to-back depth relative to its height, with the entire rear side open. The front panel member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear panel member 43, thereby forming the front panel internal space 40a that becomes part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the rear panel member 43. The front panel member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a on the front side near the right end that penetrates from front to back and extends left to right.

The rear panel member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. The rear panel member 43 has the front panel member 42 attached to its front surface, and cooperates with the front panel member 42 to form the interior space 40a of the panel, which is part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right center of the upper surface, which extends left-right and protrudes upward and communicates with the interior space 40a of the panel. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that its upper end is located higher from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a has a left-right length of approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire back panel member 43, and a front-rear depth slightly shorter than the depth of the entire back panel member 43. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front and rear ends are provided inside the connecting tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is connected to the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and is in communication with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a, forming an enclosure 624.

The ball trapping prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from being trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

The ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later can be attached, a first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, a standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protruding portion 44e protruding forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slanting so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it approaches the rear.

The first discharge opening 44b is formed at a position that coincides with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c are formed to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c do not communicate with the front panel internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the front panel rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that enters the first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c can be discharged to the rear of the front panel rear member 43.

If an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described below, the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 can prevent the illegal tool from entering by using the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a. Even if the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end protrusion portion 44e that protrudes forward at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed through the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

However, if the rear end of the mounting portion 44a is provided with a vertical wall portion 44d, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, if a game ball B falls onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason, the vertical wall portion 44d will prevent the game ball B from moving rearward relative to the outer frame 2, making it easier for the game ball B to remain on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball B will be pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, causing a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

In contrast, the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment allows game balls B that have fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or onto the placement portion 44a to be discharged to the rear of the curtain board rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge opening 44b, or through the second discharge opening 44c, thereby preventing game balls B from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 spaced apart on the left and right sides of the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43, a flat grill member 46 that closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear, a port member 47 with two cylinders extending forward and backward that is attached inside the front panel member 42 to close the opening 42a by sandwiching the grill member 46, and a frame-shaped seal member 48 that is placed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are against which the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. The guide members 45 are made of a low-friction material that has low friction resistance, making the lower end of the main frame 4 easier to slide on, facilitating opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is a strip-like plate extending in the left-right direction, and has multiple blades 46b spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blades 46b are inclined so that the front end is higher than the rear end (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the front panel member 42 (the front panel internal space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blades 46b.

The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the interior space 40a of the panel (enclosure 624) to the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blades 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is made of two cylinders with a specified inner diameter and length, and can resonate and amplify the low-pitched sounds emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 using the principle of Helmholtz resonance, radiating rich low-pitched sounds to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep low-pitched sounds.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the sealing member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 on the main frame 4, and prevents sound from inside the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking out from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the air vibrations emitted from the main frame speaker 622 to the outside from the inner space 40a of the fascia board can be directed by the inclined vane portions 46b through the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward, into the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed. As a result, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 can be vibrated to send air into the front tube portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

In addition, because the port member 47 is open toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward, so that the sound effects emitted from the port member 47 can be heard by players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering around the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This also attracts the attention of players, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the port member 47 is provided in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 provided in the main frame 4 can be increased, allowing for a deeper bass sound to be output, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame when disassembled and viewed from above the front, and Fig. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) when viewed from below the front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged and rotatable. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a locking member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 includes an upper fixing portion 51a that is a flat plate extending horizontally and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a flat forward extension portion 51b that extends forward from the front edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right edge of the forward extension portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, a flat horizontal fixing portion 51d that extends downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, and a flat edge wall portion 51e that extends downward from the edge of the left edge of the forward extension portion 51b around the front edge to the part where the bearing groove 51c opens and is continuous with the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 (described later) of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 comprises a band-shaped locking body 52a extending forward and backward, an operating piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 52a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic part 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 52a. The locking member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extension part 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c by means of mounting screws 53.

When the locking member 52 is attached to the upper hinge member 51, the locking body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so that it can abut against the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c in the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. In addition, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 52a of the locking member 52 abuts against the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the upper body frame hinge pin 512 of the upper body frame hinge member 510 is formed in the bearing groove 51c in a portion forward of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operating piece 52b of this locking member 52, the locking body 52a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operating piece 52b to rotate the locking body 52a in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, the locking body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 from within the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower outer frame hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 includes a flat horizontal portion 60a extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal portion 60a from top to bottom and large enough to allow only one game ball B to pass through. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to contact the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. This discharge hole 60d is formed to be approximately the same size as the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear of the horizontal section 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is placed on the mounting section 44a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is fixed to the rear panel member 43 with screws (not shown). The rising section 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11, forward of the bulging section 11b, with screws (not shown). By inserting the lower outer frame hinge pin 60c into the lower outer frame hinge hole 521a in the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, the lower outer frame hinge member 60 can cooperate with the upper outer frame hinge member 51 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. This allows the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a to fall (discharge) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge opening 44b. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 rolls to the rear side where the gap is wider, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. In this case, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls B that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d, and game balls B are less likely to become trapped in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 30. Figure 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 23 is a rear view of the door frame, Figure 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 25 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 26 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front, Figure 27 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and Figure 28 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, with approximately the same size as the interior of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the interior of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, vertically extending outer shape when viewed from the front, a glass unit 160 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, a handle unit 180 that is attached to the front right corner of the door frame base unit 100, and a handle that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180. It comprises a cover unit 290, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a left side unit 420 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right side unit 430 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top unit 450 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 420 and the right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed into a vertically extending square (rectangle) in front view and penetrates from front to back, a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner as seen from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end as seen from the rear, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 as seen from the rear, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 as seen from the rear, a door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide it with rigidity. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and the lower door frame hinge member 125 are used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to be used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and for locking and opening the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The ball supply unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 is for guiding the game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launching device 540 and have not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and for guiding the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery are used to play a game in which the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main frame 4 on the left side when viewed from the front, closing the front of the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, while allowing the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the main frame 4 to be visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 is equipped with a flat door frame base 101 with a rectangular shape that extends vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 further includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 attached to the lower front corners, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) with an outer shape extending vertically in front view. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape extending vertically in front view. The upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery of the door window 101a are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 101. In this way, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is provided with a handle mounting surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates from front to back between the handle mounting surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates from front to front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b when viewed from the front and allows the entrance 141a and ball removal opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 101 also has a lower tray ball passage port 101f that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, allowing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, an upper tray ball passage port 101g that penetrates from front to back adjacent to the lower edge of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front, allowing the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the door window 101a, into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

The door frame base 101 also has multiple vertical slits 101i formed in the lower left corner when viewed from the front (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) that penetrate from front to back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the multiple slits 101i. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the multiple slits 101i have the speaker opening 211b of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200 located in front of them, and the main body frame speaker 622 in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 located behind them, allowing sound from the main body frame speaker 622 to be emitted forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has a through hole 101j that penetrates from front to back below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. This through hole 101j is for inserting a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side, and is formed to match the through hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. This allows the sound emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 to be guided forward without being diffused, and can be well guided to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the player) through the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker port 211b in the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

The speaker duct 103 also has a cable holder 103a on the rear surface below the cylindrical section, which holds the connection cable 503. The cable holder 103a is located to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and holds the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 so that it extends to the left end of the door frame 3.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 has an outer shape that extends vertically and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a part of the connection cable 503 (see Figures 82 and 83) extending from the main body frame 4 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape with a top rectangle extending vertically and a left-right rectangle combined on the right side of the top rectangle when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that it extends vertically but is adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is for relaying the connection between the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main frame 4, and the remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected to it.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude toward the rear. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 that extend up and down are covered at the rear by the door frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are covered at the rear by the fall cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has an external shape formed in a rectangle extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle mounting surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e at the rear of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 is used to relay the connection between the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered by the handle rear relay board cover 108.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (parts extending up and down in an inverted L-shape). The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and left sides open when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the open left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 in the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and is intended to cover the wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape that extends left and right, and has openings near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cable through.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 comprises a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which extend vertically and are arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right sides, an upper reinforcement frame 113 which extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 and extends to the right near the right reinforcement frame 112, a cylinder mounting frame 115 which connects the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 to the right reinforcement frame 112, and hook hook members 116 which are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 at a distance from each other on the left and right sides and to which door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 are hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically for a length approximately equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 has multiple insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction and extends horizontally for a length approximately equal to the left-to-right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 extends left and right with a width wider than the width of the upper reinforcement frame 113. The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 has a rectangular cutout 114a cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through-hole 114b that penetrates from front to back near the right end. The cutout 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through-hole 114b is formed at a position that coincides with the through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is provided with a pair of rear pieces arranged at a distance from the left and right and formed as rectangular flat plates extending up and down when viewed from the front, a pair of side pieces extending forward in a flat plate shape from each of the opposing edges of the pair of rear pieces, and a flat front piece connecting the front end edges of the pair of forward extending pieces. This cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook members 116 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the locations of the insertion holes that penetrate from front to rear. These hook members 116 are hooked by the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

The left reinforcement frame 111, right reinforcement frame 112, upper reinforcement frame 113, middle reinforcement frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hook member 116 that make up the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are formed by punching and bending metal plates using press molding. They are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is assembled so that the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the top reinforcement frame 113 are aligned along the left, right, and top edges of the door frame base 101, and the middle reinforcement frame 114 is positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a number of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable in cooperation with the lower door-frame hinge member 125. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door-frame reinforcement unit 110, a door-frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the up-down direction, a flange member 123 attached to the door-frame upper hinge pin 122, and a lock spring 124 that biases the door-frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 has a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and flat protruding pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The upper door frame hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When assembled to the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically penetrates from below near the front ends of a pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, with the upper end extending upward beyond the upper protruding piece 121b, and the portion that extends horizontally abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 in the upper body frame hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends upward and downward between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123.

In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below, and remove it downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

In addition, the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 has a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically and is positioned coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described below. This allows the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1g. Door frame bottom hinge parts]
The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 cooperates with the door-frame upper hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable thereabout.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and has a flat mounting piece 125a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, a flat protruding piece 125b that extends forward from the bottom edge of the mounting piece 125a, and a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see Figure 22, etc.) that protrudes downward from the underside near the front end of the protruding piece 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and protruding piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal bar with a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, this lower door frame hinge pin 126 is attached to a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 that extends vertically.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 can support the door frame 3 to be hingedly rotatable relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34(a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear front, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear. Figure 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the rear. Figure 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 comprises a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 that is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other across the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate it by inserting a pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches.

In more detail, the cylinder lock 130 is provided with a first cam member 134 that is provided at the rear end of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132; a second cam member 135 that is rotatably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at a position below the cylinder body 131 around an axis in the front-to-rear direction; a band-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; and a band-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the lower position of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the lower position of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135.

The cylinder lock 130 also includes a rear cover 138 attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear, excluding the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), and rivets 139 that rotatably attach the upper and lower ends of each of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively.

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and a rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front side of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be able to rotate integrally with it. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side forward of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached and the portion where the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axes. In addition, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached.

The rear cover 138 is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at its upper end with a screw (not shown), with the shaft 138a, which protrudes outward in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of both the left and right sides, engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

This cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137, all of which are made of metal.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, we will explain the conventional cylinder lock 130A. As shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder body 131 that penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. This cylinder lock 130A has a rotation transmission member 133 provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. In a conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 34(a) and (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. 36(a), both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 are attached to the right of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, and both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. With the use of a regular key, the cylinder body 131 can be rotated by 90 degrees in both the clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the normal state.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise, whereas since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is proportional to the left-right distance between the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward in the second arm 137 becomes larger.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see Figure 36 (b)).

When using the key to rotate the key counterclockwise 90 degrees from the normal state and then clockwise 90 degrees to return it to the normal state, the action is reversed.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise from the normal state via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136, the upper end of which is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves downward, and the second arm 137, the upper end of which is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction, whereas since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is proportional to the left-right distance between the part where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases, whereas the force of the second arm 137 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force tending to rotate the second cam member 135 from the second arm 137 becomes greater than that from the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the clockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

When using the key to rotate the lock 90 degrees clockwise from its normal state to return it to its normal state by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise, the action is reversed.

In this way, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are connected by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 that are attached at a 90 degree angle from each other to transmit rotation, so that no matter what rotation position the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) is in, rotation can be transmitted by at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), allowing for good locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

In addition, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the axis of the rotation transmission member 133 (the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4) can be set at a different position relative to the axis of the cylinder body 131 by transmitting rotation using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism. This makes it possible to change the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 to any position without changing the locking unit 650. This allows the cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) to be located in a position that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3.

In addition, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

However, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, so that a fraudster who knows this configuration may insert a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131 and use the tool to fraudulently rotate the rotation transmission member 133, opening the door frame 3 and committing a fraudulent act. In contrast, in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, even if a tool is inserted at the rear of the cylinder body 131 to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present at that position, and fraudulent acts by opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 that are spaced apart by a rotational angle of 90 degrees relative to the first arm 136. Therefore, even if the portions of either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are positioned on a line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the portions that are furthest from the line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Therefore, even if one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is positioned at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 and cannot transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. This means that there is no significant resistance to the rotation of the first cam member 134, and the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, making it easy to lock and unlock, and also preventing the key inserted in the keyhole from being forcibly rotated, preventing damage to the key.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged for some reason, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly reliable cylinder lock 130.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. If the rotation were transmitted by a gear, there would be a risk that the gear would rotate and rotate the rotation transmission member 133 by catching the tip of a tool on the teeth of the gear. However, by making the first arm 136 and second arm 137 into a rod-shaped arm with a smooth surface, it is possible to prevent the tip of a tool from getting caught on the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated by moving the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This reliably prevents the door frame 3 or main frame 4 from being unlocked by unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as a rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. However, this is not limited to this, and other mechanisms may be used, such as a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, or a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 37 and 38. Figure 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. Figure 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back with the rear case and the anti-tampering member removed. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4, and can extract the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball supply unit 140 comprises a box-shaped front cover 141 having an entrance 141a penetrating in the front-to-rear direction through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and a ball ejection port 141b opening below the entrance 141a, and a rear cover 142 that closes the rear end of the front cover 141 and is box-shaped with an open front and has a ball supply port 142a for supplying the game balls B that enter through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-to-rear direction to the ball launching device 540; The ball removal member 143 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front covers 141 and has a partition 143a that separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b at the rear of the front covers 141; a ball delivery member 144 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the up-down direction between the front covers 141 and the rear covers 142 and delivers the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one to the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142; and a ball delivery solenoid 145 that rotates the ball delivery member 144.

As shown in the figure, when viewed from the front, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed to the right of the entrance 141a, a ball extracting member 143 disposed to the left of the ball feeding member 144, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 disposed to the right of the ball feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 to the left of the ball extracting opening 141b when viewed from the front, and the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 described later extends forward from this slit 141c. In addition, the upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and is formed so that when the door frame 3 is assembled, the rear side closes the rear-open portion of the ball feeding guide path 241b and the upstream end of the ball extracting guide path 241c of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball extracting unit 240.

The ball removal member 143 comprises a partition section 143a which is located below the entrance 141a between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, a pivoting rod section 143b which extends downward from the end of the partition section 143a opposite the ball feeding member 144 and is bent in an L-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball removal opening 141b, with its lower end supported for rotation around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c which protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod section 143b, and a weight section 143d which protrudes from the side of the rotating rod section 143b below the operating rod 143c in the opposite direction to the partition section 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The operating rod 143c abuts against the upper end (upper surface) of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which moves downward by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 through the ball feed opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 has a cutoff portion 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on the rotation axis that extends vertically toward the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143, a ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end of the cutoff portion 144a toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The cutoff portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b in the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of approximately 180° centered on the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is large enough to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis by moving the rod portion 144c, which is positioned eccentrically to the rotation axis, left and right when driven by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

This ball feeding member 144 is adapted to rotate between a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces in a direction communicating with the ball supply port 142a, and a holding position in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the ball supply port 142a, and the game ball B that has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a is prevented from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball supply port 142a, and only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings up and down when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction due to the movement of the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 swinging up and down, and which rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a of the ball feeding operating rod 146 is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 rotates upward around the right end. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, rotating the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 downward around the right end, returning to the original state. As a result, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is caused to swing up and down at its left end (tip) closest to the ball feeding crank 147 by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball delivery crank 147 is equipped with an engagement portion 147a that extends in the left-right direction and can engage with the tip of the ball delivery operating rod 146 that moves up and down, an axle portion 147b that is located on the opposite side of the engagement portion 147a that engages with the ball delivery operating rod 146 and is rotatably supported around an axis that extends in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a transmission portion 147c that extends upward from the axle portion 147b and engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see Figure 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball delivery member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 can rotate the ball feeding crank 147 around an axis extending forward and backward via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward, and in this state, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned in the feeding position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The drive of the ball delivery solenoid 145 in this ball delivery unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the delivery solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 173) of the payout control board 633.

The ball feeding unit 140 is also configured to apply a moment of rotation in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball removal member 143, which is rotatably supported by a pivot, or the weight portion 143d. However, the rotation of the ball removal member 143 is restricted by the actuation rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 coming into contact with the upper end of the actuation transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is operated by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200. Therefore, under normal conditions, the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b to separate them, and the game ball B does not enter the ball removal opening 141b side.

When the player presses the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, and the actuation rod 143c also moves downward relatively in accordance with the downward movement of the actuation transmission part 242b. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, releasing the partition. As a result, the game ball B that enters through the entrance 141a falls toward the ball removal opening 141b, is discharged from the ball removal opening 141b into the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 in the tray unit 200, and can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is formed with the actuation transmission part 242b against which the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 abuts, is biased upward by a spring. Therefore, even if a game ball B is supplied forcefully onto the partition part 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the actuation rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball removal member 143 etc., and preventing the game ball B from bouncing off the partition part 143a.

The ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) that is recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from behind the ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and an anti-tampering member 148 is attached within the mounting recess 142b. The anti-tampering member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed from a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached removably from the rear side within the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142.

The anti-tampering member 148 has an outer shape in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and is provided with an upper piece 148a and a lower piece 148b that are separated vertically at approximately the center in the vertical direction a certain distance to the left from the right side, and an inclined portion 148c that is formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip side (right end side when viewed from the front) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. The upper piece 148a of the anti-tampering member 148 is bent so that the right end when viewed from the front protrudes backward with respect to the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. As a result, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right when viewed from the top.

When the tamper-proof member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the ball supply port 142a.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, when a fraudulent game ball B with a string attached is shot from the upper tray into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B is manipulated to move the fraudulent game ball B into or out of the first starting hole 2002, etc., the momentum of the fraudulent game ball B shot (shot) by the ball launcher 540 causes the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then cut by the narrow V-shaped area formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent activities using the fraudulent game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1j. Foul Cover Unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. Also, Figure 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game ball B that has been paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fall cover unit 150 comprises a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open at the front, and a flat cover member 152 attached to the front of the unit body 151.

The foul cover unit 150 has a through ball passage 150a that penetrates from front to back at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and connects the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4 to the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200, and a full ball receiving port 150b that opens toward the rear on the lower right side when viewed from the front of the through ball passage 150a and can connect to the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4.

The foul cover unit 150 also has a foul ball receiving port 150c that opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front and receives game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4 but have not reached the play area 5a, and a ball discharge port 150d that opens forward near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and discharges game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c forward and is connected to the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit 200.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with a storage passage 150e that is formed by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and has a width sufficient to store a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The through ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152.

The fall cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and has a lower end that is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 becomes full of game balls B and game balls B are no longer released from the ball release port 150d toward the lower tray 202, this foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the movable piece 153 to rotate so that the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and this rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This makes it possible to determine that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, and when the full-tray detection sensor 154 detects that the tray is full, the payout of further game balls B is stopped, and the player or amusement hall staff is notified of this, urging them to replenish the lower tray 202.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear of the unit body 151 below the through ball passage 150a, and is provided with a door opening/closing abutment 150f against which the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 (described later) can abut (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing abutment 150f is inclined so that it moves forward as the rear surface faces downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against this door opening/closing abutment 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 can be rotated to open the downstream ends (front openings) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted from the rear into the glass unit mounting portion 101h and removably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, this glass unit 160 makes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) and closes the front of the playing area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumference of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, two transparent glass plates 162 that close the inside of the glass frame 161 and have their outer circumferences attached to the glass frame 161, and a pair of glass unit attachment members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 161b protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 can abut against the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 (see Figure 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion 163b that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the two upper corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and then abut the front end of the glass frame 161 against the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Then, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and abut the protruding portion 163b against the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached to the door frame base 101.

To remove the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the above steps can be reversed. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position where it is above the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released naturally, and the glass unit 160 will not come off the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Crime prevention cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed into a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer periphery of the body portion 171, and a pair of locking pieces 173 that are spaced apart on the left and right, protrude forward beyond the body portion 171, and are capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that its lower end protrudes downward below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed by the main body 171 and the rear protrusion 172 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170, and does not hinder the shooting of game ball B into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). This allows the security cover 170 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projection 172, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171, is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the component 1000. In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projection 172 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 41 to 47. Figure 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-I in Figure 41(a). Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 1. Note that Figure 46 shows a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3, with the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and can be operated by the player to shoot the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, a handle 195 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by the handle cover base 291 described later, a disk-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle unit 180 also includes an inner base 186 that is attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 195, a shaft member 187 that has the handle 195 attached to its front end and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 and has a drive gear portion 187a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that has a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and is sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

The handle unit 180 further includes a handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of which is attached to the handle 195, biasing the handle 195 to return to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, biasing the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, a single button 193 whose tip end protrudes outward from the left side of the outer circumferential surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front and whose base end is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 and detects the pressing operation of the single button 193.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and three grooves 181c recessed from the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical base 181a and extending axially, and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291, and by inserting the protrusions 291d into the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 is equipped with a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple (three in this example) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b, two slits 195d extending in an arc around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction, and a locking protrusion 195e protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slits 195d and locking the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

When the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotating), the three spoke parts 195b of the handle 195 extend horizontally to the left from the central hub part 195a, and two spoke parts 195b extend from the center in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions at angles of 120 degrees each. The three spoke parts 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c into which the player's fingers can be inserted.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in a circular ring shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped radius side facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed to be entirely translucent, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating from the central hub portion 195a to the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect the touch of the handle 195 even when only the outer circumferential ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot in by turning the outer circumferential ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center. The three handle guides 196 have the mounting stay 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting a guide piece 291g of the handle cover base 291 (described later) into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover base 183 is formed in a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting bosses 183a of the cover base 183 penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195, the mounting bosses 183a come into contact with the circumferential ends of the slits 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) in a triple concentric arrangement: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the circumference. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two at the top left of the circumference, two at the top right of the circumference, and two at the bottom of the circumference (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 184b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 184a. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 15 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 10 LEDs 184a divided into five groups can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 184a and the LED driver 184b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board (hereinafter also referred to as the "peripheral control unit") 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can cause the 10 LEDs 184a, divided into five groups, to emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

As such, since this handle decoration board 184 has an LED driver 184b, it is possible to individually (here, by group) control the light emission of a greater number of LEDs 184a than the number of wires that make up the connected wiring cable, thereby reducing the number of wires and simplifying the configuration related to the electrical wiring.

The front surface of the handle front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and is translucent. Inside the handle front lens 185, a lens member is provided that is three-dimensionally formed from a transparent material. This handle front lens 185 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of this detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to that internal resistance, and the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact and the handle 195 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the ball.

Therefore, even if a player tries to rotate the handle 195 in some way to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and game ball B cannot be shot into the game area 5a. This makes it possible to prevent players from playing by rotating the handle 195 in a way that is different from the intended way, and reduces the burden (stress) placed on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the operation of the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation of the handle 195, and by releasing the pressing of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a again with the same hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 was operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 includes a handle cover base 291 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 behind the handle 195 and has its rear end attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, an inner 292 that covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, a ring-shaped handle cover decorative board 293 that is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front side, a ring-shaped board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 is provided with a cylindrical front tube portion 291a that extends forward and backward with an inner diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a middle wall portion 291b that extends from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a so that the inner diameter decreases as it extends forward, a cylindrical rear tube portion 291c that penetrates the middle wall portion 291b and extends forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted, and multiple (here, three) ridges 291d that protrude inward from the inner circumference of the rear tube portion 291c and extend forward and backward, and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

The handle cover base 291 also includes a flange portion 291e that extends outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a, a cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front tube portion 291a, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and an opening 291h that penetrates the lower portion of the front tube portion 291a.

The middle wall 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tube 291a to the center of the front-rear direction in a circular arc shape with a cross section that bulges outward. The rear end of the rear tube 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear tube 291c is formed to the same length as the base 181a of the handle base 181, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted inside. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by inserting them into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made non-rotatable relative to the flange 291e. The outer tube 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange 291e in the radial direction. This handle cover base 291 has multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction that connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer tube portion 291f to a position close to the front tube portion 291a. The guide piece 291g extends in the circumferential direction over a length in the range of approximately 110 degrees, and three guide pieces are provided in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearward of the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the guide piece 291g can be positioned within the U-shaped guide portion 196a, and the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

The opening 291h penetrates the front tubular portion 291a with a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to near the flange portion 291e and a size in the circumferential direction within an angle range of approximately 90 degrees.

The inner 292 has an annular base 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange 291e, a leg 292b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the base 292a, and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c cut out from the rear end of the leg 292b to the vicinity of the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base 292a from the front, and the base 292a is positioned behind the flange 291e. The leg 292b extends in a curved shape that bulges outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notches 292c are provided at the top and bottom and the left and right parts of the leg 292b.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is equipped with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 293a. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, two on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right, and two on the lower right from the center (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 18 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 6 groups of 10 LEDs 293a can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle cover decorative board 293 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 293a and the LED driver 293b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 293b of this handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the 12 LEDs 293a, divided into six groups, emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate 294a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter approximately the same as the outer diameter of the base 292a of the inner 292, and a cylindrical side plate 294b with the outer peripheral edge of the front plate 294a extending rearward. The front plate 294a of this board cover 294 is located between the flange 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and the side plate 294b extends to the base 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at its front end with an inner shape the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and is formed in a spindle-shaped (snow-hollow or bowl-shaped, etc.) cylinder that bulges toward the rear, and has multiple (four in this case) notched openings 295b cut from the rear end toward the front in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the multiple notched openings 295b are formed to match the notches 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., when the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the part of the handle unit 180 rearward of the handle 195 is inserted inside the front tube part 291a of the handle cover base 291, and the handle 195 and the handle front lens 185 are positioned forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 with the part closing the rear end of the rear tube part 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 sandwiched between them.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. The handle 195 is also rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 via a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g, and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195, and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to be translucent, and by illuminating the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front tube portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be illuminated and decorated.

The handle cover unit 290 has matching notched openings 295b and notched portions 292c in the handle cover 295 and inner 292, so when viewed from the outside, it appears as if there are holes on both the left and right sides and on the bottom that communicate with the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. This can ease the player's mental anxiety about sticking their hand (fingers) into the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (upper cutout 292c of the inner cover 292) is closed by the right plate decorative unit 275 and the right door frame unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is connected to the lower cutout portion 292c and cutout opening 295b of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or game ball B enters the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195, it can be discharged downward of the handle cover unit 290 through the lower opening 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b through the gap between the front tube portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292.

As shown in Fig. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower cutout 292c of the inner 292, and the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 are provided on an extension line of the inclination direction of the blades 46b of the grill member 46 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. This allows the wind (wind pressure) discharged diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blades 46b due to vibration of the main frame speaker 622 to enter the front tube portion 291a through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout opening 295b. Therefore, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 vibrates to send air into the front cylinder portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be hooked with a finger and pulled, and can be used as a handle when opening the door frame 3, etc.

In addition, because the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and the game ball B can be shot even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched.

In addition, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily fixed by gripping the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b with the fingers, and the game ball B can be continuously shot into the game area 5a with a constant force even without continuously twisting the hand. In this way, the handle 195 can be rotated in a variety of ways to shoot the game ball B, so a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select a shooting operation that is suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is located further back than the left end in a plan view, and faces outward (toward the open side). Therefore, the handle unit 180 attached via the handle cover base 291 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and allows the player to rotate the handle without any discomfort.

In this way, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, a handle 195 having a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3, which is provided so as to be openable and closable around the left side as an axis and which closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 so as to be visible from the front. The handle 195 has a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b. A cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Because the handle cover unit 290 is provided, a handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 of a never-before-seen form can be seen in the area where the handle is provided in conventional pachinko machines, making a strong impact on the player and strongly attracting the player's interest, while also increasing the player's desire to play with this pachinko machine 1, making it easier for players wandering around the game hall in which this pachinko machine 1 is installed to select this pachinko machine as the pachinko machine to play on.

In addition, the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When the player operates the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B into the play area 5a, the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. This gives the player a different sensation when operating the handle 195 than the handles of conventional pachinko machines, and the player can be entertained by the new sensation of shooting the game ball B, preventing a decline in interest.

When the player operates the handle 195 and causes a sound effect to be output from the main frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a in the base unit 620A of the main frame 4, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the air in the enclosure 624 formed by the speaker box 623 to vibrate, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is released forward as sound pressure (sound wind) through the fascia internal space 40a and port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 which is connected to the enclosure 624. At this time, the multiple blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 can guide the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, and the sound pressure can stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Therefore, by supplying sound pressure from the port member 47 through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 according to the game status in the game area 5a, it is possible to surprise the player, give them a sense of an upcoming opportunity, or change the amount of handle operation, which not only entertains the player but also prevents them from becoming bored and reduces a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h, making it possible to cool the inside of the handle cover unit 290 and making the environment around the player's fingers operating the handle 195 more comfortable, thereby relieving stress on the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

As described above, the sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided, is guided by the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 to stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with his/her fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. Therefore, compared to a case in which a vibration device is provided in the handle 195, there is no damage to the various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanism provided in the handle 195, and it is possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort to the player due to damage to the handle unit 180, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile, and therefore, even though the appearance of the handle 195 is significantly different from that of the handles of conventional pachinko machines, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without confusion, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play without hesitation.

In addition, the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h are provided on the downward facing portion of the outer circumferential surface of the handle cover unit 290, where the player can insert his/her fingers between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When looking inside the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the lower portion of the handle cover unit 290 can be seen through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. This gives the cylindrical handle cover unit 290 a sense of openness, reducing the player's anxiety about inserting his/her fingers into the handle cover unit 290, and allowing the player to operate the handle 195 without hesitation.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 has a through-hole cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h on the outer peripheral surface facing downward, and the port member 47 of the outer frame 2 (lower outer frame assembly 40) is opened toward the front. Therefore, even if liquid such as a drink or game balls B enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b and opening 291h, and liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295b and opening 291h is less likely to enter the port member 47.

Furthermore, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and multiple cutout openings 295b are provided in the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290, whose front end has the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. This allows the handle to be grasped and operated by hand using the central hub portion 195a in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, operated using only the spoke portions 195b, operated like a steering wheel of a car using the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, operated by placing fingers on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the cutout openings 295b, or operated by straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers. This provides a pachinko machine 1 that allows a variety of operations to be performed to shoot game balls B (handle operations). Therefore, depending on the game status and the player's condition, the player can shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a in a way that is easy for the player to operate, making it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed by gripping the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195 with fingers, or by straddling the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers. Therefore, in addition to handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, handle operations that are not possible with conventional pachinko machines can also be performed, providing the player with a variety of handle operations that make handle operation enjoyable and less likely to bore the player.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, giving the appearance that the handle cover unit 290 is integrated with the handle 195, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is capable of attracting the attention of players.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and by preventing the handle cover unit 290 from compressing the play area 5a (door window 101a) upward, it is possible to prevent the play area 5a from becoming narrower, allowing the play area 5a to be relatively larger, and the large play area 5a makes the pachinko machine 1 stand out, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even when the player is operating the handle 195, the illuminated decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, making the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c stand out, and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

In addition, the handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite the hinge side, and the cutout opening 295b is provided in the part of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side, so that the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

The handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so that it can rotate in the circumferential direction, and has a flange portion 291e and a guide piece 291g that restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. Therefore, the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and damage to the handle 195 can be prevented.

In addition, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot even if the handle 195 is operated while touching only the spoke portion 195b or the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to perform a variety of shooting operations (handle operations) as described above, and also prevents the game ball B from being shot when the player is not touching the handle 195. This prevents the handle from being operated using tools, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and Figure 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201 for storing game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and a lower dish 202 arranged below the upper dish 201 and capable of storing game balls B supplied from the upper dish 201 and the foul cover unit 150.

The plate unit 200 comprises a plate base unit 210 having an upper plate 201 and attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a plate decoration unit 250 having a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, a mounting base (not shown) attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 and protruding forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) attached to the right of the mounting base, a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish body 251 which is attached to the lower front part of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish 202, a dish unit body 252 which is attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 which is attached to the underside of the lower dish body 251, and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 275 which are attached to the upper front part of the dish unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, which includes a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressing. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section cover unit 310 with a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 that is housed within the performance operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, a circular performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 attached to the top surface of the operation section base 315, an outer periphery board cover 325 that covers the top of the performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation section relay board unit 330 attached to the rear side of the operation section base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit unit 350 that can protrude upward from the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and is provided with a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 and supports the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit unit 350 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

The tray unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, with the performance operation unit 300 positioned in the left-right center so that the top surface of the performance operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward, with the upper tray 201 positioned to the left of the performance operation unit 300 on the top surface, the ball lending operation unit 220 positioned to the right of the performance operation unit 300, and the lower tray 202 positioned below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the performance operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray 201 is formed by a tray unit base 211 and an upper tray body 212, and is formed in a container shape that bulges forward more on the left side than the center when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray body 212) bulges forward most at about 1/3 of the left end to the right side relative to the left-right width of the door frame 3. The upper tray 201 has a guide passage portion 201a (see Figure 73) whose front end recedes backward as it moves from the most bulging portion to the right when viewed from the front, and whose depth in the front-back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201, including the guide passage portion 201a, is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a when viewed from the front is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray 201 has a bottom surface that is inclined downward from a position lower than the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B relative to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port (not shown). This allows the game ball B released forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a to be received and stored within the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be supplied from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a through the upper tray ball feed port to the ball feed unit 140 side.

The induction passage section 201a is equipped with a metal earth fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls), the static electricity charged to the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. Figure 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port in the door frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting the same part as (a) in a conventional door frame. The lower tray 202 is located below the upper tray 201, to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower tray 202 is formed of a lower tray main body 251 and a tray unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower tray 202 is formed into a roughly rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The lower tray 202 has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates from top to bottom, located near the front end near the right end. The lower tray 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. When assembled into the tray unit 200, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300, to the left of the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

When the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed, the lower tray 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and by opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, the stored game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (e.g., to a cash box). Also, when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is positioned in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, so that the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50(b), a lower tray ball ejection hole 202b of the lower tray 202 is provided in front of the central axis of the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 211 in the tray base unit 210, which is connected to the ball ejection port 150d of the far cover unit 150. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is cylindrical and extends straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball ejection port 150d goes straight toward the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b. This allows the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j to be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

However, if the lower tray ball supply port 211j is used to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202b, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202b and the lower tray ball supply port 211j are located near the right end of the lower tray 202. If the game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B will no longer be released from the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and determine that the lower tray 202 is full, even though there is still room in the left area of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined so that it extends diagonally forward to the left. In more detail, the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined diagonally forward to the left so that the distance between the location directly behind the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and the front of the tray unit base 211 is a distance that allows at least one game ball B to circulate.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is moved to the left of the central axis (line shown by the dashed dotted line) of the rear end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c (ball release port 150d).

As a result, by moving the lower tray ball removal hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower tray 202 (the part of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a) moves to the left, thereby reducing the concentration and accumulation of game ball B on the right side of the lower tray 202 when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed. Furthermore, even if multiple game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c extends diagonally to form a gap between the rear end of the lower tray 202 and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which game balls B can flow. Therefore, game balls B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) toward the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided along the diagonally extending left side wall to the left side of the lower tray 202 and released, allowing game balls B to be properly stored throughout the entire lower tray 202.

This prevents the full tank detection sensor 154 from activating and reporting a full tank even when there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store the game balls B.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The dish base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a flat plate shape (a shallow box shape with an open rear) extending left and right across the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The dish unit base 211 is provided with an upper dish ball supply port 211a that penetrates from front to back near the upper left corner when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a speaker port 211b that penetrates from front to back below the upper dish ball supply port 211a and has a punched metal attached to the front, a lower dish ball supply port 211c that penetrates from front to back at the lower part toward the left of the center when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a notch 211d that is cut out in the right wall of the part that extends cylindrically to the rear of the lower dish ball supply port 211c to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and an upper dish ball delivery port (not shown) that penetrates from front to front on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front and extends vertically, with the upper part located at the right end of the upper dish main body 212.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. This allows the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 to be supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and a cylindrical rear end that penetrates the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is connected to the cutout portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222, the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the upper tray ball supply port, the entrance 141a and ball removal port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, the ball supply guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240, and the cutout portion 211d.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the upper tray ball supply port is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is supplied from the ball receiving port of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball supply guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray body 212 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and cooperates with the tray unit base 211 to form the upper tray 201. The upper tray body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. The upper tray body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper tray body 212 retreats backward from the most forward bulging part toward the right side when viewed from the front, and the depth in the front-to-rear direction is formed to a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper tray body 212 near the right end is closed.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the section that is closed at the top near the right end is attached so that it fits under the ball lending operation unit 220. In addition, the upper tray body 212 has a performance operation unit attachment section 212a formed in the middle of the upper part in the left-right direction, and a part of the performance operation unit 300 is attached to this performance operation unit attachment section 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is intended to relay the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the dish left decorative board 273, dish right decorative board 278, and operation unit relay board 332. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner of the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface of this dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the tray base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 is for discharging game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, lending a predetermined number of game balls B to the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, displaying the remaining amount of cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, returning the cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine minus the amount of the lent game balls B, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 comprises a base section 221 attached to the upper front part of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray ball removal button 222 located near the left end of the top surface of the base section 221, a translucent disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 located to the right of the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the top surface of the base section 221, a ball lending button 224 located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, a return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display section 226 located on the lower rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, a volume adjustment button 227 located in front of the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221, and a light intensity adjustment button 228 located to the left of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper tray ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the top surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when the player presses it. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, with the character "ball" (ball) printed on the top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display portion 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen by the player through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 when illuminated.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. In addition, when cash or a prepaid card with a remaining balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is returned minus the amount of the lent game balls B. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. In addition, the ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume adjustment button 227 is for adjusting the volume of music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This volume adjustment button 227 is shaped like a gourd, with two circles combined. The volume adjustment button 227 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and the area between the two circles has a design that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume adjustment button 227 is shaped so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this volume adjustment button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light intensity of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. This light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped like a gourd with two circles combined. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and there is an image of a light bulb between the two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this light intensity adjustment button 228 makes it brighter, and pressing the "-" side makes it darker.

The volume control button 227 and the light control button 228 are different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light control button 228 is black) to prevent players from confusing them.

When adjusting the volume or light intensity using the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301, when a player-participation performance that requires the operation of the performance operation unit 301 is not being performed, the performance operation unit 301 is operated appropriately to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume or light intensity, etc. on the performance display device 1600, and an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation unit 302 is operated to change the volume or brightness of the light intensity, etc., which takes time and effort to adjust the volume or light intensity. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated to directly adjust the volume and light intensity, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that simplifies the effort required for adjusting the volume and light intensity and allows adjustments to be made in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Upper tray ball removal unit]
The upper tray pre-ball removal unit and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 49. The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball delivery unit 140 to discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 comprises a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball supply port from the rear, an upper tray ball removal slider 242 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be able to slide vertically, a spring (not shown) that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 is equipped with a ball receiving opening (not shown) that protrudes upward from the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens toward the front, through which the game ball B can pass, a ball feed guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the ball receiving opening downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then backward, and a ball removal guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from a position lower than the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it to the right when viewed from behind.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the ball receiving port is formed at the downstream end (right end when viewed from the front) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper tray 201, in a position that opens forward through the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit base 211. When assembled to the door frame 3, the ball supply guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part. This allows the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 to enter the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball supply guide path 241b.

The left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c protrudes further to the right as viewed from the rear than the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, is inclined so that the right end as viewed from the rear is lower, and opens to the right side as viewed from the rear. The rear side of the left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guideway 241b is located in front of the ball removal opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and is formed so that the right end as viewed from the rear of the portion extending left and right is connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c in the tray unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is released into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball ejection guide path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

The upper plate ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is equipped with an actuation receiving part (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and an actuation transmission part 242b that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the actuation receiving part. The actuation receiving part has a flat upper surface. The actuation transmission part 242b is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned downward as it moves rearward, and its lower surface extends horizontally to connect with the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation receiving part protrudes forward through the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222 abuts against the upper surface of the actuation receiving part. In addition, when the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 abuts against the upper surface.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper tray ball removal slider 242, and biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper end of its movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, and positions the upper tray ball removal button 222 at its upper end of movement via the actuation receiving part of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. In addition, because the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, the actuation rod 143c abutting the upper surface of the actuation transmission part 242b is prevented from moving downward, and the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the game ball B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port can be sent from the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144 through the ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the spring force, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward, and the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, can move downward, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight part 143d of the ball removal member 143, and the partition part 143a retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. As a result, the game ball B that entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening and the ball delivery guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball removal opening 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 141b passes through the ball discharge guide path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and is then released from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the spring force, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c abutting the operating transmission part 242b, so that the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, returning to the original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 can feed the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharge it to the lower tray 202.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 48. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and the performance operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left-right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 comprises a lower plate body 251 attached to the lower front part of the plate unit base 211 and working together with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, a plate unit body 252 attached to the front part of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the underside of the lower plate body 251, and a left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower dish body 251 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. The lower dish body 251 cooperates with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 to form the lower dish 202. The lower dish body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. This lower dish body 251 is attached to the left side of the center in the left and right direction at the bottom of the front of the dish unit base 211 so that the open rear is closed.

The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a generally rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the front end of the right end of the lower dish main body 251 when viewed from above. The bottom surface of the lower dish main body 251 is inclined so that it is lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

When the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and part of the bottom surface are covered by the dish unit body 252. Furthermore, when the lower dish body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located lower than the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. This allows the game balls B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges out so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the upper side, and bulges out so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the lower side. The dish unit main body 252 is also curved such that the top surface is lowest at the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The plate unit body 252 has upper side bulges 252a that bulge forward from both the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart on the left and right, and a lower front decorative part 252b that bulges forward on the left side of the center in the left-right direction at the bottom to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

The left and right upper side bulges 252a have a left plate decorative unit 270 and a right plate decorative unit 275 attached to their respective front faces.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates from front to back between the upper left side bulge 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower dish opening 252d is large enough for the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that it becomes wider from top to bottom as it moves to the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends from front to back by the lower dish main body 251 and the underside of the upper left side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a in the left-right center and is equipped with a performance operation unit mounting portion to which the performance operation unit 300 is attached. The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed with a width of approximately 1/3 of the left-right width of the dish unit main body 252.

When assembled to the dish unit 200, the dish unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210, with the speaker port 211b facing forward through the lower dish opening 252d.

[3-5d-3. Bottom tray ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball removal unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 27 and 50. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the underside of the lower tray body 251, and is for storing game balls B in the lower tray 202 and discharging game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is equipped with a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid 265 closes the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265, and game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In the normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower tray ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a opens, allowing the game ball B in the lower tray 202 to be ejected below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

When the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower tray ball removal button 263, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved position, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open position, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward and then release the pressure, and the lower tray ball removal cover 265 returns to its normal position, closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. This allows the game ball B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Left plate decorative unit and right plate decorative unit]
The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 in the dish decorative unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 48 etc. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are disposed at the upper part of the dish unit 200 and decorate both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300.

The left dish decorative unit 270 comprises a semi-cylindrical left dish decorative body 271 that extends left and right and is translucent, a left dish decorative lens 272 that is translucent and passes through the left dish decorative body 271, and a left dish decorative board 273 that is provided behind the left dish decorative lens 272 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the top of the upper left side bulge 252a. The left decorative body 271 is formed in a shape resembling a twisted semicylinder, with a semicircular arc that bulges forward and whose central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end and from left to right at the right end. This left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The left dish decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction, coinciding with the front surface of the left dish decorative body 271. The multiple LEDs mounted on the left dish decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the left dish decorative body 271.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left end of the left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the bottom end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the left decorative unit 270 does not have ribs along the length of the left decorative body 271, when the multiple LEDs on the left decorative board 273 are illuminated, the entire front of the left decorative body 271 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

The right-hand plate decorative unit 275 comprises a translucent right-hand plate decorative body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right, a translucent right-hand plate decorative lens 277 that passes through the right-hand plate decorative body 276, and a right-hand plate decorative board 278 that is provided behind the right-hand plate decorative lens 277 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The right plate decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the top of the upper right side bulge 252a. The right plate decorative body 276 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. This right plate decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right-hand decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right-hand decorative body 276, coinciding with the front surface of the right-hand decorative body 276. The multiple LEDs mounted on the right-hand decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the right-hand decorative body 276.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the right end of the plate right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have ribs in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the plate right decorative body 276, when the multiple LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 are illuminated, the entire front of the plate right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 protrude upward from the front end of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250, forming a step between the upper side bulge 252a and the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275. This allows the player to hook his/her fingers using the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a, and can be used as a finger rest when leveling the game balls B in the upper dish 201 or operating the performance operation unit 301 described later. In addition, the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a can prevent the game balls B on the upper side bulge 252a from leaking forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 52 to 56. Fig. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front below. Fig. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the upper end of the movement, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit has moved from the state of (a) to the upper position. Fig. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the lower end of the movement.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, and serves to decorate the plate unit 200. When a player-participation performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation unit 300 to participate in the performance. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a presentation operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The presentation operation section 301 is composed of a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch, and a pressure operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressing, and can accept operations by the player and move (vibrate) the presentation operation section 301, allowing the player to participate not only in the operation of shooting the game ball B, but also in the presentation during the game. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 provided above the pressing operation section 303. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 the outer diameter of the presentation operation unit 300.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a spherical performance operation cover unit 310 that is provided on the front of the dish unit 200 in the center of the left-right direction, an operation unit base 315 to which the performance operation cover unit 310 is attached on the outside and which is attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, a performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 that is provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and is equipped with multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the performance operation cover unit 310 (unit upper cover 312), an outer peripheral board cover 325 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and an operation unit relay board unit 330 that is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit 350 having a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the performance operation unit 350, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit 350 is arranged so that it can advance and retreat upward from the top surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the performance operation unit 300 (the periphery of the performance operation unit 350) at the center of the left-right direction of the dish unit 200.

The performance operation unit cover unit 310 comprises a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upward and backward, and a circular unit upper cover 312 that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and has an insertion opening 312a through which the performance operation unit 301 is inserted. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and bottom of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 has an outer surface that is formed in a roughly spherical shape. Incidentally, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 in this embodiment is spherical in shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it moves upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of approximately 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 becomes the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is approximately 1/2 the overall width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the unit top cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be illuminated and decorated by the illumination of multiple LEDs on the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 described below.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes further forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is also connected so that the left tray decorative body 271 and the right tray decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit bottom cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration gives it a good appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper tray body 212 in the tray base unit 210. The front and bottom of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit bottom cover 311, and the top is covered by the unit top cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 comprises a main body 315a, which is a roughly cubic box-shaped body with an open top, and a flange 315b, which extends outward from the top end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. The main body 315a houses the performance operation unit 350. The main body 315a also has a pair of guide shafts 362 and the lower end of a central shaft 366 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 350, which will be described later, attached to its bottom wall. The main body 315a also rotatably supports the lower end of an adjustment screw 384 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of its bottom wall. Furthermore, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

The performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange portion 315b. In addition, a circular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is positioned approximately flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 includes a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315, an operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 so as to cover the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear.

The operation unit relay board 332 relays the connection between the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button middle decorative board 364, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the protruding force detection sensor 375, and the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit 350 is provided so as to face the outside from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303.

The performance operation unit 350 comprises a bottomed, cylindrical button body 351 with a closed top end, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the top of the button body 351, a cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted into the button body 351 from below, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the bottom end of the button sleeve 353 and supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a circular outer button decorative board 355 located above the button base 354 and with multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface.

The performance operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection sensor body 358 that is connected to the contact detection body 352 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is formed entirely transparent. The button body 351 has a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that curves to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end of the tubular portion 351b. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape that constitutes a part of a sphere having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape that is formed with a diameter of about 1/2 the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (tubular portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals around the circumference of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portions 351c are locked to the button base 354. In this embodiment, the button body 351 has a diameter of approximately 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference and is formed in a dish shape with a certain width inside bulging upward from the outer circumference. The contact detector 352 is formed below the circular decoration on the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, bulging obliquely upward and with a flat inner surface. This makes the contact detector 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat downward extension piece 352a that extends downward from both left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 relative to the entire area is suppressed by the multiple holes in the punching metal, preventing erroneous detection. In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, light from the LED 364a on the button interior decorative substrate 364 located below can be transmitted upward, allowing the center of the top surface 351a of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated in good condition.

The contact detector 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and to detect contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) with the top or side surface of the button main body 351. In other words, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a that extends vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b that extends outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed to be transparent throughout. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and its length is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 allows light from the multiple LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 to pass upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disk-shaped with a diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the bottom end of the button body 351 so as to close the open bottom end of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at positions symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a pair of guide pins 354c that protrude from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. The guide shafts 362 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough to allow the lifting cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are attached rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by a pressure detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. The button base 354 has the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 locked to its outer circumferential surface. The button base 354 is guided so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 being inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a. The button base 354 is also moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. The upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 abut against the bottom surface of the button base 354, and the button base is biased upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The button exterior decorative substrate 355 has multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface. The multiple LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on two concentric circles. In more detail, the multiple LEDs 355a are provided in a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and in a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 355a of the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the portion on the top surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side (circumferential surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to its rotation shaft, and can generate vibrations by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward movement direction of the performance operation unit 301. The vibration motor 356 is also provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation unit 301 (performance operation unit 350) in the up-down direction. This allows the vibrations from the vibration motor 356 to be transmitted well to the performance operation unit 301. The vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 can also reduce the impact on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor body 358 has a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, a constant voltage circuit that supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode inside. In addition, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor. In this embodiment, the contact detection sensor body 358 outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance, but it may also output a signal in multiple stages depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

In the present embodiment, the performance operation unit 350 is provided with a contact detector 352 on the underside of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, which is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358, and can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 through the contact detector 352. In addition, the contact detector 352 of the performance operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, so that it can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the side of the button body 351 with the performance operation unit 350 protruding upward. For this reason, the performance operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as a contact operation unit 302 with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

This performance operation unit 350 is supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310, making the performance operation unit 300 look like a single sphere. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and can function as the pressing operation unit 303 by pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In more detail, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the state where it has been moved to the lowest position (normal state), it will not move any further downward even if it is pressed, and it is in a state where pressing operations cannot be performed. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 leaves the pressing detection sensor 373 and becomes undetectable. Then, when the upper surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

In addition, the performance operation unit 350 covers the upper side of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, so that when operating the contact operation unit 302, the player touches the smooth, spherical upper surface of the button body 351, and the player does not directly touch the surface of the punched metal with the unevenness caused by the multiple holes, allowing the player to smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. In addition, because the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, it is possible to give the contact operation unit 302 any tactile sensation by forming fine unevenness or multiple streaks on the surface (top surface) of the button body 351, which increases the design freedom for the contact operation unit 302 and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players.

In the above, the button body 351 is transparent, but this is not limiting, and the button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through. This makes it difficult to see the contact detector 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, improving the appearance of the performance operation unit 350. Furthermore, if the button body 351 is opaque, it is preferable that it be translucent. This allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can be entertained by the illumination of the button body 351.

[3-5e-5. Performance operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315 and can lift and lower the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises a lifting mechanism base 361 having a roughly circular outer periphery and attached within the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the performance operation unit 350; a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 362 arranged symmetrically about the central axis of the lifting mechanism base 361, with their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and their upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354; a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer periphery smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353; and a button decorative board 364 attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of emitting light upward.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted, respectively, and which urge the button base 354 upward, and a central shaft 366 that passes vertically through the center of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the button base 354, with its lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and its upper end attached to the upper base 363.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 further comprises an operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to the underside of the lifting mechanism base 361 so that its rotation shaft protrudes upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 meshing with the lifting drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a lifting cam member 371, the lower end of which is connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the central shaft 366 is inserted through which the lifting cam member 371 is rotatably attached, and which lifts and lowers the button base 354 by rotating, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pressure detection sensor 373 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, a lifting detection sensor 374 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the performance operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 (lifting cam member 371), and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 to detect the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of through holes 361c penetrating the base body 361a and through which the lifting spring 365 can pass together with the pair of guide shafts 362. The base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315. The base body 361a has a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressing detection sensor 373, and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to its upper surface. The base body 361a also has an operation button lifting drive motor 367, a lifting detection sensor 374, and a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to its lower surface. The lower ends of the legs 361b of the lifting mechanism base 361 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. This forms a space in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is disposed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a forward and backward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed from metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. By abutting the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 against the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The button middle decorative board 364 has multiple LEDs 364a mounted on its top surface that are full-color LEDs. The button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the center of the top surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 364a.

The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and each has a guide shaft 362 inserted therethrough. The lower ends of the pair of lift springs 365 abut against the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the upper ends abut against the button base 354.

The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the lifting/lowering cam member 371, and a lifting/lowering detection piece 370c that protrudes downward from the gear portion 370a in a cylindrical shape and has two opposing notches that are detected by the lifting/lowering detection sensor 374. The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The lifting cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The lifting cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372, and is provided between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The lifting cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer periphery and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending perpendicular to the axis near the bottom end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e extending upward in a spiral shape from the end of the first cam 371b opposite the second cam 371d (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and adjacent cam portions 371a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The lifting cam member 371 also has a connected portion 371f at its lower end that connects to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The lifting/lowering cam member 371 is formed so that the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the lifting/lowering cam member 371 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. By rotating, the lifting/lowering cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 with the cam portion 371a, and can raise and lower the button base 354 (performance operation unit 350) that is biased upward by the lifting spring 365.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lift spring 365 and the lift cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 also has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a location facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. By abutting the upper protrusion against the lower end of the lower protrusion of the upper base 363, the gear cover 372 can form a space between the upper base 363 and the lift mechanism base 361 that can accommodate the lift cam member 371.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressure operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the performance operation unit 350. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 from the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated, and this pressure detection sensor 373 becomes non-detecting. When the top surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of its travel against the force of the lift spring 365, the pressure detection sensor 373 detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 and can detect the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The lifting/lowering detection sensor 374 detects the lifting/lowering detection piece 370c of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the rotational position of the lifting/lowering cam member 371 via the connected part 371f connected to the connecting part 370b of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370.

The protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered via the button base 354 using a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and behind, and can urge the performance operation unit unit 350 upward via the button base 354 using a pair of lifting springs 365. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can raise and lower the performance operation unit unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the lifting cam member 371 using the operation button lifting drive motor 367. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can appropriately illuminate multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the button middle decorative board 364, thereby illuminating and decorating the central part of the upper surface of the button body 351.

In the normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engaging portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the lifting cam member 371 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 (see FIG. 55(a)). In this normal state, the performance operation unit 350 is located at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the performance operation unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Also, in the normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 are aligned, and the performance operation unit cover 310 and the button body 351 form a single sphere.

In the normal state (when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in a counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 rolls from the locking portion 371c to the left of the locking portion 371c on the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, so that the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 rises together with the guide pin 354c, and the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, so that the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, to which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. The amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded to the raised position with a protruding force according to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. In this state, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 abuts against the lower surface of the upper base 363, restricting further upward movement of the button base 354. Also, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire performance operation unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) moves upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351 protrudes upward beyond the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the force of the lifting spring 365, the performance operation unit 350 moves downward against the force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 moves to the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) also moves to the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 abuts against the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the pressure on the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit is detected.

To return the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. In FIG. 55(b), the third cam 371e that abuts against the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (towards the guide pin 354c). As a result, the third cam 371e presses the guide pin 354c downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the performance operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the thrust force adjustment drive motor 381 of the thrust force adjustment mechanism 380, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 is reduced (see FIG. 56). This weakens the force of the lift spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward, and the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also weakened, reducing the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371, and reducing damage (breakage) of the operation button lift drive motor 367. In addition, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used as the operation button lift drive motor 367.

When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the lift cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c rolls along the first cam 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c halfway along the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the upwardly recessed locking portion 371c by the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the operation button lift drive motor 367 is stopped, and the performance operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In the above, an example was described in which the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go. However, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 may rotate the lifting cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c moves upward along the third cam 371e due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. Then, when the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in a position halfway along the third cam 371e, the upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be stopped at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. Then, by protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

When the third cam 371e is used to protrude the button body 351 upward, it is desirable to move the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 downward to weaken the biasing force of the lift spring 365. This reduces the load on the rotation of the lift cam member 371 (operation button lift drive motor 367) and makes the button body 351 feel lighter when pressed.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371, so by varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 depending on the game status (for example, depending on the special lottery result that is drawn when game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be engaged may be provided midway on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be stably protruded to a position with the same protrusion amount, preventing variation in the amount of protrusion. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least at one location midway on the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c can be engaged in the recess, eliminating the need to keep the lifting cam member 371 stopped rotating by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and reducing the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is a lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward. By changing the amount of compression of the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303), the force (projecting force) with which the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) projects upward can be changed. The support 315 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 382 attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the underside of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383, and a screw portion 384b extending downward from the gear portion 384a in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery, an adjustment screw 384 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and a lifting spring lower holding member 385 meshed with the screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 pass and against which the lower ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 abut.

The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the underside of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the motor and the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft that protrudes into the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 is formed to a length that extends from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending forward and backward, a screw hole 385b that penetrates the center of the main body portion 385a vertically and screws into the screw portion 384b, spring holding recesses 385c that are provided at both the front and rear ends of the main body portion 385a and are recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the lift spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body portion 385a. The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 that penetrates each of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c at the center. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, by rotating the adjustment screw 384 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b.

In the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 increases. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 decreases (see FIG. 56). In other words, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 biasing the performance operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 biasing the performance operation unit 350 upward can be decreased. This allows the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 to adjust the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is raised to the highest position. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring 365 is in the state where the amount of compression is greatest. As a result, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, if the protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d, the upward movement of the lift spring lower holding member 385 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is stopped, thereby preventing further compression of the lift spring 365 and preventing damage to the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

As described above, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350, so that when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position and the contact detector 352 detects contact or approach of a detected object (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to the button body 351, and the performance operation unit lift mechanism 360 is used to protrude the performance operation unit 350 to abut against the detected object, the vertical position of the lift spring lower holding member 385 can be appropriately selected to vary the protruding force of the button body 351. This makes it possible to vary the strength of the force exerted on the player's finger, etc. when the button body 351 protrudes upward, so that when the button body 351 strongly abuts, the player can be made to think that something good is going to happen, and the player's expectations for the game can be increased. Therefore, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can make the protruding force of the button body 351 stronger or weaker depending on the game status (for example, depending on the special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004), thereby indicating to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is possible to change the biasing force by applying a twist to the spring. However, in order to protrude the performance operation unit 350, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the biasing force is changed by applying a twist to the compression coil spring, an excessive stress different from that in the original use acts on the compression coil spring, which may cause the internal structure to deteriorate early and be damaged. In contrast, in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 of this embodiment, the protruding force (biasing force) of the performance operation unit 350 is adjusted by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, so that excessive stress is not applied to the lifting spring 365, and the early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced, and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded stably for a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Function of the Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 57 and Fig. 58. Fig. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in a plan view of the performance operation unit seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. Fig. 58 (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the performance operation unit unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The contact operation unit 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 with the protruding direction of the pressing operation part 303 (performance operation part unit 350) that can protrude upward tilted so that the upper part is located forward with respect to the vertical direction. In other words, the center of the performance operation part 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300. This makes it easier for a player seated in front of this pachinko machine 1 to see the performance operation part 301.

In the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 has the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 coincides with the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. In addition, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 appears to the player as simply a spherical decorative object, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the performance operation unit 300 has the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 arranged under the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350), and the annular button outer decorative board 355 arranged inside the outer edge of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button middle decorative board 364 arranged further inside. The performance operation unit 300 is arranged outward from the button middle decorative board 364 in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. The button middle decorative board 364 and the LED 355a inside the button outer decorative board 355 are arranged under the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal and has translucency, so the light from them can be transmitted upward (to the player side) well.

The performance operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 with the LEDs 320a on the performance operation outer peripheral decorative board 320. In addition, the LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 can illuminate and decorate the periphery and outer peripheral surface of the top surface of the button body 351. Furthermore, the LEDs 364a on the button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the central part of the top surface of the button body 351.

The multiple LEDs 320a on the outer decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit, the multiple LEDs 355a on the outer decorative board 355 of the button, and the multiple LEDs 364a on the inner decorative board 364 of the button are each arranged in a row on the circumference, so that by sequentially emitting light in the circumferential direction, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, the multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged in a concentric circle, so that the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the presentation operation unit 300 is in a lowered position with the pressing operation unit 303 (presentation operation unit 350) flush with its upper surface against the surface of the unit upper cover 312. In this state, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 is not possible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can allow contact operations depending on the player participation type presentation being executed.

In the normal state where the pressing operation unit 303 (operation operation unit 350) is not protruding, the performance (player participation type performance) may be, for example, to display a performance image on the performance display device 1600 encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300, or to output voice or sound effects. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the performance proceeds to the next stage. When contact is detected, the button body 351 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 or the LED 364a on the button inner decorative board 364, so that the player can recognize that the touch operation has been accepted, and a feeling of operation of the touch operation unit 302 may be given. At this time, the light color, light emission brightness, light emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351 may be used to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game).

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or proximity) with the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. This provides a sense of operation to the contact operation unit 302, making the player more aware that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may be caused to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm, to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, in the normal presentation (player participation presentation), a presentation image encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the presentation operation unit 300 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output, and then when the contact detector 352 detects contact of the player (hand or fingers) with the top surface of the button body 351, the presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) to protrude upward (pop up) due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. In more detail, when the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 comes off the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b), and the force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351, pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 to vigorously protrude upward and reach the raised position (see FIG. 55(b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located significantly above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. And, by the button body 351 protruding upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Then, the presentation transitions to one in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed, and the player enjoys pressing the pressing operation unit 303. In more detail, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) moves downward, and the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the presentation is changed in response to the pressing operation, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation presentation.

During the above-mentioned performance, the protruding force (momentum) of the button body 351 may be increased or decreased by using the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the strength of the protruding force may suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game. In addition, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356.

In a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc. have approached within the movement range (protruding range) of the upwardly protruding button body 351. This causes the button body 351 to come into contact with the player's fingers, etc., causing an impact, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the protruding force can suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc., have approached within a predetermined distance of the protruding button body 351, outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward. This allows the wind pressure generated by the protruding button body 351 to hit the player's fingers, etc., surprising the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc., may suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruding upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detector 352. In this case, if the button body 351 is protruding with a strong protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes forcefully and generates a sound (protruding sound), so that the protruding sound can surprise the player. Also, if the button body 351 is protruding with a weak protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351, and the player can be surprised by the button body 351 protruding without his realizing it.

As an effect after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be weakened by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed in the same way as a general press button. Alternatively, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be increased by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player is forced to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

In addition, after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, a performance may be executed in which the protruding button body 351 is touched. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downward extension piece 352a that extends downward, the side of the button body 351 may be touched. At this time, it is also preferable to increase the biasing force of the lift spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move and the button body 351 (touch operation unit 302) can be easily touched.

In the above, an example of the effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350 is shown in which the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise using the operation button lifting drive motor 367, moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go, but this is not limiting.

For example, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 can be rotated clockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to move the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 can be stopped midway through the third cam 371e, so that the button body 351 stops protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even if the third cam 371e of the lift-down cam member 371 causes the button body 351 to protrude partway, the button body 351 can be pressed and can function as the pressing operation unit 303, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation type presentation. In this case, the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes upward can be varied depending on the rotational position of the lift-down cam member 371, so that the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested depending on the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes, entertaining the player.

Furthermore, as a performance in which the protruding performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the performance operation unit 350 is protruding, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to minimize the compression of the lift spring 365. As a result, the force of the lift spring 365 is in the weakest state, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation and making the pressing operation enjoyable. Also, as a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the lift spring lower holding member 385 may be placed in an appropriate position in the vertical direction to set the force of the lift spring 365 to any strength between the strongest and the weakest, depending on the special lottery result. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 firmly or lightly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and a wider variety of performances can be presented, making it less likely that the player will become bored.

In addition, as a presentation using the presentation operation unit 300, multiple threshold levels may be set according to the capacitance of the contact detector 352 so that contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stages), and the presentation may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers, etc. approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), multiple threshold levels may be set for the magnitude of the capacitance to detect it in multiple stages and to use it in the presentation. Specifically, for example, by dividing the stage into a stage where the player's fingers are more than a predetermined distance away from the button body 351, a stage where the player's fingers are not touching the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, and a stage where the player's fingers are touching the button body 351, and changing the presentation according to each stage, it is possible to present a variety of presentations to the player with just one contact detection sensor body 358, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the normal state of the performance operation unit 300 is shown in FIG. 55(a) with the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved upward. However, this is not limited to this, and the performance operation unit 350 may be in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved downward as shown in FIG. 56(a). As a result, in the normal state, the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed, so that early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. In addition, the biasing force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lift spring lower holding member 385.

In this way, the presentation operation unit 300 of this embodiment can be used for various patterns of player participation presentations, allowing players to enjoy a wide variety of presentations, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

The performance operation unit 300 has a circular (two arcs combined) performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 on the top of the spherical performance operation unit cover unit 310, and a contact detection sensor body 358 is provided on the performance operation unit unit 350, which rises and falls inside the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. In addition, a button middle decorative board 364, which is fixed in position, is provided inside the button sleeve 353 of the performance operation unit 350. This contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, so when the performance operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode) approaches the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, which may cause the contact detection sensor body 358 to make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield (e.g., punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) connected to ground (GND) may be provided between the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button middle decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 or the button middle decorative board 364 changes by moving the performance operation unit unit 350 up and down, the shield connected to ground (GND) does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 or the button middle decorative board 364, and can reduce the effect of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 or the button middle decorative board 364, and can prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, the plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 59 to 61. Fig. 59 is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. Fig. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, and the performance operation unit of the plate unit are made movable in the forward and backward directions and the contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the performance operation unit. Fig. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detection body having decorative properties, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing another embodiment of the performance operation unit. Note that in Figs. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are given the same reference numerals.

59, the contact detector 352 is divided into a left contact detector 390L and a right contact detector 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the left contact detector 391L and the right contact detector 390R are connected to the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when a player moves his/her finger from the left side to the right side on the upper surface of the button body 351, when the player's finger is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L changes and the left contact detector 391L becomes detected, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R does not change and the right contact detector 391R remains undetected. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R changes, causing both the left contact detector body 391L and the right contact detector body 391R to detect. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L returns to its original state, causing the left contact detector body 391L to become undetectable, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R changes, causing the right contact detector body 391R to remain detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. can be detected by the combination of detection/non-detection by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R and the pattern of changes. This makes it possible to detect a wider variety of contact operations, and to present the player with a player-participation presentation that allows a wider variety of contact operations to be performed on the contact operation unit 302, while also making the player-participation presentation of operating the contact operation unit 302 even more enjoyable. Furthermore, by adding more contact detection bodies, it becomes possible to detect even more complex movements.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which multiple contact detectors 393 are connected to one contact detector sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with multiple contact detectors 393 provided at multiple different locations, one contact detector sensor main body 392 can detect contact with a human body or the like at any of the contact detectors 393.

For example, by distributing multiple contact detectors 393 on the inside (underside) of the button body 351, when the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, the contact can be detected by any of the contact detectors 393, thereby improving the detection accuracy of contact with the contact operation unit 302.

In addition, multiple contact detectors 393 may be provided in areas of the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player (for example, areas where the player may be injured, areas where other players may be inconvenienced, areas where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a warning or alert may be issued.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is an example in which a switching unit 394 is provided between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and multiple contact detection bodies 393, which connects only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 switches the connection to one of the multiple contact detection bodies 352, making it possible to detect contact with a human body or the like only at the desired location (contact detection body 352). Examples of the switching unit 394 include "one that switches using a switching circuit using a relay or transistor," "one that switches using other electronic circuits," and "one that switches in response to the movement of a movable member (for example, the movable left plate decoration unit 270, right plate decoration unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 as shown in FIG. 60(c))."

For example, in the presentation operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), multiple contact detectors 393 may be distributed and when a player participation type presentation is performed in which the player touches the parts detected by each contact detector 393 in order, the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 may be switched in the touch order by the switching unit 394 to detect whether the player's fingers or the like have made contact with the contact detector 393. This makes it possible to present the player with a highly game-like player participation type presentation using multiple contact detectors 393, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60(c), if the left plate decorative unit 270, the right plate decorative unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300 are made capable of moving forward and backward, a first contact detector 393a may be provided on the front side of the performance operation unit 300, and a second contact detector 393b may be provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative unit 270, the right plate decorative unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300, and when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be protruded forward, the first contact detector 393a may be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, and when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be retreated, the switching unit 394 may be switched to connect the second contact detector 393b to the contact detection sensor main body 392.

As a result, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is protruded (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects contact or approach of the player and stops the forward movement of the performance operation unit 300 etc. This makes it possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 etc. from unnecessarily pressing against the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and if the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved back to the initial position with the player's fingers etc. inserted in the gap, the player's fingers etc. may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. that has been moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's fingers etc., the performance operation unit 300 etc. is stopped from moving backward, and the player is notified of the instruction to remove the fingers etc. from the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved backward only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is returned to the initial state. This prevents players from being injured by gaps behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and improves the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the contact detector 395 that detects contact with the player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to provide decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may be a circle, a polygon, a geometric pattern, a shape imitating a specific character, a shape imitating a specific item, a shape imitating a specific logo, a picture frame, or the like. As a result, the contact detector 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and therefore the pachinko machine 1, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, while the above embodiment shows the contact detector 352 formed from punched metal, this is not limited to this, and the contact detector may be formed from metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It is preferable that the contact detector is provided on the back side of a transparent surface member so that it is not directly touched by the player's fingers, etc. This prevents wear on the contact detector and also makes the surface member smooth to the touch.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a button-inside decorative board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detector 352, but this is not limited to the above. As shown in FIG. 61(b), a contact detector 397 may be provided below a transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below that. This allows the decorative body 398 to be visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, thereby enhancing the decorativeness of the performance operation unit on which the surface member 396 is provided, and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detector 397 is formed by metal deposition, and under normal conditions, the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 makes the decorative body 398 below it invisible. However, when contact with the surface member 396 is detected, the decorative body 398 is illuminated by an LED provided below the contact detector 397, so that the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397.

The contact detector 352 may be formed so as to be unnoticeable to the player. Examples of unnoticeable contact detectors include "those formed from transparent materials" and "those formed so as to be seen as one with the decoration of the surface member of the button body, etc." As a result, the performance operation unit 301 in which the contact detector 352 is provided cannot recognize the contact detector 352, and the player is given the illusion that the contact detector 352 does not detect or operate the contact of fingers, etc. For example, when a predetermined player participation performance is executed and the player's fingers, etc., contact or approach the button body 351, the performance operation unit lift mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 to protrude upward, and the player is first aware of the presence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302), which greatly surprises the player and entertains the player, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 62 to 65. Figure 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line U-U in Figure 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 comprises a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and having a plurality of first LEDs 422a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and having a plurality of first LEDs 423a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface. The door frame includes a lower left side decorative board 423 attached to the left side of the door frame, an upper left side reflector 424 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower left side reflector 425 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a left side decorative body 426 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front sides of the upper left side reflector 424 and the lower left side reflector 425.

The door frame left side unit 420 also includes an upper left side light guiding member 427 that guides light forward from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a middle left side light guiding member 428 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a that is above the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a lower left side light guiding member 429 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a that is below the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, multiple first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 422b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned, between the first LEDs 422a. In addition, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 422c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b.

This door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with a total of 12 full-color LEDs, including four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 422b. At least the second LEDs 422b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 422 on the upper left side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets, the top two, the third to fifth three from the top, and the sixth to eighth three from the top. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the two sets of four first LEDs 422a and the three sets of eight second LEDs 422b with three systems per set, for a total of 15 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 422c of this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, with the right side formed unevenly. On the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, multiple first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 423b are mounted two by two, vertically lined up between the first LEDs 423a. In addition, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 423c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b.

This door frame lower left side decorative board 423 is equipped with a total of 18 full color LEDs, including six first LEDs 423a and twelve second LEDs 423b. The first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LEDs 423b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Fig. 72, in the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups: the first to third three from the top, the fourth to sixth three from the top, the seventh to ninth three from the top, and the tenth to twelfth three from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the three groups of six first LEDs 423a and the four groups of twelve second LEDs 423b with three systems per group, for a total of 21 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 423c of this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The upper left side reflector 424 has a through hole 424a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 424b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 422a. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 424a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 422b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 424b of the upper left side reflector 424 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 described later in a straight line in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the retaining tube 424b, the light from the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame that is exposed from the through holes 424a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides to the light guide shaft 427a, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from being cast on the back side of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame.

The upper left side reflector 424 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and a cylindrical retaining tube 425b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 423a. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 425a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 423b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 is inserted with the cylindrical light guide shaft 428a of the left-side middle light guide member 428 and the cylindrical light guide shaft 429a of the left-side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, and holds the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, which protrude forward through the retaining tube 425b, the light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 facing through the through holes 425a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being cast on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semitubular shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decorative body 426 has multiple openings 426a that penetrate forward and backward at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The multiple openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted from the rear into these openings 426a. This door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative part 426b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 426a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 427a extending forward and backward, and a runner 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 427a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided at regular intervals up and down to correspond to the four retaining tubes 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. The light guide shafts 427a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 424b. Each light guide shaft 427a penetrates the retaining tube 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the left-side door frame decoration 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the left-side door frame decoration 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide light from the first LED 422a on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward using the light guide shaft 427a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left side center light guide member 428 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 428a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 428a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided at regular intervals vertically to correspond to the upper three retaining tubes 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shafts 428a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light guide shaft 428a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left side center light guide member 428 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame forward through the light guide shaft 428a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the left side door frame decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 429a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 429a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are provided at regular intervals vertically to correspond to the three retaining tubes 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shafts 429a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light guide shaft 429a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left-side lower light-guiding member 429 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the left-side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame forward through the light-guiding shaft 429a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side unit 420 has the circular or radial patterned parts of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts of the handle cover 295, and the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the handle cover 295.

In this embodiment, the portion of the door frame left side unit 420 above the center in the vertical direction protrudes slightly forward more than the portion below, and the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of this door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end is located below the door window 101a and above the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, making it look like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded in it.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and is irradiated onto the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 toward the rear, can be guided (guided) forward by the light guiding shaft 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the light guiding shaft 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, so that the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated in a spot-like manner more brightly than other areas.

In addition, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428 and the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429 are arranged in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an even amount of light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b on both sides, so even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected from behind onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated and decorated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative part 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 426b is located at the location where the shadows are projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 66 to 70. Figure 66(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E in Figure 66(a). Figure 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The right-side door frame unit 430 includes a right-side door frame base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, an upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 432a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 433a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a right-side door frame reflector 434 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front sides of the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433, and a right-side door frame decorative body 435 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right-side door frame reflector 434.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 is equipped with an upper right side light guiding member 436 that guides light forward from the first LED 423a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and a lower right side light guiding member 437 that guides light forward from the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is provided with: a door frame right side left side decorative body 438 that is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 438a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape; a right side left lens 439 that is provided between the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 439a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438; a door frame right side right side decorative body 440 that is attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape; and a right side right lens 441 that is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 441a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a generally constant width on both sides. The rear end of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over its entire height, and the front end extends downward from the top end in a generally straight line to near the center in the vertical direction, where it curves rearward and extends diagonally backward, then curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a number of reflector parts 431a recessed from the left and right side sides and extending forward to the front end at the height where the decorative hole 438a of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) are provided. These reflector parts 431a have their rear ends inclined toward the side faces, which are inside the decorative parts 439a and 441a, and their bottom surfaces are curved.

The door frame right side base 431 has a reflector portion 431a that corresponds to the decorative hole 438a and decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) provided rearward of the center in the fore-and-aft direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the front portion excluding the portion inside the decorative portion 439a and decorative portion 441a penetrates in the left-right direction (it is recessed from the left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the door frame right side base 431 reflect the light irradiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, described below, in the left and right directions, causing the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 to emit light and be decorated (see Figure 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 432b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 432a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 432d with a unique address for illuminating the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c.

This door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is equipped with a total of 16 full-color LEDs: four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. The first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 432b. At least the second LED 432b and third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets, the top two, the three from the third to fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to eighth from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two.

The door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so that each of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 21 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 432d of the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, so in addition to the 21 systems mentioned above, it controls a total of 24 systems, including the upper set of three third LEDs 433c, which are divided into two sets on the door frame lower right side decorative board 433, which will be described later.

Although not shown in the figure, a wiring cable consisting of four wires is connected to this decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame. The wiring cable consists of two power lines (one of which is an earth line) that supply power to drive the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, the two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the LED driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 432d on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via a control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in response to that command, cause the four first LEDs 432a divided into two groups, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three groups, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the two groups on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light of the appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 433b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 433a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for illuminating the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c.

This door frame lower right side decorative board 433 is equipped with a total of 22 full-color LEDs: six first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c. The first LED 433a, which has second LEDs 433b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 433b. At least the second LED 433b and third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top. The twelve second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups: the first to third LEDs from the top, three from the fourth to sixth LEDs from the top, three from the seventh to ninth LEDs from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth LEDs from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c, so that each of the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 27 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can only control a maximum of 24 systems, so in the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the upper set of three systems of the third LED 433c, which is divided into two sets, is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front first LED 433a and second LED 433b, and the lower two of the rear third LED 433c) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. This helps prevent an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the LED driver 433d of this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the two groups emit light with appropriate colors and intensities for each group in response to the command.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and has a cylindrical retaining tube 434b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts against the front of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 434a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b to be diffused widely forward.

The holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 holds the light guide shaft 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 (described later) straight in the front-rear direction by inserting them. This holding tube 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that protrude forward through the retaining tube 434b, the light from the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 that are exposed through the through holes 434a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being cast on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side reflector 434 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a for mounting to the door frame right side base 431. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has multiple openings 435a that penetrate forward and backward at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The multiple openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted from the rear into these openings 435a. This door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative part 435b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 435a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 436a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided at regular intervals from the top of the right-side reflector 434 to correspond to the four retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 436a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tube 434b. Each light guide shaft 436a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right-side decorative body 435. This right-side upper light-guiding member 436 can guide light from the first LED 432a on the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 forward through the light-guiding shaft 436a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The right side lower light guide member 437 has six cylindrical light guide shafts 437a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a, and is made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided at regular intervals from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 to correspond to the six retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 437a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 434b. Each light guide shaft 437a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. This right-side lower light-guiding member 437 can guide light from the first LED 433a on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 forward through the light-guiding shaft 437a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape whose front end side follows the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns that appear on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface of the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438, and has a decorative part 439a that protrudes to the left and fits into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438 from the inside (right side). When fitted into the decorative hole 438a, the surface of the decorative part 439a matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438 (see Figure 70). This right-side left lens 439 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438. The decorative part 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right-side base 431, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433.

The right side left lens 439 is also formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 439a exposed through the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 looks the same as the radial pattern part molded in two colors in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate in the left-right direction in a specific shape (radial pattern shape). The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical part having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is approximately the same as the overall height of the door frame 3. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a shape that follows the rear end of the right side decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame, from the top end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and has a decorative part 441a that protrudes to the right and fits into the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame from the inside (left side). When fitted into the decorative hole 440a, the surface of the decorative part 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (see Figure 70). This right lens 441 on the right side is made of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative part 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side is located to the right of the reflector part 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 441a exposed through the decorative hole 440a on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame looks the same as the part with the radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 441a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In this embodiment, the door frame right side unit 430 has the circular or radial patterned parts on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are formed in the same color as the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the portion of the right door frame unit 430 above the center in the vertical direction protrudes further forward than the portion of the left door frame unit 420 on the opposite side at the same height. This right door frame unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from its top end to its bottom end. The upper portion of the right door frame unit 430 is located on the outer right side of the door frame top unit 450.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 appears to have a cylindrical fluorescent lamp embedded in it.

The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes forward from the top to about half its height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side of the island equipment in the gaming hall to see inside the door window 101a (play area 5a). Therefore, because the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it can block the line of sight of nearby players, making it difficult for other players to see the entire play area 5a, and by making it difficult for players to feel like they are being watched by other players, other players can play without feeling embarrassed.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and is irradiated onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, allowing the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

The door frame right side unit 430 also guides (guides) light forward from the first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 toward the rear, by the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436 and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to emit light in a spot-like manner that is brighter than other areas.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 can illuminate the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and can illuminate and decorate the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted in the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 fitted in the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 through the reflector part 431a of the door frame right side base 431. In addition, since it is possible to illuminate and decorate a part of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a), it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 stand out to other players, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 at the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the rear side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 435 behind the door frame right side decorative body 435. 8 and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated, so that the presence of the upper decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame can prevent the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b from illuminating the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side, and from illuminating the right side decoration 435 on the front side of the door frame. This allows the right side decoration 435 of the door frame and the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side to be illuminated and decorated completely independently, so that a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can present a more effective illumination performance to the player.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 has the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, located in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b on both sides, so that even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected from behind onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated in a uniform, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is configured so that the door frame right side decorative body 435 has a decorative part 435b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 435a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 435b is located at the part where the shadow is projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be improved.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the left and right side units 420, 430.

The door frame top unit 450 comprises a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a top upper cover 452 that is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 that is attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 to the lower end of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top central decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, a door frame top left decorative board 456 that is attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers (not shown) provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers, a top lower cover 465 attached to the underside of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front of the door frame top base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with a length that is approximately the same as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is cut out significantly from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by the door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. In a plan view, the door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top upper cover 452. The door frame top decorative body 453 is also formed with a semicircular arc on the front side so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semitube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has multiple LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decorative board 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has multiple LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has multiple LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are spaced apart on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency range. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters that output high-frequency sounds such as voice and music.

The top bottom cover 465 is made of a punched metal plate with numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is emitted forward and downward through the top bottom cover 465.

The door frame top relay board is intended to relay the connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the top center speaker, and the top side speaker and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452, and its front end is engaged with the top upper cover 452 and its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that both the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a position rearward of the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame top unit 450 can also output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 28 and Figure 71. Figure 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer as it is in (a). As shown in the figures, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has its outer periphery surrounded by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the unit top cover 312 and button body 351 of the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, the upper left door frame decorative board 422 and the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457 are arranged behind or below the left dish decorative body 271, the right dish decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the left door frame decorative body 426, the right door frame decorative body 435, and the top door frame decorative body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs of these decorative boards, it is possible to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to show the player an illuminated performance as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

A spherical performance operation unit 300 with a diameter larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201 is attached to the left-to-right center of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. This increases the visual impact of the large spherical performance operation unit 300 being located in the center of the tray unit 200, and makes the performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302 and pressing operation section 303) of the performance operation unit 300 stand out.

In addition, in the normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 serving as the performance operation unit 301 is flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form a single sphere, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a giant sphere makes it possible for the player to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, strongly attracting the player's interest and increasing the appeal to the player, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, the center (centre) of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300, so that the top surface of the performance operation section 301 (the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for a player who recognizes that the giant sphere located in the center of the dish unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entirety of the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, making the performance operation section 301 appear larger. In addition, the player can be made to strongly desire to operate the giant spherical presentation operation unit 301, which can heighten the player's anticipation for the execution of a player-participation type presentation in which the player operates the presentation operation unit 301, and when a player-participation type presentation is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the presentation operation unit 301, which can allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation by operating the presentation operation unit 301, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Next, as shown in Figures 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 in this embodiment has multiple circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In Figure 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example of part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the exterior surface of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding using two types of synthetic resin with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns are formed by part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in Figure 71 (a), if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the honeycomb pattern of the inner layer 3a will be visible in the circular pattern areas, and the opaque outer layer 3b will be visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior appearance that emphasizes the circular and radial patterns.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 71 (b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns become relatively difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, the decorative part 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which is molded in two colors as part of the exterior, is a part of the right lens 441 on the right side and is a separate member from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, so even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the main components that make up the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, so by appropriately selecting and combining the colors and light transmittance of the materials (synthetic resins) used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, the appearance can be greatly changed without changing the shape.

Therefore, for example, when making minor changes, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a is visible.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b can be changed for each production lot, and different lots of pachinko machines 1 can be shipped to the same gaming hall and installed in the island equipment, giving them a colorful feel and increasing their appeal to players.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but this is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may also be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, a two-color molded right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is combined with a right lens 441 on the right side to form the exterior, but three-color molding may be used in which the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame and the right lens 441 on the right side are integrally formed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, circular and radial patterns are shown, but this is not limited to this and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative bodies such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are provided on the outside of the door window 101a through which the play area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward, are two-color molded (multi-color molded) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot decoration is applied by this two-color molding. Therefore, the decorative body is formed into the desired shape and the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so there is no need to form the decorative body into the desired shape and then apply the desired decoration by painting, etc., as with the decorative bodies of conventional pachinko machines, and this eliminates the effort required for decoration and suppresses increases in costs.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (outer appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. In detail, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle are formed with the same color but with different light transmittance, the polka dot circle becomes difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are the same color, and the appearance looks as if the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle is pink, the polka dot circle becomes clearly visible due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the appearance looks like a white polka dot decoration on a pink background. In this way, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the cost of changing the appearance can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used. Therefore, if the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each production lot and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same gaming hall and installed in a row in the island equipment, the island equipment can be made to have a colorful feel, which can make a strong impact on players wandering around the gaming hall, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract players can be provided.

In addition, the handle cover 295, which has decorations molded in two colors from multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, the left side base 421 of the door frame, the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame, and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are provided on the outer side of the door window 101a, which faces forward into the play area 5a of the door frame 3, so that the outside of the door window 101a can be decorated with these decorations to improve its appearance.

In addition, the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In comparison, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) made up of the inner layer 3a become clearly visible, making the decoration clearly visible.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen through from the outside, and when changing the model, a synthetic resin with a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through, which can greatly change the way the decoration of the decorative body is viewed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

As described above, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a. Therefore, a pattern (a pattern based on the shape, or a pattern based on painting, printing, sticker application, etc.) can be applied to the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance, making it impossible for the pattern of the inner layer 3a to be seen through the outer layer 3b. When a model change is made, a transparent synthetic resin can be used for the outer layer 3b, allowing the pattern of the inner layer 3a to be seen through. This allows the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body to be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body, and prevents increases in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame that can emit light are provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the others, so that the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated. This allows the inner layer 3a (polka dot area) of the decorations formed on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame to be brightly illuminated, and by illuminating the outside of the door window 101a overlooking the play area 5a, it is possible to improve the appearance and allow the player to enjoy the illuminated decorations of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be illuminated and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that is irradiated onto the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a, so that the entire left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame can be illuminated and decorated, making the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame look beautiful and creating a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

As described above, the decorations of the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are formed by two-color molding (multicolor molding) of multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, so that the decorations visible when the LEDs (light-emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are not lit can be made different from the decorations visible when the LEDs are lit, depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resins used, and the change in decoration can strongly attract the interest of the player. In more detail, for example, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the part of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, only the part exposed to the surface of the inner layer 3a can be seen when the LEDs are not lit. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the shape of the hole in the inner layer 3a is visible on the surface of the outer layer 3b, and the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the hole are visible, and a different decoration is seen when the LED is not illuminated. Alternatively, for example, if the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is illuminated in yellow, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated in green (or white), both the portion of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the outer layer 3b on the surface are illuminated, so that the portion of the decorative body that is illuminated can be changed depending on the color of the light emitted by the LED, and the decoration that is illuminated can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the illumination of the LED, which strongly attracts the interest of the player and entertains the player. Furthermore, by making the LEDs light up depending on the game status, the changes in the decoration of the ornamental body can suggest to the player the arrival of an opportunity or a change in the hitting operation (for example, "hit to the right"), etc., providing a pachinko machine 1 that allows for a variety of presentations.

In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (play area 5a), have different amounts of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction, so that the impression (appearance) of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the left front and the right front can be made to differ. Therefore, even if a player wanders around the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when he approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the other side, the appearance will be different from when he last wandered around, attracting the interest of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of attracting players wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine 1 to play.

[3-10. LED placement and system on door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 72 and Fig. 73. Fig. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and Fig. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the part of the performance operation unit of the door frame. As shown in Fig. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which the player rotates to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5. This handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile.

The front side of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 is covered by the handle front lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 with multiple LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. In addition, a handle cover decoration board 293 with multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) mounted in triple concentric circles: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the outer periphery. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, and two at the top left of the outer periphery, two at the top right of the outer periphery, and two at the bottom of the outer periphery, all connected by dashed lines. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by an LED driver 184b in 15 systems, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit full color light of the appropriate color.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, with two at the bottom left, two on the left, two at the top left, two at the top right, two on the right, and two at the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 systems, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

In this way, because the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, the player can see light-emitting effects such as light rotating around the handle 195, light-emitting effects concentrating toward the center of the handle 195, and light-emitting effects spreading toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 can be used to illuminate and decorate the outside and inside of the handle cover 295.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a roughly rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door window 101a of the door frame 3 is surrounded all around by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

As shown in Figure 72, in this door frame 3, the left decorative board 273 behind the left decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the right decorative board 278 behind the right decorative body 276, the upper left decorative board 422 and the lower left decorative board 423 behind the left side decorative body 426, the upper right decorative board 432 and the lower right decorative board 433 behind the right side decorative body 435, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left decorative board 456 and the top right decorative board 457 behind the top decorative body 453 are arranged facing forward.

In more detail, the left dish decorative board 273 is equipped with four LEDs 273a mounted on the front in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a on the right dish decorative board 278 described below. These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The right plate decorative board 278 is equipped with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front in a row running left to right. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled by the LED driver of the left plate decorative board 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in the full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 422b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 422a, and an LED driver 422c for illuminating the total of 12 first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of the top two, the three from the third to the fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to the eighth from the top, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is equipped with six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 423b mounted in pairs between the first LEDs 423a, and an LED driver 423c for emitting light from a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted on the front. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, two in each group from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups, three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, three from the seventh to ninth from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth from the top, as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b of each group can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 432b mounted on the front surface in a row between the first LEDs 432a, and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is also equipped with an LED driver 432d for emitting light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups, the top two, the third to fifth, and the sixth to eighth, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. The four third LEDs 432c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. The two groups of first LEDs 432a, the three groups of second LEDs 432b, the two groups of third LEDs 432c, and the upper group of the two groups of third LEDs 433c on the lower right side of the door frame are controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and third LEDs 433c can emit light in a full color of an appropriate color.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is equipped with six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 433b mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically aligned between the first LEDs 433a, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, and an LED driver 433d for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, and the two lower third LEDs 433c. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, two at a time from the top, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Also, the 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups, the first to third, the fourth to sixth, the seventh to ninth, and the tenth to twelfth, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72. Furthermore, the four rear third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72. The three groups of six first LEDs 433a, the four groups of twelve second LEDs 433b, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the two groups are controlled by the LED driver 433d in 24 systems, and the first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c in each group can emit light in a full color of appropriate colors.

In this embodiment, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame provided on the right side of the door window 101a are formed in an asymmetric shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the boundary. In addition, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 have different shapes in the front-to-back direction.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423, and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 have the same number of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b mounted on their respective front surfaces, and are arranged symmetrically (the systems connected by dashed lines and double-dashed lines in Figure 72). This makes it easy to create data for the lighting patterns of the LEDs to create light-emitting effects.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 is equipped with six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 455a, the LEDs 456a on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LEDs 457a on the door frame top right decorative board 457. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 has four LEDs 456a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The two sets of four LEDs 456a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 has four LEDs 457a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The two sets of four LEDs 457a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437 to the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated outward (forward). This allows the player to see a bright, dot-like light emission effect on the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, and the player can be taken aback by the dot-like, sparkling light emission effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the left dish decorative board 273, the LED 278a of the right dish decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the second LED 423b of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, the second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the LED 455a of the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, the LED 456a of the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and the LED 457a of the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame can be appropriately illuminated to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or the player can be shown an illuminated effect as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In other words, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72 can be used to create a lighting effect in which spots are emitted on the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the LED system connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 72 can be used to create a lighting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission).

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a, the light guiding shaft portion 428a, the light guiding shaft portion 429a, the light guiding shaft portion 436a, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated forward from there, so that the areas of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated with bright, high-intensity spot light compared to the general surfaces of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame. In this case, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are positioned outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, even if the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 are illuminated with high brightness, the glare does not make it difficult to see inside the game area 5a facing through the door window 101a, and the game ball B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the game area 5a can be clearly seen through the door window 101a.

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are protruded forward from the door window 101a (play area 5a), and the openings 426a and 435a that emit high-brightness spot light are provided at the ridges (on the vertical line connecting the front ends that protrude forward in an arc shape in a plan view) of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 that protrude forward, so the spot light is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the inside of the play area 5a behind the door window 101a is not difficult to see, and the high-brightness spot light can attract the attention of other players to this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the spot light emitting portion is provided on the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435, which protrude forward outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3, so that the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player will not block the spot light because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. As a result, when the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435 are made to emit spot light, the high-brightness spot light is visible to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, which can strongly attract the interest of players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing, capable of attracting players who are wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine to play.

In addition, it is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot-illuminating the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 belong to the same system. As a result, the surface LEDs on both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, and light guide shaft 437a) that guides the light of the spot LEDs are in the same lighting state, so that the same amount of light is irradiated from both sides of the light guide pin at the same time, making it even more difficult to see the shadow of the light guide pin on the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the touch operation section 302 in the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, and is equipped with a circular performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. This performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is equipped with two LED drivers for illuminating the 31 LEDs 320a. The performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321, six are spaced apart on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining nine are spaced apart on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative board 322 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322, four are provided on a circumference close to the inner circumference with twos spaced apart near both ends of the arc, three are provided on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences with threes spaced apart, and the remaining six are provided on a circumference close to the outer circumference with threes spaced apart near both ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321 are divided into 9 groups, as shown in Fig. 73, with the six on the inner circumference divided into three groups of two in the circumferential direction, the three on the middle circumference divided into three groups of one each, and the nine on the outer circumference divided into three groups of three in the circumferential direction. The 18 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322 are divided into 7 groups, as shown in Fig. 73, with the four on the inner circumference divided into two groups of two near both ends, the three on the middle circumference divided into three groups of one each, and the nine on the outer circumference divided into two groups of three near both ends. In other words, the 31 LEDs 320a on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by two LED drivers in 48 systems, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in the full range of appropriate colors.

With this decorative board 320 around the outer periphery of the effect operation unit, the 31 LEDs 320a (48 systems) can be appropriately illuminated to show the player light-emitting effects such as rotating light in the effect operation unit 301, light-emitting effects where light is concentrated in the center, and light-emitting effects where light spreads outward.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, a left-side door frame decorative body 426 of the left-side door frame unit 420 and a right-side door frame decorative body 435 of the right-side door frame unit 430 are provided on the outside of one side and the other side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, which extend up and down along the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction differs from each other. Behind each of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435, there is provided an upper left-side door frame decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted, a lower left-side door frame decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted, and A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted are provided. In addition, a light guide shaft portion 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428, a light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, a light guide shaft portion 429b of a right side upper light guide member 436, and a light guide shaft portion 436c of a left side upper light guide member 427 are provided, which guide the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and irradiate the light forward. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right-side lower light guide member 437 is provided, the first LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the door frame left-side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left-side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 can be illuminated to illuminate the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 in a planar light-emitting manner (surface illumination). 3a, when the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a are illuminated, the light irradiated forward is guided by the columnar light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a to the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and then radiated forward from their front ends (front end faces), allowing the areas corresponding to the tips of the light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated in a dot-like manner (spot illumination).

Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame which are provided outside the play area 5a (door window 101a) can be illuminated. The entire right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light emission, parts of the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with point-like light emission, or the entire left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light emission while parts of them can be decorated with point-like light emission, allowing players to see a variety of light-emitting effects, preventing players from getting bored and keeping them entertained, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this case, the system in which the multiple first LEDs 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are separated is symmetrical to the system in which the multiple first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are separated, and the multiple first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the multiple second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b are in different systems, so that the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b on the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 423b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side are in different systems. When creating data for the lighting patterns of D432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b, for example, it is possible to reuse data for the left door frame decoration 426 side as data for the right door frame decoration 435 side, or to make the data flow similar for the left door frame decoration 426 side and the right door frame decoration 435 side. This makes it possible to simplify the work required to create lighting pattern data, and makes it easier to build more complex lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). This allows players to see a variety of lighting patterns and a variety of lighting effects with high performance effects, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that can provide sufficient performance effects for the lighting effects in the left door frame decoration 426 and the right door frame decoration 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a.

In addition, the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged between the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a are in the same system, so the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged to sandwich the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) are always lit at the same time, so that the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are always lit at the same time. By irradiating light from both sides of the light axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a, the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a caused by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b become lighter and less visible, making it possible to make the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 less visible, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated and decorated in a uniform, planar manner.

The left door frame decoration 426 and the right door frame decoration 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a surface by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, can illuminate and decorate the areas corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a in a point-like manner by the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see illumination effects that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as surface illumination and partial point illumination, and can strongly attract the interest of players by illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, and can startle players by illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 on the other side (right side) are asymmetrical with respect to each other, so that the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the door frame upper right side decorative board 432, and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 can be distinguished at a glance, which makes it possible to avoid making mistakes when assembling the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the door frame upper right side decorative board 432, and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 during the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1, thereby improving the ease of assembly and suppressing increases in costs.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, the identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in this pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Fig. 74, using the door frame 3 as an example. Fig. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the following boards provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 are described in detail, taking as examples the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the upper left door frame decorative board 422, the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432, the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the top center door frame decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used for the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the non-white LED drivers and connection connectors that are mounted on the decorative board are mounted on the rear side of the board. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board to be reflected forward, making the front decorations more brightly illuminated and decorative, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player side).

The white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, a different identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of each decorative board to make it easy to identify each one (see Figure 74). This identification section 7 has a character identification section 7a with characters such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b with different colors (shown in Figure 74 with shading of different shades).

In more detail, the character identification section 7a has the characters "lower left" on the left side decorative board 273, "lower right" on the right side decorative board 278, "upper left" on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, "upper middle" on the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, "upper left" on the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and "upper right" on the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame.

The color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board and is applied across almost the entire front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is applied partially, not across the entire rear surface, so as not to interfere with the soldering of LEDs and other components mounted on the decorative board.

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silkscreen printing), attaching a sticker, applying paint, etc.

In the above, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but identification units 7 such as character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b may also be provided on various decorative boards provided on the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is shown to have both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but this is not limited to this, and it may be the character identification unit 7a only, or the color identification unit 7b only.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is provided with an identification section 7 (character identification section 7a and color identification section 7b), so decorative boards of similar shapes can be easily distinguished, preventing the wrong decorative board from being installed during assembly work and improving the workability of assembly.

In addition, with the pachinko machine 1, the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, so the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board can be reflected forward by the front side of the decorative board, allowing the decorative objects in front to be more brightly illuminated and decorated, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving its appearance.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, so that it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative board is the desired one (desired color) just by looking at a part of the decorative board. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards are overlapping during assembly, etc., the desired decorative board can be easily found as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, and the effort required for assembly can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative board, so that when preparing the decorative boards required for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, if there is a decorative board with the same color identification portion 7b, it is easy to recognize that the same decorative board has been prepared in duplicate. Or, if there is not enough color in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is easy to recognize that there is a decorative board that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards required for the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to recognize that an excess decorative board has been prepared or that the prepared decorative board is insufficient, so that it is possible to reliably prepare only the necessary amount of decorative boards, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, and the time required for assembly can be shortened to suppress an increase in costs.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the decorative board is provided with a character identification section 7a as an identification section 7 for distinguishing it from other boards, so that an operator can easily tell which part the decorative board belongs to by reading the characters on the character identification section 7a, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear of each decorative board are white, and an identification part 7 is provided on the rear, so that even if the decorative body provided in front of the decorative board is highly transparent, the decorative board is less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving the appearance of the decorative body, and the white front of the decorative board makes it possible to reflect the light from the LED forward, allowing the decorative body to emit light more brightly, and the highly effective light-emitting effect entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional components such as LED drivers are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate and are not visible from the front (player side), which makes it possible to avoid the poor appearance caused by the functional components being visible through the decorative body, and improves the appearance of the decorative body (gaming machine). Furthermore, since the functional components are not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional components white (or yellow) so that they are not noticeable, and the functional components can be used as is, which eliminates the effort of coloring the functional components and suppresses increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. Figure 75 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the right front, Figure 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the left front, and Figure 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. Figure 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members as seen from the front, and Figure 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members as seen from the rear.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The main frame 4 is an assembly of the following units, and includes a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; a main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper left end of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 attached to the lower left end of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main frame 4 also includes a main frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a ball launching device 540 attached to the lower front side of the main frame base unit 500 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out game balls B to the player, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, a back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable, and covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, for locking the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 includes a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side, and a game board lock member 505 that detachably holds the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, which is a box-shaped tank that extends left and right and is open upward, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extends leftward in a groove-like shape that is open upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 up and down, a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 83. Figure 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened or closed relative to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main frame base 501 and guides the connection cable 503, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front surface of the main frame base 501 around an axis that extends forward and backward and that detachably holds the game board 5.

[4-1a. Main body frame base (1)]
The main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a base main body 501a which is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, a game board insertion opening 501b which penetrates from the front to the back from a position slightly below the top end of the base main body 501a to a height of approximately 3/4 of the total height and through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, a game board mounting portion 501c which forms the lower edge of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a game board regulation portion 501d which protrudes upward from the left-right center of the game board mounting portion 501c and regulates the left-right and rearward movement of the bottom end of the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 also has a launcher attachment section 501e, which is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, for mounting the ball launcher 540; a cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the launcher attachment section 501e from front to back on the right side of the front view, through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted; a circular speaker opening 501g, which penetrates the game board mounting section 501c from front to back on the lower left side of the front view, through which the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620 faces forward; a cable attachment recess 501h, which is recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extends left and right, and to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached; and a cable insertion opening 501i, which penetrates the cable attachment recess 501h from front to front at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h as viewed from the front.

The main body frame base 501 further includes a plate-like extension extending rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, a rear extension portion 501j to the rear end of which the rear cover 640 is rotatably attached, and an upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l formed near both the upper and lower ends of the left end when viewed from the front on the rear surface of the base main body 501a for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520.

In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, which is attached to the front surface of the base body 501a below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) relative to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released and the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, which is attached to the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. When the main frame 4 is opened (opened) relative to the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch is released and the opening of the main frame 4 can be detected. The detection signal from the main frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is attached to the main frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position below the portion where the game board locking member 505 is attached, to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed to a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, a pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that protrude forward from both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extend further to the right than the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a number of through holes 502d that penetrate the guide body 502a from front to back at both the upper and lower ends and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a left-right length that is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is formed to a size that can be accommodated within the cable mounting recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the mounting shaft 502c can rotate around an axis that extends vertically near the right end within the cable mounting recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotate) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is made up of multiple wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, the effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main frame base 501 so that its end (right end) opposite the side (left side) where the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction is rotatable around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a cable tie 504 inserted through a pair of through holes 502d at the same left-right position out of the multiple through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, with the side connected to the interface board 635 abutting against the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is located behind the main relay board 104 and the sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and closed against the main frame 4 (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, then bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the door frame relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is positioned to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hingedly rotated so as to open relative to the main frame 4, the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 that is attached to the door frame 3, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c at the right end. In this case, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is formed to satisfy α/2 ≧ β (preferably α/3 ≧ β) (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but once the opening angle α exceeds a certain value (e.g., approximately 90 degrees), the increase stops. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. As a result, the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, and the connection cable 503 can be prevented from dangling between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so that the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is open at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and it is possible to prevent malfunction of the connection cable 503.

When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the folded back portion of the connection cable 503 can be given a fold. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the 180 degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open, the fold acts on the connection cable 503 to close it. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the fold prevents the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and also guides the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to be closed smoothly.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a.

In addition, in this embodiment, the angle between the tangent to a circle passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, centered on the central axis (axis) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126, and the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the speaker duct 103 from the cable holder 103a, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts against the connection cable 503, so that the tip side of the open connection cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the closing direction via the connection cable 503, and therefore the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed smoothly as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. In addition, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502, which rotates (opens and closes) in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door frame 3, can be set to 45 degrees or less, so that when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, achieving the same effect as described above.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and also rotatably attaches the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main frame upper hinge member 510 comprises an upper hinge body 511, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent downward into an L-shape, and a main frame upper hinge pin 512 which protrudes upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 in a cylindrical shape and is journaled by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates the main frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and which journals the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main frame is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 by bending the upper hinge body 511 downward and extending vertically. The upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and journaled. The upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame allows the upper hinge pin 122 of the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 to be rotatably inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511.

This upper body frame hinge member 510 cooperates with the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 to hinge-rotatably attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and also to hinge-rotatably attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4.

[4-3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to a lower hinge attachment portion 501l in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and has the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached thereto.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a lower hinge first body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape, and a lower hinge second body 522, which is disposed above the lower hinge first body 521 and is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 disposed at a distance above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521.

The lower hinge first body 521 has an outer frame lower hinge hole 521a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

The second lower hinge body 522 is provided with a lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above, and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricts the rotation range of the door frame 3. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main frame upper hinge member 510 to mount the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged rotatable, and also mount the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable.

[4-4. Main body reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view that is U-shaped with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has two left position restriction members 531 attached to the rear of the section extending rightward from the front end, spaced apart vertically, to restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a groove 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed on the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcement frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 and the left reinforcement frame 111 becomes serpentine in a plan view, which prevents an illegal tool from being inserted inside from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and prevents an illegal tool from being inserted into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side through the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500, and is for shooting the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The ball launcher 540 can shoot the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is equipped with a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500, a launching solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid attached to the rear surface of the right part of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front and whose rotation axis extends forward through the launching base 541, a striking hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launching solenoid 542, and a launching rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launching base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left from near the tip of the striking hammer 543 and along which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is designed so that game ball B is supplied from the ball supply unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while game ball B is being supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the angle of rotation, and the game ball B is hit by the striking mallet 543. The game ball B hit by the striking mallet 543 is guided through the launching rail 544 to the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is hit into the play area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the play area 5a due to factors such as the hitting strength of the game ball B, it will fall between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, pass through the foul cover unit 150, and be discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payment base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 85. Figure 85 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L-shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

[4-6a. Payment basis]
The dispensing base unit 550 has a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500.
The dispensing base 551 is made entirely of a transparent synthetic resin and comprises a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-to-rear direction, a left side plate portion 551b extending long downward from the left edge of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front with a width in the front-to-rear direction substantially the same as that of the top plate portion, a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right edge of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front with a width in the front-to-rear direction substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and a back plate upper portion 551b extending downward from the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the bottom edge of the right side plate portion 551c. d, a left back plate portion 551e extending rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear edge of the left side plate portion 551b to near the bottom end at a substantially constant width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right edge of the left back plate portion 551e to the same position as the rear edge of the left side plate portion 551b, a bottom plate portion 551g extending rightward from the front of the lower edge of the left side plate portion 551b to the same position as the right edge of the left back plate portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower edge of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L-shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate 551a that extends left and right with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left side plate 551b that extends up and down with a length approximately equal to the up-down height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate 551a, left side plate 551b, and right side plate 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

The dispensing base 551 also has a shallow recessed portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically, and is formed by the left side plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, to which the dispensing unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 also has a rear cover attachment portion 551i that protrudes to the right at the top of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and to which the rear cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 is equipped with a tank unit consisting of a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove-like shape that is open upward. Therefore, the top plate portion 551a, right side plate portion 551c, and upper back plate portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 constitute a tank unit mounting portion formed in the main body frame 4 for mounting the tank unit consisting of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553.

The dispensing base unit 550 also includes a first rail cover 554 attached midway in the left-right direction at the top end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the top edge of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end when viewed from the front at the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

[4-6b. Spherical tank (1)]
The spherical tank 552 which constitutes the tank unit is made of opaque black synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, and is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-back direction that is shorter than the front-to-back depth of the top plate portion 551a.
The ball tank 552 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a at a position toward the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.
In an embodiment, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 98A (plan view), Figure 98D (cross-sectional view), and Figure 99B (oblique view), a through-hole-shaped mounting portion opening notch 551ah is formed in a part of the portion of the top plate portion 551a that constitutes the tank unit mounting portion that overlaps with the tank unit, and the mounting portion opening notch 551ah is covered by the tank unit.
In this embodiment, a total of two mounting portion opening cutouts 551ah are formed in each of a portion of the portion that overlaps with the tank rail 553 of the tank unit and a portion of the portion that overlaps with the connection portion between the spherical tank 552 of the tank unit and the tank rail 553.
In the portion where this mounting portion opening notch 551ah is provided, the partition between the tank unit and the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 is partially eliminated, so that in the mounting portion opening notch 551ah corresponding to the connection portion of the tank unit, the space for accommodating the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 is essentially expanded toward the tank unit side, while in the mounting portion opening notch 551ah corresponding to the tank rail 553, the space for installing the tank rail 553, i.e., the vertical space for creating a drop in the flow of game balls, is essentially expanded toward the rear unit 3000 side.

In addition, the mounting portion opening notch 551ah on the side corresponding to the connection portion of the tank unit can be used as a substantial expansion means for the space in which the tank unit is installed, in addition to being used as a substantial expansion means for the space in which the rear unit 3000 is accommodated as described above.
That is, in the tank unit formed by connecting the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 molded separately, as shown in FIG. 98B, the enlarged view of FIG. 100(b), and the enlarged view of FIG. 101, a joint protrusion 553d that supports the bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is protruded from the right end of the tank rail 553 toward the ball tank 552. This prevents the ball tank 552 from sinking alone due to the ball pressure, and prevents a step from occurring at the joint with the tank rail 553. However, on the other hand, such a protrusion 553d creates a protrusion for a joint on the flat bottom surface of the tank unit, and when such a protrusion abuts against the top plate portion 551a that constitutes the tank unit mounting portion, the load of the game balls filled in the ball tank 552 is concentrated on the protruding portion (protrusion 553d), and the stress may cause cracks or damage to the tank unit mounting portion.
In contrast to this, in the embodiment, a through-hole-shaped mounting portion opening notch 551ah is formed in part of the portion overlapping the connection portion between the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, so that even if there is a protrusion for a joint such as the protrusion 553d on the tank unit side, contact can be avoided.Therefore, the load of the game balls applied to the tank unit can be distributed in the planar direction between the bottom surface of the tank unit and the upper surface of the tank unit mounting portion (top plate portion 551a).

In addition, as shown in Figures 98D and 99B, the tank unit mounting portion (top plate portion 551a) of the embodiment has a stepped rib 551ar that is linearly continuous and intersects with the edge of the mounting portion opening cutout 551ah in a T-shape. This stepped rib 551ar can increase the rigidity of the tank unit mounting portion and the edge of the mounting portion opening cutout 551ah. In addition, by making the rib stepped rather than a typical convex strip, the high side (top plate portion 551a) of the stepped rib 551ar and the bottom surface of the ball tank 552 of the tank unit can come into surface contact, so the load of the game balls accumulated in the ball tank 552 can be dispersed. Furthermore, the gap between the low side of the stepped rib 551ar and the bottom surface of the tank unit can be used as an exhaust (heat exhaust) passage connecting the mounting portion opening 551ah and the outside.
In the embodiment, the stepped rib 551ar is formed linearly in the left-right direction of the main body frame 4, but may be formed linearly in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 4. In this case, the upstream side of the flow direction of the game balls in the ball tank 552 is the high side of the stepped rib 551ar, and the downstream side is the low side of the stepped rib 551ar.

By the way, generally speaking, transparent synthetic resin is more expensive than opaque resin, but even if the entire payout base 551 is not made of transparent synthetic resin but is made of opaque synthetic resin, the space for accommodating the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is substantially expanded, and the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the back unit 3000 can be obtained, but conversely, it is better to make the member visible from the mounting part opening cutout 551ah from transparent synthetic resin. For example, if the tank rail 553 is made of transparent synthetic resin, in addition to the above effect, the state of the game balls rolling inside the tank rail 553 can be confirmed from the front of the game machine through the mounting part opening cutout 551ah.
In addition, when the ball tank 552 is configured to be visible through the mounting opening 551ah, it is advisable to form the ball tank 552 from conductive resin and electrically ground it. The game balls that flow into the ball tank generally store high-voltage static electricity, but in this respect, if the ball tank is grounded with conductive resin, the static electricity is constantly removed, and it is possible to minimize the emission of electromagnetic noise due to discharge. In other words, the effect on the electronic circuitry provided in the game board 5 can be suppressed.
In addition, not only the spherical tank 552 but also the tank rail 553 may be made of conductive resin, and of course both may be made of conductive resin regardless of whether they are integral or separate, as long as a part of them is visible through the mounting portion opening cutout 551ah.

Here, in relation to the mounting portion opening cutout 551ah provided on the tank unit mounting portion, the rear box opening cutout 3010h is also formed in the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, which will be described later.
That is, as shown in FIG. 99B, a transparent box-shaped rear box 3010 that covers the rear of the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear unit 3000, and a presentation device including a presentation display device and a mechanically movable presentation unit 3600 is attached to the rear box 3010.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 as shown by the imaginary lines in Figure 98D, the rear wall 3010f of the rear box 3010 faces the rear cover 640 on the rear of the main frame 4 at close range, and furthermore, the top wall 3010g on the upper surface is close to the inner surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
98C and 99B, a top wall 3010g of the rear box 3010 is formed with a top wall bent portion 3010z that is bent inwardly into an obtuse mountain shape, and this top wall bent portion 3010z approaches the inner surface of the tank unit mounting portion and gradually moves away from the tank unit mounting portion due to the gentle inclination of the obtuse angle. Normally, the tank unit mounting portion is roughly flat to receive the bottom surface of the spherical tank 552, and therefore, between the top wall 3010g of the rear box 3010 and the tank unit mounting portion, there is a gap that gradually widens in the left and right directions starting from the top wall bent portion 3010z, or, when one surface sandwiching the top wall bent portion 3010z is parallel to the tank unit mounting portion, there is a gap that gradually widens in one direction starting from the top wall bent portion 3010z.
In addition, as shown in Figure 99B, in addition to the top wall bending portion 3010z, the top wall 3010 of the embodiment has a top wall bending portion 3010zz that is bent into an outward obtuse-angled valley shape in a direction different from the top wall bending portion 3010z (for example, the top wall bending portion 3010z is approximately in the front-to-back direction, and the top wall bending portion 3010zz is in a diagonal direction), and these multiple top wall bending portions 3010z, 3010zz give the top wall 3010 a polyhedral structure with excellent rigidity.
Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of Figure 98D, the rear box 3010 has a part of the top wall 3010g protruding into the mounting opening cutout 551ah of the tank unit mounting part, so that the capacity can be expanded even if it is only by a small amount such as the plate thickness. This improves the degree of freedom in designing the movable part 3600g of the movable performance unit 3600.

In addition, the rear box 3010 of the embodiment has a through-hole-like rear box opening 3010h formed along the rear edge of the top wall 3010g at a position that does not overlap with the mounting portion opening 551ah in the vertical direction and that straddles the top wall bent portion 3010z. Note that, in addition to the top wall bent portion 3010z, the rear box opening 3010h also intersects with the top wall bent portion 3010zz from a different direction as shown in FIG. 99B, which increases the strength of the rear box opening 3010h (the shape stability of the opening).
As shown in Figures 98D and 99B, this rear box opening gap 3010h is located such that the movable part 3600g of the movable performance unit 3600 is located within the opening area in a planar view, that is, in a position where the movable part 3600g of the movable performance unit 3600 can be seen when viewed from above, and the upper part of the movable part 3600g of the movable performance unit 3600 is at a height where it can be touched with a finger from the rear box opening gap 3010h. Therefore, for a game board 5 that is not attached to the main frame 4 (that has been removed from the main frame or is new), it is possible to insert a finger or, for example, a rod-shaped tool through the rear box opening notch 3010h to perform maintenance such as cleaning and oiling of the moving parts (links, gears, etc.) 3600g of the movable performance unit 3600 and to check their operation. In particular, if the moving part 3600g corresponding to the rear box opening notch 3010h is a transmission system part (drive source (gear) or intermediate gear), it is possible to directly access the moving part 3600g of the transmission system and check its operation through the transparent rear box 3010. Furthermore, it is possible to temporarily fix the moving part 3600g by fitting a separate stopper or the like through the rear box opening notch 3010h, thereby preventing damage accidents due to vibration or impact during transportation.
Incidentally, the rear box opening cutout 3010h in the embodiment is in an inverted, generally L-shaped shape spanning the top wall 3010g and the upper part of the rear wall 3010f, as shown in Figures 98C and 99B, so that a wider opening (larger on the top wall 3010g side and smaller on the rear wall 3010f side) can be obtained when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4 (during assembly work or inspection in a factory, etc.), the large opening on the top wall 3010g side and the small opening on the rear wall 3010f side in total can be used to access the movable part 3600g from various angles, allowing thorough inspection work, etc. to be performed. On the other hand, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 (such as when used in a game hall), the large opening on the top wall 3010g side is covered with the tank unit mounting part to prevent unauthorized access to the inside, while only the small opening on the rear wall 3010g side is left open, allowing only minimal maintenance of the movable part 3600g with the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 open. This makes it possible to achieve both ease of maintenance and security against unauthorized access.
In addition, the rear box opening 3010h is not limited to a single hole shape, and may be configured as a collection of multiple openings. In this case, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, at least the portions of the multiple lined-up openings that correspond to the main movable parts 3600g are covered by the tank unit attachment portion or the rear cover 640. This improves the design freedom of the tank unit attachment portion and the main frame 4 (rear cover 640) compared to a configuration in which the entire rear box opening 3010h is covered.
In addition, some rear boxes 3010 have a top wall 3010g that is deformed like a staircase, or the boundary between the top wall 3010g and the rear wall 3010f is deformed at an angle. In such cases, the rear box opening notch 3010h visible in a plan view can be seen as the top wall 3010g side, and the rest as the rear wall 3010f side.

In addition, the movable performance unit 3600 inside the rear box 3010 is positioned so that it does not extend beyond any of the horizontal imaginary straight lines (see dotted line L in Figure 98C) that may intersect with the upper edges of both the left and right sides of the rear box opening notch 3010h in the front-to-back direction.
Generally, game boards 5 are transported with multiple units packed into one box, but recent game boards 5 are heavy as they are equipped with a large movable presentation unit 3600 with multiple movable parts 3600g. For example, if the weight causes the boards to lose balance when they are packed in order from top to bottom, there is a possibility that the game panel 1100 of a later game board 5 may accidentally hit the top surface of the back box 3010 of the earlier game board 5.
However, even in such a case, the lower edge of the other game panel 1100 of the game board 5 of the embodiment stops by hitting the upper edge of both the left and right sides of the rear box opening cutout 3010h, so it does not hit the movable part 3600g of the movable performance unit 3600 below. This is the same as the rear box opening cutout 3010h being covered with a virtual panel that essentially lines up the virtual straight lines L, and the installation area of the movable part 3600g can be expanded upward by an amount equivalent to the plate thickness of the rear box 3010.
In addition, a step 3010t higher than the rear box opening 3010h may be provided near the rear box opening 3010h of the top wall 3010g as shown by an imaginary line in Fig. 99B. In such a case, even if some object hits the rear box 3010 from above with respect to the game board 5 not attached to the main body frame 4, most of the object will hit the step 3010t and not the rear box opening 3010h, so the safety of the movable performance unit 3600 can be further improved.
This step 3010t may be provided on the left side in FIG. 99B as shown by the imaginary line, or on the right side near the rear box opening 3010h. Even in such a case, even if some object hits the rear box 3010 from above with respect to the game board 5 not attached to the main body frame 4, most of the object will hit the step 3010t and not the rear box opening 3010h, improving the safety of the movable presentation unit 3600.
Here, the position of the step portion 3010t near the rear box opening notch 3010h can be selected based on the most advantageous position in terms of ensuring a passage for heat dissipation. For example, as described in detail in the next paragraph, when heat dissipation measures are taken in which all or part of the upper part of the right edge 4r of the main frame 4 when viewed from the front is made of a metal with excellent thermal conductivity, it is preferable to provide the step portion 3010t on the right side near the rear box opening notch 3010h in Figure 99B.

In addition, when the gaming machine is in operation, the air heated in the rear box 3010 rises and is released to the main body frame 4 side from the rear box opening notch 3010h at the top of the rear box 3010. In this embodiment, a gap is formed between the top wall 3010g of the rear box 3010 and the tank unit mounting portion, which gradually expands in the left-right direction starting from the top wall bent portion 3010z as described above, and the rear box opening notch 3010h straddles the top wall bent portion 3010z, so that the heat generated in the rear box 3010 is discharged to the main body frame 4 side through the gap that gradually expands from the rear box opening notch 3010h as an air passage. Therefore, by bringing the top wall bent portion 3010z of the rear box 3010 of the gaming board 5 as close as possible to the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame 4, the capacity of the rear box 3010 (expansion of the internal space) can be increased while improving the heat dissipation performance within the rear box 3010.
A part of the heat discharged from the rear box opening 3010h of the rear box 3010 passes through the gap on the right side in Fig. 98C and is discharged to the outside of the main body frame 4 through the mounting portion opening 551ah. On the other hand, the heat passing through the gap on the left side in Fig. 98C rises along the slope of the inner surface of the tank unit mounting portion, and finally reaches the gap between the right wall of the rear box 3010 in a front view (see reference symbol 3010r in Fig. 98C) and the right side of the main body frame 4 in a front view (see reference symbol 4r in Figs. 2, 7, 12, 78, and 98C). Usually, the heat in the main body frame 4 is discharged to the outside from the heat dissipation slits 641 of the rear cover 640 (see Figs. 7, 12, 78, and 98C), but in order to further enhance the heat dissipation effect, it is preferable to make a part of the main body frame 4 out of a metal with excellent thermal conductivity, such as aluminum or iron. In particular, in the embodiment, since the heat discharged from the rear box opening notch 3010h rises mostly in the direction opposite to the downstream direction of the game balls along the slope of the inner surface of the tank unit mounting portion, heat dissipation measures for the rear box 3010 and the main body frame 4 can be effectively implemented by making the right edge 4r of the main body frame 4 corresponding to the upstream side of the ball tank 552, that is, the entirety or a portion of the upper part of the right edge 4r when viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, out of a metal with excellent thermal conductivity.

[4-6c. Tank rail (1)]
The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction.
In addition, at the joint between the tank rail 553 and the spherical tank 552, a shooter-shaped step is provided that steeply descends from the spherical tank 552 side toward the tank rail 553 side, utilising the mounting portion opening notch 551ah, and further from that joint, the flow path is changed diagonally backward at the first corner, and at the second corner, the flow path is formed into a crank shape in a plan view so that it is directed in the left-right direction.
As shown in the cross-sectional view of Figure 98E, the tank rail 553 has a gutter shape in which a gutter front wall 553x and a gutter rear wall 553y are raised in front of and behind a passage bottom wall 553z, and an inner R-shaped arc portion 553r is formed upstream of the ball stop member 557 at the front corner of the passage bottom wall 553z, and a corner portion 553t having an approximately right-angled valley fold shape is formed at the rear corner of the passage bottom wall 553z, and further, multiple (three in this embodiment) drop holes 553h through which foreign objects can be discharged are formed on the rear side of the passage bottom wall 553z, which extend also to the lower edge of the gutter rear wall 553y.

It is possible to freely determine how many of the drop openings 553h should be formed in the front or rear corners. For example, all of the drop openings 553h may be formed in the rear corners, or multiple drop openings 553h may be alternately formed in the rear and front corners, or the drop opening 553h provided in the front corner may be formed in the most downstream position, but it is preferable that at least the drop opening 553h located in the most upstream position is formed in the corner portion 553t facing the arc portion 553r.
This is because, even if there is a foreign object on the arc-shaped portion 553r of the tank rail 553, the air is unlikely to stagnate on the curved surface, so the foreign object is likely to move on the air current accompanying the flow of the balls, and the vibration accompanying the movement of the game balls makes it easy for the foreign object to move along the curved surface of the arc-shaped portion 553r toward the opposing corner portion 553t, so that the foreign object eventually gathers at the rear corner portion 553t and is efficiently discharged from the drop port 553h. Therefore, the foreign object that has entered the tank rail 553 moves from the arc-shaped portion 553r formed in the upstream portion to the corner portion 553t, and the foreign object is quickly discharged from the drop port 553h located at the most upstream position provided in the corner portion 553t, so that the retention time of the foreign object in the tank rail 553 can be shortened as much as possible. Furthermore, at the joint between the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553, a shooter-shaped step 553u (see Figures 98A and 98B) is provided that steeply descends from the spherical tank 552 side to the tank rail 553 side in order to increase the flow rate within the tank rail 553. This step 553u makes it easier for vibrations to occur, which further promotes the fall of foreign objects from the drop port 553h.
Also, it is preferable to form the drop opening 553h of the tank rail 553 in a corner of the crank (preferably on the outer course side where a moving foreign object makes a large turn due to inertia) as shown in Figure 98A. By doing so, foreign objects moving inside the tank rail 553 will tend to move in a straight direction through the corner of the crank of the tank rail 553 due to inertia, and will be efficiently discharged from the drop opening 553h provided there.

The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that extends diagonally to the left and rear from the right end connected to the ball tank 552, so that its front-to-rear width changes from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth approximately one of the outer diameter, and then extends straight to the left with its front-to-rear width being slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B.
The tank rail 553 is inclined so that the passage bottom wall 553z is lower towards the left side, and a square vertically oriented short cylinder section 553s is extended from the left end, with a rail outlet 553p opening at the lower end of the short cylinder section 553s, and this rail outlet 553p is connected to an induction inlet 570p which opens at the upper end of the induction passage 570a in the ball induction unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the height of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553 which extend straight to the left is about 4 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball B from the passage bottom wall 553z on the ball tank 552 side, whereas it is about the diameter of the game ball B on the left end (downflow end) side, and is inclined so that the left end side is lower at a steeper angle than the passage bottom wall 553z.
Furthermore, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left is attached in a state aligned with a passage seat portion 551z (see FIG. 98E) that has a generally L-shaped cross section and is formed on the top plate portion 551a.
In addition, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball straightening member 556 are attached to the upper surfaces of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, which extend straight to the left, and a ball stop member 557 is attached to the underside on the left end side.

[4-6d. Technical means]
The embodiments herein correspond to the following technical means A to E.

[4-6d-1. Technical means A1]
A game board including a game panel having a game area on the front side and a back box covering the rear side of the game panel;
A tank unit including a ball tank for storing game balls and a tank rail for guiding the game balls in the ball tank downstream;
A tank unit mounting section is located above the rear box of the game board and mounts the tank unit to an upper portion of the main body frame.
A through-hole-shaped mounting portion opening cutout is formed in a portion of the tank unit mounting portion that overlaps with the tank unit, and the mounting portion of the tank unit mounting portion is formed in the upper portion of the back box of the game board. A gaming machine characterized in that a rear box opening portion in the form of a through hole is formed at a position that does not overlap with the opening portion in the vertical direction.
According to this gaming machine, the partition between the tank unit and the back unit is partially eliminated by providing an opening cutout in the tank unit mounting portion, so that the space for accommodating the back unit of the gaming board is reduced by the tank unit. The space for installing the tank unit is substantially expanded to the rear unit side, and the rear box of the game board is provided with a rear box opening, so that the inside of the rear box and the tank unit mounting area are Since the partition between the tank unit and the rear unit is partially eliminated, the capacity of the rear unit is substantially expanded to the inside of the tank unit mounting portion, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the rear unit.
In addition, the mounting portion opening is provided in a state where it is hidden in a plan view by the portion overlapping with the tank unit, and the air heated in the rear box of the game board flows through the mounting portion opening from the rear box opening. Since the air is discharged to the outside through the gap with the tank unit, there is almost no risk of dust or foreign objects entering through the mounting opening. In addition, the air is discharged from the rear of the tank unit at a position that does not overlap with the mounting opening in the vertical direction. By forming the box opening, there is almost no risk of the foreign matter entering the rear box where important parts are densely packed.
Furthermore, since the openings, which can be a cause of reduced strength, are distributed between the tank unit mounting portion and the rear box, the strength of the tank unit mounting portion and the rear box is unlikely to decrease even though the opening is wide overall.
In addition, the mounting portion opening cutout may be formed to correspond to the front wall and bottom wall located on the side of the ball tank closer to the player.
By doing so, a larger storage space can be provided that is connected in an L-shape toward the front wall side and the bottom wall side of the spherical tank.

[4-6d-2. Technical means A2]
A performance device having a mechanical movable performance unit is provided in the back box of the game board, and at least a part of the movable performance unit is positioned in an opening area of the back box opening cutout in a plan view. The gaming machine according to the technical means A1, characterized by:
According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform maintenance of the movable presentation unit or temporarily fix the presentation device during transportation through the rear box opening notch in the rear box of the gaming board.

[4-6d-3. Technical means B1]
A tank unit is formed by connecting a tank rail that guides the game balls in the ball tank downstream to a ball tank that stores the game balls;
A tank unit mounting portion for mounting the tank unit to an upper portion of a main body frame,
A through-hole-shaped mounting opening is formed in a portion of the tank unit mounting portion that overlaps with the connection portion between the spherical tank and the tank rail, and the entire mounting opening is formed in the tank unit mounting portion. A gaming machine characterized in that it is covered with a unit.
In general, in tank units where the spherical tank and tank rail are molded separately and then connected, a joint protrusion may occur at the connection. If such a protrusion comes into contact with the tank unit mounting part, the tank unit may Since the load of the game balls being filled is concentrated on this protruding portion, there is a risk of cracks or damage to the tank unit mounting portion.
In contrast, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a through-hole-shaped mounting opening is formed in part of the portion that overlaps the connection portion between the ball tank and the tank rail, so that the tank unit can be mounted even if there is a protrusion for the joint. Therefore, the load of the game balls applied to the tank unit can be dispersed over a wide area between the bottom surface of the tank unit and the upper surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
On the other hand, the mounting opening provided in the tank unit mounting portion is entirely covered by the tank unit, and the air heated by the rear unit passes through the mounting opening to the tank. Since the air is released to the outside through the gap between the unit, it is difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to get in.

[4-6d-4. Technical means B2]
The above technical means B1 is characterized in that a linearly continuous stepped rib is formed on the tank unit mounting portion, and the stepped rib and the edge of the mounting portion opening cutout are intersected. Gaming machine.
According to this gaming machine, the stepped rib can increase the rigidity of the tank unit mounting portion and the edge of the mounting portion opening cutout. Since the high side of the stepped rib and the tank unit are in contact with each other, the load of the game balls stored in the ball tank can be dispersed. It is also possible to form a gap between the mounting portion opening and the outside to serve as an exhaust (heat exhaust) passage.

[4-6d-5. Technical means C1]
In a gaming machine having a removable gaming board,
The game board is
a gaming panel having a gaming area on a front side;
A back box that covers the rear surface of the game panel;
A mechanical movable performance unit provided in the back box or in an area surrounded by the back box;
A through-hole-shaped rear box opening is formed in the upper part of the rear box, and at least a part of the movable performance unit is positioned within the opening area of the rear box opening in a plan view. A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to perform maintenance of the movable presentation unit through the rear box opening of the rear box of the gaming board.

[4-6d-6. Technical means C2]
The gaming machine described in the technical means C1, characterized in that a part of the movable performance unit located in a plan view within the opening area of the rear box opening notch is a movable part of a transmission system connected to a drive source. .
According to this gaming machine, the movable part of the transmission system can be directly accessed through the rear box opening to check its operation, and further, the movable performance unit can be temporarily fixed when the gaming board is transported (during the transportation stage). It can also prevent damage.

[4-6d-7. Technical means D1]
a gaming panel having a gaming area on a front side;
A back box that covers the rear surface of the game panel;
A game machine having a game board having a movable performance unit provided in the back box or in an area surrounded by the back box, the game machine being detachably attached to a main frame,
A through-hole-shaped back box opening is formed in a position corresponding to the movable part of the movable performance unit in the top wall constituting the upper part of the back box,
The movable part of the movable performance unit does not extend beyond all horizontal imaginary straight lines that may intersect with the upper edges of both the left and right sides of the rear box opening in the front-rear direction of the rear box opening, and can be moved from the outside through the rear box opening. A gaming machine arranged so as to be accessible.

Generally, game boards are transported in a box with multiple units packed together, but recent game boards have large movable performance units with multiple moving parts and are heavy, so for example, it is difficult to move them up and down in order. If the weight of the game boards causes the game boards to lose balance when they are packed into the box, the game panel of a later game board may accidentally hit the top surface of the back box of the game board that was put in first.
However, even in such a case, the lower edge of the other game panel of the game board of the present invention stops by hitting the upper edge of both sides of the back box opening, so it does not hit the movable part of the movable performance unit below it. do not have.
In addition, since the movable part of the movable performance unit is arranged so as to be accessible from the outside of the back box through the rear box opening, it is possible to insert a finger or a tool into the rear box opening of the back box to operate the movable performance unit. It is possible to check and perform maintenance, and furthermore, the movable part can be temporarily fixed by inserting a separate stopper through the rear box opening, thus preventing damage caused by vibration or impact during transportation. It will also be possible to do so.
In addition, when the gaming machine is in operation, the heated air inside the back box rises and is released from the back box opening at the top of the back box, making it useful as a measure to prevent temperature rise inside the back box.

[4-6d-8. Technical means D2]
The gaming machine described in technical means 1, wherein the back box is transparent.
In the game board of such a game machine, the movable presentation unit inside the back box can be seen from the outside, so the movable part can be manually operated through the opening of the back box to check the state of the movable presentation unit inside while checking its operation and performing maintenance. It can be performed.

[4-6d-9. Technical means E1]
a gaming panel having a gaming area on a front side;
A back box that covers the rear surface of the game panel;
A game machine having a game board having a movable performance unit provided in the back box or in an area surrounded by the back box, the game machine being detachably attached to a main frame,
a top wall that forms an upper portion of the rear box and has a top wall bent portion that is bent at an obtuse angle;
and a through-hole-shaped rear box opening provided in the top wall.
According to the game board of this game machine, by forming a top wall bent portion on the top wall, the top wall has a polyhedral structure, which improves its strength. Therefore, even if a rear box opening is provided, the game board can be played with sufficient strength. In addition, when the top wall of the rear box faces the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame in a state where the rear box is mounted on the main body frame of the game machine, no bending of the top wall occurs between the tank unit mounting portion and the flat tank unit mounting portion. Since it is possible to secure an air passage (gap) whose height gradually changes starting from the opening of the rear box, heat generated inside the rear box is released to the main body frame side through the air passage from the rear box opening. Therefore, by locating the top wall of the rear box of the game board as close as possible to the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame, the capacity of the rear box can be increased while improving the heat dissipation performance within the rear box. can be done.

[4-6d-10. Technical means E2]
The gaming machine described in technical means E1 is characterized in that the rear box opening is opened in a state spanning at least one of the top wall bending portions.
According to the game board of such a gaming machine, the rear box opening cutout is formed so as to straddle at least one top wall bent portion, thereby making it possible to increase the rigidity of the rear box opening cutout.
In addition, when the top wall of the rear box faces the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame in a state where the rear box is mounted on the main body frame of the game machine, a high gap is formed between the flat tank unit mounting portion and the top wall bent portion as a starting point. Since it is possible to secure an air passage (gap) in a form in which the depth gradually changes, heat generated inside the rear box can be easily released from the rear box opening through the air passage to the main body frame side. Therefore, the top wall bent portion of the rear box of the game board can be brought as close as possible to the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame, thereby increasing the capacity of the rear box and improving the heat dissipation performance inside the rear box. .

[4-6d-11. Technical means E3]
A technical feature is that a plurality of top wall bent portions are formed in different directions on the top wall of the rear box, and the top wall bent portions intersect with the rear box opening cutout from different directions. The gaming machine according to means E2.
The game board of such a game machine has a top wall strength increased by forming a plurality of top wall bends in different directions, and the top wall bends are arranged to intersect with the rear box opening cutout from different directions. This also increases the strength of the rear box opening.
Furthermore, the high-rigidity structure of the ceiling wall or rear box opening gap achieved by technical means E1 to E3 is also useful for protecting the movable performance unit when combined with the technical means D1 and D2.

[4-6e. First rail cover and second rail cover]
The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached in a lid-like manner to the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are fixed to the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and prevent the depth (width) of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y from becoming wider or narrower due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553, and further prevent the game balls from flying out of the tank rail 553 and also prevent foreign objects from entering the tank rail 553 from the outside.

[4-6f. Ball flow control member]
91, the ball straightening member 556 is attached so as to be able to swing by supporting a swing shaft 556b on the upper edges of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y corresponding to the end on the first rail cover 554 side, or by extending in a cantilever shape from the first rail cover 554 (not shown). The ball straightening member 556 is provided on its underside with a fin-shaped straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553. When the upper game ball B of the game balls B flowing in two layers in the tank rail 553 hits the underside of this flow straightening piece 556a, it rocks upwards while applying an appropriate load (resistance) due to its own weight to the game ball B (see the enlarged imaginary line in Figure 91), which slows the flow and makes it easier for the game balls B on the upper layer to fall (join) between the game balls B on the lower layer, so that the flow is straightened in a row per layer, making it difficult for balls to get stuck. Also, if balls get stuck in the two layers, you can press down the ball straightening member 556 with your fingertips to pressurize the game balls B on the upper layer with the flow straightening piece 556a, thus breaking the balance between the balls and eliminating the ball jam.

[4-6g. Ball Stopping Member]
The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail 553 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding it to the left as shown by an imaginary line in the cross-sectional view of Figure 101, the flow path leading to the rail outlet 553p of the tank rail 553 and the induction inlet 570p of the induction passage 570a is closed, so that the game balls B cannot flow from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side. This makes it easy to perform maintenance such as cleaning, replacement, and repair of the downstream induction passage 570a and the payout device 580.

Specifically, the ball stopping member 557 comprises a sliding base portion 557c which is supported so as to be freely slidable by passing a support tube 553m vertically attached to the outer underside of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 through its own long hole 557b, a ball stopping piece 557d which is approximately beak-shaped when viewed from the front and protrudes leftward from the left end of the sliding base portion 557c, an operating knob portion 557e which protrudes rightward from the right end of the sliding base portion 557c, and a cantilevered leaf spring-like elastic locking piece 557f formed inside the operating knob portion 557e.
The elastic locking piece 557f engages with a mountain-shaped anchor portion 557g on the left and right side slopes of an inverted bulge portion 553q protruding from the underside of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553, thereby anchoring the ball stopping member 557 in the protruding position and retracted position described below, thereby preventing blind movement of the ball stopping member 557.

The ball stop member 557 can be switched between the protruding position and the retracted position by sliding the ball stop member 557 left and right with a finger on the operating knob 557e. At this time, the elastic lock piece 557f slides in a bow shape while contacting the anchor part 557g with the inverted bulge 553q, like a cam follower contacting a linear cam, and engages due to its own elasticity when the anchor part 557g reaches the side slope of the destination. The engagement and disengagement of the anchor part 557g of the elastic lock piece 557f with the side slope of the inverted bulge 553q gives the switching operation of the ball stop member 557 a click-click feel.

The ball stop member 557 has a ball stop slit 553v that is opened in an inverted L-shape in front view from the bent portion K of the tank rail 553 to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the passage bottom wall 553z and the downstream side (rail outlet 553p side) of the passage side wall 553w that constitutes the short cylinder portion 553s. The ball stop piece 557d, which is approximately beak-shaped in front view, enters and exits the short cylinder portion 553s of the tank rail 553 to open a flow path. The valve 557 can be switched between an insertion position (see imaginary line in cross-sectional view of Figure 101) in which the ball stopping piece 557d is inserted from the ball stopping slit 553v into the short cylindrical portion 553s to close the flow path of the game ball B, and a retracted position (see solid line in cross-sectional view of Figure 101) in which the ball stopping piece 557d is retracted from within the short cylindrical portion 553s to open the flow path of the game ball B, by using the operation knob 557e and elastic locking piece 557f described above.
In the embodiment, the ball stop member 557 is supported by the tank rail 553, but it may also be supported by, for example, the dispensing base 551 of the main body frame 4.

[4-6h. External terminal board (1)]
Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 is provided with an external terminal board 558 attached to the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551, on the left side of the ball tank 552 as viewed from the front. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting the machine 1 to the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The insertion slot 501b is provided with an earth connection portion to which an earth wire extending from the game board 5 is connected.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear. Figure 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back panel left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Under normal conditions, the payout device 580 releases game balls B from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on instructions from the payout control board 633, and releases game balls B from the ball removal passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side when the ball removal lever 593 is operated.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides downward the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b to the base unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and serves to receive the game ball B from the tank rail 553 and guide the game ball B to the payout device 580 side.

The ball guide unit 570 is equipped with a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a guide passage 570a that extends vertically and through which the game ball B snakes down, a flat guide passage front cover 572 that closes the front side of the guide unit base 571, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a ball out detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 (see Figure 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in front view of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front cover 572. The guidance passage 570a opens upward with a guidance entrance 570p near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center of the height of the guidance unit base 571, then bends to the right, and extends downward in a serpentine manner while repeatedly folding back between the left and right width of the guidance unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that its depth in the front, back and right directions and its width in the left and right directions are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game balls B in the direction in which the game balls B flow, allowing the game balls B to be guided in a single line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. More specifically, the upper part of the movable piece member 573 is attached so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward at the outer right part of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and is formed so that a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. When the game ball B abuts against the part of this movable piece member 573 that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a to a state where it no longer protrudes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and detects the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when a game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when a game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the guiding entrance 570p at the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a is connected to the rail exit 553p at the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is connected to the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. Since the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B extends in a serpentine shape, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many game balls B can be stored in the guiding passage 570a. In addition, the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the guiding passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, and can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball tank 552 via the guiding passage 570a.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the guide passage 570a and the tank rail 553 constitute a ball dispensing passage section that is bent in an inverted L-shape as a whole, and this ball dispensing passage section connects the ball tank 552 provided above the main body frame 4 to the dispensing device 580 provided on the side of the main body frame 4. Therefore, although the bend K of the ball dispensing passage section is on the tank rail 553 in the embodiment, it may be on the guide passage 570a side. In that case, the downstream end of the tank rail 553 is just before the bend K, while the guide passage 570a has a shape such as a periscope with the upper part bent at the bend K, and the ball stop slit 553v and the ball stop member 557 are provided on the guide passage 570a side.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 to 89. Figure 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction. Figure 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the underside of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 is equipped with a payout device main body 581 that is box-shaped and open to the rear, has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a, a flat payout device rear cover 582 that closes the payout device main body 581 from the rear, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front cover 583 that is attached to the front of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and having a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a second transmission gear 588. The device is equipped with a dispensing gear member 588 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with the delivery gear 587 and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, which is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

The payout device 580 further includes a payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball B and is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, a ball removal movable piece 592 that is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the location where it branches off from the payout passage 580a so as to be capable of opening and closing the ball removal passage 580b, and a ball removal lever 593 that is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be capable of being held in a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b and is slidable in the vertical direction.

The payout device 580 is shaped like a rectangle extending vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is shaped so that its left-right width is greater to the right when viewed from the front than the left-right width of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in Fig. 88, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position toward the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear, and the downstream end opens downward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top for about 1/3 of the total height, gradually moving leftward as it moves downward from the upstream end, then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right, and then bends at about 1/3 of the left-right width and extends downward approximately vertically toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, it bends to the right when viewed from behind at a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, then extends downward in an arc concentric with the payout blade 589 so that a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between it and the outer periphery of the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the payout blade 589 when viewed from behind.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is located below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a, branches off at a point where it bends to the right, extends vertically along the left edge as viewed from the rear to the bottom end, and opens downward near the left end of the bottom surface as viewed from the rear.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are provided with a main body guide wall 581a and a rear cover guide wall 582a, which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view, and which face each other and protrude backward and forward from the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b branch off, and which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are formed at a position on the left side of the part in the rear view that branches off from the ball removal path 580b in the payout path 580a and extends to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side walls of the ball removal path 580b. The ball removal movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 when viewed from the rear, at the point where it extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, first transmission gear 586, second transmission gear 587, and payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 has three flat detection pieces 588b extending outward, spaced circumferentially at angular intervals of 120 degrees.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, spaced at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade pieces 589a extend from the top of the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extend to the right when viewed from the rear, and protrude into the payout passage 580a so that the distance between the blade pieces 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball storage section 589b between the three blade pieces 589a, which is recessed toward the center in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage section 589b is capable of storing only one game ball B. As a result, the vane 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the vane 589 by using the vane piece 589a, and can move the game ball B contained in the ball container 589b downstream by rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and the dispensing device front cover 583 so that they can rotate together on the same axis. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588, which rotates together with the dispensing blade 589, to detect the rotation of the dispensing blade 589.

The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached rotatably around an axis extending forward and backward at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in an L-shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is formed so that its depth in the forward and backward directions is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and it can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retract out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down on the left side when viewed from the rear near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball removal lever 593 protrudes rearward through the payout device rear cover 582, and it can be slid by operating the protruding part. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the lower end, the lower part can abut against the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted, and the ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the upper end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated outside the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B that were strung together upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 will flow over the ball removal movable piece 592 and down the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B that have flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a will flow straight down the ball removal passage 580b, and since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b is connected to the island equipment side, there is nothing to suppress the flow of the game balls B, such as the payout vane 589, so the game balls B will flow down faster than the payout passage 580a.

In this way, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down the ball removal passage 580b at a high speed, so that the game ball B hits the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b with great force. However, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b through between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outside the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of the hit. Therefore, the ball removal movable piece 592 is not pinched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from applying a strong force to the ball removal movable piece 592, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in durability or damage to the ball removal movable piece 592 due to the collision of the game ball B.

As a result, the ball removal movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, which reduces the time required for replacement and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the game hall.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b and the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outward through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, even if the game ball B moves to the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B.

The game ball B is prevented from moving outward between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, causing the game ball B to separate from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent movement of the ball removal movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, so no strong force acts on the ball removal movable piece 592, making it less likely to be damaged, and the game ball B will not fly out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, ensuring that the game ball B can flow downstream of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the rear lower part of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 comprises a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear end, a box-shaped upper full-tank cover 602 that is attached to the rear of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front end, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the top end of the upper full-tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right edge when viewed from the front, and has a rear cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the rear cover 640.

In addition, the upper full ball path unit 600 is made up of an upper payout ball receiving passage 600a that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height, an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right to the right when viewed from the front, about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height, and a lower ball storage passage 600b that extends downward from the left side of the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends toward the upper side and opens downward at the bottom surface, an upper full tank dispensing passage 600d that is adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c, extends downward from the right side as viewed from the front from the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b, and opens downward at the bottom surface, and an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens upward near the right end as viewed from the front on the top surface, extends downward approximately vertically, and then opens downward near the right end of the bottom surface (see Figure 91).

On the underside of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upstream end of the upper ball removal passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and is released downward from either the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the base unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 is equipped with a lower full base 611 having a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full payout path 610b, and a lower ball removal path 610c, extending in the front-to-rear direction and opening upward, a lower full cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a payout path opening/closing door 613 attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction to the front end of the lower full base 611 and capable of opening and closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b, and a closing spring 614 that biases the payout path opening/closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b.

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has, on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end, the lower normal dispensing path 610a, the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball removal path 610c, lined up from the left when viewed from the front, with their upstream ends opening upward. The lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extend forward lined up side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610. The lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing path 610a. The lower ball removal path 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b when viewed from the front, and opens to the right halfway in the fore-and-aft direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, it closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is provided with an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. This operating protrusion 613a is formed to abut against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which open upward at the upper rear end, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flows through the lower full payout passage 610b, and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball removal passage 600e flows through the lower ball removal passage 610c.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b open immediately after the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. The downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c opens to face the ball removal guide section 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4), the lower full ball path unit 610 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front against the biasing force of the closing spring 614 as the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are connected to the through ball passage 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 moves away from the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front due to the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can no longer move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. When the payout unit 560 is assembled to the main body frame 4, it is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551. In the normal state, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball removal path 580b branching off from the payout path 580a is closed at the branching portion. In addition, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout path opening and closing door 613 is in the open state.

The ball tank 552, which is open upward, is supplied with a predetermined number of game balls B from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of ball exhaustion by the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574 of the ball guide unit 570. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent, aligned in a row by the tank rail 553, through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blade 589, and multiple game balls B are retained upstream of the payout blade 589.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This indicates that the game ball B is stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball B stored in the ball storage section 589b moves in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and is released downstream of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. The game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball storage section 589b) is then detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and is then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

Under normal conditions, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 flows through the upper ball storage passage 600b and down to the upper normal payout passage 600c located directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. The game ball B that flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c then passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and is released into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200.

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 become stuck in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and as more game balls B are paid out, they also become stuck in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600, which is connected upstream to the lower normal payout passage 610a. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B begin to accumulate in the upper ball storage passage 600b, which is connected to the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side, and begin to flow down the upper full payout passage 600d, which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

The game ball B that flows down to the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is received by the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. The game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is then released into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball release port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. This allows the game ball B to be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and more game balls B are paid out.

When the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and further game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are dispensed, the game balls B will be retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 upstream of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the player is informed by voice (e.g., "Please remove the balls!") that the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full of game balls B, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is no longer in detection mode.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from the lower end position to the upper end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. This allows the game ball B to enter the ball removal passage 580b branching off from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are released downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the area of the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down hits the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592, making the ball removal movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged.

The game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then passes through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 92 to 96. Fig. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. Fig. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear and below. Fig. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front, with each main component disassembled, and Fig. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear, with each main component disassembled. Fig. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The speaker unit 620a comprises a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a main frame speaker 622 attached facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 and open forward.

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and is equipped with a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed of multiple slits that penetrate from front to back near the left end when viewed from the front and extend up and down, a front recessed portion for space 621b that is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and a connection portion 621c that protrudes downward from the underside of the front recessed portion for space 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and opens diagonally downward toward the rear.

The main frame speaker 622 is attached from the rear side to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low-pitched sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, with the part behind the main frame speaker 622 protruding rearwards the most, and is formed so that the protrusion rearwards becomes smaller in a stepped manner as it moves to the right as viewed from the front. This ensures that there is sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 to the right of the center as viewed from the front, allowing the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. to be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface except for the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621.

The speaker unit 620a, together with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, forms part of an enclosure 624 that contains the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting part 621a in the front view of the speaker cover 621, so even though the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount of protrusion rearward decreases as it moves to the right, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main frame speaker 622.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a has the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 connected to the connection tube portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and the space behind the main frame speaker 622 is connected to the inner space 40a of the curtain board of the outer frame 2. Therefore, a large enclosure 624 can be formed behind the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, speaker box 623, curtain board front member 42, and curtain board rear member 43, and sound outputted to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be outputted (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain board front member 42.

In more detail, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right when viewed from the front with a relatively wide depth and is connected to the lower frame assembly 40 via the connection part 621c and the connection tube part 43a. Therefore, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be transmitted to the lower frame assembly 40 without attenuating the low-frequency range in particular, and the transmitted low-frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

In this case, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in an inverted phase, so that it resonates to amplify the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200, and a loud sound with deep bass can be output even if the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep bass sounds. This allows the player to hear a rich bass sound from the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the platter unit 200, and the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2.

The speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the front recess for space 621b, and a through tube 623a formed in the speaker box 623, which extends cylindrically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, communicating with the through hole 621d. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and has a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface.

The base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and includes a ball removal guide section 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right when viewed from the front, a discharged ball receiving section 628 that opens upward to the right when viewed from the front downstream of the ball removal guide section 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5, and a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens to the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball removal guide section 627 faces so that the opening of the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and can receive the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c and guide it to the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The discharged ball receiving section 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the discharged ball receiving section 628 is connected to the bottom surface of the ball removal guide section 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that it becomes lower as it goes to the right.

The base unit 620b guides game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right as viewed from the front using the ball removal guide section 627 and discharged ball receiving section 628, and then discharges them downward from the ball discharge port 629, making it easier to ensure a wider space to the left of the center as viewed from the front. This makes it possible to make the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a wider, allowing the player to hear a sound with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 96) housed in the payout control board box 632. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like, by pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200, or the like. The payout control board box 632 is formed so that it leaves a trace of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect any illegal modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby enhancing the deterrent effect against illegal acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface board 635.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear of the speaker box 623 at the part that protrudes furthest to the rear, behind the main frame speaker 622. One end (main frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) when viewed from the front, so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The rear cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. The rear cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the rear cover 640 in a front view is attached to the rear end extending vertically of the rear extension part 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the left side is attached to the rear cover attachment part 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment part 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The rear cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front, and is formed so that the rear surface is positioned on approximately the same plane as the rear surface of the upper part 551d of the back plate of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. The rear cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, which penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the rear cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.
As shown in Figure 98E, the upper edge of the rear cover 640 is adapted to cover the lower rear edge of the tank unit mounting portion (upper part 551d of the back plate of the dispensing base 551) of the main frame 4, while a convex ridge 551t is formed on the lower rear edge of the tank unit mounting portion, which can cover the upper edge of the rear cover 640 like a canopy.
As a result, foreign matter discharged from the drop port 553h at the rear corner 553t of the tank rail 553 hits the ridge 551t and falls, or accumulates on the ridge 551t, so that almost no foreign matter penetrates into the inside of the main body frame 4 from the overlapping part between the upper edge of the rear cover 640 and the tank unit mounting part. Incidentally, the foreign matter contains metal powder as mentioned above, which is undesirable as it may adversely affect the operation of the electronic components inside the main body frame 4.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 is equipped with a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main frame base 501 and extends vertically, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, and a transfer cylinder 654 that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down depending on the direction of rotation.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 against the main frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

The locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that engage with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that engage with the upper hooking member 24 and lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key that corresponds to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple door frame hooks 652 move upward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In this way, the lock between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 are inclined so that the tips become thinner, so that when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 move downward or upward to overcome the hooking member 116, the upper hooking member 24, and the lower hooking member 25, and then are locked by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Further details of the configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 98A to 105.
FIG. 98A is a plan view of the main body frame, FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B1-B1 in FIG. 98A, FIG. 98D is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B3-B3 in FIG. 98A, and FIG. 98E is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B4-B4 in FIG. 98A. FIG. 99A is a perspective view of the upper part of the main body frame seen from behind, and FIG. 99B is a rear-side perspective view of the upper part of the main body frame showing the state in which the tank unit is disassembled and the game board for mounting is placed on the front side. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with the tank rails etc. assembled, seen from above the front, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) seen from below the front. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) including a cross-sectional view of the main part of FIG. 100(a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the area in the upper part of the main body frame through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank are distributed. Fig. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. Fig. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. Fig. 105 is an enlarged view of the tank rail area in a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 is made up of a frame-shaped main body frame base 501 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which is detachably and hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left sides of the rear side of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front; a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551, which is box-shaped (container-shaped) and extends left and right, and is open upward; a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, which extends leftward in the shape of a groove that is open upward; and a gutter front wall 5 53x and a part of the upper edge of the gutter rear wall 553y; a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper edge of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, spaced from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front; a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper edge of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out game balls B to the player.

[4-11a. Spherical tank (2)]
The ball tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view, has a bottom wall 552a inclined so that the left side is lower in a front view, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The spherical tank 552 also has an overflow section 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer periphery upper edge. This overflow section 552f is formed over a length of approximately 3/4 of the left-right length of the front wall 552b, from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the end side on the opposite side (the right side wall 552e side).

[4-11b. Tank rail (2)]
When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (the left side) away from the spherical tank 552.
The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, as shown in FIG. 98A, the main guide portion 553a is formed in a crank shape that extends from the right end side to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in a plan view, parallel to an axis extending from the right end side to the left in the left-right direction, and then extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it moves to the left, and then extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction.
In the main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553, a section extending parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and the upper side is closed by attaching a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball straightening member 556 to the upper end of this section. Also, in the section where the upper side is closed, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end, it is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one game ball B to flow.

The tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guide section 553a, and has a bulging section 553b that bulges out wider than the width of the main guide section 553a so that multiple game balls B are lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B that were wide in the width direction on the upstream side to be aligned so that the width becomes the width of one game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that the width becomes narrower as it moves from the upper end side to the lower main guide section 553a. As a result, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b in a line in the width direction as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge 553b of the tank rail 553 has a three-dimensional curved shape with the center of curvature located on the inner side. The bulge 553b has a curved center located above the main guide 553a, so that the tank rail 553 has a slightly chamfered corner at the boundary between the main guide 553a and the bulge 553b. The bulge 553b is also curved with a larger curvature downstream than upstream. For this reason, the game ball B circulating through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b has a reaction force acting in various directions depending on the position of the abutting bulge 553b, which suppresses the occurrence of ball jamming in the bulge 553b. In more detail, if the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends in a constant direction, a reaction force always acts on the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction, and the reaction force is difficult to disperse, so the game ball B inside is always pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, and the pushing direction of the multiple game balls B circulating inside is dispersed, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside behind the main body frame 4. As a result, even if balls become jammed in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, and the location of the jammed balls can be quickly identified. Therefore, since the jammed balls in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of play due to the occurrence of ball jamming can be shortened as much as possible, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of play can be suppressed.
In addition, because the tank rail 553 and the tank unit mounting portion (payout base 551) to which it is attached are made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear outside of the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553. Therefore, when a malfunction occurs in the movable presentation unit of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.
Also, in an embodiment, as shown in Figure 98E, the boundary between the gutter front wall 553x of the tank rail 553 and the passage bottom wall 553z is chamfered at a radius, and the outside of the arc-shaped portion 553r is also formed in a radiused shape. Furthermore, when the game board 5 is removed from the front surface of the main frame 4, the tank unit mounting portion can be seen from the front side as indicated by the arrow in the figure.
Therefore, when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4 and replaced, the state of foreign objects and game balls in the tank rail 553 can be visually checked from the front side of the main frame 4 through the tank unit mounting portion, making maintenance easy. In particular, the boundary between the gutter front wall 553x and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 is rounded, so that the interior can be clearly seen, improving the accuracy of visual inspection. If the tank unit mounting portion is made of opaque synthetic resin, a window hole can be provided in the corresponding portion.

As shown in Figures 98A, 99A, and 99B, the main body frame 4 has an overflow surface portion 501m along the front side of the spherical tank 552, while the spherical tank 552 has a bypass passage 552g in the left side wall 552d that communicates with the overflow surface portion 501m.

[4-11c. Overflow surface of main frame]
The overflow surface 501m extends in the front-to-back direction and extends outward (to the left) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (the left side when viewed from the front), and is inclined so that the rear end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end is higher in order to return the game balls B that have overflowed forward from the ball tank 552 back to the ball tank 552.
Furthermore, the overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501 as shown in FIG. 81. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward in a flat plate shape from a position that is two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B lower than the upper edge of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is about 1/3 of the length of the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end when viewed from the front is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction from the left end of the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a height from the front end to the rear end that is about 1/2 the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

[4-11d. Bypass passage for spherical tank (1)]
The bypass passage 552g extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface 501m to above the bulge 553b of the tank rail 553, the upper side of which is open, and is inclined so that the rear end is lower and also so that the side away from the ball tank 552 (the left side) in the left-right direction is lower, thereby guiding some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m to the bulge 553b of the tank rail 553.

The main frame 4 is provided with a discharge section 551j, which is provided on the opposite side of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, with a width in the left and right direction greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B and a bottom surface lower than the upper open portion of the tank rail 553, an external terminal board 558, which is provided on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge section 551j and at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m, and has multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and a terminal cover 551k which covers the upper side of the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) and has an upper surface extending horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface portion 501m.

[4-11e. Main body frame base (2)]
The main frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and has a flat left step 501n and a right step 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in a band-like manner in the front-rear direction on both the left and right outer sides of the left step 501n and the right step 501o with their upper ends higher than the left step 501n and the right step 501o, and are arranged in a row in the left-right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-rear direction. The left step 501n is also inclined so that the rear right corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right step 501o is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is longer than its length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The multiple ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the gap between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main frame base 501 is assembled to the main frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552, the left end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step 501o is aligned left-right with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552.

[4-11f. Bypass passage for spherical tank (2)]
The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. In the following, the container-like area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 in a flat plate shape and has a front end at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and a rear end that is inclined so as to be lower, and a weir portion 552i that extends upward from the end edge of the passage surface 552h opposite the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g in a front view extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552, and extends obliquely so as to move forward from the left end side toward the right end side. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the left-right direction.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank-like shape in the left-right direction and that extends diagonally to the left-right direction. In other words, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends diagonally to the left-right direction. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the diagonal rear end to a direction perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g can be received at the wide portion of the tank rail 553. In addition, the game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (perpendicular) to the flow direction of the game balls B, which makes it difficult for the game balls B from the bypass passage 552g to cause ball clogging in the tank rail 553.

The bypass passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so that its rear end moves rearward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in Figures 98A and 104. Therefore, when the game ball B is released from the bypass passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the rear end that extends diagonally allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side, where the tank rail 553 is wider, rather than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing the game ball B into the wider area, it is possible to prevent ball jamming inside the tank rail 553.

In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 where the game balls B are guided by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c when viewed from the front. Game balls B that pass under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flow through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the bypass passage 552g on the tank rail 553, the height of multiple game balls B stacked vertically does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, a space (empty space) can be secured downstream of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, allowing game balls B to be stacked upwards, so that game balls B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and game balls B will not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface portion 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j is formed in such a shape that, in a front view, the right edge extends obliquely rearward from a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/2 of the total length of the front-to-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-to-right direction.

The spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate the area surrounded by the right end edge of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view and the straight line connecting the end of the right end edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The spherical tank 552 also has flat flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The upper edge of the part of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are formed higher than the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o of the main body frame base 501).

When the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view, and the portion extending straight left and right to the left of that portion are located (protruding) rearward from the spherical tank 552. The rear end edge of the left bypass passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange section 552l on the left side of the spherical tank 552 as viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, so that the discharge section 551j lowers in a stepped manner from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552, and then extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (a position near the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555), and then extends rearward.

[4-11g. External terminal board (2)]
A plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are attached to the rear surface of the external terminal board 558 in a state of being arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminals 558a have gripping portions that open by operating a lever to grip the ends of electric wires. When the external terminal board 558 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. The terminal cover 551k, which covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a), is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is in contact with the ball tank 551. It is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of 552.

[4-11h. Flow of the ball above the main frame]
Next, the flow of game balls above the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be mainly described.
First, as shown by the outlined arrows in Fig. 102, the overflow surface 501m, the left step 501n, the right step 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are inclined so that the rear ends of the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower, and the rear right corner of the left step 501n and the rear left corner of the right step 501o are lower. Also, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the spherical tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower when viewed from the front. Also, the guide surface 552j of the spherical tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side opposite the bottom wall 552a is lower.

And when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, they can first flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f, which is the lowest part of the outer periphery upper edge, and the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B that flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface section 501m (see Figure 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent any further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from pressing against each other strongly in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure), and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jamming) due to the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

In addition, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This makes it possible to avoid the game balls B that have accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and prevents the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m from spilling outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction in which the game balls B that have spilled outside the main body frame 4 are pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, making it impossible to open or close the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position along the left side away from the ball tank 552. This allows the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g to be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other too strongly inside the tank rail 553 and preventing the game balls B from clogging.

In addition, at the outer circumferential upper edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow section 552f is made higher than the overflow section 552f, so that the upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the overflow section 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface section 501m. As a result, the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f and overflow into the overflow surface section 501m and flow from the overflow surface section 501m to the bypass passage 552g are blocked by the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from returning to the ball tank 552 side from the bypass passage 552g, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552 by pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g), so that the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. This prevents the game ball B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g can be made to flow in a constant direction from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the tank rail 553 on the rear end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a constant direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and getting caught in the tank rail 553 due to the pressure being applied to the game balls B being in different directions, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from becoming clogged.

In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end, so that when the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide section 553a, they are lined up in a row in the left-right direction, so that the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. In addition, the tank rail 553 has a wide bulge section 553b in which multiple game balls B can be lined up in the open upper portion, so that the game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion closed at the top, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a, so that as the multiple game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b, they can be aligned in a line in the width direction. In addition, the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, so that the multiple game balls B that were stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) can be aligned in a line by circulating them downstream through the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the multiple game balls B in a line aligned in a line to the downstream side (payout device 580 side).

Furthermore, since it is equipped with the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and since the tank rail 553 is equipped with the bulge portion 553b, the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that in combination with the ball tank 552, more game balls B can be stored.

In addition, on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge section 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558). Therefore, the wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface section 501m, it is difficult for them to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the game balls B contacting them.

In addition, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a face rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface 501m, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult for it to land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if the game ball B does land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult for it to fall from the rear side, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing downstream against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and makes it possible to prevent clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island equipment bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and lands on the left step 501n or right step 501o on both sides of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 103, the slope of these parts can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface 501m or the bypass passage 552g, preventing malfunctions caused by the game ball B spilling outside the main frame 4.

In addition, because the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j when they flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the guide surface portion 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, space (empty space) can be secured in which game balls B can be stacked on the upper side, and game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[4-12. Other embodiments of tank rails, etc.]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553, the ball stop member 557, the payout ball passage portion, etc. in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 106 to 117. Figure 106 is a perspective view showing an enlarged tank rail portion of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail, etc. of another embodiment, viewed from the rear. Figure 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail, etc. of Figure 106 assembled together with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail, etc. of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail, etc. of (a) viewed from the rear. Figure 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc. of Figure 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc. of Figure 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. cut along the kerk line in Figure 107(a). Figure 110 is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of Figure 107 in cross section. 111(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views showing another embodiment in which the protective wall of FIG. 109 is provided on the front wall and rear wall of the trough of the tank rail. FIG. 112 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail of another embodiment corresponding to the cross-section along the line K-K in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail of another embodiment corresponding to the cross-section along the line B4-B4 in FIG. 98A. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of a ball stopper member of another embodiment. FIG. 115 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a tank rail of another embodiment cut in the vicinity of a bent portion. FIG. 116 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a tank rail of another embodiment showing a state in which the ball stopper member of FIG. 115 in the retracted position has been moved to the protruding position. FIG. 117(a) is a cross-sectional view along the line Z1-Z1 in FIG. 115, and FIG. 117(b) is a cross-sectional view along the line Z2-Z2 in FIG. 115.
In addition, in a tank rail 553A etc. of another embodiment different from the above, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, a ball straightening member 556A, and a ball stopping member 557A are different from the tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball straightening member 556, and ball stopping member 557 of the above embodiment, but similar configurations may be given the same symbols and descriptions may be omitted.

[4-12a. Alternative tank rails (meanders and protective walls)]
The tank rail 553A of another form straightens out the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A is fitted with a first rail cover 554A to cover the upper end sides of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a ball straightening member 556A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A, and a ball stopper member 557A capable of preventing the flow of the game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and other figures, the tank rail 553A has a serpentine portion 553c that snakes back and forth downstream of the bulge portion 553b. This serpentine portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream of the serpentine portion 553c (toward the ball tank 552).

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the serpentine portion 553c at the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A. The second rail cover 555A has a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward like a fence from both front and rear ends upstream of the left-right center of the cover portion 555a, and an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a serpentine shape following the serpentine portion 553c at the portion where the serpentine portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the spherical rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball straightening member 556A is attached to the upstream end so that it can swing up and down with a swing shaft 556b that protrudes forward and backward. The ball straightening member 556A is provided between a pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and has a fin-shaped straightening piece 556a that penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. This ball straightening member 556A swings while applying an appropriate load to the game balls B by abutting from above against the game balls B stacked in multiple layers in the tank rail 553A, thereby breaking down the layers of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row, and also prevents the upper game balls B from moving quickly downstream, preventing ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to this tank rail 553A of another embodiment, in an assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between a pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper ends of the protective walls 555b. Specifically, the protective walls 555b are set at a height such that the electric wire Y (shown by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided above the portion of the tank rail 553A where the ball rectifying member 556A is attached does not enter the swing area of the ball rectifying member 556A, and therefore it is possible to prevent the electric wire Y from coming into contact from above.
If the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball straightening member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire Y may prevent the ball straightening member 556A from swinging upward even if the game ball B abuts against the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, and there is a risk that the ball straightening member 556A will not be able to fully perform its straightening effect on the game ball B.
In contrast, in this alternative embodiment, a pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents contact from above with the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a to the ball straightening member 556A, so that when a game ball B abuts against the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, the ball straightening member 556A can swing upward, fully exerting its straightening effect and preventing the occurrence of ball jamming or ball clogging within the tank rail 553A.

In addition, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the serpentine portion 553c, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed. If, among the game balls B stacked in multiple tiers in the tank rail 553A, which narrows in height toward the downstream side, an upper game ball B moves downstream first, climbing over a lower game ball, due to the influence of ball pressure from upstream, for example, that game ball B is likely to be caught between the inner surface of the second rail cover 555A and the game ball B below, causing ball biting. In contrast, in this other embodiment, as described above, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c, so that the upper game ball B can be prevented from moving downstream first, and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

As described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wire Y from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. This allows the tank rail 553A to be positioned near a terminal board (e.g., external terminal board 558) or control board to which many electric wires Y are connected, or allows the terminal board or control board to be positioned near the tank rail 553A to which many electric wires Y are connected, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the positioning of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

The protective wall 555b is provided on the second rail cover 555A of the tank rail 553A, but it may be formed by extending upward the upper edges of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553A as shown in Figure 111 (a), or it may be provided on the main frame 4 (specifically, the dispensing base 551) as shown by imaginary lines in Figure 112.
In addition, the protective wall 555b of the above-mentioned alternative embodiment has a front-to-rear width that is approximately the same as the distance between the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553A, but as shown in Fig. 111(b), the protective wall 555b corresponding to the gutter rear wall 553y side may be provided displaced rearward from the gutter rear wall 553y. The same applies when the protective wall 555b is provided on the second rail cover 555A instead of the gutter rear wall 553y.
With this configuration, the space above the ball straightening member 556A expands in the width direction (front-to-back direction) by the amount that the protective wall 555b is displaced rearward, so that even if the ball straightening member 556A rides up on a game ball B that is in a ball-caught state and stops, a reset operation such as pushing it back with a fingertip can be performed without any inconvenience.
In the above-mentioned alternative embodiment, two protective walls 555b are provided at the same height in front and behind the ball straightening member 556A, but the protective walls 555b may have a height difference between the two (one at the same level as the ball straightening member 556A and the other higher), or may be provided only on either the gutter rear wall 553y as shown in Fig. 111(b) or the gutter front wall 553x, not shown. Even in such a case, the desired effect can be achieved by appropriately setting the height and shape.

[4-12b. Tank rails of different configurations (mounting structures)]
The tank rail 553 of the embodiment described above in section [4-6c] and mainly in Figure 98E has a portion extending straight to the left that is attached in an aligned state to a passage seat portion 551z having an approximately L-shaped cross section formed on the top plate portion 551a.
In contrast, a different type of tank rail 553A has a gap SS provided between the opposing surfaces of the main frame 4 (specifically, the passage seat portion 551z of the dispensing base 551) and the tank rail 553A, as shown in the enlarged view of Figure 112.
The mounting structure of the tank rail 553A described above can provide the following advantages in comparison with a tank rail 553 that does not have the gap SS.

First, in recent years, the rear unit 3000 such as an image display device has become larger, and the amount of protrusion to the rear of the game board 5 has increased.
As the projection amount of the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 increases, the projection amount of the main body frame 4 surrounding it also increases, and as a result, the tank unit mounting portion on the upper part of the main body frame 4 also extends rearward and projects below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Therefore, the overlapping portion between the main body frame 4 and the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 increases.
Needless to say, the rear unit 3000 of the current game board 5 is a collection of electrical components such as an image display device and a motor, and generates heat when in operation. Therefore, it is necessary to dissipate heat from inside the main body frame 4 to the outside, but since the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are overlapped on the upper surface of the tank unit mounting part of the main body frame 4 as in the above embodiment, heat tends to be trapped, and there is a risk that the inside of the main body frame 4 will become hot.
In contrast, by providing a gap SS on the surface facing the main body frame 4, as in the case of the tank rail 553A of another form, the heat emitted from mainly the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 to the inside of the main body frame 4 is released to the outside through the gap SS, so that it is less likely to be trapped inside the main body frame 4. Also, by providing a gap SS on the surface facing the tank rail 553A and the main body frame 4, even if there is distortion or the like in the tank rail 553A, as long as it is within the range that can be absorbed by the gap SS, there will be no wobbling; in other words, the molding precision of the tank rail 553A can be relaxed.
It is preferable that the gap SS be provided on all surfaces of the tank rail 553A that face the main body frame 4, but even providing the gap SS on only a portion of the surface of the gutter front wall 553x that faces the main body frame 4 is effective in improving heat dissipation performance.

[4-12c. Another type of ball discharge passage (foreign object discharge bypass passage)]
The tank rail 553 of the embodiment described above in section [4-6c] and mainly in Figure 98A has multiple (in this embodiment, three) drop holes 553h through which foreign objects can be discharged formed on the rear side of the passage bottom wall 553z, as shown in the cross-sectional view of Figure 98E.
However, if the drop port 553h for dropping foreign objects faces the outside, there is a possibility that part of the electric wire Y wired to the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 may get into the inside of the tank rail 553 through the drop port 553h, and depending on the extent of the getting in, it may cause an interruption to the flow of the game balls.
In contrast, as shown in FIG. 113, a tank rail 553A of another form has a drop opening 553h provided on the front side of the passage bottom wall 553z, and is provided with a foreign object discharge bypass passage section 5531 which can receive foreign objects falling from the drop opening 553h and discharge them to the outside through a discharge opening 5530 which opens backward and is provided in the gutter rear wall 553y.
According to this tank rail 553A, the drop opening 553h does not directly face the outside on the rear side, and the horizontal foreign object discharge bypass passage section 5531 is interposed between the drop opening 553h and the outside on the rear side, so that even if a part of the electric wire Y of the pachinko machine 1 enters the discharge opening 5530 of the foreign object discharge bypass passage section 5531, it will hardly reach the inside of the tank rail 553A through the drop opening 553h at the back of the foreign object discharge bypass passage section 5531. Therefore, there is almost no risk of the flow of game balls in the tank rail 553A being hindered by the erroneous entry of the electric wire Y or the like.
In addition, this foreign object discharge bypass passage section 5531 can also be applied to the guide passage 570a that constitutes the payout ball passage section, in which case the discharge outlet 5530 may be formed by a payout base 551 or the like located on the rear side of the guide passage section 570a.
113, the gutter front wall 553x may not be extended downward from the drop opening 553h, and instead the space of the foreign object discharge bypass passage 5531 may be left, and a passage seat 551z that is a part of the dispensing base 551 may guide the foreign object to the discharge opening 5530. Alternatively, the portion equivalent to the bottom surface of the foreign object discharge bypass passage 5531 formed by the gutter front wall 553x may be formed so as to extend a member located below it, such as the rear cover member 640, to the passage seat 551z, or the top surface of a case member of a device located below may be utilized.

[4-12d. Alternative ball stopping members]
The ball stopping member 557 of the embodiment described above in section [4-6g] and mainly in Figure 101 comprises a sliding base portion 557c which is supported so as to be freely slidable by passing a support tube 553m suspended from the outer underside of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 through its own long hole 557b, a ball stopping piece 557d which is approximately beak-shaped when viewed from the front and protrudes leftward from the left end of the sliding base portion 557c, an operating knob portion 557e which protrudes rightward from the right end of the sliding base portion 557c, and a cantilevered leaf spring-like elastic locking piece 557f formed on the inside of the operating knob portion 557e, and the ball stopping piece 557d is moved in and out of the short tube portion 553s of the tank rail 553 through a ball stopping slit 553v which is opened in approximately an inverted L-shape when viewed from the front, starting from the bent portion K of the tank rail 553, to open and close the flow path of the game ball.
In contrast to this, a different form of ball stopping member 557A shown in Figure 114 is designed so that, when in the inserted position shown in Figure 116, a flow-blocking space 557h into which foreign objects can fall is formed between the rear end of the ball stopping piece 557d and the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v provided in the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553A. Specifically, as shown in Figures 114 to 117, the flow-blocking space 557h is formed by providing a crank-shaped detour portion 557i between the ball stopping piece 557d and the sliding base portion 557c.
In addition, since the illustrated bypass portion 557i does not have a bottom, the flow-blocking space portion 557h has a bottomless shape that penetrates the ball stopping member 557A in the vertical direction, but it is also possible to provide a flat receiving bottom portion (not shown) at the rear bottom of the ball stopping piece 557d (between the ball stopping piece 557d and the sliding base portion 557c) to form the flow-blocking space portion 557h into a bottomed shape in which foreign matter can accumulate.

The above-mentioned alternative ball stopping member 557A can provide the following advantageous effects in comparison with the ball stopping member 557 of the embodiment that does not have the flow-blocking space portion 557h.
First, foreign matter such as metal powder generated by the friction between game balls and resin powder generated by the friction between game balls and cleaning pellets exists inside the tank rail 553, and most of these fall and are discharged from the aforementioned drop hole 553h, but some of the foreign matter may reach the edge of the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v.
Furthermore, when even a small amount of such foreign matter is present at the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v, if the ball stopping member 557 is switched from the retracted position shown by the solid line in the cross-sectional view of Figure 101 to the protruding position shown by the imaginary line in the same figure, the force generated by this will cause the surrounding area to vibrate, and this vibration may cause the foreign matter that was stopped at the edge of the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v to fall into the ball stopping slit 553v, and then run along the top surface of the ball stopping piece 557d and fall near the center of the short cylinder portion 553s.
In contrast, in the case of the ball stopping member 557A of another form, even if a foreign object that is stopped at the edge of the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v when the ball stopping member 557A is in the retracted position of Fig. 115 falls into the ball stopping slit 553v due to vibration when the ball stopping member 557A is switched to the protruding position as shown in Fig. 116, the flow blocking space 557h faces between the rear end of the ball stopping piece 557d and the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v, so the foreign object falls downward without landing on the ball stopping piece 557d. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the foreign object that was at the edge of the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v will get into the vicinity of the center of the short cylinder portion 553s of the tank rail 553A.
Furthermore, if the flow-blocking space portion 557h of the ball stopping member 557A is made bottomless, foreign matter passes through the flow-blocking space portion 557h and is discharged to the outside, and hardly accumulates in the ball stopping member 557A, so that the ball stopping member 557A is less likely to become dirty even after long-term use.
On the other hand, if the flow-blocking space 557h of the ball stopping member 557A is made to have a bottom, even if the component density below the tank rail 553A is high and an electronic component that may be damaged by the intrusion or adhesion of foreign matter, such as a control board, has to be placed directly below the flow-blocking space 557h, the foreign matter will accumulate in the receiving bottom of the ball stopping member 557A and will not be discharged to the outside, so that a heat dissipation hole can be drilled in the board box that stores the board without having to worry about foreign matter intruding from above.

[4-13. Technical ideas included in the above embodiment and other aspects]
The above embodiment and the above alternative embodiments include the following problems and the following technical ideas that are means for solving the problems.

[4-13-1a. Problem: Discharge of foreign matter]
It has long been known that foreign objects such as metal powder and resin powder can get into the ball dispensing passage, and as a countermeasure, multiple spaced drop holes for foreign objects to fall into the ball dispensing passage have been provided, mainly in the bottom wall of the tank rail of the ball dispensing passage (see Patent Document 2).
However, in conventional tank rails, the front and rear corners of the passage bottom wall are bent at almost right angles, making it difficult for foreign objects to be discharged smoothly.
In other words, inside the tank rail, air currents are generated by the movement of the game balls, and it is thought that fine vibrations also cause foreign matter not attached to the game balls to move naturally; however, since air tends to stagnate in the right-angled corners at the front and rear of the bottom wall of the passage, foreign matter that gets into these corners tends to become retained there.
As a result, it becomes difficult for foreign matter to be discharged smoothly, and the trapped foreign matter easily adheres to the inner surface of the tank rail, causing dirt. Moreover, since right-angle corners are difficult to clean, there is a problem of dirt accumulating.
The following technical idea has been developed in consideration of the above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to expel foreign objects that have entered the ball dispensing passage.

[4-13-1b. Technical philosophy…Discharge of foreign matter]
"The door frame and
A main body frame located behind the door frame;
A ball dispensing passage portion that is bent into an inverted L shape connecting a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a dispensing device provided on a side of the main body frame;
a plurality of drop holes through which foreign objects can be discharged, the drop holes being opened at corners of the bottom wall of the ball dispensing passage portion;
When the side closer to the door frame is defined as the front and the opposite side is defined as the rear, the ball dispensing passage portion has an inner radius shape formed at at least a part of the front corner of the passage bottom wall, and at least A corner portion having a valley fold shape is formed at a rear corner portion corresponding to the arc-shaped portion, and at least a part of the plurality of drop ports of the passage bottom wall is disposed at the rear corner portion. This is a gaming machine that
In the above, "a spherical tank installed above the main body frame" refers to a case where the spherical tank is attached to the upper rear surface of the main body frame, a case where the spherical tank is attached to the top surface of the main body frame, and both cases. Similarly, "a dispensing device installed on the side of the main frame" includes a dispensing device installed on the side of the rear surface of the main frame. This includes cases where the stand is attached to the side of the main frame, or where it is attached so as to straddle both.
Furthermore, the ball tank and the ball dispensing passage portion may be integrated or separate.
According to this gaming machine, even if a foreign object gets into the arc-shaped portion at the front of the ball dispensing passage, the foreign object is easily carried away by the air current because air is unlikely to stagnate in the arc-shaped portion. The vibrations tend to move foreign objects toward the rear corner along the inner curve of the arc-shaped portion, and the foreign objects are efficiently discharged from the drop hole at the corner. As described above, foreign matter is less likely to remain on the inner surface of the arc-shaped portion, which has an inward curve, so that the inner surface can be easily cleaned and kept clean.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the previous paragraph,
The dispensing ball passage section includes a substantially horizontal tank rail connected to the ball tank and a substantially vertical guide passage leading to the dispensing device,
The arc-shaped portion is formed at least in an upstream portion of the tank rail on the spherical tank side,
It is also preferable that at least one of the drop inlets opened at the corners is located at the most upstream position of all the drop inlets.
This is because at the joint between the spherical tank and the tank rail, a shooter-shaped step that drops sharply from the spherical tank side to the tank rail side is provided in order to increase the flow rate within the tank rail, and this step makes it easier for vibrations to occur, which in turn promotes the fall of foreign objects from the drop port.Furthermore, because foreign objects are efficiently discharged from the drop port located at the most upstream position, they are less likely to be dispersed throughout the entire tank rail.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the previous paragraph,
The upstream side of the tank rail may be formed in a crank shape in plan view, and the drop opening may be formed in a corner portion of the crank (preferably on the outer course side of the corner portion).
In such a case, the foreign object moving inside the tank rail will tend to move in a straight line through the crank corner of the tank rail due to inertia, and will be efficiently discharged through a drop hole provided there.
The technical idea of providing a drop port at the crank corner of the tank rail can also be applied to normal tank rails that do not have a mixture of arc-shaped portions and corners.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in the previous paragraph or the paragraph before,
One of the drop openings may be provided at a downstream front corner of the tank rail.
By doing so, any foreign matter that has flowed down along the front arc-shaped portion of the tank rail and has not been discharged can be discharged here reliably.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in any one of the preceding paragraphs to the preceding paragraph,
The main body frame has a tank unit mounting portion for mounting the spherical tank and the tank rail on an upper portion thereof,
The tank rail is formed to be transparent, and the outer side of the arc-shaped portion is also formed to be rounded,
Furthermore, by opening a window hole in at least the part of the tank unit mounting portion that corresponds to the arc-shaped portion of the tank rail or by making at least the corresponding part transparent, it is possible to make the inside of the tank rail visible through the tank unit mounting portion from the front side of the main body frame.
With this type of gaming machine, when the gaming board is removed from the main frame and replaced, foreign objects and gaming balls inside the tank rail can be visually checked through the tank unit mounting section from the front side of the main frame, making maintenance easy; in particular, visibility is further improved by the curved inside and outside of the front side of the tank rail.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in any one of the preceding paragraphs to the preceding third third paragraph,
The main body frame has a rear cover on its rear surface that can be opened and closed, and the upper edge of the rear cover is adapted to cover the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion,
On the other hand, a visor-like protruding strip may be formed on the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion in a position along the upper edge of the rear cover.
According to this gaming machine, foreign objects discharged from the drop port at the rear corner of the tank rail either hit the eaves-like protrusions and fall, or accumulate on the protrusions, so there is almost no risk of foreign objects entering the inside of the main body frame through the joint between the upper edge of the back cover and the main body frame. Incidentally, as mentioned above, the foreign objects contain metal powder, which is undesirable as it may adversely affect the operation of the electronic components inside the main body frame.
According to the above technical concept, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to expel foreign objects that have entered the ball dispensing passage.

[4-13-2a. Problem: Accidental entry into drop hole]
It has long been known that foreign objects such as metal powder and resin powder can get into the ball dispensing passage, and as a countermeasure, a drop port for foreign objects to fall has been provided in the bottom wall of the ball dispensing passage (see Patent Document 2).
However, if the drop opening for foreign objects in the ball dispensing passage section faces the outside, there is a possibility that some of the numerous electrical wires wired to the rear of the gaming machine may enter the inside of the ball dispensing passage section through the drop opening, and depending on the extent of this, this could cause interference with the flow of gaming balls.
The following technical idea has been developed in consideration of the above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine equipped with a ball payout passage portion that can keep the flow of gaming balls smooth.

[4-13-2b. Technical concept: Prevention of accidental entry into drop hole]
"The door frame and
A main body frame located behind the door frame;
A ball tank provided above the main body frame and a ball dispensing passageway that connects a ball tank provided on a side of the main body frame and bends in an inverted L-shape,
The ball dispensing passage portion has a drop port for foreign objects provided downward on a bottom wall of the passage portion,
and a horizontal foreign object discharge bypass passage section that can receive the foreign object that falls from the drop port and discharge it to the outside on the rear side from its own discharge port that opens backward.
According to this gaming machine, the drop opening of the payout ball passage does not directly face the outside on the rear side, and a horizontal foreign object discharge bypass passage is interposed between the drop opening and the discharge opening that opens rearward, so even if part of the electric wire of the gaming machine enters the discharge opening of the foreign object discharge bypass passage, it will hardly reach the inside of the payout ball passage through the drop opening. Therefore, there is almost no risk of electric wires or the like accidentally entering the payout ball passage and interfering with the flow of the game balls.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the previous paragraph,
The drop opening for the foreign objects may be preferably provided on an edge of the bottom wall of the passageway farther from the discharge opening.
By doing so, a distance is created between the drop inlet and the discharge outlet, making it difficult for the ends of electric wires, etc. to reach the drop inlet, and since foreign objects that fall from the drop inlet are temporarily stored in the foreign object discharge bypass passage, even electronic components, etc. that may cause problems if foreign objects enter or adhere to them can be placed without any problems below the drop inlet.
According to the above technical concept, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a ball payout passage portion capable of keeping the flow of gaming balls smooth.

[4-13-3a. Problem: Malfunction of ball straightening component]
As described above, conventional gaming machines are equipped with a ball straightening member that can oscillate while applying an appropriate load to a gaming ball flowing through a tank rail when the gaming ball comes into contact with the ball, making it less likely for balls to become stuck in the tank rail.
On the other hand, gaming machines may have wire connection terminals (referred to as "terminal board 78" in Patent Document 1) located above the tank rail, specifically on the side of the ball tank on the main frame, and some of the wires connected to these wire connection terminals cross the ball straightening member in the vertical direction.
However, ball jamming can occur even in tank rails equipped with ball straightening members. There are thought to be several causes, but one of them is that when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal crosses the ball straightening member, a part of the electric wire enters the swinging area of the ball straightening member and hinders its swing. This causes the ball straightening member to not function normally, which makes ball jamming more likely to occur.
The following technical idea has been developed in consideration of the above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining a smooth flow of gaming balls within the tank rail.

[4-13-3b. Technical concept: Ensuring the swing area of the ball straightening member]
"The door frame and
A main body frame located behind the door frame;
A ball tank for storing game balls provided at a high position on the main body frame;
A tank rail that guides the game balls in the ball tank downstream;
a ball straightening member that can oscillate while applying an appropriate load to the game ball when the game ball flowing through the tank rail comes into contact with the ball;
a wire connection terminal for wiring disposed above the tank rail;
and an electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal.
The gaming machine is characterized by having a fence-like protective wall that can prevent the electric wire from entering the swing area of the ball straightening member.
In this regard, the swinging of the ball straightening member includes not only a case where one end is rotatably attached to a shaft and the other end swings up and down, but also a case where the free end swings up and down due to the elasticity of a cantilever beam.
According to this gaming machine, even if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal crosses the ball straightening member, the protective wall prevents the electric wire from entering the swinging area, so the ball straightening member can swing normally without being hindered by the electric wire. Therefore, the flow of the game balls in the tank rail can be kept smooth.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the previous paragraph,
The tank rail includes a passage bottom wall, and a gutter front wall and a gutter rear wall which are erected in front of and behind the passage bottom wall,
The protective wall may be formed on at least the rear wall of the gutter of the tank rail.
According to this gaming machine, the protective wall can be easily formed by simply extending at least the rear wall of the gutter of the tank rail higher upward.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the previous paragraph or the paragraph before that, the protective wall may be provided at a position displaced rearward from the rear wall of the gutter at the portion of the tank rail where the ball straightening member is located.
With this type of gaming machine, the space above the ball straightening member expands in the width direction by the amount that the protective wall is displaced rearward, so that even if the ball straightening member runs over a gaming ball that is stuck in the ball and stops, a reset operation can be performed without any inconvenience, such as pushing it back with a fingertip.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the paragraph before last, the protective wall may be formed on the main body frame.
According to this gaming machine, since no protective wall is formed on the tank rail side, not only the molding of the tank rail but also the assembly of the ball straightening member can be simplified.
According to the above technical concept, the flow of game balls within the tank rail can be kept smooth.

[4-13-4a. Issue: High temperature inside the main body frame]
In recent years, game boards have become larger in size due to rear units such as image display devices, and the amount of protrusion to the rear has increased.
In addition, as the rear unit of the game board protrudes more, the main frame surrounding it also protrudes more toward the rear, which causes the tank unit mounting part on the top of the main frame to extend rearward and protrude below the ball tank and tank rail. This increases the overlapping area between the tank unit mounting part and the ball tank and tank rail.
Needless to say, the rear unit of the current game board is a collection of electrical parts, and generates heat when in operation. Therefore, it is necessary to dissipate heat from inside the main frame to the outside, but as mentioned above, the ball tank and tank rail are overlapped on the top surface of the tank unit mounting part of the main frame, so heat tends to build up, and there is a risk that the inside of the main frame will become too hot.
The following technical idea has been developed in consideration of the above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine in which heat is less likely to build up inside the main body frame.

[4-13-4b. Technical concept: Improving the heat dissipation performance of the main body frame]
"The door frame and
A main body frame located behind the door frame;
A ball tank for storing game balls provided above the main body frame;
A tank rail is disposed above the main body frame to guide the game balls in the ball tank downstream.
A gaming machine characterized in that a gap is provided between the opposing surfaces of the main body frame and the tank rail.
According to this gaming machine, heat released into the inside of the main body frame, mainly from the rear unit of the gaming board, is released to the outside through a gap provided on the opposing surfaces of the main body frame and the tank rail, so heat is less likely to build up inside the main body frame.
In this gaming machine, the gap may be provided in a part of the opposing surface between the main body frame and the tank rail, thereby achieving both stability and heat dissipation of the tank rail.
In this gaming machine or the gaming machine described immediately above, the gap may be formed at least in the vertical direction with the upper end being open to the outside, so that the gap functions like a chimney and can efficiently radiate heat to the outside.
According to the above technical concept, heat generated inside the main body frame can be released to the outside, which has the effect of preventing heat from building up.

[4-13-5a. Problem: Discharge of foreign matter]
The ball stopping member that opens and closes the flow path of the payout ball passage section in Patent Document 1 is provided on the upper side of the tank rail that constitutes the payout ball passage section, but if its position would interfere with other parts, it may be placed on the lower side of the tank rail at the bend in the payout ball passage section where the flow of game balls changes from sideways to downwards, and the ball stopping piece may be inserted and removed from inside the payout ball passage section to open and close the flow path.
However, on the other hand, in order to allow the ball stopping piece of the ball stopping member to be inserted and removed from the bent portion of the payout ball passage section, it is necessary to open a ball stopping slit at the bent portion.In this case, there is a risk that foreign objects present in the tank rail will fall from the ball stopping slit, along the ball stopping piece of the ball stopping member, and into the downward flow path of the payout ball passage section due to the vibrations caused when the ball stopping member is operated.
The following technical idea has been developed in consideration of the above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that is less susceptible to the effects of foreign matter entering the ball dispensing passage portion.

[4-13-5b. Technical idea...exclusion of foreign matter]
"The door frame and
A main body frame located behind the door frame;
A ball dispensing passage portion that is bent into an inverted L shape connecting a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a dispensing device provided on a side of the main body frame;
A ball stopping member capable of opening and closing the flow path of the payout ball passage portion.
A ball stopper slit is opened from the bent portion of the ball dispensing passage portion that is bent into an inverted L shape toward the upstream passage bottom wall and the downstream passage side wall,
a ball stopping member that is slidably provided so as to be switchable between an insertion position where the ball stopping piece is inserted into the inside of the payout ball passage portion through the ball stopping slit to close the flow path of the game ball, and a withdrawal position where the ball stopping piece is withdrawn from the inside of the payout ball passage portion to open the flow path of the game ball,
The game machine is characterized in that, when the ball stopping member is in the protruding position, a flow-blocking space into which foreign objects can fall is formed between the rear end of the ball stopping piece and the beginning end of the ball stopping slit provided in the bottom wall of the upstream passage.
In the above, "a spherical tank provided above the main body frame" includes cases where the spherical tank is attached above the rear surface of the main body frame, where it is attached to the top surface of the main body frame, or where it is attached so as to straddle both, and similarly, "a dispensing device provided on the side of the main body frame" includes cases where the dispensing device is attached to the side of the rear surface of the main body frame, where it is attached to the side of the main body frame, or where it is attached so as to straddle both.
According to this gaming machine, even if a foreign object that had been stopped at the edge of the beginning of the ball stopping slit falls into the slit due to the vibration caused when the ball stopping member is switched from the retracted position to the thrust position, there is no risk of it landing on the ball stopping piece because there is a flow-blocking space between the rear end of the ball stopping piece and the beginning of the ball stopping slit. Therefore, the risk of a foreign object that was at the edge of the beginning of the ball stopping slit running down the ball stopping piece of the ball stopping member into the payout ball passage can be reduced. In particular, the ball stopping member may be given a certain load (a "click" or "click" feeling when switching) by the engagement of an elastic lock piece to prevent blind movement, and in such a case, the surrounding area vibrates more strongly each time a switching operation is performed, making it highly useful.
In addition, in the above gaming machine, the flow-blocking space portion may be bottomless and pass through the ball stopping member in the vertical direction.
In such a case, the foreign matter passes through the flow-blocking space and is discharged to the outside, and hardly accumulates on the ball stopping member, so that the ball stopping member is unlikely to become dirty even after long-term use.
In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the flow-blocking space portion may be bottomed, having a receiving bottom portion protruding from the rear bottom portion of the ball stopping piece of the ball stopping member.
In such a case, for example, even if the density of components below the tank rail is high and electronic components such as control boards that may be damaged by the intrusion or adhesion of foreign matter are located directly below the flow-blocking space, the foreign matter will accumulate at the receiving bottom of the ball stopping member and will not be discharged to the outside, so heat dissipation holes can be drilled in the board box that stores the board without having to worry about foreign matter intruding from above.

[4-14. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of another embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 118 to 123. Fig. 118(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the right front, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the left front. Fig. 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 118(a) seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 118(a) seen from the lower right rear. Fig. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 118(a) seen from the front, and Fig. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 118(a) seen from the rear. Fig. 122(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ki-Ki line in Fig. 118(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Cou-K line in Fig. 118(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ke-Ke line in Fig. 118(a). Figure 123 is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 118 (a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment replaces the board unit 620 described above and is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are used for configurations similar to those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The base unit 660 is provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, and is made up of a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 662 attached to the rear side of the front base 661 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface, and an out ball passage 663 through which game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, and a detection unit 666 for detecting game balls B flowing through the out ball passage 663 one by one. The lower full-ball path unit 610 is provided with an out sensor 664 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right when viewed from the front, a ball removal and discharge passage 665 that is located behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and through which the game ball B guided by the ball removal and discharge section 627 flows, and a passage wall member 666 that is attached to the rear base 662 to close the rear side of the ball removal and discharge passage 665.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a roughly constant height in the vertical direction, with an out ball passage 663 and a ball removal guide portion 627 formed in front of the partition wall portion 662a, and a ball removal discharge passage 665 formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear on the side rear of the partition wall portion 662a.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 formed from transparent materials. Therefore, the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660, making it easy to check for ball blockages, etc.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in front of a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, with the front end open, and the open front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 has a ball discharge receiving section 663a that opens upward at approximately the center of the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left-right, an out-ball straightening section 663b that straightens the game balls B received by the ball discharge receiving section 663a into a line while causing them to snake widely left-right, a downward guide section 663c that guides the game balls B straightened into a line by the out-ball straightening section 663b downward, and an out-ball discharge port 663d that opens downward at the lower end of the downward guide section 663c and discharges the game balls B downward from the underside of the base unit 660. The out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 123).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that its depth in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end is lower.

The out ball straightening section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a toward the bottom of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end is lower. In addition, the depth of the out ball straightening section 663b in the front-to-back direction narrows as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, the depth is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. In addition, the height of the part of the out ball straightening section 663b to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a decreases as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the height is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. This allows the game balls B to be aligned in a row in the out ball straightening section 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and is curved in a small crank shape backward in the middle of the vertical direction so that the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall portion). As a result, the downstream end of the lower guide portion 663c (out-ball discharge port 663d) is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the lower guide portion 663c. The cranked portion of the lower guide portion 663c is curved so that it does not have a portion extending horizontally, so that even if the game ball B passes through the out sensor 664 and hits the cranked portion, it does not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long lifespan, since the game ball B passes through it frequently.

The ball removal guide section 627 is located to the left of the ball discharge receiving section 663a in the out ball passage 663. The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall section 662a of the rear base 662, and is connected to the upstream end of the ball removal and discharge passage 665 (see Figure 122 (a) etc.).

The ball ejection passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball ejection passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state where it is open to the rear, and its rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of this ball ejection passage 665 is located about one outer diameter of a game ball B forward of the rear end of the rear base 662. In other words, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed between the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of this ball removal and discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball removal and guide section 627, and has a horizontal guide section 665a that extends to the right of the ball discharge receiving section 663a at the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving section 663a of the out ball passage 663, a vertical guide section 665b that extends vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide section 665a to the underside of the rear base 662, and a ball removal and discharge port 665c that opens downward at the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball removal and discharge port 665c is located slightly rearward of the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 123).

The ball ejection passage 665 also has multiple protrusions 665d that protrude inward alternately at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball ejection passage 665 allows the game ball B flowing through the vertical guide section 665b, which extends vertically downward, to alternately come into contact with the multiple protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag pattern, thereby suppressing an increase in its flow speed, and suppressing the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c.

This ball removal and discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage consisting of a horizontal guide section 665a and a vertical guide section 665b, so that when the ball removal lever 593 is operated to discharge the game balls B in the ball tank 552, many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then detected by the out sensor 664 and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552, etc., the game ball B discharged to the ball removal passage 580b side by operating the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through the ball removal guide portion 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the out ball passage 663. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately counted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can calculate an accurate payout rate (ball payout rate) of game balls B based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664.

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the sum of the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and received by the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the special winning port 2006, etc., and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and then received by the out port 1008 without being received by any of the winning ports, and is the number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a (number of shot balls).

Note that the payout rate (ball output rate) changes depending on the game status, so the payout rate within a specified period (for example, per unit time, per specified time, per day, etc.) is calculated as follows: "Number of payouts within a specified period ÷ Number of balls out within a specified period = Payout rate within a specified period."

In addition, according to this embodiment, the base unit 620A of the main frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, and the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by an out sensor 664. Since the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected, there is no need to provide the game board 5 with an out ball detection unit 3030 that detects "out balls," and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce costs.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. This means that the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are located away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and this reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the game ball B, whose flow speed has been suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663, is detected by the out sensor 664. This makes it possible to weaken the impact on the out sensor 664 caused by the flow of the game ball B, thereby reducing the risk of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, the player will want many game balls B to be paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, the player will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Furthermore, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits a fraudulent act that pays out many game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal, making it easier for other players and staff at the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent act, which will make the player hesitate to commit the fraudulent act, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, this may be due to a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., obstructing nails N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), making it possible to respond to the malfunction early and reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit 3030) for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the game ball B being discharged. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, a pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made that provides more entertainment for the player.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d protruding alternately, the speed at which the game balls B flow through the vertical guide section 665b can be reduced, thereby preventing damage to the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 caused by the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment of the game hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665.

In addition, a meandering out-ball straightening section 663b is provided in the out-ball passage 663, and a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d is provided in the ball removal and discharge passage 665, which can suppress the circulation speed of the game balls B, thereby reducing the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B circulating in the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665. This reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and payout control board 633, which are located nearby, and allows the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction less due to the circulation of game balls B.

In addition, because the out ball outlet 663d and the ball outlet 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are open downward, the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, so that the game balls B are less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and damage to the other pachinko machines or walls can be avoided. In addition, because the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, the ejected game balls B are less likely to scatter, and it is possible to easily collect the game balls B ejected from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 on the island equipment side.

Furthermore, a base unit 660 having a ball ejection passage 665 and an out ball passage 663 is provided below the portion of the main frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached. This allows the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a on the game board 5 to be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by ejecting it downward. This allows the configuration for ejecting the game ball B on the game board 5 to be simple (easy) and reduces the cost of the game board 5.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out-ball ejection opening 663d of the out-ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, it is possible to prevent the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2. This prevents the game balls B flowing with force through the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2, which would damage the outer frame 2, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection opening 663d of the out ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, there is no need to advance the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) that collects the game balls B on the island equipment side to a position overlapping with the outer frame 2, which reduces the effort required to install the pachinko machine 1 and the effort required to move the pachinko machine 1.

[4-14a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the base unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to Figures 124 and 125. Figure 124 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. Figure 125(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is removable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in (a) with the out sensor removed.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 124 has a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear at the out ball outlet 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. In more detail, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a junction 663e that joins with the ball removal and discharge passage 665. The junction 663e opens downward, and its open end serves as the out ball outlet 663d (ball removal and discharge outlet 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward a short distance from the front wall of the out ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 124, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d can be caused to come into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally downward and rearward. As a result, when the present pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall, it is possible to easily release the game ball B toward the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B that is located behind the front of the island equipment (within the island equipment), and it is possible to reliably collect the game ball B on the island equipment side.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in Figure 124, the guide piece 667 can direct the release direction of the game ball B diagonally downward and rearward, so that even if the out ball discharge outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 is located near a position directly below the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 (a position near the front side within the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received into a bucket or the like within the island equipment. Therefore, since it is possible to position the out ball passage 663 (out ball discharge port 663d) as far forward as possible, the space behind the out ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be made wider, and the out ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., which reduces the impact on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out ball passage 663, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, the out sensor 664 is detachably attached from below to the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, there is a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c in the out ball passage 663, which is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guide section 663c, which is connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening section 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment, the base unit 660 is also formed from a transparent material, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has a main body 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and has its base end rotatably attached to the base unit 660, a through hole 668b that passes through the game ball B at a position that coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body 668a, and a resiliently deformable locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the opposite side of the base end of the main body 668a.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660, opposite the out ball straightening section 663b. The locking claw section 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking section 663g provided on the outer side of the out ball straightening section 663b side relative to the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is rotated so that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c is locked with the locking portion 663g to close the sensor cover 668. The main body portion 668a abuts against the underside of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 125 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and the game ball B that has flowed through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and then discharged downward through the through hole 668b. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release it from the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated around the base end side of the main body portion 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, and the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 moves away from the underside of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 125(b)).

As shown in FIG. 125(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated open, a certain amount of gap is created between the bottom end of the sensor cover 668 and the top end of the object at risk of contact, as indicated by the two-dot chain line (e.g., the top surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, the top end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or between the sensor cover 668 and the bottom end of the main body frame 4. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the object at risk of contact, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, the out sensor 664 detects all game balls B that are inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and so there is a risk that the out sensor 664 will wear out quickly and become damaged as many game balls B are circulated. However, as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is opened and closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with objects that may come into contact with the outer frame 2 or the like, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. In detail, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, there is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to vibrations caused by the contact of many game balls B, causing the sensor cover 668 to open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during play and the out sensor 664 falls downward, the out sensor 664 will no longer detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been shot into the play area 5a, and the occurrence of an abnormality will be reported by the main control board 1310, etc. When this abnormality is reported, the game hall staff will open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 to check for the abnormality, but because there is a gap between the bottom end of the open sensor cover 668 and objects that may come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, the main frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with objects that may come into contact with it, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion opposite the out ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor mounting recess 663f, and since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B becomes stuck in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the game ball B is stuck can be identified at a glance, and the jam of the game ball B can be quickly resolved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright, and it is easy to replace the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and to check inside the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660, etc.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that a game that was interrupted due to damage to the out sensor 664 can be resumed early, which reduces the player's frustration caused by the interruption of the game and prevents a decrease in interest. It also prevents a decrease in the operating rate of this pachinko machine 1, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 remains suspended from the base unit 660 and will not fall off, thereby preventing the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

In addition, the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) at an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B flow in the base unit 660. Therefore, the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 due to the flow of the game balls B is large on the side (one end side) that is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and relatively small on the side (other end side) of the locking claw portion 668c that is locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 as many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, most of it can be received on the one end side that is rotatably attached, so that the locking at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side is less likely to be released, and the sensor cover 668 can be reduced from opening and causing the out sensor 664 to fall off.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 126 to 136. Fig. 126 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine with the center member and the like made opaque. Fig. 127 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 126 seen from the right front, Fig. 128 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 126 seen from the left front, and Fig. 129 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. Fig. 130 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. Fig. 131 is a front view of the game board with the center member and the like made transparent. Fig. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Fig. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and seen from the back. Fig. 134 is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Fig. 126, and Fig. 135 is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Fig. 126. Figure 136 is a front view of the game board with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle pins.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by a player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is provided with a general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2002, a normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a big winning hole 2005, and a special winning hole 2006, which provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) by receiving or passing a game ball B. This game board 5 is for playing an entertaining game in which the handle 195 is operated to strike the ball B and the ball B circulates within the game area 5a so that the ball B can be received by the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the normal winning hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the special winning hole 2006, etc., within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and has the game area 5a on its front side. A number of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the part of the front side of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 134, FIG. 173, etc.) that controls the game content that is played by shooting the game ball B into the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a panel relay board 1710 that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and various sensors and drive motors, which will be described later, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

The performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the performance display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the performance display device 1600 on the rear of the rear unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 is connected to the main control board 1310, the general prize opening sensor 3001, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2402, the normal prize opening sensor 2401, the large prize opening sensor 2403, the special prize opening sensor 2513, the first V prize opening sensor 2514, the first loss opening sensor 2516, the second V prize opening sensor 2515, the third loss opening sensor 2518, the start opening solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the special prize opening sensor 2515, the start opening solenoid 2415, the special prize opening sensor 2516, the special prize opening sensor 2517, the special prize opening sensor 2518, the special prize opening sensor 2519, the special prize opening sensor 2520, the special prize opening sensor 2521, the special prize opening sensor 2522, the special prize opening sensor 2523, the special prize opening sensor 2524, the special prize opening sensor 2525, the special prize opening sensor 2526, the special prize opening sensor 2527, the special prize opening sensor 2528, the special prize opening sensor 2529, the special prize opening sensor 2530, the special prize opening sensor 2531, the special prize opening sensor 2532, the special prize opening sensor 2533, the special prize opening sensor 2534, the special prize opening sensor 2535, the special prize opening sensor 2536, the special prize opening sensor 2537, the special It is used to relay connections with the prize port solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, the second distribution solenoid 2545, the third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, the third distribution right drive motor 2562, the third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, the magnetic sensor 2010, the vibration sensor 3003, and the out sensor 664, etc.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to receive a game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a normal winning opening 2003 which is always open to receive a game ball B at a further different position in the game area 5a, a second starting opening 2004 which is capable of receiving a game ball B depending on the result of a normal lottery which is drawn when a game ball B is received by the normal winning opening 2003, and a ball that is thrown into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The large prize winning port 2005 can receive the game ball B depending on the first or second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B, the special prize winning port 2006 can receive the game ball B depending on the first or second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starter port 2002 or the second starter port 2004, the first V prize winning port 2007 and the second V prize winning port 2008 are provided with an opportunity to receive the game ball B received into the special prize winning port 2006, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 that detect magnetic fields acting fraudulently within the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 is made up of a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002, a side unit 2200 which is attached to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front so as to follow the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning ports 2001, an upper left side unit 2300 which is attached slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a front unit 2300 which is attached to the front of the play area 5a. The attacca unit 2400 is attached to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005; and a frame-shaped center member 2500 is attached above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front within the game area 5a, and has a special winning port 2006, a first V winning port 2007, and a second V winning port 2008.

The attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a normal winning port sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the normal winning port 2003, a second starting port sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the second starting port 2004, and a large winning port sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the large winning port 2005. The center member 2500 is equipped with a special winning port sensor 2513 that detects a game ball B received in the special winning port 2006, a first V winning port sensor 2514 that detects a game ball B received in the first V winning port 2007, and a first losing port sensor 2516 that detects a game ball B received in the first losing port 2535.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached. The rear unit 3000 also includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning port 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in a first starting port 2002 provided in the starting port unit 2100 (see FIG. 173).

The rear unit 3000 also includes a light guide plate performance unit 3100 mounted inside the rear box 3010, a rear bottom ball discharge unit 3150 mounted on the lower front surface of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 and receiving game balls B from the starting unit 2100 and side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 and discharging them downward, and a rear right ball discharge unit 3170 mounted on the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 and receiving game balls B from the first distribution device 2530 and second distribution device 2540 of the center member 2500 and discharging them downward.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 and includes a back front performance unit 3200 extending along both the left and right sides and the top side of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, a back front lower left performance unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, a back front lower right performance unit 3400 attached to the lower right on the front side of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, and a sub-status indicator 3500 that is always visible near the right end of the back upper decorative body 3211 on the back front performance unit 3200.

[5-1. Previous components]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 137A and 137B. Figure 137A(a) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel as seen from the back, and Figure 137B is a front view of the partition member constituting the front component separated into a first partition member and a second partition member.

The majority of the component 1000 is made of a partition member 1000A made of a transparent synthetic resin.
The partition member 1000A has a predetermined thickness in the front-to-rear direction (for example, a front-to-rear width of at least one gaming ball with a diameter of approximately 11 mm (specifically, approximately 16 mm to 18 mm)), and its outer shape when viewed from the front is approximately square that roughly matches the outer shape of the gaming panel 1100, and its inner shape when viewed from the front is approximately semicircular in the left half and approximately rectangular in the right half, which penetrates in the front-to-rear direction, and the inner surface of such inner shape partitions a gaming area 5a on the front of the gaming panel 1100.
As shown in Fig. 137B, the partitioning member 1000A is composed of a first partitioning member 1000A1 that partitions the play area 5a from the left side to the upper right side as viewed from the front, and a second partitioning member 1000A2 that partitions the play area 5a from the upper right side to the lower right side as viewed from the front, as viewed from the front. The first partitioning member 1000A1 of the partitioning member 1000A is provided with a ball hitting portion 1006 at a position corresponding to the upper right corner against which the game ball shot from the ball launcher 540 can collide, and the upper end of the second partitioning member 1000A2 is connected to the end of the hanging portion 1800 that hangs down from the ball hitting portion 1006.

The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end toward the left of the center in the left-right direction in a clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and extending to the upper right diagonal direction; an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 and extends in a semicircular shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to the upper left diagonal direction in a front view (approximately in the range from 6 o'clock to 11 o'clock on the clock face); and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 that is located to the right of the play area 5a in a front view. The rail 1003 is formed at the lowest position and slopes downward toward the rear, a lower right rail 1004 slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right edge of the front component 1000 so that the right end is slightly higher, and a right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right edge of the front component 1000 to below the ball contact section 1006, with the upper part curved toward the inside of the front component 1000.
The outer rail 1001 of the embodiment is a metal rail member having the same width as the front-rear width of the first partition member 1000A1, and is attached to the inside surface of the first partition member 1000A1 on the playing area 5a side in a state where it is bent into an arc shape by stress within the elastic limit of the metal material. The lower right rail 1004 is formed on the inside surface of the lower part of the second partition member 1000A2, and the right rail 1005 is formed by the hanging part 1800 of the first partition member 1000A1 and the inside surface of the vertical part of the second partition member 1000A2 connected thereto.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 at the upper end of the inner rail 1002, as shown in FIG. 137A(a), which can prevent game balls that have passed through the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and entered the game area 5a from flowing back toward the inner rail 1002. This backflow prevention member 1007 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003, at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged through the outlet 1008 to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) and is collected in the island equipment of the game hall (not shown).

In addition, the front component 1000 is provided with security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the vicinity of the portion extending approximately vertically from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3 is inserted into this security recess 1009. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The first component 1000 (first partition member 1000A1) also has a notch 1010 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1103 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the notch 1010 and the notch 1103 and face forward.

Furthermore, the component 1000 (first partition member 1000A1) has a function display unit attachment section 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment section 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

The components 1000 (first partition member 1000A1 and second partition member 1000A2) are formed almost entirely transparent as described above, allowing the images and lighting for effects, which will be described later, of the game panel 1100 arranged behind to be seen from the front. In particular, if a cell sheet is attached to decorate the surface of the game panel 1100 from the game area 5a to the entire outside, and the first partition member 1000A1 and second partition member 1000A2, which are made transparent, are placed on top of that, the boundary between the game area 5a and its outside becomes unclear, making the game area 5a appear visually wider.

[5-1-1. Other forms of the constituent members]
Here, other configurations of the component 1000 will be described with reference to Figures 137C to 137O. Figure 137C is a front view of the first partition member, Figure 137D is a perspective view of the first partition member as seen from the front side, Figure 137E is a perspective view of the first partition member as seen from the rear side, Figure 137F is an exploded perspective view of the first partition member as seen from the rear side, Figure 137G is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 137C, Figure 137H is a perspective view of another configuration of the first partition member as seen from the front side, Figure 137I is a perspective view of yet another configuration of the first partition member as seen from the rear side, Figure 137I is a perspective view of the first partition member as seen from the front side, Figure 137I is a perspective view ... 137J is an exploded oblique view of Figure 137I, Figure 137K is a front view of the second partition member, Figure 137L is an oblique view showing a portion of the second partition member in cross section as viewed from the front side, Figure 137M is a cross-sectional view along line B-B of Figure 137K, Figure 137N is a cross-sectional view along line CC of Figure 137K, and Figure 137O shows the joined state of the first partition member and the second partition member, where (a) is a cross-sectional view of the essential parts showing the state before joining, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the essential parts showing the state after joining.

[5-1-2. Partitioning member]
The partition member 1000A is provided with a partition wall portion 1801 having an average plate thickness of approximately 3 mm, facing the game area 5a, with a front-to-rear width larger than the diameter of a game ball (for example, at least the width of one game ball with a diameter of approximately 11 mm, specifically approximately 16 mm to 18 mm), and a support base portion 1802 formed on the side of the partition wall portion 1801 opposite the game area.
The support base portion 1802 has a partition wall support portion 1803 formed on the back side, which is the side opposite the playing area of the partition wall portion 1801, in a direction parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a surrounding outer wall portion 1804 that is integral with the partition wall support portion 1803 and forms the outer surface of the partition member 1000A.

[5-1-3. Partition member (first partition member)]
The first partition member 1000A1 of the partition member 1000A, which partitions the playing area 5a from the left side when facing the front to the upper right side, has a metal protective member 1819 removably attached to the outer surface (the outer surface of the surrounding outer wall portion 1804 on the left side when facing the front) of the partition member 1000A, which corresponds to the hinge means (upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and lower door frame hinge member 125) of the door frame 3, as shown in Figures 137C to 137G.

[5-1-3-1. Protective member for first compartment member]
As shown in the exploded oblique view of Figure 137F, the protective member 1819 is a metal strip that is adapted to fit flush with the installation recess 1806 formed on the outer surface of the surrounding outer wall portion 1804 of the first partition member 1000A1, and is accurately positioned by fitting its own receiving hole 1808 into short protrusions 1807 protruding above and below the installation recess 1806.
The protective member 1819 has mounting pieces 1809 formed on the upper and lower rear edge sides that bend toward the rear side of the first partition member 1000A1, and the mounting pieces 1809 are removably fastened to the female threaded portion 1810 of the support base portion 1802 of the first partition member 1000A1 by passing the set screw 1805 through the set screw 1805.
This protective member 1819 may be a simple strip as shown in Fig. 137H if it has a certain bending strength, but in this embodiment, a vertically long convex forming portion 1811 is press-formed, so that even a thin strip can obtain the required bending depth. This allows the protective member 1819 to be made lighter.
The front view shape of the first partition member 1000A1 corresponding to the hinge means side of the partition member 1000A is a straight line shape on the outer surface side that roughly follows the vertical side of the game panel 1100, and a curved shape with an arc-shaped concave inner surface on the playing area 5a side, with a narrow width portion 1812 near the vertical center where the distance between the outer surface and the inner surface is the smallest, and the protective member 1819 is long enough to sufficiently cover the narrow width portion 1812.

In addition, the protective member 1819 of this embodiment is provided with a conductive member 1813 having elasticity such as a gasket facing the outer rail 1001, which is a rail member made of metal, and the conductive member 1813 abuts against the back surface of the outer rail 1001 through the conductive notch 1814 provided in the partition wall portion 1801 of the first partition member 1000A1 and the wall of the installation recess 1806. Therefore, since the outer rail 1001 and the protective member 1819 are electrically connected through the conductive member 1813, the static electricity charged on the game ball can be discharged from the outer rail 1001 to the earth means such as the main body frame 4 through the protective member 1819. At that time, the rib-shaped protrusion of the convex forming portion 1811 ensures contact with the earth means and can improve the reliability of the static electricity countermeasures. In addition, it is preferable to install the conductive member 1813 in correspondence with the narrowest part of the narrow width portion 1812 of the first partition member 1000A1. By doing so, the conductive member 1813 can be made smaller, and the amount of protrusion when attached to the protective member 1819 can also be made smaller. This reduces the risk that the conductive member 1813 will get caught on a tool or the like and become detached or damaged when handling the protective member 1819.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the protective member 1819, the tightening direction of the mounting set screw 1805 is set in the thickness direction of the first partition member 1000A1. Therefore, even if the set screw 1805 loosens or is not tightened properly and the screw head protrudes, there is no risk of adversely affecting the contact between the protective member 1819 and the earthing means, and therefore the static electricity countermeasures using the protective member 1819 can function more effectively.
In addition, by setting the fastening direction of the mounting set screw 1805 in the thickness direction of the first partition member 1000A1 and from the rear side as described above, the set screw 1805 of the protective member 1819 cannot be removed when the first partition member 1000A1 is attached to the game panel 1100. This prevents the protective member 1819 from being mistakenly removed from the first partition member 1000A1. On the other hand, if the protective member 1819 can be attached and detached while the first partition member 1000A1 is attached to the game panel 1100, the protective member 1819 can be formed of a simple rectangular strip plate as shown in FIG. 137H, and the set screw 1805 can be fastened from the outer surface side of the first partition member 1000A1. This allows the protective member 1819 to be attached and detached for repair or replacement while the first partition member 1000A1 is attached to the game panel 1100.
137I and 137J, the protective member 1819 may be fastened from both the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the first partition member 1000A1 and the outer surface side with set screws 1805. In such a case, the integrity of the protective member 1819 with the first partition member 1000A1 is improved, so that the protective member 1819 exerts a higher protective function for the first partition member 1000A1.

Since the partition member 1000A (first partition member 1000A1) of this embodiment has the above-mentioned configuration, when the door frame 3 is open and the game board 5 is attached or detached from the main frame 4, even if the outer surface of the first partition member 1000A1 is accidentally hit against a gaming machine component such as the door frame 3, it will not be easily damaged due to the cover of the protective member 1819, and even if the protective member 1819 is deformed by the impact, it can be replaced by removing the locking screw 1805.
In addition, the narrow portion 1812 of the first partition member 1000A1 covered with the protective member 1819 is less likely to break, so it can be made as narrow as possible to make the play area 5a wider. In particular, by providing the protective member 1819 with a convex forming portion 1811 having a long convex stripe in the vertical direction, for example by press molding, the bending strength is improved compared to a flat plate structure with a square cross section, so that the narrow portion 1812 of the partition member 1000A can be made even narrower, and the play area 5a can be made wider accordingly.

[5-1-3-2. Specific members of first compartment member]
137B does not have a protective member 1819, and before it is attached to the game panel 1100, there is a risk that it may bounce around the narrow portion 1812 as shown by the imaginary line in the figure. The reason for this is that the metal outer rail 1001 attached to the inside surface of the first partition member 1000A1 is bent into an arc by stress within its elastic limit, and the bending strength of the narrow portion 1812 of the first partition member 1000A1 cannot withstand the restoring elasticity.
In contrast, the first partition member 1000A1 of this embodiment is provided with the metal protective member 1819 as described above, and the bending strength of the protective member 1819 is sufficient to resist the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001, so that the shape before attachment to the gaming panel 1100 is corrected to a nearly straight shape that is aligned with the vertical side of the gaming panel 1100. Therefore, the instability centered on the narrow width portion 1812 of the first partition member 1000A1 is corrected, improving the workability of attachment to the gaming panel 1100.
In this way, the protective member 1819 of the first compartment member 1000A1 can also function as a specific member having bending strength that can correct against the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001, and therefore the above-mentioned protective member 1819 can also be used as a specific member.
In addition, as shown in Figure 137F, the protective member 1819 is attached by a set screw 1805 whose tightening direction is in the thickness direction of the first partition member 1000A1.When the outer rail 1001 is first attached to the first partition member 1000A1, the first partition member 1000A1 bends due to the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001, so that the first partition member 1000A1 must be corrected with one hand while the set screw 1805 is tightened in a direction perpendicular to the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001 with the other hand, which may result in wasted movement by the worker.
In contrast, as shown in Figure 137H, the protective member 1819 is attached by a set screw 1805 whose tightening direction is a direction against the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001 (see arrow R in the same figure).Even if the outer rail 1001 is first attached to the first partition member 1000A and the first partition member 1000A1 is bent around the narrow portion 1812 due to the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001, the protective member 1819 can be attached to the first partition member 1000A1 and the set screw 1805 can be tightened to counter the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001.Therefore, the worker can support the first partition member 1000A1 with one hand while tightening the set screw 1805 with the other hand, thereby correcting the first partition member 1000A1.
Therefore, the specific member is preferably attached to the first partition member 1000A1 by a set screw 1805 whose tightening direction opposes the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001 as shown in FIG. 137H.

[5-1-4. Partition member (second partition member)]
As shown in Figs. 137K to 137N, the second partition member 1000A2, which partitions the right upper part to the right lower part when facing the front of the play area 5a, is integrally provided with a front-rear rib 1815 that straddles the back surface of the partition wall portion 1801 and the partition wall support portion 1803, and the ribs 1815 are arranged in a comb-teeth shape in the narrow width portion 1812 of the partition wall support portion 1803. The distance between the ribs 1815 may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball (about 11 mm), and is preferably about a little more than half of the diameter or less. Since the ribs 1815 are arranged in a comb-teeth shape in this way, the strength of the narrow width portion 1812 of the partition wall portion 1801 is increased, so that even if the game ball contacts the right rail 1005 depending on the gauge configuration, it can be bounced back stably, and it is also less likely to be damaged by the colliding game ball. In addition, since the portions of the partition wall support portion 1803 other than the narrow portion 1812 have sufficient left and right width to support the partition wall portion 1801, even if similar ribs 1815 are provided, there is no need to form them in a forest as described above.

However, if the ribs 1815 are arranged in a comb-like manner, the weight of the second partition member 1000A2 will naturally increase. Therefore, in the second partition member 1000A2 of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 137N, the combined length h in the front-rear direction of the partition wall support portion 1803 corresponding to the narrow width portion 1812 and the rib 1815 (the partition wall support portion 1803 and the rib 1815 may be located in either front-rear position, and the arrangement may be reversed from that in Figure 137N, i.e., the partition wall support portion 1803 may be located at the rear end of the rib 1815) is made smaller than the front-rear width H of the partition wall portion 1801, so that a smooth band 1816 with a width of (H-h) is formed at the front edge portion of the partition wall portion 1801. By forming this smooth band 1816 at the front edge of the partition wall 1801, the presence of the ribs 1815 standing on the back side of the partition wall 1801 becomes less noticeable, and the weight can be reduced by the amount of the ribs 1815 that have been removed. Preferably, the smooth band 1816 is formed in front of the area where the game ball rolling in the game area 5a may come into contact. This prevents the game ball from rubbing against the smooth band 1816, so that the transparency is less likely to decrease due to scratches, and of course there is no risk of damage due to the collision of the game ball. Note that the front position of the game ball in the game area 5a is restricted by the glass unit 160, so that the game ball cannot come into contact with the partition wall 1801 in the area within the radius of the game ball from the glass unit 160. Therefore, it is preferable to form the smooth band 1816 of the partition wall 1801 in this area.
In this embodiment, in order to reduce the weight of the second partition member 1000A2, the front-to-rear width of the surrounding outer wall portion 1804 corresponding to the forest of ribs 1815 is made shorter than other portions as shown in Figures 137L to 137N. Of course, the surrounding outer wall portion 1804 corresponding to the forest of ribs 1815 may ultimately be eliminated. Note that the perspective view of Figure 137L shows the state of the internal ribs 1815 by cutting out a part of the partition wall support portion 1803 and the surrounding outer wall portion 1804, and the unhatched part of the rib 1815 shown in the enlarged view of the same figure is exposed to the outside.
In addition, color psychology may be applied as a means for reducing the weight of the game board 5. That is, in terms of color psychology, people tend to feel oppressive toward darker colors and to feel lighter toward whitish colors depending on the degree of brightness and luminosity. Therefore, in order to make the game board 5 feel lighter, it is advisable to form the entire board in a whitish color. If the board is transparent, it is possible to make the board invisible, so that the game board 5 can be made to feel lighter in terms of color psychology simply by making the first partition member 1000A1 and the second partition member 1000A2 transparent. More preferably, if the cell sheet that decorates the surface of the game panel 1100 is made in a whitish color and the color is visible through the transparent first partition member 1000A1 and the second partition member 1000A2, the psychological oppressive feeling of the game board 5 is alleviated, and the efficiency of transportation and installation work on the island equipment can be improved and fatigue can be reduced.

[5-1-5. Partitioning member (joining of first partitioning member and second partitioning member)]
As described above, the partition member 1000A comprises a first partition member 1000A1 which partitions the playing area 5a from the left side facing the front to the upper right side and has a ball hitting portion 1006 against which playing balls shot from the ball launcher 540 can collide, and a second partition member 1000A2 which partitions the playing area 5a from the upper right side facing the front to the lower right side and whose upper end is joined to the end of a hanging portion 1800 extending downward from the ball hitting portion 1006 of the first partition member 1000A1, and the right rail 1005 is formed by joining the end of the hanging portion 1800 of the first partition member 1000A1 to the upper end of the second partition member 1000A2.
In this embodiment, the joint between the end of the hanging portion 1800 of the first partition member 1000A1 and the upper end of the second partition member 1000A2 forms an inner joint portion 1817 on the playing area 5a side of the upper end of the second partition member 1000A2, as shown in Figures 137O (a) and (b), while an outer joint portion 1818 that can engage with the anti-playing area side of the inner joint portion 1817 is formed at the end of the hanging portion 1800 of the first partition member 1000A1, so that the upper end of the second partition member 1000A2 is positioned on the playing area 5a side, and the end of the hanging portion 1800 of the first partition member 1000A1 is positioned on the anti-playing area side of the upper end.
By doing so, the connection between the first partition member 1000A1 and the second partition member 1000A2 is stabilized, and furthermore, the impact of the game ball applied to the ball hitting portion 1006 of the first partition member 1000A1 is less likely to be transmitted to the play area 5a side of the second partition member 1000A2, that is, the right rail 1005. This is because the impact of the game ball hitting the ball hitting portion 1006 acts in a direction that pushes the hanging portion 1800 of the first partition member 1000A1 toward the opposite play area side, and the force in that direction causes the outer mating portion 1818 of the first partition member 1000A1 to move away from the inner mating portion 1817 of the second partition member 1000A2. Therefore, the game ball traveling along the right rail 1005 is also less likely to be affected by the impact of the game ball hitting the ball hitting portion 1006.

[5-1-6. Technical means P to R]
The above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the following technical means P to R.

[5-1-6-P1. Technical means P1]
A removable game board having a game area in which a game ball shot by a ball launching device rolls;
A game machine having a door frame supported by a hinge means so as to be rotatable between a closed state in which the front of the game board is covered in a visible state and an open state in which the game board can be attached and detached. In the machine,
The game board is
A plate-shaped game panel having the game area on a front surface thereof;
A partition member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and attached to the front surface of the game panel to partition the game area,
1. A gaming machine comprising: a metal protective member attached to an outer surface of the partition member on the side opposite the gaming area, the outer surface corresponding to the hinge means side of the door frame.
Generally, the game board 5 is attached and detached with the door frame 3 open. Therefore, when attaching and detaching the game board 5, the outer surface corresponding to the hinge means side of the door frame 3 is in contact with the game machine configuration such as the door frame 3. There is a possibility that the partition member 1000A may hit a component, and the impact may damage the outer surface of the partition member 1000A. However, by attaching a metal protective member 1819 to the outer surface of the partition member 1000A, Even if the outer surface of the game board 5 is accidentally struck against a component part of the game machine such as the door frame 3 when attaching or detaching the game board 5, it is protected by the protective member 1819 and is not easily damaged. Even if the partition member is deformed, it can be easily detached and replaced, so there is no risk of damage to the partition member itself.

[5-1-6-P2. Technical means P2]
The front view shape of the part of the partition member corresponding to the hinge means side is a straight line shape on the outer surface side that is substantially along the vertical side of the game panel, and the inner surface on the game area side is a curved shape that is concave in an arc shape,
The gaming machine described in technical means P1 is characterized in that the protective member is arranged so as to cover at least the narrow portion where the distance between the outer surface and the inner surface of the partition member is small.
The narrow portion 1812 of the partition member 1000A covered with the protective member 1819 can be made narrower because the risk of breakage is reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the play area 5a wider than before.

[5-1-6-P3. Technical means P3]
The gaming machine described in technical means P1 or P2 is characterized in that the protective member is provided with a long convex portion in the vertical direction.
By providing the protective member 1819 with a long convex portion 1811 in the vertical direction, the bending strength is increased, making it possible to further narrow the narrow portion 1812 of the partition member 1000A and expand the play area.

[5-1-6-P4. Technical means P4]
The partition member has a metal rail member on the inner surface against which the game ball can come into contact,
The gaming machine according to any one of technical means P1 to P3, further characterized in that the protective member and the rail member are connected by a conductive member.
The protective member 1819 and the outer rail 1001, which is a rail member, are electrically connected by the conductive member 1813, so that the static electricity charged on the game ball is transferred from the outer rail 1001 through the protective member 1819 to an appropriate external earth. Means can be discharged.

[5-1-6-P5. Technical means P5]
The gaming machine described in technical means P4 is characterized in that the protective member is attached by a set screw whose tightening direction is the thickness direction of the partition member.
In such a gaming machine, even if the set screw 1805 becomes loose or the screw head is protruded due to improper tightening, there is no risk of adversely affecting the contact between the protective member 1819 and the earthing means to be electrically connected. This makes it possible to more effectively counter static electricity via 1819.

[5-1-6-Q1. Technical means Q1]
A game board having a game area in which a game ball shot out by a ball launching device rolls,
The game board is:
A plate-shaped game panel having the game area on a front surface thereof;
A partition member that partitions the game area by being attached to the front surface of the game panel,
The partition member is
A partition wall portion having a front-to-rear width larger than the diameter of the game ball;
A support base portion formed on the opposite side of the partition wall to the play area,
The support base portion is
A partition wall support portion formed on a rear surface of the partition wall portion on a side opposite to the game area in a direction parallel to a front surface of the game panel;
a front-rear rib extending between the rear surface of the partition wall and the partition wall support portion;
A gaming machine characterized in that the ribs are arranged in a comb-teeth shape in a narrow portion of the partition wall support portion, which is narrow when viewed from the front.
According to this gaming machine, the strength of the partition wall portion 1801 is increased by providing the ribs 1815 in a comb-tooth shape on the narrow width portion 1812 of the partition member 1000A, so that the game ball can be brought into contact with the partition wall portion 1801 in a gauge configuration. Even if there is a ball, it can bounce back stably and is unlikely to be damaged by a colliding game ball.

[5-1-6-Q2. Technical means Q2]
The combined length of the partition wall support portion corresponding to the narrow width portion and the rib in the front-rear direction is made smaller than the front-rear width of the partition wall portion, so that a smooth band is formed at the front edge portion of the partition wall portion. The gaming machine according to technical means Q1 is characterized in that it is configured to
In addition, the smooth band need only be smooth and free of bumps and may be gently curved as a whole along the edge of the play area.
By forming a smooth zone 1816 without ribs 1815 at the front edge portion of the partition wall portion 1801, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the ribs 1815 that have been removed.

[5-1-6-Q3. Technical means Q3]
The gaming machine described in technical means Q2 is characterized in that the smooth band of the partition wall is formed forward of an area where a gaming ball rolling in the gaming area can come into contact.
This eliminates the risk of the game ball colliding with the smooth band 1816, and therefore there is no risk of damage.

[5-1-6-Q4. Technical means Q4]
The partition member is
A first partition member partitions the game area from the left side to the upper right side when viewed from the front and has a ball hitting portion with which the game balls shot from the ball launching device can hit;
a second partition member that partitions the play area from the upper right side to the lower right side when viewed from the front and has an upper end joined to an end of a hanging portion that extends downward from the ball hitting portion of the first partition member; ,
At the joint between the end of the hanging part of the first partition member and the upper end of the second partition member, the upper end of the second partition member is disposed on the playing area side, and the upper end of the second partition member is disposed on the opposite playing area side. A gaming machine described in any one of technical means Q1 to Q3, characterized in that an end of the hanging portion of the first partition member is arranged on the side.
In the above-mentioned partition member 1000A, the connection between the first partition member 1000A1 and the second partition member 1000A2 is stable, and further, the impact of the game ball applied to the ball hitting portion 1006 of the first partition member 1000A1 is absorbed by the second partition member 1000A2. The impact of the game ball hitting the ball hitting portion 1006 acts in a direction that pushes the hanging portion 1800 of the first partition member 1000A1 toward the opposite side of the game area 5a. This is because the end of the hanging portion 1800 of the first partition member 1000A1 is separated from the upper end of the second partition member 1000A2.

[5-1-6-R1. Technical means R1]
A detachable game board having a game area in which a game ball shot by a ball launching device rolls is provided;
The game board is:
A plate-shaped game panel having the game area on a front surface thereof;
A partition member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and attached to the front surface of the game panel to partition the game area,
The partition member is
A metal outer rail attached to the inner surface of the play area in a state where it is bent into an arc within its elastic limit;
A specific member attached to the outer surface opposite the play area corresponding to the outer rail and having a bending strength capable of resisting the restoring elasticity of the outer rail.
When a metal outer rail 1001 is attached to the inner surface of the partition member 1000A on the side of the play area 5a in a state where it is bent into an arc within the elastic limit, the partition member 1000A is bent around the weak part by the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001. However, as described above, a specific member having a bending strength capable of resisting the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001 is attached to the outer surface of the outer rail 1001 on the side opposite the play area. Since the shape of member 1000A is corrected to the state when attached to game panel 1100 and is stabilized in that shape, the workability of attaching member 1000A to game panel 1100 is improved.

[5-1-6-R2. Technical means R2]
The specific member is provided on the outer surface of the partition member including a narrow portion where the distance between the arc-shaped outer rail and the outer surface of the partition member is small. Machine.
If the specific member is provided on the outer surface of the partition member 1000A including the narrow width portion 1812 where the distance between the arc-shaped outer rail 1001 and the outer surface of the partition member 1000A is small, the specific member does not necessarily have to be provided on the entire outer surface of the partition member 1000A. It is not necessary to provide such a support, and in such a case, it can also contribute to reducing the weight of the game board 5.

[5-1-6-R3. Technical means R3]
The gaming machine described in technical means R2 is characterized in that the specific component is attached by a set screw whose tightening direction is a direction against the restoring elasticity of the outer rail.
In such a gaming machine, when the outer rail 1001 is attached to the partition member before the specific member, even if the partition member 1000A is bent around the narrow portion 1812 due to the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001, the specific member is attached to the partition member 1000A. By attaching the member and tightening the set screw 1805, it is possible to counter the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001. Therefore, the worker supports the partition member with one hand and tightens the set screw 1805 with the other hand while attaching the partition member 1000A. Therefore, the specific member can be efficiently attached to the partition member 1000A having the outer rail 1001.

[5-1-6-R4. Technical means R4]
The specific member is a metal plate-like member having a long convex portion formed in the vertical direction.
By providing the specific member with a vertically long convex forming portion 1811, the bending strength is improved, so that the narrow portion 1812 of the partition member 1000A can be made even narrower. Therefore, the play area 5a can be made wider by that amount. It becomes possible.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 137A etc. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and a front unit 2000 and a rear unit 3000 are attached to it. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see Fig. 136 etc.).

The gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment is formed from a wooden board such as plywood of a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is formed to be approximately the same as that of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1100 is formed at the lowest position within the gaming area 5a, and has an out recess 1101 recessed upward from the bottom end at a position corresponding to the out opening 1008 of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1100 also has multiple openings 1102 formed through it from front to back for mounting the front unit 2000.

The gaming panel 1100 also has a cutout 1103 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This cutout 1103 is formed to match the cutout 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the cutout 1010 and the cutout 1103 and face forward. Although not shown in the figure, a decorative sheet with a pattern or decoration that matches the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 132 and 133. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection part 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and the board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the discharged ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. This allows it to receive all game balls B discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008, and game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000, and discharge them downward from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving section 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 122). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control unit (1)]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 132 to 134. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see Figure 173) that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, a setting change board 1311 (see Figure 130) that can set game performance, and a board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the board box 1320. In addition, the board box 1320 has multiple sealing parts corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the board box 1320 is closed using one sealing part, the sealing part must be destroyed in order to open the board box 1320, and a trace of the opening and closing of the board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the board box 1320 can be detected, enhancing the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 also connects the function display unit 1400, the general prize opening sensor 3001, the first start opening sensor 3002, the normal prize opening sensor 2401, the second start opening sensor 2402, the large prize opening sensor 2403, the special prize opening sensor 2513, the first V prize opening sensor 2514, the first loss opening sensor 2516, the second V prize opening sensor 2515, the third loss opening sensor 2518, the start opening solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2413, the 14, connected to the reel winning port solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, the second distribution solenoid 2545, the third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, the third distribution right drive motor 2562, the third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, the magnetic sensor 2010, the vibration sensor 3003, and the out sensor 664, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is equipped with a setting key switch (also called a "setting switch") 1311a that can change and confirm the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, a setting change button (also called a "setting change switch") 1311b that can select and change the setting value, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that indicates a state in which changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the connectors SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting change button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 is approximately the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension of the setting change board 1311 is shorter than the horizontal distance dimension of the main control board 1310, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 coincides with the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the main control board 1310 with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and turned is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311, a setting change button 1311b having a pressing operation portion is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is arranged on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (below the left of the setting change button 1311b). A setting display 1310g consisting of a single seven-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a base monitor 1310h consisting of a row of six seven-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located below the center line of the main control board 1310 from the center to the right side, and a RAM clear switch 1310f with a push button is located near the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state as the initial position when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular socket runs vertically). When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the socket and can be removed from the socket. Note that in this embodiment, the depth dimension of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that even if the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the socket, the setting key and the components of other pachinko machines (or components of the island equipment of the game hall) installed in a row facing each other on the island equipment of the game hall will not interfere with each other and will not be damaged.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In addition, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, the two completely different functions of the setting key ON function and the decision key ON function can be realized by the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated, and the setting key ON operation and the decision key ON operation can be performed together by the setting key switch 1311a alone.

Although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding board box 1320, a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and their corresponding openings to tamper with the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The setting display 1310g and base monitor 1310h are housed in an internal space formed by the cover body and base body and cannot be touched at all, but because the cover body is molded transparent as described above, the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be seen through the cover body.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be spaced apart, and on the main control board 1310 The wiring patterns through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., the wiring pattern through which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal of the OFF of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other), and the wiring patterns through which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, setting change button 1311b, and setting display 1310g are briefly described below. First, the case where the setting value is changed is briefly described, followed by the case where the current setting value is displayed for confirmation. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to confirm the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

When changing the setting value, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be met. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, thereby turning on the power for the pachinko machine 1. The above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON state, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. When the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is satisfied, the setting value can be changed.

A person who changes the setting of a setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, the power switch 630a in Figure 7 is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from an off state to an on state.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, increases by one again, and controls the setting value to be displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When a person who changes the setting value decides on a setting value, he or she rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., rotates the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and then rotates it another 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON by performing a second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value decided by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, when the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), the decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, and then the setting value can be decided and the setting key can be removed from the setting key cylinder simply by turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a, improving operability.

The person who changes the setting value turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key was turned on to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from a state in which it is lit to a state in which it is turned off.

The person who changes the setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the work of changing the setting value.

When checking and displaying the currently set setting value, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the insertion hole of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state, and the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be met. In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), and then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion hole of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state.

A person who checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a setting key ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value that is set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned to the first ON operation) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains off, and even if a person who wants to confirm and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the setting value does not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g does not change either.

When the person who checks and displays the currently set setting values has finished checking the currently set setting values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it.

The person who wishes to confirm and display the currently set setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the confirmation and display of the currently set setting value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions require that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. Meanwhile, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions require, as described above, that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition have a common requirement in that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. However, they differ in that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "when power is restored," while the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power is restored."

Here, to briefly explain the setting values, the "setting values" can change the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery when transitioning from a special probability mode to a normal mode, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls B that the player can acquire can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects various tables (e.g., a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is specified, a jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a jackpot pattern is specified, a small jackpot determination table in which the ratio of small jackpot determination values indicating that a small jackpot has been won is specified, a small jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a small jackpot pattern is specified, a normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from a probability change to a normal time is specified, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, or selects various tables (e.g., an allocation table in which the allocation time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. In addition, the various tables used in the various lottery judgments are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and some are set so that the values are different based on the relationship between a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but the range may be smaller or larger than this. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or it may be eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality, and if it determines that there is an abnormality and the main control side power-off processing does not end normally when the power is cut off, displays an error message to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in its own built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, out of the game balls B that have been launched into the game area 5a. Of the game balls B that have been launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 173, etc.), and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a may also be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned ON as the decision key, and this decision key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "variant example (1) of the decision key").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the setting change board 1311. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position of the enter key button on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switch button 1311b. The cover of the board box 1320 has stickers with the names of each button printed on them affixed to the positions corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the decision key button or the setting switching button 1311b (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portion may be different in color, the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b may have different external shapes or pressing operation portion shapes, or other types of switches not having a pressing operation portion may be used as the decision key button. Examples of other types of switches not having a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. In addition, when a decision key button and a setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so that they are spaced apart, and on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart). Also, if a confirmation key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the confirmation key (2)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 of the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 in the handle unit 180, which detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether or not the player wishes to forcibly stop the shooting of the game ball B, may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input via the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and whether or not the decision key is ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the palm or fingers are not touching the handle 195, and/or can determine that the decision key is ON when the shooting of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the shooting of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the aspect of the handle touch sensor (which may include the aspect of the single button operation sensor) may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (3)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a firing reference pulse from a firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 described later is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be shot per minute toward the game area 5a, and is generated based on a clock signal from an oscillator circuit. In this case, when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas when the firing reference pulse is not input, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is not ON (the form of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (4)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to In the past, the signal was input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but if a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movement of a player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor may be branched in the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The distance measuring sensor detects the movement of a player by transmitting light emitted by a light emitting unit through a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflecting on the arm or hand of the player within a predetermined distance dimension, and the reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by a light receiving unit. In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance sensor via the relay board, it determines whether or not there is motion based on this detection signal, and if it determines that there is motion, it can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas if it determines that there is no motion, it can determine that the decision key is not ON (the aspect of the distance sensor is sometimes referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (5)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a on which this serial output circuit is provided was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or on the dispensing control board 633. When the serial information outputted serially from this serial output circuit is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether it conveys the setting key ON, the decision key ON, or OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "variant (6) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to return it to its original position, which is the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit that can output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. This can improve security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a on which this pulse output circuit is provided is provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the decision key ON, and the pulse width is set to 5 ms when the information conveys the OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether the information conveys the setting key ON, the decision key ON, or the OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "variant (7) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON state, and this decision A setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the decision key ON signal, The voltage level of the ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal may be set to an intermediate potential (e.g., a potential of 2V to 3V out of a range of 0V to 5V) between the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, and a comparator circuit may be provided in the main control board 1310. The comparison results of the comparator circuit may be input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a may determine the ON/OFF state of the setting key ON signal, the ON/OFF state of the decision key ON signal, and the ON/OFF state of the OFF signal. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a (the embodiment of the setting key switch that uses an intermediate potential may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (8)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to modify the dispensing control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is placed on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the error release switch so that the decision key button and the error release switch are not confused (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded on the cover body). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the error release switch from being confused, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the decision key button or the error release switch (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation unit) may be used, a pressing operation unit with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation unit of the decision key button and the error release switch may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation unit may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the error release switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other). In addition, if a confirmation key button is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the confirmation key (9)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a signal from an error release switch having a pressing operation unit on the dispensing control board 633 may be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input via the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power is restored (the power-on processing of the various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed) and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is such that no error has occurred, the pressing operation part of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch is operated based on a signal from the error release switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch. This can improve security with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key being ON (the form of the error release switch may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (10)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The error reset switch is input to the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of the signal from the error reset switch having a push operation part on the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, create a command, send the created command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether the decision key is ON. As described above, the error reset switch is for resetting the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power recovery (the power-on process of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the push operation part of the error reset switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit has been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the decision key is not ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit has not been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. This improves security in relation to whether the decision key is ON or not (mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (11)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal is set In the past, the operation signal was input from the constant change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f can be input to the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633, and also branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the operation signal input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, while it can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security in relation to whether the confirmation key is ON or not.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the dispensing control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding opening to tamper with the dispensing control board 633.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a push operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused (the names of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of these stickers). In addition, in order to prevent the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch from being confused, a button with a cover covering the push operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (the cover needs to be opened to operate the push operation unit by pushing it) may be used, a push operation unit with a different color may be used, a RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch with a different external shape or a push operation unit with a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation unit may be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error reset switch are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and even in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the error reset switch is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, if a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the RAM clear switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 13 In the past, the signal was input to the main control MPU 1310a of 10, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 can monitor the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below.The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command can determine whether the decision key is ON or not. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt processing described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect, while the payout control MPU can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is ON or not (RAM clear switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "Decision key variation (13)").

In the above-described embodiment, the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON for the second time. 311a can be set as the decision key ON, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via (through) the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 input. The game ball B launched into the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is collected by the outlet 1008 provided in this game area 5a, as described above. The game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 is detected by the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033, as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch, and when the outlet 1008 collects the game ball B based on the detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 or the outlet right sensor 3033. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not opened relative to the main frame 4 (i.e., closed), and/or when the outlet 1008 does not collect the game ball B based on the detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 or the outlet right sensor 3033, the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the outlet switch (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant embodiment of the determination key (14)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B into the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the output left sensor 3032 and the output right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then turned it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, create a command, send the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether the decision key is ON. The game ball B launched into the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 is collected by the outlet 1008 provided in this game area 5a, as described above. The game ball B collected by this outlet 1008 is detected by the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033, as described above. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the payout control MPU determines that the game ball B has been collected by the outlet 1008 based on the detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 or the outlet right sensor 3033 and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the determination key is not ON when the payout control MPU determines that the game ball B has not been collected by the outlet 1008 and receives a command to that effect. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (outlet switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant embodiment of the determination key (15)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B into the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform the second ON operation, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 is input to the dispensing control board 633. The signal is input to the main control MPU, and is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals, or the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which receives this command may determine whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the configuration of the dispensing unit (which may include the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the determination key (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the main frame 4 remains open against the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the form of the main body frame opening switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value must close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, must open the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main frame 4. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the door frame opening switch (which may include the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant (17) of the decision key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, must close the door frame 3 again relative to the main body frame 4, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the aspect of the setting key switch may be described as "variant example (18) of the determination key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to the initial position, and this OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (setting key switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch mode 1311a') may be described as "decision key variation (19)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the main control board 1310. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to tamper with the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the board box 1320, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused (the names of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of stickers). Also, in order to prevent the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation part) may be used, a pressing operation part with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and other switches. In addition, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the main control board 1310 in order to prevent unauthorized tampering. In addition, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the setting key button mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant of the decision key (20)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security in relation to whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (RAM clear switch mode 3 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant of the determination key (21)"). Note that the period during which the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 as described later, so if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need an error release switch.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control Instead, the main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the normal winning port sensor 2401 of the normal winning port 2003, various sensors of various winning ports (e.g., the second start port sensor 2402, the large winning port sensor 2403, the accessory winning port sensor 2513, the normal winning port sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002), and the out sensor 664 of the main frame 4, which are provided on the game board 5, may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspects of the various sensors (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the decision key (22)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and send a game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003, to the various winning openings, or to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is then transmitted to the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, when the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of the movable body (gimmick), by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, or a solenoid, and determines the original position or operating position of the movable body (gimmick) based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of the decision key ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the optical gadget sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variation example of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person changing the setting must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and move the movable body (prop) so that the optical sensor can detect the original position, operating position, etc. of the movable body (prop) in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives an input of a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects unauthorized magnetism within the play area 5a, may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the magnetic sensor (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the determination key (24)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must bring a magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to set the determination key to ON.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, when a vibration sensor 3003 is provided on the game board 5 to detect fraudulent behavior by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 and making the ball enter various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent behavior based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003 and may also determine the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the mode of the vibration sensor (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variation example of the determination key (25)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1 Instead, when a radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent acts of illegally acquiring game balls B by irradiating radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 to cause malfunctions of various sensors of various winning slots provided on the game board 5 or various sensors provided on the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent acts based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor and may also determine the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the aspect of the radio wave sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variation example of the determination key (26)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MP of the main control board 1310. Instead, a detection signal from the pressing detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 350 and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 350 may be input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched in the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the performance operation button unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (27)").

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body. However, the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the board box 1320. In the board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part. This crimping part is a sealing part, and there are multiple crimping parts. The board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing part, and then, in order to open the board box 1320, the sealing part needs to be destroyed. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing part is destroyed. Such a structure of the board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the board box 1320 corresponding to each of them, but a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body so that a wire or the like cannot be intruded through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the openings corresponding to each of them to modify the setting change board 1311. Note that, as the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the board box 1320 described above, if the cover body is configured to be opened or closed from the base body, a setting change board cover body opening/closing switch that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided on the base body. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be configured to be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions can include a case where the cover body is opened from the base body based on a detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body (the aspect of the setting change board box may be described as a "variant of the decision key (28)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected to each other, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key switch 1311a OFF, and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal from the setting switching button 1311b are provided. The wiring for the setting change board 1311 and the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are formed so that they are not close to each other (are spaced apart from each other), and the connection to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be spaced apart. Also on the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the enter key The wiring pattern for transmitting the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting changeover button 1311b were also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). However, for either the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a or the wiring pattern for transmitting the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector SMCN of 1311 via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of 1311 (inter-board connection), and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the manner in which the wiring pattern is routed may be described as "variant example of the determination key (29)").

Also, the above-mentioned modified enter key configurations (1) to (29) may be appropriately selected and combined to adopt the above-mentioned modified enter key configurations (the selected combination of modified configurations may be referred to as "modified enter key configuration (30)").

In addition, the above-mentioned setting values can change the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery when transitioning from a probability change to a normal time, the allocation rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls B that the player can obtain can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. Incidentally, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has multiple setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a single setting value in which a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. That is, there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as multiple preset values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and settings need to be changed, and there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a single preset value, and settings do not need to be changed at all. However, if the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications, and the design of the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will depend on the game specifications, and the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that can be used in common without being dependent on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in game specifications where the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset to a single set value and no setting changes are required, there is no need to use the set value as the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player, so this can be addressed by changing the design of the software to assign set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 as follows:

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can use these as setting values to set multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns (allowing for variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM) after clearing a specified area (the entire area of the RAM excluding a specific area) of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, for the operation of the movable body (gimmick object) and the lighting of light-emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs that are the objects of control by the main control MPU 1310a, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "all operations (movement of movable body (gimmick object), lighting of light-emitting objects)" is assigned as setting value 1, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movement of movable body (gimmick object)" is assigned as setting value 2, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of light-emitting objects" is assigned as setting value 3, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "detailed operation of movable body (gimmick object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, movement over other structures and other movable objects)" is assigned as setting value 4. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned which specifies "operations such as checking for interference with moving objects (gimmicks), operation order with other moving objects (gimmicks)" as a setting value 5, an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "lighting of light-emitting objects by one port unit (lighting of light-emitting objects by a predetermined output port unit (i.e., by one output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" as a setting value 5, and an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 is assigned which specifies "no operation" as a setting value 6 (the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "variation example (1) based on a common hardware configuration"). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing by repeatedly performing a main control side timer interrupt process described later to operate the moving objects (gimmicks) and light-emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (referred to as a setting change completion command in FIG. 178) from the main control MPU 1310a, can operate the movable body (gimmick) and light the light-emitting body that are the object of control by the peripheral control board 1510 with the contents (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the actual machine confirmation operation is changed after the RAM is cleared, it is possible to provide a variety of methods for starting the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple times from the end of the pattern change to the start of a demonstration (a demonstration performance performed in a player waiting state). In this case, a time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 1, a time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 2, a time setting pattern 3 that specifies "20 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 3, a time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 5, and a time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 6 (the manner of changing the time from the end of the pattern change to the start of a player waiting state may be described as "variation example (2) based on a common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start a demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the time setting between when the pattern changes and when the player waits, it is possible to vary the time between when the pattern changes and when the demonstration begins.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings of the contents of the demonstration (demo performance performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the pattern change. In this case, demo performance setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical performance" is assigned as setting value 1, demo performance setting pattern 2 that specifies "comical performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 2, demo performance setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious performance" is assigned as setting value 3, demo performance setting pattern 4 that specifies "serial performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 4, demo performance setting pattern 5 that specifies "period drama style performance" is assigned as setting value 5, and demo performance setting pattern 6 that specifies "period drama style performance, movable body (gimmick)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the demo performance contents may be described as "variation example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo performance (demo performance setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the content of the demo performance is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the content of the demo performance that is performed after the pattern change has ended.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The volume adjustment switch can be rotated to increase or decrease the volume from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the default volume may be described as "variant (4) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a sets the default volume to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. The default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 may be muted when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to decrease the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increase the volume) and is adjusted to the minimum volume by completing the movement to the minimum volume end, or may be a volume that can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine. The default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 may be the maximum volume when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to increase the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decrease the volume) and is adjusted to the maximum volume by completing the movement to the maximum volume end, or may be a volume that is a predetermined percentage of the maximum volume (e.g., 85%). This aspect of changing the default volume setting allows for variation in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

It can also be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings for the volume of error notification sounds for various malfunctions, goto, errors, and other error notifications. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., they are not dependent on it), and while setting them to maximum volume makes it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to notice the pachinko machine that is emitting the error notification sound, it may be unpleasant to players playing other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for something that allows the volume of the various error notification sounds to be adjusted. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 specifying "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, error notification volume setting pattern 2 specifying "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, error notification volume setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the volume of the error notification sound may be described as "variant example (5) based on a common hardware configuration"). The volume of the error alarm is set to increase from setting value 1 (a volume that is not muted and allows the error alarm to be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error alarm) to setting value 6 (maximum volume that allows the error alarm to be fully heard even when several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error alarm). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls the error alarm to be emitted at a volume (error alarm volume setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. This change setting of the volume of the error alarm can provide variation in the volume of the error alarm during error notifications.

It can also be used as a setting value that can set multiple default luminances for light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance of the light-emitting body that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default luminance. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies "luminance 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 that specifies "luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, a default luminance setting pattern 3 that specifies "luminance 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, a default luminance setting pattern 4 that specifies "luminance 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, a default luminance setting pattern 5 that specifies "luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and a default luminance setting pattern 6 that specifies "luminance 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the default luminance may be described as "variant (6) based on a common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light-emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting element that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and can turn on, blink, or set a gradation point for the light-emitting element. Depending on the manner in which the content of the default brightness is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the default brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs.

It can also be used as a setting value that can set multiple luminances of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs in error notifications of various malfunctions, stumbles, and errors. For the lamps controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, an error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification luminance 1" is assigned as a setting value 1, an error notification luminance setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as a setting value 2, an error notification luminance setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification luminance 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, an error notification luminance setting pattern 4 that specifies "error notification luminance 4" is assigned as a setting value 4, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as a setting value 5, and an error notification luminance setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the luminance of the light-emitting element in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) based on a common hardware configuration"). The lamp brightness is set to increase from setting value 1 (the lamp brightness is low, but the error notification can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine, even if the lamp is not turned off) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point of the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting body that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point of the light-emitting body. Depending on the manner of changing the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification, it is possible to provide variation in the brightness of the light-emitting body such as a lamp or LED in the error notification.

The various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variants (1) to (7) are displayed on the setting display 1310g when a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met in the setting value confirmation display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described later), but they may also be displayed on the setting display 1310g at all times from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until it is powered off (the manner of displaying the setting values may be referred to as "common hardware configuration variant (8)").

Furthermore, any one of the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variations (1) to (8) may be appropriately selected and adopted for the above-mentioned determination key variation (30).

The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions required that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. Also, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, in either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed (sometimes referred to as a "variant of the predetermined setting value change permission condition").

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition requires that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage) is restored, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value that is set on the setting display 1310g in the setting value confirmation display process that is performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. In addition, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the pressing operation part is pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period during which it is pressed is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (sometimes referred to as "a modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition"). In this case, when the modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later, but performs it before the initial setting and start-up setting of the built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process described later, and then performs the interrupt permission setting and the like to proceed with the game. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting value confirmation display processing after a predetermined modified setting value display permission condition is met, the interrupt permission setting has not yet been made, so the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the main control side timer interrupt processing, and does not read the detection signal from the main frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into the setting key ON state, and stores these in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information described later. Therefore, when a variation of a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met and the setting value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a reads a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch to detect the opening of the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., whereas when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game, the setting value confirmation display process is never performed. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., it never displays the currently set setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main frame 4 through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 in a ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described later, and outputs the counted number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 to the base monitor 1310h in a port output process of the main control side power-on process described later, and displays the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (sometimes referred to as a "variant example of the method of using the base monitor"). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can use the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values that have been set during the period from when power is restored until when game progress begins by setting interrupt permission, etc., and once power is restored and game progress begins by setting interrupt permission, etc., the number of game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) can be displayed, eliminating the need to provide a setting display 1310g and contributing to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned variation of the decision key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately selected and adopted in the variations (1) to (8) based on the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 126 etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The function display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, a normal pattern display consisting of two LEDs that displays the normal lottery result that is drawn when a game ball B is received by the normal winning opening 2003, and a normal reserve display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved balls related to the reception of a game ball B by the normal winning opening 2003.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a first special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and a second special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) that the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 129 and 133. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see Figs. 173 and 174A) that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, movable performance, etc., and a performance display control unit 1512 for controlling performance images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (see Figures 173 and 174A, etc.).

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 132 and 133. The effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear side via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 at approximately the center. The device 1600 can be seen from the front (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. The performance display device 1600 uses white LEDs as a backlight. The performance display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device. The performance display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and videos.

The performance display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side and one right fixed piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side. With the LCD screen facing forward, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixed grooves 3010c opening into the left inner peripheral surface of the frame-shaped LCD mounting part 3010b of the rear box 3010 described later, then moving the right fixed piece 1602 side forward to insert the right fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 upward in rear view.

[5-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 138 to 140. Fig. 138 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board. Fig. 139(a) is a perspective view of the start hole unit, side unit, upper left side unit, and attacca unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and Fig. 139(b) is a perspective view of the start hole unit, side unit, upper left side unit, and attacca unit of the front unit as viewed from the back. Fig. 140(a) is a perspective view of the center member of the front unit as viewed from the front, and Fig. 140(b) is a perspective view of the frame parts that make up the upper part of the center frame.

The front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and part of its rear end protruding into the opening 1102 of the gaming panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can receive the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a normal winning opening 2003 that is attached at a further different position in the game area 5a and is always open and can receive the game ball B, and a second starting opening 2004 that can receive the game ball B depending on the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball B is received by the normal winning opening 2003. 004, a large prize opening 2005 that can receive the game ball B depending on the first or second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, a special prize opening 2006 that can receive the game ball B depending on the first or second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and a first V prize opening 2007 and a second V prize opening 2008 that are given the opportunity to receive the game ball B received into the special prize opening 2006.

The multiple (three in this example) general winning holes 2001 are located below the vertical center in the game area 5a and to the left of the horizontal center. The first start hole 2002 is located directly above the out hole 1008, which is at the bottom end in the horizontal center of the game area 5a. The normal winning hole 2003 is located near the right end of the game area 5a, lower than the vertical center. The second start hole 2004 is located to the lower left of the normal winning hole 2003. The large winning hole 2005 is located between the second start hole 2004 and the first start hole 2002, at a height slightly lower than the first start hole 2002. The special winning hole 2006 is located above the normal winning hole 2003. The first V winning hole 2007 is located at a height between the special winning hole 2006 and the normal winning hole 2003. The second V winning hole 2008 is located directly above the first starting hole 2002 in the left-right center of the play area 5a.

The front unit 2000 is composed of a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002, a side unit 2200 which is attached to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has three general winning ports 2001, a side upper left unit 2300 which is attached slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front, and a front unit 2300 which is attached to the front of the play area 5a. The attacca unit 2400 is attached to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005, and a frame-shaped center member 2500 is attached above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center when viewed from the front within the game area 5a, and has a special winning port 2006, a first V winning port 2007, and a second V winning port 2008.

[5-8a. Starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 138 and 139. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed directly above the outlet 1008 near the lower end of the left-right center in the game area 5a, and is attached from the front to the game panel 1100. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

When the starting hole unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the first starting hole 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, opens upward, and is located directly below the center of the center member 2500 in the left-right direction.

When the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, it can guide the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the rear bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 138 and 139. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning holes 2001 that are open so as to be able to receive the game ball B at all times. The three general winning holes 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning holes 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning hole 2001 on the left side opens upward to the left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the rear bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the light guide plate presentation unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 138 and 139. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front, within the gaming area 5a, so as to contact the inner rail 1002 to the left of the side unit 2200. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center member 2500 to the right side below the center member 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. Attacker Unit]
Next, the attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 138 and Fig. 139. The attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a, to the right of the start hole unit 2100 as seen from the front, which is the lower right corner as seen from the front, and is attached from the front to the front of the game panel 1100. This attacca unit 2400 has a normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole 2004, and a large winning hole 2005 (see Fig. 148, etc.).

When viewed from the front, the Attacca unit 2400 has an external shape that is triangular, with the height from the bottom increasing as it moves to the right. In this Attacca unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open toward the top in the upper right corner. The second starting opening 2004 is located at the bottom left, spaced apart from the normal winning opening 2003 by a distance greater than the width of one game ball B, and is always open toward the front. The special winning opening 2005 is located near the bottom end of the bottom left of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened and closed toward the front.

The Attacca unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. The Attacca unit 2400 also has a second starting opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball B, and a large winning opening 2005 that opens left and right with a width of about 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball B.

The attacca unit 2400 is equipped with a normal winning hole sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004, a large winning hole sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the large winning hole 2005, and a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects unauthorized magnetism (see FIG. 173, etc.).

The attacca unit 2400 includes a second start port door 2411 capable of guiding a game ball B to the second start port 2004, a start port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the second start port door 2411 in response to a normal lottery result that is drawn when a game ball B is received at the normal prize port 2003, a large prize port door 2413 that can open and close the large prize port 2005, and an attacca solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the large prize port door 2413 in response to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result that is drawn when a game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004.

As shown in Figures 148, 149A, and 152, the Attacka unit 2400 is provided with a second start opening guide shelf 2421 that is located to the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and above the second starting opening 2004, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the left, a second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 that is located to the left of the second start opening guide shelf 2421 and extends vertically, a second start opening right standing wall portion 2423 that extends downward from the right end of the second start opening guide shelf 2421, and a large winning opening guide shelf 2424 that is located below the second start opening guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 and is located to the right of the large winning opening 2005, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the left.

The second starting opening guide shelf 2421 extends leftward from a position to the right of the right end of the second starting opening 2004, past the left end of the second starting opening 2004, to near the center in the left-right direction between the second starting opening 2004 and the big prize opening 2005. This second starting opening guide shelf 2421 prevents the game ball B from being received from above into the second starting opening 2004.

The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is provided to the left of the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 with a distance allowing one game ball B to pass through. The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 extends vertically from a position higher than the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and higher than the bottom end of the second starting opening 2004. The upper end of the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is bent to the right.

The second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 extends vertically downward from the right end of the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the second starting opening 2004. This second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 prevents the game ball B from being received into the second starting opening 2004 from the right.

The large prize opening guide shelf 2424 is slightly lower than the bottom end of the second starting opening 2004, and extends left and right from a position to the left of the left end of the second starting opening 2004 to a position one game ball B below the bottom end of the second starting opening 2004, to the left of the second starting opening left standing wall 2422, and approximately the same as the right end of the large prize opening 2005, so that the left end is lower. As shown in the figure, the right end of the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so that it rises upward, and the angle of inclination becomes steeper the further to the right it goes.

The attacca unit 2400 also has an attacca right passage 2430 that opens to the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 and guides the game ball B to a position below the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 and lower than the special winning opening 2005.

The Attacca right passage 2430 has a first opening 2431 which is long in the vertical direction and opens to the left above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, a second opening 2432 which opens to the upper left between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, a third opening 2433 which opens upward below the second starting opening 2004, a fourth opening 2434 which is long in the vertical direction and opens to the left below the large winning opening 2005 below the large winning opening guide shelf 2424, and a discharge opening portion 2435 which is connected to the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens to the left. The Attacka right passage 2430 allows game ball B to enter the interior through a first opening 2431, a second opening 2432, a third opening 2433, and a fourth opening 2434, and allows game ball B to be released to the outside only through a release port 2435.

The attacca right passage 2430 is formed in a multi-step staircase shape with the left side lowered. In detail, the attacca right passage 2430 extends downward from a portion above the normal prize winning opening 2003 on the right side of the normal prize winning opening 2003, bends left at a portion lower than the normal prize winning opening 2003, wraps around to the lower side of the normal prize winning opening 2003, bends downward as part of the left wall of the second start opening right standing wall portion 2423 below the normal prize winning opening 2003, bends left again at a portion lower than the large prize winning opening guide shelf 2424, bends downward below the portion to the right of the center of the large prize winning opening guide shelf 2424, and extends to the lower end of the attacca unit 2400.

The Attacca right passage 2430 has multiple protrusions 2436 spaced apart in the vertical direction on the inner walls at the front and rear of the vertically extending portion, which protrude into the passage and extend left and right. The multiple protrusions 2436 are arranged so that their heights alternate between the front and rear. When the game ball B comes into contact with these multiple protrusions 2436, they can guide the game ball B downward in a zigzag pattern while suppressing an increase in its downward speed.

The Attacca right passage 2430 is located to the right of the large prize opening 2005, and is elongated vertically at the location where the fourth opening 2434 opens. The protrusions 2436 have a protrusion 2437 that protrudes further into the passage from the end on the fourth opening 2434 side (see FIG. 152, etc.). The presence of this protrusion 2437 prevents the game ball B in the Attacca right passage 2430 from being released to the outside (left) from the fourth opening 2434, and allows the game ball B to enter the Attacca right passage 2430 from the outside through the fourth opening 2434. Therefore, the game ball B that enters the Attacca right passage 2430 is released from the Attacca unit 2400 into the game area 5a without having a chance to be accepted by the normal prize opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the large prize opening 2005.

In addition, the Attacca right passage 2430 has a long fourth opening 2434 open vertically at the portion passing to the right of the large prize opening 2005, so that the game ball B released to the left from the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the large prize opening 2005, and the game ball B that flows above the large prize opening 2005 and to the right of the large prize opening 2005 can be received by the fourth opening 2434 and enter the Attacca right passage 2430. And, as described above, the game ball B that enters the Attacca right passage 2430 is only released to the outside from the release port 2435 at the bottom end, so the game ball B that is guided to the right by the obstacle nails N above the large prize opening 2005 does not bounce back to the large prize opening 2005 side due to the presence of the Attacca right passage 2430.

Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state, if the game ball B released from the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right of the large prize opening 2005 by the obstacle nail N, it will not enter the attacca right passage 2430 and be accepted by the large prize opening 2005. For this reason, even if a passage for game ball B (here, the attacca right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the large prize opening 2005, the game ball B will not bounce off the wall of the passage (the fourth opening 2434) toward the large prize opening 2005 and be accepted by the large prize opening 2005, and it is possible to provide a passage for game ball B adjacent to the large prize opening 2005 while suppressing excessive acceptance of game ball B into the large prize opening 2005, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a passage that has not been seen in pachinko machines until now.

The second starting port door 2411 is a plate extending from the bottom of the second starting port 2004 to the vicinity of the second starting port left standing wall 2422, and is moved forward and backward by the starting port solenoid 2412. The second starting port door 2411 is inclined so as to become lower from the left end side toward the second starting port 2004 side to the right, and is also inclined so as to become lower toward the rear at the second starting port 2004 portion. This second starting port door 2411 is retracted in the normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that enters between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall 2422 falls onto the large winning port guide shelf 2424 without coming into contact with the second starting port door 2411, and therefore does not enter (be accepted) the second starting port 2004.

On the other hand, in the normal winning state (open state), the second starting port door 2411 is forwarded, so that the game ball B that enters between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 abuts against the second starting port door 2411 and is guided by the second starting port door 2411 toward the second starting port 2004 side, and enters (is received by) the second starting port 2004. In this way, the second starting port 2004 opens and closes as the second starting port door 2411 moves forward and backward. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is ON (energized).

The large prize opening door 2413 is a rectangle that is long from side to side, and is attached so that it can rotate around an axis in the left-right direction, with one long side as the axis. The large prize opening door 2413 can close the large prize opening 2005 that opens toward the front by setting the short side upright with the attacca solenoid 2414, and can open the large prize opening 2005 by rotating the other long side so that it moves forward, allowing the game ball B to be received. This large prize opening door 2413 closes the large prize opening 2005 when the attacca solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large prize opening 2005 when the attacca solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

In the attacca unit 2400, the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 at the rear of the game panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower board holder 1200. The game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004 is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2402 at the rear of the game panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower board holder 1200. The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 at the rear of the game panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower board holder 1200.

The attacca unit 2400 further includes a second starting opening decorative board 2451 for illuminating and decorating the second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening decorative board 2452 for illuminating and decorating the large winning opening 2005, and a front right lower decorative board 2453 for illuminating and decorating the attacca right passage 2430 (see FIG. 174A). The second starting opening decorative board 2451 is provided behind the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, and is equipped with multiple full-color LEDs. When a "normal win" is drawn by receiving a game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003, this second starting opening decorative board 2451 changes its illumination state to attract the player's attention to the second starting opening 2004.

The large prize opening decoration board 2452 is provided behind the large prize opening 2005 and is equipped with multiple full-color LEDs. When the large prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern due to a "jackpot game" or the like, the large prize opening decoration board 2452 illuminates the large prize opening 2005 to make the game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 easier to see. The front bottom right decoration board 2453 is provided below the second starting hole 2004 and to the right of the large prize opening 2005, behind the attacca right passage 2430 and is equipped with multiple full-color LEDs.

When this attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, the normal winning opening 2003 is located below the exit of the second ball passage section 2521 on the upper right side of the center member 2500 described later and at a height higher than the first starting opening 2002 (the third sorting device 2550 of the center member 2500), the second starting opening 2004 is located to the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and at a height slightly lower than the third sorting table 2554 of the third sorting device 2550 of the center member 2500, and the large winning opening 2005 is located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. In addition, when attached to the game panel 1100, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in the areas above the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421), and the large winning opening 2005.

[5-8e. Center member]
Next, the center member 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 140 to 147. Fig. 140(a) is a perspective view of the center member in the front unit as seen from the front, and Fig. 140(b) is a perspective view of the frame parts constituting the upper part of the center member. Fig. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center member and the opening of the game panel. Fig. 142(a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center member, the game panel board, and the rear left decorative body of the rear unit, and Fig. 142(b) is a front view of Fig. 143(a) is a plan view of the third distribution device in the center member, and Fig. 143(b) is a perspective view of the third distribution device in the center member as seen from the front. Fig. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the third distribution device in the center member as seen from the front top, and Fig. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the third distribution device in the center member as seen from the front bottom. Fig. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the third distribution device in the center member. Figure 147 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the function of the protrusions provided on the second V winning port and the third losing port in the third distribution device of the center member, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the game ball when no protrusions are provided on the second V winning port and the third losing port.

The center member 2500 is attached to a large opening 1102 formed in the game area 5a, above the starting unit 2100 and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. The center member 2500 is of an approximately annular shape having a center frame 2501 formed in a frame shape, and a game member consisting of a third distribution device 2550, a second ball passage section 2521 (details will be described later), or a so-called stage section (not shown) that causes the game ball B to oscillate by inertia in the left and right directions when viewed from the front and drop into the game area, and the performance display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100, the light guide plate performance unit 3100, the back front performance unit 3200, the back front left lower performance unit 3300, the back front right lower performance unit 3400, and the sub status indicator 3500, which are provided in the back unit 3000, can be seen from the front.

[5-8e-1. Center frame]
The center frame 2501 comprises a frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 extending in a plate-like manner in the fore-and-aft direction with approximately constant thickness, a flange portion 2503 extending in a flat plate-like manner from the rear end of the front frame portion 2502 in a direction perpendicular to the fore-and-aft direction (the same surface direction as the front surface of the gaming panel 1100), a frame-shaped rear frame portion 2504 extending in a plate-like manner from the rear surface of the flange portion 2503 with approximately constant thickness to the rear, and an attachment hole 2505 penetrating the flange portion 2503 in the fore-and-aft direction for attaching the center frame 2501 to the gaming panel 1100.
The center frame 2501 of the embodiment is made of transparent resin, and is formed of a plurality of frame parts 2501a, 2501b as shown in Fig. 140, and an end 2501aa of the upper frame part 2501a is overlapped and connected to the front surface of the lower frame part 2501b. However, the frame parts 2501a, 2501b of the center frame 2501 do not need to be integrally joined to each other with screws or the like, and may be connected by being fixed to the game panel 1100.
The upper frame part 2501a has no electrical components mounted thereon and has no electrical wiring. Therefore, the upper frame part 2501a alone can be removed from the center frame 2501 attached to the gaming panel 1100 to perform maintenance such as cleaning or to replace it with a new one. As described above, since the end 2501aa of the upper frame part 2501a overlaps the front of the lower frame part 2501b, the upper frame part 2501a can be removed even if the lower frame part 2501b remains attached to the gaming panel 1100.
In the embodiment, the center frame 2501 is formed from multiple frame parts 2501a, 2501b, but it may also be a single molded body. In that case, if no electrical components are mounted on the center frame 2501 and the above-mentioned play components are formed to be detachable, the center frame 2501 can be easily removed from the play panel 1100 for maintenance such as cleaning, or for replacement with a new one.
Instead of mounting electrical components on the center frame 2501, a light-transmitting decoration 2501 (preferably a three-dimensional decoration with a concave-convex shape that can change the direction of light transmission over a wide range) may be formed on a part of the center frame 2501 (frame part 2501a having a bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a described later), and the decoration 2501 may be illuminated by the light of a back unit 3000 (back front performance unit 3200) serving as a light-emitting performance means separately provided on the gaming panel 1100 side. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide decoration by lighting the center frame 2501 without providing electrical wiring.
In addition, when the above-mentioned play members are not provided on the center member 2500, the center frame 2501 also serves as the center member 2500.

[5-8e-2. Front frame part of center frame]
The front frame 2502 of the center frame 2501 is formed in a substantially frame-like shape. The front frame 2502 has a front frame upper right part 2502a that is inclined linearly from a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the frame to the right. When the center member 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the front frame upper right part 2502a of the front frame 2502 becomes the passage bottom itself, and forms a first ball passage part 2506 of a predetermined width through which the game ball B can flow between the front frame part 2502 and the outer rail 1001 of the front component part 1000. The ball hitting part 1006 mentioned above faces the terminal end of the first ball passage part 2506.

[5-8e-3. Rear frame part of center frame]
The rear frame 2504 of the center frame 2501 has a plurality of rows of stripe-like decorations extending in the front-rear direction on the inner peripheral surface side. This makes it difficult to see the opposite side through the rear frame 2504, and can be made to appear to be emitting light by irradiating light from the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b mounted on the rear left decorative board 3222 in the rear front performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear. This rear frame 2504 is formed to fit along the inner circumference of the opening 1102 of the gaming panel 1100, and by attaching the center member 2500 to the gaming panel 1100, it is possible to make the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 difficult to see from the player side (front). It is also possible to select not to provide this rear frame 2504 as necessary.

[5-8e-4. Flange part of center frame]
As described above, the center frame 2501 has a flat flange portion 2503 with a tapered edge extending in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction from the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 and rear frame portion 2504 that extend in the front-rear direction. The flange portion 2503 can reinforce the center frame 2501, making the front frame portion 2502 and rear frame portion 2504 less likely to warp.

The center frame 2501 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 by inserting the rear frame portion 2504 from the front into the large central opening 1102 of the gaming panel 1100, and with the rear surface of the flange portion 2503 abutting against the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, using small screws that are screwed into the gaming panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2505. When the center frame 2501 (center member 2500) is attached to the gaming panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, so that a gaming ball B shot into the gaming area 5a cannot enter the frame.

When the center frame 2501 is attached to the gaming panel 1100, the rear frame 2504 is positioned so as to cover the inner periphery of the opening 1102 in the gaming panel 1100. The multiple stripe-like decorations formed on the inner periphery of the rear frame 2504 make the inner periphery of the opening 1102 difficult to see from the player's side (front).

As shown in Figures 141 and 142, at the left edge of the frame of the center member 2500 (center frame 2501), a flange portion 2503 extends inward of the front frame portion 2502. The contour of the inner surface of the front frame portion 2502 generally roughly matches the contour of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the gaming panel 1100, and a portion of the front frame portion 2502 is positioned significantly outward from the opening 1102. An attachment hole 2505 for attachment to the gaming panel 1100 is provided in the flange portion 2503 of the portion of the front frame portion 2502 positioned outward from the opening 1102.

In other words, at the left edge of the frame of the center member 2500, a portion of the inner periphery of the opening 1102 of the gaming panel 1100 protrudes inward more than the front frame portion 2502, and the center member 2500 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 at this portion.

As a result, in the area that forms the left edge of the center frame 2501 of the center member 2500, the flange portion 2503 extends inward of the front frame portion 2502, and nothing extends outward, making it possible to plant the obstacle nails N in a position as close as possible to the front frame portion 2502. Therefore, the area in which the game ball B actually circulates in the game area 5a can be limited to a position that contacts the front frame portion 2502, making it possible to make the circulation area of the game ball B larger than in conventional pachinko machines, and making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself.

In addition, in the center member 2500, the flange portion 2503 extends in a direction perpendicular to the front frame portion 2502 and rear frame portion 2504, which extend in the front-to-rear direction, and therefore the flange portion 2503 can reinforce the front frame portion 2502 and rear frame portion 2504, i.e., the entire center member 2500. In addition, by attaching the center member 2500 to the gaming panel 1100 via the flange portion 2503, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 and rear frame portion 2504 can be further improved. Furthermore, because the flange portion 2503 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 via the mounting holes 2505 even at the portion that extends inward of the front frame portion 2502, even if the game ball B in the game area 5a abuts against the portion of the front frame portion 2502 where the flange portion 2503 extends inward, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 can be maintained by mounting it to the gaming panel 1100 via the flange portion 2503 and the mounting holes 2505, and deformation or damage to the front frame portion 2502 (center member 2500) can be prevented.

Furthermore, since it is possible to plant the obstacle nails N as close as possible to the front frame portion 2502 as described above, even if the inside of the frame of the center member 2500 partitioned by the front frame portion 2502 in the center frame 2501 of the center member 2500 is enlarged, the actual circulation area of the game ball B does not become smaller as in conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, by enlarging the inside of the frame of the center member 2500 while preventing the circulation area in which the game ball B circulates within the game area 5a from becoming substantially smaller, it is possible to make the performance image of the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear through the frame and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 more visible, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows the enjoyment of both the movement of the game ball B within the game area 5a and the various performances that can be seen through the frame of the center member 2500.

Furthermore, as described above, in the center frame 2501 of the center member 2500, the flange portion 2503 can increase the strength of the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504, so that deformation of the molded product can be prevented when the center frame 2501 is resin molded and removed from the mold.

In the above embodiment, the rear frame 2504 of the center member 2500 is decorated with light from LEDs mounted on the rear left decorative board 3222 of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear, making the inner surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 difficult to see, but this is not limited to this. For example, between the inner surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 and the rear frame 2504 of the center member 2500, a decorative board for openings on which multiple LEDs are mounted may be provided on the surface facing the center of the opening 1102 so as to follow the inner circumference of the opening 1102. This can achieve the same effect as above, and the decorative board for openings can also hide the inner surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102, improving the appearance of the game area 5a. In this case, by making the surface of the opening decorative board white, the opening decorative board itself can be made less noticeable, and the rear frame portion 2504 can be more brightly illuminated and decorated when the LED is illuminated. Alternatively, the surface of the opening decorative board can be colored a predetermined color that matches the concept of the game board 5, and the same effect as above can be achieved. In addition, the opening decorative board can be provided around the entire circumference of the opening 1102, and the center member 2500 can be illuminated in a frame shape (ring), or illuminated in a circle in a predetermined direction to encourage "right hit" or "left hit", providing the player with a variety of illumination effects to enjoy.

[5-8e-5. 2nd ball passage section]
The center member 2500 is provided with a second ball passage portion 2521 that opens at the upper right corner of the center frame 2501 and is integral with the center frame 2501. The second ball passage portion 2521 is one form of the play member described above. A game ball that rolls on the front frame upper right part 2502a constituting the passage bottom of the first ball passage part 2506 for right hitting and falls at the end part or collides with the ball hitting part 1006 and falls. It receives the game ball B and allows it to flow down, guiding the game ball B above the attacca unit 2400.

As shown in FIG. 148, etc., this second ball passage section 2521 opens directly below the ball hitting section 1006 with the entrance section 2521a (hereinafter also referred to as the "bouncing ball receiving section") on the front frame upper right section 2502a side facing diagonally downward from the ball hitting section 1006. Therefore, most of the game balls B that collide with the ball hitting section 1006 are bounced off there, and then hit the bouncing ball receiving section 2521a and fall.

Incidentally, the flange portion 2503 and mounting hole 2505 corresponding to the second ball passage portion 2521 of the center frame 2501 are formed on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion 2521, across the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, as shown in Figure 136.
Needless to say, the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a repeatedly receives the impact of the game ball B that hits the ball hitting portion 1006 and bounces off, but the impact is supported by the screw inserted into the mounting hole 2505 of the flange portion 2503. The impact of the game ball B received by the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a acts in a direction to lift the flange portion 2503 from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when the flange portion 2503 is on the second ball passage portion 2521 side, and acts in a direction to press the flange portion 2503 against the front surface of the game panel 1100 when the flange portion 2503 is on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion 2521 with the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a in between.
Therefore, if the flange portion 2503 having the mounting hole 2505 is located on the second ball passage portion 2521 side, the impact of the game ball B received by the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a will cause the flange portion 2503 to rise up from the front surface of the game panel 1100, which will cause a force to act on the screw in the pulling direction. Repeated exposure to this force may cause the screw to become loose.
In contrast, when the flange portion 2503 having the mounting holes 2505 is located on the opposite side of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a to the second ball passage portion 2521, the flange portion 2503 is pressed against the front surface of the game panel 1100 by the impact of the game ball B received by the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, so that almost no stress is applied to the screws passed through the mounting holes 2505 of the flange portion 2503. Therefore, the screws are less likely to loosen, improving the stability of the center frame 2501 in the long term.
In addition, since the flange portion 2503 is located on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion 2521 from the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, as shown in Fig. 136, there is no step due to the thickness of the flange portion 2503 in at least the ball bouncing passage 2521s between the ball hitting portion 1006 and the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, and therefore, for example, a problem such as "the game ball B that hits the ball hitting portion 1006 and heads toward the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a comes into contact with the step of the flange portion 2503 and changes course toward the glass unit 160, and in the worst case, the ball gets stuck" is unlikely to occur. Note that in Fig. 136, a part of the edge of the flange portion 2503 protrudes into the ball bouncing passage 2521s, but since this part of the flange portion 2503 has a tapered shape and the game ball B is spherical, contact between the two in this area is not possible. Therefore, the flange portion 2503 protruding into the ball bouncing passage portion 2521 in FIG. 136 is not a step 2527 that the game ball B can contact, and does not affect the path of the game ball B at all.

The second ball passage section 2521 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin, including a removable passage cover 2521d that covers the front, so that the game ball B flowing inside can be seen from the front.
Furthermore, since the game ball B hit to the right has strong momentum and moves quickly, the time it takes for it to collide with the ball hitting section 1006 and fall is short, and therefore the impression of the game ball B flowing from the end of the first ball passage section 2506 to the second ball passage section 2521 is weak.
In contrast, in this embodiment, at least the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is formed in an opaque light color such as white, while at least the surface of the ball hitting portion 1006 is formed in a dark color such as black.
The opaque light color of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a may be yellow or pink in addition to white, while the dark color of the ball hitting portion 1006 may be dark navy or dark brown in addition to black. Means for making the part light or dark may include directly painting the part with light-colored paint, attaching a light-colored sticker to the part, or attaching a separate molded product of the corresponding color to the part. In short, when viewed from the player during play, it is sufficient that the background of the game ball B that hits the ball hitting portion 1006 is dark, and the light color is reflected on the round steel mirror surface of the game ball B.

Here, it is important to use colors to increase the difference in brightness between colors and emphasize the contrast, which is a necessary element in making game ball B easier to understand and find. For example, if white is considered to have a reflectance of 100% and a brightness of 10, black has a brightness of 0 and the brightness difference between the two is 10, emphasizing the contrast. On the other hand, compared to a color with a brightness of 1 and a color with a brightness of 3, there is almost no difference in brightness between a color with a brightness of 4 and a color with a brightness of 6, and they are recognized as a combination of colors with the same brightness difference.
The game balls B that are taken into the pachinko machine 1 and repeatedly roll in the game ball area 5a, or that are discharged from the pachinko machine 1, are washed in the island equipment to remove dust and dirt that adheres to them due to static electricity, cigarette tar, and grease, and are chrome-plated to be highly abrasion-resistant so that they can withstand such an operating environment. Therefore, the appearance of the game balls B is a mirror-like surface that shines silver when exposed to external light.

In the example of this embodiment, when the game ball B that hits the ball hitting portion 1006 bounces back onto the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, the dark color (black) of the ball hitting portion 1006, which is located at a position that is normally about 50 cm away from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is viewed slightly upwards from the player during play (see the perspective view from the player's eye level in the speech bubble in Figure 1), becomes the background of the game ball B, and at the same time, the light color (white) of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is reflected on the silvery round mirror surface of the game ball B (steel ball) that has been polished by a ball polishing device located midway along the ball circulation path, making it easy to recognize the flowing status of the game ball B due to this contrast.
That is, the black and white colors used for the ball hitting portion 1006 and the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a are achromatic colors with no color tone in terms of hue, but are the most different color combination in terms of brightness. In addition, this effect can be achieved by combining the characteristics that the surface of the game ball B passing between them is always polished to a mirror finish.
In addition, since the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is an opaque light color compared to the transparent center frame 2501, the influence of other presentation devices and patterns of the game panel 1100 behind the center frame 2501 being transparent and being miscellaneously reflected on the surface of the game ball B is reduced, improving ease of recognition.
Of course, the time for the game ball B to bounce off the ball hitting section 1006 is very short and instantaneous, but since the game ball B is hit to the right continuously, the game ball B flowing from the end of the first ball passage section 2506 to the second ball passage section 2521 can be made more noticeable than in the past. In particular, in recent pachinko machines 1, the decorations on the upper and side edges of the door frame 3 protrude toward the player, and the area around the ball hitting section 1006 located in the upper right corner is often dimly lit, and in such an environment, the bright color of the bouncing ball receiving section 2521a reflected in the round mirror surface of the game ball B is easily noticeable, and the effect obtained is accordingly greater.

In this embodiment, since the upper wall of the passage of the first ball passage section 2506 is formed of the outer rail 1001 made of shiny stainless steel, when the game ball B passes through the first ball passage section 2506, a player who looks up slightly can see the mirror image of the game ball B reflected on the outer rail 1001, that is, two game balls B are seen. Then, as the game ball B hits the ball hitting section 1006 and bounces off while moving away from the outer rail 1001, the mirror image of the game ball B reflected therein becomes invisible, and instead, the bright color of the bouncing ball receiving section 2521a is reflected on the mirror surface of the game ball B, making the movement of the game ball B look more dynamic.
In addition, in an embodiment, as described below, when the surface that the game ball B hits is the front side, the ball hitting portion 1006 is set so that said surface is tilted backwards (tilted backwards with respect to a vertical line).As a result, the rebound direction of the hitting game ball B is slightly upward and is slightly slowed down, making the bright color of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a reflected on the game ball B more striking.

The second ball passage section 2521 extends vertically downward from directly below the bouncing ball receiving section 2521a and the ball hitting section 1006 at the end of the first ball passage section 2506, then bends almost at a right angle to the right, and when it hits the right rail 1005, bends downward and extends along the right rail 1005, bends left at about 3/4 height from the bottom of the height of the play area 5a, extends left at a gentle angle, bends downward at the left position and extends to the center height of the play area 5a, bends right and extends near the right rail 1005, and then bends downward to form an outlet opening downward. The second ball passage section 2521 does not bend in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on approximately the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[5-8e-6. Others]
The center member 2500 is provided in the middle of the second ball passage portion 2521, and includes a prize winning port 2006 into which the game ball B can be received according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and a prize winning port 2006 into which the game ball B can be received according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the prize winning port 2006, and a prize winning port 2006 into which the game ball B can be received according to ... The machine is equipped with a first distribution device 2530, a second distribution device 2540 that distributes the game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a (distributed to the V winning side) by the first distribution device 2530 to either the first V winning port 2007 or the second losing port 2543, and a third distribution device 2550 that distributes the game ball B distributed to the second losing port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 to either the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555.

The center member 2500 also includes a device prize opening door 2511 that can open and close the device prize opening 2006, a device prize opening solenoid 2512 that opens and closes the device prize opening door 2511 in response to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is determined by the reception of a game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, a device prize opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received into the device prize opening 2006, a first V prize opening sensor 2514 that detects the game ball B that has been distributed by the second distribution device 2540 and received into the first V prize opening 2007, and a third distribution device 2550 that detects the game ball B received into the first V prize opening 2007. The machine is equipped with a second V winning port sensor 2515 that detects a game ball B that has been sorted by the first sorting device 2530 and received in the second V winning port 2008, a first losing port sensor 2516 that detects a game ball B that has been sorted by the first sorting device 2530 and received in the first losing port 2535 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 150(a)), a second losing port sensor 2517 that detects a game ball B that has been sorted by the second sorting device 2540 and received in the second losing port 2543, and a third losing port sensor 2518 that detects a game ball B that has been sorted by the third sorting device 2550 and received in the third losing port 2555.

The reel prize opening 2006 is provided in a portion of the second ball passage section 2521 that extends to the left, extends left and right over the entire length of the portion in the left-right direction, and opens upward. The reel prize opening door 2511 extends front to back and is formed in a plate shape that extends left and right so that the left end is lower, and can move forward and backward to appear and disappear inside the second ball passage section 2521, thereby opening and closing the reel prize opening 2006 that opens upward.

The reel prize opening door 2511 can close the reel prize opening 2006 by moving forward, and when the reel prize opening 2006 is closed, it forms the bottom surface of the part extending to the left in the second ball passage section 2521, and can guide the game ball B circulating from the upstream side to the exit side of the second ball passage section 2521.
In addition, the reel prize opening door 2511 can open the reel prize opening 2006 by retracting due to the drive of the reel prize opening solenoid 2512, thereby allowing the game ball B that has flowed down the second ball passage portion 2521 to be accepted by the reel prize opening 2006.
In this way, the reel prize opening door 2511 closes the reel prize opening 2006 when the reel prize opening solenoid 2512 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the reel prize opening 2006 when the reel prize opening solenoid 2512 is ON (when energized).

The first distribution device 2530 is located at a height between the reel winning opening 2006 and the lower rightward extending portion of the second ball passage section 2521, and is located behind the second ball passage section 2521 (the front surface of the game panel 1100).

The first distribution device 2530 has a storage section 2531a on its outer periphery that can store only one game ball B, and is made up of a distribution rotor 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-to-rear direction, a first distribution solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 173, etc.) for rotating the distribution rotor 2531 between a state in which the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces to the right and a state in which it faces upward, a cylindrical peripheral wall section 2533 that covers the outer periphery of the distribution rotor 2531, and a ball B that is received in the prize winning opening 2006 and passes through the upper part of the distribution rotor 2531 in the peripheral wall section 2533 to the upper side of the distribution rotor 2531. a first distribution guide path 2534 that guides the balls to the outer periphery of the distribution rotor 2531; a first loss opening 2535 that opens rearward at the bottom of the first distribution guide path 2534 and through which game balls B that are not accommodated in the accommodation section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 enter; a first winning passage 2536 that passes through the right part of the distribution rotor 2531 in the peripheral wall 2533 and extends to the right; and a first loss opening sensor 2516 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 150(a)) that detects game balls B that enter the first loss opening 2535.

The distribution rotor 2531 has an outer circumferential surface formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows toward the rear. The right end of the first contact passage 2536 bends rearward and then downward to communicate with the second distribution device 2540.

When the first distribution solenoid 2532 is OFF (not energized), the first distribution device 2530 has the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 facing to the right. In this state, when the game ball B received in the role winning port 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534 and comes into contact with the upper part of the outer circumferential surface of the distribution rotor 2531, the outer circumferential surface of the distribution rotor 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape narrowing toward the rear, so that the inclination of the outer circumferential surface guides the game ball B backward and causes it to enter the first losing port 2535.

On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the distribution rotor 2531 rotates counterclockwise and the storage section 2531a faces upward (see FIG. 150(a)). In this state, when a game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534, only one is stored in the storage section 2531a. When a game ball B is stored in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 and another game ball B is guided from the role winning opening 2006 side by the first distribution guide path 2534, the game ball B comes into contact with the game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a and then enters the first loss opening 2535 at the rear. The game ball B that enters the first loss opening 2535 is delivered to the rear right ball ejection unit 3170 of the rear unit 3000 and then ejected onto the board holder 1200.

When game ball B is stored in storage section 2531a, the first distribution solenoid 2532 rotates the distribution rotor 2531 clockwise and storage section 2531a faces right, causing game ball B stored in storage section 2531a to roll from storage section 2531a to the right toward the first hit passage 2536, and circulate through the first hit passage 2536. Game ball B that has circulated through the first hit passage 2536 is sent to the next second distribution device 2540.

In this way, the first distribution device 2530 can distribute the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 to either the second distribution device 2540 side (storage section 2531a side) or the first losing opening 2535 side.

As shown in Figures 136 and 148, the second sorting device 2540 is provided below the first sorting device 2530 and behind the exit of the second ball passage section 2521. The second sorting device 2540 is provided behind the first sorting guide path 2534 and the first hit passage 2536 of the first sorting device 2530.

As shown in FIG. 150, the second sorting device 2540 includes a second sorting guide path 2541 extending vertically through which game balls B accommodated in the storage section 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted to the first winning path 2536 flow, a first V winning port 2007 opening on the right side of the lower part of the second sorting guide path 2541, a first V winning passage 2542 extending to the right from the first V winning port 2007 and then extending downward, and a first V winning port sensor 2514 provided within the first V winning passage 2542 to detect game balls B received in the first V winning port 2007.

The second sorting device 2540 also includes a second loss port 2543 that opens upward at the lower end of the second sorting guideway 2541, a sorting door 2544 that is provided above the second loss port 2543 and can open and close the second loss port 2543, a second sorting solenoid 2545 for moving the sorting door 2544 back and forth to open and close the second loss port 2543, a second loss passage 2546 that extends leftward from the second loss port 2543 and then bends downward, and a second loss port sensor 2517 that is provided at the downstream end of the second loss passage 2546 and detects the game ball B received in the second loss port 2543. The sorting door 2544 is a flat plate that moves back and forth and is inclined so that the right side is lower.

When the second sorting solenoid 2545 of the second sorting device 2540 is OFF (de-energized), the sorting door 2544 is retracted and the second loss port 2543 is open upward. In this state, when a game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, it enters the second loss port 2543 and is sent to the third sorting device 2550 side through the second loss passage 2546.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 advances above the second losing port 2543, and the distribution door 2544 closes the second losing port 2543, making it impossible to accept game ball B. In this state, when game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 flows down the second distribution guideway 2541, it abuts on the upper surface of the distribution door 2544, is guided to the right by the inclination of the distribution door 2544, and enters (is accepted by) the first V winning port 2007. Then, the game ball B that entered the first V winning port 2007 flows through the first V winning passage 2542, is detected by the first V winning port sensor 2514, and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back right ball discharge unit 3170 of the back unit 3000.

When the ball game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 is received by the first V winning port 2007 and detected by the first V winning port sensor 2514, a "big win game" is executed in which the big winning port 2005 of the attacca unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. This second distribution device 2540 can be seen from the front through the transparent second ball passage section 2521.

In this way, the second sorting device 2540 can sort the game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 to either the first V winning port 2007 or the second losing port 2543 (third sorting device 2550) side.

As shown in FIG. 140, the third sorting device 2550, which is one form of the above-mentioned game member, is provided at the lower side within the center frame 2501 of the center member 2500. The third sorting device 2550 is connected to the downstream end of the second loss passage 2546 of the second sorting device 2540, and is provided with a third sorting guide path 2551 that guides the game ball B detected by the second loss mouth sensor 2517 to the left, a crane 2553 that is provided at the left end of the third sorting guide path 2551 and releases the game ball B downward while rotating it around an axis in the vertical direction, and a second V winning port 2008 that is provided below the crane 2553 and penetrates downward near the front end in the center in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a third distribution table 2554 on which the game ball B can roll, two third losing holes 2555 that penetrate downward on both the left and right sides of the second V winning hole 2008 in the third distribution table 2554, a third distribution middle rotor 2556 provided near the rear end of the center in the left-right direction of the third distribution table 2554, and a third distribution left rotor 2557 and a third distribution right rotor 2558 provided near the front end on both the left and right ends of the third distribution table 2554, respectively (see Figures 143 to 146, etc.).

The third sorting device 2550 further includes a third sorting base 2559 attached to the underside of the third sorting table 2554 and attached to the center frame 2501, a third sorting drive motor 2560 attached to the underside of the third sorting base 2559 for rotating the third sorting middle rotor 2556, a third sorting left drive motor 2561 attached to the underside of the third sorting base 2559 for rotating the third sorting left rotor 2557, and a third sorting right drive motor 2562 attached to the underside of the third sorting base 2559 for rotating the third sorting right rotor 2558. The third sorting drive motor 2560, the third sorting left drive motor 2561, and the third sorting right drive motor 2562 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173).

The third distribution middle drive motor 2560 has a rotating shaft that penetrates the third distribution base 2559 and protrudes upward. The third distribution left drive motor 2561 has a rotating shaft that penetrates the third distribution base 2559 and protrudes upward, and a third distribution left rotor 2557 is attached to the rotating shaft. The third distribution right drive motor 2562 has a rotating shaft that penetrates the third distribution base 2559 and protrudes upward, and a third distribution right rotor 2558 is attached to the rotating shaft.

In addition, the third distribution device 2550 is equipped with a third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution rotating body 2556, a third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotating body 2557, a third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, a second V winning port sensor 2515 for detecting a game ball B accepted by the second V winning port 2008, and a third losing port sensor 2518 for detecting a game ball B accepted by the third losing port 2555. The second V winning port sensor 2515, the third losing port sensor 2518, the third distribution mid-rotation detection sensor 2563, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173).

The third sorting device 2550 also includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 2566 attached to the rotation shaft of the third sorting drive motor 2560 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, and a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 2567 that meshes with the drive gear 2566 and is attached to the shaft portion 2556a protruding downward in the third sorting rotor 2556. The transmission gear 2567 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 2566, and transmits the rotation of the third sorting drive motor 2560 to the third sorting rotor 2556 at a reduced speed. The transmission gear 2567 also has a detection piece 2567a that extends outward in a flat plate shape and is detected by the third sorting rotation detection sensor 2563.

The third sorting device 2550 further includes a spur gear-shaped left transmission gear 2568 attached to the rotation shaft of the third sorting left drive motor 2561 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, a spur gear-shaped left rotation detection gear 2569 meshing with the left transmission gear 2568 and rotatably attached by the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, a spur gear-shaped right transmission gear 2570 attached to the rotation shaft of the third sorting right drive motor 2562 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, and a spur gear-shaped right rotation detection gear 2571 meshing with the right transmission gear 2570 and rotatably attached by the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559.

The left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 have the same diameter and number of teeth. The left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 have the same diameter and number of teeth. The left rotation detection gear 2569 has a larger diameter than the left transmission gear 2568 and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561. This left rotation detection gear 2569 protrudes downward from the middle of the radial direction in a flat plate shape and has a detection piece 2569a detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564. The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a larger diameter than the right transmission gear 2570 and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562. This right rotation detection gear 2571 protrudes downward from the middle of the radial direction in a flat plate shape and has a detection piece 2571a detected by the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565.

The third distribution device 2550 also includes a third distribution rotor decorative board 2572 which is provided below the third distribution rotor 2556 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559 and is mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward, and a third distribution table decorative board 2573 which is provided below the area between the third distribution rotor 2556 and the second V winning port 2008 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559 and is mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward.

The third sorting device 2550 is attached to the front end side of the third sorting base 2559, and includes a passage forming member 2575 which cooperates with the third sorting base 2559 to form a third sorting ball discharge passage 2574 for guiding the game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555 and discharging it downward, a lower cover 2576 attached to the underside of the third sorting base 2559 so as to cover the third sorting middle drive motor 2560, the third sorting left drive motor 2561, and the third sorting right drive motor 2562 from below, and a transparent upper cover 2577 (see FIG. 134) which covers the crane 2553 and the third sorting table 2554 from above.

The third distribution table 2554 is formed to be transparent. The third distribution table 2554 has an outer shape in a plan view, which is formed in a shell shape with a semicircular arc at the rear end and a length in the front-to-rear direction approximately equal to the diameter of the semicircular arc. The length in the front-to-rear direction of the third distribution table 2554 is 2.5 times the diameter of the third distribution rotating body 2556. In other words, the diameter of the third distribution rotating body 2556 is 0.4 times the length in the front-to-rear direction of the third distribution table 2554. In addition, the diameter of the third distribution rotating body 2556 is about 4 times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm), and the length in the front-to-rear direction of the third distribution table 2554 is about 10.5 times the diameter of the game ball B. In addition, the central table 2554a of the third distribution table 2554 has a length (width) in the left-right direction that is just over five times the diameter of the game ball B, and a length (depth) in the front-back direction that is five to seven times the diameter of the game ball B.

The third sorting table 2554 is provided in front of the third sorting rotor 2556 in the center in the left-right direction, and is composed of a roughly rectangular central table 2554a that is inclined so that the front end side is lower, a left table 2554b and a right table 2554c that are provided on both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a and are long in the front-rear direction from a position behind the front end of the central table 2554a to a position behind the rear end of the third sorting rotor 2556, and a right table 2554c that is provided in front of the central table 2554a. The collection table 2554d is inclined so as to become lower on both sides of the left-right center, and then bends backwards at the left and right outer parts of the center table 2554a and then inclined so as to become lower toward the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and the side tables 2554e are provided one step higher on both the left and right outer sides of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and are inclined so that the front end side and the inside are lower.

The third distribution table 2554 also has a dam portion 2554f that protrudes upward from both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a, and a peripheral wall portion 2554g that extends upward higher than the diameter of the game ball B so as to surround the rear end sides of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c and the outsides of the left and right side tables 2554e. The dam portion 2554f prevents the game ball B from entering or exiting from both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a. The peripheral wall portion 2554g also cooperates with the upper cover 2577 to prevent the game ball B from falling out of the third distribution table 2554.

The length of the central table 2554a in the front-to-rear direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the third distribution rotating body 2556, and the length in the left-to-right direction is longer than the length in the front-to-rear direction. In addition, the rear end of the central table 2554a extends to a position forward of the center of the third distribution rotating body 2556, and both left and right sides are bent diagonally toward the third distribution rotating body 2556. The central table 2554a is only inclined in the front-to-rear direction, but is horizontal in the left-to-right direction. Near the front end of this central table 2554a, the third loss port 2555 is opened on both the left and right sides, with the second V winning port 2008 in the center in the left-to-right direction between them. The second V winning port 2008 and the third loss port 2555 are round holes of the same diameter. In addition, the second V winning port 2008 has a rounded R-chamfered edge.

The front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are at the same height as the front ends of the second V winning hole 2008 and the third losing hole 2555 in the front-rear direction, and are located at a height about the diameter of the game ball B lower than the same part of the central table 2554a in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are inclined so that the area between their front ends and the part in the front-rear direction that is the same as the rear end of the central table 2554a becomes lower toward the outside in the left-right direction, and the rear side is approximately horizontal. Furthermore, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are at the same height as the general surface of the third distribution middle rotor 2556 in the front-rear direction and the part behind that is higher than the third distribution middle rotor 2556. A third distribution left rotating body 2557 and a third distribution right rotating body 2558 are provided on the left and right outer sides at the front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, respectively.

The third distribution table 2554 also has a bulge 2554h that extends forward and backward from the rear end to near the second V winning opening 2008 in the left-right center of the central table 2554a so that its left-right width narrows as it moves forward, and bulges outward slightly upward. This bulge 2554h makes it possible to direct the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling in the left-right center of the central table 2554a outward in the left-right direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to enter the second V winning opening 2008.

The third allocation table 2554 also has a protrusion 2554i that protrudes upward from the front end side of the second V winning port 2008 and the two third losing ports 2555 on the upper surface of the central table 2554a and extends to the front end of the central table 2554a. The protrusion 2554i is formed in a triangular shape in the second V winning port 2008, and is formed in a rod shape with a narrow width from side to side in the third losing port 2555. The protrusion 2554i of the third losing port 2555 also protrudes slightly into the third losing port 2555. Details will be described later, but these protrusions 2554i are designed to prevent the game ball B from coming into contact with the circular opening of the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555, rolling around the edge of the opening and then flying outwards, and entering the other third losing port 2555 or second V winning port 2008.

Furthermore, the third allocation table 2554 has a protrusion 2554j that protrudes lower than the protrusion 2554i in the left-right area at the center between the second V winning port 2008 and the third losing port 2555 at the front end of the central table 2554a.

The third distribution rotating body 2556 has a shaft 2556a that protrudes downward from the center of the disk and is rotatably supported by the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, and to which the transmission gear 2567 is attached. The third distribution rotating body 2556 also has three inner protrusions 2556b that protrude in a fan shape near the center, and an outer protrusion 2556c that protrudes in an arc shape higher than the inner protrusion 2556b near the outer periphery. The inner protrusions 2556b and the outer protrusions 2556c are provided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and are each provided on the same radial line. The outer protrusions 2556c have a constant width in the radial direction, and the outer periphery side coincides with the general surface of the third distribution rotating body 2556, and is inclined in the radial direction so that the inner periphery side is higher. When assembled to the third sorting device 2550, the general surface of the third sorting rotor 2556 is parallel to the surface of the central table 2554a of the third sorting table 2554 and is located slightly above the central table 2554a. The third sorting rotor 2556 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the third sorting drive motor 2560 via the drive gear 2566 and the transmission gear 2567.

The third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 each have a protrusion 2557a and a protrusion 2558a that protrude perpendicular to the axial direction and extend in the axial direction. When the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are assembled to the third distribution device 2550, the protrusions 2557a and the protrusions 2558a protrude to approximately the center of the game ball B located at the left and right outer parts of the lowest front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, respectively. The tips of these protrusions 2557a and the protrusions 2558a are rounded in a plan view. Therefore, the protrusions 2557a and 2558a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 make it difficult to hit the game ball B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c with force.

In addition, when the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are assembled to the third distribution device 2550, the lower ends of the respective protrusions 2557a and protrusions 2558a are positioned above the center of the game ball B, which is located at the outer left and right parts of the lowest front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, respectively. In other words, the protrusions 2557a and protrusions 2558a are arranged to abut against the upper part of the game ball B. As a result, the protrusions 2557a and protrusions 2558a do not abut against the game ball B in a way that would scoop it up upwards, making it difficult for the game ball B to bounce upwards.

The third distribution left rotating body 2557 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is rotated in a clockwise direction in a plan view by the third distribution right drive motor 2562. Therefore, the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 bounce the game balls B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c backwards.

The third distribution base 2559 cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to hold the second V winning port sensor 2515 and two third losing port sensors 2518. The third distribution base 2559 also cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to form a third distribution ball discharge passage 2574 that guides the game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555 and discharges it downward. The third distribution ball discharge passage 2574 is formed to guide the game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 and the third losing port 2555 on both the left and right sides of the second V winning port 2008 in a separate state without merging, and the second V winning port sensor 2515 and the third losing port sensor 2518 are provided in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 134, the upper cover 2577 is formed so that the rear end is lower, so that when a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 looks into the playing area 5a, the first image 3110 and second image 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 provided at the rear and the presentation image on the presentation display device 1600 are not obstructed.

When assembled to the game board 5, the third distribution device 2550 has a front end located forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100 and slightly rearward of the front surface of the front component 1000, and a rear end located rearward of the light guide plate 3102 of the rear unit 3000 (described later) and slightly forward of the front surface of the performance display device 1600. The collection table 2554d of the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 is located forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100.

In the third distribution device 2550, the third distribution middle rotor 2556, the third distribution left rotor 2557, and the third distribution right rotor 2558 are constantly rotated by the third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The third distribution middle rotor 2556 and the third distribution left rotor 2557 rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the third distribution right rotor 2558 rotates in a clockwise direction in a plan view.

In this embodiment, the third distribution middle rotor 2556 rotates at a speed of 16.7 rpm, and the third distribution left rotor 2557 and the third distribution right rotor 2558 rotate at a speed of 625 rpm, which is much faster than the third distribution middle rotor 2556. In this way, since the rotation speeds of the third distribution left rotor 2557 and the third distribution right rotor 2558 are fast, even if detection pieces are provided on the third distribution left rotor 2557 and the third distribution right rotor 2558 to detect the presence or absence of rotation, the sensor may not be able to reliably detect the detection pieces. In more detail, since the sensor that detects the detection pieces operates at regular intervals to detect the detection pieces, for example, if the rotation period of the detection pieces and the detection period of the sensor are the same, the detection pieces may not be detected at all, so the detection period of the sensor must be sufficiently shorter than the rotation period of the detection pieces. If the detection piece rotates faster and the rotation cycle becomes shorter, the sensor's detection cycle must also be shortened. However, shortening the sensor's detection cycle requires more frequent signal exchange between the sensor and control unit, which increases the load on the control unit and increases the risk of runaway or malfunction due to overload.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 are attached to the rotation shafts of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 (third distribution left drive motor 2561 and third distribution right drive motor 2562), respectively, and the large-diameter left rotation detection gear 2569 and right rotation detection gear 2571 are meshed with the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570, respectively, to reduce the rotation, and detection pieces 2569a and 2571a are provided on the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 whose rotation has been reduced, and are detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565. In this embodiment, the rotation speed of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is set to 250 rpm.

As a result, the rotation speed of the detection pieces 2569a and 2571a for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is slowed down, so that the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 can reliably detect them, and it is possible to determine whether the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are rotating or not. In addition, because the rotation speed of the detection pieces 2569a and 2571a is slowed down, there is no need to unnecessarily shorten the detection cycle of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, and the detection cycle can be made appropriate, and an increase in the load on the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

This third sorting device 2550 is supplied with game balls B sorted by the second sorting device 2540 to the second loss port 2543. In more detail, the game balls B sorted to the second loss port 2543 are detected by the second loss port sensor 2517, and then supplied to the crane 2553 through the third sorting guideway 2551, rotate around a vertical axis in the crane 2553, and then fall near the right end of the collection table 2554d on the third sorting table 2554 below. At this time, based on the detection of the game balls B by the second loss port sensor 2517, a performance corresponding to the sorting of the game balls B by the third sorting device 2550 is executed.

The game ball B that falls from the crown 2553 near the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the rear right table 2554c, then rolls toward the right side of the lowest front end of the right table 2554c, and comes into contact with the protrusion 2558a of the rotating third distribution right rotor 2558. After that, the game ball B that comes into contact with the protrusion 2558a and is bounced backward enters the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third distribution middle rotor 2556, and rolls forward due to the inclination of the central table 2554a. Then, it is received by either the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a, or passes by them to enter the collection table 2554d. The game ball B that enters the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a will roll toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c depending on the part that it entered. In addition, the game ball B that rolls from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b will be bounced off the protruding piece 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotor 2557, similar to the movement on the right table 2554c described above, and will enter the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the left table 2554b through the third distribution middle rotor 2556.

In this way, the basic flow of the game ball B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 is that it travels from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, passes through the third distribution rotor 2556, rolls around the central table 2554a, and is then sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c by the collection table 2554d, repeating this process until the game ball B is received by either the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555.

In this embodiment, since the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 rotate at high speed, depending on the timing when the game ball B enters the contact area where it can contact the protrusions 2557a and 2558a on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and the timing when the protrusions 2557a and 2558a contact the game ball B, the protrusions 2557a and 2558a will contact the game ball B in a grazing manner or will hit the game ball B hard, and the momentum of the game ball B being bounced backwards will vary depending on the degree of contact of the protrusions 2557a and 2558a.

Therefore, even if the game ball B is bounced backward by the protrusions 2557a and 2558a, if the impact is weak, it may not be able to climb the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, which are higher toward the rear, and may return, and the game ball B may not enter the third distribution rotating body 2556 side, but may go back and forth in the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. Alternatively, even if the game ball B bounced backward by the protrusions 2557a and 2558a reaches the third distribution rotating body 2556, depending on the timing at which the three outer protrusions 2556c of the rotating third distribution rotating body 2556 are positioned, the game ball B may be prevented from entering by the outer protrusions 2556c, and may not be able to move toward the center table 2554a side, but may be returned to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. Furthermore, when the game ball B enters the third distribution rotating body 2556 from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the third distribution rotating body 2556 rotates, and the area between the three outer protrusions 2556c moves, so the game ball B may be carried to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side by the rotation of the third distribution rotating body 2556. Also, if the game ball B is strongly bounced backward by the protrusions 2557a and 2558a, it may pass through the third distribution rotating body 2556 and enter the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side, or enter the side table 2554e. The game ball B that enters the side table 2554e rolls to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c that it is in contact with.

For this reason, on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, game ball B that is bounced backward by the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and enters the third distribution middle rotating body 2556 will, with a certain degree of probability, enter the central table 2554a. At this time, because the third distribution middle rotating body 2556 is rotating, game ball B will enter the central table 2554a from various positions in the left and right directions depending on its rotational position.

The game ball B that enters the central table 2554a will roll forward due to its inclination, but since it enters through the third distribution rotor 2556 from the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c on both the left and right sides, and the third distribution rotor 2556 is rotating, it has a left-right movement vector and rarely rolls straight forward, but rather rolls diagonally. At this time, since the bulge 2554h bulges upward in the center of the left-right direction of the central table 2554a, the bulge 2554h weakens the left-right movement of the game ball B or returns it to the opposite side. Then, the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a will enter either the second V winning hole 2008 or the third losing hole 2555 located near the front end, or pass by them and enter the recovery table 2554d.

In the central table 2554a, depending on the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling toward the second V winning hole 2008 or the third losing hole 2555, the game ball B may come into contact with the circular opening of the second V winning hole 2008 or the third losing hole 2555, causing the game ball B to move like a swing-by, rotating along the edge of the opening. As shown in FIG. 147(b), when there is nothing in the opening of the second V winning hole 2008 or the third losing hole 2555, the game ball B may change its rolling direction by rotating along the edge of the opening, and if there is another second V winning hole 2008 or third losing hole 2555 at the point where it flies out from the edge of the opening, the game ball B may enter the second V winning hole 2008 or third losing hole 2555. Due to this phenomenon, for example, when a player thinks that game ball B has entered the second V winning port 2008, it may go around the edge of the opening and enter the adjacent third losing port 2555, disappointing the player and reducing interest. In addition, due to this phenomenon, the variation in the probability of receiving game ball B (winning probability) into the second V winning port 2008 in the third distribution table 2554 (third distribution device 2550) may increase, causing players to feel distrustful.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protrusion 2554i is protruded from the front end side of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, so even if the game ball B tries to rotate along the edge of the opening, it can abut against the protrusion 2554i on the way and bounce from the edge of the opening to the front side or inside the opening, and it can be prevented from flying out from the edge of the opening to the left or right or rear side and entering the adjacent second V winning opening 2008 or third losing opening 2555. This reduces the possibility of the game ball B entering the third losing opening 2555 unnecessarily, which disappoints the player, and suppresses a decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being received by the second V winning opening 2008 unexpectedly, it is possible to reduce the variation in the probability of receiving the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel distrustful.

In this embodiment, the protrusion 2554i of the third losing opening 2555 protrudes toward the inside of the opening, so that the game ball B that rolls along the edge of the opening can be reliably deflected. Also, the edge of the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 is rounded and chamfered, so that the movement vector of the game ball B can be easily directed toward the outside or inside of the opening, making it difficult for the game ball B to roll along the edge of the opening.

When the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a passes between the second V winning hole 2008 and the third losing hole 2555, it will enter the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. At this time, it may come into contact with the protrusion 2554j protruding upward at the front end of the central table 2554a. Depending on how the game ball B comes into contact with the protrusion 2554j, the game ball B may be reflected backward, and depending on the angle of reflection, it may be received by the second V winning hole 2008 or the third losing hole 2555. On the other hand, if the game ball B comes into contact with the protrusion 2554j and is reflected forward, it will enter the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. In addition, when the game ball B passes between the third loss port 2555 and the dam portion 2554f in the central table 2554a, it enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a without coming into contact with the protrusion 2554j.

In this way, the game ball B that enters the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a rolls to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c depending on the part it entered, and is bounced off the third distribution left rotor 2557 or the third distribution right rotor 2558, and is sent back to the central table 2554a through the third distribution middle rotor 2556, and repeats the above-mentioned movement to circulate on the third distribution table 2554 until it is accepted by either the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555. In this embodiment, the game ball B is allocated (accepted) to the second V winning port 2008 with a probability of 1/5.

The game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 is guided by the third ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the second V winning port sensor 2515, and discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing port 2555 is guided by the third ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the third losing port sensor 2518, and discharged downward. The game ball B discharged downward from this third distribution device 2550 is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back-bottom ball discharge unit 3150 in the back unit 3000.

In this way, the third distribution device 2550 can distribute the game ball B distributed by the second distribution device 2540 to the second losing port 2543 to either the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555.

In addition, according to the third distribution device 2550 of this embodiment, the height and protrusion amount of the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are made to make it difficult to hit the game ball B hard, and since the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are rotated at high speed, it is possible to make it impossible for the player to predict with what strength the game ball B will be bounced backwards when it enters the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, so that the player's gaze can be glued to the game ball B on the third distribution table 2554 and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B going back and forth on the third distribution table 2554, which increases the expectation of receiving the game ball into the second V winning port 2008 and suppresses a decline in interest.

In addition, unless game ball B is bounced off with a certain degree of force by the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, game ball B will not enter the central table 2554a from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, and even if game ball B enters the central table 2554a, if it is not accepted by the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555, it will be returned to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c by the recovery table 2554d. As a result, game ball B will remain on the third distribution table 2554 for a relatively long time, and the distribution of game ball B can be enjoyed for a longer time than with a distribution device such as a crane in a conventional pachinko machine, and the distribution of game ball B to the second V winning port 2008 increases the expectation of the occurrence of a "jackpot game", thereby suppressing a decline in interest. In other words, since the "jackpot game" occurs due to the movement of game ball B, which is the acceptance of game ball B into the second V winning port 2008, compared to when the "jackpot game" occurs by showing an image effect in which multiple pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 on the effect display device 1600, even if it takes a long time until the occurrence of the "jackpot game" is confirmed, the player is less likely to become bored, and the disappointment at the time of a "miss" can be alleviated, preventing a decrease in interest.

Incidentally, in the conventional Pachinko machine, the distribution device using a crane or the like does not require the acceleration of the game ball B in order to reach the distribution destination such as the V winning hole or the losing hole, and the structure is such that the game ball B can reach the distribution destination without changing the rolling path or rolling speed. Therefore, in the conventional Pachinko machine, although the movement of the game ball B can be entertained to a certain extent, the player becomes bored with it due to familiarity, and there are problems such as the following examples.
That is, for example, in the case where the rolling path of the game ball B is not changed and the ball is guided to an unfavorable allocation destination, the player's interest may be lost before the ball reaches the allocation destination because the ball can be predicted from the rolling path. Or, even if the rolling path of the game ball B is changed by some means, if the ball is guided to an unfavorable allocation destination as a result, the player may feel that the development that would have led to an advantageous allocation destination (if the rolling path had not been changed) was prevented by the means and the player has suffered a disadvantage, which may cause distrust and reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player cannot clearly predict with what strength the game ball B will be accelerated and bounced by the rapidly rotating third distribution left rotor 2557 and third distribution right rotor 2558 in the third distribution device 2550, and moreover, the number of times the game ball B will be bounced by the third distribution left rotor 2557 and third distribution right rotor 2558 is not limited to just once, and after tracing a complex rolling path on the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B will be accepted into either the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555, which gives the player the impression that the allocation destination has been selected at random by luck. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment does not have the problems of conventional pachinko machines as described above, and not only allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B due to its natural flow, but also allows the player to enjoy the game development by randomly selecting the allocation destination, and can arouse strong interest and curiosity in the movement of the game ball B.

In addition, in the third distribution device 2550 of this embodiment, two third losing ports 2555 are provided side by side on both the left and right sides of the second V winning port 2008 at the front end side of the central table 2554a, so that even if a game ball B is received by the third losing port 2555, the player can feel that only a slight difference has determined whether the result was favorable or unfavorable. As a result, even if the ball is distributed to the unfavorable third losing port 2555, the player can be expected to feel that it was a close call, which will increase his or her motivation to continue playing.

In addition, the third allocation device 2550 of this embodiment is provided with one second V winning port 2008 as a favorable allocation destination, while two third losing ports 2555 are provided as unfavorable allocation destinations, and indicates that it is more difficult to accept game ball B into a favorable allocation destination than an unfavorable allocation destination on the third allocation table 2554. By visually indicating the difficulty of reaching a favorable allocation destination in this way, the player is made to strongly desire to receive game ball B into the favorable allocation destination, and the effect of increasing the player's interest in the movement of game ball B and improving the enjoyment of the game can be expected.

Furthermore, in the third distribution device 2550 of this embodiment, the central table 2554a is tilted so that the front end side is lower, and the second V winning opening 2008 is provided near the front end, so that the second V winning opening 2008 is located between the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a and the player, and it is possible to easily show the player whether the game ball B is rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008 or not, and the movement of the game ball B can be more entertaining. In addition, since the game ball B rolls toward the player (forward) toward the second V winning opening 2008, the player can be made to think that the game ball B is being drawn toward the second V winning opening 2008, and the player can enjoy distribution at the third distribution table 2554 by increasing the expectation of receiving the game ball into the second V winning opening 2008.

In addition, according to the third sorting device 2550 of this embodiment, the game ball B sorted by the second sorting device 2540 toward the second losing port 2543 is supplied by the crane 2553 to the collection table 2554d downstream of the second V winning port 2008 and the third losing port 2555 of the third sorting table 2554, and in order for the game ball B to reach the central table 2554a where the second V winning port 2008 and the third losing port 2555 are provided, it has the characteristic that a necessary condition is that the third sorting right rotating body 2558 (third sorting left rotating body 2557) abuts with a certain degree of strength so as to overcome the inclined right table 2554c (left table 2554b). Therefore, for example, even if game ball B is supplied from the second distribution device 2540 when the rotation of the third distribution right rotor 2558 and the third distribution left rotor 2557 has stopped for some reason, the game ball B will remain at the front end of the right table 2554c, which is the lowest position on the third distribution table 2554, via the crane 2553, and will not move toward the central table 2554a where the second V winning port 2008 is located, and game ball B will not be illegally accepted by the second V winning port 2008.

The center member 2500 of this embodiment includes a front center decorative board 2591 that is provided between the bottom edge of the frame-shaped center frame 2501 and the third distribution device 2550 and is capable of emitting light forward, a front upper right decorative board 2592 that is provided above the role winning opening 2006 in the second ball passage section 2521, a front middle right decorative board 2593 that is provided between the role winning opening 2006 and the first winning passage 2536 of the first distribution device 2530, and a front lower right decorative board 2594 that is provided below the second losing passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540 (see Figures 131 and 174A, etc.).

Each of these, the front center decorative board 2591, the front upper right decorative board 2592, the front middle right decorative board 2593, and the front lower right decorative board 2594, is equipped with multiple full-color LEDs. By illuminating the LEDs mounted on the front center decorative board 2591, the bottom edge of the center frame 2501 can be illuminated and decorated. By illuminating the LEDs mounted on the front upper right decorative board 2592, the front middle right decorative board 2593, and the front lower right decorative board 2594, the second ball passage section 2521, the first sorting device 2530, and the second sorting device 2540 are illuminated and decorated, making it easier for the player to see the circulating game balls B.

The front center decorative board 2591 and the front upper right decorative board 2592 are each connected to the performance relay board 3026, and the front center right decorative board 2593 and the front lower right decorative board 2594 are connected to the front upper right decorative board 2592. In other words, the front center right decorative board 2593 and the front lower right decorative board 2594 are connected to the performance relay board 3026 via the front upper right decorative board 2592.

[5-8f. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 136, 148, 150 to 152, etc. Figure 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. Figure 150 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball received in the accessory winning port, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the third distribution device in (a) from a plan view, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the second distribution device in (a). Also, Figure 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the accessory winning port, the first distribution device, and the second distribution device according to the type of "small win". Figure 152 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the attacca unit, and is a cross-sectional view cut along line E-E in (a).

When assembled on the game board 5, the center member 2500 is located toward the upper right of the center of the game area 5a. Within the game area 5a, a number of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the areas to the left and below the center member 2500, and in the area between the attacca unit 2400 and the center member 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when a game ball B comes into contact with it is provided to the left of the center member 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center member 2500 are adjusted so that game balls B driven into the left side of the center member 2500 mainly enter the area to the right of the center of the windmill W, and are also adjusted to enter the area to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than that. The windmill W directs most of the game balls B that enter the right side of the center onto the multiple obstacle nails N that are lined up in a row on the underside of the center member 2500 so that they get lower toward the center of the play area 5a in the left-right direction, and causes the rest to flow down to the shelf portion 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted in a row on the lower side of the center member 2500 so that they get lower toward the left-right center of the play area 5a are adjusted so that a game ball B circulating on the upper side is accepted by the first starting hole 2002 with a higher probability than a game ball B circulating on the lower side.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the second ball passage section 2521 in the center member 2500 and the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacca unit 2400 are adjusted so that a game ball B that flows down the second ball passage section 2521 has an equal probability of entering the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003.

In the play area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the play area 5a. When the game ball B is driven into the play area 5a so as to flow along the left side of the center member 2500, as shown in FIG. 136, the multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center member 2500 guide the game ball B mainly to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability of being guided to the left of the center of the windmill W.

The game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the game ball B may be received by the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then handed over to the rear bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. The game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting opening 2002.

A game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W is guided toward the center in the left-right direction (first starting hole 2002) by a number of obstacle nails N planted in a diagonal row along the bottom side of the center member 2500, and there is a possibility that it will be accepted by the first starting hole 2002. In addition, a game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through between the multiple obstacle nails N that are lined up diagonally, and there is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200. A game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center member 2500 is unlikely to be accepted by the large winning hole 2005 of the attacca unit 2400.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the rear bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a lottery is held to determine the first special lottery result, and a special prize is awarded, such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out. Game balls B that are not received by either the general winning port 2001 or the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the outlet 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

Note that the game ball B that flows to the left of the center member 2500 in the game area 5a has no chance of being received by the normal winning hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, but it may occasionally be received by the large winning hole 2005, which is open.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that a game ball B shot to the left side of the center member 2500 will be accepted by the first starting hole 2002 is set higher than the probability that a game ball B shot to the right side of the center member 2500 will be accepted by the second starting hole 2004.

In contrast to the above, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is hit above the upper right part 2502a of the front frame of the center member 2500, it flows through the first ball passage part 2506 and into the second ball passage part 2521.

To be more specific, as shown by the imaginary lines in the enlarged view of FIG. 136, when the game ball B is struck with enough force to strike the ball strike section 1006 at the end of the first ball passage section 2506 (i.e., struck to the right), the game ball B that strikes the ball strike section 1006 bounces back. The game ball B that bounces back hits the bouncing ball receiving section 2521a at the entrance of the second ball passage section 2521, which is the side facing the ball strike section 1006, and enters (falls into) the second ball passage section 2521. The game ball B that enters the second ball passage section 2521 rolls on the top surface of the role winning opening door 2511 that closes the role winning opening 2006 on the way, and is released from the exit at the lower end of the second ball passage section 2521 toward the attacker unit 2400 below.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second ball passage section 2521 is guided by a number of obstacle nails N planted between the attacca unit 2400 so that it will enter either the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430, the normal winning hole 2003, or the area to the left of the normal winning hole 2003 with equal probability.

Then, the game ball B that enters the attacca right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released onto the lower right rail 1004 from the release opening 2435, which is lower than the big winning opening 2005, and is discharged outside the game area 5a from the outlet 1008. The game ball B that enters the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by this normal winning opening sensor 2401, a normal lottery is held and a special benefit is given, such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out.

In addition, the game ball B that enters the area on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N and flow down onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. In addition, the game ball B that enters the area on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 may occasionally pass through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and enter the attacca right passage 2430. Then, the game ball B that flows down onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 flows down onto the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 through the gap between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422.

At this time, if game ball B is received in the normal winning port 2003 and a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result, the second starting port 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern, so that game ball B that passes between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 may be received in the second starting port 2004. When game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the play area 5a. When game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, a second special lottery result is drawn and a special benefit such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given.

The game ball B that flows down onto the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 through the gap between the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 is released from the left end of the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 to the upper part of the large prize opening 2005. When the game ball B is released from the large prize opening guide shelf 2424, if the game ball B is received by the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and a "big win" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, or if the game ball B is received by the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008, the large prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the game ball B released to the left from the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 is received by the large prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. If the game ball B released to the attacca unit 2400 side through the second ball passage 2521 is not received by any of the normal prize opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the large prize opening 2005, it is discharged from the outlet 1008 at the bottom end of the game area 5a to the rear of the game panel 1100, which is outside the game area 5a.

When the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small win" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second lottery result, the device winning port 2006 provided in the middle of the second ball passage section 2521 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when a "small win" is drawn, the device winning port 2006 opens and closes, so that the player can perform a "right hit" so that the game ball B flows through the second ball passage section 2521 where the device winning port 2006 is provided, in order to allow the game ball B to be received by the device winning port 2006.

In this embodiment, the probability of a "small win" being drawn is higher than that of a "big win", and three patterns of "small win" are set: "First small win", "Second small win", and "Third small win", and in each pattern, the role winning port 2006 opens and closes roughly twice.

First, the opening and closing of the prize winning port 2006 in each "small win" will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 151, the "first small win" is completed after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed since the start of execution, when the prize winning port 2006 opens for a short time (80 ms), then closes, and after a short time (1252 ms) has elapsed, it opens again for a short time (80 ms) and then closes. The "second small win" is completed after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed since the start of execution, when the prize winning port 2006 opens for a short time (80 ms), then closes, and after a longer time (5420 ms) than the "first small win", it opens for a long time (9414 ms) and then closes. For the "third small win", after a certain amount of time (3000 ms) has elapsed since the start of execution, the role winning port 2006 opens for a short time (80 ms), then closes, and after a longer time (19366 ms) has elapsed than for the "second small win", it remains open for a longer time (9404 ms) before closing again and completing the process.

The second opening state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "first small win" begins after the start of execution and the time when the "first small win" is completed. Also, the second opening state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "third small win" begins after the time when the "second small win" is completed.

In FIG. 151, in the second long open state in the "second small win" and "third small win", the open state is repeated eight times (80 ms) at regular intervals (1252 ms). In other words, the role winning port 2006 opens and closes (is in the open state) twice in the "first small win" and nine times in the "second small win" and "third small win".

Next, in the case of a "small hit", the operation of the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is such that it rotates counterclockwise at the start of execution and enters the first storage state with the storage section 2531a facing upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms), then rotates clockwise and enters the unstorable state with the storage section 2531a facing rightward, and after the predetermined time (4560 ms) has passed, it enters the second storage state for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first time, and after a short time (500 ms) in the unstorable state, it enters the third storage state for the same time (13446 ms) as the second time, before entering the unstorable state.

The first available state of this distribution rotor 2531 ends halfway through the first open state of the special prize winning port 2006 in the "small win", and it becomes an unaccommodable state. Also, the distribution rotor 2531 enters a second available state after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "first small win". Therefore, at the time of the "first small win", the control of the distribution rotor 2531 ends before the second available state is reached, and the second and third available states are not executed. The second available state of this distribution rotor 2531 begins before the second open state of the special prize winning port 2006 in the "second small win", and it becomes an unaccommodable state after the second open state becomes a closed state.

The distribution rotor 2531 also enters the third storage-ready state after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "second small win". Therefore, at the time of the "second small win", control of the distribution rotor 2531 ends before the third storage-ready state is reached, and the third storage-ready state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotor 2531 enters the storage-ready state once at the time of the "first small win", twice at the time of the "second small win", and three times at the time of the "third small win". The third storage-ready state of this distribution rotor 2531 begins before the second opening state of the role winning port 2006 at the "third small win", and becomes unstorable after the second opening state ends and the closed state is reached.

Next, in the case of a "small win", the operation of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is to protrude forward at the same time as the start of execution, close the second losing port 2543 for a predetermined time (3020 ms) and enter a first closed state (a state in which distribution to the first V winning port 2007 is possible), and then retreat to enter an open state in which the second losing port 2543 is open (a state in which distribution to the third distribution device 2550 is possible), and after the predetermined time (23006 ms) has passed, enter a second closed state for a time longer than the first open state (13446 ms), and then enter an open state.

The first closing state of this distribution door 2544 ends halfway through the first opening state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "small win" and then becomes an open state. Also, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closing state of the distribution door 2544 begins halfway through the second opening state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third small win", and after the second opening state of the prize winning opening 2006 becomes a closed state, the distribution door 2544 goes from a closed state to an open state. Therefore, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closing state of the distribution door 2544 is executed only in the case of a "third small win", and the second closing state of the distribution door 2544 is not executed in the case of a "first small win" or a "second small win".

For this reason, in the "first small win", the opening and closing of the device winning port 2006 is executed twice in a short time, so it is unlikely that game ball B circulating through the second ball passage portion 2521 by "hitting to the right" will be accepted by the device winning port 2006. In addition, the first opening state of the device winning port 2006 in the "second small win" and "third small win" is also short, so it is unlikely that game ball B will be accepted by the device winning port 2006. In addition, the time during which the first storage state of the distribution rotor 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "small win" is shorter than the time during which the prize winning port 2006 is first open, so the possibility that the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 during the first open state of the prize winning port 2006 will be stored in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 is even lower. And, since the time when the first storage state of the distribution rotor 2531 ends and the first closed state of the distribution door 2544 in the second distribution device 2540 end are the same, the game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a during the first storage state of the distribution rotor 2531 will not be distributed to the first V prize winning port 2007 side.

On the other hand, the second opening of the device winning port 2006 in the "second small win" and "third small win" takes a long time, so there is a high possibility that game ball B will be accepted into the device winning port 2006 through the second ball passage section 2521. At this time, the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state where it can be accommodated before the device winning port 2006 opens, and then becomes in a state where it cannot be accommodated after the device winning port 2006 changes from an open state to a closed state. Therefore, there is a high possibility that game ball B accepted into the device winning port 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodation section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531.

Thus, in this example, not only is it unlikely that game ball B will be accepted by the reel winning port 2006 when it is in the first open state during the "second small win" and "third small win", but it is even less likely that game ball B accepted by the reel winning port 2006 when it is in the first open state is accommodated in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531. However, at the same time as the small win game state begins to be executed, the distribution rotor 2531 rotates counterclockwise to bring the storage section 2531a into an upwardly facing, capable of being accommodated, and after facing the storage section 2531a upward for a predetermined period of time (3020 ms), it rotates clockwise to bring the storage section 2531a into an unacceptable, capable of being accommodated, facing to the right. That is, immediately after the start of the small hit game state, the distribution rotor 2531 is unlikely to distribute game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side, but the distribution rotor 2531 performs an operation to distribute game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side, thereby indicating the distribution operation by the distribution rotor 2531 in advance.

Similarly, immediately after the start of the small win game state, the distribution rotor 2531 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first winning passage 2536 side, but at the same time as the start of the small win game state, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is pushed forward to close the second loss port 2543, making it possible to distribute to the first V winning port 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has elapsed, it retreats and opens the second loss port 2543, making it possible to distribute to the third distribution device 2550. In other words, immediately after the start of the small win game state, the distribution door 2544 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side, but the distribution door 2544 performs the operation of distributing the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side to indicate the distribution operation by the distribution door 2544 in advance.

In this example, the distribution rotor 2531 and distribution door 2544 operate simultaneously with the start of the small win game state, that is, during the performance of the performance at the start of the small win game state (the opening performance of the small win game state, for example, a performance in which an explanation of the game in the small win game state, such as "aim for the special prize opening 2006," is given), and the special prize opening 2006 opens for the first time after the operation of the distribution rotor 2531 and distribution door 2544. This reduces the possibility of the distribution rotor 2531 distributing game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side and the distribution door 2544 distributing game ball B to the first V prize opening 2007 side. In addition, if there is no possibility or is extremely low possibility that the distribution rotor 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first winning passage 2536 side and the distribution door 2544 will distribute the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side, the role winning port 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time as the operation of the distribution rotor 2531 and the distribution door 2544.

Also, only one of the distribution rotor 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the multiple movable parts (distribution rotor 2531, distribution door 2544) that distribute the game ball B that has entered the role winning port 2006 may be operated in advance to perform the distribution operation, and the other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the distribution door 2544, which is more likely to cause the game ball B to enter the V winning port (in this example, the first V winning port 2007) by operating (high V winning expectation), may not be operated in advance, and only the distribution rotor 2531, which is less likely to cause the game ball B to enter the V winning port (in this example, the second V winning port 2008) than the distribution door 2544 (low V winning expectation), may be operated in advance. As a result, while some of the allocation destinations of the game ball B that enters the bonus prize opening 2006 can be known in advance, the other allocation destinations can remain unknown. When the other allocation destinations are revealed, the player can be surprised by the increased number of allocation destinations, which can heighten anticipation, and the player can be drawn to the game ball B that is being allocated and enjoy its movement, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the movable part (distribution door 2544) with a high V winning expectation is not operated in advance to conceal its existence, leading the player to believe that game ball B will enter the third distribution device 2550, and when the "third small win" is executed, the movable part (distribution door 2544) with a high V winning expectation operates to cause game ball B to enter the V winning port (in this example, the first V winning port 2007), providing an element of surprise and increasing interest in the game by game ball B entering an unexpected allocation destination. In addition, the allocation to the first V winning port 2007 side is concealed, leading the player to believe that there are only two allocation destinations, the first losing port 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side, so that the player will not be disappointed even if a "second small win" with a lower V winning expectation than the "third small win" is executed and game ball B is allocated to the third distribution device 2550 side.

In this example, the distribution rotor 2531 is arranged in a manner that is easily visible to the player, whereas the distribution door 2544 is flat and moves back and forth on the game board 5, and has a small area on the front side, so that its operation is difficult to notice. Furthermore, the passage on the side of the first V winning port 2007, which can be accessed by the distribution door 2544 protruding forward, is difficult for the player to notice. Therefore, when the "third small win" occurs and the distribution door 2544 operates to cause game ball B to enter the first V winning port 2007, the behavior of game ball B is difficult to notice, and the player can be given the sensation that a V win has suddenly occurred and a 15R big win has been executed, without being made aware that game ball B has entered the first V winning port 2007.

In addition, by operating the distribution rotor 2531 in advance during the opening performance of the small win game state, the player can easily recognize the destination of the shot, i.e., the position to aim for during the small win game state, by the operation of the distribution rotor 2531 in addition to the instructions in the opening performance, such as "aim for the role winning hole 2006."

When the "small win" is drawn as described above and the device winning port 2006 is opened, the game ball B that has flowed down the second ball passage section 2521 is received by the device winning port 2006, and is then detected by the device winning port sensor 2513 and sent to the first distribution guide path 2534 of the first distribution device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the device winning port sensor 2513, a special benefit such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is awarded.

In the "second small win" of the "small wins", when the role winning port 2006 is opened for the second time, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is open, so when the distribution rotor 2531 rotates from a storage state to an unstorage state, the game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first winning passage 2536, flows through the second loss passage 2546 from the second loss port 2543 at the bottom, is detected by the second loss port sensor 2517, and is sent to the third distribution device 2550.

The game ball B sent to the third sorting device 2550 is supplied to the crane 2553 through the third sorting guideway 2551, rotates inside the crane 2553, and then falls to the third sorting table 2554 below. The game ball B that falls from the crane 2553 near the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the rear right table 2554c, then rolls toward the right side of the lowest front end of the right table 2554c, and comes into contact with the protrusion 2558a of the rotating third sorting right rotor 2558. After that, the game ball B that hits the protrusion 2558a and bounces backward enters the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third sorting middle rotor 2556, and rolls forward due to the inclination of the central table 2554a.

The game ball B that enters the central table 2554a from the third distribution rotating body 2556 is received by either the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555, which are provided near the front end of the central table 2554a, or passes beside them and enters the collection table 2554d. The game ball B that enters the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a will roll toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the part where it entered. Then, the game ball B that rolls from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is bounced off the protrusion 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotor 2557, in the same manner as in the movement on the right table 2554c described above, and enters the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the left table 2554b through the third distribution middle rotor 2556.

In this way, the basic flow of the game ball B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 is that it travels from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, passes through the third distribution rotor 2556, rolls around the central table 2554a, and is then sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c by the collection table 2554d, repeating this process until the game ball B is received by either the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555, circulating on the third distribution table 2554.

Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 passes through the third ball discharge passage 2574, is detected by the second V winning port sensor 2515, and is discharged onto the board holder 1200 via the back bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loss port 2555 passes through the third ball discharge passage 2574, is detected by the third loss port sensor 2518, and is discharged onto the board holder 1200 via the back bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning port sensor 2515, a special privilege is given in which the large winning port 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

In contrast, in the "third small win", when the role winning port 2006 is in the second open state, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the closed state, so when the distribution rotor 2531 rotates from the storage state to the non-storage state, the game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first hit passage 2536, abuts on the upper surface of the closed distribution door 2544, is guided to the right, and enters (is accepted by) the first V winning port 2007. The game ball B that entered the first V winning port 2007 passes through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning port sensor 2514, and is discharged onto the board holder 1200 via the back right ball discharge unit 3170 of the back unit 3000. When the first V winning hole sensor 2514 detects game ball B, a special bonus is awarded in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

For this reason, in order to open or close the large prize opening 2005 of the attacca unit 2400, it is necessary to receive the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and draw a first or second special lottery result such as a "small win" or a "large win". When the game ball B is shot so that it flows down the left side of the center member 2500, there is a chance that it will be received by the first starting opening 2002, but there is no chance that it will be received by the second starting opening 2004.

On the other hand, when game ball B is shot so that it flows down the right side of the center member 2500, there is a chance that it will be accepted by the normal winning port 2003 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 because a second ball passage section 2521 is provided on the right side of the center member 2500, but there is a possibility that it will enter the attacker right passage 2430, where it will be sent to the out port 1008 without being accepted by the normal winning port 2003, etc. In addition, in order to accept game ball B into the second starting port 2004, it is necessary to have game ball B accepted by the normal winning port 2003 and derive the normal lottery result of "normal win", so the probability of accepting game ball B is lower in the second starting port 2004 than in the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player can drive the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center member 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting opening 2002. This allows the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 by seeing the movement of the game ball B guided by the multiple obstacle nails N, and also heightens the player's anticipation for the game ball B being received by the first starting opening 2002.

When game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 and a "small win" is selected as the first special lottery result, the device winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so that game ball B can be accepted into the device winning opening 2006. In this way, the operation for shooting game ball B can be changed to "right shot" to shoot game ball B into the second ball passage section 2521 in which the device winning opening 2006 is located, thereby increasing the anticipation of game ball B being accepted into the device winning opening 2006.

Even if game ball B shot into the right side of center member 2500 is not accepted by special prize winning port 2006, it may still be accepted by normal prize winning port 2003 downstream, and further, it may be accepted by second start port 2004, which is opened according to the normal lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into normal prize winning port 2003, and a "small win" or "big win" may be drawn as the second special lottery result.

When the game ball B that is shot into this second ball passage section 2521 is received by the role winning port 2006, it is sent to the first distribution device 2530, so the player can be excited and nervous depending on whether or not the game ball B will be received in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531.

When the game ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is received in the storage section 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540, so the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether the game ball B is sorted to the first V winning port 2007 or the second losing port 2543 in the second sorting device 2540. Even if the game ball B is sorted to the second losing port 2543 in this second sorting device 2540, the game ball B is sent to the third sorting device 2550 equipped with the second V winning port 2008 through the second losing passage 2546, so that a sense of expectation for the second V winning port 2008 can be created and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

The game ball B that is sorted to the second losing port 2543 in the second sorting device 2540 is supplied to the third sorting table 2554 from the crown 2553 of the third sorting device 2550. Then, when it is bounced off the third sorting left rotating body 2557 or the third sorting right rotating body 2558 of the third sorting table 2554 and passes through the third sorting middle rotating body 2556 to enter the central table 2554a and roll forward, the player can be excited and entertained by the fact that the ball will be accepted by the second V winning port 2008 or not.

When game ball B is received by the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, or when a "big win" is drawn as the first and second special lottery results by receiving game ball B into the first and second starting ports 2002 and 2004, the large winning port 2005 of the attacca unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, providing an opportunity for many game balls B to be paid out. Therefore, a shooting operation can be performed to aim game ball B at the right side of the center member 2500 so that game ball B can be received into the large winning port 2005 that is open and closed.

[5-8g. Another embodiment of the center member]
Next, a center member 2500 of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 149A, 153, and 154. Figure 149A (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls passing through the second ball passage portion, and Figure 149A (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls passing through the third ball passage portion described later. Figures 153 (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment of the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion different from Figure 149A, and Figures 154 (e) and (f) are explanatory diagrams showing further different embodiments of the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion. In Figures 149A, 153, and 154, the same reference numerals are used for components that are the same or have the same functions as those of the previous embodiments.

The embodiment shown in Figure 149A has a third ball passage portion 2522 that connects the first ball passage portion 2506 and the attacca unit 2400 on the lower right, in addition to the second ball passage portion 2521 of the center member 2500.
The third ball passage portion 2522 has an entrance that opens upward, at a location spaced to the left from the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521, on the right end side of the front frame upper right portion 2502a.
The third ball passage section 2522 extends downward in a substantially straight line from the entrance at the upper end, bends backward at a height lower than the height of the section where the second ball passage section 2521 first bends to the right, then bends downward behind the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 to be aligned in the front-to-back direction with the second ball passage section 2521, extends downward so as to substantially coincide in the left-to-right direction with the section of the second ball passage section 2521 that extends downward to the left of the bonus prize-winning opening 2006, and comes to a cross at a height at the center of the gaming area 5a. It bends in a stepped manner to the right, then bends downward, then bends forward at a section lower than the section extending to the right on the lower side of the second ball passage section 2521, and then bends to the right so as to extend along the lower side of the section extending to the right on the lower side of the second ball passage section 2521, with the front-to-back plane being on the same plane as the second ball passage section 2521, and then bends downward adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the second ball passage section 2521, so that the outlet is formed in a shape that opens downward.

The second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 have an overlapping section 2520a that appears to overlap from the front by lining up with each other in the front-to-back direction in the section extending up and down to the left of the device winning opening 2006 in the second ball passage section 2521. In this overlapping section 2520a, both the game ball B flowing through the second ball passage section 2521 and the game ball B flowing through the third ball passage section 2522 can be clearly seen from the front, making it difficult for the player to determine which passage the game ball B flowing through the overlapping section 2520a is flowing through.

The second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis above the overlapping section 2520a, and are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis below the overlapping section 2520a in the opposite direction to the upper side. The outlets of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 open downward above the normal winning port 2003 in the attacca unit 2400.

The second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 each have multiple protrusions 2520b spaced apart in the flow direction of the game ball B, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the protrusions 2520b, the increase in its flow speed can be suppressed.

When the game ball B, which has been shot into the first ball passage section 2506, enters the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522, the center member 2500 in Figure 149A having the above configuration is twisted backwards and aligned in the front-to-back direction with the second ball passage section 2521 at the overlapping section 2520a, and then twisted forwards and released downward from the left exit of the second ball passage section 2521 toward the attacker unit 2400.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the third ball passage section 2522 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacca unit 2400 to enter either the normal winning opening 2003 or the area to the left of the normal winning opening 2003, and in rare cases, is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430.
In addition, the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the exits of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 and the Attacca unit 2400 are adjusted so that a game ball B that flows down the second ball passage section 2521 has the same probability of entering the first opening 2431 of the Attacca right passage 2430, the normal winning port 2003, and the left side of the normal winning port 2003, whereas a game ball B that circulates through the third ball passage section 2522 has a higher probability of entering the normal winning port 2003 and the left side of the normal winning port 2003 than the first opening 2431 of the Attacca right passage 2430.
In addition, the probability that game ball B will reach the large prize opening 2005 is higher when the game ball passes through the third ball passage portion 2522 than when the game ball passes through the second ball passage portion 2521.
Therefore, the player can refrain from simply "hitting to the right" and can adjust the hitting strength so that the game ball B enters the third ball passage portion 2522, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B.

The right side of the center member 2500 has an overlapping portion 2520a where the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. When looking at the overlapping portion 2520a, it is difficult to determine which passage the game ball B is passing through. This makes the player think that the game ball B entered the second ball passage portion 2521 instead of the third ball passage portion 2522, and draws the player's attention to the game ball B passing on the right side of the center member 2500. In addition, the game ball B, which is aimed at the third ball passage portion 2522, can make the player excited as to whether the game ball B will come out from the exit of the third ball passage portion 2522, and can increase the player's expectations for the game. In addition, if the game ball B comes out from the unexpected exit of the second ball passage portion 2521, it can give the player an unexpected surprise, and can entertain the player and suppress a decline in interest.

Compared to FIG. 149A, the embodiment shown in FIG. 153(a) has the inlet at the upper end of the third ball passage portion 2522 spaced a greater distance to the left from the inlet of the second ball passage portion 2521. Other than that, it is the same as the embodiment in FIG. 149A, and this embodiment can also achieve the same effects as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153(b), the ball striking portion 1006 in the front component 1000 is in the above-mentioned backward tilted state so that the game ball B that strikes it tends to bounce back toward the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522, and the area between the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 in the front frame upper right portion 2502a is tilted so that the third ball passage portion 2522 side (left side) is lower. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the third ball passage portion 2522 side, and therefore the adjustment range of the impact strength of the game ball B entering the third ball passage portion 2522 is wider, making it easier to perform the operation of hitting the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 153 (c), while in the embodiments in Figures 149A and 153 (a) and (b), the inlets of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 open upward, the upstream sides of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 extend to near the center in the left-right direction above the center member 2500, and the inlets open to the left side lined up one above the other.

In this embodiment, a portion of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the play area 5a) constitutes a portion of the second ball passage section 2521, and a portion of the front frame upper right section 2502a constitutes a portion of the third ball passage section 2522. Also, in this embodiment, the left-right length of the first ball passage section 2506 between the front frame upper right section 2502a and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the play area 5a) is the length from the left end of the front frame upper right section 2502a to the respective entrances of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, which is narrower than the first ball passage section 2506 shown above in Figure 149A, etc.

In this embodiment, in order to make the game ball B enter the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522, it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a hitting strength that makes it hit the narrower part to the left of the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522 in the front frame upper right part 2502a, or with a hitting strength that makes it enter directly into the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522 that opens to the left, so the adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B is narrower compared to the embodiment of FIG. 149A, etc. Also, when the game ball B hit into the first ball passage section 2506 to the left of the entrance of the second ball passage section 2521 and the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522 hits the left end (the part between the two entrances) of the wall section that separates the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, depending on the momentum and angle of the rebounded game ball B to the left, it may deviate from the first ball passage section 2506. In other words, even if game ball B is shot with enough strength to enter the first ball passage 2506, there is a possibility that it will deviate to the left from the first ball passage 2506 and circulate along the left side of the center member 2500 without entering either the second ball passage 2521 or the third ball passage 2522. Because of this, the difficulty of the operation of shooting game ball B increases, which can increase the player's motivation to shoot game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the gaming medium and suppressing a decline in interest.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 153(d) is the embodiment of FIG. 153(c) in which a branch section 2524 is provided in the middle of the second ball passage section 2521, which is connected in one direction to the third ball passage section 2522. The branch section 2524 is provided directly above the part that bends downward from the right end of the part (upper right part of the front frame 2502a) that extends left and right in the third ball passage section 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the second ball passage section 2521, depending on the hitting strength (if the hitting strength is weak), the game ball B will branch off to the third ball passage section 2522 side at the branch section 2524, so the difficulty of circulating the game ball B through the third ball passage section 2522 can be lowered than in the embodiment of FIG. 153(c).

In addition, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the third ball passage section 2522, it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a force weaker than that of the game ball B entering the second ball passage section 2521. Also, since the branch section 2524, which is connected to the second ball passage section 2521, is provided above the part of the third ball passage section 2522 that bends downward, the game ball B that enters the third ball passage section 2522 does not bounce upward (towards the branch section 2524) at the part that bends downward, and does not enter the second ball passage section 2521 side through the branch section 2524. In other words, the branch section 2524 is connected in one direction from the second ball passage section 2521 to the third ball passage section 2522.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second ball passage section 2521, which has a branch section 2524 on the way, and flows through the second ball passage section 2521, it branches off at the branch section 2524 to either the second ball passage section 2521 side or the third ball passage section 2522 side, so the player can be kept on edge depending on which side the game ball B will branch off to at the branch section 2524, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball B inside the second ball passage section 2521, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the player shoots game ball B aiming at the third ball passage section 2522, but game ball B enters the entrance of the second ball passage section 2521, there is a possibility that the game ball will branch off to the third ball passage section 2522 at the branching section 2524 of the second ball passage section 2521. Therefore, the player can be kept on edge and excited depending on whether or not the game ball will branch off to the third ball passage section 2522 at the branching section 2524, which can entertain the player. In addition, if the game ball branches off to the third ball passage section 2522 at the branching section 2524, the player's mistake in the shooting operation is covered and game ball B will flow through the desired third ball passage section 2522, which can make the player feel like he has made a gain and suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 154 (e), the third ball passage section 2522 has a bypass section 2525 that crosses the frame of the center member 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the front frame upper right section 2502a. Therefore, all game balls B that are shot into the first ball passage section 2506 above the front frame upper right section 2502a will flow through the second ball passage section 2521. According to this embodiment, when game ball B enters the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522 and flows through the bypass section 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center member 2500, so that the flow of game ball B can be made noticeable to the player. Therefore, when game ball B flows through the bypass section 2525, the player can be made to think that something good will happen afterwards. This allows the player to perform an operation to shoot game ball B aimed at the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522 having the bypass section 2525, and the operation of shooting game ball B can be made enjoyable, suppressing a decline in interest.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 154(f), an entrance to the third ball passage section 2522 is provided behind the second ball passage section 2521, and the entrances are arranged in the front-to-rear direction. The entrance to the second ball passage section 2521 is provided forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the entrance to the third ball passage section 2522 is provided rearward of the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, near the ball hitting section 1006 of the front component 1000 in the first ball passage section 2506, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right rear, so that the game ball B that has circulated along the front surface of the game panel 1100 is guided toward the third ball passage section 2522. In addition, the ball hitting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 is inclined so that the portion near the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 moves to the right as it moves rearward, and the game ball B that is hit with force toward the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 can be reflected toward the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 appear to be lined up and overlapped in the front-to-back direction, making it difficult to determine which passage the game ball B that is hit into the first ball passage portion 2506 above the center member 2500 has entered, which draws the player's attention.

[5-8h. Bouncing ball catcher]
As described above, in the center member 2500 of the embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of Figure 136, a ball hitting portion 1006 is provided at the end of the first ball passage portion 2506, and a bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is formed at the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 opposite it, so that when a game ball B hit to the right collides with the ball hitting portion 1006, it bounces back, and then hits the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a and bounces back again as it travels down the second ball passage portion 2521.
Usually, the game ball B aimed at the right hand side is hit with a strong force, so that the impact on the ball hitting portion 1006 at the time of impact is large, and therefore the impact on the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is also large. Since the resin constituting the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a may crack due to repeated exposure to such impacts, in the embodiment of the center member 2500 shown in Figures 149A, 153, and 154, the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is molded separately from synthetic resin and is firmly and rigidly joined by tightening it with a screw that is inserted from the back side of the center member 2500. This strengthens the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, making it less likely to crack, and even if it does crack, it can be removed and replaced.

However, when the separate bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is rigidly connected to the center member 2500 with screws as shown in Figure 149A, etc., the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a itself does not have a shock-absorbing function, so that the game ball B that bounces off the ball hitting portion 1006 and hits the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a may be bounced back again with force, which may cause the speed of the game ball B in the second ball passage portion 2521 to become too fast.

149B and 149C, the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, which is separate from the center frame 2501 that is a fixed member fixed to the game panel 1100, is attached to the center frame 2501 with a non-rigid joint structure. Here, the term "non-rigid joint structure" refers to a joint relationship that does not use a means for integrating members together, such as adhesive joints or screw joints, and therefore "attaching with a non-rigid joint structure" refers to attaching members together while maintaining a relatively movable state without integrating the members together. The non-rigid joint structure here is configured so that vertically elongated support protrusions 2526b protruding oppositely from support portion 2501c of center frame 2501 and transparent passage cover 2521d covering support portion 2501c are fitted into vertically elongated receiving hole 2526a formed on the front and rear surfaces of bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a from both the front and rear directions, and the dimensional difference (clearance) between receiving hole 2526a and support protrusion 2526b which is one size smaller than it results in a loose fit which can be felt with the fingertips in all directions, especially in the up and down direction.
In addition, the receiving hole 2526a of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a and the support protrusion 2526b of the support portion 2501c, which are exemplified as a non-rigid joint structure, may be replaced with each other to form the receiving hole 2526a on the support portion 2501c side by providing the support protrusion 2526b on the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a side. Also, even if the support protrusion 2526b and the receiving hole 2526a are not provided, for example, the support portion 2501c may be formed in a frame shape so that the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a itself is loosely fitted therein. However, if the support protrusion 2526b is provided on the support portion 2501c side, as shown in FIG. 149C, the support protrusion 2526b itself can guide the game ball B to the second ball passage portion 2521 side, so that even if a mistake such as forgetting to attach the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a to the support portion 2501c occurs, it is possible to continue playing the game. Such support protrusion 2526b does not need to be plate-shaped as shown in the figure, but may be in the form of a round shaft, and the key is that the game ball B that hits the support portion 2501c itself is bounced back toward the second ball passage portion 2521 without getting stuck there.
In addition, the configuration in which the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is a separate piece and attached to the center frame 2501 with a non-rigid joint structure can also be applied to the center member 2500 of the above embodiment that does not have the third ball passage portion 2522, as shown in Figures 149D to 149F.

As described above, with the separate bouncing ball receiving part 2521a attached to the center frame 2501 with a non-rigid joint structure, when the game ball B that bounces off the ball hitting part 1006 hits the bouncing ball receiving part 2521a, the impact is absorbed by the rattle of the bouncing ball receiving part 2521a against the center frame 2501, and the momentum of the game ball B is killed and the rebound weakens, so the subsequent falling speed becomes slower. In addition, because the impact applied to the bouncing ball receiving part 2521a is absorbed, the risk of damage to the bouncing ball receiving part 2521a itself and the center frame 2501 can also be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 149E and 149D, the separate bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a has a flat top 2521ah, and the position of the top 2521ah is set so as to be stepped lower than the terminal end of the passage bottom (upper right portion 2502a of the front frame) that forms the lower side of the first ball passage portion 2506.
According to this configuration, when the game ball B that bounces off the ball hitting portion 1006 lands on the top 2521ah of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a with too much momentum and tries to flow back through the first ball passage portion 2506, it hits the step 2527 formed at the boundary between the passage bottom of the first ball passage portion 2506 and the top 2521ah of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a. Therefore, the game ball B that tries to flow back through the first ball passage portion 2521 is stopped or decelerated here, and quickly changes direction and falls toward the second ball passage portion 2521, reducing the risk of collision with the following game ball B hit to the right.

In the embodiment, the ball hitting section 1006 is set so that when the surface that the game ball B hits is the front side, the surface is tilted backwards. This causes the game ball B to bounce slightly upwards, making it easier for the game ball B to land on the top 2521ah side of the bouncing ball receiving section 2521a. This makes the step 2527 described above function effectively. In order to further enhance the effect of the step 2527, it is preferable to make the steep angle of the step 2527 approximately perpendicular to the surface of the top 2521ah of the bouncing ball receiving section 2521a or an acute angle to the surface of the top 2521ah. This increases the resistance when climbing over the step 2527, improving the effect of preventing the game ball B from flowing back.

However, if you do not want players to know about the existence of the step 2527 for presentation reasons, etc., then as shown in Figure 149E, the upper edge of the passage cover 2521d covering the front of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a can be raised at least to the level of the step 2527, or even higher, so that at least the step 2527 and the upper edge of the passage cover 2521b overlap in the front-to-rear direction.

In addition, the center frame 2501 of the embodiment is formed in a color (including transparent) different from the color of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, which is separate from the center frame 2501. This makes it possible to clearly identify the end of the first ball passage portion 2506 and to easily aim when hitting with the right hand. If the passage cover 2521d shown in Fig. 149E is opaque and blocks the front of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, it is sufficient to make a part of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a protrude outside the outer edge of the passage cover 2521d.
Furthermore, by making the separate bouncing ball receiving part 2521a a different color from the center frame 2501, any defective set during manufacturing can be easily found by visual inspection. In particular, if the center frame 2501 is made transparent and the bouncing ball receiving part 2521a is made opaque, when the bouncing ball receiving part 2521a is not attached, the back (such as the back front performance unit 3200) which should be hidden by the bouncing ball receiving part 2521a and cannot be seen becomes fully visible, causing a significant change in appearance, making it easier to find any defective set.

Moreover, it is difficult to tell up from down by itself with the transparent center frame 2501, and it takes a certain amount of time to determine the correct orientation. In order to prevent such a loss of time, in this embodiment, as shown by the dashed line and the imaginary line in Fig. 149F, a colored sticker 2528 including white is affixed either to the dashed line location that is hidden by the separate bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a and cannot be seen by the player when the device is installed on the gaming panel 1100, or to the imaginary line location that is close to the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a and is difficult to see because it is roughly parallel to the player's line of sight.
By using the sticker 2528 as a guide, the up and down of the center frame 2501 can be easily determined, so that the sticker can be quickly attached to the game panel 1100. In addition, since the sticker 2528 is almost invisible to the player when attached to the game panel 1100, there is almost no risk of it interfering with the presentation.
The color of the sticker 2528 is preferably the same color as the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a if the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is separate from the center frame 2501. For example, if the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is white, the sticker 2528 should be white. This makes it possible to clearly indicate the attachment position of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a.
In addition, it is also possible to write codes or letters on sticker 2528 indicating, for example, management information for game panel 1100.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 155 to 159. Figure 155 is a front view of the rear unit of the game board, Figure 156 is a perspective view of the rear unit of the game board seen from the front, and Figure 157 is a perspective view of the rear unit of the game board seen from the rear. Figure 158 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and Figure 159 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the rear.
The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and has a peripheral control unit 1500 and an effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the starting port unit 2100, and a vibration sensor 3003 that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. The rear box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and has a locking mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the performance display device 1600. The rear box 3010 is attached to the left side of the rear surface below the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and various sensors, drive motors, etc. 710, a panel relay board cover 3025 attached to the rear box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 1710, a performance relay board 3026 attached to the right side of the rear face below the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 and relaying the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and a performance relay board cover 3027 attached to the rear box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the performance relay board 3026.

[5-9a-1. Back box]
The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped and open at the front, with a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-shaped LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed leftward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b and into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d that is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 near the left-right center of the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b, and into which a locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting section 3010b is also formed to be large enough to fit the performance display device 1600 into the frame. The rear box 3010 has a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout section 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind, so that it can slide up and down.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from its front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting the light guide plate performance unit 3100 and the like. A vibration sensor 3003 is attached to a portion of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a light guide plate performance unit 3100 mounted inside the rear box 3010, a rear bottom ball discharge unit 3150 mounted on the lower front surface of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 and receiving game balls B from the starting unit 2100 and side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 and discharging them downward, and a rear right ball discharge unit 3170 mounted on the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 and receiving game balls B from the first distribution device 2530 and second distribution device 2540 of the center member 2500 and discharging them downward.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 and includes a back front performance unit 3200 extending along both the left and right sides and the top side of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, a back front lower left performance unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, a back front lower right performance unit 3400 attached to the lower right on the front side of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, and a sub-status indicator 3500 provided near the right end of the back upper decorative body 3211 on the back front performance unit 3200.

[5-9a-2. Light guide plate production unit]
Next, the light guide plate performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 160 to Fig. 162. Fig. 160(a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate performance unit of the back unit seen from the front, and Fig. 160(b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate performance unit seen from the back. Fig. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern board in the light guide plate performance unit from the front. Fig. 162(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated, and Fig. 162(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated.

The light guide plate performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the rear box 3010. The light guide plate performance unit 3100 includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, a transparent flat light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, a first pattern board 3103 mounted on the unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102 and equipped with multiple LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102, and a second pattern board 3104 mounted on the unit base 3101 to the left of the light guide plate 3102 and equipped with multiple LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the left side of the light guide plate 3102.

The light guide plate performance unit 3100 also includes an upper board cover 3105 attached to the upper edge of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the first pattern board 3103, a left board cover 3106 attached to the left edge of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the second pattern board 3104, and a left cooling fan 3107 and a right cooling fan 3108 attached to the lower edge of the unit base 3101 at a distance in the left-right direction.

The light guide plate 3102 has a first pattern 3110 (see FIG. 162(a)) formed by a countless uneven first reflecting parts that reflect only light from above forward, and a second pattern 3120 (see FIG. 162(b)) formed by a countless uneven second reflecting parts that reflect only light from the left forward. In other words, the light guide plate performance unit 3100 can illuminate the first pattern 3110 when the LED on the first pattern board 3103 is illuminated, and can illuminate the second pattern 3120 when the LED on the second pattern board 3104 is illuminated.

The light guide plate 3102 has, as the reflecting parts constituting the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120, a point-like light emitting part 3102a (shaded part in FIG. 162) that emits light in a point-like manner by light irradiated from the corresponding direction, a linear light emitting part 3102b (cross-hatched part in FIG. 162) that emits light in a line by light irradiated from the corresponding direction, and a spectral light emitting part 3102c (mottled part in FIG. 162) that emits light by dispersing the cocktail light irradiated from the corresponding direction. In other words, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are formed by appropriately combining the point-like light emitting part 3102a, the linear light emitting part 3102b, and the spectral light emitting part 3102c. Although not shown in the figure, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are also formed by varying the densities of the point light-emitting portion 3102a, the linear light-emitting portion 3102b, and the spectral light-emitting portion 3102c.

Here, cocktail light refers to light of a color that includes two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is irradiated onto the spectral light-emitting unit as cocktail light, the yellow light components are split into red and green light, and parts that look red or green appear in the relevant area. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated onto the spectral light-emitting unit as cocktail light, the white light components are split into red, green, and blue light, and parts that look red, green, or blue appear in the relevant area, or light of a color that is a suitable mixture of these, and a sparkling rainbow-colored light can be displayed. Note that when light of only one of the three primary colors of light is irradiated onto this spectral light-emitting unit, the light does not have any components that are split into separate colors, so the light of that color is emitted. For this reason, the spectral light-emitting unit can emit light in a single color or in multiple sparkling colors depending on the color of the light it irradiates, allowing for a more diverse light-emitting performance.

The light guide plate 3102 has numerous first reflective portions forming the first pattern 3110 and numerous second reflective portions forming the second pattern 3120, each with finely formed projections and recesses. When the LEDs on the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are not illuminated, the light guide plate 3102 appears transparent, allowing the performance images displayed on the performance display device 1600 located behind it to be clearly visible.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), the first pattern 3110 is a pattern consisting of the characters "Decisive Battle". This first pattern 3110 has a portion in which the shadow of "Decisive Battle" extends radially outward from the characters "Decisive Battle", and multiple arc-shaped portions are arranged radially outside of that portion. In the first pattern 3110, the portion of the characters "Decisive Battle" is formed by dot-like light-emitting elements 3102a, the portion in the outer shadow of the characters "Decisive Battle" is formed by linear light-emitting elements 3102b, and the outer arc-shaped portion is formed by spectral light-emitting elements 3102c and linear light-emitting elements 3102b.

As shown in FIG. 162(b), the second pattern 3120 is a pattern imitating a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The second pattern 3120 has a central pattern portion 3121 consisting of a character, a radial pattern portion 3122 extending radially outward from the central pattern portion 3121, and a scattered pattern portion 3123 that is scattered around the outside of the central pattern portion 3121 like dancing petals. The central pattern portion 3121 is formed by dot-like light-emitting portions 3102a that are bordered on the periphery by spectral light-emitting portions 3102c. The radial pattern portion 3122 is formed by spectral light-emitting portions 3102c that are bordered on the linear light-emitting portions 3102b. The scattered pattern portion 3123 is formed by spectral light-emitting portions 3102c.

The radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 is formed so as to be continuous with the radial decorative portion 3212b of the rear left decorative body 3212 and the radial decorative portion 3213b of the rear right decorative body 3213 of the rear front performance unit 3200 described later (see FIG. 172). As a result, when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated, the radial pattern portion 3122 appears to be connected to the radial decorative portion 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b, making the second pattern 3120 appear larger, and the radial decorative portion 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b protruding forward give the second pattern 3120 a sense of depth, making a strong impact on the player.

The light guide plate 3102 also has a lower cutout 3102d cut upward from the lower edge, and a right cutout 3102e cut leftward from the right edge. The lower cutout 3102d is to prevent the light guide plate 3102 from contacting the third sorting table 2554 and the upper cover 2577 of the third sorting device 2550 in the center member 2500, and the right cutout 3102e is to prevent the light guide plate 3102 from contacting the third ball passage 2522 of the center member 2500.

The first pattern board 3103 is divided into three parts in the left-right direction: the left decorative board 3103a on the light guide plate, the middle decorative board 3103b on the light guide plate, and the right decorative board 3103c on the light guide plate. A number of full-color LEDs that emit light downward are mounted on the underside of each board. The first pattern board 3103 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the performance relay board 3026. The left decorative board 3103a on the light guide plate, the middle decorative board 3103b on the light guide plate, and the right decorative board 3103c on the light guide plate are connected in a rosary pattern to the performance relay board 3026 in this order (see Figure 174A).

The second pattern board 3104 is divided vertically into two parts, the light guide plate upper left decorative board 3104a and the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3104b, and multiple full-color LEDs that emit light to the right are mounted on the right surface of each board. The second pattern board 3104 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the performance relay board 3026. The light guide plate lower left decorative board 3104b and the light guide plate upper left decorative board 3104a are connected in a daisy chain in that order to the performance relay board 3026 (see Figure 174A).

The two left and right cooling fans 3107 and 3108 attached to the bottom edge of the unit base 3101 are intended to cool the third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 of the third distribution device 2550 in the center member 2500. The left and right cooling fans 3107 and 3108 are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and are attached diagonally toward the front in the center in the left-right direction. The left and right cooling fans 3107 and 3108 each have a left fan motor 3107a and a right fan motor 3108a that are connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the performance relay board 3026 (see FIG. 174A).

This light guide plate performance unit 3100 has the back bottom ball ejection unit 3150, back right ball ejection unit 3170, back front performance unit 3200, back front bottom left performance unit 3300, and back front bottom right performance unit 3400 attached to the front outer periphery of the unit base 3101. In other words, all the performance units in the back unit 3000 are attached to the light guide plate performance unit 3100. As a result, when assembling the back unit 3000 (game board 5), by attaching all the other performance units of the back unit 3000, such as the back bottom ball ejection unit 3150, to the light guide plate performance unit 3100, all the performance units can be attached to the back box 3010 simply by attaching the light guide plate performance unit 3100 to the back box 3010.

The light guide plate performance unit 3100 is formed as a unit by attaching the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern board 3103, and the second pattern board 3104 to the square frame-shaped unit base 3101. As a result, when assembled into the light guide plate performance unit 3100, the light guide plate 3102 can be handled by holding the unit base 3101 without touching the light guide plate 3102. This prevents the worker from touching the light guide plate 3102 during assembly, which can lead to fingerprints, dirt, scratches, etc. on the light guide plate 3102, and makes it easier to handle the light guide plate 3102.

However, when a decorative body that is luminous and decorated is provided behind the light guide plate, the light from the luminous decoration of the decorative body is irradiated to the player in front through the light guide plate, and the light may cause the light guide plate to appear partially luminous or the pattern luminous and displayed on the light guide plate to be visible. When the light guide plate is luminous or the pattern is visible, it appears to overlap with the luminous decoration behind it, making the luminous decoration of the decorative body difficult to see, and there is a risk of reducing the performance effect of the luminous decoration. In addition, if the pattern luminous and displayed on the light guide plate is visible in advance due to the luminous decoration of the decorative body provided behind the light guide plate, the impact on the player when the pattern on the light guide plate is actually luminous and displayed may be reduced, and there is a risk of not being able to fully obtain the performance effect of the light guide plate. In addition, when a decorative body is provided behind the light guide plate, when a pattern is luminous and displayed on the light guide plate, the rear decorative body appears to overlap through the pattern, so depending on the shape and color of the decorative body, there is a risk of the pattern on the luminous and displayed light guide plate being difficult to see.

In contrast, the light guide plate performance unit 3100 of this embodiment is located at the rearmost position within the rear box 3010 when assembled to the game board 5, and no decorative body is provided behind the light guide plate performance unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102). In other words, because the rear front performance unit 3200, rear front lower left performance unit 3300, and rear front lower right performance unit 3400 are provided in front of the light guide plate 3102, even if the rear upper decorative body 3211, rear left decorative body 3212, and rear right decorative body 3213, etc. are illuminated, the light is unlikely to reach the light guide plate 3102.

Therefore, even if decorative bodies such as the upper back decorative body 3211, the left back decorative body 3212, and the right back decorative body 3213 are illuminated, the light guide plate 3102 (first pattern 3110 and second pattern 3120) can be prevented from appearing to glow, so the luminous decoration of the decorative bodies is not difficult to see, and the luminous decoration of the decorative bodies can be displayed in good condition, allowing the dramatic effect of the luminous decoration of the decorative bodies to be fully demonstrated.

In addition, even if decorative elements such as the upper back decorative element 3211, the left back decorative element 3212, and the right back decorative element 3213 are illuminated, the light guide plate 3102 (first pattern 3110 and second pattern 3120) can be prevented from appearing to glow. This prevents the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 from being seen by the player before they are illuminated, thereby reducing the impact on the player when the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are illuminated. This allows the dramatic effect of the illuminated display of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 to be fully utilized.

Furthermore, since no decorative body such as the upper back decorative body 3211 is provided behind the light guide plate 3102, even if the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are illuminated on the light guide plate 3102, no decorative body is seen overlapping the rear of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120, so that the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be displayed in good condition, and the dramatic effect of the illuminated display of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be fully demonstrated.

As described above, the top back decorative body 3211, the left back decorative body 3212, and the right back decorative body 3213, etc. are not visible behind the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120, so that the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen in good condition, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen in good condition regardless of the shape and color of the top back decorative body 3211, the left back decorative body 3212, and the right back decorative body 3213, etc. Therefore, it is not necessary to consider the shape and color of the decorative body such as the top back decorative body 3211, the left back decorative body 3212, and the right back decorative body 3213 in consideration of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, and the design freedom of the decorative body can be increased, and a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a decorative body with a higher decorative effect can be provided.

Furthermore, the light guide plate performance unit 3100 is provided at the rearmost part within the rear box 3010, and the light guide plate 3102 is located as close as possible to the performance display device 1600. Therefore, the direction of the light from the performance display device 1600 is approximately perpendicular to the light guide plate 3102. As a result, the light guide plate 3102 does not appear to be partially illuminated, and the first pattern 3110 and second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 do not appear to be illuminated, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the light guide plate 3102 is as close as possible to the performance display device 1600, depending on the performance image (including the screen color) displayed on the performance display device 1600, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 that are illuminated can be made to stand out or stand out, and the performance effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be further enhanced. In addition, by bringing the light guide plate 3102 close to the performance display device 1600, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 can be mistaken for the performance image of the performance display device 1600, or the performance image of the performance display device 1600 can be mistaken for the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, and a more diverse performance can be shown to the player.

The performance display device 1600 may be attached to the rear of the light guide plate performance unit 3100. In this way, when the performance display device 1600 is attached to the light guide plate performance unit 3100, the rear of the light guide plate 3102 is covered by the performance display device 1600, making it more difficult to touch the light guide plate 3102, and providing the same effect as above.

[5-9a-3. Bottom ball discharge unit]
Next, the back-bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to Figures 155 to 159. The back-bottom ball discharge unit 3150 is attached to the front lower part of the unit base 3101. The back-bottom ball discharge unit 3150 receives the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges it to the lower board holder 1200. The back-bottom ball discharge unit 3150 has a general winning port sensor 3001 that separately detects the game ball B received in the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

The bottom back ball discharge unit 3150 receives the game ball B that is received by the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555 in the third sorting device 2550 of the center member 2500 and discharged downward, and discharges it to the board holder 1200 below.

Furthermore, the bottom back ball discharge unit 3150 has an attachment portion 3155 below the opening for receiving the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, which allows the attachment of an out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008. By attaching the out ball detection unit 3030 to this attachment portion 3155, the game ball B received in the out port 1008 can be detected.

[5-9a-4. Back right ball ejection unit]
Next, the rear right ball ejection unit 3170 of the rear unit 3000 will be described with reference to Figures 155 to 159. The rear right ball ejection unit 3170 is attached to the lower right side of the unit base 3101. This rear right ball ejection unit 3170 receives the game balls B received in the first losing port 2535 of the first sorting device 2530 in the center member 2500 and the first V winning port 2007 of the second sorting device 2540, and ejects them to the board holder 1200 below.

[5-9a-5. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the rear front performance unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 155 to 159 and Fig. 163. Fig. 163 is a front view showing the arrangement of each decorative board of the rear front performance unit in the rear unit. The rear front performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the front of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate performance unit 3100.

The rear front performance unit 3200 is formed in a U-shape that opens downward when viewed from the front, and includes a decorative body base 3201 that is attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, a rear upper decorative body 3211 that is attached to the front side of the upper edge of the decorative body base 3201 and extends left and right, a rear left decorative body 3212 that is attached to the front side of the left edge of the decorative body base 3201 and extends up and down, and a rear right decorative body 3213 that is attached to the front side of the right edge of the decorative body base 3201 and extends up and down.

The front back performance unit 3200 also includes a top back decorative board 3221 that is provided between the top back decorative body 3211 and the decorative body base 3201 to illuminate and decorate the top back decorative body 3211, a left back decorative board 3222 that is provided between the left back decorative body 3212 and the decorative body base 3201 to illuminate and decorate the left back decorative body 3212, and a right back decorative board 3223 that is provided between the right back decorative body 3213 and the decorative body base 3201 to illuminate and decorate the right back decorative body 3213.

Furthermore, the back front performance unit 3200 is equipped with a sub-status indicator 3500 which indicates the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and displays the number of reserved balls. The sub-status indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of the back upper decorative body 3211.

The upper back decorative body 3211 is translucent overall. The upper back decorative body 3211 has a logo section 3211a consisting of three circles arranged overlapping in the left-right direction, and a logo decoration section 3211b consisting of small spheres arranged in a rosary shape along the outer periphery of the logo section 3211a. A predetermined logo character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is formed as a relief on the logo section 3211a. The upper back decorative body 3211 has a slanted front surface so that it protrudes forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, a part of the logo decoration section 3211b constitutes the sub-status display section 3501 of the sub-status indicator 3500.

The left rear decorative body 3212 is translucent overall. The front surface of the left rear decorative body 3212 is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the left. The left rear decorative body 3212 has a main decorative part 3212a formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape imitating a flame over the entire surface, and a radial decorative part 3212b extending radially from the right outer side center so as to cross the main decorative part 3212a. The main decorative part 3212a is formed so that a colorless (transparent) part, a red part, and a yellow part are mixed together. The radial decorative part 3212b is formed to be colorless (transparent). The radial decorative part 3212b is formed so as to be continuous with the radial pattern part 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and displayed in the light guide plate 3102.

The back right decorative body 3213 is translucent overall. The front of this back right decorative body 3213 faces approximately to the left, and is slightly inclined relative to the front-to-rear plane so that the front side is slightly to the right of the rear side. The back right decorative body 3213 has a main decorative part 3213a formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape that resembles a flame over the entire surface, and a radial decorative part 3213b that extends radially from the left outer side center so as to cross the main decorative part 3213a. The main decorative part 3213a is formed in red. The radial decorative part 3213b is formed in a colorless (transparent) form. This radial decorative part 3213b is formed so as to be continuous with the radial pattern part 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and displayed in the light guide plate 3102.

The top back decorative board 3221 is a flat plate extending left and right with a roughly constant top and bottom, and is provided at an angle to fit along the front of the top back decorative body 3211, with multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the front. The top back decorative board 3221 has a white surface. This top back decorative board 3221 is connected to the performance relay board 3026 via the left back decorative board 3222.

The left-back decorative board 3222 is a flat board extending vertically, attached with the board surface facing the front-to-rear direction, and the surface is formed in white. This left-back decorative board 3222 has a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted behind the main decorative part 3212a of the left-back decorative body 3212, and a plurality of second LEDs 3222b mounted behind the radial decorative part 3212b of the left-back decorative body 3212. The first LEDs 3222a and the second LEDs 3222b are each full-color LEDs. The left-back decorative board 3222 is connected to the performance relay board 3026. When the first LED 3222a is illuminated, the left-back decorative board 3222 can illuminate and decorate the main decorative part 3212a of the left-back decorative body 3212, and when the second LED 3222b is illuminated, the radial decorative part 3212b of the left-back decorative body 3212 can be illuminated and decorated. The multiple second LEDs 3222b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of each radial decorative part 3212b.

The back right decorative board 3223 is a flat board extending vertically, attached with the board surface facing left and right, and its surface is formed in white. This back right decorative board 3223 has a first LED 3223a mounted to the right of the main decorative part 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213, and a second LED 3223b mounted to the right of the radial decorative part 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213. The first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are each full color LEDs. The back right decorative board 3223 is connected to the performance relay board 3026 via the back upper decorative board 3221 and the back left decorative board 3222. When the first LED 3223a of this rear right decorative board 3223 is illuminated, it can illuminate and decorate the main decorative part 3213a of the rear right decorative body 3213, and when the second LED 3223b is illuminated, it can illuminate and decorate the radial decorative part 3213b of the rear right decorative body 3213. The multiple second LEDs 3223b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction or front-back direction) of the radial decorative part 3213b at the location of each radial decorative part 3213b (see Figure 164 (a)).

The rear right decorative board 3223 is mounted on the board surface facing right and has multiple third LEDs 3223c that can illuminate the right side of the center member 2500. These third LEDs 3223c are full-color LEDs. When the third LEDs 3223c are illuminated, they can brightly illuminate the role winning opening 2006 and the first distribution device 2530 in the center member 2500.

In addition, the rear right decorative board 3223 has multiple sub-state LEDs 3510 mounted on the board surface facing left at the top for displaying sub-patterns and the like on the sub-state indicator 3500. The sub-state LEDs 3510 are side-view type LEDs that radiate light in a direction parallel to the board surface on which they are mounted. The light from each sub-state LED 3510 is guided by the light-guiding pin 3520 to the sub-state display section 3501 at the right end of the logo decoration section 3211b of the rear upper decorative body 3211, and is emitted forward. The sub-status LED 3510 has a first sub-pattern LED 3511 made of a full-color LED to indicate the result of the first special lottery, a second sub-pattern LED 3512 made of a full-color LED to indicate the result of the second special lottery, two first sub-pending number LEDs 3513 made of single-color LEDs to display the number of reserved balls in the first special lottery result, and two second sub-pending number LEDs 3514 made of single-color LEDs to display the number of reserved balls in the second special lottery result.

When assembled to the game board 5, this rear front performance unit 3200 allows the first pattern 3110 and second pattern 3120 displayed by light on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 provided at the rear, the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600, etc. to be clearly visible from the front (player side) through the space surrounded by the rear top decorative body 3211, rear left decorative body 3212, and rear right decorative body 3213. In addition, the rear top decorative body 3211, rear left decorative body 3212, and rear right decorative body 3213 can decorate the first pattern 3110, second pattern 3120, and the performance image, improving the appearance within the game area 5a.

In addition, with the back-front performance unit 3200, the LEDs mounted on the back-top decorative board 3221, back-left decorative board 3222, and back-right decorative board 3223 can be appropriately illuminated to illuminate the back-top decorative body 3211, back-left decorative body 3212, and back-right decorative body 3213, allowing the player to see the illuminated performance using these.

Furthermore, according to the rear front performance unit 3200, the second LED 3222b of the rear left decorative board 3222 and the second LED 3223b of the rear right decorative board 3223 are illuminated in accordance with the illumination display of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate performance unit 3100, thereby illuminating and decorating the radial decorative part 3212b of the rear left decorative body 3212 and the radial decorative part 3213b of the rear right decorative body 3213, making it appear as if the radial decorative part 3212b and the radial decorative part 3213b are continuous on both the left and right outer sides of the radial pattern part 3122 of the second pattern 3120.

In addition, the rear left decorative body 3212 and the rear right decorative body 3213 of the rear front performance unit 3200 are inclined so that their front ends protrude forward as they move from the center of the game area 5a to the outside in the left-right direction, so that the radial decorative portion 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b, which are continuous with the radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, can give a sense of depth to the second pattern 3120.

Because of this, the player can be shown a wide and large luminous decoration (luminous performance) that spreads out to the left and right by the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 and the rear left decorative body 3212 and rear right decorative body 3213 of the rear front performance unit 3200, which makes a strong impact on the player and strongly attracts the player's attention, while making the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the rear left decorative body 3212 of the rear front performance unit 3200 is located behind the left edge of the center member 2500 when assembled to the game board 5, so that when the first LED 3222a and second LED 3222b of the rear left decorative board 3222 are illuminated, the light can illuminate and decorate the rear frame portion 2504 of the center member 2500, making it difficult to see the inner surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 from the player's side (front).

[5-9a-6. Back front bottom left performance unit]
Next, the rear front left lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 155 to 159 and Figure 163. The rear front left lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the lower front surface of the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, above the left cooling fan 3107.

The rear front left lower performance unit 3300 comprises a translucent rear lower left decorative body 3301 in which the character "determination" is formed in relief and protruding diagonally upwards, a decorative body base 3302 which attaches the rear lower left decorative body 3301 to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, a rear lower left upper decorative board 3303 which is provided between the decorative body base 3302 and the rear lower left decorative body 3301 and which illuminates and decorates the character "determination" of the rear lower left decorative body 3301, and a rear lower left lower decorative board 3304 (see Figure 174A) which is attached to the underside of the decorative body base 3302 and which illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the rear lower left decorative body 3301.

The surfaces of the lower left top decorative board 3303 and the lower left bottom decorative board 3304 are formed in white. The lower left top decorative board 3303 and the lower left bottom decorative board 3304 each have multiple full color LEDs mounted on their upper surfaces. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the lower left top decorative board 3303 and the lower left bottom decorative board 3304, it is possible to illuminate the character "Ketsu" (decision) on the lower left decorative body 3301, illuminate the outer periphery of the character "Ketsu" (decision), or illuminate the entire lower left decorative body 3301.

[5-9a-7. Back front bottom right performance unit]
Next, the rear front right lower performance unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 155 to 159 and Figure 163. The rear front right lower performance unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the right side of the lower front surface of the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, above the right cooling fan 3108.

The back-front-right-bottom performance unit 3400 comprises a translucent back-bottom-right decorative body 3401 in which the character "戦" (war) is formed in relief and protruding diagonally upwards, a decorative body base 3402 which attaches the back-bottom-right decorative body 3401 to the unit base 3101 of the light-guiding plate performance unit 3100, a back-bottom-right-top decorative board 3403 which is provided between the decorative body base 3402 and the back-bottom-right decorative body 3401 and is used to illuminate and decorate the character "戦" on the back-bottom-right decorative body 3401, and a back-bottom-right-bottom decorative board 3404 (see Figure 174A) which is attached to the underside of the decorative body base 3402 and is used to illuminate and decorate the outer periphery of the back-bottom-right decorative body 3401.

The surfaces of the lower right back decorative board 3403 and the lower right back decorative board 3404 are formed in white. The lower right back decorative board 3403 and the lower right back decorative board 3404 each have multiple full color LEDs mounted on their upper surfaces. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the lower right back decorative board 3403 and the lower right back decorative board 3404, it is possible to illuminate the character "戦" (war) part of the lower right back decorative body 3401, illuminate the outer periphery of the character "戦" (war), or illuminate the entire lower right back decorative body 3401.

[5-9a-8. Sub Status Indicator]
Next, the sub-status indicator 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 164 and 165. Figure 164(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front performance unit in the back unit, the sub-status indicator, and the right part of the center member in a left side cross section, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front performance unit in the back unit (a), the sub-status indicator, and the right part of the center member from the front. Figure 165 is a wiring diagram showing the wiring of some of the LEDs for the sub-status LEDs on the back right decorative board.

The sub-status display 3500, in addition to the performance images for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result in the performance display device 1600, displays suggesting the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game ball B in the second starting port 2004, and displays the number of reserved first special lottery results and the second special lottery results.

The sub-status indicator 3500 is located near the right end of the upper back decoration 3211 of the back front performance unit 3200 so that it can be seen at all times from the front (player side). The sub-status indicator 3500 comprises a sub-status indicator 3501 which forms part of the logo decoration 3211b in which small spheres of the upper back decoration 3211 of the back front performance unit 3200 are arranged in a rosary shape, a number of sub-status LEDs 3510 mounted on the upper left surface of the right back decoration board 3223 of the back front performance unit 3200, and a number of light guiding pins 3520 which guide the light from the sub-status LEDs 3510 to the front end of the sub-status indicator 3501.

The sub-status display section 3501 extends vertically in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the logo section 3211a on the upper back decorative body 3211. The sub-status display section 3501 is also inclined so that it moves backward as it moves downward.

The multiple sub-state LEDs 3510 are arranged in a vertical row on the rear right decorative board 3223, and are side-view type LEDs that emit light in a direction parallel to the board surface on which they are mounted (forward in this case). Since the multiple sub-state LEDs 3510 are mounted on the rear right decorative board 3223, they are connected to the performance relay board 3026 via the rear top decorative board 3221 and rear left decorative board 3222, and their light emission is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 that is connected to the performance relay board 3026.

The sub-status LED 3510 is composed of a first sub-pattern LED 3511 consisting of a full-color LED for indicating the result of the first special lottery, a second sub-pattern LED 3512 consisting of a full-color LED for indicating the result of the second special lottery, two first sub-pending number LEDs 3513 consisting of single-color LEDs for displaying the number of reserved balls in the first special lottery result, and two second sub-pending number LEDs 3514 consisting of single-color LEDs (e.g., red LEDs) for displaying the number of reserved balls in the second special lottery result.

The rear end of the light guide pin 3520 is located in front of the sub-state LED 3510, and the front end passes through one of the spheres in the sub-state display section 3501 and is located near the front end of that sphere.

This sub-status indicator 3500 displays the illumination state (on, off, flashing, illuminated color, etc.) of the sub-status LED 3510 as a sub-pattern. Specifically, when suggesting the first or second special lottery result that has been drawn, the first sub-pattern LED 3511 or the second sub-pattern LED 3512 is made to flash in red for a predetermined variable time. In this embodiment, the lights are turned on and off repeatedly every 2F (2/30 sec).

When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "lose", the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are lit in red as "lose" symbols. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win", the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are lit in green as "win" symbols.

In addition, the display of the reserved numbers for the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result on the sub status indicator 3500 is made to display the reserved numbers by combining the lighting states of the two first sub reserved number LEDs 3513 and the second sub reserved number LEDs 3514 that are arranged vertically in each case. Specifically, when the reserved number is "0", the two on the top and bottom are turned off, when the reserved number is "1", the top is turned on and the bottom is turned off, when the reserved number is "2", the two on the top and bottom are turned on, when the reserved number is "3", the top is blinking and the bottom is lit, and when the reserved number is "4", the two on the top and bottom are blinking. In this way, the reserved number is displayed by combining the lighting states of the two LEDs on the first sub reserved number LEDs 3513 and the second sub reserved number LEDs 3514.

In this embodiment, the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, but as described above, the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are illuminated in red or green as sub-patterns, and are not illuminated in blue. Therefore, in the back right decorative board 3223, as shown in FIG. 165, the anode and cathode of the blue light-emitting element of the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are connected and short-circuited. As a result, even if some malfunction occurs, electricity is not supplied to the blue light-emitting element, and the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 do not emit blue light. Therefore, the sub-pattern is not displayed in blue, which does not normally emit light, and it is possible to avoid causing distrust in the player and suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, the anode and cathode of the unused blue light-emitting element are connected and short-circuited, which prevents static electricity from accumulating in the light-emitting element, prevents damage to the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 due to static electricity, and ensures that the sub-patterns are displayed reliably.

In this way, according to the sub-status display 3500 of this embodiment, a sub-pattern that suggests the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) that has been drawn on the sub-status display 3500 is displayed, so even if the player misses the display of the main pattern in the performance image on the performance display device 1600 or does not clearly understand the suggestion of the special lottery result by the main pattern, the player can recognize the special lottery result that has been drawn by looking at the sub-pattern.

In addition, in the sub-state indicator 3500, the sub-state display unit 3501 forms part of the logo decoration unit 3211b in the upper back decoration body 3211, so when the sub-state LED 3510 is illuminated to display the sub-pattern, etc., the logo decoration unit 3211b appears to be illuminated. However, when a game ball is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 and the first or second special lottery result is drawn, the illumination state of the part of the sub-state display unit 3501 in the logo decoration unit 3211b changes. This allows the player to recognize that the illumination state is changing according to the drawn first or second special lottery result, and allows the player to recognize the sub-pattern. At this time, the sub-patterns suggesting the first and second special lottery results are decorated by the sub-status display unit 3501, which forms part of the logo decoration unit 3211b, so the sub-patterns do not look inorganic as in conventional technology, but can be made to blend into the decoration, improving the appearance of the sub-status display 3500 and ultimately the play area 5a.

Furthermore, the light from the sub-state LED 3510 mounted on the rear right decorative board 3223 is guided by the light guide pin 3520 to the sub-state display unit 3501 located away from the rear right decorative board 3223, so that the light can be guided in good condition to the front end of the sub-state display unit 3501 to display the sub-pattern, etc. Also, since the light guide pin 3520 can guide the light from the sub-state LED 3510 to any position, it can be guided to the position of the sub-state display unit 3501 which constitutes part of the logo decoration unit 3211b located along the outer periphery of the logo unit 3211a of the rear top decorative body 3211, so that the sub-pattern can be blended into the decoration of the rear top decorative body 3211 to improve its appearance.

In addition, the rear right decorative board 3223, which is equipped with a sub-state LED 3510 for displaying sub-patterns, etc., is further equipped with a first LED 3223a and a second LED 3223b for illuminating and decorating the rear right decorative body 3213, and a third LED 3223c for illuminating the first distribution device 2530 of the center member 2500, so that the rear right decorative body 3213 can be illuminated and the first distribution device 2530 can be brightened to make the circulating game balls B easier to see.

In the above embodiment, the sub-patterns for indicating the special lottery results are displayed with red and green lights, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sub-patterns may be displayed with red and blue lights, or with green and blue lights. The sub-patterns may be displayed with only one of red, green, and blue lights. In this case, the anode and cathode of the light-emitting elements of the colors not used (not to be emitted) in the full-color LED are connected and shorted to each other, thereby achieving the same effect as described above. It is preferable to connect the anode and cathode of the light-emitting elements of the colors not used to each other and then connect them to GND (ground), so that the static electricity can be discharged to GND.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 165, the sub-status indicator 3500 has three full-color LEDs, and the anode and cathode of the unused light-emitting element are connected and short-circuited. However, this is not limited to this, and the full-color LED may be used to illuminate a decorative body, illuminate a specific portion, or illuminate the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102. Specifically, for example, when a decorative body that does not transmit light of a specific color or a decorative body having a portion that does not transmit light of a specific color is illuminated with a full-color LED, since it is not necessary to emit light of the color that is not transmitted, the anode and cathode of the light-emitting element of that color are connected and short-circuited. This makes it possible to avoid the decorative body appearing unnatural by emitting light of a color that does not need to be emitted due to malfunction, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

More specifically, for example, if the areas formed in red on the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 in the back front performance unit 3200 (main decorative part 3212a and main decorative part 3213a) are made to be transparent to only red and green light, when the full color LEDs (first LED 3222a and first LED 3223a) corresponding to those areas emit blue light, those areas will not be illuminated as they do not transmit blue light, but the areas of a different color adjacent to those areas will be illuminated and decorated by the blue light, and there is a risk that the intended performance effect will not be fully achieved due to unintended illumination. In response to this, by connecting the anode and cathode of the blue light-emitting element to the full-color LED that is provided in correspondence with the area that does not transmit blue light and shorting it, it is possible to avoid the full-color LED malfunctioning and causing unintended illumination decoration in the area adjacent to that area, and it is possible to prevent unnatural illumination effects and achieve the intended effect, thereby achieving the same effects as those described above.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the sub-state LED 3510 is mounted on the rear right decorative board 3223, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on a board (e.g., a sub-state display board) other than the rear right decorative board 3223, or the sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the rear top decorative board 3221.

[5-9a-9. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out ball detection unit 3030 that can be attached to the attachment portion 3155 of the rear lower ball discharge unit 3150 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 166 to 170. Figure 166 (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the rear unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, (d) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the rear, (f) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from a position near the lower right front, and (g) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the lower right rear. Figure 167 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out ball detection unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out ball detection unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

Figure 168 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing the out ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. Figure 169 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the device assembled to the game board, cut vertically at the center of the right out sensor, and viewed from the right side. Figure 170 is a perspective view showing the area around the out port from the front when assembled to the game board.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting the game ball B received in the outlet 1008 is formed so that it can be attached to the mounting portion 3155 of the bottom back ball discharge unit 3150. When the game board 5 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 of the first embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 may or may not be attached.

This out ball detection unit 3030 is for detecting game balls B (game balls B to which no special benefit has been awarded, also referred to as "out balls") that have been shot into the game area 5a and have not been accepted by the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006. In this embodiment, it detects game balls B that have been discharged from the out port 1008.

The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1101 in the game panel 1100 and includes a unit body 3031 attached to the front of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, an out left sensor 3032 and an out right sensor 3033 attached to the unit body 3031, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit body 3031 so as to cover the rear sides of the out left sensor 3032 and the out right sensor 3033.

The unit body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 and includes a cylindrical tube section 3031a that extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-to-rear direction, a partition section 3031b that divides the inside of the tube section 3031a into left and right sections, a flange section 3031c that protrudes in a flat plate shape in the left-to-right direction from the rear end of the tube section 3031a, and an insertion recess 3031d that is recessed forward from the rear end side of the tube section and into which the left out sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033 are inserted. The front end of the tube section 3031a is approximately the same size as the out port 1008 in the previous component 1000, is long in the left-to-right direction, and the lower inner surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side.

The partition 3031b is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3031a, and divides the area into sections large enough for one game ball B to pass through on both the left and right sides. The front end of the partition 3031b is curved so that it protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward by a distance shorter than the diameter of the game ball B. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes upward, so that the front side is perpendicular to the inclined inner surface on the lower side of the tubular portion 3031a.

The left outlet sensor 3032 detects game ball B that has flowed through the left side of the partition 3031b in the tubular portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. The right outlet sensor 3033 detects game ball B that has flowed through the right side of the partition 3031b in the tubular portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. The left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B downward after it passes through the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033, and has a partition plate 3034a in the center in the left-right direction.

The out ball detection unit 3030 has the flange portion 3031c of the unit body 3031 attached to the mounting portion 3155 on the front side of the back-bottom ball discharge unit 3150 (see Figure 169). When the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the tube portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and the front side of the flange portion 3031c abuts against the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (see Figures 168 and 169).

When the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper front end of the tubular portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the previous component 1000 (see FIG. 169). In other words, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. In addition, the lower end of the cover 3034 passes through the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200 and protrudes downward beyond the bottom surface of the board holder 1200 (see FIG. 169).

In the play area 5a, after the game ball B flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the previous component 1000, it is guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 and supplied into the tube section 3031a. After being detected by either the left out sensor 3032 or the right out sensor 3033, the game ball B is discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island equipment side of the play hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, without contacting it with the board holder 1200.

The out ball detection unit 3030 of this embodiment can detect game ball B ("out ball") that is shot into the game area 5a and is not accepted by any of the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006. Therefore, for example, if game ball B is continuously detected being accepted by a specific winning port but an "out ball" is not detected, this means that fraudulent activity is occurring at that specific winning port, and it can be notified that fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting them, the ratio of "safe balls" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of "safe balls" counted by detecting game balls B received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006, and the number of "out balls".

Furthermore, in the out ball detection unit 3030, the left out sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033 provided on the left and right sides are separated by a partition section 3031b, so that game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center member 2500 can be guided to the left out sensor 3032 side, and game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center member 2500 can be guided to the right out sensor 3033 side. As a result, the left out sensor 3032 can mainly detect game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center member 2500, and the right out sensor 3033 can mainly detect game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center member 2500. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B detected per unit time by the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "hit left" or "hit right", and based on that determination, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the hitting operation that is optimal for the game situation, allowing the player to enjoy the game as intended.

In addition, the forward protrusion of the partition 3031b is shortened to make it easier for the game balls B to climb over it, so that when a large number of game balls B enter the outlet 1008 per unit time, the game balls B can escape to the left or right side of the partition 3031b, where the flow of game balls B is relatively low, and the game balls B can be discharged without stagnation at the outlet 1008.

In addition, since the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes downward below the discharge section 1201 of the board holder 1200, game ball B ("safe ball") that is received by the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 can be prevented from flowing back through the out ball detection unit 3030 and being detected by the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, so that only the "out balls" can be accurately detected.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000, but this is not limited to the above, and the out ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached, so that it can be used with existing game panels 1100 that have an out recess 1101 and can be retrofitted to existing game boards 5.

In addition, when the game board 5 is configured to detect all game balls B ("all balls") that are shot into the game area 5a, or all game balls B ("all balls") that are ejected from the game area 5a, the out ball detection unit 3030 detects only "out balls", so by comparing the numbers of "out balls", "safe balls", and "all balls", it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball jams in the game board 5.

[5-9b-1. Board and board cover (1)]
On the rear side of the game panel 100 of the game board 5, as described above, there are mounted the main control board 1310 which controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and the peripheral control board 1510 which controls the effects such as light, sound, and movement of decorations based on control signals from the main control board 1310. As is well known, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 require advanced fraud prevention measures (hereinafter, simply referred to as "high risk boards"), and are housed inside the sealed board box 1320 and the peripheral control board box 1520, respectively.
Furthermore, on the rear side of the game board 5, a panel relay board 1710 which relays the connections between various sensors, drive motors, etc. and the main control board 1310, and a performance relay board 3026 which relays the connections between various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the peripheral control board 1510 are attached below the rear box 3010.
Although these boards 1710, 3026 are mounted with electronic components including joining members for connector joints, they are considered to be boards for which there is little need for anti-tampering measures (hereinafter simply referred to as "low-risk boards"), and therefore are not housed in a box with a sealing function. However, they are often covered with a rear cover 640 (see Figures 7 and 12) that covers the rear side of the game board 5. When the rear cover 640 is opened and closed to respond to a problem, game balls that have spilled out of the upper ball tank 552, etc. may come into contact with the mounting surface of the boards 1710, 3026. In order to prevent damage or malfunction that may occur due to such accidental contact by game balls, a panel relay board cover 3025 is attached to the rear box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 1710, and a performance relay board cover 3027 is attached to the rear box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the performance relay board 3026.
In addition, these board covers 3025, 3027 are formed with long hole-shaped openings that can expose the joining members for connector connection to the outside, but the board covers 3025, 3027 are designed and manufactured for each model, and the position and size of the openings are adapted to match the joining members of the boards 1710, 3026, so there is no risk of space being created in the openings that could allow game balls to enter.

[5-9b-2. Board and board cover (2)]
The above-mentioned board covers 3025, 3027 are designed and manufactured to fit the different boards 1710, 3026 for each model. Although they provide the function of protecting the boards 1710, 3026 from game balls, the entire process from design to mold molding must be redone every time the model is changed.
In contrast, the substrate cover 3050, which will be described next in Figures 174B to 174M, is designed to reduce costs without compromising the function of protecting substrates 1710, 3026 (wherever possible, these low-risk substrates will be collectively referred to as "substrate 4000") from game balls.
In addition, Figure 174B is an oblique view of the game board seen from behind, Figure 174C is a front view of the rear board unit seen from behind, Figure 174D is an oblique view of the rear board unit seen from behind, Figure 174E is an exploded oblique view of Figure 174D, Figure 174F is a cross-sectional view along line A-A of Figure 174C, Figure 174G is a cross-sectional view equivalent to line A-A of Figure 174C showing another form, Figure 174H is a cross-sectional view along line B-B of Figure 174C, Figure 174I is a front view of a pachinko machine seen from behind showing the rear board unit attached, Figure 174J is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from behind showing the rear board unit attached, Figure 174K is a front view of the main parts seen from behind of the rear board unit showing another form, Figure 174L is a side view of a joining member which is a specific electronic component, and Figure 174M is an oblique view of a joining member which is a specific electronic component.

[5-9b-2a. Back board unit]
The board cover 3050 of this embodiment constitutes a part of the rear board unit 3040 shown in Figures 174B to 174H. The rear board unit 3040 has a vertical part 3042 and a horizontal part 3043, and has an approximately L-shaped appearance when viewed from the front. As shown in Figure 174B, when assembled, the rear board unit 3040 is located across the rear center of the rear box 3010 of the game board 5 and along the bottom side and one vertical side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board box 1520). Normally, as shown in Figures 174I and 174J, the rear board unit 3040 is covered by a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5. The rear board unit 3040 may be attached to the main body frame 4 side.
As shown in exploded view in FIG. 174E, the rear board unit 3040 is composed of an attachment support portion 3080, a board 4000, and a board cover 3050.

[5-9b-2b. Mounting support part]
As shown in Figures 174E to 174H, the mounting support part 3080 has an overall shape that is roughly L-shaped when viewed from the front, and is in the form of a shallow box whose rear side (when attached to the pachinko machine, the player side is the front and the opposite side is the rear; the same applies below) is reinforced with a lattice-like rib 3081.
This mounting support portion 3080 has two upper and lower shaft portions 3041a on the outer edge of an L-shaped vertical portion 3042 extending up and down, and the shaft portions 3041a are rotatably and detachably supported on an axle support portion 3010f provided at the rear corner portion of the rear box 3010, as shown in FIG. 174B.
The mounting support portion 3080 is provided with elastic locking claws 3014b at the upper end of the vertical portion 3042 and at the tip of the horizontal portion 3043. The locking claws 3014b of the vertical portion 3042 are detachably locked to a locking portion 3010g protruding from the rear surface of the rear box 3010, and the locking claws 3014b of the horizontal portion 3043 are detachably locked to a locking portion 3010g formed in a rear corner of the rear box 3010 opposite to the rear corner where the pivot portion 3010f is provided.
Therefore, with the locking claws 3014b disengaged from each locking portion 3010g of the rear box 3010, the mounting support portion 3080 can be opened and closed like a door, centered on the pivot portion 3010f of the rear box 3010, and is also removable, and is fixedly attached to the rear face of the rear box 3010 with the locking claws 3014b locked to the locking portions 3010g.

[5-9b-2c. Substrate]
As shown in FIG. 174E, the substrate 4000 in this embodiment is an approximately L-shaped panel relay substrate 1710 which corresponds to a part of the L-shaped horizontal portion 3043 and the vertical portion 3042 of the mounting support portion 3080, and a square performance relay substrate (also called a "performance drive substrate") 3026 which corresponds to the remaining horizontal portion 3043.

These boards 4000 have many electronic components 4001 mounted on the mounting surface facing the board cover 3050, including a specific electronic component, a connector joint member 4001x, but since these mainly serve as relays between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 and other boards, the risk of tampering is extremely low. In other words, the boards 4000 that can be attached to the rear board unit 3040 may be of any use or function, as long as they are boards (low-risk boards) other than those that require advanced tamper protection such as "sealing" in the stored state. In addition, the number of boards 4000 stored may be only one, rather than multiple as in this embodiment.

One of the substrates 4000, ie, the panel relay substrate 1710, is provided with a mounting area 4002 for mounting electronic components 4001 other than a joining member (specific electronic component) 4001x for joining a connector.
Furthermore, a plurality of bonding member mounting sections 4003a, 4003b capable of mounting a plurality of bonding members 4001x are formed in the panel relay board 1710. One bonding member mounting section 4003a is a common section common to a plurality of models, in which a plurality of bonding members 4001x constituting a group that can be commonly used (no modification required) are arranged together, and the other bonding member mounting section 4003b is a non-common section that cannot be shared with other models, in which a plurality of bonding members 4001x specific to each model are arranged together.

The other board 4000, the performance relay board 3026, is also provided with a mounting area 4002 for collecting and mounting electronic components 4001 other than the joining members (specific electronic components) 4001x for connector joining.
In addition, the performance relay board 3026 is formed with a joining member mounting section 4003c in which a plurality of joining members 4001x can be mounted, and a plurality of joining members 4001x that form a group that can be used with a plurality of models (no modification required) and a plurality of joining members 4001x that form a model-specific group are arranged together there.

[5-9b-2d. Board cover]
The board cover 3050 is L-shaped like the mounting support part 3080, and is in the form of a shallow box facing the mounting support part 3080, and is screwed to the rear surface of the mounting support part 3080. The panel relay board 1710 and the performance relay board 3026 are screwed side-by-side to the front surface of the board cover 3050, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 174F, the board 4000 is housed in the box-shaped space formed by the facing board cover 3050 and the mounting support part 3080.
In addition, the portion of the board 4000 corresponding to the mounting area 4002 (an area where electronic components 4001 other than the joining members (specific electronic components) 4001x for connector joining are collected and mounted) is covered entirely with the board cover 3050 so as not to be exposed to the outside. This ensures that the electronic components 4001 other than the joining members 4001x are isolated from the game ball B. In addition, in FIG. 174E, the board cover 3050 has two openings 3051 at the upper corners of the portion covering the mounting area 4002 on the performance relay board 3026 side, but since these openings 3051 are almost completely blocked by the joining members 4001x for connector joining, there is no risk of the game ball B entering the mounting area 4002.

The substrate cover 3050 has a large window hole 3052 formed in the portion facing the bonding member mounting sections 4003a, 4003c, which exposes the entire bonding member mounting sections 4003a, 4003c (i.e., including all bonding members 4001x provided in the bonding member mounting sections 4003a, 4003c) to the outside.
In addition, the board cover 3050 has multiple vertical or horizontal long hole portions 3053 (three in a vertical row in this embodiment) formed in the portion facing the bonding member mounting section 4003b corresponding to the non-common portion (model-specific component) of the panel relay board 1710, which can expose the bonding member 4001x to the outside.

[5-9b-2d-1. Window hole]
As shown in FIG. 174E, two window holes 3052 are provided in a horizontal portion 3043 extending to the left and right of the L-shaped board cover 3050 .
One of the window holes 3052 is located approximately at the center of the horizontal portion 3043 and corresponds to the joint member mounting section 4003c of the performance relay board 3026, and exposes the joint member mounting section 4003c to the outside. All electronic components 4001 are exposed to the outside.
The other window 3052 is located at the end of the horizontal portion 3043 of the board cover 3050 on the vertical portion 3042 side, and corresponds to the joining member mounting section 4003a of the panel relay board 1710, and allows the joining member mounting section 4003a to be exposed to the outside. 4001, and all electronic components 4001 therein are exposed to the outside.

As described above, the board cover 3050 has the role of protecting the board 4000 from game balls B that may inadvertently enter when the rear cover 640 of the main body frame 4 is opened or closed. However, since the window hole 3052 is larger than the game ball B, the game ball B may enter the joining member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c that correspond to the window hole 3052. Therefore, the window hole 3052 and the joining member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c have their own unique measures against game balls.

In other words, in this embodiment, a peripheral control board box 1520 accommodating a peripheral control board 1510 is arranged in the space above the window hole portion 3052 as a board box accommodating another board.As a result, even if a game ball B spills out of the ball tank 552, etc., the peripheral control board box 1520 acts as a shield (obstacle) to prevent the ball from entering the window hole portion 3052.
Needless to say, electrical wiring is printed on the board 4000, but in the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c, wiring is not provided in areas where the joint member 4001x is not mounted, so that even if the game ball B enters the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c through the window hole 3052, it is difficult for the game ball B to make erroneous contact with the wiring. Specifically, the wiring of the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c may be provided on the mounting surface of the board 4000 that overlaps with the joint member 4001x and on the mounting surface that corresponds to the non-contact space C (see FIG. 174L) around the joint member 4001x and within a distance equivalent to the radius of the game ball B. In this way, most of the wiring can be provided in an area where the round game ball B is blocked by the joint member 4001x and cannot physically step in, thereby reducing the risk of erroneous contact with the game ball B.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned measures against game balls, it is advisable to prevent the game ball B from entering the gaps between the joining members 4001x by making the vertical spacing between the joining members 4001x smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, or to prevent the game ball B from remaining between the joining members 4001x arranged side by side by making the horizontal spacing between the joining members 4001x larger than the diameter of the game ball B. This is because the game ball B remaining on the upper surface of the joining members 4001x or between adjacent joining members 4001x becomes a risk factor that may damage the board 4000 if it falls unexpectedly.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 174K, the joining members 4001x of the joining member mounting sections 4003a, 4003b (the same applies to the joining member mounting section 4003c, although not shown) may be tilted horizontally to prevent the game ball B from remaining on the upper surface of the joining member 4001x. Specific means for tilting the joining members 4001x laterally include a method in which the joining members 4001x are attached straight to the substrate 4000 as in the conventional manner, and the substrate 4000 is tilted relative to the substrate cover 3050, as shown in FIG. 174K, and a method in which each joining member 4001x is tilted relative to the substrate 4000 without changing the relationship between the substrate cover 3050 and the substrate 4000. In the former case, the joining members 4001x can be attached to the substrate 4000 using conventional equipment and methods, making it easy to manufacture the substrate 4000. On the other hand, in the latter case, the relationship between the substrate cover 3050 and the substrate 4000 remains unchanged, so that the substrate 4000 can be attached to the substrate cover 3050 efficiently.
When attaching the joining member 4001x straight to the substrate 4000, it is possible to either divide a portion of the substrate 4000 and tilt it as shown in FIG. 174K, or to tilt the entire substrate 4000 (not shown).
As described below, the joining member mounting section 4003b is provided with a long hole 3053, which prevents the game ball B from entering the joining member mounting section 4003b. Therefore, there is no risk that the game ball B remaining on the joining member 4001x will later enter the joining member mounting section 4003b. However, since there is a non-zero probability that the game ball B remaining on the joining member 4001x will later fall and cause some kind of malfunction somewhere, there is a sufficient advantage to tilting the joining member 4001x of the joining member mounting section 4003b as well to actively allow the game ball B to fall.

In this embodiment, the electronic components 4001 mounted on the substrate 4000 are also provided with the above-mentioned game ball countermeasures.
That is, as shown in Figures 174M and 174L, the electronic component 4001 mounted on the board 4000 has a number of terminal pieces 4006 protruding from two opposing side surfaces 4005 of a square resin body 4004, and the terminal pieces 4006 are joined to the mounting surface of the board 4000.
The electronic component 4001 (e.g., joining member 4001x) of this embodiment, which is mounted on the substrate 4000 in the window hole portion 3052, is joined in a state in which the terminal piece 4006 on the side surface 4005 facing upward and the terminal piece 4006 on the side surface 4005 facing downward are aligned with the mounting surface of the substrate 4000 when in use, and the amount of protrusion of the terminal piece 4006 from the side surface 4005 of the resin body 4004 is set to be greater for the terminal piece facing downward than for the terminal piece facing upward.
By doing so, even if the game ball B collides with the electronic component 4001 from above, the possibility of the round game ball coming into contact is physically low because the upwardly facing terminal piece 4006 only protrudes a small amount from the side surface of the resin main body 4004, and even if the electronic component 4001 is pushed downward by the collision of the game ball B, the electronic component 4001 is unlikely to tilt because the terminal piece 4006 that protrudes significantly downward from the side surface 4005 of the resin main body 4004 holds it in place. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously reduce the risk of an electrical short circuit caused by contact with the terminal piece 4006 and the risk of physical deformation caused by collision with the resin main body 4004 when the game ball B falls from above.
Also, when it is desired to check various input/output information, it is preferable to obtain the information from the terminal strip 4006 of the joining member 4001x, but even in such a case, a test point electrically connected to a line extending from the terminal strip 4006, for example, or a through hole replacing the test point, can be provided in the vicinity of the terminal strip 4006 so as not to come into contact with the game ball B since the amount of protrusion from the side surface 4005 of the resin main body 4004 is small (non-contact space C in FIG. 174L).
Such a joining structure for electronic component 4001 can be understood as an embodiment of the following technical means. Also, this joining structure for electronic component 4001 is not limited to those mounted in joining member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c, but can be widely applied to electronic components that may be subjected to impact from above, such as those mounted in places where an operator's hand may touch them.
"A game area where games are played with game balls,
A substrate on which electronic components including at least a joining member for joining a connector are mounted,
At least one of the electronic components has a rectangular resin body with a number of terminal pieces protruding from two opposing side surfaces, and the terminal pieces are joined to the board.
The electronic component is a game machine characterized in that, in a state in which the terminal piece on the side surface facing upward and the terminal piece on the side surface facing downward are joined in a state in which they are aligned along the board when in use, and the amount of protrusion of the terminal piece facing downward from the side surface of the resin main body is set to be greater than that of the terminal piece facing upward.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the connector joining member 4001x having multiple terminal pieces 4006 protruding from two opposing side surfaces of the rectangular resin body 4004 described above, as shown in the perspective view of the upward-looking state in Figure 174N, there is a connector joining member 4001x (S) for electrically connecting at least one of the power supply, ground (GND), or various signals, in which the terminal pieces 4006 protruding from one side surface of the resin body 4004 are arranged vertically, and measures are taken to prevent the connection with the board 4000 from becoming unstable.

That is, as shown in the perspective view of Fig. 174N and the cross-sectional view of Fig. 174O, the joining member 4001x(S) is arranged so that terminal pieces 4006 protruding from one side surface of a resin body 4004 are aligned vertically to the board 4000 which is attached vertically at a predetermined location, and the terminal pieces 4006 are connected downward to copper foil pads 4000p formed on the board 4000. In the enlarged view of Fig. 174O, 4000b is a base material constituting the board 4000, 4000r is a resist, and 4000s is a solder that joins the terminal pieces 4006 of the joining member 4001x(S) to the pads 4000p.
Generally, the board 4000 attached to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is often located lower than the shoulders of the worker when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility. Therefore, as shown by imaginary lines in Fig. 174O, when the connector 4001y is pinched and removed from the joint member 4001x(S), a large force component acts to press the joint member 4001x(S) downward together with the connector 4001y.
In addition to the board 4000 attached to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, many boards are attached to the board 4400 inside the lower part of the center member 2500 and various places inside the movable body (not shown), as shown by the dashed line in Fig. 126. Therefore, the work of assembling the pachinko machine 1 is often performed in the same positional relationship as above, and when the connector 4001y is removed from the joining member 4001x(S), a large force component acts to press the joining member 4001x(S) downward together with the connector 4001y.
When a force is applied to the joining member 4001x(S) in a downward direction, the force changes to a direction in which the terminal piece 4006 protruding downward from one side surface of the resin body 4004 is pressed against the pad 4000p of the substrate 4000. Therefore, even if the connector 4001y is inserted into or removed from the joining member 4001x(S) of the substrate 4000, the terminal piece 4006 is unlikely to peel off from the pad 4000p of the substrate 4000, and therefore poor connection problems are unlikely to occur.

The substrate 4000 is provided with an expanded pattern portion 4000pp formed by extending copper foil further downward from a pad 4000p for joining the terminal piece 4006 of the joining member 4001x(S). The pad 4000p in this embodiment has a width substantially equal to that of the terminal piece 4006, and the expanded pattern portion 4000pp extended from the pad 4000p also has a width substantially equal to that of the terminal piece 4006, but the width of the expanded pattern portion 4000pp may be made larger than that of the pad 4000p.
By providing such an enlarged pattern portion 4000pp, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of connection problems caused by inserting and removing the connector 4001y.
That is, when the connector 4001y cannot be removed from the joining member 4001x(S), in many cases, people try to forcefully pull the connector 4001y by rocking it up and down. At this time, if an upward force is applied to the joining member 4001x(S) through the connector 4001y, the force changes from the above-mentioned pushing down direction to a direction that pulls the terminal piece 4006 off the pad 4000p of the board 4000. Because the pad 4000p and the copper foil of the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp together resist this force, connection problems caused by inserting and removing the connector 4001y are unlikely to occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp is provided with a through hole 4000t that exposes the copper foil without covering the entire portion with resist 4000r, making electrical contact easier. This through hole 4000t can be used to detect electrical abnormalities, making it possible to effectively utilize the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 174P, when a joining member 4001x for joining a connector is arranged below an electronic component 4001, the joining member 4001x (S) of this embodiment is provided at least below the electronic component 4001 with a working space 4000w between the electronic component 4001 and the joining member 4001x (S) large enough to enable the connector 4001y to be inserted and removed.
Specifically, when the joining member 4001x for connector joining is arranged under the electronic component 4001, if the amount of protrusion of the upper electronic component 4001 from the board 4000 is equal to or greater than the amount of protrusion of the lower joining member 4001x from the board 4000, the lower joining member 4001x is made the joining member 4001x (S) of this embodiment, and a working space 4000w (preferably, the vertical width w of the working space 4000w is set in the range of (protrusion amount h≦width w) with respect to the protrusion amount h of the lower joining member 4001x (S)) is provided so that the connector 4001y can be inserted and removed between the upper and lower parts. Note that the width w should be narrower than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) in the board 4000 where the game ball may collide. In particular, when the above-mentioned through hole 4000t is provided, unnecessary trouble due to contact with other terminal pieces 4006 can be avoided.
When an electronic component 4001 is arranged above the joining member 4001x(S), even if there is working space 4000w between the joining member 4001x(S) and the electronic component 4001 required for inserting and removing the connector 4001y, it is unavoidable that it will become cramped, and as a result, there is a possibility that the connector 4001y of the lower joining member 4001x(S) will be pushed downward with force, and therefore the joining member 4001x(S) of the present invention is particularly effective in such locations.
As shown in FIG. 174P, by employing the bonding member 4001x(S) of this embodiment also for the electronic component 4001 located above, a board 4000 with less risk of connection failure can be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 174Q, in the substrate 4000 of this embodiment, a solid pattern portion 4000sp connected to an expanded pattern portion 4000pp via a through hole 4000t is provided on the surface opposite to the side to which the joining member 4001x(S) is connected, which corresponds to the rear of the joining member 4001x(S).
By providing the solid pattern portion 4000sp in this manner on the surface opposite the mounting surface and in the portion corresponding to the rear of the joining member 4001x (S), the strength of the board 4000 itself in that portion is increased, thereby obtaining strength sufficient to withstand the force exerted when inserting and removing the connector 4001y. Furthermore, by electrically connecting the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp and the solid pattern portion 4000sp via the through hole 4000t, a stable ground (GND) area can be secured.

[5-9b-2d-2. Long hole]
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 174F, the elongated hole portion 3053 has an opening width s in the short side direction that is large enough to expose a bonding member 4001x, which is a specific electronic component, to the outside, that is, large enough to pass the bonding member 4001x. While having a certain area that is smaller than the diameter (about 11 mm) of the game ball B, the long hole portion 3053 has a certain area that is smaller than the diameter (about 11 mm) of the game ball B. Therefore, even if there is an empty space without the joining member 4001x in the long hole portion 3053, the game ball B cannot pass through the long hole portion 3053. Be prevented.
The long hole portion 3053 is provided in a joint member mounting section 4003b of a non-common portion, which differs for each model, and is preferably provided with an amount ( By doing so, it is possible to accommodate many types of machines, and even if an excess of the long hole portion 3053 occurs, there is no risk of the game ball B entering as described above. Rather, it can contribute to preventing the temperature of the substrate 4000 from rising as a heat dissipation port.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 174F, the board cover 3050 has a distance h between its inner surface and the mounting surface on which the joining member 4001x of the board 4000 is mounted, which distance h is greater than the amount of protrusion t that would occur if the game ball B were to attempt to enter from outside the specific area of the long hole 3053 and not pass through the specific area of the long hole 3050 and protrude into the inner surface of the board cover 3050. As a result, even if the game ball B hits the outside of the specific area of the long hole 3053 and a part of the spherical surface protrudes into the inner surface of the board cover 3050, the distance h between the inner surface of the board cover 3050 and the mounting surface of the board 4000 is greater than the amount of protrusion t, so that the game ball B does not come into contact with the board 4000. In addition, there is a correlation between the opening width s of the specific area of the long hole portion 3053 and the size of the distance h between the inner surface of the board cover 3050 and the mounting surface of the board 4000. The larger the opening width s, the greater the amount of protrusion t of the game ball B, so it is necessary to increase the distance h between the inner surface of the board cover 3050 and the mounting surface of the board 4000 accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 174G, it is preferable to form an inclined portion 3054 on at least one of the longitudinal sides of the long hole portion 3053, inclining the opening width s of the long hole portion 3053 in a direction that widens outward. By doing so, even if the game ball B is strongly pushed from the outside of the long hole portion 3053, the game ball B escapes to the inclined portion 3054 side, so there is almost no risk of the edge being chipped, and the game ball B can easily leave the long hole portion 3053.

The long hole portions 3052 are not limited to the vertically elongated configuration described above, but may be horizontally elongated and aligned in the vertical direction.
For example, three long hole portions 3052 may be arranged at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. In this case, although it depends on the longitudinal length of the long hole portions 3052 and the material of the board cover 3050, the top long hole portion 3052 is regarded as the first tier, and the second tier long hole portion 3052, especially the portion closer to the center, is more likely to bend when pressed by the game ball B. This is because the band plate portion formed between the top and bottom long hole portions 3052 forms a long-span, double-supported beam structure.
In such a case, as shown by imaginary lines in the enlarged view of Fig. 174G, it is advisable to provide ribs 3050a that are continuous in a line or scattered at appropriate intervals around the openings of the long holes 3052 or in the middle of the strips between the long holes 3052 from the back surface of the board cover 3050 toward the mounting surface of the board 4000. By doing so, even if the game ball B hits the center of the second-stage long hole 3052, the impact is absorbed by the ribs 3050a and the ball is bounced back by its repulsive force, so that the game ball B does not come into contact with the mounting surface of the board 4000.
Alternatively, the vertical width of the band plate portion formed between the long hole portions 3052 may be made wider (for example, approximately the opening width s of the long hole portions 3052) to increase the strength of the band plate portion itself. In this case, by widening the vertical width of the band plate portion, a horizontally long empty space is generated on the mounting surface of the board 4000 facing it, so that electronic components 4000 other than the bonding members 4001x can be mounted in the empty space. Note that if electronic components 4000 are mounted in such an empty space, when the bonding members 4001x are densely arranged in the long hole portions 3052, there is a possibility that the mounted electronic components 4000 are surrounded by the bonding members 4001x and cannot dissipate heat, so it is preferable to provide heat dissipation holes in the band plate portion in advance. Of course, in such a configuration, the strength of the band plate portion is determined taking into account the provision of heat dissipation holes. For example, the size of the heat dissipation hole can be set to a size that does not protrude from the heat dissipation hole to the inner surface of the band plate portion even if a game ball collides with the band plate portion (specifically, if the heat dissipation hole is circular, when a game ball hits the outside of the heat dissipation hole, the amount of protrusion of the sphere into the heat dissipation hole is contained within the thickness of the board cover 3050 and does not protrude from the inner surface of the band plate portion) and the required thickness of the band plate portion can be determined.

The relationship between the above-mentioned substrate 4000, substrate cover 3050, and long hole portion 3053 can also be applied to a substrate 4400 that is provided inside the lower part of the center member 2500 or inside a movable body not shown in the figure, in a location into which the game ball B may fly, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 126.
That is, the back side of the game board 5 constituting the game area 5a is densely packed with drive mechanisms and electrical wiring related to the movable body and electrical equipment. Therefore, the game ball B that flies in there may become stuck, and the stuck game ball B may suddenly roll away due to, for example, the opening and closing of the door frame 3. If the board 4400 is placed in an exposed state in such a place, especially at the very end, the game ball B that suddenly rolls away may come into contact with the wiring drawn to the board 4400 or the terminal pieces (electrodes) of the mounted electronic components, which may cause an electrical failure and lead to destruction.
In response to this, by covering the substrate 4400 with a substrate cover having the long hole portion, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from accidentally coming into contact with the substrate 4400, and further by arranging electronic components (including the joining member 4001x) in the area surrounded by the long hole portion of the substrate 4400, it is possible to prevent electrical failure or destruction.

[5-9b-2d-3. Window hole and long hole]
In the explanation so far, window hole portions 3052 are provided in the joining member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c, and a long hole portion 3053 is provided in the joining member mounting section 4003b, but it is also possible to mix window hole portions 3052 and long hole portions 3053 in one joining member mounting section 4003a to 4003c.
To explain this, for example, using Figure 174H, in the upper part of the section where the protrusion 3050d to the rear of the board cover 3050 and the peripheral control board box 1520 arranged further above that can be used as a ball-blocking eave, a window hole 3052 is opened while taking the above-mentioned game ball countermeasures, and a joining member 4001x is installed on the corresponding board 4000, while on the other hand, in the lower part of the section where the eave effect of the protrusion 3050d etc. does not reach, a long horizontal hole 3053 is made.
As described above, the window hole portion 3052 has the advantage of allowing freedom in the placement of the joining member 4001x (connector) in terms of standardization. However, even if it is possible to take measures against game balls such as those described above, there remains a certain degree of risk of game ball B directly touching or impacting the board 4000.
On the other hand, although the long hole portion 3053 is slightly inferior to the window hole portion 3052 in terms of the freedom of arrangement of the joining member 4001x, it is superior to the window hole portion 3052 in terms of responding to the risk of the game ball B directly touching the substrate 4000 or receiving a direct impact.
In this way, depending on the surrounding environment of the joining member mounting sections 4003a to 4003c in which the joining members 4001x (connectors) are arranged, it is advisable to provide a mixture of window hole portions 3052 and long hole portions 3053 so that the advantages of each can be utilized.
As shown in Figures 174I and 174J, the long hole 3053 may be disposed below (more preferably directly below) the ball tank 552 disposed at the top of the pachinko machine 1 to store the game balls B (the area below the ball tank 552 surrounded by straight lines passing through the left and right ends of the ball tank 552). Normally, the game balls B that get inside the back cover 640 are highly likely to have fallen from the upper ball tank 552, so by deliberately arranging the long hole 3053 in a zone that may be considered dangerous for the joining member 4001x, the possible installation range of the board 4000 can be expanded.

[5-9b-2e. Technical Means K0 to K5 of the Substrate and Substrate Cover]
The above embodiment of the substrate and substrate cover (2) solves the problems in the prior art described in JP-A-2001-46599 (FIG. 5), namely,
"A ball tank that stores prize balls is attached to the top of the main frame of the gaming machine, and when the main frame is opened and closed, the game balls in the ball tank may spill out. If this timing coincides with the opening and closing of the back cover on the rear of the main frame, the game balls may get inside the back cover.
As mentioned above, a low-risk board that does not require significant anti-tampering measures is attached to the inside of the back cover in its original state. Therefore, if a game ball accidentally gets inside the back cover, there is a risk that the game ball will come into contact with the terminal pieces of the joining member joined to the board or the wiring of the board, or will remain unstable while resting on the joining member.
Pachinko balls, which are used as game balls, are made of iron, have a diameter of 11 mm, weigh 5.4g to 5.7g, and so touching the terminal pieces or wiring of the joining member could cause structural and electrical destruction or failure.
The following technical means K0 to K5 are provided to solve the above problem.

[5-9b-2e-0. Technical means K0]
A game area where games are played with game balls;
A gaming machine having a board on which a specific electronic component is mounted,
a board cover for covering a surface of the board on which the specific electronic component is mounted,
the board cover has a long hole portion that can expose the specific electronic component to the outside,
The long hole portion has a specific area through which the game ball can enter so as to protrude toward the base plate,
Between the surface of the board on which the specific electronic components are mounted and the inner surface of the board cover, a gap is provided that is greater than the amount of protrusion of the game ball through the specific area toward the inner surface of the board cover. The gaming machine is characterized by:
According to such a gaming machine, even if a gaming ball hits the surface of the board covered by the board cover, the ball does not come into contact with wiring, etc., reducing the risk of damage or malfunction.
In addition, even if a game ball tries to fly in from outside the specific area and protrudes toward the inside of the board cover, the amount of protrusion will determine whether the inside of the board cover and the specific electronic part of the board are separated from each other by a certain amount. Since the gap between the board and the surface on which the components are mounted is larger, the game balls do not come into contact with the board. Therefore, when a specific electronic component is a connecting member for connecting a connector, for example, a large number of connecting members are attached to the board cover. By forming multiple long holes that can accommodate the components and appropriately arranging the necessary joining materials in positions that correspond to the long holes, the number and arrangement of connectors used can be varied for each board. It is possible to deal with the problem with only one type of board cover. Of course, even if the number of actual connectors is small and there is a surplus (empty space) in the long hole portion, the problem caused by the game balls as described above does not occur.
Therefore, since there is no need to remake the board cover to fit different boards for each model, manufacturing costs can be reduced (see, for example, paragraphs [1355] to [1388], Figure 126, Figures 174B to 174M, etc.).

[5-9b-2e-1. Technical means K1]
A game area where a game is played using a game ball;
A board on which electronic components including at least a joining member for joining a connector (hereinafter also referred to as a "specific electronic component") are mounted,
a board cover for covering a surface of the board on which the joining member is mounted,
The substrate cover includes:
The joining member is exposed to the outside, and the opening width in the short direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
A gap is provided between the surface of the substrate on which the joining member is mounted, the gap being greater than the amount of protrusion of the game ball inward when the game ball hits the outside of the long hole portion. Amusement machine.
According to such a gaming machine, even if a gaming ball collides with the surface of the board covered with the board cover, the ball does not come into contact with wiring, etc., and therefore the risk of damage or malfunction is reduced.
In addition, the long hole in the board cover is designed so that even if a ball were to enter the board from the outside and part of the ball were to protrude into the board cover, the protruding amount would be enough to prevent the board from beingnd over the inner surface of the board cover and the board. Since the gap between the board and the surface on which the balls are mounted is larger, the balls do not come into contact with the board. Therefore, the board cover is provided with a number of long slots to accommodate a number of connectors. By placing the necessary joint members in positions corresponding to the long holes, it is possible to use a single type of board cover even if the number and arrangement of connectors used differs for each board. Even if the number of connectors is small and there is a surplus in the long hole section, no problems due to game balls will occur as described above.
This eliminates the need to remake the board cover to fit different boards for each model, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

[5-9b-2e-2. Technical means K2]
The substrate cover is characterized in that an inclined portion is formed on at least one side of the long hole in the longitudinal direction, the inclined portion being inclined in a direction in which the opening width of the long hole widens outward. The gaming machine described in K0 or K1.
In such a gaming machine, even if the gaming ball is strongly pushed from the outside of the long hole portion, the gaming ball escapes to the inclined portion side, so there is almost no risk of the edge being chipped, and the gaming ball easily comes off the long hole portion. sell.

[5-9b-2e-3. Technical means K3]
The base cover is characterized in that the long hole is provided in a range corresponding to a ball tank disposed at the top for storing game balls, below the ball tank. 13. A gaming machine as described in any one of the above.
Normally, there is a high probability that the game balls that get inside the back cover are those that have fallen from the ball tank at the top, so the board cover is provided with a space below the ball tank that can prevent the game balls from entering. Providing a long hole makes it more useful.

[5-9b-2e-4. Technical means K4]
the substrate is configured to gather and mount electronic components other than the specific electronic component in a mounting area;
A gaming machine described in any one of technical means K0 to K3, characterized in that the board cover covers the electronic components in the mounting area so as not to expose them to the outside.
In this way, by gathering all electronic components other than specific electronic components in the mounting area of the board and covering it with a board cover so that it is not exposed to the outside, electronic components that do not need to be exposed to the outside can be placed in the game ball. can be securely isolated from

[5-9b-2e-5. Technical means K5]
forming a plurality of bonding member mounting sections capable of mounting a plurality of the specific electronic components at a plurality of locations;
A plurality of the long holes are formed in a portion of the board cover corresponding to at least one of the bonding member mounting sections, and the bonding member mounting section is formed in a portion of the board cover corresponding to at least one of the other bonding member mounting sections. Forming a window portion that is exposed to the outside,
The gaming machine according to any one of technical means K0 to K4, further comprising a board box accommodating another board disposed in the space above the window hole.
Generally, a circuit board of a gaming machine has common parts that are common to a plurality of models, and non-common parts that differ for each model.
In contrast, the joint member mounting section corresponding to the portion having the long hole of the board cover can freely set the number and arrangement of connectors by utilizing multiple long holes. As mentioned above, even if there is a surplus, there is no problem, so it is easy to deal with non-common parts that differ from model to model.
On the other hand, the window of the board cover is opened widely to a size corresponding to one joining member mounting section, and large and small connectors can be mixed in a complex arrangement on the board corresponding to that space. Therefore, It is easy to deal with common parts that are common to multiple models. As mentioned above, the window opening is wide and there is room for the game ball to enter, but the space above it is Another base box acts as a shield (obstacle) for the falling game balls, making it more difficult for the balls to get in.

[5-9b-2f. Technical features L1 to L7 of substrate and bonding member]
The above embodiment also corresponds to the following technical means L1 to L7.

[5-9b-2f-1. Technical means L1]
In a gaming machine having a board on which electronic components are mounted, the board including a connector for electrically connecting at least one of a power source, a ground, or various signals,
The joining member is arranged such that the terminal pieces protruding from one side surface of the resin body are aligned vertically to the board that is attached vertically to a predetermined location,
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the joining members is connected to a pad formed on the substrate with the terminal piece facing downward.
For example, the board attached to the rear side of the gaming machine is generally located lower than the shoulders of the worker when the gaming machine is installed on the island. When the connector is inserted into the connecting member, a large force acts downward on the connecting member together with the connector.
In addition to the board attached to the rear side, many other boards are attached to various places on the gaming machine. Therefore, the assembly work of the gaming machine is often performed in the same positional relationship as described above, and the joining When inserting or removing a connector from a member, a large force acts to press the joining member downward together with the connector.
When a force is applied to the joining member in a downward direction, the force changes to a direction that presses the terminal piece protruding downward from one side of the resin body against the pad of the board. Even when the connector is plugged in or unplugged, the terminal pieces are unlikely to peel off from the pads on the board, making connection problems less likely to occur.

[5-9b-2f-2. Technical means L2]
The gaming machine described in technical means L1 is characterized in that the substrate has an enlarged pattern portion in which copper foil is extended further downward from the pad to which the terminal piece of the joining member is joined.
When removing a connector from a joining member, if there is a large resistance, the connector may be pulled up and down slowly to remove it. In this case, if an upward force is applied to the joining member through the connector, the force will be in the opposite direction to the downward force. Conversely, the force changes to one that pulls the terminal piece away from the pad on the board. The pad and the copper foil of the expanded pattern resist this force together, causing connection problems when the connector is inserted or removed. Hateful.

[5-9b-2f-3. Technical means L3]
The gaming machine described in technical means L2, wherein the enlarged pattern portion has a width greater than or equal to the width of the pad.
By making the width of the enlarged pattern portion equal to or greater than the width of the pad, not only does the strength increase, but unnecessary stress is less likely to occur at the boundary between the pad and the enlarged pattern portion.

[5-9b-2f-4. Technical means L4]
A gaming machine according to technical means L2 or L3, characterized in that a through hole is provided in the enlarged pattern portion.
By providing a through hole in the enlarged pattern portion, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the enlarged pattern portion, for example, to detect electrical abnormalities.

[5-9b-2f-5. Technical means L5]
The joining member is disposed below the electronic component with a working space sufficient to insert and remove the connector. Amusement machine.
When electronic components are placed above the joint, even if there is enough working space between the joint and the electronic components to insert and remove the connector, the connector is forced downwards more strongly due to the electronic components on top. The possibility of being pushed in increases the usefulness of the present invention.

[5-9b-2f-6. Technical means L6]
A gaming machine, characterized in that the electronic component located on the joining member described in technical means L5 is a joining member described in any one of technical means L1 to L4.
By arranging the bonding members of the present invention vertically at intervals, a board that is less susceptible to connection problems can be provided.

[5-9b-2f-7. Technical means L7]
The substrate is provided with a solid pattern portion connected to the enlarged pattern portion via a through hole on a surface opposite to the surface to which the joining member is connected and located behind the joining member. A gaming machine according to any one of technical means L2 to L6.
By providing a solid pattern portion on the surface opposite the mounting surface and corresponding to the rear of the joining member, the strength of the board itself in that portion is increased, so that the strength capable of withstanding the force of inserting and removing the connector is obtained. Furthermore, by electrically connecting the expanded pattern portion and the solid pattern portion via a through hole, a stable ground (GND) region can be secured.

The boards relating to technical means K0 to L7 include not only those attached to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, but also those attached to the inside of the lower part of the center member 2500 (board 4400) as shown by the dashed line in Figure 126, and those attached to various places inside the movable body (not shown).

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 171 and 172. Fig. 171 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. Fig. 172 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. In the game board 5, the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the back front effect unit 3200, the back front left lower effect unit 3300, and the back front right lower effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 perform a predetermined light-emitting effect according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004.

Specifically, as an example of an illumination effect using the light guide plate performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, as shown in FIG. 171, a number of LEDs mounted on a first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 when viewed from the front are illuminated to illuminate and decorate the first pattern 3110. As a result, the word "decisive battle" is illuminated in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 and behind the back front performance unit 3200, suggesting to the player that an opportunity is approaching, making the player think that something good is about to happen, increasing expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as an example of a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 172, a number of LEDs mounted on a second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 when viewed from the front are illuminated to illuminate and decorate the second pattern 3120. This causes a specific character in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 to be illuminated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, surprising the player and making a strong impact on the player, as well as making the player believe that a favorable game state such as a "jackpot game" will occur, thereby heightening anticipation for the game.

When the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated, the left back decorative body 3212 and the right back decorative body 3213 of the front back performance unit 3200 are illuminated and decorated, so that the radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the radial decorative portion 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b of the left back decorative body 3212 and the right back decorative body 3213 appear to be continuous, and together they form one pattern (special pattern), so that a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, the left back decorative body 3212 and the right back decorative body 3213 that form the outer periphery of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, so that the decoration of the left back decorative body 3212 and the right back decorative body 3213 is located in front of the second pattern 3120, so that a sense of depth can be given to the special pattern, and the special pattern can be made to look three-dimensional. Therefore, it is possible to make a strong impact on the player, strongly attracting the player's interest in the special images, and while it is possible to entertain the player, it is also possible to make the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing the player's expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the light-emitting effects by the light guide plate 3102 as described above can be appropriately combined with the light-emitting effects of the decorative body, and can also be combined with the effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., a variety of patterns of effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and the player can be entertained by various effects, preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5-11. Technical features of the game board F1-J3]
The above embodiments of the game board correspond to the following technical means F1 to J3.

[5-11-F1. Technical means F1]
a gaming panel having a gaming area on a front side;
A first ball passage portion located above the game area through which a game ball shot into the game area can pass;
a ball striking section provided at the end of the first ball passage section and with which a game ball passing through the first ball passage section can collide;
A second ball passage portion that receives the game balls that fall from the first ball passage portion and guides them downward.
A bouncing ball receiving portion is provided which receives a game ball that hits the ball hitting portion and bounces back, and drops the game ball into the second ball passage portion,
The bouncing ball receiving portion is separate from the game panel and is attached to a support portion provided on the game panel side by a non-rigid joint structure.
Here, the term "non-rigid joint structure" refers to a joint relationship that does not use a means for integrating components together, such as adhesive joints or screw joints. Therefore, "attaching using a non-rigid joint structure" refers to a joint relationship that does not use a means for integrating components together, such as adhesive joints or screw joints. This refers to mounting the parts in a state where they are not integrated but can move relatively.
According to this gaming machine, when the game ball hits the ball hitting section and bounces off, the impact is absorbed by the rattle of the non-rigid joint structure, and the momentum of the game ball is reduced. This allows the flow of the game balls to be slowed down.

[5-11-F2. Technical means F2]
The support part to which the bouncing ball receiving part is attached is capable of receiving the game ball bouncing off the ball hitting part and dropping it to the second ball passage part side by itself. Machine.
By giving the support part to which the bouncing ball receiving part is attached the function of dropping the game ball that hits the ball hitting part and bounces back to the second ball passage part, even if a mistake is made such as forgetting to attach the bouncing ball receiving part, At the very least, it is possible to continue playing the game as is, so that losses due to the mistake can be minimized.

[5-11-F3. Technical means F3]
The bouncing ball receiving portion has a flat top portion, and the position of the top portion is stepped lower than the terminal end of the passage bottom constituting the lower side of the first ball passage portion, The gaming machine according to technical means F1 or F2, characterized in that a step is formed at the boundary between the bottom of the passage and the top of the bouncing ball receiving portion.
Since a step is provided at the boundary between the end of the passage bottom of the first ball passage section and the top of the bouncing ball receiving section, the game ball that hits the ball hitting section and bounces back will hit the top of the bouncing ball receiving section with too much momentum. When the ball is placed on the first ball passage and then attempts to flow backward from there, it hits the step and decelerates or stops. Therefore, the game ball that is attempting to flow backward through the first ball passage hits the step, changes direction, and quickly Since the ball falls into the second ball passage, the risk of collision with the subsequent game ball hit to the right is reduced.

[5-11-F4. Technical means F4]
The ball striking portion is inclined backward when the surface on which the game ball strikes is the front side. Machine.
By tilting the surface of the ball striking part that the game ball strikes backward, the ball bounces slightly upwards, which reduces the impact on the ball receiving part.

[5-11-F5. Technical means F5]
The technical means F3 or F4 described above is characterized in that the passage cover covers the front side of the bouncing ball receiving portion and has an upper edge at a position approximately the same height as the step or higher. Gaming machine.
The upper edge of the passage cover covering the front side of the bouncing ball receiving section is aligned with the step at approximately the same height, or the upper edge of the passage cover is made higher than the step, so that the step is visible from the player's point of view. It can be made less noticeable.

[5-11-F6. Technical means F6]
A gaming machine described in any one of technical means F1 to F5, characterized in that the bouncing ball receiving portion is attached to a fixed member fixed to the gaming panel by a non-rigid joint structure.
According to this gaming machine, when the game ball hits the ball hitting section and bounces off, it hits the ball receiving section, and the impact is absorbed by the rattle of the non-rigid joint structure, so the momentum of the game ball is reduced. This makes it possible to slow down the flow of the game balls, and also prevents damage to the fixed members due to the impact.

[5-11-F7. Technical means F7]
Technical Means F1 to F6, characterized in that the non-rigid joint structure is such that the bouncing ball receiving part is attached in a loose fit state to the support part formed on the game panel or the fixed member. 13. A gaming machine according to claim 12, wherein
Here, the term "loose fit" refers to a loose fit state with an appropriate amount of play (clearance) and refers to a rattling state when subjected to an external force.
The bouncing ball receiving part is attached to the support part of the bouncing ball receiving part in a loose fit state, so that there is a rattle between the two. When the game ball hits the ball hitting part and is bounced back, the bouncing ball receiving part is hit by the ball hitting part. The impact is absorbed by the wobble and the momentum of the game ball is neutralized, so that the flow of the game ball thereafter can be made gentler.

[5-11-F8. Technical means F8]
The gaming machine described in technical means F6 or F7, wherein the fixed member is a center frame fixed to the gaming panel.
This makes it possible to prevent damage to the center frame caused by game balls bouncing off the ball hitting section.

[5-11-G1. Technical means G1]
a gaming panel having a gaming area on a front side;
A first ball passage portion located above the game area through which a steel game ball driven into the game area can pass;
a ball striking section provided at the end of the first ball passage section and with which the game ball passing through the first ball passage section can collide;
A second ball passage portion that receives the game balls falling from the first ball passage portion and guides them downward.
A bouncing ball receiving portion is provided which receives the game ball bouncing off the ball hitting portion and drops the game ball to the second ball passage portion side,
At least a surface of the ball hitting portion that hits the game ball is formed in a dark color, while at least a surface of the bouncing ball receiving portion that hits the ball hitting portion and receives the game ball that bounces back is formed in an opaque light color. Amusement machine.
When the game ball hits the ball hitting section and bounces back to the ball receiving section, the dark colored (black, etc.) ball hitting section, which is located slightly above the player during the game, becomes the background of the game ball (see FIG. 1). (See the bubble diagram.) At the same time, the light color (white, etc.) of the bouncing ball catcher is reflected on the round mirror surface (silver) of the steel game ball polished by the ball polishing device in the middle of the ball circulation path. The contrast makes it easy to see the presence of the game ball. In particular, in recent gaming machines, the decorations on the upper and side edges of the door frame protrude toward the player, and the ball contact area located in the upper right corner The surroundings are often dimly lit, and in such an environment the bright color of the ball receiving part is more noticeable when reflected in the round mirror surface of the ball.

[5-11-G2. Technical means G2]
The gaming machine described in technical means G1 is characterized in that the ball hitting section is inclined backward when the surface that the gaming ball hits is the front side.
By tilting the surface of the ball striking part that the game ball strikes backwards, the game ball bounces slightly upwards when struck, and its speed is slightly slower than when the game ball bounces downwards. The ball receiving part is reflected on the mirror surface of the ball for a longer period of time, making it more noticeable.

[5-11-G3. Technical means G3]
The ball receiving portion is provided on a transparent center frame attached to the game panel, and the bright-colored portion is painted with bright-colored paint, or a bright-colored sticker is attached, or a bright-colored resin molded product is attached. The gaming machine according to technical means G1 or G2, characterized in that it is formed by any one of the above.
By making the ball receiving area opaque and light-colored in contrast to the transparent center frame, other performance devices and game panel patterns behind the center frame are transparent and miscellaneous reflected on the surface of the game ball. Since the influence can be reduced, the ease of recognition is improved.

[5-11-G4. Technical means G4]
Any one of technical means G1 to G3, characterized in that the upper wall of the first ball passage section is formed of a stainless steel outer rail that surrounds the outside of the game area. 2. The gaming machine described in
By forming the upper wall of the passage of the first ball passage section with a stainless steel outer rail, when the game ball passes through the first ball passage section, the game ball reflected on the outer rail is not visible to a player who is looking up slightly. The mirror image of the ball is visible, meaning that there are two balls. Then, as the ball hits the ball striker and bounces off the outer rail, the image of the ball reflected there disappears, and a bouncing ball appears to replace it. The bright color of the receiving part is reflected on the mirror surface of the game ball, making the movement of the game ball appear more dynamic.

[5-11-G5. Technical means G5]
The dark color of the ball contact portion is black, dark blue, dark brown, or dark green,
A gaming machine described in any one of technical means G1 to G4, characterized in that the light color of the bouncing ball receiving portion is white, yellow, or pink.
By using the above-mentioned combination of the dark color of the ball hitting portion and the light color of the bouncing ball receiving portion, the brightness difference is increased and the contrast difference is emphasized, making the game ball stand out more.

[5-11-H1. Technical means H1]
a gaming panel having a gaming area on a front side;
A first ball passage portion located above the game area through which a game ball shot into the game area can pass;
a ball striking section provided at the end of the first ball passage section and with which a game ball passing through the first ball passage section can collide;
A second ball passage portion that receives the game balls that fall from the first ball passage portion and guides them downward;
A center frame attached to a periphery of an opening formed in the game panel,
The center frame is
A bouncing ball receiving section that receives a game ball that hits the ball hitting section and bounces back and drops the game ball into the second ball passage section;
A flange portion that can abut against the front surface of the game panel and has a mounting hole for a screw;
A gaming machine characterized in that no electrical components are mounted on the gaming panel and the gaming panel can be attached and detached from the front side.
Since no electrical components are mounted on the center frame, there are no electric wires on the center frame, and the center frame is fixed to the front of the game panel by passing a screw through the mounting hole on the flange. This makes it easy to attach and detach the center frame to and from the game panel. This makes it easy to perform maintenance such as cleaning and repairing the center frame, and also makes it easy to replace the center frame if it is damaged in a way that is difficult to repair.

[5-11-H2. Technical means H2]
The center frame is characterized in that the flange portion having the mounting holes for screws is formed at least on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion with the bouncing ball receiving portion in between. Gaming machine.
The bouncing ball receiving portion is repeatedly subjected to the impact of the game balls that bounce off the ball hitting portion as described above, but the impact is supported by the screws inserted into the mounting holes of the flange portion. When the flange portion is located on the second ball passage side, the impact of the game ball on the second ball passage side acts in a direction that lifts the flange portion from the front surface of the game panel, and the flange portion sandwiches the bouncing ball receiving portion and the second ball When the flange portion is located on the opposite side of the passage, the flange portion acts in a direction to press the flange portion against the front surface of the game panel. The impact of the game ball on the flange tends to cause the flange to lift off the front surface of the game panel, which causes a force to act on the screw in the pulling direction. Repeated exposure to this force can cause the screw to loosen.
On the other hand, if the flange portion having the mounting hole is located on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion across the bouncing ball receiving portion, the flange portion will be pushed against the front surface of the game panel by the impact of the game ball received by the bouncing ball receiving portion. Because it is pressed against the center frame, almost no stress is placed on the screws inserted into the mounting holes in the flange. This means that the screws are less likely to loosen, improving the stability of the center frame over the long term.

[5-11-H3. Technical means H3]
Technical means H1, characterized in that a step that can be contacted by the game ball due to the thickness of the flange portion is not provided in the ball bounce passage formed between the ball hitting portion and the ball receiving portion. Or a gaming machine according to technical means H2.
In the ball bouncing passage formed between the ball hitting portion and the bouncing ball receiving portion, there is no step due to the thickness of the flange portion that the game ball can contact. For example, This makes it less likely that problems such as "a game ball heading towards the receiving part may come into contact with a step in the flange part and change course towards the glass unit, and in the worst case scenario, the ball may get stuck." will occur.

[5-11-I1. Technical means I1]
a gaming panel having a gaming area on a front side;
A first ball passage portion located above the game area through which a game ball shot into the game area can pass;
a ball striking section provided at the end of the first ball passage section and with which a game ball passing through the first ball passage section can collide;
A second ball passage portion that receives the game balls that fall from the first ball passage portion and guides them downward;
A center frame attached to a periphery of an opening formed in the game panel,
The center frame is
A bouncing ball receiving section that receives a game ball that hits the ball hitting section and bounces back and drops the game ball into the second ball passage section;
A flange portion that can abut against the front surface of the game panel and has a mounting hole for a screw;
The center frame is formed of a plurality of separable frame parts, and one of the frame parts having the ball receiving portion is disposed so as to overlap the front surface of the other frame parts. .
The ball receiving part is subject to repeated impacts from balls that bounce off the ball hitting part, and so may be damaged in a way that is difficult to repair. Therefore, the center frame is made up of multiple separable frame parts, among which By arranging the frame part having the bouncing ball receiving portion so as to overlap the front surface of the other frame parts, when the bouncing ball receiving portion is damaged, the entire frame part can be easily replaced.

[5-11-I2. Technical means I2]
The gaming machine described in technical means I1 is characterized in that no electrical components are mounted on the frame part having the bouncing ball receiving portion.
By mounting no electrical components on the frame part having the bouncing ball receiving portion, no electric wires are connected to the frame part, making it even easier to attach and detach the frame part from the game panel.

[5-11-I3. Technical means I3]
The frame part having the bouncing ball receiving portion is provided with a light-transmitting decoration, and the decoration is illuminated from behind by light from a light-emitting means separately provided on the gaming panel side. The gaming machine according to technical means I2.
If a light-transmitting decoration is provided on the frame part having the bouncing ball receiving portion so that the light is illuminated from behind by the light of the light-emitting means separately provided on the gaming panel side, the frame part can be illuminated without providing electrical wiring. This makes it possible to decorate with lighting.

[5-11-J1. Technical means J1]
a gaming panel having a gaming area on a front side;
A first ball passage portion located above the game area through which a game ball shot into the game area can pass;
a ball striking section provided at the end of the first ball passage section and with which a game ball passing through the first ball passage section can collide;
A second ball passage portion that receives the game balls that fall from the first ball passage portion and guides them downward;
A center frame attached to a periphery of an opening formed in the game panel,
The center frame is made of a transparent synthetic resin and has a bouncing ball receiving portion that receives a game ball that hits the ball hitting portion and bounces back, and drops the game ball toward the second ball passage portion.
The ball receiving portion is formed as a separate body having a different color from the center frame and is formed so as to be detachable from the center frame.
Since the bouncing ball receiving part is formed in a different color from the transparent center frame as a separate body, improper installation of the bouncing ball receiving part can be easily detected by visual check.
In addition, the separate and detachable bouncing ball receiving portion is a different color from the center frame, making the end of the first ball passage clearly defined and making it easier to aim for right-handed hits.

[5-11-J2. Technical means J2]
The center frame is located at a position overlapping with the bouncing ball receiving portion when the center frame is installed on the game panel, or at a position adjacent to the bouncing ball receiving portion and difficult to be seen by a player when the center frame is installed on the game panel. A gaming machine according to technical means J1, characterized in that colored stickers, including white, are attached to the gaming machine.
By attaching a colored sticker to the center frame at a position where it overlaps with the bouncing ball receiving part or near the bouncing ball receiving part, it is easy to tell the top and bottom of the center frame, which is difficult to distinguish by itself because it is transparent. This makes it possible to efficiently attach the frame to the game panel. Moreover, this sticker is completely invisible or difficult to see for the player when the center frame with the bouncing ball catcher is attached to the game panel. There is no risk of interfering with the game, and no risk of marring the aesthetic appearance of the game panel.

[5-11-J3. Technical means J3]
The gaming machine described in technical means J2 is characterized in that the sticker attached to the center frame is the same color as the bouncing ball receiving portion.
By making the sticker attached to the center frame the same color as the bouncing ball receiving part, the attachment position of the bouncing ball receiving part can be clearly indicated even if multiple stickers are attached to the center frame. .

[5-11-K0. Others]
The above describes the technical means F1 to J3 corresponding to the above embodiment. However, the technical means F1 to J3 may be combined as appropriate. In addition, the following modifications of the above embodiment are also included in the technical means F1 to J3.
That is, in the embodiment, the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is provided on a center frame 2501 (fixed member) fixed to the gaming panel 1100, but the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a does not necessarily have to be provided on the center frame 2501. For example, the above-mentioned support portion 2501c may be provided on the gaming panel 1100 itself, and the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a may be attached to the support portion 2501c.
In addition, in the embodiment, the center member 2500 is formed by integrating the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third distribution device 2550, which are play members, into the center frame 2501, but the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third distribution device 2550 may also be formed separately from the center frame 2501.

6. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 173 and FIG. 174A. FIG. 173 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine in outline. FIG. 174A is an explanatory diagram showing the connection configuration of each board and motor on the game board. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure, and each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 which controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and displaying errors, and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by an outlet 1008 provided in a game area 5a partitioned off on the game board 5.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a as a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the individual unit. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a specified register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the register changes to an inconsistent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by controlling it with a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, as described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the dispensing control board 633, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the dispensing control board 633 remains in an activated state.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU 1310a), and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from the various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 2402 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, the general prize port sensor 3001 detects the game ball B received in the general prize port 2001, the normal prize port sensor 2401 detects the game ball B received in the normal prize port 2003, the large prize port sensor 2403 detects the game ball B received in the large prize port 2005, the special prize port sensor 2513 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2006, the first V prize port sensor 2514 detects the game ball B received in the first V prize port 2007, the first H Detection signals from the first miss opening sensor 2516 that detects the game ball B received in the miss opening 2535, the second V winning opening sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, the third miss opening sensor 2518 that detects the game ball B received in the third miss opening 2555, the out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 (or the out opening left sensor 3032 and the out opening right sensor 3033), the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor 3003 that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, etc. are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (i.e., directly, without passing through the dispensing control input circuit and dispensing control output circuit described below), and are then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start opening sensor 3002, and the second start opening sensor 2402 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the normal prize opening sensor 2401, the gimmick prize opening sensor 2513, the large prize opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2010, and the vibration sensor 3003 are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the main control solenoid drive circuit outputs respective drive signals to the start port solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, role winning port solenoid 2512, first distribution solenoid 2532, and second distribution solenoid 2545 via the panel relay board 1710, i.e. indirectly, and outputs respective drive signals from the output terminal of its specified output port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal hold indicator, first special pattern indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400 without going through other boards, i.e. directly. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a also outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of a specified output port, thereby outputting a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the specified output port, outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the specified output port, and outputs a launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B from the output terminal of the specified output port to the payout control board 633. The logic of this launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to launch permission logic when launch is permitted, and is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when power is restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described below is started.

In this embodiment, the first start hole sensor 3002, the second start hole sensor 2402, the normal winning hole sensor 2401, the large winning hole sensor 2403, the accessory winning hole sensor 2513, the first V winning hole sensor 2514, the first losing hole sensor 2516, the second V winning hole sensor 2515, the third losing hole sensor 2518, and the out sensor 664 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the normal winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switch. This is because game ball B frequently enters the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, and the normal winning hole 2003, so the first start hole sensor 3002, the second start hole sensor 2402, and the normal winning hole sensor 2401 also frequently detect game ball B. For this reason, the first start hole sensor 3002, the second start hole sensor 2402, and the normal winning hole sensor 2401 use proximity switches that are highly durable and have a long lifespan.

In addition, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the large prize opening 2005 is opened and game ball B enters the opening frequently, so the large prize opening sensor 2403 also frequently detects game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the large prize opening sensor 2403. In addition, since a large amount of game ball B shot into the game area 5a is collected by the out opening 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 also frequently detects game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the out sensor 664. In contrast, the general prize opening 2001, where game ball B does not enter frequently, is not frequently detected by the general prize opening sensor 3001. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter life than a proximity switch is used for the general prize opening sensor 3001. Furthermore, regardless of whether game balls B frequently enter the general winning hole 2001, a highly durable and long-life proximity switch may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, which will be described in detail later, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in RAM during power off processing even when the power is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the dispensing control board 633.

The main control board 1310 is also provided with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispense control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of game balls B, is equipped with a payout control unit 633a which performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and controls ball supply using the ball supply solenoid 145, an error LED indicator which displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a push operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch which, during maintenance, discharges the game balls B in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and initiates the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing in the dispensing control board 633, is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and receives the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port. In addition, it also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590.

The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the fall cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port, transmits commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display may display and notify the user of the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball out" (specifically, that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball stuck" (specifically, that a game ball B is stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 59 When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it indicates a "full" state (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the fault cover unit 150 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates a "CR not connected" state (the electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates a "stocking" state (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball loan request signal for game ball B from the ball loan button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B loaned, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball loan operation unit 220, and this signal is input to the ball loan display section 226 of the ball loan operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball delivery solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball delivery solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the game area 5a and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and generates a ball delivery reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and the single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player will forcibly stop shooting the game ball B, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the detection signals are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which conveys permission to shoot the game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which the game ball B is shot toward the play area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

Unless launch condition 1 is met, that is, the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, launch condition 2 is met, that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected based on a CR connection signal, and launch condition 3 is met, that the launch of game ball B is permitted based on a launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, the launch timing control circuit will not output a launch reference pulse to launch game ball B toward the play area 5a. For example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 and game ball B cannot be launched.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 to launch the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 195, triggered by the input of a launch reference pulse. On the other hand, the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball delivery solenoid 145, triggered by the input of a ball delivery reference pulse, to receive one game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball delivery unit 140, and sends the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 by stopping the output of the constant current, triggered by the end of the input of the ball delivery reference pulse. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit to the ball delivery solenoid 145 is controlled to be constant.

In this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633, but it may also be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 173, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, although detailed illustration is omitted, is equipped with a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated onto a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM which stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC which produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM which stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on a single semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands, and transmits game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5. The door side drive light emission data, which is composed of door side drive data for outputting drive signals to the vibration motor 356, operation button lift drive motor 367, and protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, etc., provided on the door frame 3, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512, and a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signal from the second loss sensor 2517 of the center member 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC. In addition, the detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, the pressing detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, and the protruding force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, so that music and sound effects corresponding to various performances are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, by sending audio signals (e.g., 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses the built-in WDT and the external WDT together to diagnose whether its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the performance display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be sent per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light flashing command, game board side light flashing command, movable body drive command, etc., output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and the like. A display control ROM for storing various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) for controlling the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a display control ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600. and an image RAM to which various data stored in the ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores a variety of programs for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, as well as schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands). The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that specifies the screen configuration, and specifies the order in which the screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that specifies the order in which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data specifies the order in which the various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting from the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. When the performance display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the display device 1600 of this. The VDP uses a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which one line's worth of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data stored in the line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and this affects the speed at which data is drawn on the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is the base data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Now, to explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image that is displayed as a unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 after their placement on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "sprite overlapping order") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas of 64 pixels each. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 x 3. Even larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified arbitrarily for each sprite.

The performance display device 1600 is driven by a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects with the one direction. When the performance display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600. When the output of one line is completed, the performance display device 1600 moves to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same way, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 based on the drawing data for the next line.

[7. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 173 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 175A to FIG. 180. FIG. 175A and FIG. 175B are flowcharts showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175A and FIG. 175B, FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process, FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process, and FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, the main control side timer interrupt process, the setting change process, the error display process, and the setting value confirmation display process.

[7-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state will be generated, initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number, reach determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a reach (missed reach) will be generated when a jackpot game state is not generated, variable display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns that are variably displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, pattern random numbers used to determine the jackpot pattern or small jackpot pattern (determine the type of hit) that is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated, and initial value determination random numbers for jackpot pattern used to determine the initial value of this pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B, initial value determination random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the random numbers, and random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns that are used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is updated directly by hardware using a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hard random number circuit again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum to the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum value, the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as a numerical value during the main control side power-on process described below does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off process (when the power is turned off), etc., when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, executes an initial value derivation process in which the same fixed value is always derived from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern hit determination random number based on the retrieved ID code, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the normal pattern hit determination initial value determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who produced the main control MPU 1310a, and the second security measure is that an initial value derivation process is executed when clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, thereby deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire the game ball B paid out as a prize ball obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' equipped in the other game boards 5'. In other words, in the other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', so even if a momentary stop is generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game ball B is passed through normal winning opening 2003 at each of those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece to generate a game state in which game ball B can be received by second starting opening 2004.

[7-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. This stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control side power-on process is performed as shown in Figures 175A and 176. When this main control side power-on process starts, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clear process (step S12). In this power outage clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches a predetermined voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S14). In this judgment, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, judging that the RAM clear is to be performed, whereas when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear is to be performed, judging that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. Note that, since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the judgment of step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the person who presses the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f will turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

In the judgment of step S14, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S14, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU 1310a makes the RAM clear process, which initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), executable for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, including game information related to the game such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or S16B, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a performs the determination based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is generated when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch, and determines that the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key ON based on a setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met; on the other hand, it determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch, and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to setting key ON based on a setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met.

In the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is operated to the first ON) stored in a predetermined area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is set to a value of 1 when the setting value is permitted to be changed, and to a value of 0 when the setting value is not permitted to be changed. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 waits until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s). When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the dispensing control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510, so the dispensing control board 633 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a).

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The judgment in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the judgment in step S24, if the main control MPU 1310a judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the judgment in step S24 again, and repeats the judgment in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. A detailed explanation of the fact that the judgment in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when changing the setting value is permitted, and to a value of 0 when changing the setting value is not permitted.

When the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S25 that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, when changing the setting value is not permitted, it judges whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 or not (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 when various information is to be erased, and to 0 when various information is not to be erased. When the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it has determined that various information is not to be erased, it calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating their sum.

Following step S28, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. A detailed explanation of the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on for inspection after production in the inspection process of the main control board 1310 production line will be provided later.

In the judgment of step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the judgment of step S32, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, when the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, it performs error display processing (step S33) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has ended is maintained, and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game at all, so the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. In this error display processing, the details of which will be described later, if it is judged that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is judged that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed at the time of power off, an error display is performed to inform the user that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that it cannot be trusted). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

After the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) to perform the first ON operation, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is then turned on, and the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. In the judgment of step S18 described above, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch, and judges that the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, thereby judging that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, and in the judgment of step S20A described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1, that is, in the judgment of step S25 described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is determined to be a value of 1, that is, the setting value is permitted to be changed, and following the setting change processing of step S37 described below, in the processing of step S38 described below, the RAM error is cleared by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as the "first RAM error clearing method").

As an alternative to this first RAM error release method, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, thereby starting the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, again. In the judgment of the above-mentioned step S14, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, and in the above-mentioned step S16A, it sets the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 1, so in the judgment of the above-mentioned step S26, it judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1, that is, that various information is to be erased, and in the processing of step S38 described later, it clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, thereby releasing the RAM error and allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as the "second RAM error release method").

In this embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it displays an error in step S33 to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable), and this can be done using two methods, the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. As a result, when there is no need to change the setting value at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch 1310f.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, that the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, it sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored in a specified storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency waves from unauthorized means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of an individual's arm) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. to change as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, unless the main control side power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area, as described below.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process (step S37). In this setting change process, which will be described in detail later, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g each time the pressing operation part of the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311, and the changed setting value is determined based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, and is stored in a specified area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the judgment of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is judged that various information is to be erased, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a does this by writing a value of 0 to a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is judged that various information is to be erased, and also when the setting change process is terminated, the main control MPU 1310a always clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)). Here, the "specific area" is composed of a setting value dedicated area in which a setting value is stored, and an out ball count dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is stored. The setting value dedicated area stores the setting value that is changed in the setting change process described below, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 that is counted in the ball counting process described below.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value and set it. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f indicates RAM clear and various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern hit determination random number based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value to the normal pattern hit determination initial value determination random number to be used for determining the initial value of the normal pattern hit determination random number described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball count information is set to the initial value of 0. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value and starts the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT is started to start timing until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, timing by the main control built-in WDT is started, and if the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. In contrast, when the main control built-in WDT is started and timing begins, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and timing begins again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timing by the main control built-in WDT before it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally.

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 633 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and enable transmission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs the activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the special random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware by latching and acquiring the random number in the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the activation of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when this latch signal is input from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this obtained random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are transmitted. These commands are sent during the main control timer interrupt process described below. A detailed explanation of how the commands to be sent when the power is turned on are scheduled in step S50 will be provided later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot pattern, and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small jackpot pattern, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (jackpot determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern win determination, the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern win determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, where the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the process performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main process on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned game information and other information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as when the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control internal RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and it becomes impossible to start timekeeping again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on processing again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the judgment in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forced to reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without performing the main control side power-off processing, and will again perform the main control side power-on processing. In other words, because the main control side power-off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power-off processing based on the state immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. Therefore, the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off processing was executed the previous time the power was cut off and the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit is forced to reset and restarted cannot possibly match, resulting in a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM, and all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are completely erased (cleared) in the processing of step S38.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the main control side performs power-on processing.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in the judgment of step S25, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change processing of step S37 is performed, and in the processing of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area, and in the judgment of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is judged that various information is to be erased, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation part is operated when the power is restored (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), when a setting change that can change and determine the setting value is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears the specified area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, for example, if the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player when the gaming hall closes for business (for example, a state in which a probability-varying (probability-changing) hit has occurred), the above-mentioned gaming backup information needs to be erased (cleared) before the next business day begins, so a staff member or other attendant at the gaming hall needs to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In addition, when the setting value is changed, when the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is ultimately maintained), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information, including various information such as game information obtained from the setting value before the setting change process, from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to check the current setting value, so only limited people, including the manager of the game parlor, are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed, that is, even if there is no setting key that only limited specific people possess, a staff member such as a staff member of the game parlor can erase (clear) the game backup information from the main control built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f when it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as DC +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, in the wait time standby process of step S22, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) and starts counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, it is set to 2.5 seconds). If an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before the waiting time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. However, within a period of about 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. This causes the main control side timer interrupt process described later to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process may not be completed. For this reason, the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power on process is started again when power is restored.

When this happens, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is started, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28 is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred, the checksum values will not match, and in step S38 all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when power is restored, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a staff member or other attendant of the game parlor, and the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM will be forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the staff member or other attendant of the game parlor to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated. This prevents the game from progressing. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a as described above, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing the progress of the game, and preventing various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information, etc.) from being updated, and preventing fluctuations in the calculation result of the checksum. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 are consistent, so that the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is not initialized. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, to output game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment information) relating to the progress of the game. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power cut processing consisting of the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of a fixed counter, and an infinite loop, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup processing (i.e., the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64), and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms defined by the hardware, as before. In other words, in this embodiment, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control side power-on process when power is restored, and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, and the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cut process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, a determination is made in step S24 immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 as to whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and if a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, so that the game cannot proceed.

This software makes it impossible for the game to progress, thereby preventing progression to steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initial settings are made in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output) from being updated). In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall, the main control's built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that is handled by software so that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all, and a part that is handled by hardware so that the main control's power outage processing is completed reliably and the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all. By configuring it in two parts, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2414. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2414; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen showing a jackpot game state (e.g., a screen showing a jackpot game presentation) in the display area of the presentation display device 1600, and the main control board 1310 is driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and the large prize opening 2005 is open by the opening/closing member, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will start driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and the large prize opening 2005 will transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 when power is restored and returns to normal, so when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, game ball B enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of game balls B that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of game balls B that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving status, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state (i.e., which round).

In this situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and transmits a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 between rounds of the attacca unit 2400), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it transmits a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the attacca solenoid 2414 to start driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable piece is open) on the display area of the performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game state is favorable to the player because the game ball B can be received into the second starting hole 2004, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a state in which it is driving the starting hole solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece and open the second starting hole 2004, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and transitions to a state in which it starts driving the starting hole solenoid 2412 to close the movable piece and close the second starting hole 2004.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game ball B can be received by the second starting port 2004, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state is now such that game ball B can be received by the second starting port 2004, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player. For this reason, a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game ball B could be received into the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game ball B can be received into the second starting hole 2004, a screen instructing the player to play (i.e., a screen instructing the player to insert game ball B into the second starting hole 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, and the player may not know what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem in that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of a jackpot game and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can communicate to the peripheral control board 1510 that the main control board 1310 will return to the destination by starting to drive the attacca solenoid 2414 and transitioning the jackpot opening 2005 from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big win game state (i.e., a screen indicating which round it is) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but can display a screen informing that it is a big win game state, that the attacca solenoid 2414 has started to be driven, and that the big win opening 2005 has been opened by the opening and closing member (for example, a screen saying "It's a big win. The big win opening is open. Please play so that the game ball B enters the big win opening"). In the above example, when the game state is favorable for the player, in which the game ball B can be received by the second starting port 2004, and a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 can be directed to return to the starting port. The peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 informing the player that the drive of the noid 2412 has begun, causing the movable piece to open and opening the second starting hole 2004 (for example, a screen conveying the message to the player, "The movable piece is open. Please play so that game ball B enters the second starting hole."), and instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play the game by placing game ball B in the second starting hole 2004 after power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on where to return the peripheral control board 1510 when power is restored after a momentary or power outage. Therefore, once power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or power outage. In other words, when a momentary or power outage occurs and then power is restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine will see that the system of the pachinko machine has frozen, which can prevent the player from mistaking this for a malfunction.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop, as described above. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38 except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control, so that only three commands, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

The power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the player to clear the RAM when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power recovery after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that instructs which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to from the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power recovery after a power outage or momentary interruption), and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it refers to and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type of pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, game specifications in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times (for example, 30 or 70 times) for the special pattern (so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of copyrights may be mixed. In such a case, the workers on the manufacturing line may not know which of the multiple types of copyrights (e.g., copyrights of works A, B, C, D, E, and F) the main control board 1310 is being sent to manufacture for which copyright of the work, or may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (e.g., copyright of the work F) even though the main control board 1310 is being sent to manufacture the main control board 1310 for one copyright (e.g., copyright of the work D) of the multiple types of copyrights.

For this reason, when main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, if the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed, the workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type it is (max type, middle type, sweet type, or any other type) or what the game specifications are (such as a game specification in which if a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1, the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game board 5 while still mixed. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright. This results in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the production line, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code that specifies the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes, as well as the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes (ST machine), it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the same copyright of the work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) and what the game specification is (a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, and can separate the main control boards 1310 for each work copyright and send them to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the work copyright to the game board 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[7-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 175A and Fig. 176.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control process described later, the time during which the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control process described later, as well as the time for which the payout control board 633 receives the various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) and the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payout owner ACK signal has been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. These various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a receives, for example, a detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402, a detection signal from the large winning hole sensor 2403, a detection signal from the role winning hole sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first V winning hole sensor 2514, a detection signal from the first losing hole sensor 2516, a detection signal from the second V winning hole sensor 2515, a detection signal from the third losing hole sensor 2518, an out sensor 664 (or the out left sensor 3032 and the out right sensor 3033), and a detection signal from the first V winning hole sensor 2514. The main control internal RAM reads the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402, and stores the corresponding start hole winning command classified as "other" in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as input information. The main control internal RAM reads the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402, and stores the corresponding start hole winning command classified as "other" in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the input states of all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing) are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second read is compared with the result of the first read. It is determined whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is determined again whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is determined again whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if the game ball B has not entered the game, or the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input process, the input states of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those for which empty terminal processing has been applied) are read twice in total, by comparing the first to third readings and the second to fourth readings, thereby making it possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and therefore, the detection signal from the normal winning port sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, the detection signal from the large winning port sensor 2403, the detection signal from the special winning port sensor 2513, the detection signal from the first V input It is possible to improve the reliability of the detection signal from the prize opening sensor 2514, the detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2516, the detection signal from the second V prize opening sensor 2515, the detection signal from the third losing opening sensor 2518, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the detection signal from the main frame open switch, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button 1311b, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below was successfully received by the payout control board 633.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing in step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to ground (GND) as a vacant terminal processing, so that its logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, whether the logical state of the input terminals that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW or not is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing in step S104. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logical state of the input terminal to which the idle terminal processing has been applied is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command classified as a notification display that notifies the user that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuitry of the main control MPU 1310a as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning/losing random number update process (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned pattern random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the winning pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning pattern, which are updated in the non-winning/losing random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the winning pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning pattern are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby increasing the randomness. In contrast, the pattern random numbers are random numbers related to winning/losing judgment (winning judgment), so the respective counters count up only each time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination and the random numbers for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum value to the maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is updated by the win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a ball counting process (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, when a detection signal from the left outlet sensor 3032 is input and the left outlet sensor 3032 detects a game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, and when a detection signal from the right outlet sensor 3033 is input and the right outlet sensor 3033 detects a game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008. That is, in the ball counting process, when the left outlet sensor 3032 detects a game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 and the right outlet sensor 3033 detects a game ball B collected by the outlet 1008, a calculation is performed to add a value of 2 to the value of the collected ball counter. The main control MPU 1310a stores the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, in an out ball count dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, and sets the output of a lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h and stores it in the output information storage area as output information. In addition, when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, each time the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 reaches 10, the main control MPU 1310a creates a ball collection command to inform the fact and stores it in the output information storage area as transmission information. In addition, when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the result of the calculation, reaches its maximum value (in this embodiment, a value of 65,535), and the main control MPU 1310a further adds (increments) the value of the recovered ball counter by a value of 1, the value of the recovered ball counter overflows and becomes 0, and the main control MPU 1310a performs a calculation to increment from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game ball B based on this input information is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the large prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the player of this fact, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal, which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command has been received normally, is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output command classified as "other" is created to inform the player of this fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this counter for determining the main prize ball number information output is calculated by reading input information from the input information memory area described above, and counting the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls B that have entered the various prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, the normal prize opening 2003, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, and the large prize opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as the ``various prize openings provided on the game board 5'').The value is stored and updated in the prize ball planned information memory area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control is read, and the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information read from the input information storage area described above based on the input information read from the input information storage area. When the value indicating the added number of balls exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the user of this fact and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information, and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control described above.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified as status indications (for example, the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information informing the payer control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a reshapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status indications (the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the winning ball is confirmed. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation cheat") is occurring, the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave cheat counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control side timer interrupt process), a radio wave irradiation cheat notification command classified as a notification display that informs the user that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process in step S112, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 2010, it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is occurring, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation goto is occurring in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the value of 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt period in which the fraud detection process performs the main control side timer interrupt process), a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that informs the user that a radio wave irradiation goto is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, this mechanism reliably detects and reports magnet gouges, helping game parlor staff and other attendants to discover magnet gouges at an early stage.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when an abnormal winning occurs at the large prize opening, such as when a detection signal is input from the large prize opening sensor 2403 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when game ball B enters the large prize opening 2005), an abnormal winning display command classified as an abnormal condition and a notification display is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a radio wave irradiation and/or a magnet is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected, whereas when neither a radio wave irradiation nor a magnet is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 to indicate that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. In addition, when an abnormal win at the large prize slot is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG may also be set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a launch permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is set. Specifically, based on the value of the above-mentioned fraud detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that no fraud has been detected, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to the launch permission logic and stores it in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value of 0 (a value of 1), that is, when it is determined that fraud has been detected, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) inverted from the launch permission logic, and stores it in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, when the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input and the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4, or when the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input and the main frame opening switch detects that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic, and stores it in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. The logic of the launch permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic as an initial value (default) from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power is restored) until the launch permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the special random number. It then determines whether the special random number (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (determines whether a jackpot game state will occur (called a "special lottery")), or it retrieves the value of the counter that updates the pattern random number and determines whether it matches any of the win type determination values pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM according to the jackpot type or small win type (determines the win type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are due to the first start hole sensor 3002, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance are created, whereas if the judgment result (lottery results) are due to the second start hole sensor 2402, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area. In addition, the special pattern variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and the output is stored as output information in the output information memory area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, large prize opening 1 open Nth time display command, large prize opening 1 closing display command, large prize opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, for example, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening/closing member is set, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the large prize opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is set to two. When there are 15 rounds, the output of a lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the 2 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; when there are 15 rounds, the output of a lighting signal to the 15 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the 15 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; and the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up a specified color to indicate whether or not a time reduction has occurred, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal winning port winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning port winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the normal winning port sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether the normal symbol has been hit described above is extracted and stored as normal winning port winning information in the normal winning port winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This regular prize opening winning information storage area has sections 0 to 3 (four sections), and regular prize opening winning information is stored in the order of section 0, section 1, section 2, and section 3. For example, if regular prize opening winning information is stored in sections 0 to 2 of the regular prize opening winning information storage, when a detection signal from the regular prize opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the regular prize opening winning information is stored in section 3 of the regular prize opening winning information storage.

The regular prize winning information stored in the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this regular prize winning information is set, the regular prize winning information in the 1st section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage, the regular prize winning information in the 2nd section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the regular prize winning information in the 3rd section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 2nd section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the 3rd section of the regular prize winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the normal prize winning information in the first section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the normal prize winning information in the second section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the second section of the normal prize winning information storage and the third section of the normal prize winning information storage become free areas. Here, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal prize winning information so that the total number of stored normal prize winning information is set as a reserved ball and the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the normal winning port winning process, the normal winning port winning information set in the working area of the RAM built in the main control is read, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol wins is determined from this read normal winning port winning information to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value previously stored in the ROM built in the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable piece. If the opening and closing operation is performed as a result of this determination, the movable piece will be in an open state, creating a game state in which the game ball B can be received by the second starting port 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won matches the normal symbol winning judgment value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won does not match the normal symbol winning judgment value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, the output of a light-up signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the regular lottery (the probability of winning the regular lottery) is 1 in 2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S117). This setting value confirmation display process, which will be described in detail later, reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 with a detection signal from the main frame opening switch, and detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 with a setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON with the setting key ON, and the setting key switch The process determines that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the setting key ON signal from the switch 1311a, and that the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, while the process determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch, and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not met. In the setting value confirmation display process, when the setting value display permission condition is met, the process sets the output of a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information, while when the setting value display permission condition is met, the process ends as it is and returns to the main routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the above-mentioned output information storage area from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the large winning port 2005 when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece, and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small jackpot information output signal, a special pattern table It outputs various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a start port winning information output signal, to the payout control board 633, outputs a launch permission signal set to launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, and outputs a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special winning 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special winning 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a big winning port 1 count display command corresponding to a big winning port count command based on a detection signal from the big winning port sensor 2403 when a game ball B that has entered the big winning port 2005 is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal winning 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test-related, and various other commands (for example, a command for displaying a status when the main control board 1310 detects that a ball has entered one of the various winning ports provided on the game board 5). A main prize ball number information output command that instructs the hall computer to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal as main prize ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 each time the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls B reaches 10 balls), and various commands classified into specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies the hall computer each time the number of game balls B collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10 balls, a setting change command that notifies the hall computer that a setting value has been changed, an error display command that notifies the hall computer that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable), a setting key ON operation command that notifies the hall computer that a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM to be described later, etc.) are stored. One packet of main circuit serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main serial transmission port built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs after power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.As main serial data, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command at power-on, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control power-on processing. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are transmitted.

Whenever the number of game balls B collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the same. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of game balls B collected at the outlet 1008 for each ball collection command received, and updates the ball collection information (information associating the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls B collected at the outlet 1008) with the updated date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). If the ball collection command cannot be received and the business hours of the game hall end and the power is cut off to the pachinko machine 1, the ball collection information associating the last counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls B collected at the outlet 1008) with the updated date and time is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on to start business at the game hall, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 creates ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) again from the day business started, and the ball collection information is stored and held as ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The counted value stored and held as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or it may be both the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day and the sum of the values counted up to that point.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control's built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT. Then, the main control's built-in WDT restarts counting time, which avoids the main control MPU 1310a being forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 175A, in order to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores these command in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. This is stored in the transmission information storage area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the game will be returned by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, which is a so-called frozen state, and the player is prevented from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 of the same processing shown in FIG. 176, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. M, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, and then transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

[7-4. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is carried out in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175A.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting value, as shown in FIG. 178 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read or extracted, but when extracting the setting value, the extracted setting value is set in a specified area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control internal RAM as numerical values and calculating their sum, and is the same process as the checksum calculation performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A.

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (when power is off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176 (step S204). In step S204, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determinations in steps S204 and S206 are the same as the determinations in steps S30 and S32, respectively, in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG has been stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control's power-off processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control's power-off processing has not been completed normally.

In the judgment of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the judgment of step S206, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, when the main control side power off processing is judged not to have ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). Here, the "normal range" is a value that the set value can be changed to, and in this embodiment, it is preset to values of set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the judgment of step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally at the time of power off, so that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the judgment of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the values of setting value 1 to setting value 6, which are within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S208, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting value is not within the normal range, it sets the setting value acquired in step S200 to the initial value, setting value 1 (step S210). In step S208, it is determined whether the setting value acquired in step S200 and stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is one of the normal ranges of setting value 1 to setting value 6. However, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, without making the determination in step S208, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it may proceed to the processing in step S210 and set the setting value acquired in step S200 to the initial value of setting value 1.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is equal to the value 1, i.e., that the processing during power failure on the main control side has been completed normally, or when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S208 that the value is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a turn-on signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214).

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switching button 1311b has been operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b and determining whether a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b has been input. When a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b has been input, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b has been operated, whereas when a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b has not been input, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b has not been operated.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button 1311b has been operated, it performs a calculation to add (increment) the setting value by 1, updating it (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, the setting value set in this predetermined area is added (incremented) by 1.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S220).

Following step S220, or in the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the setting switch button 1311b has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a on (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a on to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it on a second time, and this is done based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the decision key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the decision key has been operated, but when the decision key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the decision key has not been operated.

In the judgment of step S222, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key has not been operated, it returns to the judgment of step S216 again and determines whether the setting switch button 1311b has been operated. In the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button 1311b has been operated, it performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, performs the judgment of step S222, and when it determines that the decision key has not been operated, it returns to the judgment of step S216 again, and when the setting switch button 1311b is operated until the decision key is operated, the setting value is added by one each time it is operated and updated, and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting switch button 1311b is not operated, the setting value updated by the operation of the setting switch button 1311b immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. In addition, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and is then restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or momentary interruption is not stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, so it is discarded and the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the Enter key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a specific area when the setting value is acquired in step S200, the setting value set in this specific area is updated, so this updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and is then restored after the processing of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the Enter key was operated before the power outage or momentary interruption occurred is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S226). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been turned OFF by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and the main control MPU 1310a judges that the setting key has been turned OFF when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, and judges that the setting key has not been turned OFF when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the process returns to step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g, and hides the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit a change to the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when a change to the setting value is permitted, and to a value of 0 when a change to the setting value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0, no further changes to the setting value are permitted.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that judged in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the judgment of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 is any value within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not an abnormal value, and uses the setting value as is when it is judged to be within the normal range.

When the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S233 that the range is normal, it performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets the transmission information (step S236), then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circuit serial data (step S238), and ends this routine. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same processing as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177. Here, in the serial communication initialization in step S234, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 transmits the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data before the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176 is reserved and set, and the setting change command is used to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed. The setting change command is a command that notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that the value is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display process has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to play the game, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power off process has not ended normally when the power was cut off, it displays an error message to that effect, saying that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that they cannot be trusted). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

[7-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process carried out in step S117 of the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 or not (step S350), as shown in FIG. 179. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is set to 1 when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and to 0 when the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation.

In the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a value of 0, that is, when the setting value is not being displayed, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S352). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and, based on this input information, detects a detection signal from the main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and the setting key switch 13 11a and the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined to have the setting key ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, whereas the detection signal from the main frame open switch determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is determined to have the setting key ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not met.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are not met, it ends this routine. On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to a value of 1 to display the setting value for confirmation (step S354), and then acquires the current setting value (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that in step S208 and step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 215, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the judgment of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value acquired in step S356 (i.e., the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not abnormal, and uses the setting value as is when it is judged to be within the normal range.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360), and ends this routine. This ON operation command for the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. The ON operation command for the setting key is a command that notifies the start of this routine, which is the setting value confirmation display process (i.e., that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is to be confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting key ON operation command, it updates the setting key ON operation history information (information that associates the fact that the setting value was confirmed with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the CPU is in a state where a predetermined specific history information display permission condition is established, which allows the display of specific history information such as the ball collection history information, the setting value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key. When this predetermined specific history information display permission condition is established, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 controls the switching from the image that has been displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays the specific history information by a person who checks the specific history information by rotating the touch operation unit 302 and pressing the pressing operation unit 303, and displays it in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not the value 0 (is the value 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the decision key ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, and this is done by an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, whereas when an OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the judgment of step S362, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it ends this routine as it is, whereas if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to a value of 0 so as not to display the setting value (step S364), then stops the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g, and makes the acquired setting value invisible to the setting display 1310g (step S366), then creates an OFF operation command for the setting key and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, sets the OFF operation command for the setting key (step S368), and ends this routine. This OFF operation command for the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. The setting key OFF operation command is a command that indicates that this routine, the setting value confirmation display process, has ended (i.e., that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM have been confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-mentioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not met. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling the display of the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it controls the display to switch back to the image that was displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the value is not within the normal range, it sets the interrupt not to be permitted (step S370). This setting stops the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which is repeated every 4 ms.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control's built-in WDT is continually cleared (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control's built-in WDT to be continually cleared, but since the main control's built-in WDT cannot be stopped once it has been started, by continuing to clear the main control's built-in WDT, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control's built-in WDT clears the timekeeping, and the main control's built-in WDT restarts the timekeeping, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. In addition, this infinite loop causes the state in which the error display process has ended to be maintained, resulting in a state in which the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power off processing did not end normally when the power was cut off, it will display an error message to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

[7-6. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 175A, in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 175A (in step S240 in the setting change process shown in Fig. 178), and in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in Fig. 179.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the launch permission signal as shown in FIG. 180 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, it can convey that the launch is permitted, whereas when the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it can convey that the launch is stopped (not permitted).

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175A or in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175A (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176, so it cannot perform the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and cannot perform the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process. The launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function, so that when power is restored, the main control output circuit with reset function is reset, and the logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, when the error display processing, which is this routine, is started as one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A or as one of the processes performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in step S400 to reliably prevent the game ball B from being launched even after the power is restored and the error display processing, which is this routine, is started, and outputs it from the output terminal of the specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

When this routine, the error display process, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S357 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179 that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176, but the interrupt non-permission setting has already been performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179 before the error display process, which is this routine, is started. Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is ended, as described above, an infinite loop is entered, and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a, in step S400, sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being launched when there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, and outputs it from the output terminal of the specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication is output to the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial serial communication settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets the transmission information (step S408), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (error display command) set in step S406 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data (step S410), and ends this routine.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 178 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 178 and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177. When the error display processing routine, which is the process performed in step S33 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A, the process performed in step S37 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A (the process performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 178), and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 179, respectively, starts and ends, as described above, it enters an infinite loop, and due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has ended is maintained, making it impossible to progress in the game at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410.

The error display command is a command that notifies the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it updates the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of receipt) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, it controls the display of a message image in white text on a blue background in the display area of the performance display device 1600, saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant.", and controls the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant" to be forcibly set to maximum volume and played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker 622, etc.) regardless of the volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The process of notifying a RAM error using an error display command is the process with the highest priority, and if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command to notify another error, it gives top priority to notifying a RAM error.

[8. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in Fig. 173 will be described with reference to Figs. 181 to 184. Fig. 181 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, Fig. 182 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process in Fig. 181, Fig. 183 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following Fig. 182, and Fig. 184 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

[8-1. Processing when power is turned on for the dispensing control unit]
First, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in Fig. 181 to Fig. 183. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the payout control MPU interrupt. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is performed with priority.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, the various input ports and various output ports of the dispensing control MPU are set, etc.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer process 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination in step S508 is based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU judges whether the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This judgment is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, it is judged that the operation signal does not command the RAM clear to be performed and the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, whereas when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is judged that the operation signal commands the RAM clear to be performed and the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S512, when the payout control MPU judges that the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to the payout of, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the actual ball count PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area) stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, and allows, for example, writing (storing) or reading payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when terminating a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a stack is added. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to an initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are added to the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading the stacks in order from the last stacked to the first stacked.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 when the payout information is to be cleared and to 0 when the payout information is not to be cleared.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout control MPU determines not to erase the payout information, it calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (when power is off) described below (step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value was stored and retained in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout control unit power-off process has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power-off process has not been completed normally.

In the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when it is judged that the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. This sets information to be used for various processes based on the payout information related to the payout, such as the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the actual ball count PB, the number of drive commands DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC, which are stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the mismatch counter reset judgment time, which is stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, when the payout control MPU judges that the payout information should be erased, or in the judgment of step S526, when the payout control MPU judges that the checksum values do not match, or in the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value of 1 (is a value of 0), that is, when the payout control unit power off processing has not been completed normally, the payout control MPU clears the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt period when the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S538). This setting causes the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S536, i.e., every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting the values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, as described below, and is set to 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

In the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to the value 0, that is, that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals based on this information are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area stores various information such as payout master ACK information indicating that various payout-related commands (prize ball commands and self-check commands) from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, drive information for controlling the drive of the payout motor 584, prize ball number information indicating the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, when various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of a specified output port, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, or outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 every time the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls B).

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter is provided to determine whether or not to output prize ball number information. This prize ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below, and the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown in the figure for monitoring the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls B actually paid out by this payout motor 584, the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the value is updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is read from this prize ball information storage area, and when the value of this read counter for determining the output of prize ball number information exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls), a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM mentioned above), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the dispensing control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, the main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described below have been normally received by the main control board 1310, and the like are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball-stuck determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball-stuck state has occurred due to the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the skip determination time, which is set when the payout blade 589 is not in a fixed position, the full-ball determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls B, the ball of game ball B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 due to a detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574, and the ball-stuck state are determined as a determination condition when the ball-stuck state is determined by the ball-stuck state. In addition to managing the time of the ball run-out determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the number of game balls B received and dispensed by the ball receiving portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the time management unit 100 also manages the time of the mismatch counter reset determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether to reset the mismatch counter INCC, which is used to monitor whether the dispensing of game balls B that are inconsistent due to a mismatch between the number of game balls B received and dispensed by the ball receiving portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589 and the number of balls actually detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591 is being repeated. For example, when the ball jamming determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so that the ball jamming determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the ball jamming determination time is accurately measured by the subtraction result becoming a value of 0. Note that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit have been input. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, information to be used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payout, such as payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area).

With this process, for example, even if there is a momentary or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. As a result, even if there is a momentary or power outage while the payout operation of game ball B by the payout device 580 is being performed and the payout operation cannot be continued due to the momentary or power outage, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that game balls B can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, when the payout control MPU is exchanging various signals with the CR unit during CR communication processing while paying out game balls B to the upper tray 201 or lower tray 202, if there is an instantaneous or power outage that cuts off the exchange of various signals with the CR unit and makes it impossible to continue paying out game balls B, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous or power outage that are stored as payout backup information. This makes it possible to continue exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the instantaneous or power outage when power is restored, and to continue paying out game balls B.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is interrupted or stopped, when power is restored it is restored to the state it was in immediately before the interruption or stoppage, and the various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not altered by the effects of the interruption or stoppage. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

In addition, the various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, and if this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to a logic state of a PRDY signal that indicates, for example, that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, a determination is made as to whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH based on the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is operating abnormally, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, as a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which informs the CR unit that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible when there is no communication with the CR unit, is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

In this way, in the CR communication process, at the next timer interrupt after power is restored, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area, and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of game ball B by the payout device 580 was in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power outage, the state is restored when power is restored, so that at an extremely early stage after power is restored, a PRDY signal that notifies the CR unit that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and it is possible to inform the CR unit that the payout operation of game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting an unnecessary loaned ball request signal BRDY at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when its logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible, whereas when its logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as LOW to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is not possible. The logic state of the EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended, is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected or not, is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball exhaustion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball exhaustion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether the lower tray 202 described above is full of stored game balls B based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and whether the number of game balls B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is a predetermined number or more based on a detection signal from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574. For example, the determination of whether the lower tray 202 is full with the stored game balls B is performed by using a timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the current full tank and ball out check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank and ball out check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned full tank determination time. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes a value of 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time has arrived, the full tank and ball out check process determines whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower tray 202 is determined to be full with the stored game balls B, and full tank information that conveys this is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls B, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

The determination of whether the number of game balls B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number also uses a timer interrupt period of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is ON in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous full tank and out-of-ball check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned out-of-ball determination time. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area, whereas when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is OFF, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information informing that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not received normally, connection abnormality information informing that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, it sets the operation of prize balls, loan balls, ball removal, ball jamming, etc., judges the retry operation, and monitors the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball out information, when the number of game balls B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands classified as state displays (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on this various information and sent to the main control board 1310. For example, when ball out information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not a predetermined number or more, a frame state 1 command is created and sent to the main control board 1310 based on this ball out information.

Following step S566, the dispensing control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the values A, B and C are set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in that order, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539, where the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value A, and in step S540 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, in step S542 it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, in step S544 it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0, in step S546 it sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value B, and in step S548 In step S539, port output processing is performed, in step S550, port input processing is performed, in step S552, timer update processing is performed, in step S554, CR communication processing is performed, in step S556, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed, in step S558, command reception processing is performed, in step S560, command analysis processing is performed, in step S562, main operation setting processing is performed, in step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed, in step S566, command transmission processing is performed, in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing in steps S539 to S568 is referred to as the "dispensing control unit main processing."

The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. This causes the time required for processing by the payout control MPU to vary. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 as a priority, which indicates that various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. This ensures that the payout control MPU has enough processing time to perform other variable processing.

On the other hand, when the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S570). This setting prevents the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below from being performed, prevents writing to the dispensing control built-in RAM, and protects the dispensing information described above from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game ball B.

Following step S574, the dispensing control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clearing is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the storage area for the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value, as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). This setting prohibits access to the payout control built-in RAM, making writing and reading impossible, and protects the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S582, the dispensing control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to values A, B, and C in that order. This causes the dispensing control MPU to be reset, after which the dispensing control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "dispensing control unit power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the payout control unit performs power-on processing.

In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528 it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by doubly checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[8-2. Dispense control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figures 181 to 183.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 184, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the dispensing control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This restoration switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596) and ends this routine.

[9. Various control processes of peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 173 will be described with reference to FIG. 185 to FIG. 189. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board power-on process, FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board V blank interrupt process, FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt process, FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control board power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control board V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control board command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control board power failure notice signal interrupt process. In this embodiment, the priority order of the interrupt process is set to the peripheral control board power failure notice signal interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control board command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control board V blank interrupt process.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 integrates the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip.

[9-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 185. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 185. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like are performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is in a state where it can receive various commands, such as commands related to the control of game presentations and commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data (information that specifies the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, is in a state where it is possible to accept the screen data. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value of 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to the value 1 (it is equal to the value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1. By repeating such determinations, the CPU enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below is started, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has been started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed, thereby initializing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs performance operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the presentation operation unit 300 monitors the rotation direction of the touch operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation unit 303 based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which various information (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300, and the like) is set, which is acquired based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the contact detection sensor main body 358, the press detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374, and the thrust force detection sensor 375 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300") provided in the presentation operation unit 300, and appropriately determines whether or not to reflect the rotation direction of the touch operation unit 302 and the operation state of the press operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the performance operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the schedule data for light emission mode generation is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This allows the volume and brightness adjustments to be reflected in real time, and the performance will proceed with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as part of the performance operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a luminance designation value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value. When the lamp palette setting process is executed during the performance, and a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated to the set luminance designation value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table. The brightness designation value is a value that can set one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, and the normal palette value and special palette value, which will be described later, are each preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. A player (or a staff member or other attendant at the game hall) can set one brightness designation value ranging from the 1st brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, by operating the operable performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303).

For example, when a player (or a staff member or other attendant at an amusement hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise and the current brightness is set to a first brightness designated value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are increased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve) from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, whereas when the player rotates the contact operation unit 302 counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are decreased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve) from the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness designated value. When the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) rotates the touch operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress, and at this time, the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the desired brightness by operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) operates the touch operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the positions from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is displayed, so that the degree of the desired brightness of the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can be visually shown as an image. In addition, in this embodiment, the 14th brightness designated value is set as the initial value (default).

Normal palette values are set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated as direct light. For normal palette values, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, and the palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) within the range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which are the brightness specification values described above.

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above. Similarly, for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above.

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is the maximum palette value (100%) that is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and the palette value (50%) is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for a specific decorative board (not shown) (an LED that is dazzling to the player) among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that are irradiated as indirect light. Unlike normal palette values, the special palette value has only one level, and among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value, rather than using the normal palette value set for the luminance of the LED used as direct light, and the first luminance designation value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designation value, which is the minimum luminance (light off), is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th luminance designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%) as the lowest luminance at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized, and the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value within the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a brightness specification value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall) according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, while the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall) according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is too dazzling and operates the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness to a lower level, even if the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) in conjunction with this, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), so the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light is set.

Furthermore, without having to individually set the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame for the LEDs used as direct light, the programmer designing the light emission patterns can simply set the light emission patterns in accordance with the flow of the presentation, watch the flow of the presentation based on the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, and then set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or that a slightly darker brightness would produce a better presentation effect), and set the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards, thereby extremely easily changing the balance of the overall light emission patterns. In other words, even if a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the operable performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a single brightness designated value ranging from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for a specific decorative board, while a maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for other decorative boards, so that brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark) that have been set.

Furthermore, although it is more difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, it is possible to set the brightness for LEDs used as indirect light using special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (i.e., independent of the normal palette values). As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by the special palette values, while the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by the normal palette values, making it easy to adjust the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation processing described later, and outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600. In addition, in the display data output processing, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen's worth (one frame's worth) is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but although so-called frame drops occur, it is a mechanism that allows the performance of music, sound effects, and other performance sounds that match various performances to be prioritized from various speakers such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") by the sound data output processing described later.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, in the sound data creation processing described below, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various performances are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, is to be output among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC among the sound command data that indicates sound data for musical effects, sound effects, and other sound effects, and sound data for alert sounds and notification sounds, arranged in chronological order to make up the sound generation schedule data.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time the process itself is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, it is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below, and the received various commands are analyzed, and the random numbers used for various settings of the performance (for example, random numbers used for performances related to reserved read-ahead) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis process, the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are analyzed. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and based on the analyzed various commands, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emission modes from the peripheral control ROM and executes the lamp palette setting process. When a player (or a staff member of the game hall or other attendant) operates the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value that is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated to the set luminance designation value and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command to instruct the start of a start port winning performance, a normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a variable pattern command to instruct the start of a variable performance such as the variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special patterns, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, or a large prize port 1 count display command output each time a game ball B is received in the large prize port 2005, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the received command analysis processing analyzes the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The various commands include various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to jackpots, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to notices, etc. based on the received command, and reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and schedule data for electrical drive source, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the lottery result and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a performance based on the lottery results.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the performance display control unit 1512, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission mode of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating the drive mode of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen in chronological order, and specifies the order of the screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data that specifies the light emission mode of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and specifies the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for indicating which of the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to use, and a track number for indicating which of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified as notification displays, the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and when that abnormality is resolved, it automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality notification. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that a certain abnormality has occurred because another abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality but before the abnormality has been resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and updates the year, month, and date, which are the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, based on the updated time information.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When the VDP of the peripheral control IC receives screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, it reads image data from the SDRAM based on the received screen data and generates one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame's worth) in the built-in VRAM to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is identified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to the various speakers from the output channel set in this sound data creation process. This allows sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various performances to be played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and then converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven values and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to the volume set to board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for bass on the body frame 4. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for bass on the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. In addition to the sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC also incorporate sound data for notification sounds to alert parlor staff and the like of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the volume adjustment switch. The sub-volume value of the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effects operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern), By operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is converted into seven levels of board volume values from 0 to 6, and by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch depending on the operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the board volume value is increased or decreased to set the board volume, and the sub-volume value of the performance sound can be adjusted.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that actually flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, and serialize this amplified effect sound to output it as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume of the sound coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound, the sound data of the sound embedded in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC and the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound embedded in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, and this amplified sound is serialized and recorded. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is actually the volume that is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, to briefly explain the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and the like of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the special sound is being played from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for bass on the main frame 4, first the sub-volume value of the track in which the special sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this special sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum are combined, and the volume of this combined special sound and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value which will actually be the volume played from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for bass on the main frame 4, and these amplified special sound and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound that actually comes out of the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, the special sound is muted, so no sound comes out of the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 side, but the special sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation described above.

In this embodiment, the alarm sound is played for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds) from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. When this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound that is being played according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly set to mute is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as the sub-volume value (at this time, if the volume of the sound is adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound operation unit 300, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted sound), and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, when an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. However, since this muted sound effects progress according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started, but start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started playing and progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the point where the predetermined period of time had elapsed.

Also, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC can control the sound source of the peripheral control IC by a program to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member of the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the music and sound effects played from the various speakers will be reduced in volume, but the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent staff members of the game hall from being unable to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM for backup.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004, sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 to initialize it, and repeats the judgment of step S1006 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In other words, in step S1006, the CPU waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1008 to S1038, and returns to step S1004 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, the processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

In this peripheral control unit regular processing, first, in step S1008, the value of the regular processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 to indicate that the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed, then in step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing is executed, and in step S1036, the processing of steps S1014, ..., and step S1036 is executed, and finally, in step S1038, the regular processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate that the execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing is completed, and the processing is completed. The peripheral control unit regular processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when the V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control IC's CPU is in a state where it can accept screen data, is input from the peripheral control IC's VDP to the peripheral control IC's CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[9-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is described, which is executed when a V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to receive screen data, is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control IC's CPU judges whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, as shown in Fig. 186 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 185 is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

In the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, it ends this routine. On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, it sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 1 (step S1050) and ends this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 185 is turned on. In step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process), the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process) of FIG. 185, the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state process cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 185, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[9-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 185, will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times (step S1100), as shown in Fig. 187. As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 185 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed repeatedly every approximately 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts occur in sequence.

In the judgment of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, when it judges that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started, it ends this routine as it is. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing as the priority of the interrupt processing, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, it adds (increments) the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, step S1102. By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, has been executed, increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motor, solenoid, and other electric drive sources are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed. As a result, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, the electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and the electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided on the game board 5) are driven according to the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable object information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5, and set this in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable objects provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 and acquiring the movable positions.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a performance operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are input from various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the touch operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the performance sounds output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM. Note that in this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set to different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 185, various processes related to the performance in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the performance display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[9-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, this triggers the CPU to take in 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main serial data into a reception buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC, and when this taking is completed, this triggers an interrupt to be generated and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 188. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, when it is judged that it is within the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC takes in the 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC (step S1202) and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been taken out from the reception buffer, and takes a value of 1 when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, a value of 2 when the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, and a value of 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to the value 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is not equal to the value 3, that is, that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, has not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, in that order, it sets a 1-byte receive period timer (step S1208) and ends this routine. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, that is, when it judges that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls B from the island equipment of the game hall, and when game balls B rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in a noise-affected environment.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status assigned to the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main serial data in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, it ends this routine.

[9-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process will be described, which is executed when a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in Fig. 189, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this judgment, the timer started in step S1300 judges whether 2 microseconds have passed. In the judgment of step S1304, when 2 microseconds have not passed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 and judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it judges that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine, but if it judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the judgment of step S1304, it judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started.

In the judgment of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started, it performs power saving processing (step S1306). In this power saving processing, the backlight of the performance display device 1600 is turned off, excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are turned off, etc. are sequentially executed to reduce the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, and stable operation is ensured for the period of 20 milliseconds during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands currently being sent by the main control board 1310, the CPU waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process for the command (step S1310). In this backup process, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, it returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues to determine indefinitely whether the power outage warning signal has been input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it is no longer able to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process of step S1314 is not executed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, so that it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[10. Return operation of movable performance unit to origin]
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a power switch 630a (see Figure 7) which turns on and off the power supply provided from the island equipment in the amusement hall, but in reality, in the amusement hall, the power switch 630a of the pachinko machine 1 itself is always kept in the "on" position, and the power supply and cut-off for all the pachinko machines 1 in the island equipment is collectively controlled by turning on and off a master power switch (not shown) provided in the island equipment.
On the other hand, while there have been many pachinko machines equipped with a mechanical movable presentation unit 3600 as a visual presentation device, in recent years, the movable presentation unit 3600 has tended to be larger, with multiple movable parts, in order to increase the interest of players. If the movable part, which is the highlight of the machine, does not operate normally during play, it will lead to a decrease in the interest of players, so a specified operation (the operation of moving the movable part and returning it to the origin position; hereinafter, the origin return operation) is checked on a daily basis during opening preparations when power is supplied.
However, sometimes, for some reason, the operation of the moving parts stops or becomes unstable during play. In such cases, one of the recovery methods is to reset the microprocessor implemented in the multiple control units that control the pachinko machine 1. However, since it is not possible to reset this directly, it is necessary to temporarily turn the power supplied to the pachinko machine 1 on and off. At this time, the door frame 3 and main frame 4 of the target pachinko machine 1 are opened together and the power switch 630a is turned on and off; however, if the origin return operation begins immediately after power is supplied, there is a risk that the vibration caused by the origin return operation of the movable part may cause excessive stress to the hinge parts ([upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 + upper main frame hinge member 510 + upper door frame hinge assembly 120] and [lower outer frame hinge member 60 + lower main frame hinge assembly 520 + lower door frame hinge member 125], especially the lower [lower outer frame hinge member 60 + lower main frame hinge assembly 520 + lower door frame hinge member 125]) supporting the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

[10-1. Home return start switch]
Therefore, in an embodiment, in a pachinko machine 1 (gaming machine) equipped with a movable presentation unit 3600 on a game board 5, main frame 4, door frame 3, etc., as shown in FIG. 129, for example, a return to origin start switch 3610 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 which controls the movable presentation unit 3600, and when power is supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185 is executed first, the state of this return to origin start switch 3610 is checked, and when the state of the return to origin start switch 3610 is in an operated state (first state: for example, a protruding state), the return to origin operation is restricted so as not to be executed.
The timing for executing the origin return operation of the movable performance unit 3600 is triggered by the return (change) of the origin return start switch 3610 from the first state in which it is operated back to the state before the operation (second state: for example, immersion state). Specifically, the movable performance unit 3600 is prevented from operating as long as the origin return start switch 3610 is set to the first state, and the movable performance unit 3600 is operated when it is set to the second state.
In this case, the return-to-origin operation of the movable performance unit 3600 begins when the origin return start switch 3610 is pressed to change from the first state to the second state, but since the main frame 4 and door frame 3 can be closed immediately, the stress caused by vibrations on the hinge portion when the movable performance unit 3600 is in operation can be greatly reduced.

Furthermore, the return-to-origin operation may be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the state of the return-to-origin start switch 3610 has changed from the operated state (first state) to the state before operation (second state).
For example, the approximate time required to close the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 after returning the origin return start switch 3610 to the second state (which may be an estimated value based on experience or an average measured value obtained through experiments) is set, and the origin return operation is executed with a delay of that time.
In this way, the return-to-origin operation of the movable performance unit 3600 is performed with the main frame 4 and door frame 3 almost closed, effectively reducing the stress caused by vibrations that occur to the hinge portion when the movable performance unit 3600 is in operation.
Furthermore, it is even better if the open/closed state of the main frame 4 is notified by voice, as this draws attention to the fact that the main frame 4 is in the open state.

In the embodiment, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pilot lamp 3620 as a display device for visualizing the state of the origin return start switch 3610, and when the origin return start switch 3610 is switched from the first state to the second state, the display of the pilot lamp 3620 is made different from that in the first state. Specifically, an LED is used for the pilot lamp 3620, and the pilot lamp 3620 is turned on in the first state in which the origin return operation is restricted, and turned off when the switch is switched to the second state. Alternatively, a multi-color LED may be used for the pilot lamp 3620, and the color of the LED may be changed between the first state and the second state. The pilot lamp 3620 may be installed anywhere as long as it is visible from the rear side of the main body frame 4, but it may be installed near the origin return start switch 3610 as shown in FIG. 129, or preferably, it may be installed near the edge of the hinge part side that opens and closes the main body frame 4, taking into account the influence of external light, etc.
The state of the origin return start switch 3610 can be recognized by the change in the pilot lamp 3620, so the timing of execution of the origin return operation can be clearly recognized visually. This allows the work of supplying power with the main body frame 4 in the open state to be performed calmly without worrying about the state of the moving parts, thereby reducing work errors.

Furthermore, in the case of an embodiment in which a main frame opening switch 4b (see Figure 269) is provided which detects the open/closed state of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the state of the main frame opening/closing switch 4b may also be checked in addition to the state of the origin return start switch 3610 to start the origin return operation.
In such a case, the return operation of the movable part to its original position is not performed reliably until the main body frame 4 is closed, so that the stress applied to the hinge part can be minimized.

[10-2. Home return start switch and setting key switch]
In the above embodiment, in a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a movable presentation unit 3600 on the game board 5, main frame 4, door frame 3, etc., a method was described in which the timing of the start of the return-to-origin operation of the movable presentation unit 3600, which is executed by supplying power to the peripheral control board 1510 using the return-to-origin start switch 3610 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 of a control unit, such as the peripheral control unit 1500, is controlled (or set) depending on the situation. In the embodiment described next, a pachinko machine 1 in which multiple setting values related to the winning probability of a lottery that awards a player a predetermined benefit can be selectively changed, and a setting key switch 1311a for permitting such changes is provided on the control unit (main control unit 1300), is described in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the control unit is used as the return-to-origin start switch 3610 to execute the return-to-origin operation of the movable presentation unit 3600 depending on the situation.

The command set in the command reservation setting process to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in Fig. 176 described above is sent in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 in Fig. 177, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives this command, it executes the origin return operation of the movable performance unit 3600. In other words, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the movable performance unit 3600 executes the origin return operation for a predetermined time.
Next, in the main control side power-on processing, the states of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f are obtained and recorded. In the main control side timer interrupt processing, before executing the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in FIG. 177 described above, the recorded information of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f is confirmed, and the states of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f are determined to be in a state in which setting changes are permitted (setting key switch 1311a=origin If it is determined that the return start switch 3610 is in the first state as the return start switch 3610, the states of, for example, the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f are monitored again until the setting change operation is completed, and the transmission of the command set at power-on that was scheduled to be transmitted in step S120 of FIG. 177 is postponed until a state in which the setting change is not permitted is reached (the setting key switch 1311a=the return start switch 3610 is in the second state as the return start switch 3610).
This makes it possible to prevent the movable performance unit 3600 from returning to its origin until the setting change operation is completed, and by sending a command once the setting change operation is completed, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the command can initiate the return-to-origin operation of the movable performance unit 3600.

The setting value being changed can be checked on the setting display 1310g in FIG. 250, but the main control unit 1310 is provided with a base monitor 1310h in addition to the setting display 1310g, and the display of this base monitor 1310h can be switched to a display of setting changes by operating the setting key switch 1311a. That is, when functioning as the base monitor 1310h, all four 7-segment digits are used, and when functioning as a setting change, i.e., to display the setting value, the rightmost or leftmost 7-segment digit is used. This eliminates the need to provide an independent setting display 1310g, thereby reducing costs and allowing more room for component placement.

Also, even if the state of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f are obtained and the recorded information indicates a state that allows confirmation of the setting value, by monitoring the state of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f again and postponing the transmission of the command that was scheduled to be sent at power-on in step S120 of FIG. 177 until a state in which confirmation of the setting value is not permitted, it is possible to similarly prevent the return-to-origin operation of the movable performance unit 3600 from being performed until confirmation of the setting value is complete, as described above. This is because confirmation of the setting value is performed with the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 in the open state, in the same manner as changing the setting value.

When the setting key switch 1311a is used as the origin return start switch 3610 as described above, when the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 are opened to perform a setting change operation, the origin return operation of the movable performance unit 3600 can be restricted until the setting change is completed, so there is no problem in that the vibrations that may occur when the movable performance unit 3600 performs the origin return operation cause the hand to become misaligned, making the setting change operation more difficult than necessary.

In addition, the reserved command may be sent immediately within the interrupt process, so that the peripheral control board 1510 starts the return-to-origin operation of the movable performance unit 3600 with a delay.
In this case, particularly in a pachinko machine 1 in which the movable performance unit 3600 has multiple moving parts, it is preferable to have the origin return operation performed sequentially starting with the moving parts with relatively light loads.
In this way, even if a sufficient time has been set for the setting change operation and the origin return operation starts after the time has been exceeded, the stress on the hinge portion can be somewhat alleviated until the door frame 3, etc. is closed.
Also, considering the purpose of the origin return operation, which is to check the operation of the movable part, it does not have to be the same as the performance operation during actual play, but it may be changed to a special operation check specification in which the violent movements that occur during play are made a little more gentle, thereby reducing stress on the hinge part.

Next, in the above explanation, the origin return operation of the movable performance unit 3600 is regulated or started depending on the state of the setting key switch 1311a as the origin return start switch 3610. However, as in step S18A of Figure 175B, if the detection signal of the main frame open switch 4b indicates closure, it is preferable to proceed to the next process regardless of the state of the setting key switch 1311a, that is, without going through step S18B which checks the state of the setting key switch 1311a.
In the first place, the rear of the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed, and it is installed back-to-back on both sides of the island equipment, so there is concern that a new method of damage could be used, in which an appropriate gap is created in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rear of the pachinko machine 1 on the other side is accessed through the gap across the island equipment, and the settings of the pachinko machine 1 on the other side are then illegally changed. Therefore, if it is made impossible to change the settings when the detection signal of the main frame opening switch 4b indicates that it is closed, it will be possible to effectively counter the illegal method of changing the settings from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 across the island equipment.

If the detection signal of the main frame open switch 4b indicates open in step S18A of FIG. 175B, then the state of the setting key switch 1311a is checked (FIG. 175B, step S18B). If the state of the setting key switch 1311a indicates a state in which changing the setting value is permitted, then it is determined that an arcade staff member permitted to change the setting has set the setting key switch 1311a to a state in which it is permitted with the intention of changing the setting, and the setting change operation is permitted, but the state of the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be in the first state as the origin return start switch 3610, and the origin return operation of the movable presentation unit 3600 is restricted.

Incidentally, in the processing shown in step 28, step S30, and step 32 of FIG. 175B, a case may be considered in which it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM and the error display processing of step S33 is executed, in which the power supplied to the control unit alone is temporarily unable to be supplied, for example, such that the processing when the main control side power is cut off is restored without being executed after step 58 of FIG. 176.
At this time, after the control unit confirms that there is an abnormality in the RAM, it sends a command indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM to the performance control device in step S33 of Figure 175B.When the performance control device receives this and recognizes it as a new command, it uses a speaker or display device to notify the user that there is an abnormality in the RAM.
After that, the control unit executes a loop process, so it is necessary to turn the power back on to recover. However, since the setting values also become suspicious, an abnormality check process for the RAM (again) is performed within the setting change process shown in FIG. 178.
In the processes of steps S202, S204, and S206, the same RAM abnormality check process as in steps S28, S30, and S32 in Fig. 175B is executed. At this time, if the acquired setting value is an abnormal value, a low setting value (setting value 1) is set as the initial value.
In step S200 of FIG. 178, the value in the area in which the setting value is recorded is obtained, and it is determined whether the value is appropriate, and then it is determined whether to maintain the value as is or to reset it to the initial value described above. However, the initial value may be set directly without executing steps S200 and S208.

If such an event occurs immediately after power is turned on and a return-to-origin operation is being performed, the performance control device will receive a command from the control unit indicating that the RAM is abnormal, and will use the speaker or display device (performance display device 1600 or base monitor 1310h) to notify the user that the RAM is abnormal, and will interrupt the return-to-origin operation. However, when power is supplied again by turning the power back on, the notification using the speaker or display device will stop, and the initial screen will be displayed on the display device via a preparation screen, and the interrupted return-to-origin operation of the movable performance unit 3600 will be restarted from the beginning by receiving the command sent from the control unit when power is turned on.

If the RAM still has an abnormality even after the power is turned on again, the fact that the RAM is abnormal is notified using a speaker or a display device.
At this time, the base monitor 1310h switches to an abnormality notification function that notifies the user that there is an abnormality in the RAM, which is separate from its original display function as a base monitor and its display function for changing settings, and, for example, lights up all four 7-segment digits.
Furthermore, if an abnormality such as an interruption occurs in the movable performance unit 3600, a special display different from the usual display is displayed on the display device (base monitor 1310h) to notify the user that there is an abnormality in the movable performance unit 3600 (for example, an interruption in the return-to-origin operation).

In this embodiment, the abnormality in the RAM is prioritized as the more serious abnormality when using the speaker for notification, and so this is given priority and is notified for a specified period of time. Therefore, notification by the speaker regarding an abnormality in the movable performance unit 3600 continues after the end of the specified notification period. Note that the notification period for the abnormality in the movable performance unit 3600 using the speaker may be set to start from the point where the notification period ends, or may be set to start from the point where the abnormality is confirmed, and notification of the RAM abnormality may be started with the sound muted or the volume suppressed. In the latter case, if the notification period is set to be longer than the period for notifying the RAM abnormality, when the notification period for the RAM abnormality ends, the sound muted or suppressed volume can be set to the volume value for the notification to notify the remaining time.

Here, the origin return operation first checks whether there are signals from all the detection sensors installed at the origin position of each movable performance unit 3600, but especially when there are multiple movable parts and some of them do not detect signals, there is a risk that the movable parts may come into contact with each other if the driving order is incorrect. Therefore, the performance control device outputs drive signals to the motors in a predetermined order that does not cause contact. For example, in a pachinko machine 1 having three movable parts 3600g (not shown, but each is called movable part A, movable part B, and movable part C), if the confirmation result of the detection sensor signal shows that there is no detection signal for movable part B, it is determined that movable part B is not at the origin position, and a drive signal is output in the origin direction to the motor that drives movable part B before movable parts A and C. Then, when the detection signal is confirmed, it is determined that all movable parts are at the origin position and a predetermined origin return operation is started. Conversely, if the detection signal cannot be confirmed even after repeatedly outputting the drive signal, it is determined that there is an abnormality in movable part B, and the abnormality is notified using a speaker or a display device. Furthermore, if movable part B is not detected even when it is in the origin position, this may be due to a malfunction of the detection sensor, and therefore, particularly when the performance display device 1600 is used as the display device, it is possible to specifically identify and report an error such as "movable part B abnormality," or, when the base monitor 1310h is used as the display device, it is possible to use all seven segments of four digits to identify and report an error number such as "E.01.C."

In addition, the RAM clear switch 1310f is also used as a switch used to change the setting change operation, and this RAM clear switch 1310f is also used as a trigger for executing RAM clear in the dispensing control board 633.
Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the abnormality determination process executed by the payout control board 633, it is also used as a transmission trigger to send commands to the sub-control board via the main control board 1310X in order to reset the information stored in the RAM regarding payout control, identify abnormal areas, and provide voice guidance on how to repair them.
In addition, if there is an abnormality in the RAM of the payout control board 633, a RAM clear process is executed, just as in the case of a RAM abnormality in the main control board 1310X. However, in the pachinko machine 1 described in this embodiment, since this is related to the function of changing the settings of the main control board 1310X, that is, changing the internal information, to be able to be switched between advantageous and disadvantageous, when a RAM clear process is executed in the case of a RAM abnormality in the payout control board 633, it is preferable to notify the main control board 1310X that it has been executed.
In this case, the base monitor 1310h is used to notify the user of the abnormality in a different display from that when the main control RAM is abnormal. Then, the game is stopped in the same manner, and the setting change process is executed again to restore the game.
As for the location of the RAM clear switch 1310f, it is preferable to mount it on the main control board 1310X within the board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, considering that the wiring, connectors, and other paths will be exposed.
Conversely, when installed on the dispensing control board 633 in the dispensing control board box 632 of the dispensing control unit 620d, it is only used as a trigger for resetting the information stored in RAM regarding dispensing control in the abnormality determination process executed by the dispensing control board 633, and for providing audio guidance on identifying abnormal areas and how to repair them, etc., and when comparing their roles, it is preferable to install it on the main control board 1310X.

Furthermore, in order to undergo a conformity inspection by an inspection agency before being introduced to the market, the main control board 1310X and the dispensing control board 633 must be equipped with connectors and I/F circuits for connection to the testing equipment of the inspection agency. However, these are only necessary equipment for the conformity inspection and are not used in mass-produced products. Therefore, the mass-produced main control unit 1300 and dispensing control unit 620d introduced to the market do not have connectors or I/F circuits for inspection.
Therefore, in the main control unit 1300 and the dispensing control unit 620d of this embodiment, the connectors and I/F circuits for inspection are provided around the base monitor 1310h or the base monitor 1310h that functions as a display of the setting value during the setting change operation. By doing so, a vacant space is created around the base monitor 1310h of the main control unit 1300 and the dispensing control unit 620d where the connectors and I/F circuits for inspection are not mounted, improving visibility, making it easier to detect tampering.

In addition, in the embodiment, when forming a base monitor 1310h that displays multiple digits (four digits in the embodiment), a single display that can display all digits in a row is not used, but rather, single-digit seven-segment displays are arranged side-by-side at a specified interval for the required number of digits. This makes it substantially more difficult to tamper with the display, since the mounting surface that is hidden and not exposed by the display is cut up into small digits.

The setting display utilizes the 7-segment display located closer to the hinge section among the four 7-segment displays, and the other three 7-segment displays are not used during the setting change operation and are turned off.
When the setting key switch 1311a is switched from a state in which setting changes are permitted to a state in which they are not permitted, the setting display displays for a predetermined period of time the setting information last switched over by the setting change operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and then switches to the display function as the base monitor 1310h.
This allows an appropriate distance to be provided from the eye position of a worker standing on the open side of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the set value can be easily seen by workers of a wide range of ages, especially elderly workers.
In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of incorrect inputs of setting values due to misreading, since it is less susceptible to the effects of lighting in the game hall or the decorative lighting of other pachinko machines 1. Even if it becomes necessary to check the setting value of the setting display during business hours, since the setting display is located near the hinge part of the main body frame 4, it can be easily hidden from the view of players.

[10-3. Technical thought α]
The above embodiment includes a technical idea α for the following problem.

[10-3-1. Issues]
Gaming machines are fitted with a power switch on the rear side of the main frame that turns on and off the power supplied from the island equipment in the amusement hall; however, in reality, in amusement halls, the power switches on the gaming machines themselves are usually left in the "on" position, and the main power switch on the island equipment is turned on and off to supply or cut off power to all of the gaming machines in that island equipment at the same time.

On the other hand, while there have traditionally been many machines that have been equipped with mechanical movable presentation units as visual presentation devices, in recent years there has been a trend for movable presentation units to become larger, with multiple moving parts, in order to further increase the interest of players.
If the moving parts, which are the main attraction of the machine, do not function properly during play, it will cause a loss of interest for the players, so the specified operation (the operation of moving the moving parts and returning them to their original position, hereafter referred to as the "return to original position operation") is checked on a daily basis during opening preparations when the power is supplied. However, sometimes the operation of the moving parts stops or becomes unstable for some reason during play. In such cases, one of the recovery methods is to reset the microprocessors implemented in the multiple control units that control the gaming machine, but since it is not possible to reset them directly, it is sometimes necessary to turn the power switch of the gaming machine on and off to turn off the power and then turn it back on. In this case, the door frame and main frame of the gaming machine in question are both opened and the power switch is operated.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the above-mentioned return-to-origin operation begins as soon as power is supplied, and the moving part of the performance moving unit moves, so there is a risk that the vibrations caused by the movement of the moving part could cause excessive stress on the hinge parts that support the door frame and main body frame.

This technical idea was developed in consideration of the above, and its purpose is to provide an amusement machine that can reduce the stress applied to the hinge parts of the door frame and main body frame.

[10-3-2-α1. Technical thought α1]
The outer frame and
a main body frame supported on the outer frame so as to be capable of being opened and closed like a single-leaf door;
A game board that is detachably attached to the main body frame;
A movable performance unit having a movable part that moves from an origin position, performs a predetermined operation, and then returns to the origin position;
A control unit for controlling the movable performance unit;
In the gaming machine, when power is supplied to the control unit, the movable part moves and performs a predetermined return operation to an origin,
a return-to-origin start switch operable from the rear side of the body frame when the body frame is in an open state;
When power is supplied to the control unit, if the origin return start switch is in a first state, the origin return operation of the movable part is restricted;
A gaming machine characterized in that the origin return operation of the movable part is performed on the condition that the origin return start switch has changed from the first state to the second state.
While the origin return start switch is in the first state, the origin return operation of the movable part is restricted, and the origin return operation of the movable part is performed by changing the origin return start switch to the second state. This avoids the risk of additional vibration caused by the return-to-origin operation of the movable part when the hinge part is in the open state, which is when the greatest load is applied to the hinge part.

[10-3-2-α2. Technical thought α2]
The present invention is characterized in that a display device is provided that displays a state of the origin return start switch, and the display on the display device is changed when the origin return start switch is switched from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine as described in technical idea α1.
The state of the origin return start switch can be recognized by the change in the display on the display device, so the timing of the execution of the origin return operation can be clearly recognized visually. This allows the main body frame to be opened and power to be supplied. Since work can be performed calmly without worrying about the condition of moving parts, work errors can be reduced.

[10-3-2-α3. Technical thought α3]
A detection means capable of detecting an open/closed state of the main body frame is provided, and the origin return start switch changes from the first state to the second state and the detection means detects the closed state of the main body frame. The gaming machine according to technical idea α1 or α2, characterized in that the return operation of the movable part to its original position is performed in response to a trigger.
In this gaming machine, the return operation of the movable part to its original position is carried out after the main body frame is closed, so that the stress applied to the hinge part can be minimized.

[10-3-2-α4. Technical thought α4]
The origin return start switch is changed from the first state to the second state, and the origin return operation is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change. Amusement machine.
In this gaming machine, the origin return operation of the movable part is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the origin return start switch was switched to the second state, and the main body frame is in a closed state or in a closed state until the execution of the operation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the origin return operation of the movable part when the main body frame is widely open, and it is possible to reduce the stress applied to the hinge part due to the vibration caused by the origin return operation.

[10-3-2-α5. Technical thought α5]
a display device that displays the state of the origin return start switch,
The control unit is configured to interrupt the return-to-origin operation of the movable part,
A gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas α1 to α4, characterized in that the state in which the origin return operation has been interrupted is notified by a display on the display device.
In this gaming machine, the display device that displays the state of the origin return start switch is used to notify the user of the interruption of the origin return operation of the movable part, so that the number of display devices can be reduced, thereby reducing costs. Of course, this also allows for more leeway in component placement.

[10-3-3. Effects of technical idea α]
It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing stress applied to the hinge parts of the door frame and main body frame.

[11. Control process of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. Fig. 190 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 190, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start gate passing process, such as obtaining a first special random number of the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S232), on the condition that the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the first start gate 2002) (step S231). Also, on the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2402 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the second start gate 2004) (step S233), the main control MPU 1310a executes a second start gate passing process, such as obtaining a second special random number of the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that control is being performed in the jackpot game state, is set (step S235), and if the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed to control the jackpot game state. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display state when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops indicates a state suggesting a "15R jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot winning hole 2005 according to the 15R jackpot game state. In addition, when the result indicates a "2R jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot winning hole 2005 according to the 2R jackpot game state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the large prize opening 2005, the process of setting the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating the time-saving state, and is set when the 2R jackpot game state based on the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops varying during the time-saving state indicates a "2R jackpot", and when the 15R jackpot game state is ended during the time-saving state and non-time-saving state. The time-saving flag is then reset during the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 201 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time-saving count counter becomes "0".

The time-saving counter indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will continue as the number of times the time-saving state will continue. When the time-saving state is controlled after the end of a jackpot game state, the number of times the time-saving state will continue is set when the jackpot game state ends. The time-saving counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0". However, if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0", it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 201 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown (the counter value is returned to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, a first special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S238) on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is "0" (step S237), and a second special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops is executed (step S239) on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is not "0" (step S237). Thus, in this example, it is configured so that the variable display of the second special pattern is executed preferentially when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0".

Figure 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the processing of step S231, if it is determined that the first start hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and game ball B has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 191, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the processing of step S241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the first reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S242). If it is determined in the process of this step S242 that the first reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the process of the step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number obtained in the step S241 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S241, whether the display result of the variable display of the first special pattern is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then terminates the process.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S242 that the first reserved memory number is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on game ball B entering the first starting hole 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command indicating the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 1 storage command 0-4)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 1 storage command 0-4).

Figure 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned performance pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, it compares the random numbers acquired in the above-mentioned step S241, specifically the first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, and variable random number, with a pre-determination table (not shown) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and if so, the type of jackpot, and if not, whether or not a reach performance will be executed as the game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, and the type of game performance to be executed (step S261).

Then, a pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and if so, the type of jackpot; if not, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the reserved memory number (reserved number counter value) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number. For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passing process, a first special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been obtained, and the first reserved memory number (first special reserved number counter value) (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp pre-determination information such as the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 where the start winning occurred, whether the display result of the variable display of the special pattern based on the start winning that occurred is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of game effect to be executed before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved memory area that stores pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special pattern.

The first reserved memory area has 1 to 4 memory areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command in order starting from the first (earliest) memory area. When the pre-determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, if the peripheral control IC receives a pre-determination command, the notified pre-determination information is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the peripheral control IC receives a first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variable display of the first special pattern, the pre-determination information stored in the first memory area of the first reserved memory area is discarded according to the received first variation pattern command, and the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area (the pre-determination information stored in the reserved memory area is shifted). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special pattern is stored in a manner that allows the order in which the reservation of the start of the variable display occurred to be specified, and is discarded in order starting from the earliest pre-determination information.

In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectancy (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the on-hold display is newly output or when the on-hold display is shifted in response to the on-hold consumption.

Figure 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the processing of step S233, if it is determined that the second start hole sensor 2402 is in the ON state and game ball B has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 193, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the second reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "1" based on this counter value (step S252). If it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S253 to S254 are executed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in the above step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S252 that the second reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on game ball B entering the second starting hole 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-1)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-1).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on game ball B entering the first starting hole 2002 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on game ball B entering the second starting hole 2004 is set to "1". Note that the second starting hole 2004 allows a large number of game balls B to enter during the time-saving state, and the change time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state. Therefore, even if the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is set to "1", a long period will continue in which the change display of the second special symbol is not performed, or a long period will continue in which the second reserved memory number is at its upper limit, preventing a disadvantageous state for the player in which the player does not get a chance to win a jackpot even if game ball B enters the second starting hole 2004.

Figure 194 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for the judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process operations will be selectively executed depending on the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special symbol normal process (step S280) in which a first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number.
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process of determining the display mode when the first special symbol's variable control is stopped is performed based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol's variable control is stopped.
3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special symbol on the performance display device 1600.
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S283) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.
5. A first special symbol stop process (step S284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed during the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 175A).

Figure 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 195, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S301. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the reserved state as the processing of step S302, the random number stored in the first memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (e.g., first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the same RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning are stored in the first (earliest) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reservation of variable display control of the first special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reservation of variable display control is released in order starting from the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S305, a winning determination process is performed, which is a lottery process for determining whether or not the jackpot will be won, based on the first special random number of the first special symbol that has been read out. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stopping symbol setting process (step S281), this process ends.

Figure 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the winning determination table shown in FIG. 222(A) with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special pattern normal processing is being performed, and the second special random number read in the second special pattern normal processing when the second special pattern normal processing is being performed) (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 197(A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). In the hit determination table which is referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random numbers are associated with one type of first special random number so that it matches a hit determination value indicating a hit, three types of first special random numbers different from the hit determination value match a hit determination value indicating a small hit, and 315 types of first special random numbers match a miss determination value indicating a miss (probability of a hit: 1 in 319, probability of a small hit: 3 in 319). In this example, in the second special symbol process, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number corresponds to a hit determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won a big hit, 144 types of second special random numbers different from the hit determination value correspond to a small hit determination value indicating that a small hit has been won, and 174 types of second special random numbers correspond to a miss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned miss (probability of a big hit: 1 in 319, probability of a small hit: 144 in 319). In other words, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured so that the probability of a small hit is higher than that of the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, and the player is placed in a more favorable state when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning at the second start hole 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the start winning at the first start hole 2002 is executed.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the hit determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special symbol) (step S312), it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S313), and ends the hit determination process.

In addition, if a comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special pattern) determines that a small hit has occurred (step S314), a small hit flag is set indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a small hit (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither a big win nor a small win has been won, i.e., if it is determined that the win has been a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach judgment table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach judgment table for the time-saving state used when the game state is in the time-saving state, and a reach judgment table for the non-time-saving state used when the game state is not in the time-saving state. In the reach judgment table for the time-saving state, the reach random numbers are associated with one type of reach random number so that it matches a reach judgment value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match a reach judgment value indicating a non-reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table for the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers, including the same reach random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the time-saving state, are associated with the above-mentioned reach random numbers so that they match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will not occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time-saving state, the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur are higher than in the time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is a miss (step S317) based on the comparison between the selected reach judgment table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and ends the process (step S318).

Figure 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a determines the type of jackpot by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in FIG. 197 (B), and determines the state when the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is stopped (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S322).

in particular,
1. A 15R jackpot in which an opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to close the large winning opening 2005 after the large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large winning opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have entered the large winning opening 2005, thereby controlling to a 15R jackpot game state in which game ball B can (easily) enter the large winning opening 2005, and controlling to a time-saving state that ends if a jackpot is not achieved within 77 times of the variable display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the jackpot game state ends. 2. A 2R jackpot is determined from one of two types of jackpots: a 2R jackpot in which game ball B can (easily) enter the large prize opening 2005 after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have entered the large prize opening 2005, by repeating an opening/closing pattern twice (two rounds); a 2R jackpot in which game ball B can (easily) enter the large prize opening 2005 if the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have entered the large prize opening 2005, a 2R jackpot in which the time-shortening state is ended if a jackpot is not obtained before 77 executions of the varying display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the jackpot game state ends if the time-shortening state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state; and a 2R jackpot in which the time-shortening state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends if the time-shortening state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state.

The jackpot pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number has 8 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a 15R jackpot, and 192 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a 2R jackpot. In other words, when a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a jackpot, there is a 4% probability of a 15R jackpot, and a 96% probability of a 2R jackpot. Similarly, the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number has 196 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a 15R jackpot, and 4 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a 2R jackpot. In other words, when a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a jackpot, there is a 98% probability of a 15R jackpot, and a 2% probability of a 2R jackpot. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the probability of determining a 15R jackpot is higher in the jackpot pattern determination table which is compared to the second pattern random number than in the jackpot pattern determination table which is compared to the first pattern random number, and the player is in a more advantageous state when the variable display of the second special pattern based on the start winning entry into the second start hole 2004 is executed than the variable display of the first special pattern based on the start winning entry into the first start hole 2002.

In addition, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping pattern according to the type of jackpot is determined as the manner in which the first special pattern stops. Specifically, if a 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern. In addition, in the second special pattern stopping pattern setting process (not shown), if a 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, and if a 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

In addition, if the big win flag is not set in step S131, but the small win flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small win by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the small win pattern determination table shown in FIG. 197 (C), and determines the state when the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of big win is stopped (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S325).

in particular,
1. A first small win in which the opening and closing pattern in which the special feature winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the state to a small win game in which the game ball B can (easily) enter the special feature winning port 2006, and all game balls B that enter the special feature winning port 2006 during the small win game state are guided to the first loss port 2535, thereby making it difficult for the game ball B to be received by the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008. 2. An opening and closing pattern in which the special feature winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closed is executed nine times to control the game state to a small win game state in which the game ball B can (easily) enter the special feature winning port 2006, and one of the game balls B that has entered the special feature winning port 2006 during the small win game state is guided to the third sorting device 2550 after the special feature winning port 2006 is closed, thereby making it possible for the game ball B to be accepted by the second V winning port 2008, and when the game ball B is accepted by the second V winning port 2008, the game state is changed to the small win game state. A second small win 3. After that, after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have entered the large prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to control the game state to a 15R big prize game state in which it is possible (easy) for game ball B to enter the large prize opening 2005, and if a big prize is not achieved within 77 times of the changing display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the end of the big prize game state, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state which is terminated. By executing an opening and closing pattern nine times in which the special prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closed, the game is controlled to a small win game state in which the game ball B can (easily) enter the special prize winning port 2006, and one of the game balls B that entered the special prize winning port 2006 during the small win game state is guided to the first V prize winning port 2007 after the special prize winning port 2006 is closed, and based on the game ball B being accepted by the first V prize winning port 2007, the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) after the small win game state. or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have entered the large prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to control the game to a 15R large prize game state in which it is possible (easy) for game ball B to enter the large prize opening 2005, and if a large prize is not obtained within 77 times of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the end of the large prize game state, the game is controlled to a time-saving state which ends, and a third small prize is determined to be one of three types of small prizes.

In addition, the small win pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number is assigned 199 judgment values in the case of a second small win, and 1 judgment value in the case of a third small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 99.5% probability of a second small win, a 0.5% probability of a third small win, and no first small win. On the other hand, the small win pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number is assigned 20 judgment values in the case of a first small win, 130 judgment values in the case of a second small win, and 50 judgment values in the case of a third small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% probability of a first small win, a 65% probability of a second small win, and a 25% probability of a third small win. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the small win pattern determination table compared to the second pattern random number is configured to increase the probability of determining a third small win that will always result in a 15R big win game state after the small win game state ends by guiding one of the game balls B that have entered the special winning hole 2006 to the first V winning hole 2007, compared to the small win pattern determination table compared to the first pattern random number, and is configured to be in a more advantageous state for the player when the variable display of the second special pattern based on the start winning at the second starting hole 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special pattern based on the start winning at the first starting hole 2002.

In addition, when the type of small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of small win is determined as the mode of the first special pattern when it stops. Specifically, if the second small win is determined, the second small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, and if the third small win is determined, the third small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern. In addition, in the second special pattern stop pattern setting process (not shown), if the first small win is determined, the first small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, if the second small win is determined, the second small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, and if the third small win is determined, the third small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern.

If neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a losing symbol (step S327). After the determination process for the stop symbol has been performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the form of the stopped symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S328. Then, as the process of step S329, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), and this process ends.

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and change pattern command (changingly displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns and displaying them stationary in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may also be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and displayed stationary at the same time)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the mode (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation stops to be a small win pattern ("final battle") if a small win is identified from the received judgment result notification command, a 2R jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern of "0" to "9") if a 2R jackpot is identified, and a 15R jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern of "0" to "9") if a 15R jackpot is identified. In addition, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns from "0" to "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined, and the display of the determined stop pattern is controlled on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game performance ends).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the time-saving state can be controlled after the jackpot game state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times, but the time-saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the transition to the time-saving state is controlled. Specifically, if the time-saving state is controlled after the jackpot game state and a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, two) occur thereafter, the state may be controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpot game states. Also, even if the number of jackpots that occur is less than the predetermined number, the state may be controlled to the non-time-saving state during the jackpot game state, and the time-saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot game state.

Figure 199 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 199, if the big win flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a big win corresponding to the type of big win determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342); if the small win flag is set (step S343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small win corresponding to the type of small win determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344); if the reach flag is set (step S345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346); if neither the big win flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if it is a normal miss (miss without executing the reach performance), the variation pattern table at the time of miss (not shown) is selected (step S347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number). In addition, multiple variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variable display control of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is stored in a form associated with the variable random number, respectively, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment result based on the special random number and the pattern random number with the variable random number read in step S302 of the first special pattern normal processing, and obtains the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). As a result, a lottery process is performed for the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in this example, the variable pattern table during a reach is set to determine the type of reach performance to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with a variable random number. For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation of a jackpot game state increases.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, the next step S351 is to determine whether the counter value of the time-saving counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0". If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving counter is "0" (step S353). If the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag is set (step S354), indicating that the time-saving control is to be ended.

If the process in step S351 determines that the time-saving counter has a counter value of "0," or if the process in step S353 determines that the time-saving counter is not "0," the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol change process (step S283), the process ends.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table when a loss occurs, the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 1 second in the time-saving state, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), while the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time-saving state, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), so that the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern is set. In other words, the fluctuation pattern when a loss occurs selected in the time-saving state has the fluctuation time information of the special pattern set so that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special pattern is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern when a loss occurs selected in the non-time-saving state.

Figure 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 200, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S282) is set as the process of step S371. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

Figure 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stopping process (step S284).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display of the functional display unit 1400 as the process of step S381, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time-saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag (step S384) and also resets the time-saving flag (step S385). This ends the time-saving control (control of the time-saving state) and starts non-time-saving control (control of the normal state) when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has been performed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example).

When the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to start (step S387), and sets the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (the time to display the jackpot game start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed to set the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in a jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot counter is decremented by one for each round executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed and controls to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described below, the pre-opening process (step S401) and the during-opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot count counter reaches "0", and when the round ends in the during-opening process (step S402), the jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 and, based on the jackpot count reaching "0", the process moves to the post-opening process (step S403) to end the jackpot game.

Then, a jackpot execution flag is set to indicate that the jackpot game is being executed (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared for each type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set.

In addition, the jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is reset when the jackpot game ends, specifically when the post-opening large prize opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A) has completed the opening/closing control of the large prize opening 2005 according to the type of jackpot (for example, an opening/closing control that repeats an opening/closing pattern twice or fifteen times to close the large prize opening 2005 after it has been opened for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that ten game balls B have entered the large prize opening 2005) in accordance with the type of jackpot (all rounds that can be executed during the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is prevented from being executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric device control process (step S114), while the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Also, when the big win flag is not set (step S386), if the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small win start command indicating that a small win game is to be started (step S391), and sets the waiting time until the start of the small win game (the time to display the fact that a small win game is to be started, etc.) in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that a small win game is being executed is set (step S393). The small win start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small win. In step S391, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command, third small win start command) according to the type of small win (first small win, second small win, third small win) is set. As a result, the presentation of the small win game according to the type of small win specified by the small win start command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command, third small win start command) according to the type of small win (first small win, second small win, third small win) is set.

The small win execution flag, which indicates that a small win game is being executed, is reset when the small win game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the role winning opening 2006 according to the type of small win is completed in the small win in-progress process (step S411) of the small win control process (step S236A) described later (for example, the opening and closing control in which the role winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is repeated two or nine times). By resetting the small win execution flag, the small win control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114), while the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are made executable.

In addition, if the small win flag is not set, i.e., if a miss occurs, the waiting time until the next variable display of the special symbol begins (the time during which the static special symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S394), and the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 ends this processing when it updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S395).

Figure 202 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. A pre-opening process (step S401) for waiting until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game will move to the jackpot game state based on the fact that the state of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display stops becomes a jackpot symbol, or for waiting until the next round starts.
2. A process (step S402) during which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open based on the fact that the mode of the special symbol when the variable display stops becomes a big win symbol, or the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open based on the fact that the next round is about to start, and the large prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have entered the large prize opening 2005.
3. A post-opening process of waiting until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game state has ended when all rounds have ended (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is manipulated in the processing of step S42 to indicate that the pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. In addition, in the processing during opening of the jackpot opening (step S402), at the start of a round in which the jackpot opening 2005 is controlled to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and at the end of a round in which the jackpot opening 2005 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game presentation corresponding to the number of rounds specified by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

Figure 203 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small hit process, one of the following two processes is selectively executed depending on the small hit process flag.

1. Small win start process (step S410) for executing a setting process for starting a small win game state
2. Small win processing (step S411) for monitoring the entry and release time of game ball B during the small win game state

The small win process flag is manipulated in the processing of step S42 to indicate that the small win start processing (step S410) should be performed. Also, when the entry of game ball B into a specific area is detected during the small win processing, the big win execution flag is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big win game state (15 rounds in this example) is set in the big win counter, and the processing ends. This allows the big win game state to start following the small win game state.

Figure 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric device control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that game ball B has passed through the normal winning hole 2003, as shown in FIG. 204, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes normal winning hole winning processing in step S802, such as first obtaining a normal random number for the normal pattern from the random number counter and storing this in the normal pattern reserved memory area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal pattern process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal pattern process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation processing that waits until the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805)
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S806) for stopping the variable display of the normal pattern so that the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400.
5. When the result of the lottery process for the state when the variable control of the normal pattern is stopped indicates a state that suggests a "normal pattern hit", the second start opening door 2411 moves backward to allow the second start opening 2004 to receive the game ball B. A normal electric role opening process (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed during the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 175A).

[12. Playing in a small win game state]
Next, the game in the small win game state will be described. As described above, in this example, when the result of the variable display of the special pattern is a small win, the opening and closing pattern in which the special prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed a predetermined number of times to control the small win game state, and the small win game state is terminated when all the game balls B that entered the special prize winning port 2006 during the small win game state and were detected by the special prize winning port sensor 2513 are detected by any of the first loss port sensor 2516, the third loss port sensor 2518, the first V prize winning port sensor 2514, and the second V prize winning port sensor 2515, that is, when they are discharged from the special prize winning port 2006 to the rear of the game board 5. In addition, when a game ball B that enters the device winning port 2006 during a small win game state is accepted by the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 and detected by the first V winning port sensor 2514 or the second V winning port sensor 2515, the game state is controlled to a large win game state after the small win game state, and when a game ball B that enters the device winning port 2006 during a small win game state is accepted by the first miss port 2535 or the third miss port 2555 and detected by the first miss port sensor 2516 or the third miss port sensor 2518, the game state is controlled to a normal state or a time-saving state depending on the control state before the small win after the small win game state.

As described above, in this example, the game is controlled to one of the following small win game states: a first small win in which all game balls B that have entered the special feature winning port 2006 are controlled to be guided to the first losing port 2535; a second small win in which one of the game balls B that have entered the special feature winning port 2006 is controlled to be guided to the third distribution device 2550 and then circulated around the third distribution table 2554 before being accepted into either the second V winning port 2008 or the two third losing ports 2555; and a third small win in which one of the game balls B that have entered the special feature winning port 2006 is controlled to be guided to the first V winning port 2007.

In addition, in the first small win, the number of times the device winning port 2006 is opened and closed is less than in the second and third small wins, and in addition, all of the game balls B that have entered the device winning port 2006 are guided to the first miss port 2535, which is the closest to the device winning port 2006, and detected by the first miss port sensor 2516, so the execution period of the small win game state (the period from when the small win game state starts to when it ends) is short, and in the third small win, one of the game balls B that have entered the device winning port 2006 is guided to the first V winning port 2007, which is the second closest in distance from the device winning port 2006 after the first miss port 2535, and detected by the first V winning port sensor 2514, so the execution period of the small win game state is second only to the first small win. On the other hand, in the second small win, one of the game balls B that entered the special feature winning port 2006 is guided to the third distribution device 2550, which is the farthest from the special feature winning port 2006, and the game ball B guided to the third distribution device 2550 is circulated within the third distribution table 2554, after which the game ball B received by the second V winning port 2008 is detected by the second V winning port sensor 2515, and the game ball B received by the third loss port 2555 is detected by the third loss port sensor 2518. Therefore, of the three types of small wins, the execution period of the small win game state is the longest.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the rate at which a second small hit will occur if a small hit is determined based on the first special random number is set high, and in the normal state, a second small hit is executed in most cases, whereas in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state, the rate at which a third small hit will occur if a small hit is determined based on the second special random number is set higher than in the normal state, and in the time-saving state, a third small hit is executed at a rate of once for every four small hits.

That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if a game ball B is received in the second V winning port 2008 during a small win game state, the game is controlled to transition to a time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, after the 15R big win game state. Therefore, one of the game balls B that entered the accessory winning port 2006 during the small win game state is circulated in the third distribution table 2554 to be received in the second V winning port 2008 or the third loss port 255. On the other hand, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state, even if a game ball B is received in the second V winning port 2008 during a small win game state, the game is simply controlled to the time-saving state again after the 15R big win game state, so if one of the game balls B that entered the role winning port 2006 circulates inside the third distribution table 2554, it may actually cause a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state, the proportion of third small wins, which have a short execution period in the small win game state, is increased, so that the small win game state ends in a short time during the time-saving state.

Also, as described above, when the distribution rotor 2531 rotates from a storable state to an unstorable state in the third small win, the game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first hit passage 2536, contacts the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 in the closed state, is guided to the right, and enters the first V winning port 2007. Therefore, in the third small win, the game ball B allocated to the first hit passage 2536 by the distribution rotor 2531 rotating from a storable state to an unstorable state is discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time and becomes invisible to the player. In addition, the first V winning port 2007 can be entered when the sorting door 2544 advances above the second losing port 2543, but since the sorting door 2544 moves in the forward and backward directions, it is difficult to visually confirm the operating state. In other words, the existence of the sorting door 2544 is difficult for the player to recognize (hard to see), and the existence of the first V winning port 2007 is also difficult to recognize because the game ball B sorted to the first V winning port 2007 by the sorting door 2544 is discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time, so that the player does not easily notice that the game ball B has been guided to the first V winning port 2007, in other words, that the game ball B passes through the first V winning port 2007. In this way, when a third small win occurs during the time-saving state, it is difficult for the player to notice that game ball B has been guided to the first V winning port 2007, so that the small win game state can be executed without the player being aware of the lottery in the small win game state (whether game ball B is accepted into the V winning port (first V winning port 2007, second V winning port 2008)) and the 15R big win game state can be executed after the small win game state ends. This allows the small win game state and the 15R big win game state to occur in succession in a short period of time, increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the presentation of the small win game state executed by the presentation display device 1600 is different when a second small win occurs and game ball B is distributed to the third distribution device 2550, and when a third small win occurs and game ball B is distributed to the first V winning port 2007. Specifically, when a second small win occurs, a presentation is executed to make the player excited about whether game ball B distributed to the third distribution device 2550 will enter the second V winning port 2008 or the third loss port 2555, whereas when a third small win occurs, a presentation is executed that does not draw the player's attention to the rotation of the distribution rotor 2531 (for example, when a third small win occurs, the same notification is given as when a big win occurs (when a third small win occurs, a notification is given that it has been a big win instead of a small win, etc.), so that the player does not feel that he or she has won a small win). It is also possible to make it difficult for players to realize that a new game state is being played, and to execute a performance in which a prize ball acquisition opportunity similar to that of the small win game state is executed before the start of the big win game state as a special bonus chance in which prize balls different from those that can be acquired in the big win game state can be acquired. This increases the interest of players who recognize that they have won a 15R big win because a special bonus chance is executed before the start of the 15R big win game state and they can acquire prize balls different from those in the 15R big win game state.

In addition, if the arrival time to the V entry port is shorter for the third small win than for the second small win, the length of the path (first path) through which the game ball B guided by the second small win is accepted into the V entry port and the path (second path) through which the game ball B guided by the third small win is accepted into the V entry port are not limited to being longer in proportion to the arrival time to the V entry port, and if the arrival time to the V entry port is longer than the third small win, the path (first path) through which the game ball B guided by the second small win is accepted into the V entry port may be shorter than the path (second path) through which the game ball B guided by the third small win is accepted into the V entry port. For example, a deceleration means for decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball B may be provided in the first path so that the arrival time to the V entry port is longer than that of the game ball B passing through the second path.

In the above example, the machine is provided with multiple V winning ports, the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008, and in the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the normal state, one of the game balls B that have won the special winning port 2006 is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 having the second V winning port 2008, and in the variable display of the second special pattern executed in the time-saving state, one of the game balls B that have won the special winning port 2006 is guided to the first V winning port 2007, which is the second closest from the special winning port 2006 to the first losing port 2535, thereby varying the execution period of the small win game state. However, the distance to the V winning port and the number of V winning ports are not limited to those described above, and the technical concept of the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that has only one V winning port, for example. Specifically, for example, a second small win takes a long time to reach the V winning port because a means (obstacle, etc.) is provided to hinder or delay the acceptance of game ball B into the V winning port, such as game ball B being able to be accepted into the V winning port after circulating within the third distribution table 2554, and a third small win takes a short time to reach the V winning port because no means is provided to hinder or delay the acceptance of game ball B into the V winning port (it is sufficient that at least the number of such means is less than the second small win), and the execution ratio in the normal state (display of the first special symbol changing) and the time-saving state (display of the second special symbol changing) can be changed depending on the common time to reach the V winning port.

[12-1. Error notification during small win game state]
Next, an error notification in a small win game state will be described. In this example, the time until the game ball B that entered the prize winning hole 2006 is discharged in a small win game state is monitored, and if the game ball B is not discharged within a predetermined period of time, an error notification is performed.

Figure 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small win start process (step S411) described above. In the small win start process, a setting process is executed to start the small win game state.

When the small win start process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process or the second special symbol stop process (step S421). When the interval timer times out (step S422), that is, when the waiting time from when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stopped and displayed until the small win game state starts has elapsed, the elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time from when the small win game state starts is set to the initial value "0" (step S423).

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects opening/closing pattern data according to the type of small win being executed (first small win, second small win, third small win) (step S424), and starts controlling the role winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the selected opening/closing pattern data (step S425), and ends this processing when the above-mentioned small win process flag is updated (step S426) so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned small win processing (step S411). On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the processing ends without executing the subsequent processing.

The opening and closing pattern data is provided for each type of small win, and indicates the operation state of each of the special feature winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small win game state. In this example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the special feature winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening and closing pattern data corresponding to the type of small win selected in step S424, so that the special feature winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 operate in the manner shown in FIG. 151.

Figure 206 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small win processing (step S412) described above.

When the small win processing starts, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to the elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time since the start of the small win game state, and subtracts 1 from the timer value of the discharge monitoring timer if the discharge monitoring timer described below is set (step S431). When the elapsed timer is added by 1, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 reads out the opening/closing pattern data corresponding to the elapsed timer (the elapsed time from the start of the small win game state) from the opening/closing pattern data selected in step S424 of the small win start processing, and controls the opening/closing of the role winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on this read opening/closing pattern data (step S432).

In addition, if the reel winning opening sensor 2513 that detects game ball B received in the reel winning opening 2006 is on (step S433), that is, if game ball B has been received in the reel winning opening 2006, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 increments the remaining ball counter that counts the remaining balls that have not yet been discharged from the reel winning opening 2006 among the game balls B that have entered the reel winning opening 2006 by one (step S434).

When the first game ball B is received in the bonus winning opening 2006 after the small win game state has started (when the first game ball B enters) (step S435), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the expected longest period corresponding to each small win type in the discharge monitoring timer as the longest period expected until all game balls B that have entered the bonus winning opening 2006, including this game ball B, are discharged (step S436).

In this example, in the case of the first small win, the game ball B received in the role winning port 2006 is all allowed to enter the second losing port 2543 without being distributed to the first winning passage 2536 by the distribution rotor 2531, so that the shortest period among the three types of small wins is set as the expected longest period (for example, 10,000 ms). In the case of the second small win, one of the game balls B received in the role winning port 2006 is distributed to the first winning passage 2536 by the distribution rotor 2531, and the game ball B that entered the third distribution device 2550 through the first winning passage 2536 circulates inside the third distribution table 2554 and then enters either the second V winning port 2008 or one of the two third losing ports 2555, so that the longest period among the three types of small wins is set as the expected longest period (for example, 180,000 ms). In the case of a third small win, one of the game balls B received in the role winning port 2006 is distributed to the first winning passage 2536 by the distribution rotor 2531, but the game ball B that passed through the first winning passage 2536 is received in the second V winning port 2008 without entering the third distribution device 2550, so the expected longest period is set to be the second shortest period after the first small win (for example, 60,000 s).

The discharge monitoring timer is decremented in step S431, and if the discrepancy between the number of game balls B that have entered the prize-winning device opening 2006 and the number of game balls B that have been discharged from the prize-winning device opening 2006 continues even after the discharge monitoring timer times out, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has occurred.

In addition, the time elapsed from the start of the small win game state may be monitored, and if this elapsed time reaches the longest expected period according to the type of small win being executed, it may be determined that some abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring. Alternatively, the time elapsed from the first opening timing of the role winning port 2006 in the small win game state may be monitored, and if this elapsed time reaches the longest expected period according to the type of small win being executed, it may be determined that some abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring. the timing at which the distribution of the game ball B by the distribution rotor 2531 is actually performed (at the first small win, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) with the start of the small win game state, and the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces upward, and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF (non-energized) and the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces rightward (the timing of the first distribution operation of the distribution rotor 2531); at the second small win, After the timing of the distribution operation of the number, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces upward, and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF (non-energized) and the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces rightward (the timing of the second distribution operation of the distribution rotor 2531). In the third small win, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON again after the timing of the second distribution operation of the distribution rotor 2531. It is also possible to monitor the elapsed time from the timing when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF (non-energized) and the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 moves from a state in which it is in the ON (energized) state and faces upward to a state in which the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF (non-energized) and the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 moves to face rightward (the timing of the third distribution operation of the distribution rotor 2531), and if this elapsed time reaches the longest expected period according to the type of small win being executed, it is determined that some abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, when the discharge of game ball B accepted into the device winning opening 2006 is detected, that is, when game ball B is detected by any of the first losing opening sensor 2516, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and the third losing opening sensor 2518, which detect when the game ball B accepted into the device winning opening 2006 is discharged (step S437), the remaining ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S438).

Then, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is "0", i.e., whether the number of game balls B received by the special prize opening 2006 matches the number of game balls B discharged from the special prize opening 2006 (step S439), and if the remaining number counter is "0", it is determined that no abnormality or fraudulent activity has occurred and the process proceeds to step S442.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in order to determine whether any abnormality or fraud has occurred (step S440). As described above, the discharge monitoring timer indicates the remaining period of the expected longest period set for each small win type as the longest period expected from the start of the small win game state until all game balls B are discharged from the role winning port 2006. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process ends without executing any further processes. As a result, when the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114) of the main control side timer interrupt process is executed again, the small win process is executed and the remaining ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out.

In addition, if the remaining ball counter is not "0" and the discharge monitoring timer times out in step S440, it is determined that an abnormality or fraud has occurred, a discharge error is notified (step S441), and the small win processing is terminated. Discharge error notifications include an error display on the performance display device 1600, output of a warning sound from the main frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc., and lighting or blinking in a predetermined manner by lamps and LEDs provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3, etc. In this example, a message such as "Discharge abnormality" is displayed in a part of the performance display device 1600, and output from the main frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. is not performed. That is, since the majority of cases where the remaining ball counter is not "0" indicate minor abnormalities such as the game ball B that entered the role winning opening 2006 not being discharged, no display is made to notify the player of an abnormality in the gaming machine, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable or uneasy. After the discharge error notification is made in step S441, the small win processing is terminated without updating the small win process flag, so that the small win processing is executed again the next time the special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114) of the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. That is, the discharge error notification is executed without ending the small win game state until all the game balls B received in the role winning opening 2006 are discharged or the information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a is completely erased (reset) by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f by the gaming store clerk.

If it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is "0", it is determined whether game ball B has entered the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 (step S442). If game ball B has not entered the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 in step S442, that is, if game ball B has entered the first loss port 2535 or the third loss port 2555 and is detected by the first loss port sensor 2516 or the third loss port sensor 2518, a small win end command is set (step S443) that instructs the execution of a performance at the end of the small win game state, and this process is terminated when the small win process flag is updated (step S447) so that the process is transferred to the small win start process (step S411).

If the game ball B enters the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 and is detected by the first V winning port sensor 2514 or the second V winning port sensor 2515 in step S442, the waiting time until the start of the big win game is set in the interval timer (step S444), and then the small win in progress flag is reset and the big win in progress flag is set (step S445). In addition, a V winning big win start command is set (step S446) which instructs the execution of the performance at the start of the big win game state based on the reception of the game ball B into the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008, and this process is terminated when the small win process flag is updated (step S447) so that the process is transferred to the small win start process (step S411).

In this way, in this example, when game ball B is received in the role winning opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is incremented by 1, and each time game ball B is discharged from the role winning opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is decremented by 1, so that the number of game balls B remaining without being discharged from the role winning opening 2006 (center member 2500) can be grasped. In addition, the period (assumed maximum period) until the discharge error notification is executed is made different depending on the type of small win, in other words, the allocation destination of game ball B, and in the third small win in which game ball B that has passed through the first hit passage 2536 is received by the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the third distribution device 2550, the period (assumed maximum period) until the discharge error notification is executed is shorter than the second small win in which game ball B enters the third distribution device 2550 and circulates within the third distribution table 2554. In other words, the smaller the win, the shorter the time (distance) it takes to reach the V winning hole, so the shorter the period until an ejection error notification is issued.

Normally, no game balls B remain in the bonus prize winning opening 2006, so if game balls B remain in the bonus prize winning opening 2006 for a long period of time, it can be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) has occurred. Also, if it is detected that more game balls B have been discharged than the number of game balls B that have entered the bonus prize winning opening 2006, it can be determined that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity being engaged in to illegally allow game balls B to enter the bonus prize winning opening 2006. The pachinko machine 1 of this example monitors for the occurrence of such abnormalities or fraudulent activity, and issues a discharge error alert if such activity is suspected.

In addition, in this example, even after an ejection error is notified based on the ejection monitoring timer timing out when the remaining ball counter is not "0" due to detection that game ball B remains in the special prize opening 2006 or that more game balls B have been ejected than the game balls B that entered the special prize opening 2006, the small win process is executed each time the main control side timer interrupt process is executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter without stopping the game, and if the value of the remaining ball counter becomes "0", that is, if the state has returned to normal, the system automatically returns to a state in which it determines whether game ball B has entered the first V prize opening 2007 and the second V prize opening 2008, and ends the small win game state.

In this example, even if the value of the remaining ball counter is not "0" after the discharge error notification is executed in step S441 of the small win processing, if a more serious abnormality occurs, the error notification regarding this serious abnormality is executed with priority. Serious abnormalities include, for example, when any of the multiple magnetic sensors 2010 detects a magnetic field acting illegally within the play area 5a (magnetic detection error notification), when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification), when the door frame 3 is detected to be open (door open error notification), and other conditions that indicate a high possibility of fraudulent activity. When such a serious abnormality occurs, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small win game state may be terminated and error notifications (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification, etc.) related to these serious abnormalities may be executed, and the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small win game state may be resumed again after the error notification related to the serious abnormality is terminated. Alternatively, by overwriting the error notification related to the serious abnormality with the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small win game state and executing it, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small win game state is not reflected (executed in a visible/audible manner) in the display on the performance display device 1600, the output of the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., or the lighting/flashing of lamps/LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3. However, (executed in the background), the content of the discharge error notification may progress over time while the error notification regarding a serious abnormality is being made, and when the error notification regarding a serious abnormality ends, the discharge error notification may be visually or audibly recognized with the progressed content, which may be reflected in the display on the performance display device 1600, the output of the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., and the lighting/flashing of lamps/LEDs etc. provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 (for example, if an error notification regarding a serious abnormality is started 5 seconds after the start of the discharge error notification of step S441 in a small win game state and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, after the error notification regarding a serious abnormality ends, the content may be resumed from 35 seconds after the start of the discharge error notification of step S441 in a small win game state).

In addition, in step S439 of the small win processing, the manner of the discharge error notification may be different depending on whether the remaining ball counter is "1" or more or less than "0." When the remaining ball counter is "1" or more, this indicates only a minor abnormality in which game balls B that entered the special feature winning opening 2006 have not been discharged, whereas when the remaining ball counter is less than "0," this indicates a serious abnormality in which game balls B are discharged in excess of the number of game balls B that entered the special feature winning opening 2006, and there is a possibility that game balls B have been illegally admitted into the special feature winning opening 2006. Therefore, when a minor abnormality occurs such as the game ball B that has entered the role winning opening 2006 not being discharged, for example, as shown in FIG. 207, a display such as "Discharge abnormality" is displayed in a part of the performance display device 1600, and the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. continue to output a performance sound so that no error sound is output, and some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are partially illuminated. When a major abnormality occurs such as the game balls B being discharged more than the number of game balls B that entered, for example, a display such as "Fraud has occurred!" is displayed in the entire area of the performance display device 1600, and the volume of the performance sound is suppressed and a loud error sound such as "Fraud has occurred" is output from the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., and further, all of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are illuminated to light up the entire door frame 3, thereby notifying the occurrence of fraudulent activity.

In this example, the detection signal of the second loss port sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the game ball B guided to the third distribution guide path 2551 by the second distribution device 2540 in the second small win game state is detected by the second loss port sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the performance display device 1600, the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, the lamps and LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, etc., to execute a performance that creates excitement by determining whether the game ball B circulating inside the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 will be accepted into the second V winning port 2008 or the third loss port 2555.

The detection signal of the second loss port sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guideway 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the presence or absence of an abnormality may be determined depending on the detection of the game ball B by the second loss port sensor 2517. For example, if the game ball B is detected in a V entry port or loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled according to the small win type in the above-mentioned small win processing, or if there is a possibility that the game ball B will be detected in a V entry port or loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled according to the small win type (if the game ball B heads toward a passage or entry port other than the passage or entry port scheduled according to the small win type), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and a distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the small win processing.

Specifically, the V winning port and losing port planned according to the type of small win are as follows: in the case of a first small win, the first losing port 2535 is planned, in the case of a second small win, the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555 is planned, and in the case of a third small win, the first V winning port 2007 is planned. In the case of a first small win, if the small win processing detects that game ball B has been received into either the first V winning port 2007, the second V winning port 2008, or the third missing port 2555, in the case of a second small win, if the small win processing detects that game ball B has been received into either the first missing port 2535 or the first V winning port 2007, in the case of a third small win, if the small win processing detects that game ball B has been received into either the first missing port 2535, the second V winning port 2008, or the third missing port 2555 In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and for example, as shown in FIG. 207, a message such as "Fraud has occurred!" is displayed across the entire area of the performance display device 1600, and the volume of the performance sound is suppressed from the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., and an error sound saying "Fraud has been committed" is output at a loud volume. In addition, all of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 may be illuminated to illuminate the entire door frame 3, thereby executing a distribution error notification to notify the occurrence of fraudulent activity. In this case, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be immediately reported, and fraudulent activity can be discovered at an early stage.

In addition, a second distribution detection sensor that detects game ball B flowing inside the second distribution induction path 2541 may be provided in the middle of the second distribution induction path 2541, and the detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor may be input to the main control board 1310. In the case of a first small win, if there is a possibility that game ball B will be accepted into either the first V winning port 2007, the second V winning port 2008, or the third losing port 2555 during the small win processing, that is, if the second distribution detection sensor detects game ball B and determines that game ball B has entered the second distribution induction path 2541, in the case of a second small win, the second distribution detection sensor detects game ball B during the small win processing but the second H When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guideway 2541 is heading toward the first V winning hole 2007 because the misalignment sensor 2517 cannot detect the game ball B, when the game ball B passing through the second distribution guideway 2541 is determined to be heading toward the third distribution device 2550 because the second misalignment sensor 2517 detects the game ball B after the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B during the small win processing in the case of the third small win, etc., when there is a possibility that the game ball B will be detected at a V winning hole or a missing hole different from the planned V winning hole or missing hole, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and a distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when a state in which fraudulent activity may occur, and fraudulent activity can be discovered early.

In addition, the manner of the distribution error notification may be changed depending on the degree of abnormality (fraud level). For example, in the case of a first small win, if the second distribution detection sensor detects game ball B and determines that game ball B has entered the second distribution guide path 2541, or in the case of a second small win, if the second distribution detection sensor detects game ball B during the small win processing but the second loss port sensor 2517 cannot detect game ball B and determines that game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the first V winning port 2007, the degree of abnormality is determined to be high, and, for example, a message such as "Fraud has occurred!" is displayed on the entire area of the performance display device 1600, and the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the The occurrence of fraudulent activity is notified by outputting at a loud volume "Fraud is occurring" from the top side speaker, etc., and if the second distribution detection sensor detects game ball B during the small win processing in the case of a second small win, and then the second miss sensor 2517 detects game ball B during the small win processing in the case of a third small win, and it is determined that game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the third distribution device 2550, it may be determined that the degree of abnormality is low, and for example, a message such as "There is an ejection abnormality" may be displayed in a part of the performance display device 1600, and no output may be provided from the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., to notify the occurrence of an abnormality other than fraudulent activity. That is, if the game ball B passes through a path through which the game ball B enters the V winning port at a rate higher than the rate of entry of the game ball B into the V winning port that is preset according to the type of small win (if the V winning expectation rate is improved compared to the V winning expectation rate that is preset according to the type of small win being executed), the degree of abnormality is judged to be high and a notification is made that a fraudulent act is being performed, and if the game ball B passes through a path through which the game ball B enters the V winning port at a rate lower than the rate of entry of the game ball B into the V winning port that is preset according to the type of small win being executed (if the V winning expectation rate is lower than the V winning expectation rate that is preset according to the type of small win being executed), the degree of abnormality is judged to be low and an occurrence of an abnormality different from a fraudulent act may be notified. Also, if the V winning expectation rate is lower than the V winning expectation rate that is preset according to the type of small win being executed, the player himself will suffer a disadvantage, but the gaming establishment will not suffer any damage, so if the degree of such an abnormality is low, a distribution error notification may not be performed.

In addition, during a period in which an allocation error notification is being issued based on the detection of game ball B in a V entry port or a missing port other than the V entry port or the missing port scheduled for the small win type, or the occurrence of a possibility of detecting game ball B in a V entry port or a missing port other than the V entry port or the missing port scheduled for the small win type, even if it is determined in the above-mentioned small win processing that a minor abnormality has occurred in which game ball B that entered the device entry port 2006 has not been discharged, the allocation error notification that is being executed based on the detection of game ball B in a V entry port or a missing port other than the V entry port or the missing port scheduled for the small win type, or the occurrence of a possibility of detecting game ball B in a V entry port or a missing port other than the V entry port or the missing port scheduled for the small win type, is not terminated and continues to be executed. However, the discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that a minor abnormality has occurred in the above-mentioned small win processing, that is, the game ball B that has entered the prize winning opening 2006 has not been discharged, is not made visible or audible, but is executed in the background, and the content of the discharge error notification 1 progresses over time. In this case, when the game ball B that has entered the prize winning opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the remaining ball counter becomes "0", the discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that a minor abnormality has occurred, that the game ball B that has entered the prize winning opening 2006 has not been discharged, ends. In this way, during the period in which an error notification (distribution error notification in this example) is being made based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, even if a minor abnormality occurs, the error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality (discharge error notification 1 in this example) is not executed in a visible or audible state. However, it is executed silently in the background of the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (in this example, sorting error notification), and when the minor abnormality is resolved, the error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality (in this example, discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

In this example, even when a small win game state or a big win game state does not occur, the detection of game ball B by the role winning hole sensor 2513, the first V winning hole sensor 2514, the first loss hole sensor 2516, the second V winning hole sensor 2515, and the third loss hole sensor 2518 is monitored, and if game ball B is detected by any of these, it is determined that a fraudulent act is occurring and the occurrence of the fraudulent act is notified. In addition, when a small win game state or a big win game state does not occur, the detection of game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor and the second loss hole sensor 2517 may be monitored, and if game ball B is detected by either the second distribution detection sensor or the second loss hole sensor 2517, it may be determined that the degree of abnormality is high, that is, that a fraudulent act is occurring, and the occurrence of the fraudulent act may be notified. In other words, when neither a small win nor a big win game state is occurring, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the rate at which game ball B enters the V winning port, it may be determined that fraudulent activity is occurring no matter which path game ball B passes through in the role winning port 2006, and the occurrence of fraudulent activity may be notified.

In the above example, when an ejection error notification is executed in step S441, when game ball B is detected in a V entry port or a loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled according to the small win type, or when a distribution error notification is executed based on the occurrence of a possibility of detecting game ball B in a V entry port or a loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled according to the small win type, the small win process is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter, but the game progress may be stopped without monitoring the value of the remaining ball counter. Also, even if the game progress is not stopped, the value of the remaining ball counter may be monitored, and if the value of the remaining ball counter becomes normal ("0"), the abnormal state may be automatically restored and the small win game state may not be terminated. This makes it possible to reliably grasp the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, after the distribution error notification, if a game ball B is detected in the V winning hole or the missing hole (the regular receiving hole) scheduled according to the small win type, or if a game ball B rolling along the route (the regular route) scheduled according to the small win type is detected (for example, if it is detected by the second missing hole sensor 2517 in the case of the second small win), the distribution error notification may be terminated. In addition, after the discharge error notification, if a game ball B is detected in the V winning hole or the missing hole (the regular receiving hole) scheduled according to the small win type, or if a game ball B rolling along the route (the regular route) scheduled according to the small win type is detected (for example, if it is detected by the second missing hole sensor 2517 in the case of the second small win), the discharge error notification may be terminated. In addition, the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer that causes the discharge error notification to be executed may be reset each time a game ball B is detected rolling along a route (regular route) scheduled according to the type of small win (for example, when the second miss sensor 2517 detects a second small win), in which case the discharge monitoring timer is measured again after the reset, and the discharge error notification can be executed when the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer reaches the expected longest period according to the type of small win being executed.

[13-1. Volume adjustment]
The volume adjustment switch is turned on for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or the special symbol display ( A certain period of time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device (in this example, the variable pattern is controlled by the peripheral control unit) From the time the command is received until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the display of the decorative pattern, or from the time the peripheral control unit receives a stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern was confirmed and displayed) The volume of the music and sound effects, etc., coming from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and the low-pitched main body frame speaker 622 on the door frame 3 side, is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. This allows for adjustment. As described above, the volume control switch is configured so that its resistance value can be changed by being rotated, and the peripheral control A/D converter electrically connected thereto can detect the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch. The voltage divided by is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023.

In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-level value is divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source IC is controlled to the volume set for board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low frequencies on the main frame 4. In this way, music, sound effects, and other special effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low frequencies on the main frame 4, by adjusting the volume based on the rotational operation of the volume adjustment switch.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music, sound effects, and other sound effects, notification sounds to inform the hall staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds to inform the contents of the game performance (for example, to make the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600 more impressive, to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4. However, the notification sounds and notification sounds are played completely independent of volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the peripheral control IC by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be changed in five stages from mute to maximum volume, unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven stages as described above. As a result, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low frequencies on the main frame 4 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is cheating, a warning sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is low, it is possible to prevent hall staff and the like from having difficulty noticing malfunctions or player cheating due to the warning sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of the music and sound effects is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch, except for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the final display of the decorative pattern). 1002) is ended), a certain period when the varying display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) on the special pattern display device (first special pattern display device, second special pattern display device) is started or stopped (in this example, from when the peripheral control device receives a varying pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the varying display of the decorative pattern has started, or from when the peripheral control device receives a stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the decorative pattern has been confirmed and displayed), and further, the operation period of the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 set in the varying performance (the effective period during which the operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is accepted in the so-called button performance), etc., the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300. Specifically, during a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), during a certain period when the special pattern display device (first special pattern display device, second special pattern display device) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control device receives a variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or from the time the peripheral control device receives a stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern), and during the variable performance. When the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated, an indicator consisting of multiple scales is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the volume of the music or sound effects can be changed and adjusted to the desired volume (anywhere from 1 for the minimum volume to 5 for the maximum volume) by rotating the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, excluding the operation period of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 (the effective period during which operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is accepted in the so-called button performance).

Specifically, the touch operation unit 302 is rotated right without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and when the amount of rotation of the touch operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation, the volume of the performance sound is changed to a volume that is one step higher, and when the touch operation unit 302 is rotated left without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and when the amount of rotation of the touch operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation, the volume of the performance sound is changed to a volume that is one step lower.

Figure 208 is a timing diagram showing an example of a case where a variable performance display in which decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner is started on the performance display device 1600 while the volume of the performance sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low frequencies on the main frame 4 are set to volume 5 in response to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during this variable performance, and then the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated.

As shown in FIG. 208, in order to change the volume of the performance sound from volume 5 to volume 4 during a variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600, the touch operation unit 302 is rotated left without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the touch operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the performance sound is changed from volume 5 down one step to volume 4, and this change in response to the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 is immediately reflected in the performance sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4. That is, at the timing t1 when the touch operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated to change the volume of the performance sound output from the top center speaker, top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, the changed volume is reflected in the output from the top center speaker, top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4.

In addition, the indicator displayed on the performance display device 1600 changes its scale in response to the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300. This allows the current set volume to be visually determined. In addition, in this example, the indicator displayed in response to the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in which the performance using the decorative pattern or the like is performed. In addition, this indicator is displayed on the top surface among the images displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this example, the indicator displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed semi-transparently so that the image of the variable performance or the like performed on the back of it can be recognized. In addition, a sub-display device different from the performance display device 1600 in which the variable performance using the decorative pattern or the like is performed may be provided, and in this case, the indicator may be displayed on the sub-display device in response to the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300. In addition, in this example, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) has passed since the operation of the touch operation unit 302 ended, the indicator displayed on the performance display device 1600 is erased. In addition, after an indicator is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the rotation of the touch operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be made to disappear based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, the above-mentioned indicator may be displayed in the center of the performance display device 1600, or a lower right display area or the like that does not overlap with the performance image or the like may be partitioned out from the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the indicator may be displayed in this lower right display area. Also, a display device that displays various settings for the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the performance display device 1600, and the indicator may be displayed on this display device.

In addition, when the indicator scale and the volume of the music or sound effects are changed by rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, a specific sound (electronic sound such as "beep") corresponding to the changed volume is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for low tones of the main body frame 4. As a result, even if the music or sound effects are not output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for low tones of the main body frame 4 when the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated, the volume can be adjusted while checking the actual volume by the specific sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for low tones of the main body frame 4. Note that the specific sound may not be output during the execution of the variable performance. That is, during the execution of the variable performance, a performance sound corresponding to the content of the variable performance is output, and it is possible to check the actual volume without outputting a specific sound. This prevents a situation in which a specific sound unrelated to the content of the variable performance is output during the variable performance, disrupting the variable performance and decreasing interest in the game.

This adjusted volume is updated as a sub-volume value for the tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC that incorporate sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects, and is reflected in adjusting the volume of the sound effects, but is not reflected in adjusting the volume of the notification sounds and announcement sounds mentioned above.

In this way, in this embodiment, there are two ways to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects: by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch, or by increasing or decreasing the board volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch in response to the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the operation operation unit 300. Since the volume adjustment switch is implemented on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to always keep the main frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In that case, only the hall staff can rotate the volume adjustment switch. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may sound too low for the player to hear the music and sound effects, or may sound too high for the player to hear the music and sound effects. Therefore, when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the volume of the performance sounds of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the performance sounds of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so that if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is felt to be low and the performance sounds of music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the player can operate the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 to increase the volume to the desired volume, and if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is felt to be high and the performance sounds of music and sound effects are loud, the player can operate the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 to decrease the volume to the desired volume.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played for a predetermined period of time and is in a waiting state for customers and the demonstration by the performance display device 1600 is performed repeatedly (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is cancelled and the volume is initialized. This volume initialization is set to the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly turning the volume adjustment switch. As a result, if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was low and the music and sound effects were difficult to hear, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was high and the music and sound effects were loud, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can decrease the volume to the desired level by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300.

[13-2. Adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch, thereby increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume to adjust the volume of the performance sound of music or sound effects, and in addition, the volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted. Specifically, the sound output in the high frequency range (above a predetermined frequency band) can be suppressed (or muted).

That is, during a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), or during a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the fixed display of the decorative pattern). .5 seconds have passed), and further, except for the operation period of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 set in the variable performance (the effective period for accepting the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 in the so-called button performance), when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, a screen for performing an environment change mode for setting various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (whether or not to output high-pitched sounds, whether or not to light up the LED of the door frame 3, etc.) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. On the screen for performing the environment change mode, a list of changeable environments (whether or not to output high-pitched sounds, whether or not to light up the LED of the door frame 3, etc.) is displayed, and by operating the pressing operation unit 303 with one of the environment settings selected with the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, a process for changing the environment setting can be executed. In this way, by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 according to the screen of the environment change mode, it is possible to suppress the sound output of a specific frequency band, or to output at a volume that is set according to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300. Also, although the screen of the environment change mode is displayed on the front side of the images displayed on the performance display device 1600, it is displayed semi-transparently so that the image behind it can be recognized.

Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Then, when the touch operation unit 302 is operated to select the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, a selection screen between a state in which the sound output of the specific frequency band is suppressed and a state in which the sound output of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is displayed by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed, and "treble cut on" or "treble cut off" is displayed in the speech bubble of the mini character, and the display is switched every time the touch operation unit 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount), and when the touch operation unit 302 is operated again to select either a state in which the sound output of the specific frequency band is suppressed or a state in which the sound output of the specific frequency band is not suppressed, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to determine the change to the selected state, and a decision screen is displayed (either "treble cut" or "no treble cut" is displayed in the speech bubble of the mini character for volume setting). After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decision screen displayed on the performance display device 1600 is erased, and the environment change mode is terminated. After the decision screen is displayed, the decision screen displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be erased based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The screen, selection screen, and decision screen for performing the above-mentioned environment change mode may be displayed in the center of the performance display device 1600, or a lower left display area or the like that does not overlap with the display of the performance image or the indicator when adjusting the volume of the above-mentioned performance sound may be partitioned out of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the screen, selection screen, and decision screen for performing the environment change mode may be displayed in this lower left display area. Also, a display device that displays various settings for the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the performance display device 1600, and the screen, selection screen, and decision screen for performing the above-mentioned environment change mode may be displayed on this display device.

Note that by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 without rotating the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, after a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600, even if the touch operation unit 302 is rotated, the volume adjustment of the performance sound is disabled and no indicator is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Then, if the touch operation unit 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 after the environment change mode has ended, the volume adjustment of the performance sound is enabled and an indicator is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 208, if the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to suppress the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during a variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600 below the volume set in response to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, at the timing t2 when these operations are completed, the change in response to the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is not reflected in the performance sound output from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4. Then, at the timing t3 when the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600 ends (the timing when the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped based on receiving a stop display command from the main control MPU 1310a instructing the derived display of the decorative pattern display result), the changes made in response to the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 during the variable performance are reflected, that is, the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band is suppressed below the volume set in response to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300.

Note that, after the timing of t2 when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is completed in adjusting the volume of the sound of the specific frequency band during the variable performance, the volume adjustment of the sound of the specific frequency band is disabled. Then, when the change in the volume adjustment of the sound of the specific frequency band according to the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is reflected at the timing of t3 when the variable performance ends, the volume adjustment of the sound of the specific frequency band is enabled. Also, in this example, even if the volume adjustment of the sound of the specific frequency band is disabled, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600, but the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band cannot be selected. In addition, during a period in which volume adjustment of a particular frequency band of sound effects is disabled, the screen for performing the environment change mode may be prevented from being displayed on the performance display device 1600 even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600, the changes corresponding to these operations are not reflected immediately, but are reflected after the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600 ends. Normally, from the start to the end of the variable performance, the performance sound according to the content of the variable performance is continuously output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, so when the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band is adjusted during the variable performance (because the continuously output performance sound is interrupted for a moment, and then the output of the performance sound with the volume of the specific frequency band suppressed or the performance sound with the volume of the specific frequency band not suppressed is resumed, etc.), it may give the player a sense of discomfort.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band of presentation sound during a variable presentation, the change corresponding to this operation is not reflected until the variable presentation ends, and is reflected after the variable presentation ends, so that the presentation sound that flows continuously during the variable presentation is output with the content that has been set in advance, and after the variable presentation ends and the output of the presentation sound that has been continuously played according to the content of the variable presentation stops, a presentation sound that reflects the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 can be output, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. In other words, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is not reflected during the variable presentation in which the presentation sound is continuously output, but is reflected at the switching timing until the continuously output presentation sound stops and the next presentation sound is output, so that the presentation sound can be changed according to the adjustment without feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band during a period when no variable performance is being performed, the change corresponding to this operation is immediately reflected, and the performance sound with the adjusted volume of the specific frequency band is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4.

In this way, while adjustments to the volume of the sound produced during a variable performance are reflected immediately, adjustments to the volume of sound produced in a specific frequency band are not reflected immediately. In other words, changes to sound-related information that may have a negative effect on the planned performance during the variable performance, such as making the player feel uncomfortable due to changes to the sound produced, are prohibited during the variable performance, preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

In addition, when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected immediately, the player may be notified of this by displaying it on the performance display device 1600. For example, when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during a variable performance, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is not reflected immediately, but a mini character for setting the volume may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 and a standby display such as "Please wait a moment" may be displayed in the speech bubble of this mini character to notify the player that the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 to adjust the volume of the performance sound of the specific frequency band has been normally accepted. In addition, the standby display that notifies the player that the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band is being accepted normally may be changed according to the remaining time until the timing for reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band. For example, a mini character for setting the volume may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 and a standby display 1 such as "Please wait a moment" may be displayed in the speech bubble of this mini character to notify the player that the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band is being accepted normally. Then, when the remaining time until the timing for reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band becomes a predetermined time, a standby display 2 may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 and a countdown such as "3," "2," "1" may be displayed in the speech bubble of this mini character. Furthermore, when it is time to adjust the volume of the sound effects in a specific frequency band, a notification to that effect may be sent; for example, a mini character for setting the volume may be displayed on the sound effect display device 1600, and a reflection display such as "Starting selection reflection!" may be displayed in the speech bubble of this mini character.

In the above example, as the volume adjustment for a specific frequency band, an equalizer setting A in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed and an equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed are stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and by switching between equalizer setting A and equalizer setting B as the volume adjustment for the performance sound of the specific frequency band, two levels (on and off) are switched between a state in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed and a state in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed. Note that multiple equalizer settings with different degrees of suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band may be stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and multiple states with different degrees of suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band may be switched by switching between these multiple equalizer settings. For example, an equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, an equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and an equalizer setting C in which the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed to half the volume set in response to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 (for example, if the set volume is volume 6, change it to volume 3) may be stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and by switching between equalizer setting A, equalizer setting B, and equalizer setting C by adjusting the volume of the performance sound of the specific frequency band, it may be possible to switch between three levels: a state in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, a state in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and a state in which the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed to half the volume set in response to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300. This makes it possible to set settings that suit the preferences of various players.

In addition, the specific frequency band of the sound effects is not limited to the above, but also includes the frequency band of voices and low-pitched sounds. For example, the volume of the lines uttered by the characters during the variable performance may be adjustable (if there are multiple characters, they may be adjusted collectively or individually), or the volume of the low-pitched sounds may be adjustable. In addition, the sound effects (confirmation sounds) for announcing a confirmed jackpot and the payout sound when the prize balls are paid out may also be adjustable. In addition, the volume of multiple frequency bands may be adjusted as a specific frequency band, and for example, the volume of both the high-pitched and low-pitched sounds may be adjusted. In this case, the high-pitched and low-pitched sounds may be adjusted together (for example, the operation of switching between a state in which the high-pitched sound is not suppressed and a state in which it is suppressed and the operation of switching between a state in which the low-pitched sound is not suppressed and a state in which it is suppressed are performed together in a single operation), or each may be adjusted (for example, the operation of switching between a state in which the high-pitched sound is not suppressed and a state in which it is suppressed and the operation of switching between a state in which the low-pitched sound is not suppressed and a state in which it is suppressed are performed separately). That is, players may be allowed to select one of several setting modes (such as cutting high-pitched sounds, cutting payout sounds, cutting the sound confirming a big win, etc.). This allows settings to be made to suit the preferences of various players.

In addition, when continuous sound effects are output during a big win game state or a small win game state, the volume adjustment of the sound effects may be immediately reflected in the output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, while the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band may be reflected after the end of the big win game state and the small win game state. This allows the sound effects to be changed without any discomfort by reflecting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 at the switching timing until the output of the next sound effects when the output of the continuous sound effects stops. In addition, during a big win or small win game state, the player's attention to the content of the presentation is less than that of the variable presentation, so volume adjustments to specific frequency bands can be immediately reflected in the output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, in the same way as the volume adjustments to the presentation sounds described above.

In addition, when continuous sound effects are output in a game state different from the normal state, such as during a time-saving state, adjustments to the volume of the sound effects may be immediately reflected in the output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for bass tones on the main frame 4, and adjustments to the volume of a specific frequency band may be reflected after the end of the variable performance when the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a sound effect of a specific frequency band during the variable performance, without reflecting the change corresponding to this operation until the variable performance ends, and when the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a sound effect of a specific frequency band when the variable performance is not being performed, the change may be immediately reflected in the output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for bass tones on the main frame 4. In other words, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band may not be reflected during the variable performance, which is the performance that the player pays the most attention to, but may be reflected after the variable performance has ended, allowing the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band to be reflected when the player is not paying much attention, allowing the performance sound to be changed in accordance with the adjustment without feeling unnatural.

Even if the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the changed performance sound will not be output until the performance sound is actually output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4. Therefore, if the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the variable performance, even if the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected after the variable performance ends, the changed performance sound will be output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4 after the start of the next variable performance. In other words, the actual output will be performed after the lottery process (winning judgment lottery, etc.) to start the next variable performance is performed. Similarly, if the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band while a demonstration is being performed on the performance display device 1600, the adjustment of the volume of the performance sound of the specific frequency band is immediately reflected, but if the performance sound is not output as part of the demonstration, the changed performance sound is not output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4 until the next variable performance begins, but is output after the variable performance begins.

The volume adjustment for a specific frequency band is also initialized at the same time that the volume of the effect sounds is initialized. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played for a predetermined period of time, and the machine is in a waiting state for customers and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is cancelled, and the volume is initialized and at the same time the volume adjustment for the specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed).

In addition, when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the execution of an error notification in which the alarm sound is output at a high volume (which may be maximum volume), it may be appropriately set whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band in the alarm sound depending on the degree of the abnormality (level of irregularity) that caused the error notification.

For example, as shown in FIG. 209, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B, and the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during a full tank error notification, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately reflected in the notification sound, and when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs after the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, the state in which the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound is continued, and the changed notification sound is output from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. In this example, the voice output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side as a full tank error notification (e.g., "Please remove the ball!", etc.) is changed to one that reflects the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band (for example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, a female voice is output, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, a male voice is output).

On the other hand, when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during a door open error notification that is executed when a serious abnormality (door open error) occurs, such as when the door frame 3 is detected to be open as shown in FIG. 210, or when a serious abnormality (door open error) occurs after adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band may not be reflected in the notification sound. In this example, although it is possible to adjust the volume in a specific frequency band of the voice (e.g., "The door is open!") output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side as a door open error notification (for example, when the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed, a female voice is output, and when the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed, a male voice is output), when a serious abnormality occurs, the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is disabled and a notification sound with the volume of the specific frequency band not suppressed is output.

That is, as shown in FIG. 209, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B, and a full tank error is being notified, if the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid but this volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound, whereas volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound and the changed notification sound is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4. Also, as shown in FIG. 210, when a serious abnormality (door open error) occurs such as when the door frame 3 is detected to be open and a door open error is being notified, if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid, but not only is this volume adjustment not reflected in the alarm sound, but the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also not reflected in the alarm sound. In this way, by appropriately setting whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the alarm sound depending on the degree of the abnormality that caused the error notification (illegal level), serious abnormalities can be reliably detected.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 210, when the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 are operated to suppress the volume of a specific frequency band, and the changed performance sound is output from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, if a serious abnormality occurs, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (turned off) without adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band in accordance with the environment change mode or the operation of the performance operation unit 300, and an alarm sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the alarm sound is output for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds), and when the output of the sound effect is resumed after the alarm sound has stopped, the volume of the specific frequency band is not adjusted in response to the environment change mode or the operation of the sound effect operation unit 300, and the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that was forcibly released is set (on) again, and the sound effect with the volume of the specific frequency band suppressed is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example allows for volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, and either a performance sound or notification sound that reflects the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band made by operating the touch operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 can be immediately output, or the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band made by operating the touch operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 can be delayed in timing to output the changed performance sound or notification sound without immediately reflecting the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band made by operating the touch operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 in the output of the performance sound, and this is appropriately set according to the state of the pachinko machine 1 (game state, error state, etc.). This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect and reliably detect serious abnormalities.

[14. Changing the settings of winning probability, etc.]
In the above pachinko machine 1, an example of changing the probability of a big win or a small win according to a setting value will be described. In the following, it is assumed that the operation signals from the setting key, the setting change switch 1311b, and the setting confirmation switch on the setting board are output to the payout control board 633. In this example, the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633, but it may be connected to the power supply board 630 in the power supply board cover 631, or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting board may not be an independent board, but may be a part of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310. In other words, the setting key, the setting change switch 1311b, the setting confirmation switch, and the setting display 1310g may be mounted on either the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operating state of each switch provided on the setting board and controls the setting display 1310g that displays the set or selected setting value.

The setting board is provided with a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, a setting change switch 1311b for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 1310g for displaying the set or selected setting value, and functions as a setting change operation section that accepts setting change operations. As described above, the setting board is provided in the board unit 620 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, and when multiple pachinko machines 1 are lined up on a game island in an amusement parlor, the setting can be changed by opening the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key, setting change switch 1311b, and setting confirmation switch on the setting board are input to the payout control unit 633a. The setting display 1310g is controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The confirmed setting is sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a selects a table according to the setting as a table to be used in special lotteries, etc. (a winning judgment table, a big winning symbol determination table, a small winning symbol determination table, etc.). Note that a table to be used in special lotteries, etc. is provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

Specifically, in this example, as shown in FIG. 211, the "big hit probability," "small hit probability," "small hit type," "normal symbol hit probability," and "opening and closing pattern of the second starting hole according to the normal symbol hit type" are set corresponding to each of the setting values 1 to 6.

The probability of winning (the proportion of the jackpot judgment value that indicates a jackpot in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each setting value, with setting value 1 being "1 in 319", setting value 2 being "1 in 309", setting value 3 being "1 in 299", setting values 4 and 6 being "1 in 279", and setting value 5 being "1 in 289". In this example, the higher the setting value is from setting value 1 to setting value 5, the higher the jackpot probability, but the highest setting value, setting value 6, has a lower jackpot probability than setting value 5. Note that the jackpot probability may be increased in proportion to the setting value, in which case it may be set so that the higher the setting value is from setting value 1 to setting value 6, the higher the jackpot probability is.

In addition, the probability of a small win (the proportion of small win judgment values in the hit judgment table that indicate a small win) is set to a different value for each setting value, and in the table used for the special lottery for the first special symbol, it is set to "1 in 100" for settings 1 to 4 and "1 in 90" for settings 5 and 6, while in the table used for the special lottery for the second special symbol, it is set to "50 in 100" for settings 1 to 5 and "66 in 100" for setting 6. In this example, the high setting values (setting values 5 and 6) indirectly increase the frequency of occurrence of a big win game state by increasing the small win probability more than the other setting values (low setting values). In this way, the table used for the special drawing for the first special symbol changes the small win probability according to the set value, allowing the player to guess the set value based on the frequency of small wins during normal play, while the table used for the special drawing for the second special symbol keeps the small win probability roughly the same for all set values, allowing the player to enjoy the continuation of the time-saving state (consecutive wins) purely during the time-saving state.

In addition, in the table used for the special drawing of the first special symbol, which is mainly performed in the normal state, the small hit probability of setting value 5 and setting value 6 is set higher than setting value 1 to setting value 4, while in the table used for the special drawing of the second special symbol, which is mainly performed in the time-saving state, only the small hit probability of setting value 6 is set higher than setting value 1 to setting value 5. Therefore, in the special drawing of the first special symbol, which is performed in the normal state, setting value 4 and setting value 5 are drawn with different small hit probabilities, but in the special drawing of the second special symbol, which is performed in the time-saving state, small hits are drawn with the same probability. However, the probability of a big hit and the determination ratio of the small hit type, which will be described later, are set higher for setting value 5 than for setting value 4, so that setting value 5 is more advantageous overall than setting value 4.

In addition, by changing the setting value, it is possible to realize a game in which the hit that triggers the transition to the time-saving state is likely to be a "big hit" as in setting value 4 but is unlikely to become a big hit via a "small hit", while a game in which the hit that triggers the transition to the time-saving state is unlikely to be a "big hit" as in setting value 5 but is likely to become a big hit via a "small hit", by having the player guess the setting value depending on the type of hit that triggers the transition to the time-saving state.

The probability of a small hit may be increased in proportion to the setting value. In this case, the higher the setting value is from setting value 1 to setting value 6, the higher the probability of a small hit may be set. The probability of a small hit corresponding to some of the settings from setting value 1 to setting value 6 may be set lower than the probability of a small hit corresponding to any of the settings lower than this part of the setting value. For example, the probability of a small hit for setting value 4 may be set to 1 in 100, and the probability of a small hit for setting value 3, which is lower than setting value 4, may be set to 1 in 90. In this case, the ratio of the type of small hit that is advantageous in the case of a small hit (the third small hit in this example) may be set higher for setting value 4 than for setting value 3, so that setting value 4 is more advantageous than setting value 3.

In addition, the selection ratio (selection ratio set in the small win symbol determination table) for determining the type of small win based on the result of the special lottery (win determination process (step S305)) is set to a different value for each setting value. In this example, if a small win is determined as the result of the special lottery for the first special symbol, the second small win is determined at a rate of 9/10 for setting values 1 to 3, and the third small win is determined at a rate of 1/10 for setting values 4 and 5, the second small win is determined at a rate of 8/10, and the third small win is determined at a rate of 2/10 for setting value 6, and the first small win is determined at a rate of 1/10, the second small win is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small win is determined at a rate of 3/10.

In addition, if the special lottery result for the second special pattern is determined to be a small win, at setting value 1 and setting value 2, there is a 3/10 chance that it will be determined to be the first small win, at a 6/10 chance that it will be determined to be the second small win, and at a 1/10 chance that it will be determined to be the third small win, at setting value 3 and setting value 4, there is a 2/10 chance that it will be determined to be the first small win, at a 6/10 chance that it will be determined to be the second small win, and at a 2/10 chance that it will be determined to be the third small win, at setting value 5 and setting value 6, there is a 1/10 chance that it will be determined to be the first small win, at a 6/10 chance that it will be determined to be the second small win, and at a 3/10 chance that it will be determined to be the third small win.

As described above, the first small win guides the game ball B received in the role winning port 2006 to the first losing port 2535, and there is no possibility of a big win game state occurring, or the possibility of a big win game state occurring is extremely low. In this example, if it is decided to be a small win as a result of the special lottery for the first special pattern, the first small win is selected only when the setting value is 6, and is not selected for other setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 5). In the case where a small win occurs in a state unfavorable to the player compared to the time-saving state of the normal state, if the setting value is 1 to setting value 5, a second small win or a third small win, which has the possibility of a big win game state occurring, will always occur, and the small win game state can be executed while raising expectations for a big win game state. That is, when a small win occurs in a state unfavorable to the player in the normal time-saving state in the case of the setting value 1 to the setting value 5, the player focuses on the small win state with the expectation of a big win game state, but when the game balls B received in the role winning port 2006 are all guided to the first loss port 2535 and the player realizes that there is absolutely no possibility of a big win game state occurring, the player becomes very disappointed. However, by generating at least a second or third small win, which has the possibility of generating a big win game state, the player can be made to focus on the big win game state with the expectation of a big win game state during the small win game state, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented. On the other hand, in the case of the setting value 6, although the first small win may be selected, it is possible to determine that the setting value is the highest setting value 6 by executing the first small win in the normal state, so that the player can be given a joy that is greater than the disappointment of winning the first small win, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, if it is decided that the special lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, the first small win is selected. In the time-saving state, the small win probability is increased compared to the normal state, so that the small win game state is executed more frequently. Therefore, even if the first small win is executed and all game balls B received in the role winning port 2006 are guided to the first loss port 2535, and it is recognized that there is no possibility of a big win game state occurring, the player will not be discouraged. In addition, if it is decided that the special lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, the low setting value (setting value 1 or setting value 2) increases the determination rate of the first small win, and the high setting value decreases the determination rate of the first small win. In other words, the high setting value reduces the rate at which a small win type that is disadvantageous to the player is determined when it is decided that the special lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win compared to the low setting value, and as a result, the high setting value is more advantageous to the player than the low setting value.

As described above, the third small win guides game ball B received in the device winning port 2006 to the first V winning port 2007, and determining a third small win is roughly the same as winning a big win. In other words, a higher determination rate for a third small win is synonymous with a higher probability of winning a big win, and in this example, at high settings (setting value 5 or setting value 6), the determination rate for the third small win is increased, thereby indirectly improving the probability of a big win game state occurring.

The winning probability of the normal lottery (the proportion of the normal winning symbol judgment value indicating a normal win among the random numbers for judging a normal winning symbol) is set to a different value for each setting value, and is set to "1 in 2" for setting values 1 to 5, and "1 in 1" for setting value 6. Therefore, for setting value 6, when game ball B is received in normal winning port 2003 and a normal lottery is performed, second starting port door 2411 always advances to a state in which game ball B can be received in second starting port 2004, which is more advantageous to the player than the other setting values.

In addition, in this example, if it is decided that the normal lottery result is a normal win, the normal winning pattern type is decided from among multiple normal winning pattern types: normal winning pattern A (normal winning pattern A), normal winning pattern B (normal winning pattern B (normal winning pattern B1 to normal winning pattern B5)), and normal winning pattern C (normal winning pattern C), and the mode corresponding to the decided normal winning pattern type (normal winning pattern A, normal winning pattern B, normal winning pattern C) is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display. Also, the opening and closing mode of the second starting gate 2411 is made different for each set value. Specifically, when a normal pattern hit A occurs during normal operation, the opening and closing mode of "executing a 0.1 s opening once" is executed for all set values (set values 1 to 6), when a normal pattern hit A occurs during time-saving operation, the opening and closing mode of "executing a 6 s opening once" is executed for all set values (set values 1 to 6), when a normal pattern hit B occurs during normal operation, the opening and closing mode of "executing a 0.1 s opening twice" is executed for odd set values (set values 1, 3, and 5), and the opening and closing mode of "executing a 0.1 s opening once" is executed for even set values (set values 2, 4, and 6), when a normal pattern hit B occurs during time-saving operation, the opening and closing mode of "executing a 6 s opening once" is executed for set values 1 to 3, the opening and closing mode of "executing a 3 s opening twice" is executed for set values 4 and 5, and the opening and closing mode of "executing a 3 s opening once" is executed for set value 6.

In addition, when the setting value is 1 to 5, the normal pattern hit type is determined to be one of two types of normal pattern hit types, normal pattern hit A and normal pattern hit B, whereas when the setting value is 6, the normal pattern hit type is determined to be one of three types of normal pattern hit types, normal pattern hit A, normal pattern hit B, and normal pattern hit C. When the normal pattern hit is C during the normal state, the opening and closing mode of "executing 0.1s opening six times" is executed at the setting value 6, and when the normal pattern hit is C during the time-saving state, the opening and closing mode of "executing 1s opening six times" is executed at the setting value 6.

In this way, the operating mode of the second start opening door 2411 (opening/closing mode of the second start opening 2004) that opens the second start opening 2004 based on the result of the normal lottery being a normal win differs for each setting value, so the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operating mode of the second start opening door 2411.

The setting key is a switch that maintains the shorted or open state of the contacts by inserting a specific key into the keyhole (key insertion section) and turning the key to the set position, and outputs a signal that triggers a change to the setting change mode. Note that a setting key may not be provided and another switch may be used instead. In this case, the setting change mode may be started by operating (pressing and holding) the setting change switch 1311b for a specific period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) or more, and the setting change mode may be ended by pressing and holding the setting change switch 1311b during the setting change mode.

The setting change mode may also be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) or more (long press). The setting change mode is also started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is less than the predetermined time, a RAM clear process is executed. The setting change mode may also be ended by long pressing the RAM clear switch 1310f during the setting change mode.

In this way, even employees who do not have a key for the setting key can change the settings, making it easier to handle the pachinko machine 1 in the parlor. Also, since the operation time of the setting change switch 1311b is detected, it is advisable to detect the operation when the setting change switch 1311b falls.

The setting change switch 1311b is, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch between the setting values (1 to 6) in order to select them. That is, when the setting change switch 1311b is pressed once, the setting value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch 1311b is operated when the setting value is 6, the setting value becomes 1. It is also possible to select the setting value by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f without providing the setting change switch 1311b. It is also possible to have fewer settings (for example, two settings) or more settings (for example, eight settings) instead of six.

The setting value changes the rate at which the condition device operates (i.e., the probability of a special symbol hitting), with a setting value of 1 indicating a low probability of hitting, and a setting value of 6 indicating a high probability of hitting. The setting value may also change various game-related parameters, such as the probability of a special jackpot, the rate of time-saving (ST) after a jackpot, the number of time-saving rounds, the number of jackpot rounds or counts, the probability of a normal jackpot, and the number of prize balls in the general prize slot, start slot, and large prize slot, thereby changing the number of prize balls the player can win.

The setting confirmation switch is, for example, a momentary switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 1311b and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch, so long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 1311b and the setting confirmation switch should preferably be configured with different operating methods (operation direction) and shapes to prevent the two switches from being operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 1311b should be configured as a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch should be configured as a momentary toggle switch.

In addition, the setting selected may be confirmed by returning the setting key to the normal position without providing a setting confirmation switch. Also, the selected setting value may be confirmed by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the selected setting may be confirmed by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 when the handle 195 is touched, operation of the single button operation sensor 194, operation of the ball lending button, operation of the return button, or detection of the entry of the game ball B into the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for playing) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in order to set the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 in this example, three switches (including the setting key) are provided on the setting board, but one or two switches would be sufficient on the setting board.

Furthermore, without providing any of the setting key, the setting change switch 1311b, and the setting confirmation switch, the setting change operation may be made possible only by the RAM clear switch 1310f. For example, the setting change mode may be started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) or more (long press). Also, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Furthermore, instead of the setting change switch 1311b, the setting value may be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f for less than a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) during the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch, the setting value may be confirmed by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f for a predetermined time or more (long press). Furthermore, the setting change mode may be ended by long pressing the RAM clear switch 1310f after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 1310g is configured, for example, with a 7-segment LED, and displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 1311b, and displays the current setting value by a specified operation (for example, operating the setting key). Note that instead of a 7-segment LED, the setting display 1310g may be configured with LEDs for the number of possible settable values. In this case, the LED corresponding to the setting value is lit to display the setting value.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of payout error is provided on the payout control board 633, but this error type indicator may also serve as the setting indicator 1310g, and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the setting value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off to display the error type, and the dot may be turned on to display the setting value. Also, the display of the error type may be turned on (not blinking), and the display of the setting value may be blinking.

[14-1. Setting change process]
Next, the process for changing the settings will be described with reference to Fig. 212.

In this example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control side executes power-on processing, and if the conditions for starting the setting change mode are met during the main control side power-on processing, the above setting value is changed.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a performs the initial value setting and start-up setting of the main control built-in WDT for the main control side power-on processing (step S12), and then determines the state of the setting key. If the setting key is operated, a setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key is operated to be on when it receives the setting key operation signal. Note that the setting change mode may not be started if the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is operated, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the handle 195 has been touched, a prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (there is a balance on the prepaid card), or there is a balance inserted in the cash sandwich. The setting change mode may also not be started if there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a magnetic error is detected).

When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU 1310a executes a first RAM clear process that clears data in the game control area (also called the specific area) of the built-in RAM other than data related to the game state (e.g., information related to the special bonus state, time-saving state, and prize balls) that indicates setting value information for the pachinko machine 1.

Then, by performing a setting change operation, the setting value is switched between setting value 1 to setting value 6. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a ends the first RAM clearing process, it sends a first RAM clearing process end command to the dispensing control unit 633a, and when the first RAM clearing process end command is received, the dispensing control unit 633a causes the setting display 1310g to flash an initial value (e.g., setting value 0) as the setting value, and switches the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g each time the setting change switch 1311b is operated (looping through setting values 1 to 6).

When the main control MPU 1310a executes the first RAM clear process, the setting value is cleared and the state becomes unset. Furthermore, the setting change mode cannot be ended when the setting value is unset. If a power outage occurs during the setting change mode when the setting value is unset, the setting change mode will be executed when the power is turned back on. At this time, if the setting key is off, a loop process is executed that monitors the state of the setting key until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode will be started in response to the setting key being turned on.

The payout control unit 633a also checks whether the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, i.e., whether the main frame release switch is off, and if the main frame release switch is on (the main frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2), it loops until the main frame release switch is turned off and does not accept operation of the setting confirmation switch. In other words, the setting change operation is not completed until the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

When the main frame open switch is off, or when the main frame open switch becomes off, if the setting confirmation switch is operated, the dispensing control unit 633a displays the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g as confirmed (stops blinking and turns on), and sends a setting change completion command indicating the confirmed setting value to the main control MPU 1310a.

When the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting change end command, it stores the setting value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. This allows lottery processing etc. to be performed according to the confirmed setting value.

Then, when the conditions for terminating the setting change mode are met, i.e., when the setting key is turned off, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clear process (step S14).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting values are changed by the above-mentioned processing.

When the setting change mode is ended, i.e., when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a may end the display of the setting value on the setting display 1310g (do not display the setting value). Also, when the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode is ended, the setting change mode is not executed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. This allows the gaming store clerk to change the setting value after understanding the current setting value.

In addition, when the setting change mode is executed, the fact may be notified. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is operated to ON, a setting change mode start command is sent to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify the peripheral control unit 1511 that the setting change mode is to be started, and based on receiving the setting change mode start command, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform a predetermined display (such as changing settings) on the performance display device 1600. In this case, when the setting change mode is to be ended, that is, when the setting key is operated to OFF, a setting change mode end command is sent to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify the peripheral control unit 1511 that the setting change mode is to be ended, and based on receiving the setting change mode end command, the peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display performed by the performance display device 1600. In addition, the setting value confirmed as the predetermined display or the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and in this case, it may be made to disappear when the setting change mode is ended.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a may also notify the setting change mode in conjunction with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a special display that does not appear during normal play (for example, all special symbol displays may be turned off or on).

On the other hand, after the initial value setting and startup setting of the main control's built-in WDT for the main control side power-on processing (step S12) are performed, the state of the setting key is determined, and if the setting key is not turned on, the processing from step S14 onwards is executed.

In the above-mentioned main control side power-on processing, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines that various information should be erased, or when it determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when it determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it determines that the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally, it executes a second RAM clearing process in step S38 to clear data other than the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 that indicates the game state (for example, information on the probability of a bonus state, time-saving state, and prize balls) from the game control area, and then sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM (step S40). Thus, unlike the first RAM clearing process, the setting value information is not initialized in the second RAM clearing process. That is, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clearing process can be executed to clear the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f when the power is turned on, the second RAM clearing process can be executed to clear information on the game state (for example, information on the probability of winning, time-saving state, and prize balls). Also, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clearing process can be executed to clear the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clear switch 1310f can be operated to execute the second RAM clearing process to clear information on the game state (for example, information on the probability of winning, time-saving state, and prize balls). In other words, it is also possible to clear both the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 and information on the game state (for example, information on the probability of winning, time-saving state, and prize balls). In this way, one or both of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process can be selectively executed depending on the information to be cleared.

In this example, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may also make the determination. The setting key operation signal sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 may be sent via serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency), or an intermediate potential signal that is neither the power supply voltage nor the ground voltage. This is because, in order to prevent fraudulent activity such as shorting the terminals of the setting key to activate the setting change mode, it is preferable to send a signal regarding the operation of the setting key from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 using a signal that cannot be generated by shorting the terminals.

[14-2. Variable effects according to setting values]
Next, the variation performance according to each setting value will be explained. Fig. 213 is a variation pattern table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process).

In this example, a fluctuation pattern table is provided for each setting value, and the type of fluctuation pattern selected varies depending on the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, in the special symbol 1 miss variation pattern table (Fig. 213 (A)) which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process when the first special lottery result is a miss in the normal state, for example, a mini character for setting suggestion is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a miss variation pattern 25 which executes a "low setting suggestion performance" which suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 1, 2, or 3 by displaying "Maybe low?" or "Maybe 1, 2, or 3?" in the speech bubble of the mini character is selectable from setting value 1 to setting value 3, and a miss variation pattern 26 which executes a "high setting suggestion performance" which suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 4, 5, or 6 by displaying "Maybe high?" or "Maybe 4, 5, or 6?" in the speech bubble of the mini character is selectable from setting value 4 to setting value 6. Therefore, when the "high setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player will know that the setting value is at least 4 or higher, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, for example, a mini character for setting suggestion is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and "Maybe even?" or "Maybe 2, 4, or 6?" or the like is displayed in the speech bubble of the mini character, so that the "even number setting suggestion performance" that suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 2, 4, or 6 can be selected as the setting value 2, setting value 4, or setting value 6. For example, a mini character for setting suggestion is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and "Maybe odd?" or "Maybe 1, 3, or 5?" or the like is displayed in the speech bubble of the mini character, so that the "odd number setting suggestion performance" that suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 1, 3, or 5 can be selected as the setting value 1, setting value 3, or setting value 5. Therefore, the player can recognize that when the "even number setting suggestion performance" is executed in the variable performance, the setting value is 2, setting value 4, or setting value 6, and when the "odd number setting suggestion performance" is executed, the setting value is 1, setting value 3, or setting value 5. In addition, by combining this with the execution history of the "low setting suggestion effect" and the "high setting suggestion effect," it is possible to guess the setting value. That is, if an "odd setting suggestion effect" and a "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 1 or 3; if an "odd setting suggestion effect" and a "high setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 5; if an "even setting suggestion effect" and a "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 2; and if an "even setting suggestion effect" and a "high setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 4 or 6. In this way, this example provides a new gameplay that allows the player to guess the setting value based on the combination of executed setting suggestion effects out of multiple types of setting suggestion effects.

In this example, for example, a mini character for suggesting a setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a miss variation pattern 29 that executes a "highest setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6 by displaying "Maybe the highest?" or "Maybe 6?" in the speech bubble of the mini character is selectable only for a setting value of 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting, setting value 6, and interest in the game is increased. In addition, in the case of a setting value of 6, a miss variation pattern 31 that executes a "highest setting confirmation effect" in the case of a miss that does not result in a reach or a reach miss can be selected, thereby notifying the player that the setting value is confirmed as the highest setting, setting value 6, and by making the player recognize that the highest setting has been confirmed, interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table (Fig. 213 (B)), which is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process when the first special lottery result is a small win under normal conditions, for example, a mini character for setting suggestion is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and small win variation pattern 33 and small win variation pattern 34, which execute a "highest setting confirmed performance" that notifies the player that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6 by displaying "Highest setting confirmed!" or "6 confirmed!" in the speech bubble of the mini character, can only be selected with a setting value of 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmed performance" is executed in the variation performance when a small win occurs, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting, setting value 6, and the interest in the game is increased.

In addition, in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table (Fig. 213(C)), which is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process when the first special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the jackpot variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" can only be selected with a setting value of 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variation effect in the event of a jackpot, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting, setting value 6, and furthermore, the execution of the jackpot game state can give the player a double joy, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the special symbol 2 small win variation pattern table (Fig. 213 (D)) which is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the second variation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small win during the time-saving state, the small win variation pattern 34 which executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" can only be selected with a setting value of 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variation effect in the event of a small win, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting, setting value 6, and further, by winning the third small win which guides the game ball B that has entered the role winning port 2006 to the first V winning port 2007 and generates a big win game state, the player can be given a double joy, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

As described above, in this example, the probability of a small win is changed according to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, setting values 1 to 4 have a small win probability of "1 in 100," while setting values 5 and 6 have a higher probability of "1 in 90" than setting values 1 to 4. Similarly, in the time-saving state, setting values 1 to 5 have a small win probability of "1 in 10," while setting value 6 has a higher probability of "1 in 9" than setting values 1 to 5.

In addition, small win fluctuation pattern 34, which executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" selectable in the second fluctuation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small win during the time-saving state, is executed for a long period of time (155 seconds), which is longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns selectable at setting values 1 to 5, which are lower than setting value 6. Also, at setting value 6, the selection rate of small win fluctuation pattern 20, which has a longer fluctuation time compared to small win fluctuation patterns 1 to 3, is higher than at setting values 1 to 5, which are lower than setting value 6. In other words, at setting value 6, where the probability of a small win is higher than the other setting values, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect executed during the time-saving state is longer. As described above, the probability of a small win is higher at setting value 6 than at setting values 1 to 5, and the rate at which a small win is determined to be a third small win, which induces game ball B that has entered the accessory winning port 2006 to the first V winning port 2007 and generates a big win game state, is also set higher than setting values 1 to 5, making it possible to win a large number of prize balls in a short period of time. Therefore, by increasing the selection rate of small win fluctuation pattern 20 and small win fluctuation pattern 34, which have a longer fluctuation time than other small win fluctuation patterns, at setting value 6 compared to setting values 1 to 5, the number of times the fluctuation performance is performed per unit time is suppressed, and the increase in gambling ability is suppressed.

In addition, in this example, the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern are allocated in approximately the same manner for all the set values, but in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, fluctuation patterns specific to the set value 6 (miss fluctuation pattern 29 to miss fluctuation pattern 31, small win fluctuation pattern 33, small win fluctuation pattern 34, big win fluctuation pattern 34) are provided, so the allocation of the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern is different. Therefore, in this example, only the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern allocated to a specific fluctuation pattern (adjustment fluctuation pattern) in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6 are adjusted to allocate the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern. In this way, only the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern allocated to a specific fluctuation pattern are adjusted without changing the allocation of the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern for each of all the fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, so that the load of adding or deleting a fluctuation pattern is reduced, and the design of the gaming machine is made easier. In addition, a specific fluctuation pattern maintains a certain level of occurrence frequency even if the number of allocations of the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern is reduced, and is adjusted to have at least 60% of the number of allocations of the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern set in at least other setting values, so that the occurrence rate does not decrease excessively compared to other setting values.

In this way, in this example, the probability of a small win and the time it takes for the variable presentation to be executed when the special lottery result is a small win are made different depending on the settings of the pachinko machine 1, thereby achieving a balance with the gambling element.

The above setting suggestion effects (low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, even setting suggestion effect, odd setting suggestion effect, highest setting suggestion effect, highest setting confirmation effect) are most likely to be executed when the first special lottery result in the normal state is a miss or a close miss, and there are many types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result in the time-saving state is a miss or a close miss, or when the special lottery result in the normal state and the time-saving state (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is a small hit or a big hit, they are less likely to be executed than when the first special lottery result in the normal state is a miss or a close miss, and there are fewer types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. In other words, by reducing the frequency of execution of setting suggestion effects during the time-saving state or a small hit compared to when it is a miss or a close miss in the normal state, attention is drawn to the reception of the game ball B into the V winning port.

[15. Guide passage group consisting of second ball passage portion and third ball passage portion]
[15-1. When the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the second ball passage section]
As an embodiment different from the above, a case where a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center member 2500 is provided will be described with reference to Figures 214 and 215. Figure 214 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the second ball passage portion 2521, and Figure 215 is a specific example of a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404.

214, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of a game ball B is provided slightly below (near) the entrance at the upper end of the second ball passage section 2521. This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that enters the second ball passage section 2521 always passes through it. In other words, when the game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the first ball passage section 2506 and hit the ball hitting section 1006 (so-called right hit), it enters the second ball passage section 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, and when the game ball B enters the second ball passage section 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the first ball passage 2506 and not come into contact with the ball hitting portion 1006 (slightly weaker strength than a right hit), there is a high probability that it will enter the third ball passage 2522. However, if game ball B enters the third ball passage 2522, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the second ball passage 2521, so the game ball B will not be detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not game ball B has been thrown into the second ball passage section 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that game ball B has been thrown into the second ball passage section 2521, and when the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of game ball B, it determines that game ball B has not been thrown into the second ball passage section 2521.

In this embodiment, it is necessary to change the way game ball B is hit (the firing strength) depending on the game state, and to change the area and passage into which game ball B is hit. First, during a small win game, the special feature winning opening 2006 provided inside the second ball passage section 2521 is opened, and game ball B is required to enter the open special feature winning opening 2006. For this reason, during a small win game, game ball B needs to be hit (so-called right hit) with enough strength to enter the first ball passage section 2506 and hit the ball hitting section 1006 so that game ball B enters the second ball passage section 2521 of the guide passage group 2520.

In addition, during a jackpot game, the large prize opening 2005 located at the bottom right of the center member 2500 opens, and the player is required to insert game ball B into the open large prize opening 2005. However, the game ball is configured so that there is a higher probability of the game ball B entering the large prize opening 2005 if it is discharged from the exit of the third ball passage section 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 than from the exit of the second ball passage section 2521. In addition, during the time-saving state, the second starting hole 2004 provided at the lower right of the center member 2500 is opened based on the ball entering the normal winning hole 2003 provided at the lower right of the center member 2500, and it is required to enter the game ball B into the second starting hole 2004 in the open state, but it is configured so that the game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 with a higher probability of being discharged from the exit of the third ball passage section 2522 than from the exit of the second ball passage section 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. For this reason, during the big win game and the time-saving state, it is preferable to hit the game ball B with a strength (somewhat weaker than a right hit) that does not enter the first ball passage section 2506 and does not hit the ball hitting section 1006 so that the game ball B enters the third ball passage section 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

In addition, during the normal state, it is required that the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 provided below the center member 2500. Therefore, during the normal state, it is necessary to hit the game ball B with enough strength to enter the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center member 2500 when viewed from the front (to the left of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame) so that the game ball B flows down the left side area of the center member 2500 where the game ball B can enter the first starting hole 2002 (so-called left hit).

In this embodiment, the way in which game ball B is shot (the launch strength) needs to be changed depending on the game state, and the area or passage into which game ball B is shot needs to be changed. However, if game ball B has not been shot into the recommended area or passage, the player is alerted to shoot game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, when the game state is not such that game ball B should be shot into the second ball passage section 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, if the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage section 2521 detects the passage of game ball B and this state continues for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

First, during a jackpot game or during the time-saving state, it is recommended that game ball B be shot into the third ball passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, but when the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage 2521 detects the passage of game ball B, it determines that game ball B has been shot into the second ball passage 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in five seconds), it warns the player that game ball B should be shot into the third ball passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215(A), the first warning effect is executed in the effect display device 1600 to notify the player of the message "Please shoot into the third ball passage." This allows the player to understand that during a jackpot game or in the time-saving state, the player should change the hitting method to a strength (slightly weaker than a right hit) that will not allow the ball to enter the first ball passage 2506 and hit the ball hitting portion 1006, and hit the game ball B into the third ball passage 2522. If the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) after the first warning effect is executed, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into the second ball passage 2521 has been resolved, and the first warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B during a jackpot game or during the time-saving state, it determines that game ball B has been thrown into the second ball passage section 2521, starts a monitoring timer, and increments the count value each time the right detection sensor 2404 detects game ball B during monitoring by the monitoring timer. If the state in which game ball B has been thrown into the second ball passage section 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the monitoring timer starts (for example, if five or more game balls B are detected in five seconds), the first warning effect is executed, whereas if the state does not continue for the predetermined time (for example, if the detection ends with less than five game balls B in five seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has been thrown into the second ball passage section 2521 has been resolved, and the first warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. In addition, after the monitoring timer starts, if the game state changes from a jackpot game or time-saving state and the state in which the game ball B should not be shot into the third ball passage section 2522 is no longer in effect, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Then, after the first warning effect is executed, the monitoring timer is started, and if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B has been shot into the second ball passage section 2521 is resolved and the first warning effect is terminated. In addition, if the game state changes from a jackpot game or time-saving state, the state in which the game ball B should not be shot into the third ball passage section 2522 is no longer in effect, and the first warning effect is terminated.

In addition, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center member 2500, but when the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B, it determines that the game ball B has been hit into the second ball passage 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in five seconds), it warns the player that the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center member 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (B), the performance display device 1600 executes a second warning performance that notifies the player of the message "Please hit to the left". As a result, during the normal state, the player can understand that the ball should be hit into the area on the left side of the center member 2500 by changing the hitting method to a strength that advances to the left side of the highest part of the outer circumferential surface of the center member 2500 when viewed from the front (left side of the upper right part of the front frame 2502a). If the right detection sensor 2404 continues not to detect the passage of game ball B for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has been thrown into the second ball passage section 2521 has been resolved, and the second warning presentation is terminated.

In more detail, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B during the normal state, it is determined that game ball B has been thrown into the second ball passage 2521, and a monitoring timer is started, and the count value is incremented each time game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. If the state in which game ball B has been thrown into the second ball passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the monitoring timer starts (for example, if five or more game balls B are detected in five seconds), a second warning effect is executed, whereas if the state does not continue for the predetermined time (for example, if the detection ends with less than five game balls B in five seconds), the state in which game ball B has been thrown into the second ball passage 2521 is deemed to have been resolved, so the second warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. In addition, if the game state is switched from the normal state after the start of the monitoring timer and the state where the game ball B should not be shot into the area to the left of the center member 2500 is no longer present, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Then, after the second warning effect is executed, the monitoring timer is started, and if the state where the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state where the game ball B has been shot into the second ball passage portion 2521 is resolved and the second warning effect is terminated. In addition, if the game state is switched from the normal state, the state where the game ball B should not be shot into the area to the left of the center member 2500 is no longer present, and the second warning effect is terminated.

As described above, when the game state is not such that game ball B should be shot into the second ball passage section 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, if the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage section 2521 continues to detect the passage of game ball B for a predetermined period of time, a warning screen (first and second warning displays) is displayed on the display device 1600, and the content of the warning changes depending on the game state. This allows the player to accurately understand which area or passage is recommended, even if game ball B is shot into the second ball passage section 2521 when the game state is not such that game ball B should be shot into the second ball passage section 2521.

On the other hand, during a small win game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second ball passage section 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but if the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage section 2521 does not detect the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the second ball passage section 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it warns the player that the game ball B should be hit into the second ball passage section 2521. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (C), the third warning performance is executed in the performance display device 1600 to notify the player of the message "Please hit into the second ball passage section". As a result, during a small win game, the player can understand that the ball should be hit into the second ball passage section 2521 by changing the hitting method to a strength that enters the first ball passage section 2506 and hits the ball hitting section 1006. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the second ball passage portion 2521 has been resolved, and the third warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during a small win game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been shot into the second ball passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is started. After the monitoring timer is started, if the state in which the game ball B has not been shot into the second ball passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the third warning effect is executed, whereas if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been shot into the second ball passage 2521 has been resolved, and the third warning effect is not executed, and the information of the monitoring timer, etc. is cleared. In addition, if the game state is switched from the small win game after the monitoring timer is started and the state in which the game ball B should be shot into the second ball passage 2521 is no longer, the information of the monitoring timer, etc. is also cleared. After the third warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, the state in which game ball B has not been thrown into the second ball passage 2521 is resolved and the fourth warning effect is terminated. In addition, if the game state is switched from a small win game, the third warning effect is terminated as the state in which game ball B should not be thrown into the second ball passage 2521 is no longer in place.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (near) the entrance at the upper end of the second ball passage section 2521, but it may be located in any position through which the game ball B that enters the second ball passage section 2521 will always pass, and may be provided, for example, at the entrance at the upper end of the second ball passage section 2521, at the exit at the lower end of the second ball passage section 2521, or inside the second ball passage section 2521.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided upstream of the special feature winning opening 2006 provided inside the second ball passage section 2521, but it may be provided downstream of the special feature winning opening 2006. In such a case, when game ball B is shot into the second ball passage section 2521 during a small win game, there is a high possibility that game ball B will enter the open special feature winning opening 2006. Therefore, game ball B passes less frequently through the right detection sensor 2404 located downstream, and it is possible to prevent game ball B from passing through excessively and causing a malfunction in the right detection sensor 2404.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, if a shot area instruction display (for example, a right-hit display consisting of a right arrow image or a left-hit display consisting of a left arrow image) is separately performed to allow the player to always know in which manner the game ball B should be shot in each game state, it is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to obstruct this shot area instruction display. For example, it is desirable to partition and provide a "display area for displaying the shot area instruction display" in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and partition and provide a "display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" in the upper left part of a display area of the effect display device 1600 separate from that area, so that the respective guidance is not obstructed by overlapping.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings may be realized as audio effects rather than displays. In that case, it is desirable to set the priority of allocation to the finite number of channels for outputting sound to be higher than the various sound effects set during normal mode, jackpot play, or time-saving mode, so that the sound is output as much as possible even in situations where there are no vacant (unused) channels among the finite number of channels. This makes it possible to effectively prevent players who are unfamiliar with the gameplay that involves hitting a variety of different game balls B from being disadvantaged.

[15-2. When detection sensors are provided in the second ball passage section and the third ball passage section]
As an embodiment different from the above, a case in which a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center member 2500 and a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the third ball passage portion 2522 are provided will be described with reference to Figures 216 and 217. Figure 216 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, and Figure 217 is a specific example of a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405.

As shown in FIG. 216, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of a game ball B is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance at the top of the second ball passage section 2521, and a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the passage of a game ball B is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance at the top of the third ball passage section 2522. This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that enters the second ball passage section 2521 always passes through it. In other words, when the game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the first ball passage section 2506 and hit the ball hitting section 1006 (so-called right hit), it enters the second ball passage section 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but when the game ball B enters the second ball passage section 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is located in a position where game ball B that enters the third ball passage section 2522 always passes through it. In other words, if game ball B is hit with a strength that allows it to enter the first ball passage section 2506 and not come into contact with the ball hitting section 1006 (a strength somewhat weaker than a right hit), there is a high probability that it will enter the third ball passage section 2522, but if game ball B does enter the third ball passage section 2522, that game ball B will be detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not a game ball B has been shot into the second ball passage portion 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, and monitors whether or not a game ball B has been shot into the third ball passage portion 2522 based on the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that game ball B has been inserted into the second ball passage section 2521, and when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B, it determines that game ball B has been inserted into the third ball passage section 2522. If neither the right detection sensor 2404 nor the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B, it determines that game ball B has not been inserted into either the second ball passage section 2521 or the third ball passage section 2522.

In this embodiment, as described above in detail, it is necessary to change the way the game ball B is shot (the launch strength) according to the game state, and to change the area or passage into which the game ball B is shot. If the game ball B is not shot into the recommended area or passage, the player is alerted to shoot the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, when the game ball B is in the normal state of being shot into the area to the left of the center member 2500, if either the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage section 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the third ball passage section 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time, the player is alerted.

In more detail, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center member 2500, but when the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the second ball passage 2521, and when the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the third ball passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the third ball passage 2522, and when these states continue for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in five seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405), a warning is given to the player that the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center member 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217(A), the fourth warning performance is executed in the performance display device 1600 to notify the player of the message "Please hit to the left". This allows the player to understand that during the normal state, the player should change the hitting technique to a strength that advances the ball further to the left of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center member 2500 when viewed from the front (left of the upper right part of the front frame 2502a), and hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center member 2500. If the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into the second ball passage 2521 or the third ball passage 2522 has been resolved, and the fourth warning presentation is terminated.

In more detail, when the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B during normal operation, it is determined that game ball B has been inserted into the second ball passage section 2521 or the third ball passage section 2522, and a monitoring timer is started. During monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is incremented each time game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405. Then, if the state where the game ball B is shot into the second ball passage section 2521 or the third ball passage section 2522 continues for a predetermined time after the monitoring timer starts (for example, if five or more game balls B are detected in five seconds), the fourth warning effect is executed, whereas if the state does not continue for the predetermined time (for example, if the detection ends with less than five game balls B in five seconds), the state where the game ball B is shot into the second ball passage section 2521 or the third ball passage section 2522 is considered to have been resolved, and the fourth warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, if the game state is switched from the normal state after the monitoring timer starts and the state where the game ball B should be shot into the area to the left of the center member 2500 is no longer present, information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. After the fourth warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 continues not to detect the passage of game ball B for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), the fourth warning effect is terminated as the state in which game ball B is inserted into the second ball passage section 2521 or the third ball passage section 2522 has been resolved. In addition, if the game state is switched from the normal state, the fourth warning effect is terminated as the state in which game ball B should not be inserted into the area to the left of the center member 2500 is no longer in place.

During a small win game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second ball passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. If the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage 2521 does not detect the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the second ball passage 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it warns the player that the game ball B should be hit into the second ball passage 2521. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (B), the fifth warning performance is executed in the performance display device 1600 to notify the player of the message "Please hit into the second ball passage." As a result, during a small win game, the player can understand that the ball should be hit into the second ball passage 2521 by changing the hitting method to a strength that allows the ball to enter the first ball passage 2506 and hit the ball hitting portion 1006. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the second ball passage portion 2521 has been resolved, and the fifth warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during a small win game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been shot into the second ball passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is started. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state in which the game ball B has not been shot into the second ball passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth warning performance is executed, whereas if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B has not been shot into the second ball passage 2521 is resolved, and the fifth warning performance is not executed, and the information of the monitoring timer, etc. is cleared. In addition, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the game state is switched from a small win game and the state in which the game ball B should be shot into the second ball passage 2521 is no longer, the information of the monitoring timer, etc. is also cleared. After the fifth warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, the fifth warning effect is terminated as the state in which game ball B has not been thrown into the second ball passage 2521 has been resolved. In addition, if the game state is switched from a small win game, the fifth warning effect is terminated as the state in which game ball B should not be thrown into the second ball passage 2521 has been resolved.

On the other hand, during a jackpot game or during the time-saving state, it is recommended to hit game ball B into the third ball passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, but if the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the third ball passage 2522 does not detect the passage of game ball B, it is determined that game ball B has not been hit into the third ball passage 2522, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), a warning is issued to the player that game ball B should be hit into the third ball passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217(C), the sixth warning performance is executed in the performance display device 1600, which notifies the player of the message "Please hit into the third ball passage." This allows the player to understand that during a jackpot game or in the time-saving state, the player should change the hitting method to a strength (slightly weaker than a right hit) that will allow the ball to enter the first ball passage 2506 and not come into contact with the ball hitting portion 1006, and hit game ball B into the third ball passage 2522. When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that the state in which game ball B has not been hit into the third ball passage 2522 has been resolved, and the warning presentation is terminated.

More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of game ball B during a jackpot game or a time-saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has not been thrown into the third ball passage section 2522, and the monitoring timer is started. After the monitoring timer is started, if the state in which the game ball B has not been thrown into the third ball passage section 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the sixth warning effect is executed, whereas if the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B within the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been thrown into the third ball passage section 2522 has been resolved, and the sixth warning effect is not executed, and the information on the monitoring timer, etc. is cleared. In addition, if the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time-saving state after the monitoring timer is started and the state in which the game ball B should not be thrown into the third ball passage section 2522 is no longer in place, the information on the monitoring timer, etc. is also cleared. After the sixth warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B, the sixth warning effect is terminated as the state in which game ball B has not been thrown into the third ball passage section 2522 has been resolved. In addition, if the game state is switched from a jackpot game or a time-saving state, the sixth warning effect is terminated as the state in which game ball B should not be thrown into the third ball passage section 2522 is no longer in place.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance at the upper end of the second ball passage section 2521, but it may be provided at any position through which the game ball B that enters the second ball passage section 2521 always passes. For example, it may be provided at the entrance at the upper end of the second ball passage section 2521, the exit at the lower end of the second ball passage section 2521, or inside the second ball passage section 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance at the upper end of the third ball passage section 2522, but it may be provided at any position through which the game ball B that enters the third ball passage section 2522 always passes. For example, it may be provided at the entrance at the upper end of the third ball passage section 2522, the exit at the lower end of the third ball passage section 2522, or inside the third ball passage section 2522.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided upstream of the special feature winning opening 2006 provided inside the second ball passage section 2521, but it may also be provided downstream of the special feature winning opening 2006. In this case, when game ball B is shot into the second ball passage section 2521 during a small win game, there is a high possibility that game ball B will enter the open special feature winning opening 2006. Therefore, game ball B passes less frequently through the right detection sensor 2404 located downstream, and it is possible to prevent malfunction of the right detection sensor 2404 caused by game ball B passing through it excessively.

In addition, in this embodiment, detection sensors (right detection sensor 2404, left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, but one detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the guide passage group 2520 always passes through. For example, one detection sensor is provided in a passage before the game ball B that entered the first ball passage section 2506 branches into either the second ball passage section 2521 or the third ball passage section 2522, making it possible to detect whether the game ball B enters the guide passage group 2520 by the one detection sensor. In other words, when one detection sensor detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that game ball B has been thrown into the guide passage group 2520, and when one detection sensor does not detect the passage of game ball B, it is determined that game ball B has not been thrown into the guide passage group 2520. Even in such a case, when the normal state is one in which game ball B should be thrown into the area to the left of the center member 2500, if the state in which one detection sensor detects the passage of game ball B continues for a predetermined time, a warning is given to the player, so that the player can at least know whether game ball B should be thrown into the area to the left of the center member 2500 or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, if a shot area instruction display (for example, a right-hand shot display consisting of a right arrow image or a left-hand shot display consisting of a left arrow image) is separately performed to allow the player to always know in which manner the game ball B should be shot in each game state, it is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to obstruct this shot area instruction display. For example, it is desirable to partition and provide a "display area for displaying the shot area instruction display" in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and partition and provide a "display area for displaying the fourth to sixth warning effects" in the upper left part of a display area of the effect display device 1600 separate from that area, so that the respective guidance is not obstructed by overlapping.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are exemplified by displaying a specified warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings may be realized as audio effects rather than displays. In that case, it is desirable to set the priority of allocation to the finite number of channels for outputting audio to be higher than the various sound effects set during normal play, jackpot play, or time-saving play, so that the sound is output as much as possible even in situations where there are no free (unused) channels among the finite number of channels. This makes it possible to effectively prevent players who are unfamiliar with the gameplay that involves hitting a variety of different game balls B from being disadvantaged.

[15-3. When a ball jam relief hole is provided in the overlapping portion where the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion are aligned in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, a case where a ball jam relief hole 2523 capable of removing ball jamming in the rear third ball passage portion 2522 is provided in the overlapping portion 2520a where the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-to-rear direction will be described with reference to Figures 218 and 219. Figures 218 and 219 are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment in which the ball jam relief hole 2523 is provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522.

As described above in detail, the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 have an overlapping section 2520a that appears to overlap from the front by lining up with each other in the front-to-rear direction in the section extending up and down to the left of the device winning opening 2006 in the second ball passage section 2521. In this overlapping section 2520a, the third ball passage section 2522 is located to the rear of the second ball passage section 2521.

218 and 219(A), the overlapping portion 2520a, where the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, is provided with a ball jam relief hole 2523 into which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521, and which can remove a ball jam in the rear third ball passage portion 2522 by inserting the rod-shaped member. Specifically, the ball jam relief hole 2523 is provided on the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 and at the portion adjacent to the rear side of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the front side of the third ball passage portion 2522. In addition, the ball jamming elimination hole 2523 provided at the portion where the rear side of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the front side of the third ball passage portion 2522 are adjacent is located so as to coincide with the ball jamming elimination hole 2523 provided on the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 when viewed from the front, and is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 to the third ball passage portion 2522. This allows a rod-shaped member to be smoothly inserted from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 to the third ball passage portion 2522. In other words, when a ball jam occurs in the third ball passage portion 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522, the rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B jammed in the rear third ball passage portion 2522, and the ball jam in the third ball passage portion 2522 can be removed by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-rear direction.

When a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 consisting of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, the cover member should also have a ball jam relief hole 2523 at a position that coincides with the ball jam relief hole 2523 provided on the front side of the second ball passage section 2521 when viewed from the front. In this way, when a ball jam occurs in the third ball passage section 2522, a rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the third ball passage section 2522 without removing the cover member.

In addition, the ball jam relief hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. This allows the rod-shaped member to be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the up-down and left-right directions when inserted from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522. In other words, when a ball jam occurs in the third ball passage portion 2522, the ball jam in the third ball passage portion 2522 can be easily removed by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-rear direction but also in the up-down and left-right directions.

In addition, multiple ball jamming relief holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in the area extending up and down of overlapping portion 2520a, where second ball passage portion 2521 and third ball passage portion 2522 are aligned in the front-to-rear direction. As a result, no matter where ball jamming occurs in the third ball passage portion 2522 in overlapping portion 2520a, a rod-shaped member can be inserted through the ball jamming relief hole 2523 provided in a location close to that location, and the ball jamming in the third ball passage portion 2522 can be easily removed.

The second ball passage section 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 has a passage that bends only in the left-right direction, while the third ball passage section 2522 has a passage that is formed in a complex shape that bends not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-back direction, and ball clogging is more likely to occur in the third ball passage section 2522 than in the second ball passage section 2521. In addition, the overlapping section 2520a where the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 are lined up in the front-back direction is away from both the inlet, which is the upper end of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, and the outlet, which is the lower end, and is a part that is bent from the inlet or outlet, so even if a rod-shaped member is inserted from the inlet or outlet, the rod-shaped member will not reach that part. In this regard, the overlapping portion 2520a, in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, is provided with a ball jamming relief hole 2523 into which a rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522. This makes it possible to easily remove ball jams not only in the second ball passage portion 2521 at the front of the overlapping portion 2520a, but also in the case of ball jams in the third ball passage portion 2522 at the rear, by inserting a rod-shaped member.

As described above, in the overlapping portion 2520a where the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are aligned in the fore-and-aft direction, a ball jam relief hole 2523 is provided penetrating in the fore-and-aft direction from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 to the third ball passage portion 2522. Below, another example of a ball jam relief hole 2523 capable of removing ball jams in the rear third ball passage portion 2522 is shown.

219(B), the left side of the third ball passage section 2522 in the overlapping section 2520a where the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction may be provided with a ball jamming relief hole 2523 into which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the third ball passage section 2522, and the ball jamming in the third ball passage section 2522 can be removed by inserting the rod-shaped member. In such a case, when a ball jam occurs in the third ball passage section 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the third ball passage section 2522 to contact the game ball B jammed in the third ball passage section 2522, and the ball jamming in the third ball passage section 2522 can be removed by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, a transparent light guide plate 3102 is provided to the left of the guide passage group 2520 consisting of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522. The light guide plate 3102 is located behind the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, making it possible to insert a rod-shaped member from the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522 without being obstructed by the light guide plate 3102.

As a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219(C), the overlapping portion 2520a, in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, is provided with a ball jam relief hole 2523 that penetrates in the front-rear direction from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522, but the shape of the ball jam relief hole 2523 may not be circular, but may be formed as a slit extending in the vertical direction. In such a case, when a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522, the rod-shaped member can be moved significantly in the vertical direction, and the ball jam in the third ball passage portion 2522 can be easily removed.

In addition, near the entrance, which is the upper end of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. As a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219(D), at the location where the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, a ball jam relief hole 2523 may be provided into which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the third ball passage section 2522, and by inserting the rod-shaped member, a ball jam relief hole 2523 may be provided that can remove the ball jam in the second ball passage section 2521 on the right side (rear side). In other words, the ball jam relief hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate from the left side of the third ball passage section 2522 toward the second ball passage section 2521 in the left-right direction. In such a case, when a ball becomes clogged in the second ball passage 2521, a rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the third ball passage 2522, allowing the rod-shaped member to come into contact with the game ball B that has become clogged in the second ball passage 2521 on the right side (rear side), and the ball can be removed from the second ball passage 2521 by moving the rod-shaped member left and right.

Furthermore, as in the first and third variant examples, when a ball jamming relief hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522, it is possible to remove ball jamming in the third ball passage portion 2522 by inserting a rod-shaped member through the ball jamming relief hole 2523 from the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522. However, since the light guide plate 3102 is provided behind but adjacent to the third ball passage portion 2522, there is a possibility that the rod-shaped member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102 when inserting the rod-shaped member through the ball jamming relief hole 2523. If the light guide plate 3102 is scratched by the rod-shaped member, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a pattern (first pattern 3110, second pattern 3120), the scratched portion unrelated to the pattern also guides light (reflects light), but if the scratched portion overlaps with the pattern, the pattern becomes difficult to see. For this reason, it is preferable not to provide a light guide decoration area where the pattern is displayed in the right region of the light guide plate 3102, which is the portion adjacent to the third ball passage portion 2522. The light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, but the light guide plate 3102 may be manually moved to the left so as to move away from the third ball passage portion 2522, and when inserting a rod-shaped member through the ball jamming elimination hole 2523, the rod-shaped member may be moved to a position where it does not contact the light guide plate 3102 as a preliminary step. Also, a movable member may be provided on the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522, which can be moved between a position where it hides the ball jamming elimination hole 2523 provided on the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522 and a position where it does not hide the ball jamming elimination hole 2523, and when inserting a rod-shaped member through the ball jamming elimination hole 2523, the movable member may be moved to a position where it does not hide the ball jamming elimination hole 2523 as a preliminary step. In this configuration, when there is no need to remove a ball jammed in the third ball passage section 2522, the movable member is positioned to conceal the ball jam relief hole 2523, making it difficult for the player to see the ball jam relief hole 2523, which has the advantage that the decorativeness of the entire game, including the third ball passage section 2522, is not compromised.

[15-4. Ball clogging prevention structure near the outlet of the parallel second and third ball passages]
As explained in Fig. 149A(a), when the game ball B is struck with enough force to strike the ball strike portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the periphery of the play area 5a (so-called right strike), the game ball B that strikes the ball strike portion 1006 enters the second ball passage portion 2521. The game ball B that entered the second ball passage portion 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the role winning opening door 2511 that closes the role winning opening 2006 in the middle of the second ball passage portion 2521, and is released downward from the right exit at the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 toward the attacker unit 2400 side. The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second ball passage section 2521 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacca unit 2400 so as to enter either the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430, the normal winning port 2003, or the area to the left of the normal winning port 2003 with equal probability.

On the other hand, as explained in FIG. 149A(b), when the game ball B shot into the first ball passage section 2506 enters the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522 and flows through the third ball passage section 2522, it is twisted backward and aligned in the front-to-rear direction with the second ball passage section 2521 at the overlapping section 2520a, and then twisted forward and released downward from the left exit of the second ball passage section 2521 toward the attacca unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the third ball passage section 2522 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacca unit 2400 to enter either the normal winning opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003, and in rare cases, is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430.

The game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released onto the lower right rail 1004 from the release opening 2435, which is lower than the big winning opening 2005, and is discharged outside the game area 5a from the outlet 1008.

At the bottom end of the guide passage group 2520, the outlets of the second ball passage section 2521 are arranged side by side, with the outlet of the second ball passage section 2521 located on the right side and the outlet of the third ball passage section 2522 located on the left side, so that near the outlets of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, a large amount of game balls B discharged from those outlets flow in a short time, making it easy for balls to get stuck below those outlets. In this regard, below the outlets of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 is provided to the right of the normal winning port 2003, and when the game ball B enters the first opening 2431, it is guided to the outlet 1008 through the attacca right passage 2430. As a result, near the outlets of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, some of the game balls B discharged from those outlets are guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008, making it difficult for the game balls B to stagnate near those outlets and preventing ball clogging from occurring. Even if ball clogging occurs below the outlets of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, the game balls B discharged from those outlets are guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008, preventing the game balls B from piling up inside the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522.

In this way, the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the second ball passage 2521 and the third ball passage 2522, but its position is set so that the exit of the second ball passage 2521 is closer to the exit of the third ball passage 2522 than to the exit of the second ball passage 2521. Inside the second ball passage 2521, a special prize winning port 2006 that is open during a small win game is provided, but if game balls B pile up to the position of the special prize winning port 2006 provided inside the second ball passage 2521 due to ball clogging below the exit of the second ball passage 2521, more game balls B than expected will flow into the open special prize winning port 2006, allowing the player to obtain an unfair advantage. In this regard, the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 is arranged so that the exit of the second ball passage section 2521 is closer than the exit of the third ball passage section 2522. Therefore, even if ball clogging occurs below the exits of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, the game ball B near the exit of the second ball passage section 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008, and game balls B can be prevented from piling up to the position of the special prize opening 2006 arranged inside the second ball passage section 2521.

In this embodiment, below the exits of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, to the right of the normal winning port 2003, a first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the outlet 1008 is provided, but an outlet other than the outlet 1008 may be provided in the attacca right passage 2430, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 may be discharged from the other outlet to the outside of the game area 5a. Even in such a case, a part of the game ball B discharged from the exits of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 can be efficiently guided to the outside of the game area 5a from an outlet other than the outlet 1008, making it difficult for the game ball B to stagnate near those exits, and preventing ball clogging.

In addition, below the outlets of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the outlet 1008 is provided at a position close to the outlet of the second ball passage section 2521, but a passage capable of guiding the game ball B to the outlet 1008 or an outlet other than the outlet 1008 capable of discharging the game ball B outside the game area 5a may also be provided at a position close to the outlet of the third ball passage section 2522. Even in such a case, a portion of the game ball B discharged from the outlets of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 can be efficiently guided outside the game area 5a, making it difficult for the game ball B to stagnate near those outlets, and preventing ball clogging from occurring.

In the above, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the outlet 1008 is provided near the exit of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, but a passage capable of guiding the game ball B to the outlet 1008 or an outlet other than the outlet 1008 capable of discharging the game ball B outside the game area 5a may also be provided near the entrance of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522. Below, another example is shown in which a second outlet 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B outside the game area 5a is provided near the entrance of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522. Figure 220 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second outlet 1013 is provided near the entrance of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522.

220, a second outlet 1013 capable of discharging game ball B outside the game area 5a is provided between the inlet at the top end of the second ball passage section 2521 and the inlet at the top end of the third ball passage section 2522. In this configuration, when game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the first ball passage section 2506 and hit the ball hitting section 1006 (so-called right hit), there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the second ball passage section 2521, but a portion of the game ball B that is hit will enter the second outlet 1013 adjacent to the inlet of the second ball passage section 2521. Similarly, when game ball B is hit with a strength (somewhat weaker than a right hit) that will cause it to enter the first ball passage 2506 and not come into contact with the ball hitting portion 1006, there is a high probability that it will enter the third ball passage 2522, but part of the game ball B that was hit will enter the second outlet 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the third ball passage 2522. In other words, part of the game ball B that was hit to enter the first ball passage 2506 will enter the second outlet 1013. As a result, regardless of whether the player aims at the entrance of the second ball passage section 2521 or the entrance of the third ball passage section 2522, a portion of the game ball B that is shot to enter the first ball passage section 2506 is guided outside the game area 5a from the second outlet 1013, so that fewer game balls B enter the interior from those entrances, preventing ball jams from occurring inside the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522.

In addition to the above, an outlet other than the outlet 1008 that can discharge the game ball B outside the game area 5a may be provided only when a ball jam occurs inside the second ball passage section 2521 or the third ball passage section 2522. Below is shown another example of a case in which a second outlet 1013 that can discharge the game ball B outside the game area 5a is provided near the internal exit of the second ball passage section 2521. Figure 221 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second outlet 1013 is provided near the internal exit of the second ball passage section 2521.

As shown in FIG. 221(A), a second outlet 1013 is provided slightly above the outlet at the lower end of the second ball passage section 2521, which opens to the front of the game area 5a (game board 5) that is flush with the rear surface of the second ball passage section 2521 and can discharge the game ball B outside the game area 5a. In addition, a special prize winning port 2006 that is open during a small win game is provided inside the second ball passage section 2521, and the second outlet 1013 is provided at a position downstream of the special prize winning port 2006. In this configuration, if there is no ball clogging below the second outlet 1013, such as below the exit of the second ball passage section 2521, when the game ball B enters the second ball passage section 2521, it passes directly in front of the second outlet 1013 without entering the second outlet 1013.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 221(B), if ball clogging occurs below the second outlet 1013, such as below the exit of the second ball passage section 2521, when game balls B have piled up to the position of the second outlet 1013, game balls B that have circulated through the second ball passage section 2521 will enter the second outlet 1013. In other words, inside the second ball passage section 2521, game balls B are not allowed to pile up to a position above the second outlet 1013. As described above, inside the second ball passage 2521, there is provided a feature winning port 2006 that is open during a small win game. However, if game balls B pile up up to the position of the feature winning port 2006 provided inside the second ball passage 2521 due to ball clogging near the exit of the second ball passage 2521, more game balls B than expected will flow into the open feature winning port 2006, allowing the player to obtain an unfair advantage. In this regard, a second outlet 1013 is provided downstream of the device winning port 2006 inside the second ball passage section 2521, which can discharge the game ball B outside the game area 5a only if a ball jam occurs inside the second ball passage section 2521. Therefore, even if a ball jam occurs near the outlet of the second ball passage section 2521, the game ball B can be discharged from the second outlet 1013 outside the game area 5a before the game balls B pile up to the position of the device winning port 2006 provided inside the second ball passage section 2521, preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unfair advantage.

[16. Outlet detection when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, after power is turned on, when the game ball B enters the ball entry holes (the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the big prize hole 2005, the accessory prize hole 2006, etc.) provided on the game board 5, and when the game ball B enters the out hole 1008, the number of balls that enter each hole is counted, a predetermined calculation is performed, and the calculation result is displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, the base monitor 1310h) as information about the pachinko machine 1. In addition, when an abnormality occurs, whether the calculation is continued or stopped (stopped) is different depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe, and when a severe abnormality occurs, the calculation is stopped (stopped). The execution state of the calculation when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of the calculation when an abnormality occurs.

First, in the main control board 1310, when a game ball B enters the ball entry ports provided on the game board 5, namely, the general entry port 2001, the normal entry port 2003, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the large entry port 2005, and the special entry port 2006, the general entry port sensor 3001, the normal entry port sensor 2401, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the large entry port sensor 2403, and the special entry port sensor 2513 detect the game ball B, and add it to the corresponding entry ball number counter. By using such entry ball number counters, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered each entry port out of the game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a.

In addition, in the main control board 1310, when a game ball B is discharged to the outside from the outlet 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033 detects the game ball B, and both add it to the out number counter. This out number counter makes it possible to know the number of game balls B that have entered the outlet 1008 out of the game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a.

The main control board 1310 performs a predetermined calculation using the ball entry counter and the out counter. As a specific example, by adding up all the ball entry counters, it is possible to calculate the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry openings provided on the game board 5 out of the game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a. Also, by adding up all the ball entry counters and the out counter, it is possible to calculate the total number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a.

The above-mentioned calculation results are displayed on a specified display device as information about the pachinko machine 1. However, the information displayed on the specified display device can also be the number of game balls B that have entered each entry port or exit port 1008 based on the entry ball number counter and the out number counter. Examples of the specified display device include the performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 and a hall computer managed externally by the hall. In addition, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the information may be displayed on the monitor (base monitor 1310h). Of these, when information is displayed on the performance display device 1600, it can be grasped from a position where both the player and the hall can see it, whereas when information is displayed on the hall computer or the monitor (base monitor 1310h) of the main control board 1310, it can be grasped from a position where only the hall can see it.

In addition, when the total number of game balls B that have entered the entrances provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that have entered the exit 1008 are displayed as information to be displayed on a predetermined display device, it is possible to determine from the ratio of these whether the degree to which game balls B enter the entrances and the exit 1008 is within a normal numerical range. When a normal game is being played, game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a enter the entrances at a predetermined ratio, but if the ratio of the total number of game balls B that have entered the entrances to the exit 1008 is too high, for example, it is possible to suspect that the balls are being allowed to enter the entrances through fraudulent practices, and if the ratio of the total number of game balls B that have entered the exit 1008 to the entrances is too high, it is possible to suspect that the balls are being allowed to enter the exit 1008 through fraudulent practices.

In the main control board 1310, when a game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the payout detection sensor 591 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. This payout number counter makes it possible to know the number of game balls B paid out to the player. The total number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a calculated by all of the ball entry counters and the out number counter is the total number of game balls B used by the player, so by calculating the difference between this and the number of game balls B paid out to the player, the net increase in the number of game balls B can be calculated, and such net increase in the number of game balls B can be displayed on a specified display device.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that enters the ball entrance or exit 1008 on the game board 5 is discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment of the game hall) through the ball exit 629 provided in the main frame 4 (see FIG. 93), and a frame-side exit sensor capable of detecting the game ball B passing through the ball exit 629 is provided. When the frame-side exit sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball exit 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters the ball entrance or exit 1008 provided on the game board 5, when the game ball B that has joined the ball entrance or exit 1008 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the frame-side exit sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame-side exit number counter. This frame-side out counter allows you to know the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, as described above, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 also passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then is discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall) through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge outlet 629, so that the frame side outlet sensor can detect not only the game ball B shot into the game area 5a, but also the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. Here, in consideration of the purpose of grasping the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a, it is desirable to exclude (invalidate) the number of game balls B that have been discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 and perform various calculations. In response to this, in a configuration in which the frame side outlet sensor detects the game balls B that have been discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, it is desirable to provide another ball removal detection sensor (not shown) upstream of the frame side outlet sensor, so that the game balls B that have been discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 are detected by this ball removal detection sensor, and further, to subtract the number of game balls B detected by the ball removal detection sensor from the out number counter. As a result, a game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor and first subtracted from the out number counter, and then detected by the frame side outlet sensor and added to the out number counter, essentially preventing the number of game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 from being reflected in the out number counter. Incidentally, this configuration does not cause any problems when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized and a game ball B is released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 (when the payout device 580 performs the ball removal action), because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side outlet sensor can perform detection itself. However, this configuration eliminates malfunctions when the pachinko machine 1 is energized and a game ball B is released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 (when the payout device 580 performs the ball removal action), or when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized and a game ball B is released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 (when the payout device 580 performs the ball removal action), but the pachinko machine 1 becomes energized in the middle of the ball removal action. Also, the game balls B shot into the game area 5a and the game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 may be discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment of the game hall) through separate passages without merging, so that the frame side outlet sensor can detect only the game balls B shot into the game area 5a. In such a configuration, there is no need for a configuration that subtracts the number of game balls B detected by the ball removal detection sensor from the out number counter.

As described above, the number of balls B that have entered the play area 5a can be known by the frame-side out counter, but the total number of balls B that have entered the play area 5a can also be calculated by the out counter. That is, when no game is being played and no balls B have been entered into the play area 5a, the frame-side out counter will match the value of the out counter. On the other hand, when balls B have been entered into the play area 5a, after ball B passes through the detection sensors provided at the ball entry and exit 1008, it passes through the frame-side out sensor located a predetermined distance away, so that the value obtained by adding all of the ball entry counters and the out counter will be slightly higher than the frame-side out counter.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the increment and calculation of the counter are continued or stopped (stopped) depends on whether the abnormality is minor or major. As shown in FIG. 222(A), when a minor abnormality occurs, the increment and calculation of the counter are continued without being stopped (stopped). Examples of such minor abnormalities include a state in which the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and the game ball B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580, and a state in which the game ball B should be hit into the area to the right of the center member 2500 but is not hit to the right. In these states, a performance is executed to warn the player to guide the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, or to warn the player to hit to the right. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 are not opened from the outer frame 2, and the game ball B cannot be artificially inserted into the ball inlet or ball out hole 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4. For this reason, if a minor abnormality occurs, the balls scored counter and outs counter will not be incremented through illegal activity, and the increments and calculations to the counters will continue without being interrupted (stopped).

On the other hand, if a serious abnormality occurs, the counter additions and calculations are halted (stopped). An example of a serious abnormality is when the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. In this state, the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, and it is possible to artificially insert a game ball B into the ball inlet or ball outlet 1008 on the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4. For this reason, if a serious abnormality occurs, the counter additions and calculations are halted (stopped) to prevent the ball in counter or ball out counter from increasing due to fraudulent behavior.

In addition, if a severe abnormality occurs, the counter counts and calculations are halted (stopped), but the detection sensors installed at the ball entrance and the ball exit 1008 themselves detect the passage of the game ball B. In addition, if a severe abnormality occurs, the values of counters such as the ball entry counter and the ball out counter before the occurrence, as well as the calculation results, are retained, and the counter counts and calculations are resumed after the severe abnormality is resolved, such as when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. In addition, when a severe abnormality occurs and the counter counts and calculations are halted (stopped), a halt effect is executed to notify the user that the counter counts and calculations have been halted by displaying an image on a specified display device or outputting an audio from a speaker.

Also, as shown in FIG. 222(B), the increments to the out counter and the calculations related to the out counter corresponding to detection by the left out sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033 continue without interruption (stopping) until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of a severe abnormality, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the increments to the out counter and the calculations related to the out counter are interrupted (stopped). As a result, when a severe abnormality occurs, such as the door frame 3 being released from the outer frame 2, the number of game balls B entering the out 1008 can be known until the predetermined time has elapsed.

For example, if game balls B become grape-shaped in the game area 5a and become jammed, normal play cannot be performed, so the hall staff will open the door frame 3 to remove the grape-shaped game balls B, but there is a high possibility that the removed game balls B will flow directly into the outlet 1008 at the bottom end. Such grape-shaped game balls B are game balls B that would likely have been discharged from the outlet 1008 if they had not become grape-shaped. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 to remove the grape-shaped game balls B, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter continue without interruption (stop) until a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the number of grape-shaped game balls B that have flowed into the outlet 1008 can be grasped, and the reliability of the information related to the outlet 1008 can be improved. After a certain period of time has elapsed, the grape-shaped game ball B is unlikely to flow into the outlet 1008, and since it is suspected that the ball has been thrown into the outlet 1008 through fraudulent means, the addition to the out counter and calculations related to the out counter are halted (stopped).

As shown in FIG. 222(C), the increment to the out counter and the calculation related to the out counter corresponding to the detection by the left out sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033 are continued without being stopped (stopped) until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of a serious abnormality. However, if the left out sensor 3032 or the right out sensor 3033 detects a large number of game balls B in succession in a short period of time even before the predetermined time has elapsed, the increment to the out counter and the calculation related to the out counter are stopped (stopped) at that point. In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, it is highly likely that the number of balls that are expected to flow into the out 1008 due to the removal of the grape-shaped game balls B has flowed into the out 1008, and it is suspected that balls are being entered into the out 1008 through fraudulent acts, so the increment to the out counter and the calculation related to the out counter are stopped (stopped).

As shown in FIG. 222(D), when a serious abnormality occurs, when the door frame 3 is opened, the increment to the out counter corresponding to the detection by the left out sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out counter are continued without being stopped (stopped) for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the time the door frame 3 is opened until the increment to the out counter and the calculation related to the out counter are stopped (stopped) at that point, whereas when the main frame 4 is opened, the increment to the out counter and the calculation related to the out counter are stopped (stopped). This is because when the door frame 3 is opened, it is considered that the increment is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game balls B in the game area 5a, whereas when the main frame 4 is opened, the main frame 4 is opened, which does not need to be opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game balls B in the game area 5a. In other words, when the main frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose, such as removing ball jams on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so the increment to the out counter and the calculation related to the out counter are stopped (stopped).

As described above, in this embodiment, after game ball B enters the ball inlet or outlet 1008 provided on the game board 5, the frame side outlet sensor detects game ball B when the merged game ball B is discharged outside the pachinko machine 1. However, as shown in FIG. 222 (E), with regard to the addition to the frame side out number counter corresponding to detection by the frame side outlet sensor and the calculation related to that frame side out number counter, when a severe abnormality occurs, the addition to the frame side out number counter and the calculation related to that frame side out number counter are discontinued (stopped). For this reason, when a person at the hall opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game balls B, the out counters corresponding to the detections by the left out sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033 are incremented for a predetermined period of time, while the frame-side out counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out sensor is not incremented. Therefore, the number of grape-shaped game balls B that entered when the door frame 3 was opened can be determined from the difference between the value obtained by adding all the in-ball counters and the out counter and the value of the frame-side out counter. The number of grape-shaped game balls B that entered can be displayed on a specified display device as information related to the pachinko machine 1.

As described above, when no game is being played and no game ball B has been shot into the game area 5a, the frame-side out counter will match the value obtained by adding all of the in-ball counters and the out counter. On the other hand, when game ball B has been shot into the game area 5a, after game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided at the inlet and outlet 1008, it passes through the frame-side out-out sensor located a predetermined distance away, so the value obtained by adding all of the in-ball counters and the out counter will be slightly higher than the frame-side out counter. In this way, as long as normal play is being played, the value obtained by adding all of the in-ball counters and the out counter will not differ by more than a predetermined number from the frame-side out counter, so it is possible to determine whether normal play is being played by monitoring whether a difference of more than the predetermined number has occurred.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when the value obtained by adding up all the ball entry counters and the out counters differs by a predetermined number or more from the frame-side out counter, it is determined that a special abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the counters and the calculation are stopped (stopped). In addition, when a special abnormality has occurred and the addition to the counters and the calculation are stopped, a stop-time performance is executed to notify that the addition to the counters and the calculation are stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting an audio from a speaker. Then, when the value obtained by adding up all the ball entry counters and the out counters differs by a predetermined number or more from the frame-side out counter, it is possible to suspect, for example, that an object other than the game ball B has been passed only through the ball entry hole or the out hole 1008 provided on the game board 5 by an illegal act, or that a ball jam has occurred between the time the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided at the ball entry hole or the out hole 1008 and the time it passes through the frame-side out hole sensor. As a result, any fraudulent activity or problems such as ball jamming can be detected early on, improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, a state in which the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 is exemplified as a severe abnormality, but this is not limited thereto, and if a situation is detected in which a game is assumed to be proceeding with an illegal act even when the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is not open from the outer frame 2, the increments and calculations of the various counters may be stopped (stopped). For example, if a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected near the game area 5a, or if a predetermined vibration (shock) is detected on the game area 5a, it may be determined that a game is not being played normally, and the increments and calculations of the various counters may be stopped (stopped). In addition, although the counting and calculation of various counters is halted (stopped) in both cases when the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and when unauthorized magnetism or vibration is detected when the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is not open from the outer frame 2, it may be determined that unauthorized magnetism or vibration is detected when the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is not open from the outer frame 2, and the progress of the game, including the launch of the game ball B, may be immediately stopped.

[16-1. Outlet detection when multiple outlets are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, a second outlet 1013 is provided on the upstream side and a third outlet 1014 is provided on the midstream side in addition to the outlet 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the game ball B discharged from each outlet is provided. This will be described with reference to Figures 224 and 225. Figure 224 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 are provided in addition to the outlet 1008. Figure 225 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of the calculation when the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 are provided in addition to the outlet 1008.

224, a second outlet 1013 capable of discharging game ball B outside the game area 5a is provided between the inlet at the top end of the second ball passage section 2521 and the inlet at the top end of the third ball passage section 2522. In this configuration, when game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the first ball passage section 2506 and hit the ball hitting section 1006 (so-called right hit), there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the second ball passage section 2521, but a portion of the game ball B that is hit will enter the second outlet 1013 adjacent to the inlet of the second ball passage section 2521. Similarly, if game ball B is hit with enough strength (somewhat weaker than a right hit) to enter the first ball passage 2506 and not hit the ball hitting portion 1006, there is a high probability that it will enter the third ball passage 2522, but part of the game ball B that was hit will enter the second outlet 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the third ball passage 2522. In other words, part of the game ball B that was hit to enter the first ball passage 2506 will enter the second outlet 1013.

In addition, below the exits of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522, to the right of the normal winning port 2003, a first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 is provided, and a third outlet 1014 separate from the outlet 1008 is provided in the attacca right passage 2430, so that the game ball B that enters from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third outlet 1014 outside the game area 5a.

The effect of providing the second outlet 1013 around the inlets of the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522 in the guide passage group 2520, and the effect of providing the third outlet 1014 around the outlets thereof, have been described in detail above, but by providing such second outlet 1013 and third outlet 1014, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring inside the second ball passage section 2521 and the third ball passage section 2522.

In this embodiment, a second outlet sensor capable of detecting a game ball B discharged to the outside from the second outlet 1013 and a third outlet sensor capable of detecting a game ball B discharged to the outside from the third outlet 1014 are provided. When the second outlet sensor detects a game ball B that has entered the second outlet 1013, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, whereas when the third outlet sensor detects a game ball B that has entered the third outlet 1014, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the second outlet 1013, the second outlet sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter, whereas when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third outlet 1014, the third outlet sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. This second out number counter is used to keep track of the number of game balls B that have entered the second out hole 1013, while the third out number counter is used to keep track of the number of game balls B that have entered the third out hole 1014.

The main control board 1310 performs a predetermined calculation using not only the ball entry counter and the out counter, but also the second out counter and the third out counter. As a specific example, by adding up the out counter, the second out counter, and the third out counter, it is possible to calculate the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and have been discharged to the outside without entering an entry port such as the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 on the game board 5. Also, by adding up the ball entry counter, the out counter, the second out counter, and the third out counter, it is possible to calculate the total number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, when game balls B are shot into the right area of the game area 5a, the game is designed so that more than a predetermined number of balls per unit time (for example, more than 30 balls out of 100 balls that can be shot in one minute) do not enter the second outlet 1013. For this reason, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, the second out number counter is used to monitor whether the number of game balls B that enter the second outlet 1013 is more than a predetermined number per unit time, and if the number is more than the predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that normal right-hitting play is difficult to perform.

Also, as shown in FIG. 225(A), when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 per unit time exceeds a predetermined number, a warning effect is executed by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting an audio from a speaker to warn that it will be difficult to play normally with the right hand. This warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 per unit time falls below a predetermined number.

For example, if the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game balls B will have fewer opportunities to enter the ball entry ports (normal entry port 2003, first start port 2002, second start port 2004, big entry port 2005, special entry port 2006) downstream of the second outlet 1013 in the right area of the game area 5a, which is unfavorable to the player. In this regard, if the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, it is possible to suspect that the game board 5 has been tampered with to make it easier for game balls B to enter the second outlet 1013. As a result, it is possible to detect early on that it is difficult to play normally on the right side, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether the number of game balls B that enter the second outlet 1013 per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. However, it is also possible to calculate the ratio between the number of game balls B that enter the second outlet 1013 per unit time and the number of game balls B that enter the inlet or outlet (outlet 1008, third outlet 1014) downstream of the second outlet 1013, and monitor whether the ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined rate. Even in such a case, if the rate of game balls B that enter the second outlet 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that normal right-hand play is difficult to perform.

Similarly, when game balls B are shot into the right area of the game area 5a, it is designed so that more than a predetermined number of balls per unit time (for example, more than 30 balls out of 100 balls that can be shot in one minute) do not enter the third outlet 1014. For this reason, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, the third out number counter is used to monitor whether the number of game balls B that enter the third outlet 1014 is more than a predetermined number per unit time, and if the number exceeds the predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that normal right-hand play is difficult to perform.

Also, as shown in FIG. 225(B), when the number of game balls B entering the third outlet 1014 per unit time exceeds a predetermined number, a warning effect is executed by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting an audio from a speaker to warn that it will be difficult to play normally with the right hand. This warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the third outlet 1014 per unit time falls below a predetermined number.

For example, if the number of game balls B entering the third outlet 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game balls B will have fewer opportunities to enter the ball entry ports (normal entry port 2003, first start port 2002, second start port 2004, large entry port 2005) downstream of the third outlet 1014 in the right area of the game area 5a, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. In this regard, if the number of game balls B entering the third outlet 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, it is possible to suspect that the game board 5 has been tampered with to make it easier for game balls B to enter the third outlet 1014. As a result, it is possible to detect early on that a state in which it is difficult to play normally on the right side is difficult, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether the number of game balls B that enter the third outlet 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. However, it is also possible to calculate the ratio between the number of game balls B that enter the third outlet 1014 per unit time and the number of game balls B that enter the inlet or outlet 1008 downstream of the third outlet 1014, and monitor whether this ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined rate. Even in such a case, if the rate at which game balls B enter the third outlet 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that normal right-hand play is difficult to perform.

In this embodiment, when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 or the third outlet 1014 reaches or exceeds a predetermined number per unit time during the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, the increments to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculations related to these out number counters are continued. However, as in the above embodiment, when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 or the third outlet 1014 reaches or exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the increments to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculations related to these out number counters may be stopped. In this configuration, even if game balls B are illegally inserted into the second outlet 1013 or the third outlet 1014, the second out number counter and the third out number counter do not increase, and the reliability of the information related to the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal state, game ball B should be shot into the left area of the game area 5a, but if game ball B is shot into the right area of the game area 5a, game ball B may enter the second outlet 1013 or the third outlet 1014 in that right area. For this reason, in the normal state, when game ball B is detected by the second outlet sensor or the third outlet sensor, an instruction to change from right-handed to left-handed hitting is executed by displaying an image on a specified display device or outputting audio from a speaker.

[17. Light emission history after light emission using a light guide plate]
In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the changing pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. During this changing display, the light guide plate 3102 provided on the front side of the display area of the performance display device 1600 is illuminated multiple times, and the light color of the light guide plate 3102 is gradually changed multiple times, making it possible to execute an illumination display that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot for the changing display. In addition, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with illumination, the upper back decorative body 3211, the left back decorative body 3212, and the right back decorative body 3213 of the back front performance unit 3200, which are arranged around the display area of the performance display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3010), are illuminated in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102.However, even after the illumination decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, it is possible to execute a history performance in which the upper back decorative body 3211 etc. continue to emit light in the previous emission color of the light guide plate 3102 as the history of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 (the starting condition is met), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the command analysis process of step S601, the peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the variation pattern command, determines whether or not to execute a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. Furthermore, if it is determined that a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is to be executed, the light-emitting color pattern table is referenced based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, and one of the multiple types of light-emitting color patterns in which the light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light-emitting effect is set multiple times is determined.

The light guide plate 3102 can be decorated with white, green, blue, or red light by changing the light color of the LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 arranged above it. In the light-emitting performance using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light three times at a predetermined timing with the light color set in the light-emitting color pattern. The time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light at one timing is short (for example, less than one second), and the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is turned off after being decorated with light is longer until it is decorated with light the next time. The light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light only once at one timing, but the light guide plate 3102 may be decorated with light multiple times at each timing.

In addition, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is performed during the normal fluctuation of the decorative pattern during the display before the reach is formed, but it may also be performed during the reach performance after the reach is formed. For example, one to three of the three times that the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated may be performed during the reach performance after the reach is formed.

The light guide plate 3102 can illuminate the first pattern 3110 by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 located above it, while it can illuminate the second pattern 3120 by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 located on the left side when viewed from the front. In the light-emitting performance using the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3110 is illuminated. This allows the viewer to clearly understand that the three illuminations of the first pattern 3110 in the light-emitting performance are a continuous performance.

Next, the luminous color pattern table in which the luminous color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to FIG. 226. The luminous color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 226 shows the luminous color pattern table in which the luminous color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set.

As described above, the luminous color pattern table has multiple types of luminous color patterns set, and the luminous color pattern sets how the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 changes the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226, the luminous color pattern table has luminous patterns set so that the light guide plate 3102 can be changed twice after being illuminated and decorated with a specified luminous color.

The light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 set in the light emitting color pattern is set to be decorated with one of four colors: white, green, blue, and red. When the light emitting color pattern is determined from the light emitting color pattern table, the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is set to have a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of white → green → blue → red as a result of the change to the end. In other words, when the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a jackpot, a light emitting color pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g., red) is determined with a high probability as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102, and when the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a miss (miss, reach miss), a light emitting color pattern with a low expectation of a jackpot (e.g., white) is determined with a high probability as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102. As a result, when the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color with a high expectation of a jackpot, the player's expectations for a jackpot are increased.

The light emitting color pattern does not change the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red, and is set so that the next time the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light, the light emitting color is maintained or becomes a light emitting color with a high expectation of a jackpot. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color with a low expectation of a jackpot, there remains a possibility that it will change to a light emitting color with a high expectation of a jackpot as long as the three timings of the light emitting performance are not completed, and the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 can be focused on with anticipation until the light emitting performance is completed.

In addition, the light emitting color pattern does not necessarily have to change in the order of green → blue → red after the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with white light, but can also be set to start with a light emitting color other than white, or to skip one or more light emitting colors and change to the next light emitting color (for example, white → red). This makes it impossible to predict which light emitting color the next light emitting color will change to, even if the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color that has a low expectation of a jackpot, and allows the player to pay attention to the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 with anticipation until the light emitting performance ends.

Next, the upper back decorative body 3211 and the like arranged around the display area of the performance display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 227. As described above, the front back performance unit 3200 has the upper back decorative body 3211, the left back decorative body 3212, and the right back decorative body 3213 of the front back performance unit 3200, which surround the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, i.e., surround the display area of the performance display device 1600, when viewed from the front. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 227, the left back decorative body 3212 and the right back decorative body 3213 on both the left and right sides of the display area of the performance display device 1600 are each divided into four by three radial decorative parts 3212b and three radial decorative parts 3213b. Here, these are collectively referred to as decorative bodies 3210. Therefore, four decorative bodies 3210 are arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition, a decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs capable of emitting light forward is mounted is provided behind these decorative bodies 3210. In addition, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 can be decorated with light in any of the following colors: white, green, blue, or red, similar to the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102.

When the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in a light-emitting performance, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 arranged around the display area of the performance display device 1600 are made to emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102. In addition, in a light-emitting performance using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated three times at a predetermined timing, and the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 is maintained even after the illumination decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing. In this way, when a light-emitting performance using the light guide plate 3102 is performed, a history performance is performed in which the multiple decorative bodies 3210 continue to emit light in the previous luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 as a history of the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102.

Specifically, in the first or second timing when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in the light-emitting performance, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are illuminated in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, and the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the next time the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated. In addition, in the third timing when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in the light-emitting performance, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are illuminated in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, and the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the display of the changing decorative pattern ends after the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, the time that the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated at one time is short (for example, less than one second), but by maintaining the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 with the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, even if the luminous color is overlooked when illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102, the luminous color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated.

The number of decorative bodies 3210 corresponds to the number of luminous colors that can illuminate and decorate the light guide plate 3102 in the light-emitting performance. The number of luminous decorative bodies 3210 is set to vary depending on the luminous colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the number of luminous decorative bodies 3210 that illuminate increases in order from the bottom of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 as the luminous colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210 increase as the luminous colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210 increase. Specifically, when the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 that is luminous decorated in the light-emitting performance is white, which is the luminous color with the lowest jackpot expectation, one lower decorative body 3210a is set to illuminate in white among the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition, when the light guide plate 3102 emits light in green, the two lower decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit light in green. In addition, when the light guide plate 3102 emits light in blue, the three lower decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are set to emit light in blue. In addition, when the light guide plate 3102 emits light in red, which is the color with the highest jackpot expectation, all four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are set to emit light in red. As a result, even if the jackpot expectation cannot be determined from the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, the jackpot expectation can be easily determined from the number of illuminated decorative bodies 3210.

The multiple decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102, allowing them to emit light forward. When the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in a light-emitting performance, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102. However, since the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102, light is irradiated onto the light guide plate 3102 not only by the multiple LEDs for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3110 on the light guide plate 3102, but also by the multiple illuminating decorative bodies 3210. This makes the first pattern 3110 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 more emphasized, making the performance using the light guide plate 3102 stand out more.

In addition, the light-emitting performance using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the formation of a reach during the display of the varying decorative pattern, but other preview performances using the performance display device 1600 are not started during the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102. In other words, other preview performances using the performance display device 1600 are started at a timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not being illuminated. As a result, although the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not obstruct the view of the other preview performances, and the other preview performances will not be missed even if they are started. In other words, the player can clearly understand the light-emitting performance that illuminates and decorates the light guide plate 3102 and the other preview performances.

Next, a specific example of a performance using the light guide plate 3102 and multiple decorative bodies 3210 when a light-emitting performance is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 shows a specific example of a performance using the light guide plate 3102 and multiple decorative bodies 3210 when a light-emitting performance is performed. Note that in FIG. 228, the second image 3120 is shown as an enlarged image of the eyes (pupils) of a specified character.

Figure 228 explains the case where a light color pattern is determined in which the light color for lighting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 in a light-emitting performance changes from white to green to red. First, as shown in Figure 228 (A), the display area of the performance display device 1600 starts to display a changing decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figure 228 (B), when it is the first time to light and decorate the light guide plate 3102 in a light-emitting performance, the second pattern 3120 is light-illuminated and decorated in white on the light guide plate 3102, and of the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area of the performance display device 1600, one lower decorative body 3210a is illuminated, and the light color is white, which is the same light color as the light guide plate 3102. As shown in FIG. 228(C), the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 goes out after a short time (e.g., less than one second), but the decorative body 3210a, which is already emitting white light, continues to emit white light until the second timing occurs.

Also, as shown in FIG. 228(D), when it is the second time to illuminate and decorate the light guide plate 3102 in the light-emitting performance, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in green on the light guide plate 3102, and the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each side of the display area of the performance display device 1600 are increased to emit light, but the light emission color is green, which is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. Then, as shown in FIG. 228(E), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 goes out after a short time (e.g., less than one second), but the decorative bodies 3210 and 3210b, which are already emitting green light, maintain their green light emission until the third time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 228(F), when it is the third time that the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in the light-emitting performance, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, and the number of illuminations increases so that all of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the performance display device 1600, 3210a to 3210d, emit light, but the illumination color is red, which is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. As shown in FIG. 228(G), the illumination decoration of the light guide plate 3102 goes out after a short time (for example, less than one second), but the decorative bodies 3210 to 3210d that are already emitting red light continue to emit red light until the display of the changing decorative pattern is completed, as shown in FIG. 228(H).

In this embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in the light-emitting performance, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102. However, the multiple luminous bodies may not emit light at that time, and may emit light in the luminous color just before the light guide plate 3102 is turned off from the time the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off. Even in such a case, the luminous color can be ascertained after the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of illuminated decorative bodies 3210 varies depending on the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the more illuminated decorative bodies 3210 are, the higher the expected jackpot luminous color is. However, it may also be possible to indicate the number of times that the light guide plate 3102 has already been illuminated among the three times that the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated. For example, in the illumination performance, the first time that the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated, the lower decorative body 3210a of the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area of the performance display device 1600 is illuminated, the second time that the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are illuminated, and the third time that the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated three times at a predetermined timing in the light-emitting performance, but it is also possible to provide a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated at the first timing but not at the second and third timing, or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated at the first and second timing but not at the third timing. In such a case, it is not known how many times the light guide plate 3102 will be illuminated and decorated in the light-emitting performance, and attention can also be drawn to how many opportunities there are for the light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 to change.

In addition, in this embodiment, a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed as an effect showing the expectation of a jackpot for the display of the decorative pattern during the display of the decorative pattern, but the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 may be executed over multiple changes from the time when the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 (the start condition is met) to the time when the decorative pattern is displayed by the ball entering. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 (the start condition is met), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, and if it is determined that a light-emitting effect is to be executed, the light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 may be determined based on the change pattern specified by the pre-determination command. In addition, in a light-emitting performance using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 may be configured to emit light multiple times at a predetermined timing among the multiple variations, and the light-emitting elements may continue to emit light in the previous emission color of the light guide plate 3102 even after the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off. In such a case, the viewer can be excited to see how the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes until the light-emitting performance ends across multiple variations.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the light-emitting performance using the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3110 is illuminated by illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 arranged above it. However, if a malfunction or other problem occurs and the multiple LEDs stop emitting light, the light guide plate 3102 will not be illuminated at the timing when it should be illuminated, and the expected jackpot indicated by the luminous color cannot be grasped. In this regard, after the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, so even if the light guide plate 3102 cannot be illuminated and decorated, the expected jackpot can be grasped by the luminous color of the multiple decorative bodies 3210.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect is executed in priority over other effects to notify the occurrence of the abnormality. For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected near the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (shock) is detected on the game area 5a, it is determined that normal play is not being performed, and a warning effect is executed. In this regard, when an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing of executing the light-emitting effect and illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102, the warning effect is prioritized, and the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 and the light-emitting of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are not performed. However, when the abnormality is resolved after the timing of illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102 (before the end of the display of the decorative pattern), the multiple decorative bodies 3210 start to emit light. In this way, even if a warning effect is executed in priority over a light-emitting effect, the expectation of a jackpot can be grasped by the light-emitting color of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot is suggested by the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the luminous color of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 in the light-emitting performance and history performance, but the light-emitting performance and history performance may be executed as the setting suggestion performance described above, and the setting value may be suggested by the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the luminous color of the multiple decorative bodies 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when determining the luminous color pattern from the luminous color pattern table, it is sufficient to set it so that the setting value is high in the order of white → green → blue → red as a result of the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end. In other words, as a high setting suggestion performance among the setting suggestion performances, a light-emitting pattern in which the final luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 is red is executed, and as a low setting suggestion performance, a light-emitting pattern in which the final luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 is white is executed. This can increase the player's expectations for a high setting value (setting value 6) when the light guide plate 3102 and the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are illuminated with a color that suggests a high setting value.

[18. Image presentation similar to the luminous decoration of light guide plates]
In this embodiment, a light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and not only is a predetermined pattern illuminated on the light guide plate 3102, but a pattern similar to the pattern illuminated on the light guide plate 3102 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, making it possible to execute an imitation performance in which the player is visually recognized as if there were multiple light guide plates. In this imitation performance, the pattern illuminated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and by finally displaying one of the patterns, the reach performance executed thereafter is made different.

Specifically, when game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 (starting condition is met), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process of step S601, a variation pattern is identified from the variation pattern command, and when a variation pattern for executing the first reach performance is identified, the image illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally, an imitation performance is executed in which the image is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and then the first reach performance is progressed to. On the other hand, when a variation pattern for executing a second reach performance is identified, the image that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally, an imitation performance is executed in which an image is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, and then the second reach performance is started.

The above-mentioned imitation performance is executed during the normal fluctuation before the formation of a reach during the display of the varying decorative patterns. Also, the first reach performance among the reach performances is set to have a higher probability of winning than the second reach performance. As a result, in the imitation performance during normal fluctuation, if the light guide plate 3102 is finally illuminated with a pattern, it will progress to the first reach performance, which has a higher probability of winning, so that the player can pay attention to whether or not the light guide plate 3102 will finally be illuminated with a pattern.

Next, the images displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 when the imitation performance is being performed will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 shows the images displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 when the imitation performance is being performed. Note that in FIG. 229, the second image 3120 is shown as an image consisting of the letters "CHANCE!".

As shown in FIG. 229(A), the light guide plate 3102 during the execution of the imitation performance has the letters "CHANCE!" in the center and an effect pattern around it as the second pattern 3120. Note that the light guide plate 3102 can illuminate the first pattern 3110 by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 arranged above it, while it can illuminate the second pattern 3120 by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 arranged on the left side as viewed from the front, but in the imitation performance using the light guide plate 3102, only the illumination decoration of the second pattern 3120 is used.

As shown in FIG. 229(B), while the imitation performance is being performed, the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays the word "LUCKY!" in the center as an imitation pattern 1600a, with an effect pattern around it. Note that although it is possible to display moving images in the display area of the performance display device 1600, while the imitation performance is being performed, a still image such as the imitation pattern 1600a described above is displayed.

In addition, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the word "CHANCE!" as the second pattern 3120, while the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays the word "LUCKY!" as the imitation pattern 1600a, but the characters in the imitation pattern 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as the characters in the second pattern 3120. In this way, in the imitation performance, since the shapes of the characters are the same, it is difficult to tell whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

In addition, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with an illuminated effect pattern as the second pattern 3120, while the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an effect pattern as the imitation pattern 1600a, but the effect pattern that is part of the imitation pattern 1600a is the same as the effect pattern that is part of the second pattern 3120. In this way, the imitation performance displays a common effect pattern as part of each pattern, making it difficult to know whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

In addition, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in a single color by multiple LEDs on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in a single color in the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition, when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in the light guide plate 3102, the illumination decoration of the second pattern 3120 is shaded depending on the distance from the multiple LEDs, but the display area of the performance display device 1600 is also displayed so that the imitation pattern 1600a has shades. In addition, when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in the light guide plate 3102, a black image that does not display any information is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, a black image is displayed as the background image. In this way, in the imitation performance, the visual appearance of the patterns is the same overall, making it difficult to know which of the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

The light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the performance display device 1600, but the area in which the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is approximately the same as the area in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. In this way, in the imitation performance, since the areas in which the patterns are displayed are approximately the same, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

In addition, in the imitation performance, the second pattern 3120, which is illuminatingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a, which is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, are alternately displayed, but the display time per time is the same for both. In addition, during the execution of the imitation performance, a composite performance is executed in which a predetermined sound is output from the speaker and the members provided around the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 are operated in a predetermined operating mode (for example, the lamps provided on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 are turned on and the movable members are operated) at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, but regardless of the timing of displaying any of the patterns, a common performance is executed as the composite performance. However, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, the lamps provided on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 are turned on in both cases, but the luminous colors may be different. In this way, in the imitation performance, there is no difference in performance between when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, making it difficult to know whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

Next, a specific example of a performance using the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 when performing an imitation performance will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 shows a specific example of a performance using the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 when performing an imitation performance. Note that in FIG. 230, the second image 3120 is shown as an image consisting of the letters "CHANCE!".

In FIG. 230, a variation pattern for executing either a chance reach performance as the first reach performance or a lucky reach performance as the second reach performance is determined, and a case where an imitation performance is executed before executing the reach performance is described. First, as shown in FIG. 230(A), the display area of the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the variation of the decorative pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 230(B), when the imitation performance starts, the light guide plate 3102 displays the second pattern 3120 in the center with the word "CHANCE!" and the effect pattern around it for a predetermined time (for example, less than 1 second) in red light decoration. Then, as shown in FIG. 230(C), when the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays the imitation pattern 1600a in the center with the word "LUCKY!" and the effect pattern around it for a predetermined time (for example, less than 1 second) in blue light. The display time for which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 is the same as the display time for which the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102.

As described above, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the performance display device 1600. In this way, in the imitation performance, when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it is difficult to know whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used, but it is possible to know whether the second pattern 3120 or the imitation pattern 1600a is being displayed from the display color.

In addition, in the imitation performance, the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed multiple times (for example, five times), and after the multiple repetitions, as shown in FIG. 230(D), the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out and a black image that does not display any information is displayed. This allows the viewer to pay attention to which of the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 will stop as a result of the imitation performance.

230(E), after the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out, if the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, a reach is formed by the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the game progresses to a chance reach performance (first reach performance) as the reach performance corresponding to the second pattern 3120. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 230(F), after the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out, if the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue on the display area of the performance display device 1600, a reach is formed by the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the game progresses to a lucky reach performance (second reach performance) as the reach performance corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. In addition, the display time for which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 in Figure 230 (F) is the same as the display time for which the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 in Figure 230 (E) (e.g., 3 seconds).

In this embodiment, the characters and effect patterns are displayed using the second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. However, it is sufficient to display patterns that have similar visual appearances so that specific elements match; for example, it is also possible to display patterns of characters with similar art styles.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out, either the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 or the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 is stopped, but a pattern may be set in which neither the second pattern 3120 nor the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed after the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out, and the game does not progress to either the first reach performance or the second reach performance. In such a case, it is possible to draw even more attention to the result that is notified after the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out as a result of the imitation performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the start of the imitation performance, the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are illuminated and decorated, but a pattern that starts with the display of the imitation pattern 1600a may be set. In addition, in the imitation performance, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but a pattern that executes in a different color when either part or all of them are colored may be set. In this way, when the imitation performance is executed with a display or color different from the normal one, by setting it so that the jackpot expectation for the variable display of the decorative pattern is high, it is possible to draw attention not only to which of the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 will stop, but also to the content of the performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the imitation performance is performed, the second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are displayed alternately, but performances using the light guide plate 3102 are also performed other than the imitation performance. For example, as a performance other than the imitation performance using the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to perform a performance in which the second pattern 3120 is suddenly illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 without displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the imitation performance, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition to such a pattern, a pattern is set in which the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in blue on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the performance display device 1600, so as to invert the coloring. In these patterns, the coloring indicates that the red color is more likely to result in a jackpot than the blue color. For example, when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, it notifies the user that the jackpot is more likely to be won than when it is illuminated in blue, and similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it notifies the user that the jackpot is more likely to be won than when it is displayed in blue. In this way, in the imitation performance, it is possible to display both the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a in blue and red, making it difficult to tell whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

In addition, in this embodiment, as an imitation performance, the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and by finally displaying one of the patterns, a reach performance to be executed thereafter is suggested. However, it is also possible to configure it so that an imitation performance is executed as the above-mentioned setting suggestion performance, and by finally displaying one of the patterns, a setting value is suggested. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion performance among the setting suggestion performances, an imitation performance in which the second pattern 3120 is finally illuminated and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102 is executed, and as a low setting suggestion performance, an imitation performance in which the imitation pattern 1600a is finally displayed in blue on the display area of the performance display device 1600 may be executed. As a result, when the second pattern 3120 is finally illuminated and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102 during the execution of the imitation performance, the player's expectations for a high setting value (setting value 6) can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 can illuminate the first pattern 3110 by illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 arranged above it, while the light guide plate 3102 can illuminate the second pattern 3120 by illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 when viewed from the front. The brightness of the multiple LEDs can be changed by the player operating the pressing operation unit 303. In other words, when the brightness of the multiple LEDs is set to be weak, the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 is displayed in a dark state, whereas when the brightness of the multiple LEDs is set to be strong, the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 is displayed in a bright state. In the imitation performance, when the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 is displayed in a dark display mode, whereas when the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. In this way, in the imitation performance, the performance is executed so that the brightness corresponds to both the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, so that it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 is being used. In addition, when adjusting the brightness, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303, the settings of both the brightness of the multiple LEDs for the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the performance display device 1600 may be changed.

[19. Various commands related to transmission and reception of main control board]
Next, some of the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 231 to 233. Figure 231 is a table showing an example of the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and Figures 232 and 233 are tables showing the continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board in Figure 231 to the peripheral control board.

[19-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 231 to 233, are composed of a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode indicating the variation of the presentation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

In addition, as shown in Figures 231 to 233, the various commands are categorized into those related to special chart 1 synchronization effects, those related to special chart 2 synchronization effects, those related to big wins, power-on, those related to regular chart synchronization effects, those related to regular electric role effects, notification displays, status displays, and others.

[19-1-1. Special Chart 1 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 1 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, and as shown in Fig. 231, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 1 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special symbol 1 synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special symbol 1 synchronization performance start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special symbol synchronization performance with the performance pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, the special symbol 1 designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the special symbol 1 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special symbol 1 synchronization performance, and the variable time state designation command instructs the game state. The game state consists of a time-saving state that indicates the time-saving state, a probability variable state that indicates the probability variable state, and a normal state that indicates neither the time-saving state nor the probability variable state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special chart 1 synchronization performance start command (variation pattern command) and a special chart 1 synchronization performance end command are provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command (variation pattern command) and the special chart 1 synchronization performance end command, it selects and transmits a command according to the setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the mode of the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command (variation pattern command) and the special chart 1 synchronization performance end command that have been used conventionally, it is possible to transmit the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the special pattern 1 synchronization start command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation starts, the special pattern 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 1 synchronization start, the special pattern 1 synchronization end command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when special pattern 1 is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[19-1-2. Special Chart 2 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 2 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402, and as shown in FIG. 231, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 2 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 2", and "End special symbol 2 synchronization performance" related to the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. These various commands are assigned "B*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 2 synchronization performance.

In addition, like the special pattern 1 synchronization performance start command (variation pattern command) and the special pattern 1 synchronization performance end command, the special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command (variation pattern command) and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command are provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command (variation pattern command) and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command, it selects and transmits a command according to the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that the special pattern 2 synchronization performance (the variation performance of the second special pattern based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2004) is mainly executed in the probability change state and the time-saving state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the mode of the special chart 2 synchronization performance start command (variation pattern command) and the special chart 2 synchronization performance end command that have been used conventionally, it is possible to send setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510, and even in the probability bonus state and the time-saving state, the setting value information is periodically sent to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command is sent when the special pattern 2 starts to change, the special pattern 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization performance starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command is sent when the special pattern 2 change time has elapsed (when special pattern 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[19-1-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Fig. 231, the "jackpot-related" category is made up of commands named "jackpot opening", "Nth large prize slot 1 open display", "large prize slot 1 closed display", "large prize slot 1 count display", "jackpot ending", "jackpot pattern display", "small prize opening", "small prize open display", "small prize count display", and "small prize ending". These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, the display command for opening the jackpot 1 Nth time instructs the start of opening the 1st to 15th rounds of the jackpot 1 (the jackpot 2005 is open or has started to be open in the Nth round), the display command for closing the 1st closes the 1st closes the 1st closes the 1st closes the 1st closes the 2nd rounds (the jackpot 2005 is closed or has started to be closed between rounds), the display command for counting the 1st closes the 1st counts the 0 to 10 game balls B (the number of game balls B that entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the jackpot sensor 2403), the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the display command for the jackpot pattern instructs the display of the jackpot pattern information.

In addition, the small win opening command instructs the start of a small win opening, the small win opening display command instructs the start of a small win opening (when the device winning port 2006 is open or has started to open during a small win), the small win count display command instructs a large winning port winning presentation during a small win (a presentation when game ball B that has entered the device winning port 2006 during a small win is detected by the device winning port sensor 2513), the V pass command instructs a V winning port winning presentation (a presentation when game ball B that has entered the device winning port 2006 during a small win is detected by the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008), and the small win ending command instructs the start of a small win ending. In addition, a V passing command corresponding to each of the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 (a first V winning port command when game ball B is detected by the first V winning port 2007, and a second V winning port command when game ball B is detected by the second V winning port 2008) may be provided.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, the large prize opening 1 open Nth display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 15th rounds (when the large prize opening 2005 opens for the Nth round), the large prize opening 1 close display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is closed (when the large prize opening 2005 starts to close), the large prize opening 1 count display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large prize opening 1 (when the large prize opening 2005 opens and when the game ball B that has entered the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403), the jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the large prize opening is opened (when the large prize opening 2005 opens).

The small win opening command is sent when the small win opening starts, the small win opening display command is sent when the small win opens (when the special feature winning hole 2006 opens during a small win), the small win count display command is sent when the small win enters the large win hole during a small win (when game ball B that has entered the special feature winning hole 2006 during a small win is detected by the special feature winning hole sensor 2513), and the small win ending command is sent when the small win ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[19-1-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 232, the power-on category includes the following commands: power-on state, main control return destination when power is turned on, setting key ON command, setting key OFF command, setting change command, and error display command. These commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number). indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is composed of information that indicates that the RAM clear switch 1310f on the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 232 is operated to perform a RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that indicates which state to return to from the normal state, time-saving state, or special state when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

In addition, the model code of a pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, or sweet type, specifies which copyright of the work it refers to, what kind of game specifications it has (for example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that special patterns can fluctuate (for example, 30 or 70 times) (a so-called ST machine)), and further, whether the pachinko machine has multiple settings or only one setting value, etc. In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine is mainly composed of a series code to identify the model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type), a copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, a game specification code to identify the game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, and in addition, a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for special patterns to fluctuate (ST machine)), and a setting value code indicating whether the pachinko machine 1 has one or multiple setting values.

The main control return destination command when power is turned on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command when power is turned on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2414 and the role winning port solenoid 2512.

The ON command of the setting key indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the control built-in RAM should be checked, and the OFF command of the setting key indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been checked.

The setting change command indicates the changed setting value and that the setting value has been changed. In this example, by changing the mode of the setting change command, it is possible to send setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is able to know the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from the received setting change command. The setting change command may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on regardless of whether the setting value has been changed or not, or if the setting value has not been changed when the power is turned on, a setting notification command indicating the current setting value may be sent. This makes it possible for the peripheral control board 1510 to know the latest setting value every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM.

These commands are sent when the main control board is powered on (including when the power is turned on and when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power interruption). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power interruption, the commands to be sent when the power is turned on are reserved in step S50 of the main control side game control main processing, and are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are sent in the peripheral control board command sending processing of step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[19-1-5. General-purpose synchronous performance related]
The normal symbol synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the normal winning port sensor 2401, and as shown in Fig. 232, the commands are composed of commands named "Start normal symbol synchronization performance", "Specify normal symbol", "End normal symbol synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization start command (normal pattern change pattern command) commands the start of the normal pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern (normal pattern change pattern) specified in the mode, the normal pattern designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the normal pattern synchronization end command commands the end of the normal pattern synchronization performance, and the change time state designation command specifies the game state. Note that the game state consists of a time-saving state, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving state, and a normal state, which indicates that the game is not in a time-saving state, as described above.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal pattern synchronization start command is sent when the normal pattern change starts, the normal pattern designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern synchronization start, the normal pattern synchronization end command is sent when the normal pattern change time has elapsed (when the normal pattern is confirmed), and the change time state designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern win/lose information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[19-1-6. Regular Electric Role Performance Related]
The normal electric role performance-related commands are related to the second start gate 2411, which is advanced and retreated by the drive of the start gate solenoid 2412, and are composed of commands named "normal winning opening", "normal power opening display", and "normal winning ending", as shown in Fig. 232. These various commands are assigned "F*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map opening command instructs the start of normal map opening, the normal power opening display command instructs the start of normal power opening (when the second start port door 2411 is in a state where it protrudes forward due to the drive of the start port solenoid 2412, or when it protrudes), and the normal map ending command instructs the start of normal map ending.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal map opening command is sent when the normal map opening starts, the normal power open display command is sent when the normal power is opened (when the second start port door 2411 protrudes forward due to the drive of the start port solenoid 2412), and the normal map ending command is sent when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[19-1-7. Others]
Other categories, as shown in Fig. 233, are composed of commands named "Starting port winning", "Fluctuation shortening operation end specification", "Special symbol 1 memory", "Special symbol type pre-reading", "Fluctuation pattern pre-reading 1", "Fluctuation pattern pre-reading 2", "Fluctuation pattern pre-reading 3", "Fluctuation pattern pre-reading 4", "Fluctuation pattern pre-reading 5", "Fluctuation pattern pre-reading 6", "Normal winning port winning", and "Normal symbol memory". These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start hole entry command instructs the start of the start hole entry presentation, and instructs the start of the presentation when game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002, and the start of the presentation when game ball B enters the second start hole 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402, respectively. The variable shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the variable shortening operation state to the variable shortening non-operation state. The special pattern 1 storage command conveys 0 to 4 special pattern 1 reserved (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variable special pattern on the first special pattern display of the function display unit 1400 after game ball B has entered the first start hole 2002). The special pattern 2 storage command conveys 0 to 4 special pattern 1 reserved (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variable special pattern on the first special pattern display of the function display unit 1400 after game ball B has entered the first start hole 2002). The command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 2 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 after game ball B has entered the second starting hole 2004), and the special symbol type look-ahead command specifies the display result (miss symbol, big win symbol) by the first special symbol display based on the reserved special symbol 1, which is read ahead before the reserved special symbol 1 is used to display the changing special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the display result (small win symbol, big win symbol) by the second special symbol display based on the reserved special symbol 2, which is read ahead before the reserved special symbol 2 is used to display the changing special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern read-ahead command 1 to the fluctuation pattern read-ahead command 6 respectively specify a fluctuation pattern to be read ahead and used in the fluctuation display of the special pattern based on the reserved special pattern 1 before the reserved special pattern 1 is used to display the fluctuation of the special pattern on the first special pattern display of the function display unit 1400, and a fluctuation pattern to be read ahead and used in the fluctuation display of the special pattern based on the reserved special pattern 2 before the reserved special pattern 2 is used to display the fluctuation of the special pattern on the second special pattern display of the function display unit 1400, and the fluctuation pattern read-ahead command 1 is a command according to the setting value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern read-ahead command 2 is a command according to the setting value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern read-ahead command 3 is a command according to the setting value 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern read-ahead command 4 is a command according to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern read-ahead command 5 is a command according to the setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern read-ahead command 6 is a command according to the setting value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

Note that the commands including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 described above (special chart 1 synchronization performance start command, special chart 1 synchronization performance end command, special chart 2 synchronization performance start command, special chart 2 synchronization performance end command, setting change command) are only examples, and other commands may also be provided for each setting value.

The normal winning port winning command instructs the normal winning port 2003 to accept game ball B, and the normal symbol storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved normal symbols (the number of balls (reserved number) that have been accepted by the normal winning port 2003 and have not yet been used to display the changing normal symbols on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 after game ball B has been accepted).

Regarding the timing of sending these various commands, the start hole entry command is sent from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622 when the ball enters the start hole (when game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002, or when game ball B enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402) to notify the player of this mainly by voice, the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation in which the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the special pattern 1 storage command is sent when the number of balls reserved for special pattern 1 operation changes (when game ball B enters the first start hole 2002, or when game ball B enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402). The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 activation changes (when game ball B enters the second start hole 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases, or when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using the game ball B to display the special symbol fluctuations on the first special symbol display from that number), the special symbol type read-ahead command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 and 2 activation increases (when game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases), and the fluctuation pattern read-ahead command is sent immediately after the special symbol type read-ahead command is sent. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

The normal winning port winning command is sent when game ball B is received by normal winning port 2003, and the normal symbol memory command is sent when the number of balls reserved for normal symbol activation changes (when game ball B is received by normal winning port 2003 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the normal symbol fluctuations on the normal symbol display and the reserved number decreases). Note that these various commands are actually sent by the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

As described above, the start hole entry command is transmitted from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622 mainly to notify the player of the start hole entry (when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002, or when the game ball B enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402) by voice, but how the peripheral control board 1510 uses the start hole entry command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, in addition to notifying the player of the start hole entry by voice from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622, it is also used to monitor for the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. In contrast, some other pachinko machines are designed so that the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-hole winning command, but does not issue an audio notification from the top center speaker, top side speaker, or main frame speaker 622.

[20. Setting Information Abnormality Notification]
Next, a process will be described for notifying when the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are abnormal, based on a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 among the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Fig. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the setting information determination process that is executed when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the received command analysis process (step S1022).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting information determination process, it determines whether or not a setting abnormality notification flag, which will be described later, is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when an abnormality in the setting value is being notified. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that an abnormality in the setting value is being notified and the process proceeds to step S1507, whereas if the setting abnormality notification flag is not set in step S1500, it is determined that an abnormality in the setting value is not being notified and the process proceeds to step S1501.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then determines whether the received command is the setting change command (step S1501), and if a setting change command has been received, stores the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 in the setting information storage area based on the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the setting change command (step S1502), and terminates the process. As a result, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 that were set when the power was turned on are stored in the setting information storage area, and the peripheral control board 1510 becomes able to grasp the setting values of the pachinko machine 1.

If the received command is not the setting change command (in this example, the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command, special chart 1 synchronization performance end command, special chart 2 synchronization performance start command, special chart 2 synchronization performance end command, fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 1 to fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 6 are received), it is determined whether the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502 (step S1504), and if they do not match, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information (step S1504), and the processing is terminated by setting a setting abnormality notification flag indicating that an abnormality in the setting value information is being notified (step S1505).

In addition, if it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, i.e., if an abnormality in the setting value information is being notified, it is determined whether the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502 (step S1507), and if they do not match, the abnormality notification in the setting value information continues.

On the other hand, if the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502, the abnormal notification of the setting value information is terminated (step S1508), the setting abnormality notification flag is reset, and the process is terminated (step S1509).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is able to grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and if there is an abnormality in the setting value information indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 sent from the main control board 1310, specifically if the setting value has been changed despite not having gone through normal processing (setting value change processing), a process is executed to determine that an error or fraud has occurred and to notify the user of this. Note that even while an abnormality in the setting value information is being notified, the game continues, and the performance display device 1600 executes variable performances, etc. For this reason, the abnormality in the setting value information is notified so as not to impede the execution of the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600. Specifically, one or a combination of the following controls is executed: control to display "Setting abnormal!" or the like in an area that does not overlap with the variable performance being executed on the performance display device 1600; control to semi-transparently display "Setting abnormal!" or the like in an area that overlaps with the variable performance being executed on the performance display device 1600 so that the variable performance being executed on the performance display device 1600 can be seen; control to output a voice message saying "A setting abnormality has occurred" from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622; and control to light up lamps and LEDs provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 in a specified manner (for example, flashing red).

In addition, when there is an abnormality in the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the above-mentioned abnormality notification of the setting value information may not be executed, or in addition to the execution of the abnormality notification of the setting value information, the performance suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 described below may not be executed, and if a performance suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is being executed, the execution of this performance may be stopped. In other words, when there is an abnormality in the consistency between the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, due to the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 being affected by noise or the like and the setting value information indicated by this command being changed to an abnormal value, or the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 being affected by noise or the like and being changed to an abnormal value, executing the performance suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 reduces the reliability of this performance. Therefore, in such cases, it is possible to prevent the performance suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being executed, and to prevent a decrease in reliability by canceling this performance if it is being executed.

Also, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may be configured to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information, and in this case, the game may be stopped if an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information. For example, when the setting value is changed in the setting value change process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may store the changed setting value in a reference area separate from the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and at any timing (for example, the timing of sending the special chart 1 synchronization start command or the special chart 2 synchronization start command, etc.), determine whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area matches the setting value stored in the reference area, and if it is determined that they do not match, stop the game and notify the abnormality of the setting value information.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after starting to notify the user of an abnormality in the setting value information, when the abnormality is resolved, the notification of the abnormality in the setting value information is automatically terminated without any operation by the gaming parlor staff. Therefore, if the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like and the setting value information is changed to an abnormal value, the notification of the abnormality in the setting value information is initiated because it does not match the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area, and then if the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state, the notification of the abnormality in the setting value information can be immediately terminated.

In the above example, when the setting value is changed in the setting change process, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting value indicated by the command is stored on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information is determined depending on whether or not it matches the stored setting value. However, the method of determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information is not limited to this. For example, when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, it is determined whether or not the setting value information indicated by the command matches the setting value indicated by the previously received command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and if they do not match, an abnormality in the setting value information may be notified. In this case, when a setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the change in the setting value is received, an abnormality in the setting value information may not be notified.

In addition, in relation to the variable performance, a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 may be sent multiple times from the main control board 1310, and if at least some of the commands do not match, an abnormality in the setting value information may be notified. Specifically, it may be determined whether the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command and the special chart 2 synchronization performance start command matches the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special chart 1 synchronization performance end command and the special chart 2 synchronization performance end command, and if they do not match, an abnormality in the setting value information may be notified.

In addition, in the above example, the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command, special chart 1 synchronization performance end command, special chart 2 synchronization performance start command, special chart 2 synchronization performance end command, and change pattern look-ahead command are provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1, but if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, commands that notify the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 may be provided separately from the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command, special chart 1 synchronization performance end command, special chart 2 synchronization performance start command, special chart 2 synchronization performance end command, and change pattern look-ahead command, so that whenever any command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, or when a specific command is sent, a command notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also sent. For example, setting notification commands 1 to 6 may be provided to notify the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and a setting notification command corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 (setting notification command 1 for setting value 1, setting notification command 2 for setting value 2, ... setting notification command 6 for setting value 6) may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 at any timing. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one with multiple setting values and one with only one setting value), which can reduce the design work.

In this case, not only when sending commands (such as the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command, the special chart 1 synchronization performance end command, the special chart 2 synchronization performance start command, the special chart 2 synchronization performance end command, and the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command) related to the performance executed by the performance display device 1600 (such as the special chart synchronization performance, the hold notice performance described later, etc.), but also when sending commands (such as the normal winning port winning command, etc.) that are not related to the performance executed by the performance display device 1600, a command notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 may be sent to determine whether there is an abnormality in the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to frequently determine whether the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, and the accuracy of avoiding malfunctions due to noise, etc. can be further improved.

[21. Hold Notice Performance]
Next, the reserved notice performance will be explained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting hole 2002, a command (first reserved memory number designation command 0-4) indicating the first reserved memory number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600, and when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting hole 2004, a command (second reserved memory number designation command 0-1 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-1)) indicating the second reserved memory number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the second reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the above-mentioned special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that game ball B has entered the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002, or based on the fact that game ball B has entered the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402, the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 corresponding to the special lottery result for which the start of the suggestion is pending based on the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command can be changed to execute a pending notice performance that suggests the probability of a jackpot when the suggestion of the special lottery result is executed.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a hold notice judgment table for determining whether or not to give a hold notice and the type of hold notice pattern when a hold notice is executed, according to the first hold memory number specified by the first hold number designation command sent from the main control board 1310 or the second hold memory number specified by the second hold number memory command, and the advance judgment information (miss, small win, big win, etc., and may also notify the type of jackpot such as a guaranteed jackpot or a normal jackpot) specified by the variable pattern look-ahead command and the special pattern type look-ahead command.

Then, when a decision is made to execute the hold notice and the type of hold notice pattern to be executed is decided, the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 are displayed in a different display mode (in this example, a different display color from the normal one) than usual. In this example, the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are normally displayed in the basic color white, and when the hold notice is executed, they are displayed in blue, green, red, or a ladybug pattern. Also, the display modes of the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are set so that the probability of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

In addition, when the pre-determination information specifies that the lottery result is a jackpot, the reserve notification pattern that will result in a high probability of a jackpot (e.g., red or a ladybug pattern) as the final reserved display state is determined with a high probability, and when the pre-determination information specifies that the lottery result is a loss, the reserve notification pattern that will result in a low probability of a jackpot (e.g., blue) as the final reserved display state is determined with a high probability, so that when a state with a high probability of a jackpot is displayed as the final reserved display state, the player's expectations for a jackpot game state are increased.

In addition, the hold notice pattern is set to change the display state of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 each time a suggestion of the special lottery result (display of a change in decorative pattern (display of a change in special pattern)) is made during the execution of the hold notice performance (each time the hold is consumed). The hold notice pattern is set so that the display state of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern (i.e., the expectation of a jackpot does not decrease), and is set so that the display state of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is maintained (the display state does not change) or becomes a state with a high expectation of a jackpot each time a suggestion of the special lottery result (display of a change in decorative pattern (display of a change in special pattern)) is made (each time the hold is consumed). For this reason, even if the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d or the second reserved memory 1701a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in a display mode with a low probability of winning, there is still a possibility that the reserved display mode will change to a mode with a high probability of winning until the indication of the special lottery result that is the subject of the reserved notice begins, so that the player can be kept paying attention to the reserved display mode with anticipation until the very end.

In addition, the hold notification pattern does not necessarily have to display the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a in white (basic color) and then change in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern, but may start from an intermediate display mode (for example, displaying the first hold memory 1700c in red based on the fact that game ball B has entered the first start hole 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002), or change to the next display mode without passing through an intermediate display mode (for example, if the first hold memory 1700d is displayed in white, the color changes from white to a ladybug pattern when the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the first hold memory 1700d is moved to the first hold memory 1700c in response to the start of the next special lottery result). For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reserved items) for the display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a to change, it is possible for the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a to be displayed in a display mode with a high probability of winning. Also, even if the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low probability of winning, it is impossible to predict which display mode they will change to next, and it is possible to keep the player's attention on the display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a with anticipation until the very end.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a can be changed to a display mode different from the reserved notice, either together with the reserved notice performance suggesting the expected probability of a jackpot described above, or alone, to execute a setting value reserved indication performance suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a setting value reservation suggestion determination table for determining whether or not a setting value reservation suggestion effect is to be performed and the type of setting value reservation suggestion pattern when a setting value reservation suggestion effect is to be performed, according to the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the variation pattern pre-reading command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, when a decision is made to perform a setting value reservation suggestion effect and the type of setting value reservation suggestion pattern to be performed is determined, the first reservation memories 1700a-1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are displayed in a different display mode (in this example, a different shape from the normal one).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 235(A), the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are usually displayed in a basic shape of a circle, and when a setting value reserved indication performance is executed, they are displayed in either a square as shown in the first reserved memory 1700c in FIG. 235(B), a triangle as shown in 1700c in FIG. 235(C), or a star as shown in 1701a in FIG. 235(D). Also, the display form of the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a is set so that the expectation for the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 (expectation for a high setting value) increases in the order of circle → square → triangle → star.

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command, a setting value reservation suggestion pattern with a high expectation for a high setting value (e.g., a star) is determined with a high probability as the final reserved display appearance, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 3 or 4, a setting value reservation suggestion pattern with a medium expectation for a high setting value (e.g., a triangle) is determined with a high probability as the final reserved display appearance, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 1 or 2, a setting value reservation suggestion pattern with the lowest expectation for a high setting value (e.g., a square) is determined with a high probability as the final reserved display appearance, so that when a high expectation for a high setting value is displayed as the final reserved display appearance, the player's expectations for a high setting value are increased.

In addition, the setting value hold suggestion pattern is set to change the display state of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 each time a special lottery result is suggested (display of changing decorative patterns (display of changing special patterns)) during the execution of the setting value hold suggestion performance (each time the hold is consumed). In addition, the setting value reservation suggestion pattern is set so that the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of circle → square → triangle → star (i.e., the expectation for a high setting value does not decrease), and is set so that each time a special lottery result is suggested (display of changing decorative patterns (display of changing special patterns)) (each time the reservation is consumed), the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change) or becomes a mode with a high expectation for a high setting value. For this reason, even if the first pending memory 1700a-1700d or the second pending memory 1701a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in a display mode with low expectations for a high setting value, there remains a possibility that the pending display mode will change to a mode with high expectations for a high setting value until the suggestion of the special lottery result that is the subject of the setting value pending suggestion performance begins, so that the player can be expected to pay attention to the pending display mode until the very end.

In addition, the setting value reservation suggestion pattern does not necessarily have to display the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a as a circle (basic shape) and then change in the order of square → triangle → star, but is also set to start from an intermediate display mode (for example, displaying the first reserved memory 1700d as a square based on the fact that game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002), or to change to the next display mode without passing through an intermediate display mode (for example, if the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed as a square, the square changes to a star when the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the first reserved memory 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700c in response to the start of the next special lottery result). Therefore, even if the chances (number of reserved items) of the display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a changing are low, it is possible for the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a to be displayed in a display mode with high expectations for the high setting value. Also, even if the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with low expectations for the high setting value, it is impossible to predict which display mode they will change to next, and it is possible to keep the user's attention on the display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a with anticipation until the end.

In addition, since the hold notice pattern of the hold notice performance and the setting value hold suggestion pattern of the setting value hold suggestion performance are determined separately, there are cases where the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is changed to a mode with a high expectation for a high setting value based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice performance, and the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is changed to a mode with a high expectation for a high setting value based on the setting value hold suggestion pattern of the setting value hold suggestion performance, and there are cases where the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is changed to a mode with a high expectation for a high setting value based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice performance. There are cases where the display mode of the reserved memory 1701a is changed to one with a high expectation for a high setting value, while maintaining the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the setting value reserved suggestion pattern of the setting value reserved suggestion performance, and cases where the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is maintained based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice performance, while changing the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the setting value reserved suggestion pattern of the setting value reserved suggestion performance to one with a high expectation for a high setting value.

For example, when the display mode of the hold notice performance is "white" and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion performance is "circle", the hold is consumed and the first hold memory 1700a-1700d or the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is moved, the display mode of the hold notice performance is changed from "white" to "red" and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion performance is changed from "circle" to "square" (changing both the color and the shape), or when the display mode of the hold notice performance is "red" and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion performance is "circle", the hold is consumed and the first hold memory 1700a-1700d or the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is moved. When the hold is consumed and the first hold memory 1700a-1700d or the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the display display device 1600 is moved, the display mode of the hold notice effect may be changed from "white" to "blue" while the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect may be maintained as "red" without change, while the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect may be changed from "circle" to "square" (the color may be maintained while the shape may be changed). When the display mode of the hold notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is "triangle", the hold may be consumed and the first hold memory 1700a-1700d or the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the display display device 1600 may be moved, while the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect may be maintained as "triangle" without change (the color may be changed while the shape may be maintained).

In other words, in this example, the process of determining the hold notice pattern for the hold notice performance and the process of determining the set value hold suggestion pattern for the set value hold suggestion performance are carried out separately, and each time a special lottery result is suggested (display of decorative pattern changes (display of special pattern changes)) based on each change pattern (each time the hold is consumed), the display state of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is maintained (the display state is not changed), or is changed to a state with a higher expectation for a high set value.

In addition, the final display mode of the hold notice effect and the setting value hold indication effect may be determined separately, and one of a number of change patterns indicating change scenarios for the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a according to the result of this determination may be executed.

In addition, the timing at which the setting value reservation suggestion effect starts (the timing at which the display mode is displayed in a different mode from the normal display mode) is not limited to the timing at which the first reservation memories 1700a-1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a are displayed based on the reception of the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, but also starts at a timing thereafter (a timing after display in the basic shape, for example, when the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the first reservation memories 1700b-d are moved to the first reservation memories 1700a-c in response to the start of the next special lottery result, etc.). This makes it possible to keep the player's attention on the first reservation memories 1700a-1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a with anticipation until the end, even if the setting value reservation suggestion effect is not executed.

The execution frequency of the setting value hold suggestion effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect. In other words, the hold notice effect is executed based on advance judgment information, and when a suggestion of a special lottery result is made based on the special lottery result based on the hold memory that is executing the hold notice effect, the contents of the hold notice effect are reset, whereas the contents of the setting value hold suggestion effect continue without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, so by setting the execution frequency of the setting value hold suggestion effect lower than that of the hold notice effect, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being identified.

In addition, as shown in the first hold memory 1700c in FIG. 235(A) and FIG. 235(B) and the second hold memory 1701a in FIG. 235(D), the setting value hold suggestion effect may be executed simultaneously with the hold notice effect, and as shown in the first hold memory 1700c in FIG. 235(C), the setting value hold suggestion effect may be executed alone. Note that the hold notice pattern may include a change pattern in the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion effect, in which case a hold notice judgment table may be further provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 236, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is provided with multiple types of image data that combine the display modes of the above-mentioned hold notice performance and the display modes of the setting value hold suggestion performance, and displays the target hold memory based on image data that corresponds to both the hold notice pattern of the hold notice performance and the setting value hold suggestion pattern of the setting value hold suggestion performance. In other words, after determining the color as the display mode of the hold notice performance of the target hold memory and the shape as the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion performance, a display mode that combines these is generated, and this combined display mode is displayed as the hold memory.

Specifically, in the example of FIG. 236(A) where a reserved memory in which only the reserved notice effect is executed and the set value reserved suggestion effect is not executed is displayed, the first reserved memories 1700a and 1700b are displayed based on the image data of "Composite Pattern White 1", and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "Composite Pattern Blue 1". Also, in the example of FIG. 236(B) where a reserved memory in which both the reserved notice effect and the set value reserved suggestion effect are executed are displayed, the first reserved memories 1700a and 1700b are displayed based on the image data of "Composite Pattern White 1", and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "Composite Pattern Blue 2". In the example of FIG. 236(C), in which a pending memory in which only the pending notice performance is executed and a pending memory in which only the setting value pending suggestion performance is executed are respectively displayed, the first pending memory 1700a is displayed based on image data of "composite pattern blue 1," the first pending memory 1700b is displayed based on image data of "composite pattern white 1," and the first pending memory 1700c is displayed based on image data of "composite pattern white 3."

In addition, the second pending memory 1701a also executes a pending notice effect and a setting value pending suggestion effect, and in the example of FIG. 236(D) in which a pending memory in which both a pending notice effect and a setting value pending suggestion effect are executed is displayed, the second pending memory 1701a is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern red 4."

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by controlling the display of the first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a in a manner different from normal, it is possible to execute a reserved notice performance that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot and a setting value reserved suggestion performance that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. Note that while the reserved notice performance is executed based on advance judgment information, the setting value reserved suggestion performance is not based on advance judgment information. In other words, the reserved notice performance can be executed by obtaining the reserved special lottery results in advance, while the setting value reserved suggestion performance can be executed without obtaining the reserved special lottery results in advance.

In addition, the special lottery results for which the start of the suggestion is pending may not only be displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the first pending memory 1700a-1700d or the second pending memory 1701a, but also pending memories corresponding to the special lottery results for which the suggestion is being executed may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 as pending memories in progress. In this case, the final display mode of the above-mentioned pending notice performance or setting value pending suggestion performance may be displayed in the pending memory in progress. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw attention to the pending notice performance or setting value pending suggestion performance until the suggestion of the special lottery result is executed, and to create expectations for a jackpot or a high setting value, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above example, the display mode of the hold notice performance is changing the display color of the held memory, and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion performance is changing the shape of the held memory, but this is not limited to the above as long as it is possible to determine that the setting value hold suggestion performance is being performed. For example, the display mode of the hold notice performance may be changed by changing the display color of the hold notice performance, and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion performance may be displayed in association with the held memory, without changing the shape of the target held memory, and additional information such as a numerical value corresponding to the suggested setting value or an effect mode around the held memory (sparkling effect or flame effect) may be displayed.

In addition, when the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d is displayed based on game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, when the second reserved memory 1701a is displayed based on game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, and when the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d or the second reserved memory 1701a is updated and displayed based on the reserved being consumed (when the first reserved memory 1700b-1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700a-1700c, or when the first reserved memory 1700a or the second reserved memory 1701a is moved to the active reserved memory), a sound effect may be output to suggest the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. For example, to indicate that the set value is "1", a sound effect corresponding to the set value "1" (e.g., "beep") from among the multiple types of sound effects may be output; to indicate that the set value is "2", a sound effect corresponding to the set value "2" (e.g., "beep beep") from among the multiple types of sound effects may be output; to indicate that the set value is "5", a sound effect corresponding to the set value "5" (e.g., "beep beep beep") from among the multiple types of sound effects may be output; and to indicate that the set value is "6", a sound effect corresponding to the set value "6" (e.g., "pumpakapaaan") from among the multiple types of sound effects may be output.

In addition, when a hold notice effect or a setting value hold suggestion effect is executed, the expected jackpot probability or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested in accordance with the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. In this case, an operation instruction image instructing the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300 may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and then the expected jackpot probability or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested in accordance with the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. In addition, the operation instruction image may be the same for maintaining the jackpot expectation or the suggested setting value and for further increasing the jackpot expectation or the suggested setting value, so that it becomes impossible to determine whether the jackpot expectation or the suggested setting value will be increased by the performance (performance that displays the operation instruction image) that is a precursor to the execution of the hold notice performance or the setting value hold suggestion performance, and it is possible to encourage the player to actively operate the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the performance operation unit 300.

In addition, during a demonstration (a demonstration performed while the player is waiting), it may be possible to select whether or not to display a hold notice display or a setting value hold suggestion display. This allows the display to be executed according to the player's preferences, and it is possible to prevent hold notice displays and setting value hold suggestion displays from being executed for players who do not wish to be suggested things such as the jackpot expectation rate or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, an explanation of the mode suggested by the setting value pending suggestion effect (such as an explanation that it is a mode suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and not a mode suggesting the probability of a jackpot) may be given during a demonstration (a demonstration effect performed in a player waiting state) or when a suggestion of the special lottery result is executed (while the decorative pattern is changing and displayed). This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the setting value pending suggestion effect from being mistaken for the probability of a jackpot, which increases the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, during the execution of the time-saving state or the probability change state, it is possible to execute only the hold notice performance based on the advance judgment information instructed by the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command and the special symbol type pre-reading command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2004, without executing the hold notice performance based on the advance judgment information instructed by the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command and the special symbol type pre-reading command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002. In addition, during the execution of the time-saving state or the probability change state, it is possible to execute the setting value hold suggestion performance in relation to the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the game ball B entering the first starting hole 2002. This makes it possible to create anticipation for the setting value hold suggestion performance even if the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 during the time-saving state or the probability change state.

[22. Continuous setting value suggestion performance]
Next, the setting value continuous suggestion performance will be described. In this example, it is possible to execute a setting value continuous suggestion performance that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 over multiple decorative pattern changes. Note that the decorative pattern changes are not limited to those that are executed once for each special pattern change, but also include those that are executed multiple times for each special pattern change (so-called pseudo continuous changes).

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a setting value consecutive suggestion performance table for determining whether or not to perform a setting value consecutive suggestion performance and the type of setting value consecutive suggestion performance pattern when a setting value consecutive suggestion performance is performed, according to the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command and the special chart 2 synchronization performance start command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, when a decision is made to perform a setting value consecutive suggestion performance and the type of setting value consecutive suggestion performance pattern to be performed is determined, one of a plurality of setting suggestion characters 1702 having different display modes according to the setting value is made to appear each time the display display device 1600 starts displaying the changing decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237(A), when the display of the decorative pattern begins on the display device 1600, a setting suggestion character 1702 with a "1" drawn on its head is displayed as a setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to a setting value of 1. Also, as shown in FIG. 237(C), when the display device 1600 begins to display the next change in the decorative pattern, a setting suggestion character 1702 with a "3" drawn on its head is displayed as a setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to a setting value of 3, and as shown in FIG. 237(E), when the display device 1600 begins to display the next change in the decorative pattern, a setting suggestion character 1702 with a "4" drawn on its head is displayed as a setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to a setting value of 4.

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as "6" based on the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command and the special chart 2 synchronization performance start command, a setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern in which the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponds to the setting value "6" as the final mode is determined with a high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 1, a setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern in which the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponds to the setting value "1" as the final mode is determined with a high probability, so that when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the high setting value is displayed as the final mode of the setting suggestion character 1702, the player's expectations for the high setting value are increased.

In addition, in the setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern, it is set how the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 changes each time the display of the decorative pattern changes during the execution of the setting value continuous suggestion performance. In addition, in the setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern, it is set so that the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 (i.e., the expectation for a high setting value does not decrease), and it is set so that the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change) or becomes a mode corresponding to the high setting value each time the display of the decorative pattern changes starts. For this reason, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to a low setting value, there is still a possibility that the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 will change to a mode corresponding to a high setting value until the setting value continuous suggestion performance ends, so that the setting suggestion character 1702 can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

In addition, the setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern does not necessarily have to change the setting suggestion character 1702 in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 after displaying it in a mode corresponding to the setting value "1". It can also be set to start from an intermediate display mode (for example, the setting suggestion character 1702 is first displayed with the setting value "2" when the setting value continuous suggestion performance is started), or to change to the next display mode without passing through an intermediate display mode (for example, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "2" is displayed, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to "4" is displayed in response to the start of the next change display of the decorative pattern). For this reason, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to a low setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode it will change to next, and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 can be paid attention to with anticipation until the end.

The execution frequency of the setting value continuous suggestion effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect, as with the setting value hold suggestion effect described above. In other words, the hold notice effect is executed based on advance judgment information, and when a suggestion of a special lottery result is made based on the special lottery result based on the hold memory that is executing the hold notice effect, the contents of the hold notice effect are reset, whereas the contents of the setting value continuous suggestion effect continue without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, so by setting the execution frequency of the setting value continuous suggestion effect lower than that of the hold notice effect, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being identified.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is able to execute a continuous setting value suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 over multiple changing displays of the decorative pattern. Note that the continuous setting value suggestion effect, like the setting value pending suggestion effect described above, is not based on advance judgment information and can be executed without obtaining the special lottery results in advance.

The setting value continuous suggestion effect that displays the setting suggestion character 1702 may be executed beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved memories (the upper limit of the first reserved memory number is 4, and the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is 1) (for example, over 5 or more changes in the decorative pattern). In addition, if the number of reserved memories becomes 0 during the execution of the setting value continuous suggestion effect, the setting value continuous suggestion effect may be resumed and the setting suggestion character 1702 may be displayed when the display of the decorative pattern changes based on the game ball B entering the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004. In this case, the setting suggestion character 1702 may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the setting value continuous suggestion effect is resumed. This allows the player to recognize that the setting value continuous suggestion effect is continuing and to continue playing, and even if the player has quit playing, it is possible to make a new player interested in the ongoing setting value continuous suggestion effect and encourage them to play on the gaming machine.

The continuous setting value suggestion effect may be executed in parallel with the above-mentioned reserved setting value suggestion effect. This makes it possible to provide a new game in which the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be guessed from both the presentation mode of the reserved setting value suggestion effect and the presentation mode of the continuous setting value suggestion effect. In addition, multiple types of setting suggestion characters 1702 may be provided, and one of the setting suggestion characters 1702 may be displayed depending on the expected probability of a jackpot.

[23. Use of surplus settings other than for big hit probability and small hit probability]
In this embodiment, when the setting value can be changed, the setting value (setting value 1 to 6) can be changed by pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, and the table (hit judgment table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in the special lottery is a table corresponding to the confirmed setting value. In the above embodiment, the combinations of "big hit probability", "small hit probability", "small hit type", "normal symbol hit probability", and "opening and closing pattern of the second start hole according to the normal hit type" are set to be different in the table corresponding to each setting value, but as another example, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" may be set to have the same setting value, but the monitoring system for fraudulent acts may be set to be different as information other than the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability".

As described above, various types of fraudulent activities are monitored in the fraud detection process of step S112. Specifically, a magnetic sensor 2010 is provided to detect fraudulent activities such as bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of a game ball B flowing down a game area 5a defined on the game board 5 to cause the ball to enter various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors for fraudulent activities using magnets. In addition, a vibration sensor 3003 is provided to detect fraudulent activities such as shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to cause the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 to change its course and enter various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. The main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003, and monitors fraudulent activities caused by vibration. In this example, the fraudulent activity monitoring system can change the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraudulent activity, change the part (target area) that the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraudulent activity determines as fraudulent activity, and change the conditions for canceling the error state when it determines that fraudulent activity has occurred and transitions to an error state.

As shown in FIG. 238, in this example, the "jackpot probability," "small hit probability," and "monitoring system for fraudulent activity" are set corresponding to the setting values 1 to 3 and 1' to 3', respectively.

Specifically, the jackpot probability (the proportion of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot judgment table that indicate a jackpot win) is set to "1 in 319" for setting value 1 and setting value 1', "1 in 309" for setting value 2 and setting value 2', and "1 in 299" for setting value 3 and setting value 3'. In this example, the jackpot probability is set to be higher the higher the setting value for each of setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 1' to 3'.

In addition, the table used for the special drawing of the first special symbol has a small win probability (the proportion of small win judgment values that indicate a small win in the hit judgment table) set to "1 in 100" for each of the setting values 1 to 3 and 1' to 3', whereas the table used for the special drawing of the second special symbol has a small win probability set to "50 in 100" for each of the setting values 1 to 3 and 1' to 3'. Note that the setting values 1 to 3 and 1' to 3' may be set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the small win probability.

As for the fraudulent activity monitoring system, "fraud monitoring A" is set for setting values 1 to 3, and "fraud monitoring B" is set for setting values 1' to 3'. In this example, "fraud monitoring A" is set to have a stronger monitoring system than "fraud monitoring B."

In this example, the "jackpot probability" and "small jackpot probability" are set to the same setting value for each of the setting values 1 and 1', setting values 2 and 2', and setting values 3 and 3', but the fraudulent activity monitoring system is set to either "fraudulent monitoring A" or "fraudulent monitoring B". For example, in a setting change board 1311 provided with a setting key switch 1311a, etc., if six setting values can be set and only three types of "jackpot probability" need to be set, three excess setting values will be generated in addition to the three setting values corresponding to the three types of "jackpot probability". In this way, if the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is used for other gaming machines, excess setting values may be generated, but as in this example, by using the excess setting values to change the fraudulent activity monitoring system, the excess setting values can be effectively used and the changes in the program can be minimized.

As for the display mode of the selected setting value during the operation related to the setting change, for settings 1 to 3, the setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display displays "1", "2", and "3", and the 7-segment LED is displayed in a normal flashing manner, whereas for settings 1' to 3', the setting display 1310g displays "1", "2", and "3", and the 7-segment LED is displayed in a fast flashing manner (faster flashing than for settings 1 to 3). This allows the operator to clearly distinguish whether the setting being changed is setting 1 to 3 or setting 1' to 3' when changing the setting value. However, when the setting value is determined after changing the setting value, the display mode of the setting value is that the 7-segment LED stops flashing normally or fast flashing and is displayed in a normal lighting manner in both cases of settings 1 to 3 and settings 1' to 3'. Therefore, when the operator determines the setting value after changing the setting, it is unclear whether the setting value is setting 1 to 3 or setting 1' to 3'.

As another example of the above, in regard to the display mode of the selected setting value during an operation related to a setting change, for settings 1 to 3, "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display, whereas for settings 1' to 3', dots may be added to display "1.", "2.", and "3." on the setting display 1310g compared to settings 1 to 3. In such an example, even if the 7-segment LED flashes normally during the change, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting being changed is setting 1 to 3 or setting 1' to 3'. Also, when the setting value is determined after the setting change, even if the 7-segment LED stops flashing normally and displays normally lit as the display mode of the setting value, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the determined setting value is setting 1 to 3 or setting 1' to 3'.

Next, specific monitoring systems for "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B" include the first to fifth specific examples. In this example, it is sufficient that "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B" implement one or more of the first to fifth specific examples. First, as a first specific example, a case in which the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent activity is made different will be described below.

As a first specific example, in "fraudulent monitoring A", the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent activities is increased, whereas in "fraudulent monitoring B", the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent activities is decreased. If the detection sensors that detect fraudulent activities detect excessively due to individual differences in the pachinko machines 1 or the installation location within the hall, the excessive detection can be prevented by selecting "fraudulent monitoring B". On the other hand, if the detection sensors that detect fraudulent activities are not very good, the poor detection can be prevented by selecting "fraudulent monitoring A". Also, if you want to strengthen measures against magnetic and vibration knocks, you can strengthen monitoring of fraudulent activities caused by magnetic and vibration knocks by selecting "fraudulent activities A".

In addition, in "Fraud Monitoring A," when a detection signal is input from a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraudulent activity, it is determined that there is fraudulent activity even if the time during which the detection signal is input is short or the number of times the detection signal is input is small, whereas in "Fraud Monitoring B," it may be determined that there is fraudulent activity if the time during which the detection signal is input is long or the number of times the detection signal is input is large. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above, which is achieved by changing the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor that detects fraudulent activity.

Next, as a second specific example, the case where the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent activity use different locations (target areas) to determine whether fraudulent activity has occurred will be described below.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent behavior using magnets, a setting operation magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. The setting operation magnetic sensor monitors whether a magnet has approached the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and monitors fraudulent behavior such as someone other than the person who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation, attempting to change the setting or display the confirmation. On the other hand, the game area magnetic sensor monitors whether a magnet has approached the area in front of the game area 5a, and monitors fraudulent behavior such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to enter various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5.

Similarly, as vibration sensors 3003 for detecting fraudulent behavior due to vibration, a setting operation section vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, and a game area section vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center member 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. The setting operation section vibration sensor monitors whether vibration has been applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and monitors fraudulent behavior such as an attempt to change the setting value or display a confirmation by someone other than the person who changes the setting value or displays a confirmation. On the other hand, the game area section vibration sensor monitors whether vibration has been applied to the third distribution device 2550, and monitors fraudulent behavior such as changing the path of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 to cause the game ball B to enter the second V winning hole 2008.

As a second specific example, in "fraud monitoring A," all of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent behavior are used to increase the number of areas where fraudulent behavior is determined, whereas in "fraud monitoring B," only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and setting operation unit vibration sensor, which are part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent behavior, are used to reduce the number of areas where fraudulent behavior is determined. In other words, in "fraud monitoring A," not only can it detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, but it can also detect the generation of magnetism and vibration in front of the play area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5, whereas in "fraud monitoring B," it is only possible to detect the generation of magnetism and vibration around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the play area magnetic sensor or the play area vibration sensor, and such a detection sensor frequently detects fraud even when no fraud is occurring, selecting "Fraud Monitoring B" can prevent such frequent detections. Also, if you want to strengthen measures against magnet and vibration, selecting "Fraud Monitoring A" will monitor for fraud in front of the play area 5a, and strengthen monitoring of fraud caused by magnet and vibration.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, a setting operation section magnetic sensor and a play area section magnetic sensor, are provided as magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent behavior using magnets, but one magnetic sensor 2010 capable of identifying the location where magnetism occurs (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the play board 5, or in front of the play area 5a located on the front side of the play board 5) may be provided. Similarly, two vibration sensors 3003, a setting operation section vibration sensor and a play area section vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors 3003 for detecting fraudulent behavior using vibration, but one vibration sensor capable of identifying the location where vibration occurs (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the play board 5, or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center member 2500 provided on the play board 5) may be provided. Even in such cases, "Fraud Monitoring B" can achieve the same effect as above by determining that fraud has occurred only when it is determined that magnetism or vibration has occurred in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the game board 5.

Next, as a third specific example, we will explain below how to change the conditions for releasing an error state when it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred and the system transitions to an error state.

As a third specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when it judges that a fraudulent act has occurred and the machine has entered an error state, it is possible to clear the error state by turning the power back on, whereas in "Fraud Monitoring B", when it judges that a fraudulent act has occurred and the machine has entered an error state, it is possible to automatically clear the error state by waiting a predetermined time (e.g., 3 minutes). In other words, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when it judges that a fraudulent act has occurred and the machine has entered an error state, the error state cannot be cleared unless the hall staff opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a to turn the power of the pachinko machine 1 back on. In addition, when the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraudulent act detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the machine enters an error state and executes an abnormal occurrence performance that notifies the user of the abnormal state caused by the occurrence of magnetism or vibration through the image, lamp, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600, making it difficult to normally grasp the progress of the game. Therefore, if "Fraud Monitoring A" is selected, when fraud is detected and the machine transitions to an error state, action must be taken by a hall staff member, and the hall staff member will become aware of the fraudulent activity, which can increase the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity. Also, if you want to strengthen measures against magnetic and vibration interference, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen monitoring of fraudulent activity caused by magnetic and vibration interference.

Next, as a fourth specific example, the following describes a case where, when a fraudulent act is determined and an error state is entered, information regarding the error state is output or not to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1.

As a fourth specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A," when a fraudulent activity is determined and an error state is entered, information about the error state is output to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, whereas in "Fraud Monitoring B," even if a fraudulent activity is determined and an error state is entered, information about the error state is not output to the hall computer. In other words, in "Fraud Monitoring A," when a fraudulent activity is determined and an error state is entered, a hall staff member can immediately grasp the fraudulent activity even if he or she is not present, which increases the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity. Also, if you want to strengthen measures against magnetic and vibration knockouts, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen monitoring of fraudulent activity caused by magnetic and vibration knockouts.

Next, as a fifth specific example, the following describes a case where, when a fraudulent act is determined and an error state is entered, information about the error state is notified to the outside world through an image, lamp, or output from a speaker on the performance display device 1600.

As a fifth specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A," when it determines that fraud has occurred and transitions to an error state, it executes an abnormality occurrence presentation to notify the user that an abnormal state caused by the generation of magnetism or vibration is occurring through images, lamps, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600, and notifies the user of information regarding the error state to the outside, whereas in "Fraud Monitoring B," even if it determines that fraud has occurred and transitions to an error state, it does not externally report information regarding the error state. In other words, in "Fraud Monitoring A," when it determines that fraud has occurred and transitions to an error state, the fraudster is warned by an external report of information regarding the error state, which increases the deterrent effect against fraud. Also, if you want to strengthen measures against magnetic and vibration knockouts, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen monitoring of fraudulent acts caused by magnetic and vibration knockouts.

In this example, "fraud monitoring A" is set for setting values 1 to 3, and "fraud monitoring B" is set for setting values 1' to 3'. The main control MPU 1310a sends information about the setting values as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether to wait for "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B." Therefore, if it is determined that fraud has occurred and a transition to an error state occurs, when the main control MPU 1310a sends information about the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine whether or not to report information about the error state to the outside.

In addition, in "Fraud Monitoring B", if a fraudulent act is determined and an error state is entered, information regarding the error state is reported to the outside, and at that time, the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 may be executed in a more subdued (less noticeable) manner than in "Fraud Monitoring A". For example, in "Fraud Monitoring B", when reporting information regarding the error state to the outside, the output from the lamp and speaker may be stopped and only the image of the performance display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above, where whether or not information regarding the error state is reported to the outside is changed.

In the above, a case was described in which the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values was used, only three types of "jackpot probability" were required to be set, and three surplus setting values were generated. In other words, for setting values 1' to 3', "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same as for setting values 1 to 3, but "fraudulent monitoring B" is set for setting values 1 to 3 in which the fraudulent activity monitoring system is set to "fraudulent monitoring A". However, this is not limited to this, and for example, setting values 1 to 5 corresponding to five types of "jackpot probability" are set, and when one surplus setting value is generated, the fraudulent activity monitoring system may be changed for that one surplus setting value. For example, for setting value 1', which is one surplus setting value, "fraudulent monitoring B" may be set for setting values 1 to 5 in which the fraudulent activity monitoring system is set to "fraudulent monitoring A" even though the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same as for setting value 1 out of setting values 1 to 5. In such a case, the surplus setting value can be effectively utilized.

In the above, either "fraudulent monitoring A" or "fraudulent monitoring B" is set as the fraudulent monitoring system, but any one of "fraudulent monitoring A", "fraudulent monitoring B", and "fraudulent monitoring C" with different fraudulent monitoring systems may be set. The fraudulent monitoring is strengthened in the order of "fraudulent monitoring C", "fraudulent monitoring B", and "fraudulent monitoring A". For example, in the case where setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of "jackpot probability" are set and four surplus setting values are generated, setting values 1' and 2' set to "fraudulent monitoring B" even though the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same setting values, or setting values 1'' and 2'''' set to "fraudulent monitoring C" even though the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same setting values, may be set as surplus setting values for setting values 1 and 2 set to "fraudulent monitoring A" as the fraudulent monitoring system. In such a case, the surplus setting values can be effectively used.

In the above, we have described a case where the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are set to the same value, but the fraud monitoring system is set to be different. However, as information other than the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability", the operation system of all or some of the multiple role objects (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 may be set to be different. A sixth specific example of a case where the operation system of some of the multiple role objects (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 is set to be different will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 239, the sixth concrete example differs from the first to fifth concrete examples in which a "monitoring system for fraudulent activity" is set in that the operation system of a specific role (specific movable object) among multiple roles (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 is set to "with specific role operation" for setting values 1 to 3, and "without specific role operation" for setting values 1' to 3'. In other words, in the sixth concrete example, even though the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are set to the same values for setting values 1 and 1', setting values 2 and 2', and setting values 3 and 3', the operation system of a specific role (specific movable object) is set to either "with specific role operation" or "without specific role operation". In addition, the multiple roles (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can be operated using a drive source such as a drive motor or a solenoid. For example, the specific role in this embodiment is composed of the performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 described above, and the performance operation unit 300 can be raised and lowered by the above-mentioned operating mechanism. Since the performance operation unit 300 can be operated by direct contact with the player, it is more likely to malfunction or have a malfunction than other roles. In addition, in the "with specific role operation", the specific role is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object performance accompanied by the operation of the specific role (the performance operation unit 300 is raised and lowered), whereas in the "without specific role operation", the specific role is controlled not to operate without executing the movable object performance accompanied by the operation of the specific role. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the operating mechanism of the specific role and the specific role no longer operates normally, by selecting "without specific role operation", it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the specific role stops midway and it becomes difficult to continue playing.

In this example, when a variation pattern in which a movable object performance accompanied by the operation of a specific role is determined among the multiple variation patterns, in "with specific role operation", the specific role is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object performance accompanied by the operation of the specific role, whereas in "without specific role operation", the specific role is controlled not to operate without executing the movable object performance accompanied by the operation of the specific role. In contrast, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between "with specific role operation" and "without specific role operation". For example, in "with specific role operation", it is possible to determine a variation pattern in which a movable object performance accompanied by the operation of a specific role is set among the multiple variation patterns, whereas in "without specific role operation", it is possible to control not to determine a variation pattern in which a movable object performance accompanied by the operation of a specific role is set. In such a case, the same effect as above can be obtained by controlling not to operate the specific role without executing the movable object performance accompanied by the operation of the specific role in "without specific role operation".

In addition, in this example, when the operation configuration of the specific role (specific movable object) is set to a setting value 1 to 3 that indicates "specific role operation", the initial operation of the specific role is performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed), whereas when it is set to a setting value 1' to 3' that indicates "specific role operation not occurring", the initial operation of the specific role is not performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). This allows the user to recognize once again that a specific role (specific movable object) among multiple roles (movable objects) has been removed from the operation targets. In addition, the operator can check whether the setting value for the operation of the specific role (specific movable object) is the one intended, and it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake with an unintended setting value.

In contrast to the above, if checking for malfunctions in the operation of a specific feature (specific movable object) is a priority, in order to accurately inform the user of this, the initial operation of the specific feature may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed) regardless of whether the setting is "specific feature operation" or "specific feature operation not occurring."

Whether "specific feature action" or "specific feature no action" is set can be confirmed by the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may also be notified by something other than the setting display 1310g. For example, when the setting change of the setting value is completed, "specific feature action has been set/specific feature no action has been set" may be notified by an image, lamp, or speaker output from the performance display device 1600, or a notification to that effect may be displayed as a standby screen during the period when play is not being performed, allowing the player to recognize whether a specific feature (specific movable object) among multiple features (movable objects) is the target of action.

In this example, the setting value can be changed by the operator to either "specific gambling action" or "specific gambling action not occurring." However, after such an initial setting, the player may be allowed to change the initial setting to another setting. For example, the player may be allowed to change the initial setting to either "specific gambling action" or "specific gambling action not occurring" while the standby screen is being displayed during a period when no game is being played. That is, "specific gambling action" is set to setting values 1 to 3, and "specific gambling action not occurring" is set to setting values 1' to 3', and the main control MPU 1310a sends information about the setting value as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 executes one of the settings as the initial setting. However, if the player changes the setting to another setting after the initial setting, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the setting changed by the player in priority over the initial setting.

In addition, the specific role (specific movable object) among the multiple roles (movable objects) is not limited to the performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300, but may be provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3, or may operate from outside the front of the screen of the performance display device 1600 toward the front of the screen. In this example, the operation state of the specific role (specific movable object) among the multiple roles (movable objects) can be changed by changing the setting value, but it is not limited to the specific role, and it is possible to change the operation state of multiple roles (movable objects) or all roles, and the target role may be set to either "role action" or "role action not performed". In addition, the role (movable object) may be provided not only on the game board 5 or door frame 3, but also on the outer frame 2 or main frame 4, and such roles may also be subject to the change of operation state.

[24. Fraud Monitoring]
In this embodiment, various types of fraudulent acts are monitored in the fraudulent act detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, a magnetic sensor 2010 is provided to detect fraudulent acts such as bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of a game ball B flowing down a game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to cause the ball to enter various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent acts based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 and monitors the fraudulent acts caused by magnets. In addition, a vibration sensor 3003 is provided to detect fraudulent activities such as shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to cause the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 to change its course and enter various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003, and monitors fraudulent activities caused by vibration. The monitoring method for these fraudulent activities is different between normal times and when the setting values are changed or the confirmation display of the setting values is performed.

[24-1. Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, the monitoring of fraudulent activities during normal times will be described below. Here, normal times refers to a state in which the main frame 4 is closed, and no changes to the settings or confirmation displays of the settings are being made, and it is possible to play games such as pattern changes, big win games, and small win games.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent behavior using magnets, a setting operation magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. In addition, during normal times, the setting operation magnetic sensor is used to monitor fraudulent behavior in a specified area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, during normal times, the setting operation magnetic sensor monitors whether a magnetism that should not be generated (magneticism due to fraudulent access) has occurred (whether a magnet has approached) in the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and monitors fraudulent behavior such as someone other than the person who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation. One example of fraudulent conduct using a magnet on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is to place a metal fraudulent device and a magnet that indirectly operates the metal fraudulent device inside the island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed), and then operate the magnet and the metal fraudulent device through a small gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment or through an opening created by destroying part of the pachinko machine 1 to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor in the fraud detection process in step S112, it is determined that a fraudulent conduct using a magnet has been conducted in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided.

Similarly, during normal operation, the game area magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activity in a specified area on the surface of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, during normal operation, the game area magnetic sensor monitors whether a magnetic field that should not occur (magnetic field due to fraudulent access) has occurred (whether a magnet has approached) in the area in front of the game area 5a, and monitors for fraudulent activity such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to enter various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. Note that when a detection signal is input from the game area magnetic sensor in the fraud detection process of step S112, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet has occurred in the area in front of the game area 5a.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, a setting operation section magnetic sensor and a play area section magnetic sensor, are provided as the magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent behavior using magnets, but these two magnetic sensors 2010 may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, these two magnetic sensors 2010 are configured as rectangular box-shaped sensor bodies, and are capable of magnetic detection in a first magnetic detection area having a directivity with strong sensitivity in the vertical direction to one side surface, and magnetic detection in a second magnetic detection area having a directivity with strong sensitivity in the vertical direction to the other side surface, which is the opposite side. Note that "high sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction at all. In other words, the magnetic detection areas emitted from each side surface are wide areas surrounded by a sphere. The game area magnetic sensor is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emanating from the side of the sensor body spread in the left-right or up-down direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, allowing it to monitor a wide area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, multiple locations among the winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the normal winning hole 2003, the large winning hole 2005, and other main parts of the ball flow path). On the other hand, the setting operation magnetic sensor is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emanating from the side of the sensor body spread in the front-back direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, and one of the magnetic detection areas encompasses the back side of the pachinko machine 1, allowing it to monitor the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided.

It is also possible to have an embodiment in which the two setting operation section magnetic sensors and the play area section magnetic sensors do not have the same performance. For example, instead of the setting operation section magnetic sensor and the play area section magnetic sensor, a single magnetic sensor 2010 may be provided that can identify the location where the magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the play board 5, or in front of the play area 5a located on the front side of the play board 5). Even with this configuration, it is possible to monitor whether a magnet is approaching the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is located, or the area in front of the play area 5a.

In this example, as the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent behavior due to vibration, a setting operation unit vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center member 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. In addition, during normal times, fraudulent behavior is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. In other words, during normal times, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not occur (vibrations due to fraudulent access) have been applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and monitors fraudulent behavior such as someone other than the person who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation. In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit vibration sensor, it is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed by vibration in the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided.

On the other hand, during normal play, the game area vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent behavior only during small win play, and the game area vibration sensor is not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior during play other than small win play. This is because, during small win play, the third allocation device 2550 allocates the game ball B allocated to the second V winning port 2008 side by the second allocation device 2540 to either the second V winning port 2008 or the losing side, but when vibration is applied to the third allocation device 2550, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B in the third allocation device 2550 and cause the game ball B to enter the second V winning port 2008, and this is to prevent such fraudulent behavior. In other words, during normal play when a small win is being played, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not occur (vibrations due to unauthorized access) have been applied to the third distribution device 2550, and monitors for fraudulent behavior such as changing the path of game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 to cause game ball B to enter the second V winning hole 2008. When a detection signal is input from the game area vibration sensor in the fraud detection process of step S112, it is determined that fraudulent behavior using vibration is being performed on the third distribution device 2550.

In this example, two vibration sensors 3003 are provided to detect fraudulent behavior caused by vibration: a setting operation section vibration sensor and a play area vibration sensor. However, it is also possible to provide a single vibration sensor 3003 that can identify the location where the vibration occurred (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the play board 5, or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center member 2500 provided on the play board 5). Even with this configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration has been applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is provided, or whether vibration has been applied to the third distribution device 2550.

In addition, under normal circumstances, in the launch permission signal setting process of step S113, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to convey permission to launch game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, making it possible to launch game ball B when the player operates the handle 195.

In addition, during normal times, when game ball B enters a winning hole such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the normal winning hole 2003, or the large winning hole 2005, the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor and treats the detection of game ball B as valid. Specifically, when the detection of game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, no pattern change is performed and game ball B is not paid out, whereas when the detection of game ball B is valid, when game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, the pattern change is performed and game ball B can be paid out.

In addition, during normal operation, except for the period during which the performance is being performed using the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 while the pattern is changing, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as the lamp and the screen of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, it is possible to adjust the volume and amount of light by rotating the touch operation unit 302 after displaying an image for adjustment on the performance display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303. Note that during the period during which the performance is being performed using the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 while the pattern is changing, the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is in a waiting state for being operated for that performance, so even if the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, it is a prohibited period during which the volume and amount of light cannot be adjusted.

[24-2. Monitoring for fraudulent changes to settings]
Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value will be described with reference to Fig. 240. Fig. 240 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value.

When changing the setting value, first, with the pachinko machine 1 not powered on (the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 (timing t1), then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into setting key ON (timing t2). Then, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), which brings the state into which the setting value can be changed (change permitted state). In such a change permission state, the setting value (setting value 1 to 6) can be changed every time the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, and then the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation to turn the setting key switch 1311a into the determination key ON state, and then the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the determination key ON to its original position to turn the setting key switch 1311a into the OFF state (timing t4). In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permission state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value cannot be changed (change disabled state). Then, the setting key is removed from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 (timing t5), making it possible to play the game.

In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on process (see Fig. 175A, Fig. 176), but the setting change process of step S37 is not terminated until the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 (step S222 of the setting change process does not determine that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt permission setting of the subsequent step S52 is prohibited from being performed during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. And, since the main control side timer interrupt process (see Fig. 177) is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input process of step S104, the fraud detection process of step S112, the launch permission signal setting process of step S113, etc. in the main control side timer interrupt process are left unexecuted and in a standby state. In other words, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permitted state), but this is a special period in which monitoring of fraudulent activity is not performed, the launch of game ball B is not permitted, and the input of a detection signal when game ball B enters a winning slot is not considered valid. Note that during the change permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4, information regarding the setting value being changed is output to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via external terminal board 558 of pachinko machine 1, allowing hall staff to know that the setting is being changed.

Specifically, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activities using the setting operation section magnetic sensor and monitoring of fraudulent activities using the play area section magnetic sensor are not performed. This is because, during the change permission state, the authorized operator who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who changes the setting value to commit fraudulent activities using magnets. Also, even if the authorized operator who changes the setting value has something that can generate magnetism when changing the setting value, it is possible to prevent detection of fraudulent activities using magnets and suppress interference with authorized setting change operations.

Similarly, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the play area vibration sensor are not performed at all. This is because, during the change permission state, the authorized operator who changes the setting values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who changes the settings to commit fraudulent activity using vibration. Also, even if the authorized operator who changes the settings applies vibration when changing the setting values, this prevents it from being detected as fraudulent activity using vibration, and inhibits disruption of authorized setting change operations.

In addition, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the launch of game ball B is prohibited. This prevents game ball B from being launched even if an authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value touches the handle 195, thereby preventing interference with authorized setting change work. Also, in the unlikely event that a player operates the handle 195 in the change permission state, game ball B cannot be launched.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, when game ball B enters a prize winning hole such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the normal prize winning hole 2003, the large prize winning hole 2005, or various gate sections (gates), the main control MPU 1310a does not input a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, and the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that detection of game ball B by the detection sensor itself may not be performed, or a detection signal from the detection sensor may be input but treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of game ball B is disabled, for example, even if game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, no lottery will be held, no pattern will change, and no game ball B will be paid out. As a result, even if game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 for some reason during the normal operation of changing the setting value, the progress of the game due to this can be suppressed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU 1310a does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the winning hole and gate section (gate), and at the same time, the main control MPU 1310a does not input detection signals from the detection sensor corresponding to the outlet 1008, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is invalid, for example, it is possible to exclude the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state from the measurement target (target of addition to the out number counter) by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the change permission state and measured by the base monitor 1310h (added to the out number counter).

In addition, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting elements such as lamps and the screen of the performance display device 1600 cannot be adjusted.

In addition, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a setting change notification (setting change related notification) is executed by outputting the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the setting of the setting value is being changed. The setting change notification is executed by repeating the sound "Setting is being changed", displaying the message "Setting is being changed!", and lighting the lamp in a color corresponding to the setting value 1 to 6 during the selection operation process. This setting change notification is a notification (performance) that is executed only in the change permission state, and is executed in priority over the main frame open notification that is executed when the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, a main frame open notification (such as a display or sound of "The frame is open") is normally executed, but in the change permission state, the setting change notification is executed as the top priority without executing the main frame open notification. One possible example is to execute the main body frame open notification and the setting change notification in parallel, with the setting change notification taking priority over the main body frame open notification, and issuing the main body frame open notification after the setting change notification has ended.

In addition, in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600, the notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed as the setting change notification described above. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special symbol indicator, a second special hold number indicator, and a round indicator, as well as a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permission state), and a confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being confirmed (confirmation display state). In the change permission state, only the LED of the setting change indicator in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. As a result, in the change permission state, it is possible to know that the game is not progressing by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

At the time t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process (see Figs. 175A and 176) is terminated (step S222 of the setting change process determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF), and the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed. Then, it becomes possible to start the main control side timer interrupt process (see Fig. 177), and the switch input process of step S104, the fraud detection process of step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process are performed. However, in this embodiment, until the work of closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t5), the launch of the game ball B is not permitted, and the input of a detection signal when the game ball B enters the winning hole is not permitted, and the state in which the game cannot be started is maintained. In other words, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, even if game ball B is entered into the winning slot through fraudulent activity, no detection signal is input, and no fraudulent advantage can be obtained during this period. Also, since there is a possibility of impact from closing main frame 4 against outer frame 2, the device is in a standby state and has not yet performed monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, or the game area vibration sensor.

In addition, from the time t5 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the game ball B can be released, and games such as pattern changes, big win games, and small win games can be played. Monitoring for various types of fraudulent activities begins as explained in the above-mentioned [Fraudulent monitoring during normal operation].

In addition, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main frame 4 is not closed against the outer frame 2, and an image is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 1600 to notify the player that the game is waiting to start (game waiting notification). Then, during the specified period from timing t5, the main frame 4 has been closed against the outer frame 2, and an image is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 1600 to notify the player that it is now possible to start games such as pattern change, big win games, and small win games (game start notification).

In this example, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4). However, in consideration of inspecting the launch operation by the handle 195 in the change permission state, the logic of the launch permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4), it is desirable to limit the permission to the launch of the game ball B and prevent the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B enters various winning holes or gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed improperly.

In this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4), the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the state in which game ball B can be launched is set from timing t5 (which may be timing t4). However, when the change permission state is ended and the handle 195 is operated (contacted with the handle 195) for the first time after the launch permission of game ball B is granted, a post-setting change notification is executed to notify that the setting value has been changed in the change permission state. The post-setting change notification is executed by a voice saying "The setting has been changed," a message displaying "The setting has been changed," and a lamp illumination. In addition, this post-setting change notification is executed when the handle 195 is operated (contacted with the handle 195) for the first time after the setting value has been changed in a fraudulent manner by someone other than the authorized operator who changes the setting value. As a result, if a notification is issued after a setting change even though the legitimate operator who changes the setting value did not actually change the setting value, it will become known to the outside world that the setting value was changed through fraudulent activity, which can provide a strong deterrent against fraudulent activity.

In this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4), the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the state in which game ball B can be launched is set from timing t5 (which may be timing t4). However, if the handle 195 is operated (contact with the handle 195) from a time before the launch permission of game ball B, game ball B will not be launched unless the contact with the handle 195 is released once after the launch permission of game ball B (contact detection is turned OFF) and the handle 195 is contacted (operated) again. In other words, even if the contact with the handle 195 was ON before timing t5, the continued contact with the handle 195 is invalidated and game ball B is not launched unless an edge in which the contact detection for the handle 195 changes from OFF to ON is detected after timing t5. This ensures that even if a regular operator who changes the setting value touches the handle 195 when opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball B will not be inadvertently released when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, and any losses incurred by the player will be prevented.

Also, different from the above, in consideration of speeding up the start of game play based on the end of the change permission state, if the handle 195 is operated from a point before game ball B is permitted to be launched, contact with the handle 195 may be continued and the continued contact with the handle 195 may be enabled so that game ball B can be launched from the point at which game ball B is permitted to be launched. In such a case, the handle 195 may be operated before the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 to prepare for the launch of game ball B, and game play may begin immediately after the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2.

In this example, the game ball B can be launched and games such as pattern change, big win games, and small win games can be played from the time t5 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, but the game can be played immediately at the time t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. In other words, the game ball B can be launched and games such as pattern change, big win games, and small win games can be played from the time t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and fraudulent activities can be monitored as described in the above-mentioned [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]. In this configuration, during the period from the time t4 to the time t5, the main frame 4 is not closed against the outer frame 2, but an image (game start notification) notifying that it is now possible to start games such as pattern change, big win games, and small win games may be displayed on the screen of the performance display device 1600.

As another example, after power is turned on, before the setting change process of step S37 is started, at least the processes equivalent to the switch input process of step S104, the fraud detection process of step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process of step S113 may be performed in advance. With this configuration, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value is changed (change permission state), but fraud is not monitored, the launch of game ball B is not permitted, and the input of the detection signal is not valid when game ball B enters the winning hole.

In the above-mentioned other example, in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4 (which may be a period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003 may be used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, but when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the abnormal state may not be notified. In addition, in normal times, when it is determined that fraudulent behavior using a magnet or vibration is occurring, the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are incremented by 1, but in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4 (which may be a period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), it may be configured not to increment the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter even if it is determined that fraudulent behavior using a magnet or vibration is occurring. Even with this configuration, even if a legitimate operator who changes the setting value brings a magnet close or applies vibration when changing the setting value, no notification or increment is made as a fraudulent behavior using a magnet or vibration, and it is possible to prevent monitoring of fraudulent behavior from becoming an obstacle when changing the setting value.

The various processes related to the change permission state described above may be selectable and set for each amusement facility, since various needs may exist depending on the environment of the amusement facility. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of the normal RAM clear switch 1310f, rather than the change permission state, a state is generated in which the operator at the amusement facility can select which setting to use for the various processes related to the change permission state, and when the change permission state is subsequently generated, the various processes related to the change permission state are executed with the selected setting. As a result, in amusement facility A, it is possible to set the change permission state so that the fraud monitoring is not monitored, but the touching of the handle 195 is enabled, and in amusement facility B, it is possible to set the change permission state so that the fraud monitoring is not monitored and the touching of the handle 195 is disabled, and it becomes possible to meet the needs of the amusement facility, such as whether or not to inspect the firing operation using the handle 195 in the change permission state.

[24-3. Regarding fraud monitoring during confirmation display of setting values]
In the above, it has been described that misconduct monitoring during a change in the setting value is not performed during a change in the setting value, but the misconduct monitoring during a confirmation display of the setting value may be configured in either a state in which misconduct is not monitored during the confirmation display of the setting value, or a state in which misconduct is partially monitored. First, a case in which misconduct is not monitored during a confirmation display of the setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a time chart showing a misconduct monitoring state when misconduct is not monitored during a confirmation display of the setting value.

When checking and displaying the currently set setting value, first, confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and that the pattern is not changing (no reserved balls are on hold), and then release the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 (timing t5). Next, insert the setting key into the insertion hole of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise in the same way as when changing the setting (timing t6). At this time, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned to the first ON position). Then, turn the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position and turn it OFF (timing t7), switching the setting display 1310g from the display state of the setting value to the non-display state. In other words, during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the setting value confirmation display is on (confirmation display state), and after timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value confirmation display is no longer on (unconfirmable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 (timing t8), the game becomes available for play.

At the time t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, unless there is a payout of a game ball B such as a prize ball, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g. Also, even if the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated clockwise 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, if a game ball B such as a prize ball has been paid out, the setting key switch 1311a may not be set to the setting key ON (the setting key may remain OFF), or after the payout of a game ball B such as a prize ball has been completed, the setting key switch 1311a may be set to the setting key ON and the current setting value may be displayed on the setting display 1310g.

As another example, when the currently set setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, as in the case of changing the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to set the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state, and the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1, thereby making it possible to set the setting value to a state in which it is possible to display the setting value for confirmation (confirmation display state). Also, when the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the setting value will be changed (change permitted state), while if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the setting value will be displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state). In this configuration, by turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position and turning on the power without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the device transitions to a state in which the setting value confirmation display is being displayed (confirmation display state), and this state in which the setting value confirmation display is being displayed (confirmation display state) corresponds to the period from timing t6 to timing t7.

In this example, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which the confirmation display of the setting value is being performed (confirmation display state), but this is a special period in which monitoring of fraudulent activity is not performed, the release of game ball B is not permitted, and the input of a detection signal is not considered valid when game ball B enters the winning slot. During the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, information regarding the confirmation display of the setting value is output via external terminal board 558 of pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side, allowing hall staff to know that the confirmation display is being performed.

Specifically, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation magnetic sensor and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the play area magnetic sensor are not performed. This is because, during the confirmation display state, the authorized worker performing the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized worker performing the setting value confirmation display to perform fraudulent activity using a magnet. Also, even if the authorized worker performing the setting value confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism when performing the setting value confirmation display, this prevents detection of fraudulent activity using a magnet and suppresses interference with authorized confirmation display work.

Similarly, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the play area vibration sensor are not performed at all. This is because, during the confirmation display state, the authorized worker performing the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized worker performing the confirmation display to perform fraudulent activity using vibration. Furthermore, even if the authorized worker performing the confirmation display applies vibration when performing the setting value confirmation display, this prevents it from being detected as fraudulent activity using vibration, and can suppress interference with authorized confirmation display work.

In addition, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the launch of game ball B is prohibited. This prevents game ball B from being launched even if an authorized operator who is performing the confirmation display of the setting values touches the handle 195, thereby preventing interference with authorized confirmation display work. Also, in the unlikely event that a player operates the handle 195 during the confirmation display state, game ball B cannot be launched.

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, when game ball B enters a prize winning hole such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the normal prize winning hole 2003, the large prize winning hole 2005, or various gate sections (gates), even if the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that it is also possible to prevent the detection of game ball B by the detection sensor itself, or to prevent the detection signal from the detection sensor itself from being input. In this way, when the detection of game ball B is disabled, for example, even if game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, no lottery will be held, no pattern will change, and no game ball B will be paid out. As a result, even if game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 for some reason during the normal operation of confirming and displaying the setting value, the progress of the game due to this can be suppressed.

Although not shown in the figure, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the main control MPU 1310a does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the winning hole and gate section (gate), and at the same time, the main control MPU 1310a does not input detection signals from the detection sensor corresponding to the outlet 1008, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is invalid, for example, it is possible to exclude the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state from the measurement target (target of addition to the out number counter) by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and measured by the base monitor 1310h (added to the out number counter).

In addition, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting elements such as the lamps and the screen of the performance display device 1600 cannot be adjusted.

In addition, during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, the pattern display on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a confirmation display notification (confirmation display related notification) is executed by outputting the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the setting value confirmation display is in progress. The confirmation display notification is executed by repeating the sound "Confirmation display in progress", displaying the message "Confirmation display in progress!", and lighting the lamp in a color corresponding to the setting value 1 to 6 in the confirmation process. This confirmation display notification is a notification (performance) that is executed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed in priority over the main body frame open notification that is executed when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, a main body frame open notification (such as a display or sound of "The frame is open") is normally executed, but in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display notification is executed as the top priority without executing the main body frame open notification. One possible example is to execute the main body frame open notification and the confirmation display in progress notification in parallel, with the confirmation display in progress notification being given priority over the main body frame open notification, and the main body frame open notification being issued after the confirmation display in progress notification has ended.

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, in addition to the image, lamp, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600, the function display unit 1400 also issues a notification as the confirmation display notification described above. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special symbol indicator, a second special hold number indicator, and a round indicator, as well as a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), and a confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being confirmed (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display indicator in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. As a result, in the confirmation display state, the notification from the function display unit 1400 allows the player to know that the game is not progressing.

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7 (which may include the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), even if the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor when game ball B enters a winning port such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, or the large winning port 2005, the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. If such a detection signal is received, a warning effect C is executed, which notifies the player that game ball B has illegally entered a winning port through the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, even though it is a period in which game ball B cannot enter a winning port because the launch of game ball B is not permitted. This warning effect C is executed in priority over the confirmation display in progress notification and the main frame open notification. In other words, when warning effect C is executed, it is executed as the top priority without issuing a confirmation display notification or a main frame opening notification.

In addition, during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, the launch of game ball B and the input of a detection signal when game ball B enters the winning hole are not permitted, and the game cannot be started, but this state is maintained until the work of closing the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 is performed thereafter (timing t8). In other words, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, even if game ball B is entered into the winning hole by fraudulent acts, a detection signal is not input, and it is a period during which fraudulent benefits cannot be obtained, and since there is a possibility of receiving an impact from closing the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the monitoring of fraudulent acts using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the monitoring of fraudulent acts using the playing area magnetic sensor, the monitoring of fraudulent acts using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the monitoring of fraudulent acts using the playing area vibration sensor are in a standby state without being executed.

In addition, from the time t8 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the game ball B can be released, and games such as pattern change, big win games, and small win games can be played, and monitoring for various types of fraudulent activities is started as described in the above-mentioned [Regarding fraudulent activity monitoring during normal times]. Note that even before the time t6 when the main frame 4 is opened against the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, the game ball B can be released, and games such as pattern change, big win games, and small win games can be played, and monitoring for various types of fraudulent activities is started as described in the above-mentioned [Regarding fraudulent activity monitoring during normal times].

In addition, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main frame 4 is not closed against the outer frame 2, and an image is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the device is waiting for play to begin (play wait notification). Then, during the specified period from timing t8, the main frame 4 has been closed against the outer frame 2, and an image is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 1600 to notify that play, such as pattern change, big win play, and small win play, can now begin (game start notification).

In addition, during normal times when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in a state where the setting key is ON. However, when such a state where the setting key is ON is reached, warning effects A and B are executed to notify the user that the setting key has been illegally turned ON by using the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key is ON while the pattern is being changed during normal times (timing t1), warning effect A is executed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF (timing t2). Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key is ON while the pattern is not being changed (timing t3), warning effect B is executed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF (timing t4). In addition, these warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effects being executed. In other words, when warning effects A and B are executed, the currently executing effect is stopped and warning effects A and B are executed as the top priority regardless of whether or not the pattern is changing. Note that warning effects A and B are executed in the same manner, but they may be executed in different manners so that it is possible to determine whether or not the pattern is changing.

In addition, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during the period in which fraudulent acts due to magnets or vibrations are monitored, an abnormality occurrence effect is executed for a predetermined period of time by output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 to notify that an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration has occurred. In addition, the abnormality occurrence effect notifies the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration was detected) and the part where the abnormality was detected (whether the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the play area 5a, or the area around the third sorting device 2550) depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the play area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the play area vibration sensor detected the abnormality. In addition, the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with priority over the effect being executed. In other words, when the abnormality occurrence effect is executed, the effect being executed is stopped regardless of whether the pattern is changing or not, and the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with the highest priority.

In this example, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (which may be the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7). However, in consideration of inspecting the launch operation by the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, the logic of the launch permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (which may be the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7), it is desirable to limit the permission to launch the game ball B and prevent the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B enters various winning holes or gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed improperly.

In this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (which may be the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7), the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the launch of game ball B is possible from the time of timing t8 (which may be timing t7). However, if the handle 195 is operated (contact with the handle 195) from a time before the launch permission of game ball B, game ball B will not be launched unless the contact with the handle 195 is released once after the launch permission of game ball B (contact detection is turned OFF) and the handle 195 is contacted (operated) again. In other words, even if the contact with the handle 195 was ON before timing t8, the continued contact with the handle 195 is invalidated and game ball B is not launched unless an edge is detected after timing t8 at which the contact detection for the handle 195 changes from OFF to ON. This ensures that even if a regular operator who is checking and displaying the setting value touches the handle 195 when opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball B will not be inadvertently released when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, and any losses incurred by the player will be prevented.

Also, different from the above, in consideration of speeding up the start of game play based on the end of the confirmation display state, if the handle 195 is operated from a point before game ball B is permitted to be launched, contact with the handle 195 may be continued, and the continued contact with the handle 195 may be enabled so that game ball B can be launched from the point at which game ball B is permitted to be launched. In such a case, the handle 195 may be operated before the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 to prepare for the launch of game ball B, and game play may begin immediately after the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2.

In this example, the game ball B can be launched and games such as pattern change, big win games, and small win games can be played from the time t8 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, but the game can be played immediately at the time t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. In other words, the game ball B can be launched and games such as pattern change, big win games, and small win games can be played from the time t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and fraudulent activities can be monitored as described in the above-mentioned [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]. In this configuration, during the period from the time t7 to the time t8, the main frame 4 is not closed against the outer frame 2, but an image (game start notification) notifying that it is now possible to start games such as pattern change, big win games, and small win games may be displayed on the screen of the performance display device 1600.

As another example, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7 (which may be a period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003 may be used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, but when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the abnormal state may not be notified. In addition, in normal times, when it is determined that fraudulent behavior using a magnet or vibration is occurring, the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are incremented by 1. However, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7 (which may be a period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter may not be incremented even if it is determined that fraudulent behavior using a magnet or vibration is occurring. Even with this configuration, even if a legitimate operator who performs the confirmation display brings a magnet close or applies vibration when performing the confirmation display of the set value, no notification or increment is performed as a fraudulent behavior using a magnet or vibration, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent behavior from becoming an obstacle when performing the confirmation display of the set value.

The various processes related to the confirmation display state described above may be selectable and set for each amusement facility, since various needs may exist depending on the environment of the amusement facility. For example, when the power is turned on with the normal operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f, rather than the confirmation display state, a state is generated in which an operator at the amusement facility can select which setting to use for the various processes related to the confirmation display state, and when the confirmation display state is subsequently generated, the various processes related to the confirmation display state are executed with the selected setting. As a result, in amusement facility A, it is possible to set the confirmation display state so that the fraud monitoring is not monitored, but touching the handle 195 is enabled, and in amusement facility B, it is possible to set the confirmation display state so that the fraud monitoring is not monitored and touching the handle 195 is disabled, and it becomes possible to meet the needs of the amusement facility, such as whether or not to check the firing operation using the handle 195 in the confirmation display state.

Next, a case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting values are being displayed for confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a time chart showing the fraudulent activity monitoring state when fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting values are being displayed for confirmation. Here, the points that differ from the case where fraudulent activity is not monitored while the setting values are being displayed for confirmation will be described below.

In this example, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which the setting value confirmation display is being performed (confirmation display state), but this is a special period in which game ball B is not permitted to be released and the input of a detection signal is not considered valid when game ball B enters the winning slot, and among all fraudulent acts, only fraudulent acts in the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, the game area magnetic sensor is not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, but the setting operation magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent behavior. This is to eliminate the possibility of a malfunction such as a fraudulent change of the setting value occurring when the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 and the authorized operator who performs the setting value confirmation display operates the setting key switch 1311a, with someone other than the authorized operator who performs the setting value confirmation display performing fraudulent behavior such as bringing a magnet close to the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is provided.

On the other hand, during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, even if game ball B is fraudulently placed in the winning slot, no detection signal is input and fraudulent benefits cannot be obtained during this period, so there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor.

The setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activity not only during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, but also during the period up to timing t8 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is always used to monitor for fraudulent activity in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, regardless of whether the state is normal, the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, or the confirmation display state with the setting key switch 1311a set to ON.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, the game area vibration sensor is not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, but the setting operation vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent behavior. This is to eliminate the possibility that, in the confirmation display state, while the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 and the authorized operator who performs the setting value confirmation display operates the setting key switch 1311a, a person other than the authorized operator who performs the setting value confirmation display may perform fraudulent behavior by applying vibration to the setting change board 1311 or the area where the setting key switch 1311a is provided, resulting in a malfunction such as a fraudulent change of the setting value.

On the other hand, during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, even if game ball B is fraudulently placed in the winning slot, no detection signal is input and fraudulent benefits cannot be obtained during this period, so there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

The setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activity not only during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, but also during the period up to timing t8 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activity at all times in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, regardless of whether the state is normal, the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, or the confirmation display state with the setting key switch 1311a set to ON.

In addition, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (which may be the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7), the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, and the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent behavior. If these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, an abnormality occurrence performance A is executed, which notifies the user of the abnormality caused by the occurrence of magnetism or vibration through an image on the performance display device 1600. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence performance A, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration was detected) and the part where the abnormality was detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided) are notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence performance A is executed, the abnormality occurrence performance A is forcibly terminated at the time of timing t7 (which may be the time of timing t8), which is the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF. This is because in the confirmation display state, the authorized operator who performs the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and it is not possible to exclude the possibility that the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display unintentionally brought a magnet close or applied vibration when performing the setting value confirmation display. For this reason, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet or vibration is occurring, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence presentation A that is currently being executed is forcibly terminated.

As described above, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities, and the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities. However, during normal times other than the period, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities, the play area magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities, the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities, and the play area vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during such normal times, an abnormality occurrence performance B is executed, which notifies the user that an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is present for a predetermined period of time by using the image, lamp, and output from the performance display device 1600. Here, while the abnormality occurrence performance B uses the image, lamp, and output from the performance display device 1600, the abnormality occurrence performance A uses only the image of the performance display device 1600, and is executed in a manner that is less noticeable than the abnormality occurrence performance B. This is because in the confirmation display state, the person who performs the setting value confirmation display operates the setting key switch 1311a, and it cannot be excluded that the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display may have unintentionally brought a magnet close or applied vibration when performing the setting value confirmation display. In addition, in abnormality occurrence presentation B, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the play area unit magnetic, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, or the play area unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality, the content of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the part where the abnormality was detected (whether it was the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the play area 5a, or the area around the third distribution device 2550) are notified.

As described above, in the period from timing t5 to timing t8 when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a main frame open notification is issued by outputting an image, lamp, or speaker from the performance display device 1600 to notify that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, the pattern display on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a confirmation display in progress notification (confirmation display related notification) is issued by outputting an image, lamp, or speaker from the performance display device 1600 to notify that a confirmation display of the setting value is in progress. After the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to switch to the confirmation display state. In this confirmation display state, the confirmation display in progress notification is executed in priority over the main frame open notification. Furthermore, if the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state, abnormality occurrence presentation A is executed in priority over the main frame open notification and the confirmation display in progress notification.

[24-4. Modification of fraud monitoring during setting value change]
In the above, with regard to monitoring of misconduct during a change in the setting value, it has been described that misconduct is not monitored during a change in the setting value, but it may be configured to monitor misconduct partially. Such a case where misconduct is partially monitored during a change in the setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. 243 is a time chart showing the misconduct monitoring state when misconduct is partially monitored during a change in the setting value. Here, the points that are different from the above-mentioned case where misconduct is not monitored during a change in the setting value will be described below.

In the above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on process (see Fig. 175A, Fig. 176), but the setting change process of step S37 is not terminated until the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 (step S222 of the setting change process does not determine that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt permission setting of the subsequent step S52 is prohibited from being performed during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. In other words, the main control side timer interrupt process (see Fig. 177) is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, so the switch input process of step S104, the fraud detection process of step S112, the launch permission signal setting process of step S113, etc. in the main control side timer interrupt process are left unexecuted and in a standby state. In contrast, after power is turned on, before the setting change process of step S37 is started, at least the switch input process of step S104, the fraud detection process of step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process of step S113 (the same process) may be performed in advance. With this configuration, in this example, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value is changed (change permission state), but it is a special period in which the launch of game ball B is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not valid when game ball B enters the winning hole, and only fraudulent acts against the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored.

In addition, before starting the setting change process of step S37, a process equivalent to the fraud detection process of step S112 (the same process) is performed in advance, and only fraudulent acts against the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed are monitored. In this process, as in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor 3003, it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed, and the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are incremented by 1. However, in the main control power-on process, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 and the setting change process of step S37 is completed (after it is determined in step S222 of the setting change process that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF), all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared in step S38 except for a specific area. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration has occurred during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, and the magnet counter or vibration counter value is incremented, the RAM is cleared when the change permission state ends, and the magnet counter or vibration counter value is set (initialized) to the initial value 0 (zero). In this way, the magnet counter and vibration counter values are initialized when the change permission state ends, but in the change permission state, the person who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b, and it is not possible to eliminate the possibility that the person who changes the setting value unintentionally brought a magnet close or applied vibration when changing the setting value. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration has occurred, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the magnet counter and vibration counter values are initialized.

Specifically, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the game area magnetic sensor is not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, but the setting operation magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent behavior. This is to eliminate the possibility that a malfunction such as a fraudulent change of the setting value may occur if a person other than the legitimate operator who changes the setting value performs a fraudulent act by bringing a magnet close to the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is provided in the change permission state where the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 and the legitimate operator who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or setting switch button 1311b.

On the other hand, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, no detection signal is input even if game ball B is fraudulently placed in the winning slot, and since this is a period during which no fraudulent advantage can be obtained, there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor.

The setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activity not only during the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, but also during the period up to timing t5 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is always used to monitor for fraudulent activity in the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are provided, regardless of whether the state is normal, the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and changes are permitted.

Similarly, in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the game area vibration sensor is not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, but the setting operation vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent behavior. This is to eliminate the possibility that a malfunction such as a fraudulent change of the setting value may occur if a person other than the legitimate operator who changes the setting value performs a fraudulent act by applying vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is provided, while in the change permission state, the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 and an authorized operator who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or setting switch button 1311b.

On the other hand, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, even if game ball B is fraudulently placed in the winning slot, no detection signal is input and fraudulent benefits cannot be obtained during this period, so there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

The vibration sensor of the setting operation unit is used to monitor for unauthorized actions not only during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, but also during the period up to timing t5 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit is used to monitor for unauthorized actions, and is always used to monitor the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, regardless of whether the state is normal, the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, or the change permission state with the setting key switch 1311a set to ON.

In addition, during the change-allowed state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a setting change in progress performance is executed, notifying the user that the setting value is being changed, by outputting images, lamps, and speakers from the performance display device 1600. In addition, in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4 (which may include the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), even if the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor when the game ball B enters a winning port such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, or the large winning port 2005, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, a warning effect C is executed, which notifies the player that the game ball B has illegally entered the winning port, by using an image, a lamp, or an output from a speaker of the effect display device 1600, even though it is a period in which the game ball B cannot enter the winning port because the launch of the game ball B is not permitted. This warning effect C is executed with priority over a setting change notification or a main frame open notification. In other words, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without issuing a setting change notification or a main frame open notification.

In addition, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4), the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, and the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent behavior. If these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, an abnormality occurrence performance A is executed, which notifies the user of the abnormality caused by the occurrence of magnetism or vibration through an image on the performance display device 1600. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence performance A, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration was detected) and the part where the abnormality was detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided) are notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence performance A is executed, the abnormality occurrence performance A is forcibly terminated at the time of timing t4 (which may be the time of timing t5), which is the end of the change permission state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized operator who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b, and it is not possible to exclude the possibility that the authorized operator who changes the setting unintentionally brings a magnet close or applies vibrations when changing the setting value. For this reason, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity using magnets or vibrations is occurring, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence presentation A that is currently being executed is forcibly terminated.

As described above, during the period from timing t3 to timing t5, which includes the change permission state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities, and the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities. However, during normal times other than the period, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities, the play area magnetic sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities, the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities, and the play area vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activities. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during such normal times, an abnormality occurrence performance B is executed, which notifies the player that an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is present for a predetermined period of time by using the image, lamp, and output from the performance display device 1600. Here, while the abnormality occurrence performance B uses the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600, the abnormality occurrence performance A uses only the image of the performance display device 1600, and the performance is executed in a manner that is less noticeable than the abnormality occurrence performance B. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized operator who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b, and it cannot be excluded that the authorized operator who changes the setting value may have unintentionally brought a magnet close or applied vibration when changing the setting value. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence performance B, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the play area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the play area vibration sensor detects the abnormality, the content of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the part where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the play area 5a, or the area around the third distribution device 2550) are notified.

As described above, after power is turned on, during the period from timing t3 to timing t5 when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a main frame open notification is issued by the image, lamps, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. After power is turned on, during the change permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a setting change in progress notification (setting change related notification) is issued by the image, lamps, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600 to notify that a setting change is being made to the setting value. After the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON to turn on the power, which transitions to a change-permitted state. In this change-permitted state, the setting change notification is executed in priority over the main frame open notification. Furthermore, in the change-permitted state, if the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, abnormality occurrence presentation A is executed in priority over the main frame open notification or setting change notification.

[25. Modifications of settings for winning probability, etc.]
In the above example, the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state based on the result of a special lottery, and when a game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small win game state, the settings of the winning probability, etc. are changed for the game controlled to transition to the big win game state, but as shown in Fig. 244, the settings of the winning probability, etc. may be changed for a game not controlled to transition to the big win game state even if the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small win game state. Below, a modified example of the setting change of the winning probability, etc. in a pachinko machine in a form in which the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 is not provided will be described as a second embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment has a second large prize opening 2006A (which does not have the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008 arranged inside) instead of the special prize opening 2006 of the pachinko machine 1 of the example described above (which has the first V prize opening 2007 and the second V prize opening 2008 arranged inside), but the other configurations are the same.

[26-1. Game content of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., a "big win", a "small win", a "time-saving (time-saving) win", or a "probability-changing (probability-changing) win") that is favorable to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special-changing time). In this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, the second special lottery result corresponding to the reception in the second starting hole 2004 is preferentially suggested (derived). In addition, instead of preferentially suggesting (deriving) the special lottery result in response to acceptance into the second starting port 2004 (priority variation), the special lottery result may be suggested (derive) in the order in which the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 (sequential variation), or the first special lottery result in response to acceptance into the first starting port 2002 and the second special lottery result in response to acceptance into the second starting port 2004 may be suggested (derive) in parallel at the same time (simultaneous variation).

The special lottery results that are drawn when game ball B is received in first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 include "miss", "small win", "2R sure win", "15R sure win", "15R normal win", etc. In this embodiment, the second special lottery result includes a "small win", while the first special lottery result does not include a "small win". It is also possible to set both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to include a "small win", with the probability of winning a "small win" being higher in the second special lottery result than in the first special lottery result.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 is a "small win", then after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.88 s) has elapsed since the second large winning hole 2006A became an open state capable of receiving game ball B, a "small win" game is executed in which the second large winning hole 2006A becomes a closed state unable to receive game ball B. Since the second large winning hole 2006A is provided midway through the second ball passage section 2521 on the right side of the center member 2500, when a "small win" is selected, game ball B is hit into the second ball passage section 2521 by "hitting to the right". In addition, in the small win game of the second embodiment, the period during which the second large winning opening 2006A is open is shorter than that in the large win game, but if the game ball is continuously hit so that it flows down the second ball passage 2521, at least one game ball B can enter the second large winning opening 2006A in one small win game. During the small win game, the game state before the start of the small win game state (such as the probability state or time-saving state described below) is maintained, and after the small win game, the game state before the start of the small win game state continues.

If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are a "15R guaranteed jackpot" or a "15R normal jackpot", then after the large prize winning port 2005 becomes open and capable of accepting game ball B, a "jackpot" game is executed in which an opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the large prize winning port 2005 into a closed state in which it cannot accept game ball B is repeated 15 times, once either a predetermined time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined limit number of game balls B (e.g., 10 balls) has been accepted into the large prize winning port 2005. Then, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are a "15R normal jackpot," after the jackpot game ends, the time period during which the special patterns change to suggest to the player the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is made shorter than normal until a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 suggestion times combining the suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery) is reached, and the state is controlled to transition to a "time-saving state" in which the time until the next "win" is drawn is made shorter. In addition, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are a "15R guaranteed jackpot," after the end of the "jackpot" game, the time for the special symbols to fluctuate is made shorter than usual to indicate to the player the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 until the next "jackpot," and the transition to a "guaranteed jackpot state (high probability state)" is controlled to increase the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be a "hit."

If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 are a "2R guaranteed jackpot", then after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.2 s) has elapsed since the second winning hole 2006A became an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a "jackpot" game is executed in which an opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) in which the game ball B cannot be received is repeated twice. In addition, after the "jackpot" game ends, the time for the special symbols to fluctuate until the next "jackpot" is reached is made shorter than usual to suggest to the player the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, and a transition to a "guaranteed jackpot state (high probability state)" is controlled to improve the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be a "win".

Because the second large prize opening 2006A and the large prize opening 2005 are located on the flow path of the game ball B that mainly flows down the right side of the center member 2500, the player can perform an operation to shoot the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center member 2500. When the second large prize opening 2006A and the large prize opening 2005 are in the open state and a game ball B is received by the second large prize opening 2006A and the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the second large prize opening 2006A and the large prize opening 2005 are capable of receiving game ball B, by having the second large prize opening 2006A and the large prize opening 2005 receive game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, providing entertainment to the player.

The guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center member 2500 is easier to insert balls into on the second ball passage section 2521 side than on the third ball passage section 2522 side, but is less likely to be accepted by the large prize opening 2005 than on the third ball passage section 2522 side. This allows the player to choose which passage to insert balls into, and the variety of games makes it less likely for the player to get bored, preventing a decline in interest. Also, only game balls B inserted into the second ball passage section 2521 side can be accepted by the second large prize opening 2006A.

In this embodiment, if game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the special lottery result by the reception of game ball B by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result that was previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

Incidentally, the special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the lit LEDs. In the following, the flashing of the LED for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the first special lottery to the player may be referred to as the "variable display of the first special symbol," and the flashing of the LED for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the second special lottery to the player may be referred to as the "variable display of the second special symbol." In addition, the lighting combination pattern of the LEDs that indicates the result of the first special lottery to the player may be referred to as the "stopping pattern of the first special symbol," and the lighting combination pattern of the LEDs that indicates the result of the second special lottery to the player may be referred to as the "stopping pattern of the second special symbol."

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each picture row, sequentially stopping and displaying the changing picture rows, and each picture row that is stopped and displayed is displayed so that the pictures of the three picture rows form a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss," after the three picture rows stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, "small win" game, "big win" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time indicating the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the time until the image row changes and the final image is displayed), and is set to a longer time on the function display unit 1400.

In addition to displaying a performance image suggesting the result of the special lottery by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can perform a player participation type performance in which the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 are operated according to the special lottery result. In the player participation type performance, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made more prominent by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can provide light emission effects and display effects by appropriately using the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, and the light guide plate performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, the rear front performance unit 3200, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various effects and preventing a decline in the players' interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation presentation in which the player operates the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform an operation that should be performed, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that the player can perform the correct operation.

When game ball B is received in normal winning port 2003, the main control board 1310 draws a normal lottery result to determine whether or not second start gate 2411 will be opened in a predetermined pattern. The normal lottery result is then suggested to the player on the normal symbol display of function display unit 1400 over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). In this embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time for suggesting to the player the normal lottery result drawn by receiving game ball B in normal winning port 2003 is "6000 s" in the normal state, and "0.1 s" in the special state and time-saving state.

In addition, the probability of a normal winning (the probability that the normal lottery result is a "normal win") is set to "10/11", and when a game ball B is accepted into the normal winning hole 2003, in most cases it will be a "normal win" and the second start hole door 2411 will be open. In addition, when the normal lottery result is a "normal win", the period during which the second start hole door 2411 is open is set to "0.1 s" in the normal state, while it is set to "2.0 s" in the special state and the time-saving state. Therefore, in the normal state, the second start hole door 2411 is only open at intervals of 6000 s at the shortest, and since the period during which it is open is extremely short, it is very difficult to accept a game ball B into the second start hole 2004. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts aimed at accepting a game ball B into the second start hole 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the special bonus state, not only is the second starting port door 2411 frequently opened, but it is also open for a long period of time, making it easier for the game ball B to be received into the second starting port 2004. In addition, the probability of winning a normal ball may be made different in the normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) from the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state) or the special state (high probability time-saving state). For example, the probability of winning a normal ball may be set to "1 in 11" in the normal state, and the probability of winning a normal ball may be set to "10 in 11" in the time-saving state or the special state, making it very difficult to accept game ball B into the second starting hole 2004 in the normal state, while making it easy to accept game ball B into the second starting hole 2004 in the time-saving state or the special state. This allows game ball B to be frequently accepted into the second starting hole 2004 in the time-saving state or the special state, while suppressing fraudulent behavior aimed at accepting game ball B into the second starting hole 2004 in the normal state. Also, while the probability of winning a regular prize can be set to zero (0 in 11) in the normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) to prevent a win, the probability of winning a regular prize can be set to "10 in 11" or "11 in 11" in the time-saving state or the special probability state, to further suppress fraudulent behavior aimed at receiving game ball B into second starting hole 2004 in the normal state.

In this way, in the normal state, game ball B is rarely received by the second starting hole 2004, and the first special lottery result is suggested (the first special symbol is displayed as a change in the pattern) mainly based on the reception of game ball B by the first starting hole 2002. On the other hand, in the special probability state and the time-saving state, game ball B is hit with the right side of the center member 2500, so game ball B is frequently received by the second starting hole 2004, and the second special lottery result is suggested (the second special symbol is displayed as a change in the pattern) mainly based on the reception of game ball B by the second starting hole 2004.

In addition, if a game ball B is received into the normal winning port 2003 between the start of the normal lottery and the suggestion of the normal lottery result by the acceptance of a game ball B into the normal winning port 2003, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the normal lottery result that was previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four for the normal winning port 2003, and for any more than this, even if a game ball B is received into the normal winning port 2003, the normal lottery result is not reserved but is discarded. In addition, instead of this example, if a game ball B is received into the normal winning port 2003 between the start of the normal lottery and the suggestion of the normal lottery result by the acceptance of a game ball B into the normal winning port 2003, the normal lottery result may be discarded without being reserved. This further prevents the operation of shooting game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 during normal operation, prevents the second special lottery from being performed during normal operation and generates a small win, and further suppresses fraudulent behavior aimed at receiving game ball B into the second starting hole 2004 during normal operation.

The normal lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into normal winning port 2003 is suggested by function display unit 1400 and performance display device 1600 in the same manner as the special lottery result. In function display unit 1400, the normal lottery result is suggested by directly controlling main control board 1310. Indication of the normal lottery result in function display unit 1400 is made by repeatedly turning on and off an LED different from the LED suggesting the special lottery result and flashing it for a predetermined period of time, after which the combination of lit LEDs suggests the normal lottery result.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the normal state, game ball B is shot at the left side of the center member 2500, and a first special lottery result is suggested (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting hole 2002. Also, when the first special lottery result becomes a "15R normal jackpot" in the normal state, the machine is controlled to transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, and game ball B is shot at the right side of the center member 2500, and a second special lottery result is suggested (a variable display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting hole 2004. If a predetermined number of variations (100 times, which is the total number of suggestions for the first special lottery and the second special lottery) is reached without a jackpot occurring during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends and the game transitions to the normal state, and game ball B is again shot at the left side of center member 2500, and a suggestion of the first special lottery result (a varying display of the first special symbol) is made based on game ball B being received by first starting hole 2002.

In addition, if the first special lottery result is a "15R special jackpot" or a "2R special jackpot" during normal or time-saving mode, the game is controlled to transition to a special state (high probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and a game ball B is shot into the right side of the center member 2500, and the second special lottery result is suggested (the second special pattern is displayed as it changes) based on the game ball B being received by the second starting hole 2004. The special state continues until the next jackpot, and if the second special lottery result is a "15R normal jackpot" during the special state, the game is controlled to transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, and if a jackpot does not occur in the time-saving state and a predetermined number of changes (the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery, which is 100) is reached, the time-saving state ends and the game is controlled to transition to the normal state.

In addition, if the second special lottery result during the special probability state is a "15R special probability jackpot" or a "2R special probability jackpot," the game will transition back to the special probability state (high probability state) after the jackpot game ends. In this way, the special probability state will continue until a "15R normal jackpot" occurs, and if a "15R normal jackpot" occurs, the game will transition to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, if only the first special lottery result is reserved without there being a reserved second special lottery result, or if game ball B is received into first starting port 2002 without there being a reserved second special lottery result, the first special lottery result is suggested (the first special symbol changes and is displayed) even during the time-saving state or the probability variable state. If the first special lottery result is a "15R normal jackpot" during the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the transition to the time-saving state is controlled after the jackpot game ends, and if the first special lottery result is a "15R probability variable jackpot" or a "2R probability variable jackpot" during the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the transition to the probability variable state is controlled after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of a "small win" as a result of the second special lottery (small win probability) is set to be much higher than the probability of a big win (for example, about 10 times the probability of a big win during the special probability state). During the time-saving state or the special probability state, game balls B are frequently received by the second starting port 2004 and the second special lottery is performed, so that small wins occur frequently and the second large winning port 2006A is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s).

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, small wins occur frequently in the second special lottery during the time-saving state or the probability of winning, and even if it does not result in a big win, it is possible to win prize balls that exceed the amount of balls fired, albeit little by little, and the longer the time-saving state or the probability of winning continues, the more prize balls can be won. Therefore, not only do game balls B not decrease during the time-saving state or the probability of winning, but the player's balls can be increased by the prize balls won by the small wins that occur. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example can be controlled to be in completely different states between play in the normal state, where game balls B are consumed a lot, and play in the time-saving state or the probability of winning, where not only game balls B are consumed less, but also the player's balls increase due to the occurrence of small wins, even if it does not result in a big win.

[26-2. Changes to settings such as winning probability in the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probability of a big win, a small win, etc., which changes according to the setting value will be explained.

In the second embodiment, as in the example described above, a table corresponding to a set value is selected as the table to be used in the special lottery etc. (a winning judgment table, a big winning symbol determination table, a small winning symbol determination table, etc.). Note that a table to be used in the special lottery etc. is provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

As shown in FIG. 245(A), in this embodiment, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are set to correspond to each of the setting values 1 to 6.

The jackpot probability (the ratio of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot judgment table that indicate a jackpot win) common to the first and second special lotteries is set to a different value for each setting value, and the jackpot probability in the first and second special lotteries in normal and time-saving states (low probability states) is 1 in 319 for setting value 1, 1 in 309 for setting value 2, 1 in 299 for setting value 3, 1 in 289 for setting value 4, 1 in 279 for setting value 5, and 1 in 269 for setting value 6. The jackpot probability in the first and second special lotteries in the probability bonus state (high probability state) is 1 in 30 for setting value 1, 1 in 40 for setting value 2, 1 in 50 for setting value 3, 1 in 60 for setting value 4, 1 in 70 for setting value 5, and 1 in 80 for setting value 6.

Thus, in the normal state and time-saving state (low probability state), the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability, but in the special probability state, the opposite is true: the higher the setting value, the lower the jackpot probability. That is, in the normal state and time-saving state, the jackpot probability is highest for a setting value of 6, while in the special probability state, the jackpot probability is lowest for a setting value of 1. Note that the jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional or inversely proportional to the setting value, and in some cases, it may be set so that the jackpot probability set for a setting value lower than an arbitrary setting value is higher than the jackpot probability set for that setting value.

As shown in Figure 245 (A), the probability of a small win in the first special lottery (the proportion of small win judgment values in the hit judgment table that indicate a small win has been won) is set to "0" for all setting values (a small win will not be won), making it difficult to win prize balls through a small win in normal and time-saving modes, whereas the probability of a small win in the second special lottery (the proportion of small win judgment values in the hit judgment table that indicate a small win has been won) is set to the same "1/3" for all setting values, which is a very high probability compared to the probability of a big win, so small wins occur frequently in special mode and time-saving modes, making it easy to win prize balls.

In the high probability state, the probability of a jackpot is lowest at a setting value of 6, so a jackpot is less likely to occur (delayed) than with a lower setting value, and as a result the high probability state continues for a longer period of time, so the higher the setting value, the more small jackpots that occur before a jackpot occurs. In other words, the higher the setting value, the more prize balls can be won from small jackpots, and the next jackpot is also guaranteed, so the higher the setting value, the greater the advantage. In other words, in the high probability state, the next jackpot is guaranteed regardless of the setting value, but the expected number of prize balls that can be won other than through a jackpot differs for each setting value, and the higher the setting value, the higher the expected number of prize balls that can be won other than through a jackpot.

In addition, the duration of the probability change state is not limited to the next jackpot, but rather ends when a certain number of fluctuations (100 hints combining the first special lottery hint and the second special lottery hint) is reached, as in the normal state and the time-saving state, while the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a jackpot, so that the higher the set value, the greater the frequency of jackpots, thereby increasing the degree of advantage (so-called number-cut probability change). In this case, although the next jackpot is not guaranteed, the expected number of prize balls that can be obtained other than through a jackpot is different for each set value, and although the expected number of prize balls that can be obtained other than through a jackpot increases as the set value becomes higher, a gameplay that allows players to expect a jackpot to occur before the conditions for ending the probability change state are met can be realized, thereby increasing interest. In order to realize this type of gameplay, the probability of winning in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time-saving state may not have a setting difference (uniform at 1 in 319), and only the probability of winning in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probability-changing state may have a setting difference as described above.

In addition, in order to realize the gameplay of the second embodiment, when the setting value is lower than a specific setting value, the probability of a jackpot in the high probability state may be made higher than the probability of a small jackpot in the second special lottery, while when the setting value is higher than a specific setting value, the probability of a jackpot in the high probability state may be made lower than the probability of a small jackpot in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the probability of a jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time-saving state (low probability state) may be set to "1 in 250" for setting value 1, "1 in 240" for setting value 2, "1 in 230" for setting value 3, "1 in 180" for setting value 4, "1 in 170" for setting value 5, and "1 in 160" for setting value 6, and the probability of a jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the high probability state (high probability state) may be set to "1 in 250" for setting value 1, "1 in 240" for setting value 2, "1 in 230" for setting value 3, "1 in 180" for setting value 4, "1 in 170" for setting value 5, and "1 in 160" for setting value 6. The probability of winning is set to "1 in 25" for setting value 1, "1 in 24" for setting value 2, "1 in 23" for setting value 3, "1 in 18" for setting value 4, "1 in 17" for setting value 5, and "1 in 16" for setting value 6, while the probability of a small win in the second special lottery (the proportion of small win judgment values that indicate a small win in the hit judgment table) can be set to the same "1 in 20" for all setting values.

In this configuration, with setting values 1 to 3, the probability of a small win in the second special lottery is lower than the probability of a big win in the special state, so the number of prize balls that can be acquired by a small win in the special state is relatively small, while with setting values 4 to 6, the probability of a small win in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of a big win in the special state, so the number of prize balls that can be acquired by a small win in the special state is relatively large. In particular, with setting values of 4 or more, the probability of a big win in the special state is lower than the probability of a small win, making it difficult for a big win to occur, creating a game that gives the player a sense of expectation that the special state will continue for a long time and a sense of expectation that many prize balls can be acquired by a small win. In addition, by storing historical information on the probability of a big win occurring in the probability variable state after power-on and the probability of a small win occurring in the probability variable state in a specified storage area (RAM, etc.) of the peripheral control unit 1511 and displaying various winning probability information based on the historical information on the performance display device 1600, it is possible to make the player aware that the probability of a small win is higher than the probability of a big win in the probability variable state, and to give the player a sense of expectation that "the set value may be 4 or more," and to give new fun and excitement that was not available before while playing in the probability variable state. In addition, by letting the player experience that the probability variable state continues for a long time and that many prize balls can be obtained by small wins in the probability variable state, it is possible to make the player recognize that "the set value may be 4 or more," and in this respect, new fun and excitement that was not available before can be given. As described above, at a certain setting value (setting value 4 in this embodiment), any setting value above that changes the gameplay to one in which many prize balls can be won through small wins, further increasing the interest in the game.

In another embodiment, the higher the set value in the probability variable state, the higher the probability of a big win in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a small win in the second special lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 245(B), the probability of a big win in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time-saving state (low probability state) is "1 in 319" for set value 1, "1 in 309" for set value 2, "1 in 299" for set value 3, "1 in 289" for set value 4, "1 in 279" for set value 5, and "1 in 269" for set value 6. Additionally, the probability of a small win in the high probability state (high probability state) is 1 in 31.9 for setting value 1, 1 in 30.9 for setting value 2, 1 in 29.9 for setting value 3, 1 in 28.9 for setting value 4, 1 in 27.9 for setting value 5, and 1 in 26.9 for setting value 6. In this way, the probability of a big win for all settings in the high probability state is increased by 10 times compared to the normal state and the time-saving state.

The probability of a small win in the second special lottery is set to "1 in 7" at setting value 1, "1 in 6" at setting value 2, "1 in 5" at setting value 3, "1 in 4" at setting value 4, "1 in 3" at setting value 5, and "1 in 2" at setting value 6. Therefore, at setting value 1, a small win occurs about once for every 7 second special lotteries, whereas at setting value 6, a small win occurs about once for every 2 second special lotteries, increasing the frequency of small wins. In other words, at setting value 6, small wins occur more frequently than at setting value 1, making it easier to win prize balls through small wins, and the higher the setting value, the higher the expected number of prize balls that can be won in the special mode or time-saving mode.

In addition to changing the settings of the jackpot probability and small jackpot probability described above, or without changing the settings of the jackpot probability and small jackpot probability, the degree of advantage may be changed by varying the determination ratio of the jackpot type for each setting value. As described above, in the special probability state and the time-saving state, the second special lottery is mainly executed and a small jackpot can occur, while in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and a small jackpot cannot occur. Therefore, the degree of advantage changes depending on the duration of the special probability state and the time-saving state.

In addition, in the special probability state, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big win, just as in the normal state and the time-saving state. If the set value is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a small win, a so-called drop lottery may be held to determine whether or not to end the special probability state if the special lottery result is a "miss" during the special probability state. In this case, the drop probability (probability of ending the special probability state) may be the same for each set value, or the drop probability may be different for each set value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 245(C), the probability of falling out of the high probability state may be set to "1 in 100" common to all setting values. In this case, the probability that the result of the falling lottery indicates that the high probability state will end does not differ for each setting value. However, as shown in FIG. 245(B), the probability of a jackpot increases as the setting value becomes higher, so the frequency and number of times that a jackpot will occur are made different for each setting value to change the degree of advantage, so that the higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage.

The probability of falling in the high probability state may also be changed for each setting value. For example, as shown in FIG. 245(D), the probability of falling may be "1 in 80" for setting values 1 and 2, "1 in 90" for setting values 3 and 4, and "1 in 100" for setting values 5 and 6.

In this case, with setting value 1, the probability of a jackpot is 1 in 31.9, but the probability of falling is 1 in 80, making the probability of a jackpot about 2.5 times higher than the probability of falling, whereas with setting value 6, the probability of a jackpot is 1 in 26.9, but the probability of falling is 1 in 100, making the probability of a jackpot about 3.7 times higher than the probability of falling. In other words, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot is, increasing the proportion of jackpots that are won before the result of the falling lottery that ends the special state is obtained, making the higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage.

In addition, when a drop lottery result that ends the probability of a special chance state is obtained during the probability of a special chance state, the probability of a jackpot may be returned from the probability of a special chance state (high probability) to the probability of a normal state (low probability), while the control of shortening the time of the special pattern change to suggest the second special lottery result to the player may be continued. In this case, the control may be terminated and the transition to the normal state may be controlled based on the number of changes after the end of the jackpot game reaching a predetermined number (for example, 100 times of suggestions, which is the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery). In other words, when a drop lottery result that ends the probability of a special chance state is obtained during the probability of a special chance state, the probability of a special chance state may be terminated and the transition to the time-saving state may be controlled. Also, when a drop lottery result that ends the probability of a special chance state is obtained, if the number of changes after the end of the jackpot game has already reached a predetermined number (for example, 100 times of suggestions, which is the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery), the transition to the normal state may be controlled without the transition to the time-saving state after the probability of a special chance state is terminated.

In addition, when a drop lottery result that ends the special probability state is obtained during the special probability state, the jackpot probability may be returned from the special probability state probability (high probability) to the normal state probability (low probability), and the fluctuation time of the special pattern for indicating the second special lottery result to the player may be returned to the normal fluctuation time. In other words, when a drop lottery result that ends the special probability state is obtained during the special probability state, the special probability state may be ended and the transition to the normal state may be controlled. In this case, a drop lottery may also be performed during the time-saving state, and when a drop lottery result that ends the time-saving state is obtained during the time-saving state, the time-saving state may be ended and the transition to the normal state may be controlled.

In the example shown in Figure 245 (E), after the end of a jackpot game, the player is controlled to transition to a special jackpot state, and the degree of advantage is changed by changing the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type that will end the special jackpot state if the special lottery result is a "jackpot." Specifically, when the result of the first special lottery, which is mainly executed in the normal state (low probability non-time-saving state), is a "jackpot," the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type is the same for all setting values, and the occurrence ratio of a "15R sure-variable jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends and a "2R sure-variable jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends but has fewer winning balls than a "15R sure-variable jackpot" is "40/100," and the occurrence ratio of a "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a time-saving state until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 hints, which is the sum of the hints of the first special lottery and the hints of the second special lottery) is reached after the jackpot game ends is "20/100."

On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery, which is mainly executed in the probability variable state and the time-saving state, is a "jackpot," the occurrence rate of the jackpot type differs for each setting value. At setting value 1, the occurrence rate of a "15R probability variable jackpot," which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, is "45 in 100," the occurrence rate of a "2R probability variable jackpot," which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends but has fewer winning balls than a "15R probability variable jackpot," is "15 in 100," and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot," which is controlled to transition to a time-saving state until a specified number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 times) is reached after the jackpot game ends, is "40 in 100."

At setting value 2, the occurrence rate of a "15R sure-variable jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "46 out of 100", the occurrence rate of a "2R sure-variable jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer winning balls than a "15R sure-variable jackpot" is "19 out of 100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a time-saving state until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 hints combining the first special lottery hint and the second special lottery hint) is reached after the end of a jackpot game is "35 out of 100".

At setting value 3, the occurrence rate of a "15R guaranteed jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "47 out of 100", the occurrence rate of a "2R guaranteed jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer winning balls than a "15R guaranteed jackpot" is "23 out of 100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a time-saving state until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 hints combining the first special lottery hint and the second special lottery hint) is reached after the end of a jackpot game is "30 out of 100".

At setting value 4, the occurrence rate of a "15R guaranteed jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "48 out of 100", the occurrence rate of a "2R guaranteed jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer winning balls than a "15R guaranteed jackpot" is "27 out of 100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a time-saving state until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 hints combining the first special lottery hint and the second special lottery hint) is reached after the end of a jackpot game is "25 out of 100".

At setting value 5, the occurrence rate of a "15R guaranteed jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "49 out of 100", the occurrence rate of a "2R guaranteed jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer winning balls than a "15R guaranteed jackpot" is "31 out of 100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a time-saving state until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 hints combining the first special lottery hint and the second special lottery hint) is reached after the end of a jackpot game is "20 out of 100".

At setting value 6, the occurrence rate of a "15R guaranteed jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "50/100", the occurrence rate of a "2R guaranteed jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer winning balls than a "15R guaranteed jackpot" is "35/100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to transition to a time-saving state until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 hints combining the first special lottery hint and the second special lottery hint) is reached after the end of a jackpot game is "15/100".

In this way, when the result of the second special lottery, which is mainly executed in the high probability state and the time-saving state, is a "high probability", the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to transition to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times, which is the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery), is reached, is changed for each set value, and the higher the set value, the lower the occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot", making it more difficult to end the high probability state. As a result, the higher the set value, the more difficult it is for the high probability state to end once it has been controlled to transition to the high probability state, increasing the number of times that a jackpot occurs, and making it possible to acquire prize balls based on small wins that occur during the high probability state. In other words, the higher the set value, the higher the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired in the high probability state.

In addition, the higher the setting value, the lower the occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot", while the higher the occurrence rate of the "2R special jackpot" compared to the "15R special jackpot", limiting the number of winning balls, preventing players from gaining an excessive advantage.

[26-3. Setting value suggestion effect in the second embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the expected value of the prize balls that can be acquired in the high probability state and the expected value of the number of small wins that can be won are different for each setting value. Specifically, in FIG. 245(A), the probability of a big win in the high probability state of setting value 1 is set to "1 in 30", and the probability of a small win is set to "1 in 3", so the expected value of the number of small wins that can be won from the control to the high probability state after the end of the big win game until the next big win is "9 times". Also, since about one game ball B can enter the second large winning hole 2006A in one small win game, the expected value of the prize balls that can be acquired in one small win game is "15 balls". In other words, the expected value of the prize balls that can be acquired by a small win in the high probability state in the case of setting value 1 is "9 times x 15 balls", or "135 balls". Similarly, in the case of setting value 2, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired through a small win in the special chance state is "13 times x 15 balls"("195balls"); in the case of setting value 3, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired through a small win in the special chance state is "16 times x 15 balls"("240balls"); in the case of setting value 4, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired through a small win in the special chance state is "19 times x 15 balls"("285balls"); in the case of setting value 5, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired through a small win in the special chance state is "23 times x 15 balls"("345balls"); and in the case of setting value 6, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired through a small win in the special chance state is "26 times x 15 balls"("390balls").

In addition, in FIG. 245(B), when the setting value is 1, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired by a small win in the special state is "4 times x 15 balls" (60 balls), when the setting value is 2, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired by a small win in the special state is "5 times x 15 balls" (75 balls), when the setting value is 3, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired by a small win in the special state is "5 times x 15 balls" (75 balls), when the setting value is 4, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired by a small win in the special state is "7 times x 15 balls" (105 balls), when the setting value is 5, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired by a small win in the special state is "9 times x 15 balls" (135 balls), when the setting value is 6, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired by a small win in the special state is "13 times x 15 balls" (195 balls).

In this way, the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired from a small win in the special probability state and the expected number of small wins that can be won differ depending on the setting value (in Fig. 245 (B) they are partially the same), so when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a big win game, the setting value can be guessed depending on the number of prize balls acquired in small win games and the number of small wins won before the next big win. In addition, a presentation that suggests the setting value (setting value suggestion presentation) may be executed depending on the number of prize balls acquired in small win games and the number of small wins won.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246, the peripheral control unit 1511 may display a gauge section having six scales 1600d, 1 to 6, corresponding to six levels of the set value on the display device 1600 as a setting value suggestion effect, and color the intervals between the scales of the gauge section according to the number of winning balls (number of payouts) due to winning the second large winning port 2006A, so that as the number of winning balls in small wins increases, the gauge section is gradually colored from the initial display state (the color display between the scales is increased), and a high setting value is suggested by coloring all the intervals between the scales of the gauge section. Specifically, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a big win game, the scale 1600d of the initial display state, the character 1600b, and the speech bubble 1600c displaying the character's lines are displayed on the display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 246 (A). In this initial display mode, assuming that the number of prize balls acquired is "0," only the leftmost one of the six scales is colored to indicate the corresponding set value, suggesting that the "set value is 1 or greater," and the bubble 1600c displays "The set value is...?" to indicate to the player through the character 1600b that the gauge section is suggesting the set value.

Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small win game after a big win game has exceeded the expected value for set value 1 and is within the range of the expected value for set value 2, the first two marks from the left of the six scales on the gauge are further colored (the first and second marks from the left are colored) to indicate that the value is "set value 2 or more," and the character 1600b says "Maybe it's 2 or more?" in speech bubble 1600c to more clearly indicate that the value is set value 2 or more (Fig. 246 (B)).

In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small win game after a big win game has exceeded the expected value for set value 2 and is within the range of the expected value for set value 3, the first three marks from the left of the six scales on the gauge are further colored (the first to third marks from the left are colored) to indicate that the value is "set value 3 or more," and the character 1600b's line "Is it 3 or more?" is displayed in speech bubble 1600c to more clearly indicate that the value is set value 3 or more (Fig. 246 (C)).

In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small win game after a big win game has exceeded the expected value for setting value 3 and is within the range of the expected value for setting value 4, the first four of the six scales on the gauge from the left are further colored (the first to fourth scales from the left are colored) to indicate that the setting value is "4 or more," and the character 1600b's line "4 or more!?" is displayed in speech bubble 1600c to more clearly indicate that the setting value is 4 or more (Fig. 246 (D)).

In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small win game after a big win game has exceeded the expected value for set value 4 and is within the range of the expected value for set value 5, the first five of the six scale marks on the gauge from the left are further colored (the first to fifth marks from the left are colored) to indicate that the value is "set value 5 or more," and the character 1600b's line "More than 5??" is displayed in speech bubble 1600c to more clearly indicate that the value is set value 5 or more (Fig. 246 (E)).

In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small win game after a big win game has exceeded the expected value for set value 5 and is within the range of the expected value for set value 6, the gauge section will further color up to the sixth scale from the left (all scales are displayed in color) to indicate that this is a "set value of 6," and the character 1600b will say "Yay! It might be 6!!!" in speech bubble 1600c to more clearly indicate that this is set value 6 (Fig. 246 (F)).

Then, after the sixth of the six scales on the gauge from the left is displayed in color (all scales are displayed in color), the display on the gauge is not changed according to the number of winning balls paid out in the small win game after the big win game because the final stage has already been reached, and all scales are displayed in color until the next big win game starts or, if there is a condition to end the probability bonus state, that condition is met.

In addition, when all six scales in the gauge section are displayed in color, a further setting suggestion may be made separately. For example, when all six scales in the gauge section are displayed in color, a special performance lottery may be made to execute a maximum setting confirmation performance that definitely informs the player that the setting is the maximum (setting value 6) based on the detection of a ball entering the second large winning opening 2006A when paying out prize balls in a small winning game after a big winning game. Specifically, when all six scales in the gauge section are displayed in color, a special performance lottery with a 1/1000 chance of winning is made every time a ball is detected in the second large winning opening 2006A, and if the lottery is won, a maximum setting confirmation performance consisting of a special voice output (a voice message saying "Congratulations on the setting 6!"), various lamps of the door frame 3 in a special mode (lamp illumination in rainbow colors using seven colors), and a special display on the performance display device 1600 (a message display saying "Congratulations on the setting 6!") is performed at the same time. By executing the highest setting confirmation display with all the scales displayed in color in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of satisfaction from the previous display related to the setting suggestion, and then provide the player with an even greater sense of satisfaction without boring them, thereby further increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs before all the scales are displayed in color, the display mode of the gauge section is cleared after the jackpot. This allows the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 to be suggested each time a jackpot occurs and the game is controlled to transition to a special state after the jackpot, so that the actual setting value can be estimated by calculating the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion. In other words, if the special state is only executed once, it is difficult to determine the setting value because the number of prize balls acquired by small wins during this special state may differ from the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired according to the setting value. However, if the number of prize balls acquired by small wins is counted for each special state between jackpots, the proportion of prize balls around a specific number of prize balls increases, so the setting value can be estimated by comparing the specific number of prize balls with the expected value. In this example, it can be estimated that the setting value with the highest suggested proportion in the setting value suggestion effect executed multiple times is the actual setting value.

In addition, when a jackpot is hit, the display mode of the gauge section may not be cleared, and may continue until the special probability state ends. In this case, the six scales on the gauge section may be set to be equal to or greater than the expected number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special probability state or the number of small prizes that can occur in one special probability state, depending on the set value, and all of the scales may not be colored in one special probability state. This allows the set value to be suggested based on the number of prize balls obtained and the number of small prizes in the special probability state over a long period of time, thereby improving the reliability of the suggested set value.

The various setting value suggestion effects described above are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511 and are based on the number of prize balls acquired in the small jackpot game that is executed in the high probability state during the period from the end of the big jackpot game to the start of the next big jackpot game, and are not based on the actual setting value, so the suggested setting value may differ from the actual setting value. Information regarding the setting value (setting value information) may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and in this case, the setting value suggestion effect may suggest a setting value based on the setting value information in addition to the number of prize balls acquired in the small jackpot game after the big jackpot game. Specifically, if the number of prize balls acquired in a small win game after a big win game exceeds the expected value of the setting value indicated by the setting value information, the suggestion mode of the setting value suggestion effect may not be changed, or if the number of prize balls acquired in a small win game after a big win game is less than the expected value of the setting value indicated by the setting value information, the suggestion mode of the setting value suggestion effect may be changed by lottery or the like to the setting value indicated by the setting value information or a setting value equal to or less than the setting value indicated by the setting value information. By configuring in this way, the reliability of the setting value suggestion effect can be increased, and attention can be drawn to the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in the small jackpot game after the big jackpot game, and when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the total number of prize balls exceeds the expected value for each setting value, the display of the gauge section is changed to suggest a setting in the special probability state, but the setting suggestion in the special probability state is not limited to this form and may be as follows.

For example, in the case of a six-stage gauge section as described above, each time the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small win has reached a certain value, one mark on the scale 1600d may be colored, and the player may be informed that the setting is high by reaching the final mark on the scale 1600d. In this case, it is preferable to reach the final mark on the scale 1600d using the expected number of prize balls paid out in a small win game after a win game with a setting value of 6 as a guide. For example, if the expected number of prize balls paid out in a small win game after a win game with a setting value of 6 is "195 balls," the timing for reaching the final mark on the scale 1600d may be set to the payout of "195 balls + α balls (α < 195)."

In addition, instead of based on the prize balls paid out due to small wins, the peripheral control unit 1511 may determine that the number of times the second special lottery results in a small win has reached a certain value, and the player may be suggested that the setting is high by achieving the final stage of the scale 1600d (for example, the number of times the second special lottery results in a small win has reached 80 times). In this case, the difficulty of achieving this will change depending on the relationship between the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win in the variable state at the setting value that is actually set. Depending on the display status of the gauge section (for example, a situation where the final stage is reached with one more mark), a new gameplay can be provided in which the player focuses on the result of the second special lottery being a small win rather than a big win, in anticipation of the setting value suggestion.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example can provide new gameplay that allows the player to guess the setting value based on the number of winning balls won in small jackpot games after a big jackpot game and the number of times the small jackpot game has been won when the machine is controlled to enter a special probability state.

[27. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiments]
The contact detection sensor main body 392 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 in this embodiment corresponds to the sensor main body of the present invention, the contact detection body 393, the first contact detection body 393a, and the second contact detection body 393b in this embodiment correspond to the detection bodies of the present invention, the switching unit 394 in this embodiment corresponds to the switching means of the present invention, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the performance display control unit 1512, etc. in this embodiment correspond to the control means of the present invention.

[28. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switching unit 394 switches between connecting the contact detection body 393 provided at the desired location where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of the player to the contact detection sensor main body 392, for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different locations on the pachinko machine 1. When the player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at the desired location, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes, and the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393. As a result, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the desired location, and predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512 in response to the detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, when the switching unit 394 connects the contact detection body 393 at the desired location to the contact detection sensor main body 392, the connection between the contact detection body 393 at other locations and the contact detection sensor main body 392 is cut off. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at other locations changes when the player approaches or touches the other locations, the change in capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected because the contact detection body 393 has been cut off by the switching unit 394, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired location can be reliably detected, preventing erroneous detection. In this way, the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detector body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 for the multiple contact detectors 393 installed at different positions, so that it is possible to detect the capacitance of the multiple contact detectors 393 with one contact detector body 392, and the number of channels required for detecting the approach or contact of the player in the control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512 can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, luminous decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player by increasing the number of performance means, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and allows the player to fully enjoy the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, by providing contact detectors 393 at multiple locations on the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player, and by connecting the contact detectors 393 provided at the desired locations to the contact detection sensor body 392 by a switching unit 394 depending on the game status, it is possible to detect the player's approach to or contact with the desired location and to cause the control means, such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512, to issue a specified warning or alarm. This makes it possible to monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392 while relatively increasing the number of channels that can be used for performance, and to achieve the same effect as described above.

In addition, since the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are located apart, so the sensor body containing electronic components such as a sensor IC and output circuit can be located in a location that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals for electrically connecting multiple contact detection bodies 393, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, which simplifies the process of assembling the pachinko machine 1 and suppresses any increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. This reduces the number of parts compared to when a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and eliminating the need to design the layout of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393. This increases the freedom of arrangement of the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, a switching unit 394 is provided for switching the contact detector 393 connected to the contact sensor main body 392, and the contact detector 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. For example, when a player-participation type presentation is performed in which multiple contact detectors 393 are distributed and the multiple distributed contact detectors 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order, so that it is possible to detect whether the player touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This makes it possible to realize a highly game-like player-participation type presentation with a single contact detection sensor main body 392, and a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 in the performance operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player in the performance operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of a punched metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of this contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, and therefore it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) via the contact detection body 352. In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, a predetermined performance is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351 by the performance means such as the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is output, so that the performance operation unit 350 can function as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit by the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358. Furthermore, because the presentation operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is extended, a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations can be performed with the presentation operation unit 350, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that differs from conventional pachinko machines equipped with operation buttons that can only be pressed, and by differentiating it from other pachinko machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact sensor main body 358. Since the capacitance differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button main body 351) and the player, it is possible to set multiple capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player approaches the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) to when the player makes contact in multiple stages, and by outputting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is located away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be located in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations. By implementing a player-participation type presentation that allows the player to operate the presentation, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a variety of presentation operations, making it less likely for the player to become bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation, which can prevent the player's interest in the game from declining.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352, whose capacitance is detected by the contact sensor main body 358, is a punched metal made of a metal plate with multiple holes formed therein, the multiple holes can reduce the capacitance of the contact detector 352 when the player is not approaching or touching the button main body 351, thereby preventing erroneous detection by the contact sensor main body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the multiple holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance, and therefore the range in which the contact detector 352 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be widened. This allows the contact detector 352 to be enlarged to widen the detection range, so if the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that the player can press is enlarged as in the above embodiment, and the contact detector 352 is made the same size as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, when the player is required to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) due to the execution of a player-participation performance, the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, so the movement distance for the player's fingers to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 is shortened, and the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, making it difficult to miss the operation timing in the player-participation performance and allowing the player to reliably participate in the player-participation performance, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the light emission effects from the LEDs 364a of the button decorative board 364, which acts as an effect means and is provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, can be output to the player side through multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352, ensuring that the player can enjoy the light emission effects and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the touch detector 352 is provided on the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing, the presentation operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the touch detector 352 made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity, and the presentation operation unit 350 is less likely to deform or break even if the player presses or hits the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) hard when performing a pressing operation. Therefore, since the touch detector 352 makes it difficult to damage the presentation operation unit 350, the player can press the presentation operation unit 350 without any worries, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation in which the presentation operation unit 350 is operated, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, and compared to a case in which the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness, the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be made thinner. This makes it easier to secure space for the contact detector 352, makes it easier to install the contact detector 352, and increases the degree of design freedom, making it easier to design a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is consistent compared to expanded metal, making it easy to process the contact detector 352 into a desired three-dimensional shape by pressing. This makes it easier to make the contact detector 352 into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and ensures the realization of the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 350, the button body 351 covers the player side of the contact detector 352, so the button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal with multiple holes formed therein. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when touching the contact detector 352 with multiple holes formed therein, and allows the button body 351 to be operated without feeling strange in player participation performances that use the button body 351 as the operation unit, allowing the player to enjoy the performance and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punched metal is covered by the button body 351, the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 do not become contaminated with dust, food, drink, or other contaminants, making cleaning much easier and reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs the pachinko machine 1 as an easy-to-clean pachinko machine 1.

In addition, presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, making it possible to output a specified presentation to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351.When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350), a specified presentation is output through the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the presentation operation unit 350, and the presentation output through (via) the presentation operation unit 350 can be enjoyed reliably, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, so that the presentation means is covered by the contact detector 352, and the contact detector 352 (presentation operation unit 350) and presentation means can be compactly arranged. This makes it easier to arrange the presentation operation unit 350 and presentation means that achieve the above-mentioned effects in the desired location on the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351), which is arranged to be movable in the vertical direction in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the performance operation unit 350 changes, and therefore, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 using the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. When the contact sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350, the performance operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. If the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is not in contact with the performance operation unit 350, it will abut (crash) against the player, and if the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is in contact with the performance operation unit 350, it is possible to present the player with a performance that uses a physical force to push the player. Therefore, a strong impact can be made on the player by a performance that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the performance operation unit 350, and the player can be reliably made aware of the protrusion of the performance operation unit 350.

When the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, if the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction (upward) toward the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes stronger and the biasing force can be increased, and if it is moved in the direction (downward) away from the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes weaker and the biasing force can be reduced. By moving the lift spring lower holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the performance operation unit 350 by the lift spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with various protruding forces, the variety of performances by physical forces can be increased, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can enjoy the performance by the protrusion of the performance operation unit 350, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the thrust force of the presentation operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, so that when a player approaches or touches the presentation operation unit 350 with a strong force, a strong impact is given to the player, making the player strongly believe that something good is about to happen (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage), heightening anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player-participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to press the performance operation unit 350, thereby making it possible for the player to participate in the player-participation type performance, and thus making the player enjoy pressing the performance operation unit 350 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, for a player who places his/her fingers on the performance operation unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) so that he/she can press it at any time, when a player-participation performance is executed in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, allowing the player to quickly recognize the start of the player-participation performance without being notified of the start of the player-participation performance by performance images, sounds, etc., and this increases the player's desire to press the performance operation unit 350, making the player-participation performance even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, because the performance operation unit 350 is protruded by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded easily and forcefully compared to a case in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded using a drive motor, making it easier to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the contact sensor body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the performance operation unit 350 and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with a different protruding force for each threshold. Therefore, the contact sensor body 358 can detect the distance from the approach of the player's fingers to the performance operation unit 350 in multiple stages, so that by protruding with a protruding force according to each stage, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, which is arranged to be movable forward and backward by popping up the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 by executing a player participation type performance, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches on the performance operation unit 350 changes. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor body 358 provided away from the contact detection body 352 on the performance operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, and can capture the change in capacitance of the contact detection body 352 due to the approach or contact of the player, so it can detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the player by capacitance. Then, when the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the movement of the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (pressing) by the player, a predetermined performance is executed by the performance means such as the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and the performance display device 1600. In other words, a predetermined performance is executed when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) can be made to function like a performance operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). On the other hand, when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (presses), a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be made to function like a performance operation unit (pressing operation unit). As a result, the player can perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player-participation type performance that allows the player to operate the performance, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface 351a). The capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, so it is possible to provide multiple capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect and execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance from the approach of the player's fingers to the effect operation unit 350 to contact in multiple stages, so that by presenting effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, a predetermined effect is executed when the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 detect the player, so that the effect can impart a sense of operation to the effect operation (non-contact operation, contact operation) using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, allowing the player to enjoy the effect operation even more.

Furthermore, since the device is equipped with a performance operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressed) by the player, and a contact detector 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the player's approach or contact with the performance operation unit 350, it is possible to request the player to perform a variety of operations in a player participation type performance, such as an operation to advance and retreat the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation) or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger (non-contact operation, contact operation). The various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in the player participation type performance, making it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type performance. And, when the player participates in the player participation type performance, the various operations using the performance operation unit 350, the contact detector 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored, and can enjoy the player participation type performance, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the performance operation unit 350 can be locked so that it cannot move forward or backward by engaging the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be prevented from moving or swinging on its own by keeping the performance operation unit 350 unable to move forward or backward using the guide pin 354c and the lifting cam member 371 until a performance is performed that moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the player feeling distrustful or uneasy due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or swinging on its own, and to make the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is arranged at a position away from the contact detector 352, so that the contact detection sensor main body 358, which contains electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be arranged in a location that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the contact detector 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC and output circuit that detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 are separate, the shape and material of the contact detector 352 can be selected appropriately regardless of the contact sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to be made to optimally correspond to the shape, form, and specifications of the button main body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and ensures the realization of a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395 with his/her fingers, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395 changes, and in response to this change, a predetermined performance is executed in which light is irradiated toward the player by the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395, so that the light irradiated toward the player can strongly attract the player's attention to the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395, and the executed performance can entertain the player. In this case, the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative board 355 or the button inner decorative board 364 or decorative body 395 is formed to conform to the decorative part provided on the button body 351 or surface member 396, so that the player can be given the illusion that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is part of the decorative part, and the player cannot recognize that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is for detecting the player. In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized by the player, even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 blocks a part of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395 (effect), the player will not be bothered by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is placed in front of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395, the presence of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 will not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395 can be shown to the player in a good condition, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 or surface member 396 by the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397, an effect is executed in which light is irradiated towards the player from the button outer decorative substrate 355, button inner decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 395, which are covered by the button body 351 or surface member 396. This makes it possible to make the button body 351 or surface member 396 function like the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), and gives the player the feeling of operating through light. Therefore, for example, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and when the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the fingers or the like, a performance is executed by the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type performance and to enjoy the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is configured to detect the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396, it is possible to vary the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decorative body 395 depending on the distance between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc., so that the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decorative body 395 can be changed depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc., allowing the player to see a more diverse presentation, which makes it less likely for the player to become bored, and prevents the player's interest from declining.

In addition, the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decorative body 395 changes, so that the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. to the button body 351 or surface member 396 can be easily detected, and a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the change in capacitance is detected by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made of a conductive material. For example, if the contact detector 397 is made of a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made thin to make it transparent, and if the vapor deposition film is made thick to give it a metallic luster, it can be made to look like part of the decoration. Alternatively, if the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punched metal with a design shape such as a star or heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. In this way, the contact detector 352, the contact detector 395, and the contact detector 397 can be made unrecognizable to the player, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance changes when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the transparent button body 351 covering the upper side (front side), and this change causes the contact detectors 395, etc. (including contact detector 352, left contact detector 390L, right contact detector 390R, contact detector 393, contact detector 397, etc.) to present a predetermined performance by performance presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and performance display device 1600, to be formed into a predetermined outer peripheral shape with a design, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detector 395 itself, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and has a high appeal to players. In addition, the front side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and a predetermined effect is presented by the effect presenting means through the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. in response to a change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact detector 395, so that the button body 351 can function as the effect operation unit 301. And, since the contact detector 395 etc. visible through the button body 351 has design, the effect operation unit 301 appears to have design, so that the pachinko machine 1 can have a strong impact on the player as a pachinko machine 1 equipped with the effect operation unit 301 not found in previous pachinko machines, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Also, as mentioned above, the design of the contact detector 395 etc. can make a strong impact on the player, which can make the player take a strong interest in the contact detector 395 etc. (button body 351) and heighten the player's anticipation for operating the button body 351 (performance operation unit 301). In addition, when a player-participation performance in which the player operates the button body 351 is executed, the player can enjoy operating the button body 351, and the player's interest can be prevented from declining.

In addition, the decorative detector 395 etc. that detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers etc. to the button body 351 is formed into an outer peripheral shape with a design, so that at first glance, some players may not notice the presence of the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting a performance by the performance presentation means. Therefore, when a player-participation type performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, the player is prompted to approach or contact the button body 351, and it is possible to make the player realize for the first time that the button body 351 is the performance operation unit 301 by the contact detector 395 etc., which gives the player an element of surprise and makes the player-participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player-participation type effect is executed by operating the effect operation unit 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like without knowing that it is the effect operation unit 301, the capacitance of the contact detector 359, etc. changes and an effect is presented by the effect presentation means, which can surprise the player and entertain the player with the presented effect, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the effects are presented by the effect presentation means in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., and it is easy to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. Also, because the effects are presented in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to detect the time (distance) between the approach of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., and the contact, in multiple stages. By presenting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395, etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if inorganic materials such as punched metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh are used as the conductive contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395, etc., prevent the contact detector 395, etc. from deteriorating the appearance, and make the contact detector 395, etc. stand out, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design that has a unique design without forming the contact detector 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing costs of the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink does not adhere to the contact detector 395, etc., and the effort required for cleaning can be reduced. In more detail, since the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and cleaning the dirt is time-consuming. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, the button body 351 can prevent dirt from adhering, and the easy-to-clean product can reduce the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the surface side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 359 etc. Therefore, if a material that enhances the design, such as a metal deposition film or foil stamping, is used as the contact detector 395 etc., it is possible to prevent early wear due to the player's touch, and the durability of the contact detector 395 etc. can be improved.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 395 etc., making it possible to use contact detectors 395 etc. that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player. This increases the freedom in the materials used for the contact detector 395 etc., and allows the contact detector 395 etc. to be formed from materials suited to needs.

In addition, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 etc., a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc., and the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. allows the player to intuitively recognize that the player has brought the finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the finger etc.

In addition, effects are presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and effects presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc. are executed when the player's fingers, etc. approach or touch the button body 351, which covers the contact detector 395, etc., so that the button body 351 can function like a touch operation unit, and the presented effects can give the player a sense of operation, allowing the player to enjoy operations using the button body 351 (player-participation effects).

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, which is capable of multiple operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with his/her fingers, etc., and when the contact detector 352 (contact detection sensor body 358) detects the entry of the fingers, etc. into the detection area, a light emission effect is executed in which light is irradiated onto the player through the button body 351 by the emission of the multiple LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 and the multiple LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364, an effect in which the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact through (via) the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, an effect in which the button body 351 is protruded upward by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and an effect in which an impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are given to the player through (via) the button body 351, etc. are executed, so that the button body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can be entertained. At this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, pushing up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise and entertain the player, increasing the player's motivation to operate the button body 351. Then, when the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, the player can appropriately move the fingers or the like to press the button body 351 downward, so that the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the contact operation by the contact detector 352 detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can allow the player to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

The detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is composed of the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detector 352 is provided near the back surface of the top surface 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, is located on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detector 352 can detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., on the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is configured with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, can be positioned on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the top surface portion 351a (contact detector 352) of the button main body 351. This allows the contact detection sensor main body 358 to be positioned in an inconspicuous location, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the back (bottom) of the button body 351 is provided with an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, which makes it easier for the player to experience effects such as light, vibration, impact, upward pressure, and wind pressure through the button body 351, achieving the same effects as those described above.

[29-1. Main control unit (2)]
The other main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will now be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 247 to 269.
The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control unit 1310 having a main control MPU 1310a that controls the progress of the game, and a board box 1320 that is a container that houses the main control unit 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

[29-1-1. Circuit board box]
As shown in FIG. 252, the board box 1320 is mainly composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate and are molded from a transparent synthetic resin. The main control unit 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space 1320s formed by stacking the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded transparently from synthetic resin (polycarbonate), the state of the front side and back side of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not unauthorized tampering has been performed or whether or not an unauthorized IC chip is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the board box 1320.
Furthermore, the board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing parts 1320z corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, and when the board box 1320 is closed using one sealing part 1320z, that one sealing part 1320z must be destroyed in order to open the board box 1320 next, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing left on the sealing parts 1320z, unauthorized opening and closing of the board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control part 1310 is enhanced.

[29-1-2. Main control unit]
The main control unit 1310 is roughly composed of a main control board 1310X (see Figures 252 and 269) which controls the progress of the game and the payout of game balls B, and a setting change board 1310Y (see Figures 252 and 269) which can set game settings related to the probability of winning the lottery described below and the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player to one of multiple setting values.

[29-1-2-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1310 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1310Y. The main control board 1310X is also connected to the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second start port sensor 2402, the large prize port sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2406, the start port solenoid 2404, the attacca solenoid 2405, the general prize port sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002, the magnetic sensor 3003, the left out port sensor 1008a, and the right out port sensor 1008b.

[29-1-2-2. Setting change board]
The setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1310 is equipped with a setting switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting values, a setting change button 1311b that can select and switch the setting value, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that indicates a state in which switching of the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted.
The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X (the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X may be electrically connected via a harness). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X.
The vertical distance dimensions of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1310Y are approximately the same as the vertical distance dimensions of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310X, and the horizontal distance dimensions of the setting change board 1310Y are shorter than the horizontal distance dimensions of the main control board 1310X, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310X coincides with the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1310Y.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is positioned along the right side of the setting change board 1310Y, with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X is positioned along the left side of the main control board 1310X, with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line.
The setting change board 1310Y is provided with a setting switch 1311a having an operation portion 1311j into which a setting key K1 is inserted and rotated below its center line, a setting change button 1311b having a press operation portion 1311p is provided above the center line of the setting change board 1310Y, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c capable of emitting light in a single color (e.g., red) is provided on the center line of the setting change board 1310Y and to the upper left of the setting switch 1311a (below and to the left of the setting change button 1311b).
A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located above the center line of the main control board 1310X and near the connector MSCN, and a base monitor 1310h consisting of a row of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located below the center line of the main control board 1310X from the center to the right side, and a RAM clear switch 1310f having a push operation portion similar to the push operation portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is located near the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310X.

In this embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is in an OFF state as an initial position when the setting key K1 is ready to be inserted into the socket formed in the operation part 1311j of the setting switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular socket is along the vertical direction). When the operation part 1311j is in the initial position, the setting key K1 can be inserted into the socket and can also be removed from the socket.

The setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Also, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) and the setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the operation unit 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
In this embodiment, two completely different functions, namely, the setting key ON and the decision key ON, can be realized by a single setting switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the operating unit 1311j is rotated, and the operations of the setting key ON and the decision key ON can be performed together by the setting switch 1311a alone.

The front surface of the base of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed to the outside through openings 1301h formed in the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320, respectively. In order to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering through the "gaps" formed between the openings 1301h of the cover body 1301 and the setting switch 1311a, the setting change button 1311b, and the RAM clear switch 1310f, foreign object intrusion prevention sections 1301v (for example, the fitting of the cylindrical bodies 1301c shown in Figure 264) that prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering are molded between the parts of the cover body 1301 corresponding to these openings 1301h and the setting switch 1311a, the setting change button 1311b, and the RAM clear switch 1310f.
Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are contained in an internal space 1320s formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and cannot be touched at all, because the cover body 1301 is molded to be transparent as described above, the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be seen through the cover body 1301.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed at a distance, and on the main control board 1310X However, the wiring patterns through which various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., the wiring pattern through which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the decision key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal of the OFF of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the wiring patterns through which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other).

[29-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting change button, setting display]
A brief description will be given of the setting switch 1311a, the setting change button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g. First, a brief description will be given of how to change the game setting value, and then a brief description will be given of how to display and confirm the current setting value. Note that the setting key K1 is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to confirm the currently set setting value, and therefore is only possessed by a limited number of people, including the manager of the game parlor.

When changing the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key K1 must be inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting switch 1311a to the setting key ON, thereby satisfying the ``predetermined setting value change permission condition.''
In other words, a person who actually changes the setting value will first open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, then turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 with the power switch 630a, insert the setting key K1 into the socket of the operating part 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, rotate the setting key K1 clockwise 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting switch 1311a into the setting key ON state, and then turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 again with the power switch 630a.

As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the operation section 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from an off state to an on state.

Next, when the pressing operation portion 1311p of the setting switch button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y, and when it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, increases by one again, and controls the setting value to be displayed on the setting display 1310g.

Next, to determine the setting value, rotate the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise 120 degrees (i.e., rotate the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key was turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF), and then rotate it counterclockwise another 60 degrees) to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

Next, the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the decision key was turned ON to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g to a non-display state and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c.

Next, remove the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the operation part 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and complete the setting value setting change operation.

In addition, when displaying the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key K1 must be inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby establishing a ``predetermined setting value display permission condition'' in which the setting switch 1311a has the setting key turned ON.
In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary interruption has occurred), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key K1 into the socket of the operating part 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting switch 1311a into the setting key ON state.
This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.

The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the operation part 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains turned off, and even if a person checking the setting value presses the pressing operation part 1311p of the setting switch button 1311b, the setting value is not changed at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed either.

When the currently set value has been confirmed, the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the setting value status displayed on the setting display 1310g disappears.

Finally, remove the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the operation part 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and complete the confirmation display of the currently set setting value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the socket of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. Meanwhile, the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires that, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the socket of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON.
In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition have a common requirement in that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. However, they differ in that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires ``when power is restored'', while the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires ``after power is restored''.

Here, the setting value of the game setting will be explained. The "setting value" is a value that can change the probability for determining whether or not a big win has occurred by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small win has occurred by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small win has occurred by lottery when transitioning from a special probability mode to a normal mode (collectively referred to as the "probability of winning the lottery"). The allocation rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls that the player can acquire can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance as multiple stages of setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X selects various tables (e.g., a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that a jackpot has been won is specified, a jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of the determination value for determining the jackpot pattern is specified, a small jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the small jackpot determination value indicating that a small jackpot has been won is specified, a small jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of the determination value for determining the small jackpot pattern is specified, a normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of the determination value for transition determination from a probability change to a normal time is specified, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, or selects various tables (e.g., an allocation table in which the allocation time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. In addition, the various tables used in the various lottery judgments are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and some are set so that the values are different based on the relationship between a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range or a larger range. For example, they may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality, and if it determines that there is an abnormality and the main control side power-off processing does not end normally when the power is cut off, displays an error message to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in its own built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls that have been collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned off on the game board 5, out of the game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a. Of the game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a, those that have been collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by either the left outlet sensor 1008a or the right outlet sensor 1008b, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected through the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and also displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e. the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, the setting switch 1311a may also be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key was turned ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a' can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF), and the setting switch 1311a' can be turned ON as the decision key, and this decision key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (this aspect of the setting switch 1311a' may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (1)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation unit (not shown) may be provided on the setting change board 1310Y. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed to the outside through an opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a foreign object intrusion prevention part similar to the foreign object intrusion prevention part 1301v of the setting switching button 1311b is provided to prevent foreign objects such as wire from entering through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to alter the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X.
When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position of the decision key button on the setting change board 1310Y may be near the setting switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. The cover body 1301 of the board box 1320 has stickers with the names of each button printed on them affixed to the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover body). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the decision key button or the setting switching button 1311b (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portion may be different in color, the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b may have different external shapes or pressing operation portion shapes, or other types of switches not having a pressing operation portion may be used as the decision key button. Examples of other types of switches not having a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. In addition, when a decision key button and a setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1310Y, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the setting change board 1310Y, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed so that they are spaced apart, and in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart). Also, if a confirmation key button is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant form of the confirmation key (2)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby turning the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Alternatively, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 in the handle unit 180, which detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether or not the player wishes to forcibly stop the shooting of the game ball B, may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the palm or fingers are not touching the handle 182, and/or can determine that the decision key is ON when the shooting of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the shooting of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the aspect of the handle touch sensor (which may include the aspect of the single button operation sensor) may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (3)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, a firing reference pulse from a firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 described later can be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be shot per minute toward the game area 5a, and is generated based on a clock signal from an oscillator circuit. In this case, when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas when the firing reference pulse is not input, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is not ON (the form of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (4)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby turning the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board 13 In the past, the signal was input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but if a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movement of a player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor may be branched in the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The distance measuring sensor detects the movement of the player by transmitting light emitted by the light emitting unit through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflecting on the arm or hand of the player within a predetermined distance dimension, and the reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit. In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance sensor via the relay board, it determines whether or not there is motion based on this detection signal, and if it determines that there is motion, it can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas if it determines that there is no motion, it can determine that the decision key is not ON (the aspect of the distance sensor is sometimes referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (5)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Also, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Also, the setting switch 1311a can be returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON to its original position, that is, the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting key cylinder can be turned clockwise by rotating it 60 degrees to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but the setting switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. This can improve security against signals from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a on which this serial output circuit is provided is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310X or on the dispensing control board 633. When the serial information output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether the setting key is ON, the decision key is ON, or OFF (the embodiment of the setting switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "variant (6) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Also, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Also, the setting switch 1311a can be returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the operation unit 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF), and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but the setting switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit that can output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. This can improve security against signals from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a on which this pulse output circuit is provided is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310X or on the dispensing control board 633. For example, the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit has a pulse width set to 1 ms when it is information conveying the setting key ON, a pulse width set to 3 ms when it is information conveying the decision key ON, and a pulse width set to 5 ms when it is information conveying OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether the information conveys the setting key ON, the decision key ON, or the OFF (the aspect of the setting switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "variant (7) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key was turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF) and the setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by pressing the decision key ON. The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and The voltage levels of the ON and OFF signals may be set to an intermediate potential (e.g., a potential of 2V to 3V out of a range of 0V to 5V) between the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X, and a comparator circuit may be provided in the main control board 1310X. The comparison results of the comparator circuit may be input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a determines the ON/OFF status of the setting key ON signal, the ON/OFF status of the decision key ON signal, and the ON/OFF status of the OFF signal. This improves security for signals from the setting switch 1311a (the embodiment of the setting switch that uses an intermediate potential may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (8)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation unit may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to modify the dispensing control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the error release switch 633d so that the decision key button and the error release switch 633d are not confused (instead of these stickers, the names of each button may be molded on the cover body). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the error release switch 633d from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation unit of either the decision key button or the error release switch 633d (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation unit) may be used, a pressing operation unit with a different color may be used, a pressing operation unit with a different shape or a pressing operation unit with a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation unit may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the error release switch 633d are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and even in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other). In addition, if a confirmation key button is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the confirmation key (9)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e. the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, a signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit on the dispensing control board 633 may be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input via the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power recovery (the power-on processing of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed) and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is such that no error has occurred, the pressing operation part of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch 633d is operated based on a signal from the error release switch 633d, while it can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch 633d is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch 633d. This can improve security with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key being ON (the form of the error release switch may be described as "variation example (10) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF), and then turned it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Alternatively, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of the signal from the error release switch 633d having a push operation part on the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, create a command, and send the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that received this command may determine whether the decision key is ON. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed its startup after the power is restored (it is in a state where the power-on process of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the push operation part of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the dispensing control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on a signal from the error release switch 633d and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the decision key is not ON when the dispensing control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch 633d and receives a command to that effect. This improves security in relation to whether the decision key is ON or not (mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (11)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform the second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is then sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the setting change board 1310Y. In the past, the operation signal was input from the RAM clear switch 1310f to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f can be input to the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control board 633, and also branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the operation signal input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, but can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security in relation to whether the confirmation key is ON or not.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the dispensing control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a foreign object intrusion prevention portion similar to the foreign object intrusion prevention portion 1301v is formed so that the dispensing control board 633 cannot be tampered with by inserting a wire or the like through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding opening.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is placed on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error reset switch 633d having a push operation unit described later. Stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover body of the dispensing control board 633 at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch 633d, respectively, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch 633d are not confused (instead of these stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover body). In order to prevent the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch 633d from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error reset switch 633d (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portion may be different in color, the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch 633d may have different external shapes or pressing operation portion shapes, or another type of switch not having a pressing operation portion may be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Examples of other types of switches not having a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. In addition, when a RAM clear switch 1310f and an error reset switch 633d are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error reset switch 633d are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also formed at a distance, and in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern through which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the error reset switch 633d is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart). In addition, if a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned ON (the form of the RAM clear switch 1310f (which may include the form of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "variant example of the decision key (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder which turns the setting switch 1311a OFF), and then turned it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310X. 1310a, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control board 633 can monitor the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the command created in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that receives this command can determine whether the decision key is ON or not. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt processing described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect, while the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect, and can determine that the confirmation key is not ON. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is ON or not (mode 2 of the RAM clear switch 1310f (which may include the mode of the setting switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant (13) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the output left sensor 1008a and the output right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON, and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a ON for the second time. The determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead, the left outlet sensor 1008a and the right outlet sensor 1008b may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the determination key ON is ON based on the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 1008a and the right outlet sensor 1008b to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The game balls launched into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 are collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. The game balls collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by either the left outlet sensor 1008a or the right outlet sensor 1008b, as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, and when the outlet 1008 has collected a game ball based on a detection signal from either the left outlet sensor 1008a or the right outlet sensor 1008b, while it can determine that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 is not open relative to the main frame 4 (i.e., closed) and/or when the outlet 1008 has not collected a game ball based on the detection signals from either the left outlet sensor 1008a or the right outlet sensor 1008b. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a ON (the form of the outlet switch (which may include the form of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (14)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B into the outlet 1008 in order to turn the decision key ON.

In the above-described embodiment, the output left sensor 1008a and the output right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF), and then turned it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and this decision key ON signal is the setting change base. The input from the board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signal from the left outlet sensor 1008a and the right outlet sensor 1008b in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, create a command, send the created command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that receives this command may determine whether the decision key is ON. The game balls shot into the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 are collected by the outlet 1008 provided in this game area 5a, as described above. As described above, the game ball collected by the outlet 1008 is detected by either the left outlet sensor 1008a or the right outlet sensor 1008b. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the game ball has been collected by the outlet 1008 based on the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 1008a and the right outlet sensor 1008b and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the determination key is not ON when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the game ball has not been collected by the outlet 1008 and receives a command to that effect. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a ON (Outlet switch mode 2 (which may include the setting switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "Decision key variation (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B into the outlet 1008 in order to turn the decision key ON.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position where the operation unit 1311j turns the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform the second ON operation. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 is input to the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the signal may be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals, or the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described later, and create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310X in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described later, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that receives this command may determine whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (the configuration of the payout unit (which may include the configuration of the setting switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the determination key (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the main frame 4 remains open against the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the main body frame opening switch (which may include the form of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "variant of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value must close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 to turn the decision key ON, and after turning the decision key ON, must open the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again, remove the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e. the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j which turns the setting switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main frame 4. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (the door frame opening switch form (which may include the setting switch 1311a' form) may be described as "variant form of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in order to turn the decision key ON, and after turning the decision key ON, must close the door frame 3 again relative to the main body frame 4, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In the above embodiment, the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but the setting switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310X (the aspect of the setting switch may be described as "variant example (18) of the decision key").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, the setting switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting switch 1311a from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, and this OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, so that the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned ON (setting switch mode 2 (which may include the setting switch mode 1311a') may be described as "variant (19) of the decision key").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation unit may be provided on the main control board 1310X. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a foreign object intrusion prevention part similar to the foreign object intrusion prevention part 1301v (see FIG. 264) is formed between the part corresponding to the opening of the cover body 1301 and the pressing operation part so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to tamper with the main control board 1310X. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310X may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the board box 1320, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused (the names of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of stickers). Also, in order to prevent the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation part) may be used, a pressing operation part with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and other switches. In addition, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the main control board 1310X in order to prevent unauthorized tampering. In addition, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation part 1311j when the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (the embodiment 2 of the decision key button (which may include the embodiment of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "variant (20) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead, the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security in relation to whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation part 1311j when the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (RAM clear switch mode 3 (which may include the setting switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant of the decision key (21)"). Note that the period during which the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 as described later, so if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as the error release switch 633d described later, the error release switch 633d is not required on the payout control board 633.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 131 of the main control board 1310X. 0a, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the gate sensor 2401 of the gate unit 2003, various sensors of various winning ports (e.g., the second start port sensor 2402, the large winning port sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2406, the general winning port sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002), and the left out port sensor 1008a and the right out port sensor 1008b of the out port 1008, which are provided on the game board 5, may be input to determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a ON as the setting key (the aspects of the various sensors (which may include the aspect of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "various embodiments of the decision key (22)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and send a game ball B to the gate section 2003, to the various winning holes, and to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then it is turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and this decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board Instead, when the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of the movable body (gimmick), by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, or a solenoid, and determines the original position or operating position of the movable body (gimmick) based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the optical gadget sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "variation example of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person changing the setting must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and move the movable body (prop) so that the optical sensor can detect the original position, operating position, etc. of the movable body (prop) in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives an input of a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects unauthorized magnetism within the play area 5a, may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the magnetic sensor (which may include the form of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (24)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must bring a magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to set the decision key to ON.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key was turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Alternatively, when a vibration sensor 3006 (see Figs. 241, 242, and 245) is provided on the game board 5 to detect fraudulent behavior by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of game balls flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 and cause the balls to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent behavior based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3006, and may also determine the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3006. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the vibration sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the determination key (25)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board 1310X. Instead, if a radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent behavior of illicitly acquiring game balls B by irradiating radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 to cause malfunctions of various sensors in various winning slots provided on the game board 5 or various sensors provided on the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not there is fraudulent behavior based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the radio wave sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (26)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, a detection signal from a pressing detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation part 303 of the performance operation button unit 360, and a detection signal from a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that detect the rotation direction of the rotation operation part 302 of the performance operation button unit 360 may be input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched in the peripheral control board 1510, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation part 1311j that turns the setting switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the performance operation button unit (which may include the aspect of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (27)").

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are housed in the internal space 1320s of the board box 1320 composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, but the setting change board 1310Y may be housed in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the board box 1320. The board box 1320 has the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 crimped with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part 1303. This crimping part 1303 is a sealing part 1320z, and there are multiple crimping parts 1303. The board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part 1303 using one sealing part 1320z, and then, in order to open the board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing part 1320z. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing portion 1320z is destroyed. Such a structure of the board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the decision key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the board box 1320 corresponding to each of them, but a foreign object intrusion prevention portion similar to the foreign object intrusion prevention portion 1301v (see FIG. 265) is formed between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body and the pressing operation portion so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gaps" formed between the front surface of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the decision key button and the openings corresponding to each of them to change the setting change board 1310Y. In addition, if the configuration of the setting change board box is different from the configuration of the board box 1320 described above and is configured so that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, a setting change board cover body opening/closing switch that can detect the opening of the cover body from the base body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310X, or may be configured to be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y. The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition may include the fact that the cover body is opened from the base body based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening/closing switch (the aspect of the setting change board box may be described as "variation example of the decision key (28)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the decision key ON of the setting switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting switch 1311a OFF, and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal from the setting switching button 1311b are provided. As for the wiring, the wiring is formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed at a distance, and also on the main control board 1310X, a wiring pattern through which various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., a wiring pattern through which a signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern through which a signal of the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, The wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch 1311a is transmitted (the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted) were also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). However, for either the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted or the wiring pattern through which the signal from the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310X separately from the connector SMCN (inter-board connection) via another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y separately from the connector SMCN, or the other connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y may be electrically connected to the other connector provided on the main control board 1310X via a harness (the manner in which the wiring pattern is routed may be described as "variant example of the determination key (29)").

Also, the above-mentioned modified enter key configurations (1) to (29) may be appropriately selected and combined to adopt the above-mentioned modified enter key configurations (the selected combination of modified configurations may be referred to as "modified enter key configuration (30)").

[29-2. Other forms of main control unit]
The main control unit 1310 described above in [29-1-2. Main control unit] has a main control board 1310X and a setting change board 1310Y that are separate bodies (hereinafter referred to as a "split board structure"), but both control boards 1310X and 1310Y may be formed from a single board (hereinafter referred to as a "single board structure").
The main control unit 1300 shown in Figures 253 to 256 comprises a main control unit 1310 of a stand-alone board structure having a main control MPU 1310a that controls the progress of the game, and a board box 1320 that houses the main control unit 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.
In addition, each element such as parts and members provided on the main control unit 1310 having a single board structure has the same function and operation method as those provided on the main control board 1310X and setting change board 1310Y having a divided board structure, except for the structural features described below. Therefore, the functions and operation methods of each element are mainly described in [29-1. Main control unit (2)] to [29-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting change button, setting display].
Conversely, the configurational features of each element described below can also be applied to the main control unit 1310 having a split board structure consisting of the main control board 1310X and setting change board 1310Y described above.

[29-2-1. Circuit board box]
As shown in Figures 253 and 254, the substrate box 1320 is generally composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302, and the main control unit 1310 is housed in an internal space 1320s formed by stacking the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302.
The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded from a transparent synthetic resin (e.g., polycarbonate), which makes it possible to check the condition of the front and back sides of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not any unauthorized tampering has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC chip is installed) from the outside of the board box 1320.

[29-2-2. Main control unit]
The main control unit 1310 has a split board structure, and is made up of a main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game and the payout of game balls B, and a setting change board 1310Y that can set game settings related to the probability of winning the lottery and the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player to one of multiple setting values.The circuit components, such as electronic components (such as a main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g, or a resistor 1310r), setting switches 1311a, setting change buttons 1311b, etc., provided on each board are appropriately arranged on a single board (hereinafter also referred to as a ``printed board'') 1310t.
For ease of explanation, the main control unit 1310 is attached to the base body 1302 side of the substrate box 1320 in FIG. 254, but in reality it is screwed to a female threaded tube 1301n provided at the four corners and the midpoint of the long side of the cover body 1301 by a screw (not shown).

[29-2-2-1. Layout of circuit components]
Here, the layout of circuit components on the printed circuit board 1310t will be described.
As shown in Fig. 254, the printed circuit board 1310t is substantially rectangular, with a main control MPU 1310a as an electronic component attached substantially in the center, setting switches 1311a attached to the corners (the details of the attachment of the setting switches 1311a will be described later), and other electronic components such as ICs 1310i, resistors 1310t, capacitors, and other circuit components are disposed throughout the board. The setting switches 1311a attached to the printed circuit board 1310t have their tops fitted into openings 1301h formed in the cover body 1301 as will be described later, and in this state are exposed to the outside through the openings 1301a.

As is well known, the main control MPU 1310a comprises a plate-shaped resin package 1310ab and a number of pins 1310ap (hereinafter, the number of pins 1310ap arranged in a row will be collectively referred to as the "pin group") arranged in rows on both the front and rear sides of the lower edge of the package 1310ab. The main control MPU 1310a is disposed approximately in the center of the printed circuit board 1310t with the row of pins oriented approximately parallel to the long side of the printed circuit board 1310t, and the front and rear pin groups are soldered to the printed circuit board 1310t at that position.

As already explained in the section [29-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting change button, setting display], the ON/OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a and the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b are input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a controls changing the set value of the game setting. Therefore, by accessing a specific pin 1310aq connected to the setting switch 1311a or the setting change button 1311b in the pin group of the main control MPU 1310a, it is possible to change the set value of the game setting even from the outside. Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is the specific electronic component that can be the target of tampering, and the specific pin 1310ap in the pin group is the specific pin 1310aq that can be the target of tampering.

[29-2-3. Setting switches]
As shown in Figures 254, 255, and 256, the setting switch 1311a is roughly composed of a roughly cubic mounting portion 1311d that is mounted on the substrate of the main control portion 1310, and a cylindrical setting key cylinder 1311e that has a smaller diameter than a circle that can be inscribed in the square apex of the mounting portion 1311d and is shorter than the height of the mounting portion 1311d, and from the outside it has a stepped stacked form with an upper portion (setting key cylinder 1311e) stacked on top of a lower portion (mounting portion 1311d).

[29-2-3-1. Mounting part]
The mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is roughly composed of a resin main body portion 1311f having electrical functional parts inside, and a mounting bracket 1311g covering the top and side surfaces of the resin main body portion 1311f, and is fixedly attached to the circuit by inserting an insertion piece 1311h protruding from the bottom edge of the mounting bracket 1311g into the board of the main control unit 1310.
The mounting bracket 1311g has notches 1311i formed in the approximate centers of the four sides of the top, so that the top of the mounting portion 1311d is flat around the setting key cylinder 1311e and uneven at the centers of each side due to the notches 1311i.

[29-2-3-2. Setting key cylinder]
The setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a has an operation section 1311j at the top, which has an insertion port for inserting the setting key K1. By inserting the key body K10 of the appropriate setting key K1 into the insertion port of the operation section 1311j and twisting the key knob K11 in a predetermined direction, the setting value can be changed or confirmed as described above.

[29-2-4. Circuit board box cover and setting switch]
As shown in the cross-sectional view of Figure 255, the cover body 1301 of the base box 1320 has an opening 1301h for allowing the operating portion 1311j of the setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a to be exposed to the outside, and a receiving tube portion 1301i is protruded toward the internal space 1320s so as to surround the opening 1301h.
In order to facilitate insertion and removal of the setting key cylinder 1311e when attaching and detaching the main control unit 1310 to the cover body 1301, the inner diameter of the receiving tube portion 1301i is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting portion 1311e (for example, approximately 7 to 8% of the design dimension), and therefore fits loosely into the setting key cylinder 1311e with the gap t1 shown in the enlarged view of Figure 255.
The setting switch 1311a is shaped so that, when the setting key cylinder 1311e is fitted into the receiving tube portion 1301i as shown in Figures 255 and 256, the position of the operating portion 1311j at the top is recessed from the outer surface of the cover body 1301, and a concave recess 1301k is formed by the operating portion 1311j and the opening 1301h of the cover body 1301.

FIG. 259 shows another form of the recess 1301k, in which a tapered surface 1301p is formed with a slope that slopes downward toward the center. The tapered surface 1301p of the recess 1301k reflects the indoor lighting, making a part around the setting switch 1311a stand out, making it easy to understand intuitively. Therefore, the setting switch 1311a of the board box 1320 can be arranged on the hinge side of a door frame or the like, which is generally difficult to see and is avoided, and conversely, by doing so, it is possible to improve the crime prevention performance by making it impossible to commit fraud unless the door frame or the like is opened widely. In this case, if the main control unit 1310 has a divided board structure divided into the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y, the setting change board 1310Y can be arranged in a position advantageous for crime prevention as described above, so that the effect of the tapered surface 1301p of the recess 1301k can be more significantly exhibited.
The radial size and inclination angle of the tapered surface 1301p are arbitrary, but since generally transparent synthetic resin molded products have a risk of reduced visibility of the bent portion, making it difficult to detect tampering with the circuit components below, it is possible to ensure the necessary visibility by making the tapered surface 1301p larger than the size of other circuit components (electronic components) themselves or the size of the circuit components (electronic components) that are located near the setting switch 1311a and below the tapered surface 1301p and that need to be checked (display portion such as product number). Also, the size of the tapered surface 1301p may be associated with the steepness or gentleness of the inclination angle, such as by making the inclination angle gentler in order to make the tapered surface 1301p larger.
Also, Fig. 260 shows another form of the recess 1301k, in which an inner flange piece 1301q is provided at the opening 1301h to further bend the path of entry of foreign objects. This significantly increases the difficulty of inserting foreign objects and the subsequent operation, thereby further improving the crime prevention performance against foreign objects. Note that the recess 1301k in Fig. 260 is formed with a tapered surface 1301p together with the inner flange piece 1301q, but the inner flange piece 1301q may be provided in the recess 1301k without the tapered surface 1301p as in Figs. 255 and 256.

As shown in the enlarged view of Fig. 255, the length of the receiving cylinder 1301i is set so that the interval t2 between the cylinder end 1301z of the receiving cylinder 1301i of the cover body 1301 and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is equal to or less than the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e. By making the radial gap t1 between the receiving cylinder 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e and the axial gap t2 between the cylinder end 1301z of the receiving cylinder 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a equal to or greater than t1 t2, it is possible to effectively prevent the fraudulent insertion of a foreign object such as a wire through the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e.
This is because the radial gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is normally set to the minimum width (clearance) required to pass the setting key cylinder 1311e through the receiving tube portion 1301i, and the foreign objects that can pass through here are limited to extremely thin objects. Therefore, even if such a thin foreign object passes through the gap t1, it is not easy for it to change direction after hitting the top of the mounting portion and break through the area with a distance t2 that is less than the gap t1 in that state, and even if it does break through, it is extremely difficult to control the foreign object to head toward the targeted point (for example, a specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, which is the specific electronic component mentioned above).

In particular, in the embodiment, the mounting portion 1311d, which is the lower portion, is higher in the internal space 1320s than the setting key cylinder 1311e, which is the upper portion, and therefore the position of the axial distance t2 between the tube end 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is relatively high in the internal space 1320s. Therefore, as shown by the imaginary line in Fig. 258, for example, a fraudster needs to perform an operation of sending out a foreign object W that has broken through the narrow gap t1 and the narrow distance t2 into the internal space 1320s, bringing its tip into contact with the printed circuit board 1310t by bending due to its own weight, and then switching the direction of the tip in the contacting state to the desired direction, but it is difficult to perform such an operation with a foreign object W that is bent and has a long length that hangs down due to its own weight, so that force cannot be transmitted well to the tip.
Moreover, since a foreign object W hanging down from a high point on the side of the setting switch 1311a is unlikely to move around toward the vicinity of the setting switch 1311a (at the feet), a specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a (specific electronic component) may be arranged near such a setting switch 1311a as shown in Figures 257 and 258. By setting the unauthorized intrusion guard hatch for the foreign object W at a high point in the internal space 1320s in this way, important parts of the main control MPU can be arranged near the unauthorized intrusion guard hatch, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of circuit components.

Incidentally, the main control unit 1310, which is the support base for the setting switch 1311a, is a plate-shaped printed circuit board, and can bend when the setting switch 1311a is pressed in. Therefore, by strongly pressing the setting switch 1311a to bend the main control unit 1310, it is possible to forcibly widen the gap t2 between the tube end 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a, and in such a case, there is a risk of it being broken through by a linear foreign object W, as shown by an imaginary line in FIG.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by attaching the setting switch 1311a near (at a corner) the screw fastening portion (joint portion) of the main control portion 1310, the bending of the main control portion 1310 is suppressed, thereby preventing unauthorized attempts to forcibly increase the interval t2. Furthermore, suppressing the bending of the main control portion 1310 when the setting switch 1311a is operated is also effective in preventing cracks in the main control portion 1310 after long-term use.

As described above, the top of the mounting part 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is uneven on each side due to the notches 1311i created by the workmanship of the mounting bracket 1311g, and the tube end 1301z of the receiving tube part 1301i is also uneven to fit into the unevenness of the mounting part 1311d. Specifically, a protruding part 1301m is provided on the tube end 1301z that corresponds to the notch 1311i of the mounting part 1311d, so that the relationship t1 ≧ t2 is maintained overall.

As described above, the configuration in which the gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e and the distance t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a are set to t1 ≧ t2, the configuration in which the distance t2 is located at a high point within the internal space 1320s, and the configuration in which the tapered surface 1301p is provided in the recess 1301k of the opening 1301h are one of the foreign object intrusion prevention portions 1301v that prevent the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires. This corresponds to an embodiment, and therefore this foreign object intrusion prevention unit 1301v can be applied at low cost to stepped, stacked push button switch members or slide switch members, such as the setting change button 1311b and RAM clear switch 1310f, in which the upper part, the pressing operation part 1311p, is protruding from the lower part, the mounting part, without the need to add a separate cylinder body 1301c like the foreign object intrusion prevention unit 1301v shown in FIG. 264.

255, the thickness of the protrusions 1301m of the tube end 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i is made thinner than the thickness of the receiving tube portion 1301i, and the distance between the opposing protrusions 1301m is made larger than the inner diameter of the receiving tube portion 1301i. Furthermore, a taper 1301j is provided at the boundary between the inner surface of the protrusions 1301m and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving tube portion 1301i, and the top of the setting key cylinder 1311e is captured and guided by the protrusions 1301m and the taper 1301j, allowing it to be smoothly fitted into the receiving tube portion 1301i. As described above, the clearance between the setting key cylinder 1311e and the receiving tube portion 1301i is set to the minimum necessary for crime prevention, and therefore it is difficult to insert the setting key cylinder 1311e directly into the receiving tube portion 1301i, but by setting the distance between the convex portions 1301m to be wider than the inner diameter of the receiving tube portion 1301i, the workability can be significantly improved. Moreover, in a configuration in which the convex portions 1301m are used as an introduction guide for the setting key cylinder 1311e, the fitting length between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e can be made longer than when the inner circumference of the tube end of the receiving tube portion 1301i is chamfered in a tapered shape, thereby improving crime prevention performance against the insertion of foreign objects.
In the embodiment, the receiving tube portion 1301i is cylindrical to match the setting key cylinder 1311e, but it may be rectangular to match the top shape of the square mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. In that case, the inner dimension of the rectangular tube is made smaller than the top contour shape of the mounting portion 1311d so that a gap t2 is formed between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a.

[29-2-5. Main control unit and back cover of main body frame]
The main control unit 1300 configured as above is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 of the main body frame 4 as described above, and its rear surface is covered together with the game board 5 by the rear cover 640 of the main body frame 4 as shown in Figures 7 and 12. In the embodiment, the rear cover 640 of the main body 4 covers the opening 1301h of the main control unit 1300, so that unauthorized access to the setting key cylinder 1311e using a duplicate key or the like can be prevented without providing a crime prevention cover to the opening 1301h. This eliminates the need for an extra cover to protrude from the opening 1301h, making it easier to keep the depth dimension of the game machine within the regulations without compressing other elements.
255, a bulge 640b that can fit (loosely fit) into the recess 1301k of the cover body 1301 may be provided on the inner surface of the rear cover 640. In this way, if the recess 1301k of the cover body 1301 and the bulge 640b of the rear cover 640 do not match, the bulge 640b of the rear cover 640 will interfere with each other and will not close normally, making it possible to prevent the discovery of illegally modified products and defects in the installation of the main control unit 1300.
In the embodiment, the rotation center of the rear cover 640 is provided on the side opposite to the rotation center of the main body frame 4, but the rotation center may be provided on the same side as the rotation center of the rear cover 640 relative to the main body frame 4. In this case, the rear cover 640 can be opened without rotating the main body frame 4 significantly, and the game setting value of the control unit 1300 can be changed in this state, thereby improving the efficiency of the operation of changing the game setting value.

[29-3. Crime prevention structure]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has game settings related to the player's profits as multiple setting values, and the setting values can be changed by changing operation means such as the setting switch 1311a, the setting change button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, etc., and is provided with a crime prevention mechanism to prevent unauthorized changes to the game setting values. A specific example of the crime prevention mechanism will be described below.

[29-3-1. Crime prevention structure of main control unit (1)]
As described above, in the main control unit 1300 of the embodiment, the opening 1301h through which the setting switch 1311a passes and the main control MPU 1310a which is the specific electronic component T are arranged so that a virtual straight line L1 connecting the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a and the opening 1301h intersects obliquely with the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq (see dotted line L2 in Figure 254).
In the main control unit 1300, if no foreign object protection such as the foreign object intrusion prevention unit 1301v of the embodiment is provided between the opening 1301h and the setting switch 1311a, which is a circuit component, and as a result, even if a wire-like foreign object is inserted into the internal space 1320s of the board box 1320 through the gap between the opening 1301h and the setting switch 1311a and can reach the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, it is difficult to apply the contact load required to electrically connect the foreign object and the specific pin 1310aq in a stable manner, so that electrical access to the main control MPU 1310a cannot be performed. Therefore, fraud caused by foreign objects can be prevented.
Furthermore, if the opening 1301h is located on an extension of the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq (see dashed line L2 in FIG. 254), in other words, if the dashed line L2 overlaps with the straight line L1 connecting the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h, it is possible to protect the specific pin 1310aq by using the other pins 1310ap as a shield, thereby preventing tampering due to foreign objects.
Furthermore, if the main control MPU 1310a is positioned approximately in the center of the approximately rectangular printed circuit board 1310t with the long side of the board approximately parallel to the row direction of the pins as in the embodiment, and the opening 1301h, i.e., the setting switch 1311a, is positioned on the short side of the printed circuit board 1310t, more preferably in a corner, the distance between the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h can be increased and the angle of the straight line L1 connecting the two can be made acute, thereby effectively preventing tampering due to foreign objects.
Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a may have the specific pin 1310aq disposed on the opposite side of the opening 1301h across the package 1310ab. In this case, since the specific pin 1310aq is located on the rear side of the package 1310ab of the main control MPU 1310a as viewed from the opening 1310h, even if a foreign object is inserted through a gap between the opening 1301h and a circuit component, it is substantially difficult for the foreign object to come into contact with the specific pin 1310aq, and therefore fraudulent acts due to foreign objects can be prevented.

[29-3-2. Anti-theft structure of main control unit (2)]
In the embodiment of the main control unit 1300, the main control MPU 1310a is a specific electronic component T that may be a target of tampering, but in reality, an input circuit may be formed between the main control MPU 1310a and the setting switch 1311a using electronic components such as resistors, and in that case, the electronic components that make up this input circuit also fall under the category of specific electronic component T that may be a target of tampering.
For this reason, in the embodiment, as the crime prevention structure (2) of the main control unit 1300, circuit components other than the specific electronic component, such as the setting switching button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, and the resistor 1310r, are arranged as obstacles 1310s in a barricade shape between the circuit component corresponding to the opening 1301h and the specific electronic component T, thereby preventing foreign objects from reaching the specific electronic component T. Therefore, fraudulent acts by foreign objects targeting the specific electronic component T can be prevented.
This crime prevention structure (2) can provide an even higher crime prevention effect by using it in combination with the crime prevention structure (1).
Specifically, by arranging circuit components in a barricade-like manner between the main control MPU 1310a of the security structure (1) and the opening 1301h to form an obstacle section 1310s, it is possible to more effectively prevent tampering by foreign objects.
For example, as shown by the solid line in Fig. 250, the setting switch 1311a and the main control MPU 1310a are arranged with the connectors SMCN and MSCN (electronic components) that connect the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X of the divided board structure sandwiched between them. In this case, the connectors SMCN and MSCN can function as obstacles 1310s against foreign objects inserted from the setting switch 1311a side toward the main control MPU 1310a, and even if this obstacle 1310s is overcome, the instability of overcoming the obstacle 1310s and the instability of contacting the main control MPU 1310a at an angle combine to make it very difficult for the foreign object to commit fraud. This effect is also the same when the main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the position shown by the imaginary line in Fig. 250.
250 (the setting switch 1311a is drawn sideways in the figure, but in the explanation here it is assumed to be in the same orientation as the solid line setting switch 1311a), the main control MPU 1310a is placed at the imaginary line position so that the setting display 1310g is sandwiched between the setting switch 1311a and the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the setting display 1310g can function as an obstacle section 1310s against a foreign object inserted from the imaginary line setting switch 1311a side toward the imaginary line main control MPU 1310a, and even if this obstacle section 1310s is overcome, the instability of overcoming the obstacle section 1310s and the instability of contacting the main control MPU 1310a at an angle combine to make fraud by a foreign object extremely difficult.

The obstacle section 1310s of the security structure (2) does not necessarily have to be a circuit component. For example, the main control section 1310 may have the above-mentioned divided board structure in which the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separated, and a partition wall (a structure in which the partition wall 1302b in FIG. 266 is integrally molded on the cover body 1301 side) that separates the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y may be provided inside the cover body 1301, and the partition wall may be used as the obstacle section 1310s. In this case, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y may be connected by the connectors SMCN and MSCN as described above, but it is better to provide each with a connector with a connection structure that can be inserted and removed in a direction perpendicular to the board surface and connect both connectors with a harness. Foreign objects moving along the printed circuit board 1310t cannot possibly penetrate a connector with this type of connection structure due to the difference in the direction of movement, so even if the connector is a specific electronic component connected to a specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, fraud is not possible.

The above describes the security structures (1) and (2) of the main control unit 1300, but of course it is possible to achieve a high security effect by combining these security structures (1) and (2) with a configuration in which the previously described gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e and the distance t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a satisfy t1 ≧ t2, a configuration in which the distance t2 is located at a high position within the internal space 1320s, or a configuration in which a tapered surface 1301p is provided in the recess 1301k of the opening 1301h.

[29-3-3. Anti-theft structure for change operation means (A)]
The first security mechanism (A) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means, as explained above for the embodiment of Figures 250 to 256, is composed of a setting switch 1311a (having a key insertion part on the face part at the tip) that turns on the specific operation part of the change operation means, which controls the start of setting changes in particular, with a setting key K1. This ensures that only specific people, including the manager of the game hall who owns the setting key K1, can change the setting values of the game settings with the change operation means.

The change operation means is for changing the setting value, and in this embodiment, it is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switching button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g. Of these, the setting switch 1311a is a specific operation unit provided in the main control unit 1310 that controls the start of the setting change, and the setting switching button 1311b is a separate operation unit provided in the main control unit 1310 that performs setting operations other than the start of the setting change. And, for this separate operation unit, no crime prevention measures are taken other than the foreign object intrusion prevention unit 1301v that prevents the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires, so that input operations from outside (pressing the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b) are possible even for non-specific persons, but inputs in a state where the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a, which is a specific operation unit, is turned on by the setting key K1, is not established is invalid in terms of control, so there are almost no crime prevention problems.

The setting switch 1311a, which is a specific operation part of the change operation means, has its axis oriented in a direction perpendicular to the board surface of the main control unit 1310 as shown in the figure, and in the form shown in Figures 250 to 252, its tip part protrudes from the outer surface of the cover body 1301. However, this protrusion may get in the way depending on the depth of the island equipment in the game hall, and may also get in the way during storage, etc.

In such a case, as shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 250B, the axis of the change operation means (for example, the setting switch 1311a having a key insertion portion) operated by the setting key K1 is set in a direction approximately parallel to the board surface of the main control unit 1310, and its tip surface (key insertion surface) is made to face the side of the board box 1320. Specifically, the change operation means is arranged in a direction approximately parallel to the board surface of the main control unit 1310 so that the key insertion portion protrudes from the left end (hinge portion side) of the board surface of the main control unit 1310 in a front view (so that it protrudes from the board edge), and the protruding portion of the change operation means is accommodated with the key insertion portion exposed to the outside by both a semicircular cutout portion formed in the base body 1302 of the housing board box 1320, which is the housing body, and a cutout portion formed in the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320 so as to fit into the setting switch 1311a. When the key insertion section protrudes from the left end of the board surface of the main control section 1310 when viewed from the front, the operation section on which the key insertion section is provided may be on substantially the same surface as the side surface of the board box 1320, or the surface on which the key insertion section is provided may protrude further than the side surface of the board box 1320, but it is preferable to form a recess 1301k as described above.

This makes it possible to almost completely eliminate or reduce the protrusion of the change operation means from the rear side of the board box 1320 (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). Also, when placing the board of the main control unit 1310 on the base body 1302 or cover body 1301 of the board box 1320, the key insertion portion protruding from the end of the board can be stored in the cutout portion, making it easier to position (align) the board of the main control unit 1310 and reducing the burden of assembling the pachinko machine 1.

[29-3-4. Anti-theft structure for change operation means (B)]
The second security structure (B) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means, as shown in Figures 261 to 266, consists of a change suppression means 1312 that covers at least a part of the change operation means, and a first state holding means (hereinafter also referred to as a lock section) 1313 that locks (holds) the change suppression means 1312.

The change operation means of this security structure (B) is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting change button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, similar to the security structure (A) described above, and of these, the change operation means provided in the main control unit 1310 are the setting switch 1311a (hereinafter also referred to as the "specific operation unit 1311a"), excluding the power switch 630a provided in the power supply unit 620c, the setting change button 1311b (hereinafter also referred to as the "separate operation unit 1311b"), and the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value. In this security structure (B), the setting switch 1311a, which is a specific operation unit, and the setting changeover button 1311b, which is a separate operation unit, are both small push button switches that can be turned on and off by pressing the pressing operation unit 1311p, and do not have any security structure other than the foreign object intrusion prevention unit 1301v that prevents the intrusion of foreign objects such as wire.

The change suppression means 1312 of the security structure (B) covers at least a portion of the change operation means to make it difficult to change the game settings.The specific configuration will be described later, but it can change between a first state in which at least a portion of the change operation means is covered to make it difficult to change the game settings, and a second state in which the change operation means that was covered in the first state is exposed to make it possible to change the game settings.
Here, "at least a part of the change operation means" means not only the entirety of the change operation means when the change operation means is made up of multiple elements, but also one element among the multiple elements that is related to the change operation required for the game settings. It also means that even if an element of the change operation means is not completely covered, there may be some gaps if it is difficult to change the game settings. In other words, the concept of covering at least a part of the change operation means includes both the quantitative and qualitative aspects described above.

The locking section (first state holding means) 1313 of the security structure (B), the specific configuration of which will be described later, locks (holds) the change suppression means 1312 in the first state and releases the lock (holding) by a specific release operation, thereby switching the change suppression means 1312 from the first state to the second state and from the second state to the first state.

[29-3-4-1. Change suppression means and lock unit (first state holding means)]
The change restricting means 1312 and lock section (first state maintaining means) 1313 of a specific crime prevention structure (B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266.
First, the change suppression means 1312(D) in Fig. 261 has a flat plate shape that covers almost one half of the outer surface of the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320 (i.e., a part of the container), and can collectively cover the specific operation unit 1311a (setting switch 1311a) and the separate operation unit 1311b (setting switching button 1311b) of the change operation means provided in the main control unit 1310, and further the RAM clear switch 1310f. This change suppression means 1312 can be rotated like a single-leaf door by pivoting one end side to the bearing part 1301a of the cover body 1301, and can be changed (rotated) between a first state in which the specific operation unit 1311a etc. is covered to make it difficult to change the game settings, as shown by solid lines in Fig. 261, and a second state in which the specific operation unit 1311a etc. is exposed to make it possible to change the game settings, as shown by imaginary lines in the same figure.

On the other hand, the locking section (first state maintaining means) 1313(D) in Figure 261 is a cylinder lock 1313a integrally provided on the free end side of the change prevention means 1312(D), and by engaging a locking member 1313c provided at the tip of the rotating lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a with a lock receiving member 1301b protruding from the cover body 1301 of the base box 1320, the change prevention means 1312(D) in the first state and the cover body 1301 are coupled to lock the change prevention means 1312(D) in the first state.
In addition, the locking section (first state maintaining means) 1313(D) can release the lock (maintenance) of the first state of the change suppression means 1312(D) and enable it to change to the second state by a specific release operation of rotating the rotating lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a using the unlocking key K2 and thereby disengaging the locking member 1313c from the lock receiving member 1301b of the cover body 1301, and can further lock (maintain) the change suppression means 1312(D) that has been changed from the second state to the first state with the unlocking key K2.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the anti-theft structure (B) of the change suppression means 1312 (D) and the lock section (first state holding means) 1313 (D) in FIG. 261, the set values of the game settings can only be changed by a specific person who has the unlocking key K2 using the change operation means, so there are almost no anti-theft problems, just like with the anti-theft structure (A), even if the change operation means itself does not have an anti-theft structure for changing the game settings.

The change suppression means 1312(D) is made of a synthetic resin having transparency (e.g., transparency), and does not impede visibility of the change operation means even when it covers the change operation means in the first state. Furthermore, each of the cover body 1301 and the change suppression means 1312(D) is provided with an information display section 1314 on which a management number and a predetermined explanatory text are written in a position where they do not overlap when the change suppression means 1312(D) is in the first state and covers the cover body 1301. This makes it easy to detect the replacement of the cover body 1301 and the change suppression means 1312(D) (collecting parts in good condition) with the aim of concealing fraud, and further makes it easy to visually check for fraudulent manipulation of the change operation means, particularly the specific operation section 1311a.

In addition, the change suppression means 1312(D) is sized and shaped to cover part of the cover body 1301, but for example, the change suppression means 1312(D) may be formed to a size and shape that can cover the entire main control unit 1300, and the bearing portion 1301a and the lock receiving member 1301b of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313(D) may be provided on a fixed member (e.g., the board holder 1200) on the main body frame 4 side. By doing so, the safety of the entire main control unit 1300 can be improved.

In addition, the crime prevention performance of the change suppression means 1312(D) is configured to be further crime-preventive even if the locking section (first state holding means) 1313(D) is destroyed by providing the rotation center (bearing section 1301a) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 261. That is, as shown by imaginary lines in the figure, the change suppression means 1312(D) is configured to be a screen-like screen in the open state and to play a role of guarding the left side vicinity of the change operation means (specific operation section 1311a, other operation section 1311b) like a wall, and the change suppression means 1312(D) itself in the open state can block the act of performing an illegal change operation on the change operation means from the free end side of the main body frame 4. In other words, by providing the rotation center of the change suppression means 1312(D) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 in this way, it is not only possible to protect the change operation means in the first state, but also possible to hinder illegal change operations on the change operation means by becoming a screen-like screen in the second state. Also, in order to maximize this effect, the change suppression means 1312 (D) in Figure 261 is configured so that when it is in the open state, the length (distance) that protrudes from the bearing portion 1301a toward the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is greater than the length (distance) from the bearing portion 1301a to the location where the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation unit 1311b) is located, and the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation unit 1311b) is located immediately to the right of the change suppression means 1312 (D) in the open state. In addition, the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation unit 1311b) are positioned near the center of the vertical length of the change suppression means 1312(D), making it difficult to access the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation unit 1311b) from above and below, and the change suppression means 1312(D) is stopped (fixed) in a standing upright position like a screen. Incidentally, while it is possible to improve crime prevention performance by having some of these components, it is most preferable to satisfy all of them.

Conversely, the change suppression means 1312 (D) may be made smaller so that only the specific operation unit 1311a is covered, and the separate operation unit 1311b is not covered in either the first or second state. In this way, the protection targets of the change operation means consisting of multiple elements (specific operation unit and separate operation unit) are narrowed down to those with high security importance, and those with low security importance are left open to the outside, thereby improving the operability of changing settings.

The technical idea described in the security structure (A) of setting the axis of the change operation means in a direction approximately parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310 and having the tip of the change operation means face the side of the container can also be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the lock unit (first state holding means) 1313 (D).

Next, the change suppression means 1312(E) in FIG. 262 is almost identical to the change suppression means 1312(D) in FIG. 261, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.
On the other hand, the locking section (first state maintaining means) 1313(E) in Figure 262 is a padlock 1313d that connects a perforated lock receiving member 1315 integrally formed on the free end side of the change prevention means 1312(E) to the perforated lock receiving member 1316 protruding toward the cover body 1301 with an inverted U-shaped locking member 1313c, and by engaging both perforated lock receiving members 1315, 1316 with the locking member 1313c, the change prevention means 1312(E) in the first state is connected to the cover body 1301, thereby locking (maintaining) the change prevention means 1312(E) in the first state.
In addition, the locking section (first state maintaining means) 1313(E) can release the lock (maintenance) of the first state of the change prevention means 1312(E) and enable it to change to the second state by a specific release operation in which the unlocking key K2 is used to change the locking member 1313c of the padlock 1313d to the unlocking direction and then the locking member 1313c is removed from the perforated lock receiving member 1315 of the change prevention means 1312(E) and the perforated lock receiving member 1316 of the cover body 1301, and further the padlock 1313d can lock (maintain) the change prevention means 1312(E) that has been changed from the second state to the first state.

The locking unit (first state holding means) 1313(E) uses a well-known padlock 1313d, and therefore detaches from both the change suppression means 1312(E) and the cover body 1301 in the unlocked state. Therefore, the locking unit (first state holding means) (E) is connected to the cover body 1301 by, for example, a wire-like or chain-like support part 1317, so that it does not detach from the cover body 1301 (container) in the unlocked state. This eliminates the risk of the locking unit (first state holding means) 1313(E) falling into the island equipment in the unlocked state, and also eliminates the waste of time caused by forgetting where the removed locking unit (first state holding means) 1313(E) was placed and then having to search for it during the locking stage.

Next, the change suppression means 1312(F) in Figs. 257 to 263 is a roughly horizontal fan-shaped device with the part corresponding to the center of the fan pivotally attached to the cover body 1301 of the base box 1320 to be able to swing freely, and can be changed between the first state in which the specific operation unit 1311a of the change operation means is covered as shown in Fig. 263, and the second state in which the specific operation unit 1311a is exposed to the outside as shown in Fig. 265. In addition, when the change suppression means 1312(F) is in the first state with respect to the specific operation unit 1311a, it does not cover the separate operation unit 1311b, but when it is changed to the second state with respect to the specific operation unit 1311a, it covers the separate operation unit 1311b. In this way, by selectively covering the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b with the change suppression means 1312(F), it is difficult to erroneously operate the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b simultaneously.

The change suppression means 1312(F) is constantly biased in a direction covering the separate operation unit 1311b by a coil spring (not shown) provided at the center of the swing, and when the lock (hold) of the first state by the lock unit (first state holding means) 1313(F) described later is released, the change suppression means 1312(F) changes to the second state due to the elasticity of the coil spring. By biasing the change suppression means 1312(F) toward the second state in this way, there is no risk of the change suppression means 1312(F) stopping at an intermediate position, and operability is improved. The biasing direction of the change suppression means 1312(F) may be either the first state or the second state, but it is preferable to bias it toward the second state, so that when the lock (hold) of the change suppression means 1312(F) is released, the special operation unit 1311a is automatically exposed to the outside, making it easy to understand the procedure for the change operation.

The locking portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) in Figures 263 to 265 consists of a mounting base portion 1301d protruding from the cover body 1301, a cylinder lock 1313a fixed to the mounting base portion 1301d, and a cam 1313e attached to the tip of the rotating lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and by sliding the peripheral surface (cam surface) of the cam 1313e against the upper side surface of the change suppression means 1312 (F), the change suppression means 1312 is pushed down against the force of the coil spring, thereby locking (holding) it in the first state in which the specific operation portion 1311a is covered.
In addition, the lock section (first state holding means) 1313(F) can release the lock (hold) of the first state of the change suppression means 1312(F) and enable it to change to the second state by a specific release operation in which the unlocking key K2 is used to rotate the rotating lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and the resulting change in the circumferential shape of the cam 1313e releases the lock (hold) of the change suppression means 1312(F). (Since the change suppression means 1312(F) in the embodiment is biased toward the second state by a coil spring not shown, when the lock (hold) of the first state is released, it automatically changes to the second state while sliding against the circumferential surface of the cam 1313e.) Furthermore, the change suppression means 1312(F) that has been changed from the second state to the first state can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2.

When the change suppression means 1312(F) is in the second state and covers the separate operation unit 1311b during the setting value change operation, if it is necessary to operate the separate operation unit 1311b, the change suppression means 1312(F) can be manually pressed down, for example by placing a finger on the operation protrusion 1312m protruding from the change suppression means 1312(F), to expose the separate operation unit 1311b.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the change suppression means 1312 (F) and the security structure (B) of the lock section (first state holding means) 1313 (F) in Figures 263 and 265, the set values of the game settings can only be changed by a specific person who has the unlocking key K2 using the change operation means, so even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game settings, there are almost no security problems, just like with the security structure (A).

Next, the change suppression means 1312 (I) in Figure 266 is in the form of a portion of the cover body 1301 of the substrate box 1320 corresponding to the setting change substrate 1310X that has been separated and made independent, and by engaging its own hook-shaped hinge portion 1312b with the hook-shaped hinge portion 1302a formed on one side of the base body 1302 of the substrate box 1320, it is freely rotatable relative to the base body 1302, and can be changed between a first state in which the specific operation portion 1311a and the separate operation portion 1311b provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y are covered collectively, and a second state in which the specific operation portion 1311a and the separate operation portion 1311b are exposed, enabling change operations. The cover body 1301 corresponding to the main control board 1310X is rotatably attached to a partition wall 1302b that rises from the base body 1302 between the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X.

The locking portion (first state maintaining means) 1313(I) in Figure 266 is a dial lock 1313f provided on the edge of the change prevention means 1312(I) on the cover body 1301 side, and by engaging the tip of the advance/retract lock shaft 1313g of the dial lock 1313f with the lock shaft hole 1301f provided on the edge of the cover body 1301, the change prevention means 1312(I) in the first state and the cover body 1301 are connected to lock (maintain) the change prevention means 1312(I) in the first state.
In addition, the locking section (first state maintaining means) 1313(I) can release the lock (maintenance) of the first state of the change suppression means 1312(I) and enable it to change to the second state by a specific release operation in which the multiple dials of the dial lock 1313f are rotated in accordance with the unlocking numbers to retract the advance/retract lock shaft 1313g and thereby remove the advance/retract lock shaft 1313g from the lock shaft passage 1301f of the cover body 1301, and can further lock (maintain) the change suppression means 1312(I) that has been changed from the second state to the first state with the dial lock 1313f.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the security structure (B) of the change suppression means 1312 (I) and the locking section (first state holding means) 1313 (I) in Fig. 266, the set value of the game setting can be changed by the change operation means only by a specific person who knows the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f, so even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, there are almost no security problems, just like the security structure (A). Note that the first state holding means 1313 exemplified in the security structure (B) adopts a cylinder lock 1313a, a padlock 1313d, a dial lock 1313f, etc., which have relatively high security performance, but even if the security performance is lower than these, any type may be used as long as it has a configuration that allows the change suppression means 1312 held in the first state to be released by a specific release operation.
In addition, since the alteration suppression means 1312(I) in FIG. 266 is independent from the cover body 1301, even if it becomes necessary to replace the cover body 1301, the alteration suppression means 1312(I) can be reused as is. In addition, when the alteration suppression means 1312(I) is connected to the hinge portion side of the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 can be rotated only in the second state in which the alteration suppression means 1312(I) is rotated. Therefore, even if an unauthorized person destroys the sealing portion 1320z of the cover body 1301, the unauthorized person cannot perform unauthorized manipulation unless he or she knows the specific operation of the alteration suppression means 1312(I), that is, the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f. Therefore, the alteration suppression means 1312(I) can improve the unauthorized prevention function of the cover body 1301.

[29-3-5. Anti-theft structure for change operation means (C)]
The third security structure (C) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means is, in contrast to the security structure (B) in which the change suppression means 1312 is placed in a position covering the change operation means on the container body (base box 1320) side, making it difficult to change the change operation of the change operation means by itself, while the change suppression means 1312 operates the change operation means on behalf of the change suppression means 1312, by placing the change suppression means 1312 in a position covering the change operation means on the container body (base box 1320) side, while making it difficult to change the change operation of the change operation means by itself, by having the change suppression means 1312 operate the change operation means on behalf of the change suppression means.
That is, as shown in FIG. 267, the change prevention means 1312 (J) of the security structure (C) is provided with a cylinder lock 1313a fixedly provided on the side of the cover body 1301, which is the container, in a position covering the specific operation unit 1311a (which may be a separate operation unit 1311b), that is, in the first state position covering the opening 1301h for exposing the specific operation unit 1311a, making it difficult to directly change the specific operation unit 1311a from the outside.
In addition, the change suppression means 1312(J) is equipped with a motion conversion mechanism that converts the rotation of the end cam 1313i fixed to the rotating lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a into linear motion of the push-operated slider 1313h, i.e., motion that can perform an operation for switch input, so that an intermediate operation for switch input can be performed by a specific operation from outside.
Then, when a specific operation is performed by inserting the unlocking key K2 into the change suppression means 1312(J) to rotate the rotating lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, due to the above-mentioned action of the motion conversion mechanism, the direct change operation from outside on the specific operation unit 1311a is substituted by the pressure operation slider 1313h of the change suppression means 1312(J); in other words, the direct change operation from outside on the specific operation unit 1311a is executed via the pressure operation slider 1313h of the change suppression means 1312(J).

According to this change suppression means 1312(J), changing the game settings from outside using the change operation means is made difficult by the change suppression means which is fixedly installed at a position covering the change operation means on the cover body 1301 side, so that there is almost no risk of the game settings being illegally changed.
On the other hand, when changing the game settings using the change operation means in a normal manner, when a specific operation from outside is performed on the change suppression means 1312 (J), for example, inserting an unlocking key K2 from outside and twisting it, this operation on the change suppression means 1312 (J) acts as a proxy (intermediary execution) for a direct change operation on the change operation means, making it possible to change the game settings.
After the change of the game settings is completed, the specific operation on the change suppression means 1312(J) is terminated, whereby the state can be restored to one in which it is difficult to directly change the change operation means from the outside.

In addition, in addition to the case where the rotating lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is rotated with the unlocking key K2, the change suppression means 1312(J) may also be arranged, for example, so that the dial lock 1313f of the change suppression means 1312(I) is arranged so that the axis of the advance/retract lock shaft 1313g coincides with the axis of the pressing operation unit 1311p of the specific operation unit 1311a, so that the pressing operation unit 1311p of the specific operation unit 1311a can be pressed via the advance/retract lock shaft 1313g when each dial of the dial lock 1313f is set to the unlocking number.
268, a shutter plate 1319 that covers the separate operation unit 1311b may be integrally provided on the end cam 1313i of the change suppression means 1312(J) so that when the end cam 1313i is rotated by a specific operation, the shutter plate 1319 also rotates to expose the separate operation unit 1311b. This not only prevents unauthorized operation of the separate operation unit 1311b, but also prevents dust from entering the internal space 1320s of the board box 1320.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the security structure (C) of the change suppression means 1312 (J) in Figures 267 and 268, the set values of the game settings can only be changed by specific persons who have the unlock key K2 or know the unlock number, so even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game settings, there are almost no security problems, just like with the security structure (A).

The technical idea described in the security structure (A) of setting the axis of the change operation means in a direction approximately parallel to the base surface of the main control unit 1310 and having the tip of the change operation means face the side of the container can also be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the change prevention means 1312 (J).

[29-4. Technical Concept]
As is clear from the explanation so far, the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the main control unit 1300 described in the above [29-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [29-3-2. Crime prevention structure for main control unit (2)] corresponds to an embodiment of the following technical idea.
"A gaming machine that holds a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and awards a predetermined benefit to a player when the lottery result is a winning combination,
A main control unit having a main control MPU that controls the progress of a game;
A board box that houses the main control unit;
a setting switch that is provided in the base box and that can change a game setting related to the winning probability of the lottery to one of a plurality of stages;
the board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body that covers the base body, and accommodates the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body;
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder which is turned by a setting key, and is formed so that an operating portion of the setting key cylinder is exposed to the outside through an opening formed in the cover body,
In addition, the setting key cylinder of the setting switch is configured so that the operating part is positioned deeper than the outer surface of the cover body, and a concave recess is formed by the operating part and the opening,
The recess further has a tapered surface that slopes downward toward the center.
According to such a gaming machine, only specific persons who have the setting key can change the game setting values, making it difficult for fraudulent operations to be carried out.
On the other hand, when changing the setting value with the setting key, it is necessary to open the door frame at the front and work quickly, but it takes some time from opening the door frame to finding the location of the setting switch on the board box. Also, if you are in a hurry and fail to insert the setting key, the setting key may slip on the operating part and protrude into the plastic part of the cover body, and the hard tip of the setting key may leave a streak-like scratch on the surface of the cover body.
In contrast, the base box of the game machine based on the above technical concept has a concave recess formed by the operating part at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body, and further has a tapered surface that slopes downward toward the center of the recess, so that first, the tapered surface of the recess reflects the indoor lighting, making a part around the setting switch stand out and easy to understand intuitively. Therefore, the setting switch of the base box can be placed on the hinge side of a door frame or the like, which is generally difficult to see and is avoided, and conversely, by doing so, it becomes impossible to commit fraud unless the door frame or the like is opened widely, thereby improving the crime prevention performance.
Even if the setting key is accidentally inserted, the setting key will not protrude beyond the surface of the cover body when it hits the tapered surface of the recess in the opening, or will bounce up along the tapered surface and will not easily rub against the surface of the cover body. Therefore, there is no risk of the surface of the cover body being scratched by the tip of the setting key, and the beautiful transparency of the cover body can be maintained for a long period of time (see, for example, paragraphs 2557 to 2579, Figures 259 and 260, etc.).
Incidentally, the tapered surface of the recess can be a factor in reducing visibility due to refraction of light, but the required visibility can be ensured by making the size and inclination angle of the tapered surface larger than the size of the circuit component itself or the size of the part of the circuit component that needs to be checked (the part showing the product number or the like) that is placed underneath it, and by setting the gradient of the inclination angle (for example, making the inclination angle more gradual in order to widen the tapered surface).

The pachinko machine 1 equipped with the main control unit 1300 described in the above [29-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [29-3-2. Crime prevention structure of main control unit (2)] also includes the following technical ideas. Note that the control units of the following technical ideas include the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control unit 1500, the payout control unit 620d, etc.
The specific electronic components T include the main control MPU 1310a having two rows of pins on both the front and rear surfaces of a plate-shaped package 1310ab, as well as, for example, a square package having four rows of pins on the four sides.
[Claim A1]
A gaming machine having a control unit in which a gaming control board is housed in a control board box,
The control board includes:
A printed circuit board;
a circuit component including an electronic component that is attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board,
The control board box includes:
A base body;
a cover body which is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between the cover body and the base body and has an opening which is opened to expose a part of the circuit components to the outside from the internal space;
A gaming machine characterized in that when a specific one of the electronic components having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is designated as a specific electronic component, and a specific one of the pins of the specific electronic component is designated as a specific pin, the opening and the specific electronic component are arranged so that a straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening approximately overlaps or diagonally intersects with the row direction of a group of pins including the specific pin.
According to this gaming machine, even if a cheater inserts a foreign object into the internal space of the control board box through the gap between the opening and the circuit component, and aims at a specific pin of a specific electronic component from there, if the straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening (see symbol L1 in Fig. 254) overlaps with the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin (see symbol L2 in Fig. 254), it is possible to protect the specific pin from the foreign object by using other pins as a shield, and if the straight line intersects with the pin group at an angle, sufficient contact load cannot be obtained even if the foreign object touches the specific pin, so the contact resistance becomes large and it becomes difficult to electrically access the specific electronic component. Therefore, cheating using foreign objects can be prevented.

[Claim A2]
A gaming machine having a control unit in which a gaming control board is housed in a control board box,
The control board includes:
A printed circuit board;
a circuit component including an electronic component that is attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board,
The control board box includes:
A base body;
a cover body which is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between the cover body and the base body and has an opening which is opened to expose a part of the circuit components to the outside from the internal space;
This gaming machine is characterized in that when a specific one of the electronic components having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is designated as a specific electronic component, and a specific one of the pins of the specific electronic component is designated as a specific pin, the specific pin is disposed on the opposite side of the opening across the package of the specific electronic component.
According to this gaming machine, the specific pin is located at the rear side of the package of the specific electronic component when viewed from the opening, so even if a foreign object is inserted through the gap between the opening and the circuit component, it is substantially difficult for the foreign object to come into contact with the specific pin, thereby preventing fraud using foreign objects.

[Claim A3]
The gaming machine described in A1, characterized in that the printed circuit board of the control board box is formed into an approximately rectangular shape, the row of pins of the specific electronic component is arranged approximately parallel to the long side of the printed circuit board, and the opening is further arranged on the short side of the printed circuit board.
Such a gaming machine can increase the degree to which the straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening intersects obliquely with the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin, and can increase the distance from the opening to the specific pin, making it more difficult for foreign objects to be controlled within the internal space.

[Claim A4]
A gaming machine having a control unit in which a gaming control board is housed in a control board box,
the control board includes circuit components including electronic components;
The control board box includes:
A base body;
a cover body which is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between the cover body and the base body and has an opening which is opened to expose a part of the circuit components to the outside from the internal space;
When a specific one of the electronic components is designated as a specific electronic component, the gaming machine has the circuit components excluding the specific electronic component disposed between the specific electronic component and the opening. The specific electronic component can be an electronic component that can be the target of tampering.
According to this gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), the circuit components other than the specific electronic component are arranged like a barricade between the opening and the specific electronic component, so that a foreign object inserted through the opening toward the specific electronic component hits the circuit components in between. Therefore, the foreign object is prevented from reaching the specific electronic component, and fraud using the foreign object aimed at the specific electronic component can be prevented.

Furthermore, the main control unit 1300 further includes the following technical idea.
[Claim B1]
A gaming machine that holds a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and gives a predetermined benefit to a player when the lottery results in a winning combination,
A main control unit having a main control MPU that controls the progress of a game;
A board box that houses the main control unit;
a setting switch that is provided in the base box and that can change a game setting related to the winning probability of the lottery to one of a plurality of stages;
the board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body that covers the base body, and accommodates the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body;
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder which is rotated by a setting key, and is formed so that an operating portion of the setting key cylinder is exposed to the outside through an opening formed in the cover body,
The gaming machine further comprises a setting key cylinder of the setting switch, the operating part being positioned further back than the outer surface of the cover body, and a concave recess being formed by the operating part and the opening.
According to such a gaming machine, only specific persons who have the setting key can change the game setting values, making it difficult for fraudulent operations to be carried out.
On the other hand, when changing the setting value using the setting key, if the setting key is not inserted properly due to haste in the work, it may slip over the operating part and protrude into the plastic part of the cover body, and the hard tip of the setting key may cause a streak-like scratch on the surface of the cover body.
In contrast, the base box of the game machine of the present invention is designed so that a concave recess is formed by the operating part at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body, so even if the setting key is not inserted properly, the setting key will not hit the edge of the opening and protrude beyond the surface of the cover body. Therefore, there is no risk of the surface of the cover body being scratched by the tip of the setting key, and the beautiful transparency of the cover body can be maintained for a long period of time.
[Claim B2]
The gaming machine according to claim B1 comprises:
The game machine is characterized in that an openable and closable back cover and the base box are attached to the rear side of a main body frame having a game board, and the base box does not have a cover for the opening, but the opening can be covered by the back cover of the main body frame.
In such an amusement machine, even if a security cover is not provided over the opening of the base box, the security performance of the setting key cylinder (preventing unauthorized access to the setting key cylinder using a duplicate key, etc.) can be improved by the back cover of the main body frame, and further, since the setting key cylinder does not protrude from the opening of the base box and the cover does not protrude excessively, the depth dimension of the amusement machine can be kept within regulations without compressing other elements.
[Claim B3]
The gaming machine according to claim B2, characterized in that the inner surface of the back cover is provided with a bulge that can be loosely fitted into the recess of the cover body.
In such an amusement machine, if the recess in the cover body and the bulge in the back cover do not match, the bulge in the back cover will interfere and the machine will not close properly, thereby preventing the discovery of illegally modified products and defects in the installation of the main control unit.

[Claim C1]
A gaming machine that holds a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and gives a predetermined benefit to a player when the lottery results in a winning combination,
A main control unit having a main control MPU that controls the progress of a game;
A board box that houses the main control unit;
a setting switch that is provided in the base box and that can change a game setting related to the winning probability of the lottery to one of a plurality of stages;
the board box includes a base body and a cover body that covers the base body, and accommodates the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body;
The setting switch has an attachment part attached to the main control part, and a setting key cylinder having a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the top shape of the attachment part and turned by a setting key, and is formed so that the top of the setting key cylinder faces the outside through an opening opened in the cover body,
Furthermore, the setting key cylinder is fitted into a receiving tube portion protruding into the internal space of the cover body,
On the other hand, this gaming machine is characterized in that the tube end portion on the opposite side to the opening of the receiving tube portion is brought close to the top of the mounting portion that protrudes outside the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, thereby making it possible to prevent foreign objects inserted into the gap between the receiving tube portion and the setting key cylinder from passing into the internal space.
According to this gaming machine, even if a wire-like foreign object is inserted into the gap between the receiving tube part and the setting key cylinder from the opening of the cover body, it will come to a dead end when it hits the top of the attachment part at the end of its travel direction, and even if it is possible to change the direction of the tip of the foreign object there, it will be blocked from passing through the narrow gap between the end of the receiving tube part and the top of the attachment part. Thus, fraudulent acts using wire-like foreign objects aimed at the gap between the receiving tube part and the setting key cylinder from the opening of the cover body can be prevented.
Moreover, this fraud prevention effect can be achieved by utilizing the stepped shape of the setting switch itself, so that almost no special cost is required.

[Claim C2]
In the gaming machine described in claim C1, the distance between the end of the receiving tube portion and the top of the mounting portion of the setting switch is formed to be less than the dimension of the gap between the receiving tube portion and the setting key cylinder.
The gap t1 between the receiving tube portion and the setting key cylinder is normally set to the minimum width (clearance) required to pass the setting key cylinder through the receiving tube portion, and foreign objects that can pass through here are limited to extremely thin objects. Therefore, even if such a thin foreign object passes through the gap t1, it is not easy for it to change direction after hitting the top of the mounting portion and break through the area of distance t2 that is less than gap t1 in that state; even if it does break through, it is extremely difficult to control the foreign object to aim it at the desired point.

[Claim C3]
The gaming machine according to claim C1 or C2, characterized in that the setting switch is attached to the surface of the main control unit in the vicinity of a joint with the base box.
The vicinity of the joint between the main control unit and the board box is unlikely to bend due to the rigidity of the board box, even if the main control unit is pressed in the planar direction. Therefore, by providing a setting switch at that location, it is unlikely to sink even if pressed from the outside, making it difficult to commit fraud by forcibly pushing down the main control unit by pressing the setting switch to forcibly expand the gap t2. In addition, suppressing the bending of the main control unit when the setting switch is operated is also effective in preventing cracks in the main control unit when used for a long period of time.

[Claim D]
A gaming machine having a control unit in which a gaming control board is housed in a control board box,
The control board includes:
A printed circuit board;
a plurality of circuit components mounted on the printed circuit board;
The control board box includes:
A base body;
a cover body which is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between the cover body and the base body and has an opening which is opened to expose a part of the circuit components to the outside from the internal space;
At least one of the circuit components is formed in a stepped, overlapping configuration including a lower portion attached to the printed circuit board and an upper portion having a bottom shape smaller than a top shape of the lower portion and a height to the opening smaller than the height of the lower portion, and the upper portion is formed so as to be exposed to the outside through an opening formed in the cover body,
the opening of the cover body has a receiving tube portion that protrudes into the internal space of the cover body and surrounds the upper portion of the circuit component,
A gaming machine characterized in that the end of the receiving tube portion on the side opposite the opening is adjacent to the top of the lower portion of the circuit component.
Here, the bottom of the upper part does not mean the absolute bottom of the upper part, but in the case where the upper part extends into the lower part, it refers to the apparent part where the side of the upper part and the top of the lower part intersect.
According to this gaming machine, even if a linear foreign object is inserted from the opening of the cover body into the gap between the receiving tube part and the upper part of the circuit component, it will come to a dead end when it hits the top of the lower part at the end of the direction of travel of the foreign object. Even if the tip of the foreign object is turned sideways from this point and the narrow gap between the end of the receiving tube part and the top of the lower part is forcibly widened and broken through, since this location is at a high position within the internal space, the fraudster must, for example, advance the foreign object that has broken through the narrow gap into the internal space, bring the tip into contact with the printed circuit board by bending due to its own weight, and then change the direction of the tip in this contacting state to the desired direction. However, it is difficult to perform such an operation with a foreign object that is bent and hangs down long due to its own weight, so that force cannot be transmitted well to the tip.
This makes it possible to prevent tampering with the cover by using linear foreign objects aimed at the gap between the receiving tube portion and the upper portion of the circuit component through the opening in the cover body.
Examples of circuit components include a setting switch consisting of a lower mounting portion and an upper setting key cylinder, a setting change button consisting of a lower mounting portion and an upper pressing portion, and a RAM clear switch 1310f.

[29-5. New Abuse of Control Unit]
As is clear from the above explanation, the control unit includes a main control unit 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510, and the control unit is configured by mounting a large number of circuit components (electronic components such as the main control MPU 1310a) on the component mounting surface of the board 1310t. For example, as shown in Fig. 251 and Fig. 252, when the control unit is installed in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface 1320a is the surface located at the front end when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the rear side, and the front surface 1320a, the rear surface 1320b, the upper surface 1320c, the lower surface 1320d, and the left and right surfaces 1320e and 1320f surround the board box 1320 made of transparent synthetic resin. The board box 1320 is configured by covering the base body 1302 with the cover body 1301, and is sealed with the sealing portion 1320z described above so that a trace of opening the cover body 1301 remains.
The board box 1320 in Figures 251 and 252 forms a vertical surface portion 1320g along the board 1310t on the edge of the top surface portion 1320c facing the board 1310t, and is configured to allow a plurality of connector members C1 provided on the board 1310t to protrude from a plurality of connector openings 1320h opened in the vertical surface portion 1320g.

The above-mentioned board box 1320 has an upper surface 1320c and a side surface of the connector member C1 that are nearly parallel to each other, and the connector member C1 stands up very close to the upper surface 1320c, leaving only a narrow gap. Therefore, even if an unauthorized hole is drilled in the upper surface 1320c, it is difficult to see because it is hidden behind the connector member C1, the connector plug C2 connected to the connector member C1, and the harness C3 attached to it. Therefore, a person attempting fraud could target such an obscure area, drill a hole with a drill or the like, and insert a foreign object to tamper with the control unit (main control unit 1310) inside, a fraud that cannot be covered by the above-mentioned crime prevention structure.

[29-5-1. Anti-theft structure of control unit (a)]
The control unit (main control unit) shown in Figures 270 to 277 is designed to be able to resist tampering due to drilling as described above, and is provided with the vertical surface portion 1320g of the upper surface portion 1320c, the lower surface portion 1320d, and the left side surface portion 1320e or the right side surface portion 1320f of the substrate box 1320 (in this embodiment, the cover body 1301), and is provided with an inclined surface portion 1320i that slopes inwardly of the front surface portion 1320a, for example, as shown in Figure 274, an inclined surface portion 1320i that slopes downward toward the front surface portion 1320a in the case of the upper surface portion 1320c, and an undercut inclined surface portion 1320i that slopes toward the front surface portion 1320a in the case of the lower surface portion 1320d. Of course, the inclined surface portion 1320i may be provided on the left side surface portion 1320e or the right side surface portion 1320f in a state inclined toward the inside of the front surface portion 1320a (toward a direction as if forming one surface of a pyramidal surface). In addition, in Fig. 274, the inclined surface portions 1320i provided on both the upper surface portion 1320c and the lower surface portion 1320d are drawn symmetrically from top to bottom, but each inclined surface portion 1320i does not need to be symmetrical and may have different inclination angles or front-to-back lengths.
This inclined surface portion 1320i improves visibility into the back of the top surface portion 1320c of the board box 1320, making it difficult to hide holes, and thus prevents attempts to tamper with the circuit components of the board 1310t by drilling holes in areas hidden by the connector member C1 with a drill or the like. Even if tampering by drilling is committed, the hole can be found relatively easily, making it possible to minimize the extent of damage.

The bottom surface 1320d of the board box 1320 should be provided with an inclined surface 1320i regardless of whether or not it has a vertical surface 1320g, and therefore regardless of whether or not it has a connector member C1. This is because when the top surface 1320c of the board box 1320 is drilled with a drill or the like, foreign matter such as shavings from the drilling process falls onto the inclined surface 1320i of the bottom surface 1320d, and these foreign matter tend to collect on the lower side of the inclined surface 1320i, making traces of tampering more obvious.

The inclined surface portion 1320i is formed in a chamfered shape from the middle of the upper surface portion 1320c in the front-rear direction as shown in Fig. 270 to Fig. 272, or is formed on the entire front-rear direction of the upper surface portion 1320c as shown in Fig. 273. In this case, the inclined surface portion 1320i has the substrate 1310t side as the starting point of the inclination, and the position of the starting point of the inclination is preferably the same as the end (socket side) of the connector member C1 on the opposite substrate side or further back toward the substrate 1310t side. This is because, in order to drill holes with a drill, it is necessary to avoid the connector member C1, which will inevitably result in holes being drilled into the inclined surface portion 1320i and be noticeable, which can psychologically discourage tampering by drilling.

As shown in Fig. 270 and Fig. 271, the inclined surface portion 1320i is formed in the left half of the upper surface portion 1320c in the left-right direction and communicates with the outside of the left side surface portion 1320e. The control unit of the embodiment is disposed on the rear side of the door frame 3 (more specifically, the game board 5 attached to the door frame 3) which is attached to the front side (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where it can rotate like a door, so that the inclined surface portion 1320i communicating with the outside of the left side surface portion 1320e as in the embodiment communicates with the outside of the edge side of the door frame 3 on the counter-rotation center side. Therefore, by opening the door frame 3 and looking at the rear side, the entire gap between the upper surface portion 1320c of the board box 1320 and the connector member C1 can be seen from the part of the inclined surface portion 1320i communicating with the outside of the left side surface portion 1320e, so that it is easy to detect fraud that uses the connector member C1 as a cover.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, the inclined surface portion 1320i can be made to linearly connect to the outside of both the left and right side surface portions 1320e, 1320f to provide the best visibility from the side, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. 273, the overall visibility can be improved by forming it over the entire front-to-rear area of the top surface portion 1320c.

[29-5-2. Anti-theft structure of control unit (B)]
The control unit in Fig. 277 includes an openable cover portion 1321 that covers the connector member C1 from the front surface 1320a side of the board box 1320 in a state perpendicular to the insertion direction of the connector member C1. The connector member C1 is covered from the front surface 1320a side of the board box 1320 by this cover portion 1321, thereby blocking the insertion of a foreign object from the insertion direction of the connector member C1, and therefore, it is possible to further improve the deterrent effect against fraud targeting the connector member C1.

As shown in FIG. 277, the cover portion 1321 is rotatably attached to a bearing portion 1302c protruding from the side of the base body 1302 of the substrate box 1320, and can be fixed to the front portion 1320a by a screw 1302d passed through the free end side.
This cover portion 1321 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin (e.g., polycarbonate) and, with the connector member C1 covered from the front portion 1320a side, can support (abut and hold) the harness C3 connected to the connector member C1 via the connector plug C2 while keeping it bent toward the opposite side to the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320. By supporting the harness C3 connected to the connector member C1 by the cover portion 1321 in this manner while bending it toward the opposite inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320, it is possible to check through the colorless and transparent cover portion 1321 from the colorless and transparent inclined surface portion 1320i whether there are any traces of tampering inside the board box 1320.
277, the cover portion 1321 is provided with a number of ventilation holes 1321a for heat dissipation corresponding to the heat dissipation structure described later, but at least the portion of the cover portion 1321 corresponding to the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320 (for example, the portion where the entire inclined surface portion 1320i is included when viewed straight from the front surface portion 1320a side) is a smooth surface without any holes. This allows the inside of the board box 1320 to be easily visually checked by looking through the cover portion 1321 and the inclined surface portion 1320i.

277, the cover part 1321 is not limited to being attached to the board box 1320, and may be attached, for example, to the rear surface of the main body frame 4 or to the rear surface of the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4, and specifically, the back cover 640 may be the cover part 1321. By doing so, the cover part 1321 and the board box 1320 are separate, so that only the control unit can be replaced, and therefore there is no risk of the undamaged cover part 1321 being wasted.
Furthermore, when the cover portion 1321 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 5, the base box 1320, the control unit within the base box 1320, and other devices connected by harness C3 are all attached together with the cover portion 1321, so that the game board 5 can be quickly attached and detached while maintaining their relationship.

[29-6. Heat dissipation structure of control unit]
The above-mentioned configurations of the security structures for the control unit (a) and (b) are also useful as a heat dissipation structure for the control unit.
That is, the inclined surface portion 1320i described in the above security structures (A) and (B) is provided on the upper surface portion 1320c of the board box 1320, and the high heat generating component 1322 which generates a large amount of heat among the circuit components mounted on the board 1310t of the control unit is disposed above the board 1310t and below the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320, without any other circuit components disposed therebetween. The high heat generating component 1322 here corresponds to, for example, a PMOSFET or a driver IC which drives the drive source of the starting port solenoid 2404 or the attacker solenoid 2405 in FIG. 269.
Needless to say, heat generated from the circuit components, particularly from the high heat generating components 1322, rises inside the board box 1320. The heat is then dissipated to the outside, mainly through the top surface 1320c of the board box 1320 as a heat dissipation surface. In this case, in the board box 1320 of this embodiment, the upper part of the inclined surface portion 1320i provided on the top surface portion 1320c is hotter and the lower part is cooler, so that the temperature difference between the top and bottom can cause an airflow along the inclination of the outer surface of the inclined surface portion 1320i. This can improve heat dissipation performance.
In addition, by placing the high heat generating component 1322 above the board 1310t with no other circuit components in between, heat can be quickly dissipated from the upper surface 1320c of the board box 1320, thereby reducing the risk of other circuit components being exposed to high temperatures.

The configuration of the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320 is similar to that described in the security structures (a) and (b), but it is preferable to form the inclined surface portion 1320i over the entire area of the top surface portion 1320c in the front-to-rear direction as shown in FIG. 273. By doing so, it is possible to maximize the effective length of the inclined surface portion 1320i, which is advantageous for improving heat dissipation performance.

In addition, among the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320 described in the security structures (A) and (B), it is preferable to form a vertical surface portion 1320g on the edge on the board 1310t side as shown in Fig. 272. By doing so, heat collected on the upper surface portion 1320c and the inclined surface portion 1320i is dissipated to the outside via the vertical surface portion 1320g, so that the temperature rise inside the board box 1320 can be more effectively suppressed.
In addition, the heat transferred to this vertical surface portion 1320g is transferred from the board 1310t to the connector member C1 and is dissipated to the outside through the connector opening 1320h, further reducing the risk of exposure to high temperatures.
The connector member C1 is preferably disposed on the solid pattern of the substrate 1310t, because the solid pattern of the substrate 1310t has better thermal conductivity than the surrounding insulating parts, and therefore more heat is dissipated through the connector member C1.
In addition, it is preferable to use multiple connector members C1 and arrange the connector members C1 at a predetermined interval from each other, because using multiple connector members C1 enables more heat dissipation, and by providing a predetermined gap between the connector members C1 to ensure ventilation, the heat dissipation performance can be further improved.
Furthermore, the connector member C1 may be mounted so as to overlap the high heat generating component 1322 in a plan view (looking down from the upper surface 1320c side). By mounting the high heat generating component 1322 and the connector member C1 so as to overlap in the vertical direction in this manner, heat generated from the high heat generating component 1322 can be efficiently transferred to the connector member C1 over the shortest distance.

In addition, the high heat generating component 1322 of the control unit may be configured as a single unit as in Figures 270 and 271, or it may be divided into multiple units for each circuit, each of which may be formed in the same shape, and arranged at a specified interval, as shown in Figure 275.
In this way, by dividing the high heat generating components 1322 into multiple circuits (four circuits in this embodiment) and arranging them with spaces between them, the source of heat generation can be dispersed, making it possible to effectively utilize the heat dissipation effect of the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320.
Also, each high heat generating component 1322 divided for each circuit should be arranged in such a direction that the maximum length in the vertical direction is greater than the maximum length in the horizontal direction. For example, each high heat generating component 1322 shown in FIG. 275 is in the shape of a half cylinder (a so-called kamaboko shape), and the maximum length in the vertical direction is approximately the diameter of the circle, and the maximum length in the horizontal direction is approximately the radius of the circle. By doing so, more high heat generating components 1322 can be arranged in correspondence with the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320, or the interval between adjacent components can be set wider in a limited space.

Furthermore, in the case of the above-mentioned crime prevention structure (B), in which an openable cover part 1321 is provided that covers the connector member C1 from the front part 1320a side of the board box 1320 in a state perpendicular to the insertion direction of the connector member C1, it is preferable to provide a number of ventilation holes 1321a for heat dissipation in the cover part 1321 as shown in FIG. 277. The ventilation holes 1321a provided in this cover part 1321 are provided in a position that is higher (higher) than the connector member C1 when installed in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the heat dissipated and rising from the high heat generating component 1332 through the inclined surface part 1320i and the connector member C1 can be effectively released to the outside through the ventilation holes 1321a of the cover part 1321. In addition, the cover part 1321 blocks the insertion of foreign objects from the insertion direction of the connector member C1, improving the deterrent effect against fraud. In addition, the cover part 1321 is not limited to being attached to the base box 1320 as described in the crime prevention structure (B), but may be attached, for example, to the rear surface of the main body frame 4 or to the rear surface of the game board 5 that is removably attached to the main body frame 4. Specifically, the back cover 640 described above may be used as the cover part 1321.

Generally, a pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of control units, and as shown in Fig. 129, a main control unit 1300 and a peripheral control unit 1400 are arranged vertically on the rear surface of the game board 5. In such a case, the upper peripheral control unit 1400 may be affected by the heat released from the lower main control unit 1300 due to the above-mentioned heat dissipation structure, so it is advisable to adopt a heat dissipation structure similar to that of the upper surface 1320c on the lower surface 1320d side of the upper peripheral control unit 1400.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 276, the above-mentioned heat dissipation structure is adopted on the upper surface 1320c of the board box 1320 of the lower control unit (main control unit 1300), and an undercut inclined surface portion 1320i sloping upward toward the front surface portion 1320a is provided on the lower surface portion 1320d of the board box 1320 of the upper control unit (peripheral control unit 1400) (in order to distinguish the board box 1320 of the control unit located above from the board box 1320 of the control unit located below, for convenience of explanation, the board box 1320 of the control unit located above will be referred to as the "second board box" below). By doing so, heat rising from the substrate box 1320 located below is diffused outward toward the front surface portion 1320a along the inclined surface portion 1320i provided on the underside portion 1320d of the second substrate box 1320, making it less likely for heat to build up between the substrate box 1320 and the second substrate box 1320.
Furthermore, it is preferable to form a lower vertical surface 1320j along the substrate 1310t by bending the substrate 1310t side vertically downward on the lower surface 1320d of the second substrate box 1320, and further to make the connector member C1 provided on the substrate 1310t protrude from a connector opening 1320h opened on the lower vertical surface 1320j. By doing so, a part of the heat from the substrate box 1320 located below is blocked by the connector member C1 of the second substrate box 1320 and diffuses outward, and the rest of the heat is also diffused outward along the inclined surface 1320i provided on the lower surface 1320d of the second substrate box 1320, so that heat is less likely to be trapped between the substrate box 1320 and the second substrate box 1320.

[29-7. Technical Concepts]
As is clear from the explanation so far, the above pachinko machine 1, particularly the pachinko machine 1 described in the above [29-5-1. Crime prevention structure for control unit (a)] to [29-6. Heat dissipation structure for control unit] corresponds to an embodiment of the following technical idea. Note that all of the explanations for the above pachinko machines 1 also apply to the pachinko machines 1 in the above [29-5-1. Crime prevention structure for control unit (a)] to [29-6. Heat dissipation structure for control unit] to the extent that they do not overlap or contradict.

[29-7-S1. Technical means S1]
a transparent synthetic resin circuit board box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces;
A control unit is provided in the board box, and the component mounting surface of the board having a large number of circuit components is opposed to the front portion of the board box so that the component mounting surface can be viewed from the outside. ,
The base box is provided with an inclined surface portion on the upper surface portion, the inclined surface portion being inclined downward toward the front surface portion, based on the orientation in which the front surface portion is vertical when the base box is installed in the gaming machine;
The control unit is configured to place high heat generating components, among the circuit components mounted on the board, above the board and below the inclined surface of the board box, with other circuit components in between. A gaming machine characterized in that the components are arranged without being placed.
Heat generated from the circuit components, especially from components that generate high heat, rises inside the board box and is dissipated to the outside, mainly from the top surface. Since the upper and lower parts are hotter and the lower parts are cooler, the temperature difference between the upper and lower parts can generate air currents along the inclination of the outer surface of the inclined surface part, thereby improving the heat dissipation performance.
In addition, by arranging high heat generating components above the board without arranging other circuit components between them, and dissipating heat quickly from the top surface of the board box, there is a risk that other circuit components will be exposed to high temperatures. can also be reduced.

[29-7-S2. Technical means S2]
The gaming machine described in technical means S1, wherein the inclined surface portion of the base box is formed over the entire front-to-rear area of the upper surface portion.
By making the entire area of the top surface of the board box in the front-to-rear direction an inclined surface, the effective length of the inclined surface, which is advantageous for improving heat dissipation performance, can be maximized.

[29-7-S3. Technical means S3]
The gaming machine according to technical means S1 or S2, characterized in that the upper surface of the board box is formed by bending the end on the board side vertically upward to form a vertical surface along the board. .
Since the heat that gathers on the upper surface and the inclined surface is also dissipated from the vertical surface, the temperature rise inside the board box can be more effectively suppressed.

[29-7-S4. Technical means S4]
Any of the technical means S1 to S3, characterized in that the high heat generating component is provided with a plurality of components having the same shape but different circuits, and each of them is arranged at a predetermined interval. 10. The gaming machine described in any one of the preceding items.
By dividing high heat generating components into multiple parts for each circuit and arranging them with space between them, the heat source can be dispersed and the heat dissipation effect of the inclined surface of the board box can be effectively utilized. .

[29-7-S5. Technical means S5]
The gaming machine described in technical means S4 is characterized in that the high heat generating components are arranged in an orientation such that their maximum vertical length is greater than their maximum horizontal length when installed in the gaming machine.
By arranging the high heat generating components so that their maximum length in the vertical direction is greater than their maximum length in the horizontal direction, more components can be arranged in accordance with the inclined surface of the board box, or in a limited space. In contrast, the interval between adjacent pixels can be set wider.

[29-7-S6. Technical means S6]
A transparent synthetic resin box is enclosed by a front surface, a rear surface, an upper surface, a lower surface, and left and right side surfaces, similar to the board box, and contains a control unit different from the control unit. a second board box;
The second board box is installed above the board box, and a sloped surface portion that slopes upward toward the front side is provided on a lower surface portion of the second board box that faces the upper surface portion of the board box. A gaming machine according to any one of technical means S1 to S5.
According to this gaming machine, the heat generated by the board box located below is diffused outward toward the front side along the inclined surface portion provided on the underside of the second board box, so that the board This makes it difficult for heat to build up between the box and the second board box.

[29-7-S7. Technical means S7]
The lower surface of the second board box is formed by bending the board side vertically downward to form a lower vertical surface along the board, and a connector opening is provided on the board from the lower vertical surface. The gaming machine according to technical means S6, characterized in that the connector member is protruded.
According to this gaming machine, a part of the heat from the board box located below is blocked by the connector member and diffuses outward, and the remaining heat is diffused through the inclined surface portion provided on the lower surface of the second board box. Since heat is diffused outward along the board box, heat is less likely to be trapped between the board box and the second board box.

[29-7-T1. Technical means T1]
a transparent synthetic resin circuit board box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces;
A control unit is provided in the board box, and the component mounting surface of the board having a large number of circuit components is opposed to the front portion of the board box so that the component mounting surface can be viewed from the outside. ,
The board box is provided with a vertical surface portion that is aligned with the board by bending an end of the top surface portion on the board side vertically upward based on the orientation of the front surface portion when the board box is installed in the gaming machine; A connector opening is provided through the vertical surface portion,
The control unit disposes high heat generating components, which generate a large amount of heat, among the circuit components mounted on the board, above the board and below the top surface of the board box, and a connector member for connecting to an external device is provided further above said vertical surface, said connector member protruding to the outside through said connector opening in said vertical surface.
Heat generated from the circuit components, particularly from components that generate high heat, rises inside the board box and is dissipated to the outside, mainly from the top surface portion which serves as a heat dissipation surface. By arranging the board in such a way that the heat inside the board box can be dissipated quickly from the top surface, it is possible to reduce the risk of other circuit components being exposed to high temperatures. Furthermore, the heat is transferred from the board to the connector material and dissipated through the connector opening. Since heat is dissipated to the outside, the risk of exposure to high temperatures can be further reduced.

[29-7-T2. Technical means T2]
The gaming machine described in technical means T1 is characterized in that an inclined surface portion that slopes downward toward the front portion is provided on the upper surface of the base box located above the high heat-generating components of the control unit.
The board box has a high temperature above the inclined surface on the top and a low temperature below it, so the temperature difference between the top and bottom tends to create an air current along the slope on the outer surface of the inclined surface. It can be improved.

[29-7-T3. Technical means T3]
The gaming machine according to technical means T1 or T2, wherein the connector member is arranged on a solid pattern of the substrate.
The solid pattern on the board has better thermal conductivity than the surrounding insulating parts, so more heat is dissipated through the connector members.

[29-7-T4. Technical means T4]
A gaming machine described in any one of Technical Means T1 to T3, characterized in that the connector members are provided in a plurality of parts, and each connector member is arranged at a predetermined interval.
By using multiple connector members, more heat can be dissipated, and by providing a predetermined gap between the connector members to ensure ventilation, the heat dissipation performance can be further improved.

[29-7-T5. Technical means T5]
A gaming machine described in any one of Technical Means T1 to T4, wherein the high heat generating component is mounted so as to overlap the connector member when viewed in a plan view.
By stacking the high heat generating components and the connector member vertically, the heat generated from the high heat generating components is efficiently transferred over the shortest distance to the connector member, and a large amount of heat is dissipated from there to the outside.

[29-7-U1. Technical means U1]
a transparent synthetic resin circuit board box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces;
A control unit is provided in the board box, and the component mounting surface of the board having a large number of circuit components is opposed to the front portion of the board box so that the component mounting surface can be viewed from the outside. ,
The board box is provided with a vertical surface portion that is aligned with the board by bending an end of the top surface portion on the board side vertically upward based on the orientation of the front surface portion when the board box is installed in the gaming machine; A connector opening is provided through the vertical surface portion,
The control unit disposes high heat generating components, which generate a large amount of heat, among the circuit components mounted on the board, above the board and below the top surface of the board box, and a connector member for connecting to an external device through the connector opening is disposed above the connector member;
The gaming machine further comprises an openable and closable cover portion having a number of ventilation holes and covering the connector member from the front side of the base box in a state perpendicular to the insertion direction of the connector member.
Heat generated from the circuit components, particularly from components that generate high heat, rises inside the board box and is dissipated to the outside, mainly from the top surface portion which serves as a heat dissipation surface. By arranging the board in such a way that the heat inside the board box can be dissipated from the top surface as quickly as possible, it is possible to reduce the risk of other circuit components being exposed to high temperatures. Moreover, the heat is transferred from the board to the connector material, and then to the connector material. The heat emitted from the heater can be released to the outside through the numerous ventilation holes provided in the cover.
In addition, since the cover covers the connector member from the front side of the board box, it blocks the insertion of foreign objects from the direction of insertion of the connector member. This provides a deterrent against fraudulent acts targeting the connector member. improves.

[29-7-U2. Technical means U2]
A gaming machine according to technical means U1, characterized in that an inclined surface portion sloping downward toward the front portion is provided on the upper surface portion of the base box located above the high heat generating components of the control unit.
The board box has a high temperature above the inclined surface on the top and a low temperature below it, so the temperature difference between the top and bottom tends to create airflow along the slope of the inclined surface. This improves heat dissipation performance. sell.

[29-7-U3. Technical means U3]
The gaming machine described in technical means U1 or U2, wherein the connector member is arranged on a solid pattern of the substrate.
The solid pattern on the board has better thermal conductivity than the surrounding insulating parts, so more heat is dissipated through the connector members.

[29-7-U4. Technical means U4]
A gaming machine described in any one of technical means U1 to U3, characterized in that the connector members are provided in a plurality of parts, and each connector member is arranged at a predetermined interval.
By using multiple connector members, more heat can be dissipated, and by providing a predetermined gap between the connector members to ensure ventilation, the heat dissipation performance can be further improved.

[29-7-U5. Technical means U5]
A gaming machine described in any one of technical means U1 to U4, wherein the high heat generating component is mounted so as to overlap the connector member when viewed in a plane.
By stacking the high heat generating components and the connector member vertically, the heat generated from the high heat generating components is efficiently transferred over the shortest distance to the connector member, and a large amount of heat is dissipated from there to the outside.

[29-7-U6. Technical means U6]
A gaming machine described in any one of technical means U1 to U5, characterized in that the ventilation hole provided in the cover portion is located above the connector opening.
In such a gaming machine, heat that is dissipated from high heat generating components and that travels along the inclined surface portion and the connector member and rises can be effectively released to the outside through the ventilation holes in the cover portion.

[29-7-U7. Technical means U7]
The cover part is large enough to cover almost the entire back side of the game board and is attached to the game board or a main frame having the game board. A gaming machine described in any one of U6.
By covering almost the entire back side of the game board with the cover portion, it is possible to more securely protect the connector member.

The above technical means S1 to U7 correspond to the following [Background Art], [Problem to be solved], and [Objectives and Effects of the Invention].
[Background Art]
A gaming machine is provided with a control unit (also called a "main control unit" or "control device") for controlling the game. This control unit is made up of a large number of circuit components (electronic components) mounted on the component mounting surface of a board, and is usually housed in a board box made of transparent synthetic resin that is surrounded on six sides by a front, rear, top, bottom, and left and right side sections (see JP-A-10-24146).
[Problem to be solved]
The circuit components of the control unit include components that generate high heat (hereinafter referred to as "high heat-generating components"), such as electronic components (PMOSFETs and driver ICs) that drive the driving sources (e.g., solenoids) of performance devices having moving parts.
Therefore, when the gaming machine was operating, the inside of the circuit board box could become very hot due to the heat emitted from the highly heat-generating components, and there was a risk that the inside of the circuit board box would overheat, causing the moving parts of the presentation device to malfunction.
Many techniques have been developed to prevent overheating inside such board boxes, including that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-24146, but these have been far from sufficient, due to the complex structure and the extra costs involved.
[Objectives and Effects of the Invention]
To provide a game machine capable of taking measures against overheating in a board box at low cost.

[29-7-V1. Technical means V1]
a transparent synthetic resin circuit board box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces and having a sealing portion;
The board is housed in the board box in a sealed state by the sealing portion, and the component mounting surface of the board having a large number of circuit components is arranged to face the front portion of the board box so as to be visible from the outside. A gaming machine including a control unit,
The substrate box includes:
With the front part being vertical when the game machine is installed, the upper surface part, the lower surface part, the left side surface part, and the right side surface part of the base box are at least one of the above. The edge of the substrate opposite to the front surface is bent vertically to form a vertical surface along the substrate, and a connector member provided on the substrate is protruded from a connector opening provided on the vertical surface,
a sloped surface portion that slopes inwardly toward the front surface of the game machine, the sloped surface portion being provided on one of the upper surface portion, the lower surface portion, and the left or right side surface portion that has the vertical surface portion; .
The inclined surface of the top of the board box makes it easier to see into the back, making it difficult to hide holes, and prevents people from drilling holes in areas hidden by connector parts and carrying out tampering with the board. Even if fraud is committed, the presence of the hole can be detected relatively easily, making it possible to minimize damage.

[29-7-V2. Technical means V2]
The gaming machine described in technical means V1 is characterized in that the lower surface of the base box is provided with an inclined surface portion that slopes inwardly toward the front surface, regardless of the presence or absence of the vertical surface portion.
Even if a hole is drilled in the top surface of the circuit board box for tampering, foreign matter such as shavings generated during the drilling process tend to gather in the lower part of the inclined surface of the bottom surface, making it easy to find traces of tampering.

[29-7-V3. Technical means V3]
The inclined surface portion of the board box corresponding to the connector member has a starting point of inclination at the same position as the end of the connector member on the opposite side to the board or on the board side of the end of the connector member. A gaming machine according to technical means V2.
In order to drill holes in the upper surface or the like with a drill, it is necessary to avoid the connector member, and in doing so, the hole is inevitably drilled into the inclined surface, which is conspicuous, and this has the effect of psychologically discouraging tampering by drilling.

[29-7-W1. Technical means W1]
a transparent synthetic resin circuit board box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces and having a sealing portion;
The board is housed in the board box in a sealed state by the sealing portion, and the component mounting surface of the board having a large number of circuit components is arranged to face the front portion of the board box so as to be visible from the outside. A gaming machine including a control unit,
The substrate box includes:
Based on the orientation in which the front part is vertical when installed in the gaming machine, the edge of the board side opposite to the front part is bent vertically on the upper and/or lower surface of the board box. forming a vertical surface portion along the substrate, and projecting a connector member provided on the substrate from a connector opening formed on the vertical surface portion;
On the other hand, the upper surface portion and/or the lower surface portion having the vertical surface portion is provided with an inclined surface portion inclined toward the inside of the front surface portion,
The gaming machine is further characterized in that the inclined surface portion is formed so as to communicate with the outside of the side surface portion.
The inclined surface makes it easier to see into the front and rear of the top or bottom of the board box, preventing attempts to drill holes in the top or bottom for tampering and use the connector components as a cover. Moreover, by forming the inclined surface portion so as to communicate with the outside of the side surface portion, visibility from the side of the board box is improved, so that the above-mentioned fraud prevention effect can be further improved. can.

[29-7-W2. Technical means W2]
The base plate box is disposed on the rear side of a door frame that is attached to the front side of the gaming machine in a manner that allows it to pivot like a door,
On the other hand, the inclined surface portion of the base box is configured to communicate with at least the edge side of the left and right side portions on the side opposite to the rotation center of the door frame. A gaming machine according to technical means W1.
The inclined surface of the base box is formed so as to communicate with the outside of the side surface of the edge of the door frame on the side opposite to the rotation center, so that the side of the inclined surface is in contact with the outside of the edge of the door frame on the side opposite to the rotation center. Since the entire gap between the upper or lower surface of the board box and the connector member can be easily seen from the portion communicating with the outside of the portion, it becomes easy to detect fraud such as using the connector member as a cover.

[29-7-W3. Technical means W3]
The inclined surface portion of the board box is characterized in that the entire front-rear direction of the upper surface portion or the lower surface portion is inclined, and the inclined surface portion is formed so as to communicate with the outside of both the left and right side surface portions. A gaming machine according to technical means W1 or W2.
The inclined surface portion of the board box is provided over the entire front-rear direction of the upper or lower surface portion and is formed so as to communicate with the outside of both the left and right side surfaces, so that the upper or lower surface portion of the board box and the connector member are in a good contact with each other. This makes it easy to see through all the gaps, providing a high level of fraud prevention.

[29-7-X1. Technical means X1]
a transparent synthetic resin circuit board box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces and having a sealing portion;
The board is housed in the board box in a sealed state by the sealing portion, and the component mounting surface of the board having a large number of circuit components is arranged to face the front portion of the board box so as to be visible from the outside. A gaming machine including a control unit,
The board box is provided with a base plate on at least one of the top surface, the bottom surface, and the left or right side surface of the board box, with the front surface being vertical when the board box is installed in the gaming machine. The edge of the substrate opposite to the front surface is bent vertically to form a vertical surface along the substrate, and a connector member provided on the substrate is protruded from a connector opening provided on the vertical surface, and an inclined surface portion inclined toward the inside of the front surface portion is provided on one of the upper surface portion, the lower surface portion, and the left or right side surface portion having the vertical surface portion,
The gaming machine further comprises an openable and closable cover portion for covering the connector member from the front side of the base box in a state perpendicular to the insertion direction of the connector member.
The cover portion covers the connector member from the front side of the board box, thereby blocking the insertion of foreign objects from the direction in which the connector member is inserted, thereby improving the deterrent effect against tampering targeting the connector member.

[29-7-X2. Technical means X2]
The cover portion is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and in a state where the cover portion covers the connector member from the front surface side of the board box, the harness connected to the connector member is disposed on the opposite inclined surface side of the board box. The gaming machine according to technical means X1, characterized in that it can be supported in a bent state.
By bending and supporting the harness connected to the connector member with the cover toward the inclined surface of the board box, the inside of the board box can be seen through the transparent cover from the inclined surface, making it easier to detect tampering. becomes easier.

[29-7-X3. Technical means X3]
The gaming machine described in technical means X2 is characterized in that at least the portion of the cover portion corresponding to the inclined surface portion of the base box is non-perforated and smooth.
By making the portion of the cover that corresponds to the inclined surface of the board box a smooth surface without any holes, visual inspection of the inside of the board box can be easily performed by looking through the cover and the inclined surface.

[29-7-X4. Technical means X4]
The gaming machine described in any one of technical means X1 to X3, wherein the cover portion is attached to the rear surface of a gaming board that is detachably attached to a main body frame.
Since the cover portion and the board box are separate, it is possible to replace only the board box, and therefore there is no risk of the intact cover portion being wasted.
In addition, the board box, the control unit in the board box and other devices connected by harnesses, and the cover are all attached to the rear of the game board, so that the game board can be opened and closed while maintaining their relationship. The attachment and detachment can be performed quickly.

The above technical means V1 to X4 correspond to the following [Background Art], [Problems to be solved], and [Objectives and Effects of the Invention].
[Background Art]
A gaming machine is provided with a control unit (also called a "main control unit" or "control device") for controlling the game. This control unit is made up of a large number of circuit components (electronic components) mounted on the component mounting surface of a board, and is usually housed in a sealed state in a transparent synthetic resin board box that is surrounded on six sides by a front, rear, top, bottom, and left and right side sections (see JP 2007-301407 A).
In such conventional board boxes, the front part is oriented vertically when installed in the gaming machine, and the edge of one side of the board box opposite the front part is bent vertically to form a vertical surface that follows the board, and a connector member provided on the board is allowed to protrude from a connector opening provided in the vertical surface.
[Problem to be solved]
In the circuit board box of the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the side of the connector member is almost parallel to the surface of the top surface, etc., and is located very close to them, so even if a hole is drilled there, it is hidden behind the connector member and difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible that a person who intends to commit fraud may drill a hole in such a part and insert a foreign object through it to perform fraudulent manipulation of the control unit, and even if such fraud is actually committed, there is a possibility that the discovery will be delayed because the connector member will get in the way.
[Objectives and Effects of the Invention]
To provide a game machine in which tampering with a board box is difficult.

[30. Improvement of workability]
In recent years, the overall aging of society has progressed, and therefore there is a demand for the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 to be easy to operate for workers of a wide range of ages.
From this perspective, the embodiments of Figures 278 to 280 are designed to improve workability for workers of a wide range of ages.

[30-1. Back cover]
First, the rear surface of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 is covered with the rear cover 640 as already described with reference to Figures 75 to 81. The main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the game board 5 is also almost entirely covered with the rear cover 640, including the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b, as shown in Figure 4. The vertical side of this rear cover 640 located on the hinge side of the door frame 3 or the like is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 4. Therefore, in order to change the setting value related to the probability of winning the lottery described above, it is necessary to open the rear cover 640 like a single-leaf door to expose the main control unit 1300, and in that state, to operate the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b in sequence. Needless to say, covering the main control unit 1300 with the rear cover 640 is effective in terms of crime prevention, but in order to open the rear cover 640, it is necessary to first open the heavy door frame 3 and main body frame 4 almost completely. Considering the actual situation in which settings of a large number of pachinko machines 1 must be changed efficiently in a short amount of time before opening, this places a heavy burden on those who are less physically fit, such as women and the elderly.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 278, the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b of the main control unit 1300 are placed at a low position, while the length of the back cover 640 is shortened to a level where they do not overlap with the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b, so that the parts of the main control unit 1300 corresponding to the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b are not covered by the back cover 640. As a result, by simply opening the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 to the minimum extent necessary, the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b of the main control unit 1300 can be operated with the back cover 640 closed, so that even women and elderly people who are physically weak can easily change the setting value related to the probability of winning the lottery. The same effect can be achieved not only by shortening the length of the back cover 640, but also by providing a window hole of a size and shape corresponding to the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b in the back cover 640.

If there is concern that the security performance may be reduced by the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b of the main control unit 1300 being removed from the protection of the back cover 640, an openable/closable switch cover 640sw may be provided that is limited to the setting switch 1311a and/or the setting change switch 1311b as shown in Fig. 279. This switch cover 640sw is rotatably attached to a bearing 642sw protruding from the board box 1320 as shown in Fig. 279, but a bearing (not shown) may be formed in the back cover 640 and the switch cover 640sw may be rotatably attached to the bearing.
The switch cover 640sw here is not limited to one that covers both the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b, and may be of a size and shape that covers only one of them. This is because, in order to change the setting value, it is necessary to operate both the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b, and the necessary crime prevention effect can be obtained if only one of them is covered.

To operate the setting switch 1311a and setting change switch 1311b of the main control unit 1300 in the above pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to open the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 and then open the switch cover 640sw. However, since the switch cover 640sw is sufficiently small compared to the back cover 640, there is almost no increase in the labor required for opening and closing. Also, the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 can be opened and closed by only opening them to the minimum extent necessary, so the overall labor required is almost unchanged. On the other hand, since the setting switch 1311a and/or setting change switch 1311b are protected by the switch cover 640sw, crime prevention performance is reliably improved.

[30-2. Layout of setting display, setting switch, and setting change switch]
As described above, the control unit (e.g., the main control unit 1300) has a setting switch 1311a for setting a setting value related to the probability of winning a lottery that will award a player a predetermined benefit, a setting change switch 1311b for changing the setting value, a setting display 1310g for visibly displaying the setting value by illuminating it, and a power switch 630a. The setting switch 1311a, the setting change switch 1311b, and the power switch 630a are arranged so that they can be operated from the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the setting display 1310g is arranged so that it can be seen from the rear side of the main body frame 4. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 278, the setting display 1310g (in this embodiment, one digit at the right end of the 7-segment display that constitutes the base monitor 1310h is used) is arranged at a position closer to the hinge portion than the vertical center line of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 (the vertical center lines of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 are also approximately the same).

The operation of changing the setting value for the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility is performed with the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 opened like a single door and the rear surface of the main body frame 4 facing the indoor side of the game hall, but in the above pachinko machine 1, the setting display 1310h that displays the setting value is located closer to the hinge part side than the vertical center line of the main body frame 4, so that it can be set at an appropriate distance from the eye position of the worker standing on the open side of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the setting value can be easily seen by a wide range of age groups, especially elderly workers. Moreover, since the setting display 1310h is located closer to the hinge part side of the main body frame 4, it is less affected by the lighting in the game hall and the lighting for the performance of other pachinko machines 1, so that the erroneous input of the setting value due to misreading can be reduced.
Furthermore, even if it becomes necessary to check the setting value of the setting display 1310g during business hours, since the setting display 1310g is located near the hinge portion of the main body frame 4, it can be easily hidden from view of players.

Also, as shown in FIG. 278, the setting change switch 1311b is positioned closer to the open side than the vertical center line of the main body frame 4.
Generally, to change the setting value, the open main body frame 4 is held down with one hand (e.g. the left hand) while the other hand (e.g. the right hand) is used to operate the setting switch 1311a, and then that hand is moved to the setting change switch 1311b to perform a switch operation such as pressing it. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting change switch 1311b is located closer to the opening side than the vertical center line of the main body frame 4, so that the setting change operation can be performed near the center of the body with the main body frame 4 in an open position.
Therefore, hand movements are stabilized, allowing the setting change work to be carried out efficiently, and the range of movement of the operating hand is also reduced, reducing the strain (fatigue) on the operator's arms.

Also, as shown in FIG. 278, the setting switch 1311a is disposed between the vertical center line of the main body frame 4 and the setting change switch 1311b.
Therefore, since the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b are arranged close to each other near the open side of the main body frame 4, the user can open the main body frame 4, immediately operate the setting switch 1311a, and then immediately move his/her hand to operate the setting change switch 1311b. In this way, the range of movement of the operating hand can be kept almost near the center of the body, which reduces the burden on the operator's arm when changing the settings. Therefore, combined with the ease of recognition of the setting display 1310g described above, it becomes possible to change the settings of a large number of pachinko machines 1 accurately and with little effort in a short time.

[30-3. Technical thought β]
The above embodiment includes a technical idea β for the following problem.

[30-3-1. Issues]
In recent years, society as a whole has been aging, and therefore there is a demand for gaming machines that are suitable for workers of a wide range of ages.
When conventional gaming machines were reviewed from this perspective, configurations that were disadvantageous to elderly and female workers were found.
For example, in a conventional gaming machine that allows the setting value related to the probability of winning a lottery that awards a player a certain amount of profit to be changed, a setting indicator that illuminates and displays the setting value is located near the edge of the open side of the main frame, but this is difficult for older workers to see and may lead to misinterpretation of the setting value. This is because the setting indicator of the gaming machine is often located below the main frame, below the eye level of the worker, due to the arrangement of other parts, and is close and angled, making it difficult for older workers to focus on it. Furthermore, the open side of the main frame is easily affected by the indoor lighting of the game hall and the decorative lighting of other gaming machines, and these lights may be reflected on the surface of the setting indicator, making the display itself difficult to see.

Technical idea β was developed in consideration of the above, and its purpose is to provide an amusement machine that makes it easy to perform maintenance and other operations.

[30-3-2-β1. Technical thought β1]
The outer frame and
a main body frame supported on the outer frame so as to be capable of being opened and closed like a single-leaf door;
A game board that is detachably attached to the main body frame;
A control unit for controlling a game;
a power switch for supplying power to at least the control unit;
The control unit
a setting switch for setting a set value relating to a winning probability of a lottery that will award a predetermined benefit to a player;
A setting change switch for changing the setting value;
and a setting indicator for visibly displaying the setting value by light,
The setting switch, the setting change switch and the power switch are arranged so as to be operable from the rear side of the main body frame, and the setting indicator is arranged so as to be visible from the rear side of the main body frame. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting display is positioned closer to the hinge portion than the vertical center line of the main body frame.
The setting values of the gaming machines installed in the island equipment are changed by opening the main frame like a door and facing the rear of the main frame toward the inside of the gaming hall. The setting display for the gaming machine is located closer to the hinge section than the vertical center line of the main frame, so that it is difficult for the operator standing on the open side of the main frame to see the setting display. Therefore, the setting value can be easily seen by workers of a wide range of ages, especially by older workers. Moreover, the setting display is located near the hinge of the main body frame. By providing this, the device is less susceptible to the effects of lighting in the gaming hall or lighting used for decorative purposes by other gaming machines, reducing the chance of incorrectly inputting setting values due to misreading.
In addition, even if it becomes necessary to check the setting value of the setting display during business hours, the setting display is located near the hinge part of the main body frame, so that it can be hidden from view of players. It also has other effects, such as making it easier to

[30-3-2-β2. Technical thought β2]
The gaming machine according to technical idea β1, characterized in that the setting change switch is positioned closer to the open side than the vertical center line of the main body frame.
Generally, to change the settings, one hand (e.g. the left hand) is held down on the open main frame while the other hand (e.g. the right hand) is used to operate the setting switch, and then the other hand is moved to the setting change switch. However, in this gaming machine, the setting change switch is located closer to the open side than the vertical center line of the main body frame, so when the main body frame is open, the setting change switch must be pressed near the center of the body. You can change the settings by pressing the
Therefore, the hand movements are stable, so the setting change work can be done efficiently, and the range of movement of the operating hand is also reduced, so the burden (fatigue) on the operator's arms is reduced. can.

[30-3-2-β3. Technical thought β3]
The gaming machine according to technical idea β2, characterized in that the setting switch is disposed between the vertical center line of the main body frame and the setting change switch.
In this gaming machine, the setting switch and the setting change switch are located close to each other near the open side of the main body frame, so that when you open the main body frame, you can immediately operate the setting switch, and then move your hand immediately to the setting change switch. Therefore, the movement range of the operating hand can be kept almost near the center of the body, so that the burden on the arm of the operator performing the setting change operation can be reduced. Combined with the ease of recognizing devices, this makes it possible to change the settings of a large number of gaming machines accurately, in a short amount of time, and with little effort.

[30-3-2-β4. Technical thought β4]
A gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas β1 to β3, characterized in that the setting switch and the setting change switch are provided on a single board box.
By housing the setting switch and the setting change switch in a single board box, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access from the outside aimed at the connection between the setting switch and the setting change switch.

[30-3-2-β5. Technical thought β5]
The gaming machine according to technical idea β4, characterized in that the setting switch and the setting change switch are mounted on a single board.
In this gaming machine, the setting switch and the setting change switch are connected via a single board inside a single board box, so compared to a case where a harness is used to connect the two switches, it is much more difficult to make unauthorized access from the outside. It can make access more difficult.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments and alternative forms, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, but this is not limited to this, and the invention may also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

1. Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
4000: Substrate 4400: Substrate 4001: Electronic component 4001x: Joint member 4001x (S): Joint member 4004: Resin body 4005: Side surface 4006: Terminal piece

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine having a board on which electronic components can be mounted, the board includes a connector for electrically connecting at least one of a power source, a ground, or various signals,
The joining member is attached to a predetermined location,
At least one of the bonding members has a terminal piece protruding from a body of the bonding member and connected to a copper foil of a pad formed on the substrate,
Further, the copper foil of the pad is expanded beyond the tip of the terminal piece by a width equal to or greater than the width of the terminal piece to form an expanded pattern portion, and a through hole portion capable of electrical conduction is provided in the expanded pattern portion;
The width of the enlarged pattern portion is set to be equal to or greater than the width of the pad,
The enlarged pattern portion extends beyond the tip of the terminal piece, and extends from the tip of the terminal piece connected to the copper foil of the pad to the through-hole portion without bending.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images